®ije Htbrarp
of tfje
Collection of Mmty Caroliniatta
Cnbotueb &$>
5ofjtt &prunt TfyiW
of tfje Class oU889
C375".ol
r
00034026152
This book must not
be taken from the
Library building
l6JuJ'3ft.
12Mv34J0
14Jul
; *-;■ .
Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2011 with funding from
Ensuring Democracy through Digital Access (NC-LSTA)
http://www.archive.org/details/courseofstudyfor1930nort
Educational Publication No. 154 Division of Publications No. 47
COURSE OF STUDY
FOR THE
ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS
OF
NORTH CAROLINA
READING
LANGUAGE
SPELLING
HEALTH
ELEMENTARY SCIENCE
CITIZENSHIP
published by the
State Superintendent of Public Instruction
Raleigh, N. C.
PRESS OP
Observer Printing House
charlotte, n. c.
CONTENTS
Page
Introductio n 5
General Statement 7
Reading 1 1
Introductory Statement 12
Part One: The Needs of the Teacher 12
Part Two: The Program of Reading Instruction Within the
Classroom . 21
General Discussions of Important Factors in the Reading
Program 22
Suggested Outline for the Reading Program in:
Grades I to VII, Inclusive . 38
The First Grade 38
The Second and Third Grades 72
The Fourth, Fifth and Sixth Grades 101
The Seventh Grade 111
Part Three: Further Steps in Unifying and Broadening the
Reading Course Through the Grades 117
Language 119
Part One: Basic Principles Underlying the Making of the
Course of Study in Language 119
Part Two: General Suggestions Concerning Language Instruction 122
Part Three: Language in the Primary Grades 133
Introduction 133
First Grade 139
Second Grade 1 46
Th ir d Grade 156
Part Four: Language in the Grammar Grades, Four to Seven 166
Introduction 166
Fourth Grade 178
Fifth Grade 185
Sixth Grade 192
Seventh Grade 205
Part Five: Language Forms According to Grade 211
Part Six: Follow-up Work in Course of Study Making 221
Spelli ng 223
The Course in Spelling 223
First Grade Spelling 236
Second Grade Spelling 238
Third Grade Spelling 241
Fourth Grade Spelling 247
Fifth Grade Spelling 249
Sixth Grade Spelling 251
Seventh Grade Spelling . 253
Bibliography 255
Health 257
Part One: Introduction 257
Part Two: Health Education Procedures 271
Analyses of Some Factors and Situations Which Influence
Health Study 271
Outline of Work by Grades for Period to be Given to
Definite Instruction 278
Grades One, Two and Three 278
Grade Four 318
Grade Five 337
Grade Six 353
Grade Seven 365
How May Health Achievements be Measured 378
Part Three: Reference Materials 386
Page
E LEME N TAR Y S CIE N CE 395
Introduction 395
The Subject Denned 395
Aims of Teaching Elementary Science 396
Methods of Teaching Elementary Science 399
Science Concepts to be Gained 414
The Curriculum 415
Utilize Nature Material of Local Environment 421
Restricted Lists of Nature Phenomena Common to North Carolina 422
General Information 424
Citizenship 429
Meaning of Citizenship 429
General Objectives of the Course in Citizenship 429
Specific Objectives of the Course in Citizenship 430
Some Suggestions for Reaching These Objectives 439
General Procedure 439
Materials and Period for Definite Instruction in Civic
Information 439
Remedial Work With Problem Cases 448
Grades One, Two and Three 449
Grades Four ad Five 460
Grades Six and Seven 464
Teaching Units Illustrating Phases of Citizenship Training
in the Intermediate and Upper Elementary Grades 470
Measuring Growth in Citizenship 485
Bibliography and References 490
Addresses of Publishers . 493
INTRODUCTION
Only a few elementary texts can now be changed in any one year. This
makes necessary the division of the course of study into two or more parts.
The present volume treats the subjects in which new texts have been
adopted since the last course of study was published, and two subjects
in which no text is required.
A special committee from the staff of the State Department of Public
Instruction has had direct responsibility for this work. This committee
consisted of James E. Hillman, Chairman; Juanita McDougald, Secretary;
L. C. Brogden, Nancy O. Devers, G. H. Ferguson, Susan Fulghum, M. C.
S. Noble, Jr., and Hattie S. Parrott.
Associated with this central committee were school people in this State
and elsewhere who assisted directly in the study of the various subjects.
Acknowledgment is given to these friends and students of education who
have rendered this help.
FOR READING:
P/" J?. 1 ?? W ' Carr ' Associat e Professor of Education, Duke University, Durham, N. C.
Miss Sibyl Henry, Graduate Student, Duke University, Durham, N. C.
Miss Annie M. Cherry, Supervisor Halifax County Schools, Roanoke Rapids, N. C.
leachers, supervisors and other educators who read and evaluated the course.
The Curriculum Committee preparing the Elementary School Curriculum for the public
schools in the State of Minnesota.
The Curriculum Committee preparing the Course of Study in Reading for Fresno, Cali-
fornia, public schools.
Other State Courses of Study used for checking on present-day trends in curriculum
making and contents of courses of study.
Charles E. Merrill Company, Publishers, New York, N. Y.
Johnson Publishing Company, Richmond, Va.
FOR LANGUAGE:
Dr. Carl Adams, Director of Instruction in Education and Psychology, E. C. T. C.
Greenville, N. C.
Dr. John W. Carr, Associate Professor of Education, Duke University, Durham, N. C.
Miss Frances Whitney, Department of Education, Lenoir Rhyne College, Hickory, N C.
Miss Evelyn Weaver. Critic Teacher, Appalachian State Teachers College, Boone, N C.
Miss Nora Beust, Specialist in Children's Literature, Chapel Hill, N C.
Miss Annie Ray, Critic Teacher, Western Carolina Teachers College, Cullowhee, N. C.
Miss Annie Cherry, Supervisor Halifax County Schools, Roanoke Rapids, N. C.
Miss Myrla Morris, Critic Teacher, N. C. C. W., Greensboro, N C
Miss Nan Lacy, Primary Teacher, Raleigh, N. C.
Mrs. A. E. Gouge, Instructor in Teacher Training, Bakersville, N. C.
Miss Mary Johns, Grammar Grade Teacher, Raleigh, N C.
Miss Nannie Mae Tilley, Grade Teacher, Bahama, N. C.
Miss Bettie Aiken Land, Critic Teacher in Primary Grades, N. C. C. W., Greensboro, N. C.
Miss . Salhe B Marks, Associate Professor of Elementary Education, U. N. C, Chapel
Hill, N. C.
Miss Martha Ray, Grade Teacher, Concord, N. C.
Miss Mary Hyman, Supervisor Orange County Schools, Hillsboro, N. C.
Miss Miriam MacFadyen, Critic Teacher in Primary Grades, N. C. C. W., Greensboro,
Miss Ida Seidel, Supervisor Pitt County Schools, Greenville, N. C.
Dr. L. R. Meadows, Head of English Department, E. C. T. C, Greenville, N. C.
FOR SPELLING:
Miss Mary Blackstock, Supervisor Buncombe County Schools, Asheville, N. C
Miss Clyde Fields, East Elementary School, Statesville, N. C.
Miss Margaret Gustin, Supervisor Carteret County Schools. Beaufort, N. C.
Miss Ruth Heilig, Principal Innes Elementary School, Salisbury, N. C
Miss Mamie Howard, Principal Elementary School, Candor. N. C
Miss Vera Keech, Supervisor Perquimans County Schools, Hertford, N. C.
Miss Ethel McNairy, Primary Supervisor City Schools, Statesville, N. C
Miss Edna Morgenthaler, Supervisor Elementary Schools, High Point, N. C
Dr. K. C. Garrison, N. C. State College of Agriculture and Engineering, Raleigh, N. C.
Dr. h. H. Koos, Assistant Superintendent City Schools, Winston-Salem, N. C.
FOR HEALTH:
Consultant— C. E. Turner, Professor of Health Education, Institute of Technology.
Cambridge, Mass.
Miss Nettie Brogden, Rural Supervisor Guilford County, Greensboro, N. C.
Miss Helen Burch, Instructor Teacher Training, Franklin, N. C.
Miss Berta Coltrane, Instructor Teacher Training, Whiteville, N. C
FOR HEALTH (Continued):
Miss Nena DeBerry, Principal Frank B. John School, Salisbury, N. C.
Mr. J. H. Epperson, Superintendent of County Health Department, Durham, N. C.
Miss Ruth Gunter, Supervisor Lee County, Sanford, N. C.
Miss Emily Johnson, Instructor Teacher Training, Grassy Creek, N. C.
Miss Mary Moyle, Instructor Teacher Training, Linwood, N. C.
Mrs. Hildred E. Wessel, Instructor Teacher Training, Murphy, N. C.
Miss Carrie Wilson, Supervisor Nash County, Nashville, N. C.
Miss Helen Dunlap, Supervisor Edgecombe County, Tarboro, N. C.
Dr. C. O'H. Laughinghouse, State Board of Health, Raleigh, N. C.
Dr. G. M. Cooper, State Board of Health, Raleigh, N. C.
FOR ELEMENTARY SCIENCE:
Mrs. M. Louise Bullard, Grammar Grade Teacher, Raleigh, N. C.
Dr. J'>hn W. Carr, Associate Professor of Education, Duke University, Durham, N. C.
Dr. Bert Cunningham, Professor of Biology, Duke University, Durham, N. C.
Miss Flossie Martin, Science Teacher, Winston-Salem, N. C.
Dr. C. E. Preston, Associate* Professor of the Teaching of Science, University of North
Carolina, Chapel Hill, N. C.
Dr. R. J. Slay, Director of Science Instruction, East Carolina Teachers College, Green-
ville, N. C.
Dr. L. H. Snyder, Associate Professor of Zoology, N. C. State College, Raleigh, N. C.
Dr. B. W. Wells, Professor of Botany, N. C. State College, Raleigh, N. C.
FOR CITIZENSHIP:
Miss Gladys Boyington, Teacher Social Studies, N. C. C. W., Greensboro, N. C.
Mr. LS. D. Bunn, Superintendent Puolic Schools, Lillington, N. C.
Mi' M A rril K Bobbs-Merrill.
S&y^Sr^tdv^r 8 - Wh —
rvM 1 . ng «V it f rature - Row - '
Child s World Readers. Johnson.
Open Road to Reading. Ginn
W'nston Readers. Winston!
Child-Story Readers. Lyons.
ThJ ° n c + R | ad ?> rs ' J Book Th ree. Scott
The Study Readers. Merrill
Citizenship Readers. Lippincott.
Grade IV:
Fourth Readers
Child Library. Scott.
Llson. Scott.
Reading and Living. Book I. Scribner's
Winston Readers. Winston BCnDner s -
Studies in Reading. University.
C^% Ure l m Readi «S- Doubleday
Good Reading. Scribner's.
Story Study Far and Near. Johnson
Citizenship Readers. Lippincott
Bobbs-Merrill. Bobbs-Merrill
ru*& m & ^erature- Row.
Child Story Readers. Lyons.
Grade V:
Fifth Readers
Child Library. Scott.
JUson. Scott.
Studies in Reading. University.
roL en R Ure J- m Read ing. Doubleday.
£ uu R , eadl "£- Scribner's.
Bobbs-Merrill. Bobbs-Merrill
Elementary Schools op North Carolina 37
Grade VI:
Sixth Readers
Child Library. Scott.
Elson. Scott.
Studies in Reading. University.
Good Reading. Scribner's.
Bobbs-Merrill. iiobbs-Merrill.
Citizenship Readers. Lippincott.
Adventures in Reading. Doubleday.
Reading and Living, Book III. Scribner's.
Child-Story Readers. Lyons.
Grade VII:
Seventh Readers
Child Library. Scott.
Elson. Scott.
Studies in Reading. University.
Reading and Living. Scribner's.
Achievement, banborn.
Bobbs-Merrill. Bobbs-Merrill.
Citizenship Readers. Lippincott.
3. LIBRARY LISTS
There cannot be too many books for the child's free reading in any
grade or stage of progress in reading. Interests differ and the books at
his disposal should vary in content material and difficulty. The lists sug-
gested here meet this condition as far as possible. A few books illustrative
of the types of materials offered by the more complete library lists are
listed here by grades. Since they are taken from recent compilations of
library materials they should be reliable, and are possibly the best avail-
able. The purpose of this list is merely to suggest the range and type of
materials to be selected for the various phases of library work as related
to the grade work in reading instruction. For library references and
source materials see references at the close of this section.
It is suggested that the books the child is to study during the year not
be placed on the reading table or in the library for his free use until after
the study of the books. Copies of supplementary books not to be used for
class study should be placed on the table, as valuable and interesting con-
tent material is in this way brought into use.
The First Grade:
Picture Books
The Real Mother Goose. Illus. by Wright. Rand.
Smith. The Chicken World. Putnam.
Petersham and Petersham. Miki. Doubleday.
Greenaway. A — Anple Pie. Warne.
Crane. Old Mother Hubbard Picture Book. Dodd.
Books of Verse with Pictures
Greenaway. Marigold Garden. Warne.
Stevenson. Child's Garden of Verses. Scribner's.
Tippett. I Live in a City. Harper.
Picture Books Which Tell a Story
Brooke. Johnny Crow's Party. Warne.
Bannerman. Little Black Sambo. Stokes.
Caldecott. Picture Books 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. Warne.
Carrick. Picture Tales from the Russian. Stokes.
Clark. The Poppv Seed Cakes. Doubleday.
Potter. Peter Rabbit. Warne.
Song Books
Le Mair. Little Songs of Long Ago. McKay.
Crane. The Baby's Upera. Warne.
Coleman and Thorn. Singing Time.
Other Rhymes and Poems
Adelborg. Clean Peter and the Children of Grubbylea. Longmans.
Lear. Nonsense Books. Little.
Fyleman. Fairies and Chimneys. Doubleday.
Field. Taxis and Toadstools. Doubleday.
38 Course of Study for the
Stories to be Read or Told to the Children
Lefevre. The Cock, the Mouse, and the Little Red Hen. Jacobs.
Gruelle. Raggedy Ann. Volland.
Bryant. Best Stories to Tell to Children. Houghton.
Lofting. The Story of Mrs. Tubbs. Stokes.
Mitchell. Here and Now Story Book. Dutton.
Books Children Can Read
Hardy. The Little Book, Sally and Billy. Wheeler.
Dootson. A Riddle Book. Rand.
Wright. The Magic Boat. Ginn.
Heward. The Twins and Tabiffa. Macrae.
The Second Grade:
Zirbes. The Story of Milk. Keystone View Co.
Bianco. The Wooden Doll. Macmillan.
Adams. Five Little Friends. Macmillan.
Bianco. The Velveteen Rabbit. Doubleday.
Field. Poems of Childhood. Scribner's.
Youmans. Skitter Cat. Bobbs-Merrill.
The Third Grade:
Grant. Story of the Ship. McLoughlin.
Milne. When We Were Very Young. Dutton.
Wells. Peppi, the Duck. Doubleday.
Swift. Little Blacknose. Harcourt.
Jewett. Hopi, the Cliff Dweller. Heath.
The Fourth Grade:
Heward. Ameliar Anne and the Green Umbrella. Macrae.
De La Mare. Peacock Pie. Holt.
Beston. Firelight Fairy Book. Atlantic Pub.
Asquith. Pillicock Hill. Macmillan.
Meigs. The Wonderful Locomotive. Macmillan.
The Fifth Grade:
Baylor. Juan and Juanita. Houghton.
Fyleman. Fairies and Chimneys. Doubleday.
Gfimm. Fairy Tales. Lippincott.
Lofting. The Story of Dr. Doolittle. Stokes.
Patch. Hexapod Stories. Little.
The Sixth Grade:
Bryant. The Children's Book of Celebrated Bridges. Century.
Canfield. Understood Betsy. Holt.
Green. Dick Byrd: Air Explorer. Putnam.
Pyle. Robin Hood. Scribner's.
Riley. Rhymes of Childhood. Bobbs-Merrill.
The Seventh Grade:
Charnley. Boys' Life of the Wright Brothers. Harper.
Garland. Boy Life on the Prairie. Harper.
London. Call of the Wild. Grosset.
Salter. Bambi. Simon and Schuster.
Untermeyer. This Singing World. Harcourt.
La Prade. Alice in Orchestralia. Doubleday.
REFERENCES: From which to select more complete lists of library materials for each grade.
State Approved Library Lists for Elementary and High Schools.
Graded List of Books for Children. 1930. Nora Beust. American Library Association,
Chicago. Price $2.00.
Selected Books and Pictures for Young Children. Dagleish and Schurman. Educational
Playthings, 20 E. 69th Street, New York City. Price $0.35.
II. Suggested Outline for the Reading Program in Grades I to
VII, Inclusive.
THE FIRST GRADE
There are two important divisions of the work in reading in the. first
grade, (a) the preparation period, and (b) the initial period of reading
instruction. The suggested outline which follows deals with these two
divisions.
A. The period of preparation for reading.
This period includes the work of a well-organized kindergarten and
the first grade teacher should undertake in so far as possible this very
essential step in the reading program.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 39
In planning her work the teacher should not confuse the period of
preparation with that of the initial period of reading instruction which
follows it. The purpose of the former is to get children ready to be taught
to read. This preparation must be provided for if pupils are to show a
readiness for reading when they meet with the difficulties of formal read-
ing instruction. Some children do not possess this reading readiness when
they are expected to begin the work in reading. It is important that this
foundational work be accomplished before pupils are called upon to master
any of the technical difficulties of the reading process. There are three
things involved in the definition of reading readiness: (1) a mental ma-
turity sufficient to cope successfully with the intellectual difficulties in-
volved in learning to read; (2) a background of experiences that will make
the subject matter of beginning reading intelligible; (3) active interests
and social qualities that will enable children to participate satisfactorily
in the activities by which beginning reading is taught. To try to find out
the present status of the school beginners in regard to these three things
is one of the first responsibilities of the teacher.
In addition to the broad general terms of the definition of reading
readiness a detailed list of the most significant evidences of unfitness for
reading is given here. In this way, both sides of the case of reading readi-
ness — important factors in reading readiness and deficiencies to be dealt
with before progress is made — are brought before the teacher for careful
study.
Some of the most significant evidences of unreadiness for reading are:
Lack of experience
Lack of interest
Lack of mental efficiency or maturity
Lack of sufficient command of English
Lack of social moral efficiency
Poor emotional reactions — shyness, rebelliousness, dependence, un-
happiness, discouragement
Physical handicaps — poor vision, poor health, ear defects, adenoids,
undernourishment
Unsatisfactory results — failure to make satisfactory progress, and
to acquire correct habits, attitudes and skills.
Lack of physical efficiency — restlessness, poor muscular control,
nervousness.
Lack of accuracy in habits of expression. Speech defects, poor
enunciation
Immature children limited by one or more of these deficiencies cannot
accomplish the work expected of the average and normal child who is
ready for first grade reading. Undesirable habits of study and work, and
increase in nervous strain, poor emotional responses, and low standards
are the result of trying to force pupils to read before they have attained
reading readiness.
When the child is brought into the formal work of learning to read
before he is ready for it, he is very apt to be found at the close of the
year in the retarded group or classed among the failures. When the pupil
is forced daily to face failure and discouragement as he makes an effort
to cooperate with the teacher, he rarely recovers.
The mere fact that a child has reached the age of five-and-a-half or
six years is no indication that he is ready to read. A great many children
entering the first grade are not fully prepared and eager for instruction
in reading. A very large percentage are far from being ready to attack
40 Course of Study for the
the problems of first grade reading satisfactorily. "Bridging the gap" for
these children, getting them ready to read, is one of the most important
problems in the program of reading instruction.
Beginners in school differ widely in degree of physical, mental and
social maturity due to a great extent to differences in training, experience
and ability. Because of the individual differences at the beginning of
school, it follows that their preparation for reading is notably different.
Provision for appropriate instruction for individuals and groups will be
more effective if the pupils are properly classified according to ability and
attainments.
The beginners entering school should be divided into about three groups
of approximately the same readiness for reading, and the same learning
capacity. The use of standardized mental tests will be helpful in de-
termining the proper grouping of pupils for instructional purposes. Mental
maturity is considered the most reliable basis upon which to classify pupils.
The teacher's estimate of the pupil's readiness to read which she secures
through observation and study of the child engaged in various activities
provided during the period of preparation for reading, supplements the
results of the mental tests in determining the grouping of pupils. In the
absence of measurement by standardized tests, the teacher's judgment or
estimate of the pupil's readiness to do first grade work is the most satis-
factory criterion upon which to base the classification. This, of course,
pre-supposes that the teacher gives some time, during the first few weeks
of school, to the study of the children.
Since pupils advance at different rates of progress, frequent changes
must be made in the classifications especially during the first half of the
year. From the study of the progress of pupils, the teacher should make
adjustments among the groups as the needs of the pupils demand.
In order to give the individual child his right start in the reading
situation, it is necessary to plan a preparation period for each of the
three groups suggested for classification of the school beginners. The pro-
gram of activities in each group may differ only in scope and extent of
development. Some children, of course, will move rapidly into the work
of the initial period* of reading instruction, where habits and skills are
developed, and others because of specific deficiencies and general imma-
turity will remain in the preparation period for several weeks or months.
The present equipment of the child, physical, mental and social, should
determine the kind and type of work planned and conducted during the
preparation period.
The objectives and suggested activities should be adapted and adjusted
to the needs of the three groups as they progress through the grade.
1. GENERAL OBJECTIVES OF THE PREPARATION PERIOD
The kinds of training and experience indicated in the objectives stated
here are essential to satisfactory progress in reading, and are described
briefly in terms of contributions which they make to child development.
a. Wide experience, provided in harmony with the interests of
children and preparing them to understand the stories and activi-
ties about which they will read.
b. Reasonable facility in the use of ideas; that is, ability to. make
use of past experience and information in conversation, in solv-
ing simple problems, and in thinking clearly about the content
of what they read.
Elementary Schools op North Carolina
41
c. Sufficient command of simple English sentences to enable pupils
to speak with ease and freedom. This in turn aids them in
anticipating the meaning of passages and in reading fluently.
d. A relatively wide speaking vocabulary which enables them to
recognize quickly the meaning of words and groups of words.
e. Accuracy in enunciation and pronunciation which insures right
habits in the first reading experiences and eliminates the need
of corrective exercises later.
f. A genuine desire to read, which aids in the interpretation of
passages and which supplies motives that carry pupils through
many difficult periods.
Conscious attention to the types of training which are listed and which
are recognized as prerequisites to reading, promotes growth that makes
reading a natural and desirable activity in the first grades.
2. SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES AND ACTIVITIES
To accomplish more quickly the objectives for this period, it is essential
to plan activities with a definite relation to the specific objective to be
attained. The following outline may serve the teacher in her efforts to
meet the demands of the situation.
Objective 1 : To increase the child's fund of meanings by enlarging his
experiences.
Activities: Listening to stories and talking about them.
Conversation about pictures.
Discussing events of excursions or trips.
Caring for and discussing pets.
Making things.
Drawing and painting.
Dramatization and imitative play.
Playing games suitable to age.
Taking part in school activities, parties, special programs.
Handling and manipulating things.
Objective 2: To develop the power and ability to express ideas by the
use of pictures, dramatic action, construction, and
language.
Activities : Making contributions during conversation and discussions.
Explaining about things made.
Dramatizing events and stories.
Expressing ideas by means of objective material.
Social communication with classmates.
Objective 3: To correct defects of speech, and to develop clear articu-
lation.
Activities: Listening to careful speech.
Singing rote songs.
Practice in speaking slowly and distinctly.
Special help in case of articulation defects.
Objective U: To increase the span of attention.
Activities: Listening to stories graded carefully as to length and
simplicity of plot.
Working on problems that appeal strongly to the interests.
Associating words with pictures on toys, blocks, games.
Objective 5 : To stimulate inquiry and curiosity.
Activities: Going on excursions.
Making collections of various things.
Keeping pets and watching them.
Listening to stories read or told.
Looking on while some one reads.
42
Course of Study for the
Objective 7
Activities:
Objective 8:
Activities .
Objective 9:
Activities :
Objective 10
Activities :
Objective 6: To develop self-confidence.
Activities: Living in a happy, free environment.
Encouragement and approval when attempting worth while
things.
Lead to gradually assume responsibility.
To enlarge the vocabulary.
Listening to stories.
Discussing new experiences.
Discussions relating to concrete material and situations.
Oral word or language games.
To create an interest in books and stories leading to a
definite interest in reading.
Looking at picture books.
Singing favorite songs from books with others.
Listening to interesting stories read from books.
Being in an environment rich in good pictures and good
books.
Making booklets.
To develop the child socially.
Rhythmic games.
Association with other people, children and grown people.
Playing, group games.
Planning and giving parties.
Singing together.
Working together.
To provide opportunity for physical development.
Opportunity to move about freely.
Large muscle activity.
Frequent outdoor play.
Rest period and lunch period.
Living in hygienic surroundings.
It is very necessary to build up a general readiness for reading — that
is, to be sure that all children sense that reading is a necessary and
interesting part of their activities. However, it is not the purpose of the
preparation period for reading to teach children to read but to get ready
to read. Attitude, not number of words recognized, is the main goal of
this period.
Informal teaching plans rather than regular class work should be fol-
lowed in this preparation period. Centers of interest affording a rich
environment including picture books, pictures, nature study materials and
materials for construction or making things should be provided. A great
deal of the subject matter should be centered in pupil's plans and activities.
A few suggestions are as follows:
Making furniture for the various centers of interest in the room:
reading, science, music and art, and social activities.
Making toys, tents and animals, to use in various ways in play, as
the circus.
Making a garden and cultivating the plants.
Making and furnishing doll and play houses, stores and airplanes.
Making decorations for various and special occasions, holidays.
Activities pertaining to excursions, nature study, hygiene and
health, safety, doll play, parties, use of bulletin board. Steri-
optican views. Newspaper.
These activities provide training in: planning, initiating, completing
things; assembling, adapting and taking care of materials to work with;
sharing materials and tools with others; persistence; neatness; use of
language, freedom of expression; and, ability to think.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 43
The amount of subject matter to be acquired during the preparation
period for reading cannot be definitely stated. With the specific objectives
as guides the first consideration in the program of subject matter and
activities should be to plan to eliminate in so far as possible those de-
ficiencies which retard progress in reading readiness; and second, to at-
tempt to plan those experiences which will enable as many beginners as
possible to come into the possession of the prerequisites to reading as stated
in the general and specific objectives.
In summarizing the work, it may prove helpful to state the desirable
outcomes for the preparation period of reading as follows:
a. Wide experience in
Listening to stories and rhymes and discussing interesting
points.
Handling books and pictures.
Dramatizing stories and various experiences.
Social contacts.
Use of nature study materials.
Observation and discussion of things common to the environ-
ment.
b. Definite interest in
Pictures, books, puzzles, and games.
Expressing ideas in various ways.
Working with the group — taking part in its activities, attain-
ments and progress.
c. Acquaintance with words which will be encountered in his first
reading experiences.
Opportunity to become familiar with these words through
situations providing vocabulary work.
3. EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES
A list of equipment and supplies suitable for carrying on the work as
outlined above is suggested here. While this list is in no way complete, it
should be useful in suggesting to the teacher the types of equipment and
supplies to be provided.
a. Furniture
Desk, chairs, waste paper basket, files, bookcase, and cabinet for supplies. (For
the teacher.)
Tables and chairs for children of different sizes.
Piano or phonograph.
Attractive library chairs and table.
Files for pictures, fresco paintings, and other materials.
Cabinets for individual pupils.
Cabinets for tools, blocks, and science supplies.
Book case.
Lockers or closet space for children's wraps.
Work benches and work tables.
Blackboards.
Large bulletin boards.
Cots of canvas for rest period.
Aquarium with running water.
b. Stimulating equipment and work materials
Large blocks from lumber mill.
Packing boxes to supply material for making things.
Pieces of lumber suitable for making chairs, tables, trains, boats, and many
other things called for in the various activities planned.
Tools — saws, hammers, screw drivers, brace and bits, scissors.
Frames for weaving.
Clay — for modelling.
Drawing and painting materials.
Large easels and brushes of different sizes. •
A few toys — celluloid and wooden animals and dolls; games — checker boards,
ring toss, bean bags.
Colored tiles for creating designs.
Pictures and books.
44 Course of Study for the
c. References : For the selection and use of equipment and supplies
and materials
Lewis. An Adventure With Children. Macmillan.
Moore. The Primary School. Houghton.
Dunn and Everett. Four Years in a Country School. Bureau of Publications,
Teachers College.
Knox. School Activities and Equipment. Houghton.,
Clouser and Millikan. Kindergarten — Primary Activities Based on Community
Life. Macmillan.
Rugg and Shumaker. The Child-Centered School. World.
Wieking. Education Through Manual Activities. Ginn.
Hahn. Furnishing the Setting for an Activity Program in Kindergarten and
First Grade. Board of Education, San Francisco.
Garrison. Permanent Play Materials for Young Children. Scribner's.
Gage. Readers: Up and Doing, Primer. Out and Playing. First Reader.
Mentzer.
B. The initial period of reading instruction.
Following the preparation period discussed in Section A of this outline
of first grade work is the initial period of reading instruction. The time
at which systematic training begins and the duration of the initial period
vary with the preparation of the pupils and with their capacity to learn.
The period of getting pupils ready to read must have the careful attention
of the teacher if the pupils are to complete satisfactorily all requirements
of this initial period in reading. With this delay in order to get a read-
ing readiness, all pupils will not be able to complete the work outlined for
the initial period of instruction by the end of the first grade and for these
pupils this type of training should be continued well into the second year.
The main problem in the initial period of reading instruction is the
development of right reading attitudes and habits. The main factors in
this development are:
1. To introduce pupils to reading as a thought-getting process.
2. To read fluently and smoothly.
3. To keep the mechanics subordinate to thought.
4. To follow the line with the eye.
5. To learn to attach meanings to printed symbols.
6. To read independently and intelligently.
7. To regard reading in general as a process of finding out.
The general purpose of early training in reading during the initial
period of reading instruction in the first grade is to stimulate keen interest
in reading activities, to cultivate a thoughtful reading attitude, and to
develop reasonable speed and accuracy in reading simple passages. Some
of the situations arising in the classroom which involve need of, and
stimulate interest in, reading are suggested below:
1. In playing house, store, train, circus, broadcasting, etc., children
need to make and read labels, tickets, price marks, signs, etc.
2. When children have been on a trip or excursion in or near the
school, they will want to record their experiences on a chart (as
a report, newspaper, or diary) to read to other classes or to
visitors. These records should be short, 4-6 lines. Many classes
"publish" a daily newspaper.
3. Children like to make records about their parties, pets, toys,
games and their schoolroom experiences. They like to make
flower and bird charts, and keep a weather calendar.
4. When children find attractive books and illustrated rime cards,
and so forth, on the reading or library table, they will wish to
• find out what is in the books, especially if the teacher frequently
reads all or parts of stories from these books.
5. When other children bring books to school, the children will wish
to hear what is in these books.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 45
6. If children from other classes are occasionally allowed to read
in the first grade, interest is stimulated.
7. Sometimes children ask questions, calling 1 for additional infor-
mation on some topic. The teacher should -show children that
this information may be found in books, and read it to them.
Such information would be that concerning pets, community life,
games, what to do for a party or entertainment.
8. Children will find it necessary to read the bulletin board, es-
pecially if it contains notices of this type — "John may feed the
rabbit today." They will look every day for items of school news,
information and directions to read. At times these messages
may take the form of letters which should be changed daily.
Charts composed by the children may suggest the next day's
activities and be read on that day. Interesting pictures stimulate
interest.
9. Children will be interested in reading booklets of very short
stories composed by members of the class.
The teacher should also in this pre-primer period be widening children's
experiences by excursions, conversation, pictures; by classroom free activi-
ties, such as playing postman, store, milk man; and by constructive group
activities, such as building a playhouse, a doll's house, dressing dolls, mak-
ing furniture and toys. She should be developing their vocabulary and
ability to think, by allowing much natural conversation, by cooperative
planning of work, and by discussions or conferences following activities.
All activities in which the children participate must be meaningful for
them and must present a problem that will stimulate thinking and create
the desire to express ideas. Such purposeful work will further the develop-
ment of power of oral expression and make for fluency. This fluency of
speech, an adequate spoken vocabulary, and some development of the sen-
tence sense are important factors in preparation for, and progress in
reading.
Among the many purposeful activities related to reading in which the
first grade children may engage during this period are the following:
Taking care of library table.
Drawing, cutting, pasting.
Clay modelling and construction with paper, soft wood and other materials.
Making booklets for individual use and for library purposes.
Making sand-table illustrations of scenes in a story.
Making posters — community expression of ideas developed in the reading of stories.
Building with blocks.
Making a moving picture show or a puppet show.
Composing and reading blackboard and chart units.
Making a calendar and weather, bird or flower charts.
Planning excursions and trips.
Playing with toys.
Playing games.
Caring for pets at school.
Looking at attractive picture and story books.
Choosing titles for pictures.
Listening to many stories and poems.
Practicing games or puzzles.
Collecting nature study materials.
Re-telling stories.
Pantomiming stories.
Playing pantomime games.
Taking part in free conversation.
Seat-work involving reading.
Creative work involving reading — making up rimes, riddles and stories.
Drawing, cutting, or painting pictures.
Looking at pictures with sentences attached.
Reading items on the bulletin board.
Reading directions on the blackboard.
Noticing signs, labels, and names.
Making book covers and book marks.
Helping to keep records of interesting events.
46 Course op Study for the
CLASSIFICATION OF PUPILS
Grouping the pupils for purposes of instruction should be on the basis
of ability to learn and on the rate of progress. It is of distinct advantage
to have children taught in groups of as nearly equal ability as possible.
Whenever groupings are made within the grade they should be kept flex-
ible. Frequent adjustments or reclassifications are necessary because chil-
dren progress at different rates. Small groups of eight or ten children,
or even a fewer number make much better working units, either in work-
ing together independently or working under the teacher's guidance. The
amount of material covered in the text books, the number of books read
should not be the chief basis for re-grouping. Pupils who read rapidly
and widely should be encouraged to participate in a much broader pro-
gram of activities including varied interests related to reading.
OBJECTIVES
A detailed outline of specific objectives set up primarily for the initial
period of reading instruction may prove most helpful to the teacher in
the effective organization of her program. While the attainment of the
general objectives for the reading program as a whole and a realization
of the general purpose should be the outcomes of a well-planned and
effective program of reading instruction, it is necessary to interpret these
objectives and purposes at each grade level.
Specific Objectives for the First Grade
1. Appreciations and attitudes
■ To realize that books are interesting.
To realize that books are valuable in carrying out many kinds
of activities.
Desire to own books.
Desire to improve and show pride in ability.
2. Knowledge, habits and skills
Comprehension or thought-getting.
Ability to comprehend meaning of a word, phrase, sentence
or paragraph.
Ability to find the word or words that answer a fact question.
Ability to select and classify ideas.
Ability to use facts as basis of reasoning.
Ability to follow directions.
Ability to illustrate or dramatize a short selection.
Ability to hold a question in mind and to read to find the
answer.
Ability to recognize a complete thought-unit.
Ability to tell a simple story in good sequence.
Ability to find what part of the story the picture illustrates —
to connect content of picture with printed matter.
Habit of reading for meanings.
Habit of looking for meanings in all reading in environment.
Ability to use knowledge secured from reading.
Facility in the use of language.
Ability to talk about pictures and story.
Ability to enjoy listening to good reading.
3. Vocabulary
Ability to recognize a sight vocabulary of recurring words
and phrases.
Independence in recognizing and pronouncing words by:
a. Applying knowledge of phonics
b. Help of context
c. Help of pictures
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 47
4. Mechanics of reading
Recognition of units larger than a word at each eye-fixation,
and the ability to make rhythmic eye movements across the
page, and back from the end of the line to the beginning
of the next line to be read.
Reading silently without too much vocalization which means
a minimum amount of whispering or lip movement.
Avoidance of finger-pointing and head movement.
Preparing silently before attempting to read aloud.
Increased span of attention and ability to carry longer units
in mind.
Clear enunciation, correct pronunciation, proper phrasing,
well-modulated and expressive voice in oral reading.
Good posture and regard for proper light.
5. Care and use of books and materials
Proper use and care of books in opening, turning pages, and
holding.
Keeping materials used clean and free from defacements.
Proper use of table of contents, finding page references and
word lists in back of book.
Proper care and use of grade, school, and public library books.
Putting books and materials in proper places after using
them.
READING LESSONS
The objectives outlined call for a well-balanced and integrated program
of reading lessons of varied character throughout the first year. The fol-
lowing types of reading lessons are suggestive of the varieties of pro-
cedure to be included:
a. Silent reading and oral reading lessons based on interesting
experiences and activities of the pupils, and on stories and in-
formational selections in readers and other books, to insure rapid
growth in habits of intelligent interpretation.
b. Directed silent reading for information and pleasure, to estab-
lish habits of continuous, intelligent reading and study.
c. Directed oral reading following silent preparation, to develop
ability, to recognize increasingly large units of thought at each
fixation and to read effectively to others.
d. Dramatization exercises to aid in mastering the thought of a
selection, as a means of realizing experiences more fully, and as
an opportunity of giving to others one's interpretation of the
meaning of a selection.
e. Drill and exercises, to establish habits of accuracy and inde-
pendence in word recognition, and a wide span of recognition.
f. Supervised "between recitation" work or seat activities, to train
pupils in habits of independent study, and in the thoughtful
interpretation of what they read. This should be carefully
planned and used only with group of pupils needing such train-
ing.
g. Self-directed seat activities, with appropriate check tests, to pro-
vide opportunity for pupils to read independently and to secure
training in careful, thorough work. Pupils should be free to
select the materials necessary for these activities.
h. Frequent tests of the progress of pupils and diagnostic and
remedial steps.
READING GOALS FOR FIRST GRADE
The program in reading should be so developed that the suggested
goals may be reached by pupils who are prepared by training and ex-
48 Course of Study for the
perience for the work of each division; pre-primer, primer and first reader.
These are offered to teachers merely as suggestions which should be an
aid in measuring results at intervals. (Many pupils will complete the
pre-primer work earlier than the eight weeks' period.)
a. Pre-Primer Class at End of Eight Weeks' Period
1. Ability to use all words in pre-primer vocabulary freely in oral
comprehension.
2. Ability to recognize at sight at least 50 of the important words
and phrases.
3. Ability to get a word by finding it in a memorized rime, sen-
tence, or in a familiar chart.
4. Desire to acquire reading skill because of pleasurable reading
experiences.
5. Attitude toward reading that it is always thought-getting.
6. Habit of trying to make connections between symbols and the
thought embodied.
7. Habit of self -helpfulness in using any material on work table or
any material used as "between recitation" work.
b. Primer Class at End of First Half Year
1. Interest in all reading in the environment especially in books
on reading shelf or table, bulletin board and new charts.
2. Ability to answer fact questions on material read.
3. Ability to illustrate or dramatize a selection following three or
four simple directions.
4. Ability to recognize 200-250 sight words from accepted list.
5. Ability to get new words —
a. From illustrations plus context.
b. From illustration plus initial sound.
c. By comparison with known sight words.
6. Ability to comprehend words, phrases and sentences, using sight
vocabulary in developing seat work based on material read.
7. Ability to read without a marker.
8. Ability to read material in basic text and one or two other
primers.
c. First Reader Class at End of Year
1. Interest in all reading environment.
2. Knowledge of how to prepare material which they wish to read
orally.
a. Good oral reading habits.
3. Ability to read without lip movement, finger pointing or head
movements.
4. Ability to get new words.
• a. From context.
b. From illustration plus context plus initial sound.
c. By comparison with known words — changing initial conso-
nant.
d. By sounding (inaudibly) the letters or groups of letters
and known words within word.
5. Ability to take in groups of words and phrases in one eye-sweep.
6. Ability to read well orally two primers and one first reader
other than the basic texts.
7. Ability to use material of first reader difficulty:
a. To find answers to fact questions.
b. To follow 3 or 4 simple directions.
c. To handle check-up material such as: multiple choice, yes
and no, classifying exercises, riddles, booklet making, el-
liptical sentences, underscoring according to directions,
crossing out according to directions, and illustrating.
8. Command of a vocabulary sufficient to read any primer and any
first grade material.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 49
9. The begining of the formation of these reading habits.
a. Reading for meanings.
b. Reading silently before reading orally.
c. Reading orally in a meaningful way.
d. Standing or sitting in good position.
e. Holding book correctly.
f. Phrasing, not calling words.
g. Attacking unfamiliar new words.
PRE-PRIMER WORK
Children who have had the types of experience suggested in the period
of preparation for reading will be ready to learn to read through organ-
ized reading instruction. In addition to other activities designed to build
up a general readiness for reading, there must be lessons during the first
few weeks following the preparation period which definitely prepare the
children to read the primer. These build up a vocabulary of words and
phrases which will be used during the early primer reading. Some of the
lessons should be based on children's experience and composed by the class
under the teacher's guidance, others may be stories written by the teacher.
One teacher used successfully the care of the class dolls as the basis for
a number of lessons. The care of a schoolroom pet, such as a rabbit, or
canary, making and planting a window-box or a small garden, celebrating
a birthday with a party, furnish material.
To as large extent as possible the approach to reading should be made
through actual experiences by having the experience form the basis of the
reading units composed by pupils and teachers. This makes possible a
meaningful association of the printed symbol with the printed word. Such
material will create an interest in reading and help to inculcate within
the child a right attitude toward it.
a. Aims of pre-primer lessons based on experience
1. To stimulate keen interest in reading activities and a desire to
read independently.
2. To associate meanings with symbols, to cultivate a thoughtful
attitude toward reading and to stimulate the habit of thinking
about what is read.
3. To acquire, from meaningful reading activities and from phrase
and word practice, a sight vocabulary sufficiently rich to enable
pupils to read, under direction, the simplest stories of the first
book to be used: this includes a sight vocabulary of fifty or more
frequently used words and the habit of recognizing familiar
words in thought-units.
b. Suggested Materials. For the pre-primer lessons the teacher may
make charts 18x24 inches, containing illustrated experience or story
units of four to six sentences; sentence cards; word and phrase
cards illustrated; word and phrase cards not illustrated. (See com-
plete list of materials for first grade.)
c. Methods of Procedure. The pre-primer work is the most important
step in organized reading instruction. The work should be planned
carefully to accomplish the aims. The teacher should work to ac-
quaint the child gradually with the meaning of the reading process,
and to provide situations which will make him enjoy and feel a need
for reading. A knowledge of how children learn, a consideration of
the laws of learning in her planning, ability to note evidences of
development, and patience to wait for rapid growth, are all a part
of the equipment of the skillful teacher.
50 Course of Study for the
It is essential for the teacher to make this beginning in organ-
ized reading instruction of such duration that it will insure for each
child the gradual development of desirable attitudes and habits.
Because of individual differences in capacity and rate of learning
as well as the previous preparation of the group, it is difficult to
state an exact length of time for the pre-primer work. For those
who are ready to learn to read, lessons based on experiences may
well take up from four to six weeks and should then accompany
the primer work at regular intervals as long as the primer type of
material is used in the reading lessons. Delay in beginning the
work in the primer is justified since the vocabulary must be intro-
duced in order to tell the experiences, and often the number of un-
familiar words together with the unreality and lack of concreteness
of the content tend to develop a wrong attitude toward reading and
to develop habits of word-calling. A natural approach to reading
with very small units, the use of a great deal of material based on
concrete personal experience, and material requiring an objective
type of response will help to avoid this difficulty. With pre-primer
work of action and performance sentences, the reading vocabulary
may be controlled easily and developed from the commonest words
in the vocabularies of the children of this age level. [In addition
to the vocabularies of the primers to be read, the teacher should be
familiar with the Gates and Thorndike word lists (the whole list) ,
as the word lists of the primers are largely drawn from these
recognized lists. See References.] The words are to be presented
in sentences to be read silently by the children and acted. There
should be a great variety of sentences.
Different teachers are successful with different methods of be-
ginning reading. A method is suggested below which many teachers
have found satisfactory. It is based on work composed by the
children themselves and based upon their experiences, and combines
memory reading with independent reading, allowing children to read
from memory until a vocabulary of a few words and phrases has
been learned.
1. Children and teacher compose the story line by line, which the
teacher prints or writes on blackboard.
2. Teacher asks child to read whole chart, using a line-marker,
held still under the line, and moving eyes from left to right.
3. Teacher asks children to find different sentences.
Lesson Illustrating Method. Chart Development.
The second grade would like to hear about "Our Rabbit." How can we
tell them? Wouldn't you like to make a story about him? What could we
name our story?
Shall we tell them first that we have a rabbit? Who will tell what to
write? We have a rabbit.
Now let's tell what his name is. His name is Peter. The rest of the unit
may be composed in the same way. He is brown. We like our rabbit.
Then a game of finding different lines is played. A chart is made using
the story and read to the second grade.
Word development: Here is a picture. What do you think it says under
the picture? It says: "A Rabbit." Here is something that tells what color
the rabbit is — "brown." On this card it tells the rabbit's name — "Peter."
Let's play a game with these cards. I have some other cards without pictures.
One card says "a rabbit," another says "brown," another says "Peter." Who
can put these cards in the right place?
1. Teacher prints chart and, in another period, asks children to
read whole story, line by line, using line-marker.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 51
2. Children are asked to find various lines (make a game of it).
3. Teacher introduces two or three words which occur on the chart,
by means of illustrated cards, and uses duplicate cards, not
illustrated, for matching games to fix forms.
4. Teacher asks children to find words on the chart which they
have composed. (Note: The children should "study" each line
by themselves before reading it orally.)
Not all of the lessons need to be composed by the children. The
teacher may say, "Today I have written a story for you about . . .
Would you like to read it?" Occasionally a rime related to the
main idea of the group of lessons may be used.
The danger in using a memory method is that children may
become too dependent upon it. Just as soon as a very few sight-
words — ten or more — have been acquired, the charts should carry
sentences which contain these known words, and children should be
required to work out these sentences themselves. As the vocabulary
grows, more charts composed by the teacher should be used. These
should contain a large amount of content using a relatively small
vocabulary. They may, however, contain words which are not to
be taught and which the teacher may tell or have children guess
from the context.
If in reading a chart, children come upon the sentence, "One day
Peter ran away," and know the words "Peter" and "ran," the
teacher may say, "Whom is the sentence about?" "Peter." "Do you
see something that tells what he did?" "Ran." "Well, the sentence
tells that one day Peter did something. It begins 'one day.' Study
by yourself and see if you can find out what he did. Guess the
last word."
The form in which blackboard and chart reading units appear
is important because of its bearing on habit-formation. Attention
should be given to the following points:
1. Each blackboard or chart lesson should have a central thought.
2. The sentences should be short and of the same length.
3. There should be a proper sequence of sentences.
4. There should be a good beginning and a good ending sentence.
5. Phrases should not be divided at the end of a line.
6. There should be frequent repetition of phrases or word groups.
7. The writing or printing should be large, legible and seen easily.
8. There should be correct spelling, punctuation, and capitalization.
9. Care should be taken not to introduce words too similar in form
in the same unit, as was and saw.
10. All reading units composed and "read" by the class in the pre-
primer period should be short and simple. This is important,
not only when the children are in the stage where they "read"
only through a knowledge of the content but also when they have
reached the point of being able to recognize a few words.
Reading the Units
The reading should proceed analytically from the whole story
to sentences, then phrases or word groups and lastly to individual
words.
1. There should be a motive question for the reading of the whole
unit and for each individual sentence.
2. Word difficulties should be mastered at the time they arise by
the following means:
52 Course of Study for the
a. Using suggestive questions.
b. Recalling a previous use of the word.
c. Using pictures.
d. Telling the word.
3. The sentences should be read silently in response to a thought-
question before being read aloud.
4. The silent reading may be checked by having the children do
the following things:
a. Whisper the sentence to the teacher.
b. Read the sentence aloud.
c. Answer questions.
d. A child framing with his hands a sentence he likes and
reading it to the group.
e. A child framing with his hands a sentence which tells a
certain thing.
f. The teacher whispering a sentence to one child and an-
other child pointing to and reading the sentence he thinks
was whispered.
g. One child telling what a sentence is about and another
child finding and reading the sentence.
h. One child choosing a certain sentence and the rest of the
group guessing which sentence was chosen.
i. One child beginning to read a sentence and another child
finishing it.
5. Further practice should be given by having the children:
a. Re-read the material in answer to thought-questions.
b. Frame with their hands phrases or word groups that tell
certain things.
c. Find sentences that tell certain things.
d. Find a certain phrase or an important word as often as
it occurs.
d. Developing a Sight Vocabulary. It is essential that the teacher be
skilled in conducting drill games with alertness, rapidity, variety
and a definite purpose in mind in order to assure the attentive
repetition needed to secure instant recognition of word groups and
words. Only such words and word groups as are to become a part
of the child's sight vocabulary should be drilled upon. Drill of any
kind should not be imposed upon the pupil who does not need it.
Drill shoidd be carefully planned, sparingly used, and used only to
meet a specific need of the individual.
The manuals accompanying the primers and first readers offer
a number of suggestions for helping to fix the vocabulary.
Other practice exercises to be used with early chart and black-
board reading units are given here.
1. Removing a chart unit bailt of sentence strips by taking down
one sentence strip at a time in response to thought-questions.
2. Matching chart sentences with sentence strips.
3. Building up a chart unit by means of sentence strips.
4. Finding two word group cards that make one sentence strip.
5. One child finding a sentence strip, telling what it says and giv-
ing it to another child to match with the blackboard or chart
sentence.
6. Trying to read a sentence strip which another child or teacher
shows.
7. The teacher passing out sentences or word group cards and
asking the child who has a strip that says a certain thing to
place it up on the blackboard ledge. This is continued until all
the cards have been called for.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 53
8. The teacher passing out sentence strips which correspond to a
story written on the blackboard. The child with the strip like
the first sentence, showing the strip, then a child with a strip
like the second, and so on until the story is completed.
9. The teacher having a story on the blackboard or chart, calling
attention to a certain sentence which the children try to read
to themselves. Then covering the sentence, and the child stand-
ing who has the corresponding sentence.
During the pre-primer period the children should become some-
what familiar with some of the words that occur in the early les-
sons of the primer in use. After the children have had some pre-
liminary work in the pre-primer period as a basis for the reading
experience to follow, they can begin readily the easy units on the
chart or in the primer. This work should be begun without too
much detailed preparation, for that will interfere with the thought-
getting process and the enjoyment of the illustrations and the con-
tent. Careful study of the manual accompanying the primer to be
used will aid the teacher in this work.
e. Further Suggestions (For reading lessons based on interests and
experiences and which should be in use during the entire first
year) .
1. By closely observing the children the first few weeks of school,
the teacher will have a great deal of information concerning
the interests and experiences of her pupils. This should be the
subject matter for their first lessons in reading.
2. From these experiences there should evolve a few short state-
ments worded by the pupils. These statements should be printed
on the board or charts.
3. The attention should be on large units, the total experience or
whole rime at first. The sentence should be the shortest unit
presented for some time.
4. No one unit should be worked on too long at first as children are
apt to lose interest and develop undesirable reading attitudes.
5. There should be repetition by using the same words and phrases
in various experience lessons. If the teacher allows the children
to word the statements which she uses on the charts, she will
be sure of a suitable vocabulary, sufficient repetition and mean-
ingful content.
The following materials developed in the first grade of the
Spring Hope School, are illustrative of this point.
Our Pup
We have a frisky little pup.
He is very friendly and playful.
He tried to help Joe put coal in the stove.
The Snow
The snow falls lightly.
The snow trims the tree.
It covers the ground with a big white sheet.
The Oyster
Helen brought an oyster today.
It has a hard shell.
The oyster lives inside.
You may knock and knock. He will not let you in.
6. Before taking up the work in the primer, the manual should
be studied by the teacher and the suggestions for developing
the pre-primer work carefully followed.
54 Course of Study for the
7. As the work in the first primer proceeds and the pupils are well
advanced in the use of the text, the teacher should begin the
study of the content and materials accompanying the second
primer in order to avoid overlapping or waste of time when the
second primer is to be used by the class. It is necessary to study
carefully the manual for the second primer and to follow the
detailed suggestions in preparation for the use of primer by the
class.
PRIMER WORK
Through the activities of the period of preparation for reading and the
pre-primer work, the pupil should have a wealth of experiences for in-
terpreting the stories, a good start in fundamental habits, and a keen
interest in discovering the unknown.
Before taking up the primer for regular reading the pupils should
have acquired the following:
a. An interest in books and other printed material.
b. The habit of thinking of printed symbols as standing for
meaning.
c. The habit of reading from left to right.
d. The possession of the sentence and composition sense.
e. A sight vocabulary that will enable them to recognize without
help from the teacher the most of the words in the first lessons
of the primer.
The primer should not on the average be placed in the hands of the
pupils before the eighth week of school. For some children even more
time is necessary for the preparation period and the pre-primer work.
Of course, superior children with a background of training and experience
before entering school could profit by the use of the primer during the
firs* month of school, but even then children often suffer by a rush into
the formal use of books before they have been able to make necessary
adjustments attendant upon school entrance.
The presentation of the primer and the actual reading from the text
affords the kind of joy and satisfaction that is almost unequalled through-
out the grade work. The teacher should plan carefully in order for each
child to realize his own strength and ability already developed before
taking up the primer.
After a few of the early primer lessons have been read from the
blackboard and chart, the primer may be taken up. Some points the teacher
should keep in mind are these:
a. The teacher should not only give each child sufficient time to
enjoy his new book but she should also enter into the enjoy-
ment with him.
b. At first the child should be allowed to examine the book in any
way he chooses, then be led to see that it has a name and table
of contents.
c. He should look through the table of contents to see if he can
read the titles of any of the stories.
d. He should turn to the beginning of the book and look at the
pictures. He will notice that the stories tell about the pictures.
e. Although the children may have read these early stories from
the blackboard or the chart they will be delighted to read them
from their books.
When pupils are learning to read from the primer, the use of reading
in connection with their experiences and activities should continue. Situ-
ations similar to those mentioned previously should afford opportunity for
reading. Other situations which may be used in this primer period are:
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 55
a. In constructing objects or in playing games, simple printed
directions may be used.
b. When children desire further information on any topic, such as
stories of pets, etc., they will wish to consult books.
c. Children may wish to give an entertainment, a play, or a read-
ing. Books should furnish some of the material for dramatiza-
tions, puppet shows, pantomime, tableaux, or narrative readings.
d. If children see posters containing descriptive remarks and an
interesting picture, they will become interested in the book
described. .
e. Interest in children's magazines may be stimulated by placing
attractive magazines on the reading table, asking children to
bring clippings from their magazines or the children's pages
from an adult's magazine, or having children make a little
magazine of their own. .
f . At this stage more difficult material posted on the bulletin board
will attract attention — illustrated magazine clippings, notices of
coming events, such as a party, or a trip. ;
g. Opportunity for children to report, dramatize or illustrate stories
read independently, and the opportunity to keep a record of
books read or owned will tend to stimulate wide reading.
The work outlined in the manuals which accompany the basal primers
is planned for use in connection with the chart, sentence, phrase and
word cards and is designed to introduce the content of the primers. This
should be the basis for the organized reading instruction which precedes
the use of the primer and should be used at the time when the pupils
are ready for this type of work. The lessons, based on interest and ex-
perience, and the lessons outlined in the manuals for the pre-primer period
should be carried along together and a close coordination between the two
worked out in the organized reading program planned by the teacher.
For the outline for the first primer lesson as well as those to follow
in using the primer and first reader, it is suggested that the teacher fol-
low closely the work outlined in the manual accompanying the text in use.
LESSONS FOR PRIMER AND FIRST READER
Stimulating, suggestive, and detailed plans for each lesson in the basal
primers and basal first readers are given in the manuals. The teacher
should use initiative and originality in modifying and adapting these to
best meet the needs of the groups and individuals she teaches. She should
constantly endeavor to think of enlarging upon the plans for presenting
the material or even working out a better plan. Each lesson plan in the
manual offers one way of presenting the material. These lesson plans
are merely suggestive, and intended to be a guide to inexperienced teachers
and to stimulate well-trained teachers to present the material in the way
best adapted to her group.
The following preparation is suggested for the teacher who wishes to
make her own lesson plan:
a. Be familiar with the material in the selection.
b. Study through the lesson plan given in the manual. Ideas found
there may prove stimulating and suggestive.
c. Determine what the major objectives for the lesson are in terms
of pupil achievement and decide how best to present the material
to achieve the objectives.
d. Plan in a general way the preparatory discussion and procedure.
e. List new and difficult word groups:
(1) Words to be presented in blackboard units in connection
with some activity in progress or bulletin board announce-
ment.
56 Course of Study for the
(2) Words to be presented in the preparatory discussion.
(3) Words to be met in the context as the pupils read the
story.
(4) Words which may have to be given further drill with
individuals during a drill period or the phonic drill
period.
f. Plan seat work or other between-class activities related directly
to the story or selection.
GENERAL LESSON PROCEDURE FOR THE SECOND PRIMER AND
FIRST READER
a. Introduction — Connect the book material with children's experiences
in a short introduction, using conversation, pictures, or objects.
The skilled teacher always has a stimulating introduction, culmi-
nating in a problem to be answered by the story.
b. Purpose — Be sure that children know just what they are to find
out when they read to find the answer to a question. The more
mature the children, the longer the selection they are able to read.
At first only a sentence should be read, then two or three sentences,
and by the end of the first grade a page or even a complete, though
very short story.
c. Vocabulary development — Introduce on blackboard or by cards (in
context) the new words and phrases. Be careful not to "give away"
the book content, or the purpose for reading will not be strong.
d. Remind children of what they are to look for.
e. Allow children to read silently (using markers in the primer stage),
giving them help with words they do not know.
f. Call for answers to question.
g. Proceed with other sections of the story, using steps d, e and f.
h. Provide additional check-up by means of questions, or one of several
types of informal tests,
i. Review vocabulary, asking children to find the sentence that tells
a certain thing,
j. Discuss the characters and events of the lessons, as this is valuable
in creating proper attitudes. Develop power of evaluating ideas in
content of lesson,
k. Connect with further activity by discussing other work on the same
topic. This might be in the form of poems, by constructive activity,
or by mentioning other related interesting material in this book or
other books.
This general procedure is, of course, only the basis for working out a
more detailed and extensive plan for conducting the instructional period
in reading in the first grade; however, by following these general principles
in teaching, the specific reading and study habits as follows should be
developed :
1. Reading with a conscious purpose.
2. Reading as fast as possible with good comprehension.
3. Reading by sentence or phrase units.
4. Raising questions about material read.
5. Use of table of contents to locate story.
6. Use of the terms "title page" of the book and "title" of the
story.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 57
THE STIMULATING CLASSROOM
The classroom should always be as attractive in an informal way as
possible. The child must always be impressed with the fact that it is a
happy and interesting place to be. Special attention should be given to
the room where the group is ready to begin the work in organized read-
ing instruction. The room should offer several kinds of stimulation or
interest centers as the following:
a. Science center where fish, flowers, fruit, leaves, and so forth
may be assembled.
b. Social center where dolls, drums and other toys may be found.
c. Building center where wood and tools, scissors, paste and colored
paper — materials for making things attract the children.
d. Reading or library center with a supply of pictures and picture
books well-chosen and attractive to children.
Reading should not only grow out of other activities but it should also
furnish leads and cues for additional desirable classroom experiences.
Well-chosen reading will lead out to activity in the following fields: (1)
constructive activity, (2) art work, (3) poetry, (4) music, (5) reading of
additional references, (6) dramatization, (7) original writing, and (8)
excursions.
SOME ESSENTIAL ELEMENTS IN A DAILY PROGRAM
The program for the day in this early training in reading should in-
clude much conversation leading to getting better acquainted with each
other; free periods in which the children may do what they like for a
while; conference periods to discuss things the children have shown an
interest in either by manipulating materials or planning and constructing;
music and games; story hour; and, plans for the next day based on
unfinished activities of various kinds.
DEVELOPMENT OF STUDY HABITS AND ABILITIES
Independence in reading is the result of acquiring and using proper
study habits and the developing of study abilities. One of the greatest
aids to the development of independence in reading is the assignment of
interesting and attainable goals which children can reach only through
individual study. The following suggestions may illustrate this point:
a. Pupils may read silently:
To answer a question asked by the teacher. The answer may
be found by selecting a word or a phrase; by reading a sen-
tence, a paragraph, a page, or the whole of the reading lesson.
To answer questions from the blackboard.
To select from an envelope of printed or written sentences the
proper answers to a list of questions.
To follow the directions or commands found on the blackboard
or bulletin board.
To attach name tags to the proper objects.
To place titles or name cards under the right picture.
To learn how the story ends.
To prepare to dramatize the story.
To discuss the story and ask one another questions.
b. Assignments in oral reading (Pupils to read orally) :
To enjoy the rhythm of a poem or a jingle.
To enjoy their new accomplishment.
58 Course of Study for the
To show the teacher how well they have overcdme a certain
difficulty through practice in group reading under a good
reader, or through practice reading aloud at home.
To entertain another grade, another class, a supervisor or a
guest.
To dramatize the lesson, using books.
To answer questions asked by the teacher.
To tell what different characters say.
To tell the part they liked best.
To tell the funniest part.
The alert teacher will recognize the fact that abilities in work-type
reading will be needed during this initial primer and first reader period
of reading experience, and will plan for the introduction of actual study
initiated and guided by children's purposes, without making the learning
tedious or irksome.
The success in launching a program of work-type or study reading
during this initial stage of reading experience will depend upon a knowl-
edge of aims and objectives, upon the choice of effective material of a
factual nature, upon the. conscious use of especially adapted techniques
and procedures, and upon a definite standard of expected achievements.
No rigid or dogmatic procedure should be denned for the use of work-
type reading since it should be adapted to the needs and capacities of the
children. The following suggestions are made for the development of a
few of the study abilities listed in the First Grade Objectives.
a. Ability to comprehend meaning of word, phrase or sentence, or short
unit of three or four sentences.
How developed.
1. Give a child a definite purpose or question that will compel
him to concentrate on meaning.
2. Exercises which entail search for meanings.
3. Constantly checking on comprehension by means of informal
tests, yes-no exercises, matching, multiple choice, riddles,
completion, picture pointing, drawing.
4. Encourage child to get meaning of new words through
context.
b. Ability to select and classify ideas.
How developed.
1. Ask questions or give directions which oblige child to or-
ganize, select, and classify ideas: e. g., "Tell three things
Bunny had for breakfast." "Which of these three things
did Bunny have for breakfast — tea, milk, cake?" "Draw
what Bunny Rabbit ate."
2. The types of tests mentioned above may be used to test and
practice ability to select and classify ideas.
c. Ability to use facts presented, to reason, and to answer a question
whose answer is implied but not stated in the material read. "What
was the most healthful food that Peter Rabbit had for lunch?" or
"Read about Sally and tell us if you think she was a wise little
girl," or "What should she have done?"
How developed.
Give practice exercises which require such types of think-
ing — ask the kind of questions mentioned above. Lists men-
tioned previously may be constructed for this purpose
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 59
Ability to folloiv directions.
How developed.
Give children written directions for drawing, playing a game,
performing classroom duties, or making very simple objects.
Ability to illustrate or dramatize a selection, with little direction
from the teacher.
Give opportunities for such interpretations.
Ability to connect content of story with pictures.
How developed.
Discuss pictures with children, allowing them to guess proba-
bilities from the pictures and to check themselves by referring
to the text.
Habits of reading for meanings and looking for meanings in all
reading in environment will develop as a result of attention to the
several skills noted above.
Vocabulary. Ability to recognize a sight vocabulary of recurring
words and phrases from either context clues or through form clues.
The larger the sight vocabulary that a child has, the more easily
is he able to interpret the printed page. Again, the number of ideas
he is able to acquire from a selection is affected by his ability to
understand new words from the context or to recognize words be-
cause of similarities to other words.
Further suggestions for vocabulary development.
In the early grades we develop a sight vocabulary of words
whose meanings are already known to the child, and which are in
the child's speaking vocabulary. It is necessary both to build a
sight vocabulary and to give the child some means of recognizing
unfamiliar words independently. Three important phases of vocabu-
lary development are: (1) initial presentation of new sight words;
(2) retention of vocabulary learned; (3) recognition of new sight
words.
1. Initial presentation of new sight words.
a. A good way of introducing words early in the first
grade is to use pictures, in order to make a vivid con-
nection between a word symbol and its meaning, e. g.,
a picture of a boy with the words printed under it.
Other words may be, and in fact nearly all words
should be, introduced in context. In teaching "a good
place," the teacher might say, "Who knows a good
place to play?" and put on the board the children's
response — "My yard is a good place to play." A child
may then be asked to "frame" or underline the part
that says "a good place."
b. Attention to the form of a word in addition to its
meaning helps to fix the form: e. g., in teaching
"a mouse" we might write on the board "A cat
caught . . ." and ask children to supply the right word.
Then the teacher might ask, "Does 'mouse' look like
any word that we have had before?" When "house"
is suggested, the teacher should list the words together
and have children point out their similarity and dif-
ference.
c. Care should be taken not to teach more than three or
four new sight words in a lesson. Again, not all the
new words in a lesson need to be taught. For the
60 Course of Study for the
choice of words in a lesson which become the basic
vocabulary, reference should be made to such a list as
Gates'. (See Gates' Reading Vocabulary for the Pri-
mary Grades, Bureau of Publications, Teachers Col-
lege, Columbia University, New York.)
2. Retention of vocabulary learned. Well-organized beginning
reading materials should plan for enough properly distributed
repetitions of vocabulary to fix the connections between word-
symbol and meaning. In case the materials are not so organ-
ized, or in case certain children need more repetition for fix-
ing the learning, teachers may use supplementary materials
in the form of charts, mimeographed material, short exposure
or flash cards, and seat-work reading games. The reading
material itself may be used for word-finding and phrase-
finding games. Whenever possible, supplementary exercises
in vocabulary should be in context form, e. g.,
Billy went to the farm.
He saw the cows.
He saw the horses.
He saw the pigs.
He liked the farm.
We may ask the child to find the phrase that tells where
Billy went, to find the kind of animals that say "moo," to
find the kind that children like to ride, and so forth.
Word-games with emphasis on meaning may be used with
discretion. Such games are: Picture-pointing, matching words
to pictures, drawing or acting word-meanings.
3. Recognition of new sight-words. There are three methods a
child may use in working independently. He should be taught
all three.
a. The first way is to use the context as a clue to new
words. If a sentence reads, "Baby was asleep in bed,"
the word "bed" being a new sight-word, children should
be encouraged to guess the word "bed." Use of con-
textual clues requires thinking and concentration on
meaning, but care should be taken to avoid over-de-
pendence on this type of word-recognition, resulting in
hasty and inaccurate reading.
b. The second way is to inspect words for their simi-
larities to other words. If a child sees the word "ball"
in the sentence, "Billy plays with a ball," he should
guess from the context that some sort of a toy is
meant, and he should notice that the word looks like
"fall," which he already knows. By putting two and
two together, he gets the word "ball."
c. A third way is to "sound" words. Authorities are dis-
agreed on the value of phonetic work. Until there is
a larger body of scientific evidence, however, to de-
termine exactly the value of phonics, it is safe to say
that a limited amount of phonetic work is helpful.
Recognizing words phonetically should never be em-
phasized in a lesson in such a way that acquiring the
meaning of the reading material is hampered. It is
far better to tell the child those words that he fails
to recognize during a thought-getting period, than to
delay progress and dull interest by insistence on the
use of phonetic knowledge.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 61
PHONICS
a. When to Begin Phonics (See the manuals accompanying the
primer in use.)
As phonics deals with the classification of words into groups,
its teaching should not begin until the child has some familiar
words to classify. His ear may be. trained from the beginning to
listen for sounds in rimes, but the classifying of words comes only
when he knows so many that they tend to become confusing. If a
child says, "That word (hill) ends just the way Jill does," he feels
a need for classifying sounds. The teacher seizes this lead as a
starting point for the adventures with phonics.
At some other time a child may say, "These words sound the
same," referring to "tall" and "wall." The teacher may use these
to start a list like the following:
wall tall call stall
fall ball hall all
Attention may be called to their common element, "all," and to
their different elements, the initial sounds. Thus, from two words,
six more may be learned very easily; and, in addition, an attitude
may be established of being on the lookout for other words in the
same classification.
The time to start, then, is after a need arises. Some investi-
gators believe this time to be after a sight vocabulary of fifty words
has been acquired; some, after a sight vocabulary of a hundred
words; and still others, after a sight vocabulary of two hundred
words. The early ear-training of the pupil and his keenness to
recognize and to be interested in sound classifications will determine
the exact time in a given situation.
b. When to Teach Phonics
It is to be kept in mind that thought-getting is the fundamental
aim of the reading period, and that phonics is but a tool to this
larger aim. As a tool, it should receive special attention in a sepa-
rate period. During the latter period, every effort must be made
to link the knowledge and skills practiced to the real reading period
which has preceded it or which is to follow it.
c. What to Teach in Phonics
The most essential facts of phonics for first-grade children are:
Consonants: Most of the initial consonants, some final conso-
nants, and a few important blends of consonants.
Vowels: Short vowels and long vowels. (When there are two
vowels in a syllable, the first is long and the second silent.)
Phonograms or "families": Rime words.
In considering what to teach in phonies, the safest guide is "to
teach first that which is most important." In the list which follows
are given essential facts to teach, listed in order of importance:
1. Consonants — The list which follows contains those consonants
and blends which are most frequently used and is only
suggestive :
62 Course of Study for the
Initial consonants: s, t, c, p, f, b, r, m, 1, w, g, n, h, th,
st, pr, ch.
Final consonants: r, n, 1, s, t, d, m, p.
Consonant blends (final) : nt, re, ce, se, th, nd, st, ve, ng,
te, ck.
2. Vowels
Short vowels. Since short vowels occur more frequently
than long ones, they are needed first. The following
short vowels are listed in the order of their importance :
a, i, e, o, u. Certain words may be used as keys for
short vowels: can, sit, help, fun, hop.
Long vowels. Words which may be used as keys for "long"
vowels are:
a — ate, cake, name, gave, game, take, page, place,
came; late, rain, tail, wait,
e — eat, each, teacher, meat, read, cream, clean,
leave, beat,
i — ride, five, hide, like, time, write,
o — home, hole, nose, boat, coat, loaf, road,
u — use, blue.
When using words with double vowels, the teacher should
be careful to indicate the effect of the second vowel
upon the first, as in ai, ea, oa, ue.
3. Phonograms or "families" : Rime ivords. Ten important phono-
grams, or "groups of letters of one or more vowels followed
by one or more consonants," are listed below with examples
of words. In situations, in which a teacher finds it desirable
to do so, more phonograms may be added to the list here given.
ee
ing
see
playing
seeds
eating
sleep
drinking
peep
taking
sweet
doing
need
reading
seed
going
et
ight
pet
night
set
right
met
all
est
ball
rest
fall
best
small
nest
ick
en
trick
then
ay
play
say
day
hen
when
pen
un
gray
run
may
sun
fun
How Phonics May be Taught
There are two phases of the problem of teaching phonics, ear-
training and ear and eye-training.
Ear training
Since the recognition of similarities and differences in sounds
is the basis for independent word recognition, ear training is
essential from the beginning of the first grade. All sounds make
a strong appeal to children. Throughout the early weeks of the
first grade, the children can be led to listen for sounds and to
imitate them.
Elementary Schools op North Carolina 63
1. Sound reproduction. The sounds made by animals and by
the toys with which children play, and the common street
sounds afford opportunities for ear training and for sound
repetition. Poems reproducing the sounds of water, of wind,
of rain, and of animals should be read to the group.
2. Riming words. All children have a strong feeling for rhythm
and rime. The recognition of riming words furnishes an-
other sound basis for phonics. Some suggestions for develop-
ing the riming sense follow:
a. The teacher reads couplets exaggerating the rimes; the
child listens, and reproduces the riming words.
b. The teacher gives a couplet — all but the riming words;
the child supplies the riming word. Mother Goose
rimes like the following may be used:
Jack and Jill
Went up the . . .
c. The child or teacher makes up rimes:
"Look, look!
I see the . . ."
d. The child gives two riming words from a familiar
jingle.
e. The child says a word and another child gives a rim-
ing word, such as: toy, boy; girl, curl; house, mouse,
3. Initial sound in names of children. The teacher may say:
"There are two children here whose names begin with the
same sound. Will they tell us their names?" The children
think of other names that begin with the same letter, such
as Jill, Jo, Jenny, Jessie, Jeff.
4. Initial sounds in names of things in the room. After a page
has been read, the teacher may say, "There is something in
this room that begins as Tom's name does." The teacher
makes the sound of "t" several times clearly. The children
touch something that begins as Tom's name does, such as:
table, tool, teacher, top, toy, telephone.
Ear and eye training
After the child has had some experience in ear training and
feels the need of classifying the words which he recognizes at
sight, he is ready to associate sound with symbol.
1. Initial consonant recognition. The teacher says, "When Mary
was reading today, she told me that many of the words be-
gan with the same sound." Look at the word on the boards.
Sound the word. What is the first sound? The teacher
writes the word "some" on the blackboard, sounding the initial
letter clearly as she does so. She then asks the children to
tell her other words beginning with the same sound. These
need not be the words on the page of the text, since the first
list comprises words selected by the sound of "s", not by the
sight of the written "s." The teacher should list on the
board any words the children give, pronouncing each care-
64 Course of Study for the
fully. Some common words the children may give are: see,
sing, song, six, seven. If none of the children seems to notice
the fact that all the words begin with "s", the teacher may
call attention to the fact and emphasize two things: the ap-
pearance of the letter, and the sound it makes. When the
sound has been identified with the letter, the teacher may
refer again to the text and call on the children to find other
words beginning with "s." Further drill on the "s" sound
may be made through various ways:
a. The teacher may take a number of word-cards and flash
them before the children. When the word begins with
"s", the children should say, "yes." When it does not
begin with "s", they should say, "no."
b. The children may direct the teacher in making a list
of things in the schoolroom that begin with "s." Dur-
ing a seat-work or study period the children may draw
objects, the names of which begin with "s"; or they
may make charts with pictures they have cut out from
magazines to show words beginning with "s."
2. Final consonant recognition. The teacher may call attention
to what the baby is doing in a picture of a baby drinking.
Then she may say:
Sup, sup, sup,
From a cup.
"What do you hear at the ends of the words 'sup' and
'cup'? Are the sounds the same? Here are some more. Then
the teacher may say, accenting the final consonant for the
child to repeat:
stop hop top jump
The teacher may then put the words on the blackboard,
asking the child to pronounce the parts of the words which
look the same. The name and the sound of the letter may
be given.
3. Short vowel recognition. The teacher may put on the board
several words with short vowels. These should be words
which the children know by sight, such as:
can Sallie ran
black glad had
flag cat apple
The teacher may show the symbol "a," asking for its
sound. After a strong association has been made between
sound and symbol, she may ask for other words that have
the same sound. The following words may be put on the
board so that the child will see that, in these words, the
sound of "a" is "a":
fat Sam hat mat man can
Further drill may be had by using flash cards, the text,
charts, and booklets, as suggested for consonants.
4. Long vowel recognition. The teacher may say, as she puts
the word "can" on the board, "Here is a word with 'a' in it.
What does the 'a' say? Here are some more. What does 'a'
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 65
say?" The teacher may then continue, "There is a letter
which will change these words. Watch the words change."
She puts "e" on the end of each word, pronouncing the long
vowel slowly:
fate same hate mate mane cane
The child sees that the word is changed in sound and in-
meaning. It is shown that the "e" makes the "a" long and
that the "e" is silent, or does not sound. In a short while
the child should be able to change from "a" to long "a" when
he sees the "e" on the end of a syllable or a word. The
teacher may proceed with the same type of practice suggested
for consonants. The same procedures are used for the other
vowels in developing the long sounds of e, i, o, u. When
words like eat, coat, rain, clean, and leave, are used, the
teacher may show that the second vowel, like the "e" at the
end, keeps silent but makes the first vowel long.
5. Recognition of phonograms, or "families"; rime words. The
teacher may say, "I am going to say several words. Are
there any parts that sound the same?" She then pronounces
such words as:
playing drinking reading eating taking
The children will discover the "ing" when the teacher
writes the words on the blackboard. The children may say
the words and may put a box around the family name; that
is, around each "ing" card may be placed on those words
which will take the "ing." As the child adds the "ing," he
is to pronounce the word he has made/ Other phonograms
may be taught in this way.
e. Vocabulary Attainments at the Close of First Grade
At the end of the first grade, the child should have a reading
vocabulary of several hundred words which he recognizes both iso-
lated and in context. This vocabulary consists of the words in the
basal primer and first reader and other words of high frequency
in the Gates and other standard word lists. These words should
be learned to the point of instant recognition through much easy
interesting reading material supplemented by games and drills.
SUGGESTED EQUIPMENT FOR TEACHING READING
a. Texts. It is essential that the teacher have copies of all basal tests
for her own personal use, and should be furnished with copies of
all supplementary readers used for class instruction.
b. Manuals. Every teacher should have a copy of the manual pre-
pared for the readers she is teaching, both basal and supplementary.
c. Accessory materials. Charts, sentence, word groups, and word-
cards, phonic charts, and seat-work booklets accompanying the read-
ers to be used may be furnished in complete sets for the teacher's
use. (See the list and description in the manuals accompanying the
series of readers in use.) This material should be used only with
certain groups where needs demand it. It is much more desirable
that the teacher make accessory materials with content based upon
66 Course of Study for the
the experiences of the child and the needs of the immediate situ-
ation. Especially should the teacher make the accessory materials
for the texts additional to those used for basal work if needed. All
pupils do not need either the commercial or teacher-made materials.
Many individual children do not need the aid this material gives
but can make satisfactory progress without it.
d. Pictures. These may be cut from old books, magazines, and other
sources, and used for booklets, seat-work, or bulletin boards.
e. Manila tag board, kraft, and other heavy wrapping paper for charts,
sentence strips, word group cards, or word-cards.
f. Hand printing press with the large type including capitals, small
letters and figures for making charts, books and papers of various
kinds.
g. A price and sign marker. This may be secured from Milton Brad-
ley Company, Atlanta, Ga.
h. Seat-work material. This should be chosen carefully and in re-
lation to the classwork in reading.
i. Hectograph. A two-surface one is preferred.
j. Reading table. (This may be constructed by the pupils.) For books,
pictures and all other reading materials.
k. Bulletin board. At least 3 ft. by 7 ft. in size. It may be of framed
cork or felt, or more cheaply of beaver board covered with burlap.
(It should be placed low enough to be used by pupils.)
1. Chart rack. This rack consists of a long sheet of kraft, or other
heavy paper with horizontal ledges or grooves into which sentence
strips, word-card groups, and word-cards can be slipped easily by
the children. .
m. Window shade. To be fastened above the blackboard, and used to
cover work on the blackboard as needed.
n. Blackboard markers. In teaching beginning reading, the teacher
may find blackboard markers useful when blackboard units are be-
ing read. These may be made of manila cardboard and should be
about 3 in. by 20 in. in size. Pupils and teachers hold these strips
under sentences read from blackboard and chart instead of using
a pointer.
o. Individual markers. In beginning reading from the primer, each
child should have a small cardboard marker about four inches long
and one inch wide to hold under a sentence being read. This is held
still under a line and not moved; thus pointing is avoided. Markers
are crutches or props which should be discontinued as soon as the
children are able to keep their places without them.
p. Supplementary practice materials. The use of chart materials and
book materials of the primer level which are properly organized to
provide distributed repetition of vocabulary, should take care of
fixing the vocabulary. However, supplementary material, though not
essential to the effective use of well-planned books, will enlarge and
enrich children's experiences by helping to establish a friendly atti-
tude toward reading, as well as by furnishing additional means for
thoughtful repetitions. Supplementary materials include:
1. Reading cards: The content, vocabulary, and method of these
cards should be adapted to the experiences and interests of
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 67
the first grade child, and without repeating should be related
to the book materials. They should provide definitely for
practice in such skills as, understanding of sentences, vocabu-
lary development and using the following responses — action,
verbal, yes-no statements, matching words, matching with
pictures, completion of sentences. They are effective when
used for repetition with specific sections of the books or
charts being read. All of the sentence cards in a group should
be related to one central idea. Suitable units might be
grouped around a birthday or lunch experience, things in the
home, animals, toys, and so forth.
2. Illustrated charts: These may be constructed upon the same
general principles as the reading cards.
Important. For teaching equipment specially designed to accompany
the adopted readers for primary grades, see the manual for the
Newson Readers, Primer and First Reader, Newson and Com-
pany, New York, and the manual for the Story and Study Primer
and First Reader, Johnson Publishing Company, Richmond, Va.
q. Professional library. A few well-selected texts dealing with the
teaching of reading. (See list of reference books in Part I.)
SEATWORK ACTIVITIES
There are always two phases of reading of the instructional type carried
on in the classroom : that which the teacher and pupils work together to
attain, and the activities of the pupils working independently or in groups
at their seats with materials related to that phase of the reading instruc-
tion guided by the teacher in the class period. Seat activities have a
definite function in the well-balanced reading program. They afford an
opportunity for children to develop independence in reading. They should
be planned to give practice in the fundamental habits and skills, repetition
for fixing vocabulary, and opportunities for the learning of new words
through the use of context and pictures. The seatwork should be built
for the most part upon a known vocabulary, yet it should provide new
content. It should above all else, be varied, interesting and pleasurable.
It should be planned in connection with the regular reading work, and
should help pupils progress toward the reading objectives for the class.
The seatwork material which accompanies the adopted reading texts
is preferable to the material selected at random. When such related ma-
terials are not available, effort should be made to plan the seatwork in
as close accord with the activities and interests of the class as possible.
Many teachers mimeograph or hectograph seatwork material. Others
find that supplying the child with a work-book at small expense, saves
them a great deal of labor. The work books should contain a great variety
of exercises, with numerous interesting illustrations, and should be care-
fully planned to give distributed practice in comprehension, in following
directions, in guessing riddles, and so forth. They are also of service in
indicating the individual strength and weakness of the pupils, and may
be used by the pupil to check his own progress.
68 Course of Study for the
a. Suggestions for the Selection, Construction, and Use of Seat-
work.
1. It should be directly related to the interests and activities of
the class at the time it is to be used.
2. It should be constructed with some specific reading ability in
mind.
3. It should be useful to check results.
4. The child should understand and appreciate recorded achieve-
ment. Follow-up of success or failure in seatwork and help
a on difficulties should be planned definitely.
b. Types of Seatwork
1. Pre-primer. The seatwork during this stage must be very
simple on account of lack of vocabulary and reading tech-
nique :
a. Matching pictures and phrases: animals, people, things
in a house, things to eat, colors.
b. Drawing on paper or blackboard.
c. Making characters from a story, using clay.
d. Making and labelling book of cut-out pictures, free-
hand cutting, or cutting pictures from magazines.
2. Primer and first reader. The teacher should have a definite
aim in giving each type of seatwork and should be sure that
everything which involves reading has a vocabulary of graded
difficulty.
a. Illustrating thought-units of story length through
drawing, paper tearing or cutting, crayon or clay, or
in sand table.
b. Looking at pictures and reading books from the library
table.
c. Making a story book, finding or drawing illustrations,
and printing accompanying sentences.
d. Rhymes or short stories to be placed with appropriate
illustrations and titles.
e. Units accompanied by true-false, completion, multiple-
choice or sentence-matching checks.
f. Re-assembling sentences, short stories, or nursery
rhymes which have been cut into word groups and
placed in an envelope to make the original sentences,
stories, or rhymes.
g. Directed illustration of short units, e. g.,
1. Draw three rabbits. 2. Draw the bear's bedroom.
Color one rabbit white. Draw three blue beds.
Color one rabbit black. Draw a little table.
Color one rabbit brown. Draw a big chair.
Draw carrots for the rabbit Draw Baby Bear in bed.
to eat.
h. Riddles to be completed by:
Placing with correct picture.
Placing with correct phrase.
Drawing, cutting, and so forth.
I am black and white.
I like milk.
I say "Meow, Meow."
Draw me.
i. The teacher, may cut stories from old readers. Paste
each one on an envelope. Inside the envelope have
the same story cut into sentences or word groups.
Let a child build up each story. The children should
be able to read their stories to each other when they
are through.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 69
j. Making the scenery and the figures needed in a puppet
show based on a given selection,
k. Practicing reading a selection to himself in order that
he may be ready if he is chosen to take the part of
one of the characters.
Important. The seatwork as suggested here should not be used too ex-
tensively or continuously by the pupils during the "between recitation"
periods. There should be ample time for free activity periods when the
child has the opportunity to choose materials to work with and to plan
various worthwhile things to do.
The type of seatwork suggested here must be planned most carefully
and used very judiciously. The skillful teacher will plan for specific use
of seatwork materials and avoid creating the spirit of boredom among the
pupils and thereby endangering their interest in reading.
SUGGESTIONS FOR TIME ALLOTMENT AND AMOUNT OF MA-
TERIAL TO BE COVERED
a. Time Allotment
Approximately 300 minutes (more or less as the schedule adopted
provides) is the length of the school day for the first grade. It is
found by practice in our best schools that at least one-half or fifty
per cent of this time should be given to reading. This includes the
reading period proper, and those activities in related subjects which
furnish a basis for reading experience. Since in current practice
reading is intimately related to practically every classroom activity,
and not limited exclusively to the reading period, 150 minutes per
day, or 750 minutes per week, does not seem too great a proportion
of time to allot to the reading experiences of first grade pupils.
Within this generous time allotment the teacher may realize the re-
lation of reading to other subjects and insure for the pupil an en-
riched program of meaningful activities in reading.
Differences in conditions in the various school systems and situ-
ations concerning pupils who learn slowly or rapidly, make it diffi-
cult to determine a definite time allotment for an actual reading
period in which reading instruction alone is given. In general, it
would seem reasonable to suggest that from 75 to 90 minutes per
day be given to the reading instruction period and from 60 to 75
minutes be given to incidental reading and related activities which
afford the wider reading experiences for the pupil. Not less than
75 minutes per day should be given to the reading instruction period
alone, since practice proves that this is necessary to insure success;
however, it is not recommended that every teacher in a school sys-
tem be held to close adherence to a given schedule.
b. Selection and Use of Materials
Two basal primers and two basal first readers are adopted for
use in this state (see list of adopted basal texts). In addition to
the basal texts, it is suggested that primers and first readers be
selected from the supplementary texts (see suggested supplementary
list, p. 35) for use as the needs of the class, individual or groups of
pupils, demand. From five to ten supplementary books, in addition
to the four basal texts, are recommended for use in the first grade.
70 Course of Study for the
Pupils who read widely make more rapid progress than pupils who
read a limited number of books. Sometimes twenty or more books
are read during the first year. Provision should be made for inde-
pendent reading by each pupil of at least ten interesting books.
While reading widely is highly important in the first grade, it
is also essential that pupils read intelligently. It is necessary for
the teacher to do two things in this connection: (1) to be able to
select from the supplementary texts the type and variety of content
needed by the individual or group of pupils at the time they are to
take up the supplementary text; and, (2) to provide in her program
for definite checks on pupil progress in attainment of attitudes,
habits, skills and knowledge resulting from the use of the text.
The content, method and vocabulary of books seleeted for use in
the first grade should be reviewed carefully by the teacher. These
first books should contain a combination of factual and narrative
material, and should provide for a gradual, systematic development
of study habits and skills with an easily graded and adequate vo-
cabulary of first grade level. The content should be varied; it should
be related to and should expand the natural and wholesome interests
of six-year-old children.
Definite provision should be made in the selection of reading
material for the systematic increase of the vocabulary, working
toward the achievement of the standard vocabulary for the first
grade.
In addition to material suited to the development of study habits
and skills, such as the basal texts afford, there should be a selection
of books containing fanciful tales, folk tales, poetry, science material
and other predominantly narrative material to be used for extensive
individual reading or for group audience reading. All children's
books used for reading purposes should be illustrated attractively.
SUGGESTIONS FOR PROMOTION FOR THE FIRST GRADE
Too often in practice, teachers have thought of attainments for pro-
motion in terms of completion of subject matter in basal and supplementary
texts required by the course of study. It is much more desirable that levels
of achievement or attainments as measured in attitudes, habits, skills and
knowledge with a definite check on the vocabulary, form the basis for
promotions.
In the matter of promotions in the first grade, there are several things
to consider: (1) the entrance requirements for first grade, which is the
beginning point in the first grade program, (2) the outcomes or accomplish-
ments at the close of the pre-primer, primer and first reader stages in
the program, and (3) the satisfactory completion of the general require-
ments of the initial period of reading instruction. In the sections given
to a discussion of preparation for reading the entrance requirements for
first grade are suggested.
Since the statement of objectives for the grade are very specific, they
should indicate desirable levels of attainment. Ideally, the attainments
for promotion should coincide with the objectives, but with the individual
and group promotion system, it is often necessary to promote pupils on
Elementary Schools of North Carolina
71
the basis of the more easily measurable attainments. The following chart
indicates attainments on the pre-primer, primer and first reader levels:
First Reader
Attitudes and
Appreciations
Pre-Primer
Interest in all read-
ing in environment,
including (a) early
picture books, (b)
charts formed from
sentences the child
has given from his
experiences. A feel-
ing of self-confidence
which gives him the
courage to try to
read the materials
offered.
Primer
Interest in all read-
ing in environment.
Particular interest
in books. Voluntary
interest in independ-
ent reading of very
simple selections,
charts and bulletins.
Preference for cer-
tain stories.
A love for reading
and an interest in
all reading in en-
vironment. Particu-
lar interest in books.
Voluntary interest
in independent read-
ing of Primers and
First Readers. In-
terest in owning,
borrowing, and
bringing books to
school. Interest in
public library. A no-
tion of reading as
thought-getting. The
desire to share read-
ing experiences with
others.
Habits,
Skills and
Knowledge
Background of ex-
perience.
Enlarged speaking
vocabulary.
Ability to use simple
sentences.
Ability to use ideas
in c o n v e r sation,
drawing, construct-
ing.
The habit of trying
to make connection
between the symbols
and the thought they
embody.
The habit of self-
helpfulness in using
available materials.
Some ability to
grasp thought
wholes.
Ability to read or
respond to simple
chart material of 4
or S lines (15-20
charts) .
The consciousness
that printed symbols
have meanings.
Ability to compre-
hend words, phrases,
sentences.
Ability to answer
fact questions on
material.
Ability to make mul-
tiple choice from 3
possibilities.
Ability to guess a
snort riddle.
Ability to illustrate
or dramatize a se-
lection.
Ability to follow 3
or 4 simple direc-
tions.
Ability to read any
of the easier selec-
tions from any
Primer.
Ability to read both
silently and orally
in thought units.
Ability to read aloud
clearly and natural-
ly with, considera-
tion for the audi-
ence.
Ability to compre-
hend words, phrases,
sentences.
Ability to answer
fact questions on
material.
Ability to make
multiple choice from
3 possibilities.
Ability to guess a
riddle.
Ability to illustrate
or dramatize a se-
lection.
Ability to follow 3
or 4 simple direc-
tions.
Ability to read flu-
ently at sight any of
the easier selections
from any First
Reader.
C. Vocabulary
A sight vocabulary
of 50 words from a
standard list (Gates
or Merrill-Kircher),
or 50 frequently re-
curring words in the
Primer or chart in
Vocabulary of 200-
250 sight words
from a standard list,
including the words
in the basal Primer.
Ability to read with-
out finger pointing,
lip-m o v ement, o r
head-movement.
Vocabulary of 900-
1,000 sight words,
consisting of the
words in the basal
First Reader and
other words of a
high frequency from
a standard list.
Ability to use con-
text-clues.
Ability to recognize
words through simi-
larity to other
words, and by use
of phonics.
Habit o f reading
independently for
pleasure.
Habit of enjoying
illustrations.
72 Course of Study for the
The requirements of the initial period may not be completed satis-
factorily by all pupils who should be promoted at the close of the first
year in school. However, these requirements may be met by a large pro-
portion of the first grade pupils at or near the close of the first year; a
few who learn to read easily and rapidly will complete more than is out-
lined in the initial period; and some pupils may not be ready for the
second period of reading instruction until they have been in the second
grade for several weeks.
The teacher must be alert to the needs and progress made by each pupil
in acquiring the broad general purposes of the initial period of reading
instruction during the first year. It is equally important that the teacher
know if the pupil measures up to the requirements as stated, whether he
is in the first or the second grade, before he is expected to progress very
rapidly with the second period of reading instruction. In other words, is
there evidence that the pupil realizes that reading is a thought-getting
process and is there satisfactory attainment of habits of independent and
intelligent reading of first grade materials that now insure his readiness
to enter a program of rapid development of fundamental attitudes, habits
and skills?
It is suggested that the following characteristics distinguish the pupils
who have completed satisfactorily the requirements of the initial period
in reading:
a. Becomes absorbed completely in the content of interesting selections
when reading independently.
b. Reads silently with few or no lip-movements.
c. Asks questions about and discusses intelligently the content of what
is read.
d. Reads aloud clearly, naturally, and in thought units rather than by
individual words.
e. Handles books with care, opens and turns pages properly, knows
the order of paging and is able to find readily what he is looking
for.
These characteristics may be determined by close observation on the
part of the teacher and from records made for individual pupils from time
to time. Standardized reading tests are a great aid in determining the
achievement and progress of pupils at various stages of growth and de-
velopment in the reading program. Accomplishments as follows may be
measured and pupil rating determined:
a. Recognizing the meanings of words seen.
b. Interpreting simple sentences and paragraphs.
c. Understanding and reproducing what is read.
d. Rate of silent reading.
e. General accomplishments in speed and accuracy of oral reading.
As rapidly as pupils reach the satisfactory first grade standard for the
accomplishments listed above (these are given as first grade norms in the
Manual of Directions accompanying the tests) and measure acceptably on
the attainment chart, provision should be made for the broader program
of reading activities recommended for the second grade.
THE SECOND AND THIRD GRADES
Reading attitudes, habits, skills and knowledges are developed rapidly
in the second and third grades. Upon these fundamentals depend satis-
factory oral and silent reading. The second grade begins, and the third
grade continues a period of opportunity and responsibility for the teacher
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 73
who looks upon instruction in reading as the building of permanent life
attitudes, knowledges, skills and habits.
FOUNDATIONS FOR SECOND GRADE READING
When the child enters the second grade, it is hoped that he will have
both a real desire to read and the beginning of a love for books. He should
have acquired the ability to read first grade material with a fair degree
of independence; he should have some ability in mastering words, together
with the realization that these symbols on the printed page hold meaning.
Certain definite habits, skills, and appreciations relating to reading
should have been developed before the child comes to the second grade.
During the second and third grades, the child while reading should evidence
reasonable practice in the following:
a. Good posture.
b. Proper and careful use of books.
c Reads silently before trying to read aloud.
d. Tries to eliminate lip movements while reading silently.
e. Uses correct eye movements, with lengthening eye-sweep.
f. Keeps place without pointing.
g. Enunciates clearly and pronounces words distinctly.
h. Uses pleasant voice so that audience hears with ease,
i. Attacks new and difficult words by:
1. Getting them through context.
2. Recognizing phonetic elements.
3. Asking for word.
j. Reads with expression.
k. Reads to find out things.
1. Reproduces what is read silently — organizing thought in words by
action, or through art materials,
m. Experiences joy and satisfaction in putting thought into the page,
n. Listens attentively to stories read, and enjoys hearing them,
o. Enjoys reading for others, selecting and preparing story.
p. Appreciates the humor in a story.
OBJECTIVES
Upon the foundations for reading developed in the first grade, the fol-
lowing objectives should be easily attainable during the second and third
grades.
a. Attitudes
Greater interest in books and the desire to read, as shown by
voluntary library reading, bringing books to school, and taking
books home.
Realization that books are useful, as shown by the habit of look-
ing for information in them.
Increased desire to own good books.
b. Skills, habits, knowledge
Thought-getting :
Greater ability to comprehend word, phrase, sentence.
Ability to select and group ideas.
Ability to select main ideas (a beginning in evaluating ideas
and .in outlining).
Ability to use facts to solve a simple problem.
Ability to follow directions, as in drawing and making objects,
playing games, carrying out brief assignments.
74 Course of Study for the
Ability to organize a sequence of events, as in dramatizing
a story.
Ability to read independently the grade texts and other books
of the same level of difficulty.
c. Vocabulary
Increased stock of sight-words.
Ability to recognize a vocabulary of recurring words and phrases
through both context and form-clues.
Ability to recognize meanings of new words through context
clues.
d. Mechanics of reading
Increasing span of recognition, as distinguished from span of
perception.
Elimination of finger-pointing, and head or lip-movement.
Improvement in enunciation, correct pronunciation, proper phras-
ing, well-modulated and expressive voice in oral reading.
Habitually correct posture and consistent use of proper light.
e. Handling of books
Appreciation of necessity for care of books in opening, and turn-
ing pages.
Greater skill in use of table of contents, finding stories by page
. numbers, cross referencing.
f. Library
Beginning of the ability to locate books and, without guidance,
to become familiar with contents.
MEANS OF REALIZING THE OBJECTIVES
The teacher may inculcate an attitude of friendliness toward books by
teaching the child facts about books and how to work with them. This may
be done by incidental or pointed reference to books:
a. By emphasizing factual books as well as fanciful ones.
b. By teaching the child to find answers to questions in books.
c. By encouraging the child to find answers independently.
d. By setting up situations that call for purposive reading.
Desirable reading skills may be developed:
a. By emphasizing thought in all reading.
b. By giving drills in reproduction of stories.
c. By giving exercises in following directions, in dramatization. _
d. By phrase-flashing, as in grade one, with materials of increasing
difficulty.
e. By having the child read to answer questions and problems.
f. By continuing instruction in opening books.
g. By enlarging informational vocabulary,
h. By continuing lessons in observation.
Correct reading habits may be formed:
a. By guarding against a negative attitude toward the work of the
school.
b. By developing habits of accurate and rapid reading.
c. By giving practice in following direction.
d. By perfecting mechanics.
e. By developing ability to concentrate.
f. By getting the child to like his work.
g. By encouraging promptness and industry.
h. By insisting on neatness in use of materials,
i. By developing a habit of observation.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 75
READING IN CONNECTION WITH OTHER CLASSROOM
ACTIVITIES
Reading should have a prominent part in carrying on classroom activi-
ties, and in supplementing the content matter of the curriculum. Library
shelves should contain books, which will enrich certain phases of history,
geography, science, community life. Reading lists on such topics may be
made by children or by teacher and posted.
Reading should supplement the experience gained on excursions to the
farm, the dairy, the bakery, and so forth. Reading material should be
utilized in preparing entertainments, assembly programs, parties, and
dramatizations.
Printed board directions are useful in connection with care of materials,
constructive work, free-period activities, games, study assignments in num-
ber work, and so forth. Book directions may be given for constructive
work or games. Bulletin boards should show regularly, letters from other
groups, suggestions for before-school work, lists of committees of coming
class events, and so forth. Reading should not only grow out of such
situations but should be used to furnish points of departure for further
reading, excursions, constructive work, and so forth.
Detailed Suggestions
In order to obtain the best results, teachers are urged to plan their
reading program several weeks in advance. They should study the table
of contents and the content of the stories in the reader and decide what
material is most seasonable and will lead to desirable activities in harmony
with the entire program. By planning the reading program sometime in
advance, the teacher can provide for related material, extensive reading,
and for further pupil activities. Consult the manuals for the readers for
plans and suggestions. The teacher should be familiar with and stimu-
lated by the lesson plans for the basal readers as found in the manuals.
Techniques or procedures are suggested for practice in developing the vari-
ous important reading abilities, skills and habits, which will enable the
children gradually but surely to achieve them through their daily program.
The teacher should strive to make reading an enjoyable occupation to the
pupils through their appreciation and understanding of it. The children
should be lead to consider reading as one of their greatest joys and the
teacher should help them to become acquainted with a wide range of worth-
while stories and poems. Further suggestions for the teacher follows:
Continue to give oral reading much attention. At this period, note
carefully the child's word difficulties and how he meets them; his articu-
lation, pronunciation, the modulation of his voice; and his ability to in-
terpret thought in a pleasing manner.
Continue systematic work in silent reading. Use many interesting,
easy, attractive supplementary books. Introduce good books, praise them
and permit children to examine and use them as a privilege. Encourage
in every way possible the use of the library and reading table. Help
children form the habit of consulting books in carrying on activities. En-
courage them to read when work is finished; in free periods; and encourage
them to take library books home. Lead children to read books by authors
of the stories they enjoy most. Encourage them to broaden their reading*
interests by reading a variety of books about one subject and by reading
76 Course of Study for the
books on various subjects related to the activities in which they are en-
gaged. Make the greatest use of every means of encouraging extensive
reading. Have on the reading table reading material — books and maga-
zines — and write on the blackboard, or place on the bulletin board, the
names of the books, giving page numbers, in which stories or facts related
to the selection being read may be found. Encourage children to bring
books from home for the class library.
Read aloud to children from an interesting book. Create curiosity in
a story by telling part of it. Let the children tell how it might end, and
then let them read to find out.
Continue to develop a sympathetic appreciation of poems which cause
the child to feel the poem and respond to its appeal. Be sure there is no
over-analysis in poem study. Provide situations which will cause pupils
to wish to interpret and memorize poems or read their favorite books.
Continue the use of the bulletin board on the appropriate grade level.
Continue to exercise great care in presenting the child's tasks to him.
Be sure they are suited as nearly as possible to his nature and are interest-
ing to him. Make the activities in connection with the reading natural
and child-like. Study to find out what the child's interests are. Then try
to see that they are provided for.
Continue giving practice in the following of simple written directions.
Read aloud frequently from books to answer informational questions
raised by the pupils. As soon as they are able, the children should read
to find their own answers.
Be sure that the child knows how the assigned work in reading he is
expected to do is to be done and how much of it he is to do. Then see
that he goes to work on it with promptness and industry; and that he
completes the task he has begun. The teacher should not require any-
thing of an individual child that he cannot do. Praise the good reading
of a child and let him demonstrate his skill to others.
Children should be held responsible for practicing what they have
learned about the care of a book and how to use it effectively.
Continue to deepen the children's appreciation of the truth and beauty
found in the stories and poems of their grade level by connecting these
stories and poems with life situations.
Continue to deepen the child's appreciation of the truth and beauty
found in his environment by encouraging him to observe the people, ani-
mals, and things about them and by supplementary class discussions about
these observations.
BASIC MATERIALS
The basic materials for realizing the objectives in second and third
grade reading are the adopted textbooks for these grades. (See list of
basal and supplementary texts.) As much supplementary material as
necessary should be carefully selected.
THE READING PROGRAM
The type of lessons in the second and third grade should include:
a. Group lessons in work-type silent reading for the purpose of
developing fundamental habits and skills.
b. Independent work-type silent reading, checked carefully.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 77
c. Audience reading of prepared recreatory or informational ma-
terial.
d. Independent reading of recreatory material, checked through
brief reports, and so forth.
e. An appropriate amount of drill and exercises to establish habits
and accuracy and independence in word-recognition, and a wide
span of recognition.
f . Frequent tests of progress, and diagnostic and remedial measures.
g. Reading in connection with class activities.
TIME ALLOTMENT
It is suggested that six hundred minutes per week be given to reading
instruction. This includes the many activities by which children are taught
to read. Individual helping periods must be provided for within this
alloted time.
CLASSIFICATION OF PUPILS
The class should be divided into at least three groups on the basis of
needs. Three types of tests are recommended for this purpose:
a. Tests of ability to comprehend or interpret what is read. (See
Stanford Achievement Test in Reading, and Haggerty Test.)
b. Measures of rate of silent reading. (Courtis, Starch.)
c. Tests of rate and accuracy in oral reading. (Gray.)
Some schools have found it practicable to re-group (for the reading-
period) all the children of their second and third grades, according to
special needs.
STUDY IN THE SECOND AND THIRD GRADES
a. Ability to comprehend. In these grades, it is still necessary to give
attention to the comprehension of words, phrases, and sentences.
Comprehension is developed by:
1. Giving the child a definite purpose which compels concen-
tration on meaning.
2. Questions and exercises which entail search for meaning.
(Any of the checks mentioned below are also practice ex-
ercises.)
3. Checking constantly on comprehension by means of informal
tests of the following types: yes-no, multiple choice, match-
ing sentences, completing riddles, drawing, picture pointing,
following directions.
4. Encouraging child to get meaning of new words through
context.
b. Ability to select and classify ideas.
1. Ask questions or give directions which oblige children to
organize, select and classify ideas; e. g., "Find three sentences
that tell you the cave-boys had a good time." "What kinds
of food did Surefoot like to eat?" "What two important things
did Surefoot have to think of when he chose his home?"
2. Require children to report very briefly on topics; e. g., "Tell
us about Surefoot's home." "Tell one way the cave men
built a fire."
3. Ask children to illustrate the part of the story which shows . . .
c. Ability to select main ideas.
1. Ask for title for a paragraph or story.
2. Ask children to find the "key word" (third grade).
3. Ask class to divide the selection into parts for reporting- to
class.
4. Ask children to make a series of illustrations bringing out
the most important ideas.
78 Course of Study for the
d. Ability to use ideas in solving a simple problem, as "In what ways
were the cave-dwellers different from the tree-dwellers?" or "Why
does a dog need a collar?"
e. Ability to use facts presented as a basis for reasoning or for mak-
ing inferences — i. e., ability to answer a question whose answer is
implied but not stated in the material read: "What was the safest
way Surefoot played?" "What was the most dangerous way he
played?"
1. Such questions as the above should be asked frequently in
connection with the reading lesson.
2. Informal tests of the types mentioned above may be adapted
for testing this ability.
f. Ability to follow directions — Give directions for games, play, drama-
tizations, pantomime, drawing, etc.
g. Ability to organize a sequence of events.
1. Give practice in dramatizing stories and events.
2. Give practice in reproducing stories.
VOCABULARY
In the second grade, the following means of building vocabulary must
still be employed: (a) careful presentation of difficult new sight-words;
(b) repetition of vocabulary for retention; (c) giving the child the means
for working out words independently.
a. Initial presentation of new sight-words: All words should be intro-
duced in context. In teaching "The rudder" the teacher might say, "Who
knows something that helps steer the plane?" and put on the board the
children's response — "The rudder helps steer the plane." A child may then
be asked to "frame" or underline the part that says "the rudder." At-
tention to the form of a word, in addition to its meaning, helps to fix the
form; e. g., in teaching "worn" we might write on the board, "Rubbers
are ... on rainy days," and ask the children to supply the right word.
Then the teacher might ask, "Does 'worn' look like any word we have had
before?" When "torn" is suggested, the teacher should list the words to-
gether and have children point out their similarity and difference.
b. Retention of vocabulary learned: Well-organized reading materials
should provide for enough properly distributed repetitions of vocabulary
to fix the connections between word-symbol and meaning. In case the
materials are not so organized, or in case certain children need more repe-
tition for fixing the learning, teachers may use supplementary materials
in the form of charts, mimeographed material, short-exposure (flash)
cards, and seat-work reading games. The reading material itself may be
used for word-finding and phrase-finding games. Whenever possible, sup-
plementary exercises in vocabulary should be in context form; e. g.,
A dog should have a — strong leather collar.
He should have a — muzzle.
If your dog is lost, go to the pound to see — whether — he is there.
We ask the child to find the phrase that tells what a dog should wear
around his neck, and what he should wear on his jaws in hot weather, and
so forth.
Word-games with emphasis on meaning may be used with discretion.
Asking children to give synonyms or antonyms, or the use of words, in
sentences, helps to fix their meaning (see "synonyms" and "antonyms"
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 79
below). The types of tests discussed above (true-false, completion, and
so forth) may be used to test understanding of vocabulary; e. g.,
"The . . . helps to steer an aeroplane."
"The . . . were so heavy that Lindbergh could hardly see."
c. Recognition of new sight ivords: There are three methods a child
may use to work out words independently. He should be taught all three,
as indicated in the outline for the first grade. See page 60.
d. Third grade vocabulary training: Beyond the first and second
grades, vocabulary building is chiefly a matter of teaching new terms —
that is, new games for old objects and ideas — as well as names for new
ideas. For example, the child learns that "honest" may be expressed by
"honorable," "upright," or "trustworthy." We may learn a name for a
new object — the "propeller" of an aeroplane. Ways of presenting and
fixing these words include the following:
1. Having the child try to understand meaning through context.
2. Explanation in place of formal definition.
3. Classification.
4. The use of synonyms.
5. The use of antonyms.
6. Having child use words in a sentence.
Perhaps the less familiar methods need explanation. Classification of
words focuses attention upon, and fixes memory of, their meaning.
Example 1. We might take a number of new words from a lesson on
Lindbergh's flight, and ask the children to place in one column all of the
words that have anything to do with an aeroplane, such as rudder, pro-
peller, plane, and so forth; in another column all those words relating to
weather conditions, such as mist, fog, clouds.
Example 2. In a lesson on various kinds of bread eaten in different
countries we may ask the child to "write under these headings, the kinds
of bread you would expect to find in each of the countries: Sweden, Nor-
way, Scotland."
Use of synonyms: We may give a child a word and ask him for an-
other word which has the same meaning. We may place on the board a
list of four or five words with their synonyms not in order, and ask the
child to pick out and place together the words which mean the same, e. g.,
finally grumbled resented hard complained
declared difficult was angry at at last said
Antonyms: Asking children to give the opposites of words helps to
fix their meaning; e. g.,
arrive honorable small depart
mistrust spacious believe in deceitful
Use of words in sentences : An interesting exercise is to require children
to show their understanding of word meaning ny answering questions on
the content of a story read: That is, after reading a story about the value
of safety matches, the following questions may be asked:
"How are matches lighted . . . accidentally?"
"What is a fire . . . extinguisher?"
"How could matches cause a . . . disaster?"
80 Course of Study for the
ORAL READING IN THE SECOND AND THIRD GRADES
Practice is necessary if the purposes in oral reading are to be realized,
but practice should be motivated highly. The pupil should know the pur-
poses the teacher has in mind, and in addition to these have his own
personal motives.
Some of the general purposes in 07*al reading in the second and third
grades may be summed up under these major heads:
Group reading
a. To share and enjoy a reading selection as a group.
b. To enjoy a poem as a group.
c. To gain information as a group.
Audience reading
a. To read to give pleasure to an audience.
b. To read to give information to an audience.
Practice in oral reading for improvement
There is much over-lapping in these purposes. Each of them may in-
clude to an extent the others. Any one or all of them may appear in one
day's reading lesson.
DISCUSSION OF SOME GENERAL PURPOSES OF READING
Group Reading:
a. To share and enjoy a selection as a group is certainly one purpose
the teacher can make frequent use of. The group may read a selection to
enjoy together and share a story element, a humorous situation, the im-
agery in a passage, and the rime or rhythm of a poem.
Here is one way a lesson might be planned for a group to enjoy to-
gether a humorous story:
The story used in "The Pan of Custard," page 187, "Trips to Take."
The teacher's purposes in this story might be:
1. To further the child's experience in enjoying and appreciating
a funny story.
2. To further the child's desire to share a story with a group, thus
furthering his social adaptation.
3. To increase his love for reading.
4. To improve his reading skills.
The pupil's purpose: To enjoy a humorous story.
Motivation :
"The Pan of Custard" is the second story about Waddle. The child
will wish to continue reading about the little duck. Or the pictures may
stimulate a desire to read. (There is one of a little yellow duck in a mud
puddle; another of the same little duck in a pan of custard.) Or the
stimulus may be created by the teacher. She might do this by planning
the story to be read on a rainy day and reciting the poem, "Who Likes
the Rain?" *
Procedure :
After, motives have been established for reading the story, the teacher
should anticipate the meaning and vocabulary difficulties. Chief, fountain,
custard, comfortable, are words that probably should be talked about until
the child has established meanings for them. Then the printed symbol for
them should be presented to him in context.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 81
After the difficulties have been cleared up, the child should be allowed
to read the whole story silently. To aid him in organizing the story, and
simplifying his problem of comprehension, the teacher might place on the
board the main parts of the story, which tell about
Waddle and the mud puddle.
Waddle's walk.
Waddle and the custard.
Before silent reading, the standards of silent reading should be em-
phasized; that is, the teacher should remind the pupil to (1) use his eyes
rather than his lips; (2) make his eyes run smoothly across the lines, and
(3) take in large eye-fulls. It might also be well to remind him of the
different modes of attacking the new words; such as to (1) look at the
whole word and try to see what it is, (2) see if any part of the word is an
old friend, (3) use initial sound plus context, (4) skip over the word, and
try to think what it means by reading the remainder of the line, and (5)
ask for help.
After the silent reading, the child is ready to read orally and enjoy
the story with others.
b. To enjoy a poem as a group is a worthwhile purpose in oral read-
ing, because the child enjoys the music of rimes and the nonsense of jingles.
Poetry, if presented in the right manner not only adds to his reading
pleasure — it contributes toward the development of good taste in literature.
Some of it is written to add to his fanciful imagination; some to add to
his appreciation of the world about him and the people with whom he
comes in contact. The child should be given an opportunity to enjoy both
types of poetry.
Since poetry has a rightful place in a reading program, a lesson in
poetry for the group to enjoy together should be planned occasionally.
The lesson should be arranged and executed with care. Some of the criteria
found helpful in preparing a lesson in poetry are:
1. Create a receptive mood by providing the background.
2. Read the poem without pause or comment.
3. Discuss word meanings and allusions just enough to heighten
interest.
4. Encourage the pupil to select parts liked best, to memorize de-
sirable parts, to read selections aloud to class or group.
5. Encourage pupil -to bring other selections which appeal to him.
6. Encourage creative effort through use of patterns.
7. Encourage wide reading suited to his reading level.
A poem for the group to enjoy as a reading lesson may be planned
profitable as the basis for an appreciation lesson. When this is done, the
criteria for a lesson in poetry should be combined with those for an
appreciation lesson. Worth while steps in the teaching of poetry have
already been given. Questions to help in the evaluation of an appreciation
lesson are suggested by Mossman:
1. Is the child coming in contact with the beautiful under conditions
that are so satisfying that he wants more?
2. Is the child learning through association with those who like the
beautiful?
3. Are the details, used by the artist to give embodiment to his
ideas, meaningful to the child?
4. Is the child learning technique as a means rather than an end?
5. Is provision made for some creative work?
82 Course of Study for the
A plan that might suggest one way of presenting an appreciation les-
son in poetry is here outlined:
The poem used is "My Policeman," from Trips to Take, page 114. The
same poem is also in The Open Door, page 109.
Motivation:
Probably no grown-up friend the child has is of more natural interest
to him than the policeman. The uniform with its bright buttons, the ease
with which the policeman directs traffic, his authority under all circum-
stances — in the child's mind — all appeal to his sense of wonder and awe,
even his curiosity. Hence the pictures, showing the theme of the poem,
will provide a motive for reading. The name of the poem — "My Police-
man" — with a few well-chosen questions from the teacher should further
provide the child with sufficient motive to read the poem. If the teacher
suggests that this is a good poem to use in a safety program for assembly,
still more interest will be aroused.
The child's purposes in reading the poem then, will be:
1. To learn more about a grown-up friend.
2. To enjoy the rime of an interesting poem.
3. To read the poem to see if he thinks it will be suitable for a
school program. Added to these purposes, the teacher's objectives
will be to develop a desirable attitude toward a helpful friend,
to stimulate enjoyment of the rime and rhythm of a poem, and
to increase power in oral reading.
Procedure :
Earlier in the day the difficult words should be presented to the child.
Silver, buttons, taxis, though, square, and errand may need special at
tention. The meaning of square and errand may have to be explained.
(See manuals for procedures in teaching these words.)
When the group has assembled about the table to read the poem, the
child should be allowed to discuss freely how the policeman has helped
him at various times, to tell about some policeman that he sees regularly
and feels that he knows well, to list many ways in which a policeman
can be a friend to a child or grown-up person, and to talk of ways the
child may help the policeman — by watching the signals, being obedient.
and so forth.
The teacher should then read the entire poem to the child, putting as
much expression in her voice and manner as possible. After this reading,
the separate stanzas may be read and discussed individually. Each presents
a word picture and with a little guidance the child will see this. The first
stanza tells of the policeman at his post, "always standing there," and of
his fine appearance in uniform with shining silver buttons. The second
presents a word picture of carts and taxis doing just what he says — even
the noisy little errand boy passing him with no noise. The third one tells
of a little boy's feeling of friendliness toward him, even if he is "so very
small" compared to the policeman.
The child may be asked to read the lines he likes best, and to tell why
he likes them; to find the riming words and to list them; to find lines
which mean the same as:
1. The little boys pass him quietly.
2. The traffic does as he says.
3. I am not afraid of him; to repeat any of the poem that he re-
members; to choose a good reader to read the whole poem; and
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 83
to close his eyes and see the pictures of "My Policeman" as
another child reads aloud.
Some related activities that might deepen the child's appreciation for
his friend, the policeman, and at the same time give him opportunities
to express this appreciation in creative effort, are: to plan safety games
to play in the school and suggestions, to make booklets illustrating safety
rules (the booklet might be called "My Policeman"). The best booklet
might be selected for a gift to the policeman nearest the school.
An oral lesson for the group to gain and share information is at times
profitable. (See Reading Manuals for an illustrative lesson.)
Audience Reading:
Oral reading to give pleasure to an audience is a purpose for oral
reading that appeals to the primary child. Because of his liking an audi-
ence for his reading, the teacher should give him many opportunities to
read to an audience.
A typical oral reading lesson planned for an audience may include, be-
sides a definite motive for reading, assignment of the parts; silent prepa-
ration, with the teacher's aid when needed; oral reading, if necessary, also
with the teacher's aid; a rehearsal; and then reading to the audience.
The lesson here outlined is one way a lesson for giving pleasure to an
audience may be planned.
The story to be used is "The House With a Star Inside," The Open
Door, page 76.
Motivation:
This story, a story about a little girl and an interesting riddle, fol-
lows a page of several simple Mother Goose riddles. If the child has be-
come interested in riddles by studying these, by guessing the answers, and
by asking members of the class riddles of his own, he may suggest read-
ing or dramatizing this story for another group, possibly another second
grade.
Procedure :
After the audience has been decided upon, the child should decide just
how the selection or story is to be presented — in pantomime or drama-
tization, if one child is to read all the story or different children take
different parts, if the whole story is to be used or the speaking parts
only.
This particular story is a good one for only the speaking parts to be
used. The teacher may suggest this, or the child himself. The speaking
parts are : a little girl, Anne, her mother, a carpenter, a postman, a farmer.
The class should be allowed to choose the children to take the parts of the
different characters. After the choices have been made, the characters
study the whole story silently, and are told to pay particular attention to
their own parts. The other members of the class may be interested in
studying the story if the teacher suggests that they do so in order to be
able to offer suggestions when the characters rehearse.
The teacher should give help when it is asked for. The child may not
know a certain word, he may not know the meaning of a section; he may
ask to be allowed to read his part orally in order to get the intended ex-
84 Course of Study for the
pression in his reading before the rehearsal. In any case the teacher
should give her aid willingly.
After a thorough preparation by the individual characters, a rehearsal
before the group for their suggestions should follow. The standards for
audience reading should be called attention to, and during the rehearsal,
any member of the class should be allowed to make suggestions that he
thinks should improve the reading.
Several rehearsals may be necessary before the story can be read to
another group.
A lesson planned to give information to an audience should probably
follow somewhat the foregoing outline. "Stop, Look, Listen," a selection
in Trips to Take, page 112, teaching some of the safety facts a child should
know, is a good selection to use in giving information to others.
Motivation:
Since safety is of concern to the whole school, this selection might be
given in an assembly program.
Procedure :
There are six short paragraphs in "Stop, Look, Listen," and the group
may choose six good readers to prepare and read the selection. Then should
follow silent and oral reading for practice, and then the rehearsal until
the child meets the oral reading standards to his own satisfaction. Interest
in the reading for assembly might be further stimulated by the child's
making posters to illustrate the six safety rules.
Oral reading for practice:
The three main purposes for which practice reading is needed include
silent reading and oral reading. These purposes are:
1. To develop power as a reader,
2. To make desirable habits permanent.
3. To eliminate or correct undesirable habits.
Some oral reading for practice in the fundamental reading habits and
skills is necessary in the second and third grades. For the pupil with pro-
nounced deficiencies in oral reading, some time each day should be devoted
to improving his weaknesses. Occasionally tests should be given each
member of a class to determine the accomplishments and needs in accurate
recognition, in span of recognition, and in the grasp of meaning. Then
drill in reading situations planned definitely to improve the reading in
connection with the material used in the reading period. Material to be
read at sight, and material related to other reading activities, should be
used when special drill and practice is given for eliminating the difficulties.
The deficiencies in oral reading that are typical of those occurring in
the second and third grades and need special practice in correcting are:
Non-recognition of words.
Insertion of words.
Omission of words.
Repetition of words.
Improper phrasing.
Reading word by word — short span of recognition.
Lack of expression.
Calling words without getting meaning.
Practice in the accurate recognition of words is an important part of
drill work in reading. The time devoted to it should be determined by the
child's needs.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 85
Insertion of words, if they do not change the meaning of the passage,
should not be of great concern to the teacher. The child is probably get-
ting the story in "large eye-fulls" with little attention to individual words.
To have him re-read a passage because he adds relevant words may have
an undesirable effect — cause him to pay too much attention to each word.
The same is true of omission of words. Omitting unimportant words
is not serious; but if the meaning of the sentence is changed, the child is
probably not getting the meaning. He should then be given practice in
accurate reading — that is, be held responsible for meaning — and in careful
word analysis.
Repetition of words is a result of short span of recognition and at-
tention most probably. It may be caused by the child's lack of assurance
in recognizing the words. He should be given much opportunity to express
thoughts in oral conversation. Dramatization with particular attention
to expression should help.
Practice in proper phrasing might be given by the teacher's using the
phrases that occur in the child's reading in her own conversation, by
arranging them in other reading situations, by insisting on the child's
reading as if he were talking, by helping the child express his own
thoughts, and by supplying words when he is indefinite or hazy in ex-
pressing them.
Reading in thought-units rather than word by word is a phase of the
reading act that needs a great deal of practice. Material in which the
child is interested, and which is easy enough for the individual words not
to give difficulty, should be used for this practice.
Lack of expression may be due to an indifferent attitude; or it may
result from the child's failure to get the thought. Practice in conversation
about things in which the child is interested may help him add expression
to his reading. Dramatization may aid. Emphasis first on thought and
then on expressing the thought in a meaningful manner is probably the
most natural way of developing expression that will carry over to the
reading situation when the similarity is called to the attention of the
child.
Practice to improve the quality of oral reading should be planned with
the utmost care. If drill is given aimlessly without securing the child's
interest or cooperation, he will profit by it very little. In general, these
suggestions should be observed in all practice work with reading: (1) en-
list the child's conscious efforts to improve, (2) bring about situations that
make it possible for the child to experience success, (3) prepare for prac-
tice in natural reading situations, as nearly as possible, (4) see that
further needs arise for the use of the particular skill practiced upon,
(5) distribute properly the time given to practice, (6) show improvement
by tangible means, and (7) if flash-card drills are used, correct ways of
using them should be observed.
SILENT READING IN THE SECOND AND THIRD GRADES
While oral reading may have the vantage point in primary reading,
silent reading, too, is useful. Some of the reasons for giving the silent
reading lesson a place in the reading program of a second and a third
grade are these:
86 Course of Study for the
Silent reading is important from the standpoint of economy of the
reader's time. Oral reading limits the rate of reading. The number of
words that the reader is able to recognize and speak determines largely
his rate of oral reading.
Silent reading is not limited to this manner; the unit of recognition in
silent reading may be a phrase or even a short sentence. The rate of
effective oral reading soon reaches its maturity from its very nature; the
rate of silent reading is limited only by the physical make-up of the eye
and the mental capacity of the reader. Rate of reading different types
of material orally remains about constant; rate of reading different kinds
of material silently varies greatly. Regardless of the purpose for oral
reading, its rate is relatively the same; the purpose in silent reading is
a large factor in determining its speed.
Silent reading is important because it is the type of reading that the
adult engages in largely. This is a further reason the primary grades
should introduce the child to silent reading activities, and give him prac-
tice in acquiring habits and skills that make for efficient silent reading.
"By the time the pupil reaches the third grade, his ability to pronounce
words oftentimes exceeds his ability to interpret meanings." Cultivation
of habits of intelligent interpretation is the remedy. Since silent reading
is more conducive to thought-getting than is oral reading, silent reading
is probably better adapted to teaching the child to interpret what he reads
than oral reading.
Intelligent silent reading is "an indispensable means of extending ex-
perience and of stimulating the thinking powers of boys and girls." Ade-
quate silent reading ability does not develop incidentally. It is a matter
of specific and systematic instruction. If oral reading is engaged in to
the exclusion of silent reading, it is reasonable to suppose that the funda-
mental reading habits will become fixed at the rate and the quality required
in oral reading, and the actual possibilities of developing effective silenl
reading habits will remain unsuspected by the individual.
Since silent reading habits and skills should be developed, the early
elementary grades should begin to work for their adequate formation and
use. This is more important than ever when it is realized that the funda-
mental reading habits, which are essential to effective reading, are fixed
relatively by the time the average individual progresses beyond the pri-
mary grades.
a. Goals to be Achieved
Some of the pertinent conclusions regarding the teaching of silent
reading, which are basic to the statement of the goals, are these:
1. That intelligent interpretation is even more important in effective
reading than the development of the mechanics of reading.
2. That the fundamental reading habits — accurate recognition,
rapid recognition, wide span of recognition, rhythmical eye prog-
ress along the lines, and accurate return sweeps — should be de-
veloped to the point that they function so mechanically that the
child can devote all his energy toward interpreting what he is
reading.
3. That training for comprehension and training for mastery of the
mechanics should be for the development of a unified project —
"reading adaptation."
4. That speed should not be encouraged to the point that interpre-
tation is hindered.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 87
5. That speed is relative, rate depending upon the type of material
read and the purpose for reading.
6. That the work will be more productive if the child has the atti-
tude that reading is a fundamental activity leading to desirable
interests, tastes, and habits; that books are a treasure house, that
reading has various purposes, the main purposes being for infor-
mation and pleasure.
The goals, then, generally speaking, to work for in silent reading are:
1. To develop in the child an attitude toward reading that reading-
answers a need, that it opens up unlimited treasures, that it may
be done for various purposes — that one may lose one's self in an
imaginary fairy land, or one may learn how to care for pets,
one may learn how boys and girls in other lands live — an atti-
tude of dependence upon reading for certain pleasures and in-
formation.
2. To give him a mastery of mechanics suited to the second grade
level of capacity, a mastery of mechanics regarding eye-move-
ment habits, and the proper reactions to word forms.
3. Intelligent interpretation of reading material, regardless of the
type of material, or the purpose for which it is read.
b. Attaining the Goals
The attitudes, habits, and skills to be attained in silent reading will
not develop incidentally. The teacher must plan specifically for their
acquisition, and give adequate opportunity for their practice.
Regarding the development of these attitudes, habits, and skills, it is
probably safe to say that they should seldom be worked for in isolation.
Reading efficiency depends upon all of them, and training that develops
them as a unit is the most promising in results. This does not mean that
lessons planned for the development of special phases should not be given,
but it does imply that practice for the skills should be meaningful to the
child in terms of the total reading process.
Developing the proper attitude toward books and reading can be at-
tained only through using books successfully. If interest is conditioned
by success, then the child should learn to have the desired attitude toward
books through the proper use of them. If they fill a real need, if they
answer questions he wishes to know, the child will come to have a feeling
of friendliness toward reading.
It would scarcely be possible to train a child to know and to appreciate
the worth of books without developing his abilities to get thought from
the printed page — and to get thought he must have the tools for reading.
Consequently, an attitude of appreciation for reading materials must be
developed along with the mechanics of reading and the abilities to interpret.
Some of the methods a teacher might employ to help create the proper
attitude toward reading are:
Incidental reference to certain books or stories.
Planning projects that involve certain information that can be ob-
tained from books.
. * Having reading material easily accessible and encouraging the child
to read at will.
Giving practice in the different kinds of reading the child needs;
such as skimming, reading for the main idea, reading for specific
information, and reading for fun.
Mechanics of reading, here referring to the eye-movement habits and
word control, should be developed in situations as nearly like the natural
reading situations as possible. Furnishing an abundance of easy and
88 Course of Study for the
interesting supplementary books is an intrinsic means of aiding the de-
velopment. Material to which the child gives undivided attention is the
sort best adapted to the formation of rhythmical eye-movements.
In general, it might be said that the best conditions for the formation
of proper eye-movements are present, if,
The child is reading silently.
The child is reading material simple in context and in vocabulary.
The child is interested in the story.
The child is not in an apprehensive attitude or reading for ulterior
motives.
Provision for practice in silent reading may be given by:
a. Directing the child's attention to interesting reading.
b. Arousing a desire to read by telling a part of a story.
c. Providing a library table in the room.
d. Encouraging the reading in order to solve some class problem.
e. Encouraging the child to read for pleasure.
f. Keeping a written list of books read.
While natural situations are recommended as best for the development
of the mechanics of reading, occasionally special drill will be necessary for
improying such phases of reading, as rate in reading and word recognition.
When a child's general rate of reading is slow, it may prove of worth
to the teacher to know how the speed of his reading compares with the
normal. For this reason, Table I is given to show the rates for silent
reading.
TABLE I— Showing Rates for Silent Reading-
School Grade I II HI
Average Number of Words per Minute SO 90 138
It is quite easy to test the child for rate of reading, and the knowledge
that the teacher gains from it is certainly worth the time.
The following suggestions may be helpful in increasing speed:
a. Using flash-cards.
b. Limiting the amount of time allowed for reading particular
selections.
c. Using individual and class speed charts to show improvements.
d. Drilling on phrases and short sentences in order to increase the
span of recognition.
e. Re-reading material for the expressed purpose of increasing the
rate.
f. Skimming rapidly.
If exercises of this sort fail to increase the child's rate of reading, the
teacher should get some definite information as to his eye-movement habits.
Observing the eye movements closely will give to the teacher valuable
information of this nature. When the observation reveals the particular
eye-movement habits that are faulty, the teacher should plan specifically
for their correction.
The span of recognition, measured inversely by the number of fixations
per line, may be increased by (a) giving the child very easy and interesting
material to read under time pressure; (b) helping him see word group-
ings, and read in word groups and phrases; increasing gradually the
amount of material on flash-cards, and not increasing the exposure time.
The length of the fixation pause may be decreased by exposing more
and more rapidly the drill cards; limiting the reading time, and giving
much easy material to the child to read.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 89
The number of regressive movements may be decreased by: (a) the
rapid flash of long-short exposure cards; (b) the use of material so well
known that regressive movements are not necessary; and (c) the develop-
ment of independence in word recognition.
Ordinarily when the child comes to the second grade his eyes will have
been trained to make the return sweeps from the end of one line to the
right spot to begin the next. If he needs special training in this, chart
and blackboard work are considered good, the teacher making the sweeps
with the pointer to accustom the child's eyes to sweep rhythmically. Also
it may help to give him typed or printed material with a wide space — one
inch — between the lines, and instruct him to let his eyes move quickly
along each line and swing from the end to the beginning of the next with-
out stopping to look at any of the words.
Decreasing vocalization may help the child improve his rate of read-
ing. Let him know that lip reading limits his speed of reading, and gain
his cooperation in eliminating it.
Failure to recognize words may account for slow rate of reading. If
the child does not know the printed symbols, his eyes cannot move with
the desired rhythm and speed across the lines. He should be given syste-
matic training in recognizing words — both those he has met before and
should remember, and those that are new to him.
Some of the books on the adopted list that are especially suited to
training for speed in reading — that is, books that are easy as to material,
and do not stress the thought element in reading — are: In Animal Land,
Pet Pony, Story Folk, Topsy Turvy Tales.
Intelligent interpretation is a phase of reading that should be given
attention from the first day of school. The development of mechanics is
necessary, but only so far as it aids the child to get thought from the
page. While the mechanical side of reading is an important foundation
for intelligent interpretation, it is never the end to be sought for its own
sake. Thought-getting is the end.
Since the ability of the child to pronounce words exceeds his ability to
comprehend meanings by the time he reaches the third grade — then train-
ing for intelligent interpretation must be given along with training to pro-
nounce words. Interpretation should be a natural outgrowth of various
reading situations. Some of the situations useful in training the child
to get thought from his reading are:
a. Reading to find suitable parts of a story to read to others.
b. Reading so as to draw the picture described.
c. Reading directions for a game, an errand, construction work.
d. Reading in order to dramatize.
. e. Organizing competitive reading clubs.
f. Improving ability to concentrate under pressure of time control.
g. Flashing cards for answers.
h. Reading a paragraph to discover all of the different items men-
tioned.
i. Reading for the main thought.
j. Dividing a long story into several short stories, and giving sub-
titles.
Special techniques that seem to have been productive in training the
child to interpret and might be used with second and third grades children
are:
90 Course of Study for the
a. Using silent-reading poster lessons based on experience.
b. Directing and checking carefully individual seatwork.
c. Emphasizing silent reading for meaning in every recitation.
d. Devising silent reading games in matching cards, completing sen-
tences, following directions.
e. Giving motivated drill in — silent reading, involving practice ex-
ercises based on "Action Cards," "Language Response Cards,"
"Pretense Cards," and "One Word Response Cards."
Some of the books on the suggested supplementary list that seem to
be suited for giving special training in intelligent interpretation are: Red
Feather, Baby Animals, New Stories, The Study Readers.
c. Type Lessons in Silent Reading
Silent reading is carried on for various purposes, and the child should
be trained in reading for different purposes. The different sorts of silent-
reading lessons that might be profitable in the second and third grades
are:
1. The lesson for enjoyment, based on
a. Fanciful material
b. Informational-narrative material
2. The work-type lesson
a. To gain exact information
b. For practice in careful silent reading
These types of lessons might be broken up into a number of further
types. Also, there is overlapping — for instance, the reader's attitude de-
termines largely the amount of pleasure his reading affords — regardless
of the type of material he is reading. A child will some times get as much
real enjoyment from work-type reading as from fanciful. Reading for
exact information, when that information is of interest to the child, will
afford pleasure. But the child should be taught that different types of
reading require different rates of speed and different degrees of concen-
tration; and he should be given practice in acquiring the different methods
of effective silent reading.
The Lesson for Enjoyment
1. In the second and third grades much of the silent reading material
should be of the story type. Material that can be read easily, without an
attitude of evaluation or critical interpretation, tends to develop rhythmical
eye movements that is impossible with reading which stresses the thought-
element. The following outline for a lesson of this kind may help the
teacher in planning the silent reading lesson where enjoyment of a fanciful
story is the paramount purpose.
The story used is "A Brave Little Mother," The Open Door, page 66.
Purpose :
The teacher's purpose is to train for correct silent reading habits with
material that is for enjoyment; that is, she wishes to train for getting the
main ideas and meaning from the selection, and to encourage free expres-
sion of the thoughts that the reading stimulates.
Procedure :
The difficult words in the story should be introduced earlier in the day,
but in a manner that leaves the content of the story new for the actual
reading. The words that should be taught are thief, whom, listened. The
meaning of sivish, timid, brave may need some emphasis.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 91
The child is interested usually in rabbit stories, and when the teacher
tells him that this story is about a baby rabbit named Raggylug and that
it is a story that is new to him, he will probably wish to read it at once.
He should be encouraged to read the story through from beginning to end
without stopping. After the reading, the child should be allowed to talk
freely of the story just read — without any analytical discussion by the
teacher — as long as he shows constructive thinking and makes spontaneous
comments.
2. There is no valid reason why fanciful stories should be in the child's
reading material to the point of excluding informational selections. Stories
involving information of the world about, are coming to have a place in
the reading. And rightfully so; for material concerning matters which
the child meets daily — the milkman, the postman, the policeman — is useful
in acquainting him with his surroundings, and has an appeal that does
not have to be stimulated artificially. Too, material of the informational
type is usually as easy for the child to read as fanciful material; for the
vocabulary is apt to include, for the most part, words that the child is
familiar with in his experience. If a word has personal-experience mean-
ing for a child, it will be easier for him to connect the written symbol with
the meaning than it will be if the experience is lacking. It may be con-
cluded then that informational reading of the narrative type may be used
without impeding the formation of correct eye habits.
A lesson planned to illustrate the silent reading lesson based on an
informational-narrative story is given here:
The story used is "At the Seashore," Trips to Take, page 23.
Purposes :
a. To help create a sense of the thought divisions in a story. (The
selection is divided into parts with subtitles, which helps the
child organize units of thought.)
b. To widen the child's vicarious experience.
c. To encourage reading of material that is informational.
d. To train for thought-getting with a story that is to be read for
enjoyment and information at the same time.
Procedure: The child may be asked to tell the class where he spent
his vacation, what he did and what he saw. If some child has been to the
seashore and tells the group about it, an adequate interest for reading the
story will be aroused. Interest may be stimulated further by pictures,
shells, and seaweed.
Time should be allowed for reading the whole story, and afterwards
for discussing freely the thoughts stimulated by the reading.
3. A lesson planned to illustrate the recreatory type of reading for the
third grade. The story used is "The Picnic Basket" from The Treasure
Box, page 168.
Purposes: To increase the love of reading a humorous selection and
the desire to share it with others ; to further develop the ability to organize
thought.
Procedure :
Preparation. In an informal conversation, the children may talk about
the good times they have had at picnics, the fun they had going to the
picnic, amusing things that happened at the picnic, the lunch, etc.
92 Course of Study for the
From the title of the story and the picture on page 169, they conclude
naturally that it must be the picnic basket into which the little boy is
peeping. The teacher should tell them this little boy's name. The children
will enjoy saying this funny name. The teacher and children will use the
name Andrewshek as they discuss the picture further.
The pupils will doubtless wonder whose big umbrella is on the table.
This is the time to introduce the name of Auntie Katushka and familiarize
the children with it. The class concludes that these two, Andrewshek and
Auntie Katushka are going to a picnic.
Motivation: To find out what happens at the picnic will perhaps be
the motivating thought in the children's minds and may be expressed by
them or stated by the teacher. If the class is advanced sufficiently, the
entire story may first be read silently without any additional motivation
for each section. There is usually a group in every class that cannot read
a long story in the time given and who need more help. The slower group
should read the story in sections. The headings of each part suggest the
main interest in that section. The following queries may arise as the
various sections are approached:
Part I — How did Andrewshek and Auntie Katushka get ready to go
to the picnic?
Part II — How did it happen that the picnic basket floated away?
Part III — How was the basket saved?
Reading: Silent reading in a between class period, oral reading in class.
Children's responses: After the silent preparation the class may be
divided into three groups. Each group may read orally one part of the
story. The pupils find the parts of the story that the pictures on pages
169 and 174 best illustrate.
Outcomes :
Appreciation of a happy story.
Improvement in oral reading.
Extensive reading encouraged.
Related activities: The pupils plan a dramatization and play the story
for the second-grade children or prepare to entertain their mothers with
the dramatization at school. The suggestions following the story will be
helpful to the class in planning their play. The teacher should help the
children associate the story with the author by showing the class a copy
of "Poppy Seed Cakes" by Margery Clark, and encouraging them to read
other stories in this book.
Vocabulary development:
Vocabulary work, especially through reading and discussion, should
continue to receive careful attention in the second and third grades.
See Second and Third Grade Manual for the Story and Study Readers
for the following:
1. How to teach the meaning of vocabulary, pp. 12-13.
2. How to teach recognition of words, pp. 12-16.
3. Vocabulary Tests, for the Second Reader, pp. 16-20; for the
Third Reader, pp. 23-27.
The Work-Type Lesson
While by far the majority of the silent reading in the second and third
grades should be of the narrative type, occasionally a lesson should be
designed to give the child practice in reading selections for exact infor-
Elementary Schools op North Carolina 93
mation. This can be justified on the grounds that correct study habits
involve reading of this sort, and practice is necessary to acquire the right
habits. Also as an adult the child will need to know how to read for
detailed and exact information. With wise planning the teacher can bring
about situations that will induce the child to read material of this sort
to meet a special need that he feels.
The lesson plan here given shows a possible way of proceeding with, a
lesson where the object is to give practice in reading a selection for exact
information.
The story used is "An Indian Wigwam," Trips to Take, page 75.
Purpose :
To develop the ability to read carefully for exact information.
To train the child to verify conclusions by re-reading.
To train the child to reproduce the facts he has gained, orally and
through hand-work.
Procedure: Indian life is always interesting to the second grade child.
He plays Indians, he builds wigwams, and he makes tomahawks of his
own accord. Consequently, at the first suggestion of an Indian project —
possibly a sand table scene, building a wigwam in a corner of the room, or
planning a dramatization of an Indian story— he will be enthusiastic. And
he will be willing to read intensively or extensively to aid in carrying out
his project.
Careful silent reading should follow, and then a discussion of the facts
learned. When any differences arise as to the facts read, or the particular
meaning of a sentence, the teacher should ask the child to re-read to check
his idea. Later when the wigwam is being built according to the infor-
mation learned, the child should be encouraged to check his procedure care-
fully by the directions.
GENERAL LESSON PROCEDURE IN SECOND AND THIRD GRADES
A good general plan to follow in conducting reading lessons is as
follows :
Introduction
a. Connect story with child's experience by picture, object, anecdote,
or conversation.
b. Get children to assemble some of their ideas on the topic by
questions and discussion.
c. Give children a main purpose for reading the material.
Vocabulary: Develop in context a few words and phrases that are
likely to be difficult and present them on blackboard. Take care not to
"give away" content or plot of story.
Silent and possibly a little oral reading by class, directed by questions.
a. Procedure — Ask questions which require children to read a sentence,
paragraph or longer unit.
b. Types of questions to ask —
1. Questions which call for the finding of one, two, or three facts
that are stated in the text.
2. Questions which call for using the facts to infer something which
is not stated in the text, as: "Which was the 'safest' way the
children played?" (The book does not tell which was the safest
way; the children have to read the facts and judge in the light
of experience which was the safest way.)
94 Course of Study for the
3. Questions which call for comparison: "In what way was the
barn swallow's home safer than the meadow-lark's?"
4. Questions which call for selecting the main idea: "What would
be a good title for this paragraph?"
5. Oral reading, if necessary; e. g., "Read the part that proves . . ."
Additional check-up on the material for several particular kinds of
comprehension, such as (a) ability to follow directions, (b) ability to get
meaning from simple facts, (c) ability to make inferences, (d) ability to
select main idea, and (e) ability to select from a number of facts those
pertinent to a question or statement. Any one of the five types of tests,
or drawing, may be used.
Review of vocabulary for fixing word forms and meaning in context.
Leads to further activity:
a. Further reading of stories, information, poems, in same field or
related fields.
b. Excursions, trips and visits.
c. Home and classroom constructive activities.
FREE READING IN THE SECOND AND THIRD GRADES
The atmosphere of a school room has much to do with whether or not
a child will like school. Usually if a child likes school he will learn; and
conversely, if he learns, that is, is successful, he will like school. The
schoolroom should be full of interesting things: "and much of the materials
in the room should create a working atmosphere and some of them should
be of such nature as to develop a need for a knowledge of reading." One
means for leading the child to want to read is to have a "library" in the
room.
"The classroom library promotes that absorption in the book which
marks the development of a thoughtful reading attitude. With a few good
books, an enthusiastic teacher will create a genuine literary atmosphere."
Many second and third grade pupils come from homes where the
pleasure to be found in books is not known. To give him a place to read,
a time to read, and a collection of attractive reading material may be
means of opening up to him an interest that will make his entire life
broader and happier. This reason alone would justify the library; and
when one adds to it possible attainments in the reading abilities the library
can help to realize, the resourceful teacher will, if necessary, improvise a
classroom library.
Some of the habits and attitudes the teacher wishes the child to prac-
tice that the library may further, are:
Use of index.
Use of books as reference.
Hygienic use of books.
Turning pages properly.
Use of marker instead of turning down corners of leaves or turn-
ing book on its face.
Care in handling book so as not to tear the leaves.
Having clean hands v/hen reading a book.
An attitude of friendliness toward books.
A genuine love for reading.
The appreciation of good literature must be taught systematically. The
child should be surrounded with all the good books he can use. The library
corner, where good books bound attractively and illustrated are placed,
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 95
and where the child is free to go at certain times and read just as his
fancy dictates, is one of the best aids to teaching appreciations.
a. How a library corner can be arranged at a nominal expense.
The equipment for the library corner need not be expensive. A
table, chairs, bookcase and, of course, something to read are the mini-
mum in physical equipment. Some second grade rooms have libraries
planned and constructed almost entirely by the child himself — chairs
made from orange crates painted, a crude bookcase of shelves put in
a box but painted and curtained attractively; books and booklets, many
of them made by the child (pieces of gingham or left-overs from shade-
manufacturing plants make ideal booklet covers, and the children take
a great deal of pleasure in finding pictures and writing stories about
them). Besides the books the child has made himself, the teacher should
place on the shelves and table as many books, of a very easy nature, as
she can.
The reading corner can be made more attractive by allowing the
little girls to bring sewing equipment to school and make cushions for
the chairs, mats for the table, curtains for the bookcase, and even rag
rugs for the library. If the room has this attractive place that the
child has largely made and if free and recreational reading is en-
couraged by the teacher, the library can be of untold aid in creating
a need for learning to read, and a love for reading that are essential
if the child is to become an efficient reader.
b. On what basis to choose books for free reading.
"Children are themselves the final arbiters of what they read. They
are the ones who decide what shall live and what shall not live. An
adult may be satisfied if a book tells him something he wishes to know;
a child is satisfied only if the book carries along with its message, a
human interest and a decidedly imaginative quality . . ."
"There are certain elements in literature that children always de-
sire. The first is action; the second is human interest; and the third
is imaginative appeal. . . . They prefer direct discourse to indirect.
They like colorful descriptions, and names for everything."
For the six-and seven-year -old, the books he is to read himself
should be short, highly colorful, profusely illustrated, and fanciful.
The eight- and nine-year-old shows a decided interest in fairy tales.
Also an interest in real life begins to develop, in child-life in other
lands, and in stories of children in general. . . . Too, realistic animal
and nature stories have appeal.
But it should be said that in spite of the general age likes and dis-
likes, no hard and fast rules can be laid down; for there is variation
in children's interests. The classroom library should offer a wide range
of good reading.
c. The second grade library.
The library in the second grade should contain not only material
for the average second grade child; but also first grade material for
the retarded; and third grade material for the advanced. Therefore,
the suggested list is rather wide in interest appeal. It includes some
material difficult for the average second grade child', and some very
96 Course of Study for the
easy, to meet all needs. As a general rule, however, the books should
be rather easy. See suggested list of books for the second grade library
on page 38 of the section given to Basal, Supplementary and Library
Books. (The same principles stated here apply to the library for the
third grade.)
SUPPLEMENTARY READING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
The pupil needs to read in a variety of ways material that is suited to
his reading level. He needs to read different types of materials. He needs
to read for many purposes. If he reads only the textbook readers, his
reading situations are limited. For these reasons, supplementary reading
is an important part of a reading program.
Reading in the second and third grades should be of both types, work-
type and recreatory, and in as many different situations as possible. The
basal readers, the supplementary books, the library corner with its induce-
ments toward wide reading, seatwork, bulletin boards, charts, and flash-
cards, all are means of making the desirable reading habits automatic and
permanent. Greatest care should be exercised so as to make all supple-
mentary reading as nearly natural reading as is possible.
In using any device apart from the actual reading page, effort should
be made to use the device in such a way that its practice will carry over
to the ordinary reading situation.
a. Reading from the supplementary books.
The supplementary books on the present list for the second and
third grades range from first-grade level through third-grade difficulty.
They contain both recreational and work-type material — imaginary
stories of fairies, children, animals, and toys; and true stories and
selections planned to give the child correct information of the world
about him. This makes it possible for the teacher to meet the varying
reading abilities and interests of the child to a much greater extent
than she could if she uses the basic texts primarily. Basal books are
limited in capacity, since they must necessarily be eclectic in materials.
The supplementary books offer further selections of the different types
and should be used for wider reading along the lines that have proved
to be of interest to the child.
For the purpose of reading supplementary books, the class may be
divided into five or six separate groups. Primers, first readers, and
second readers should be used, also story books — each reading book
used by the group needing its particular type. These several groups,
arranged for supplementary reading lessons, might occupy different
parts of the room, and each group read during the same period. The
individual group might be in charge of a strong member to act as
leader, and the teacher might go from group to group to guide the
recitation. At times, the groups should read orally to the leader;
occasionally silently, guided by specific questions the teacher has placed
on the board. At certain times, a supplementary lesson might be
planned for the entire grade — sometimes an oral lesson, sometimes a
silent lesson, depending on the exact purpose of the lesson. At other
times, the child that has some special interest or need should be allowed
to use the supplementary books for his voluntary reading.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 97
Independent reading activities.
In the second and third grades, provision should be made for a
large amount of voluntary reading. Each day's program should allow
for a library hour — time in which the child is allowed to read almost
at will. The teacher should guide and encourage the free reading, but
should never dictate just what the child is to read during his free
reading time. She can encourage the reading in a number of different
ways— suggesting to the child where he can find selections along lines
in which he is interested, and having the books easily at hand; by
reading parts of desirable stories to stimulate sufficient interest for
the child to read the remainder of the selection or book independently;
having reports and discussions by the pupil of his outside reading;
having individual conferences to aid the pupil in finding reading mat-
ter suited to his interests; forming reading clubs; and getting the
child acquainted with the public library.
Seat work based on reading situations.
Seat work is one excellent way of meeting the child's individual
needs. If planned wisely, materials should furnish a means of growth
for the dull, bright, and average child, each at his own rate of develop-
ment.
Seat work merely to keep the child quiet is never justifiable. It
should be educative; it should relate vitally to the child's interests. It
should make allowance for individuality in choice and treatment that
is, to be varied in kind and amount. Exercises that are used should
be of increasing difficulty— begining with very simple. It should present
a problem to the child that he will work intently to solve. It should
require very little copying or writing. If the work is not self -checking,
the teacher should check it and present to the child the results.
1. Suggestions for seat work activities.
a. Answering yes and no questions. Example: Did the fox make
a tar baby to catch the squirrel?
b. Answering yes and no questions involving judgment. Example-
Do dogs have feathers?
c. Completion exercises. Example: After the child has read "The
Old Woman and the Fox," The Open Road, he is asked to com-
plete the sentence:
The old woman lived in the . . . One day she met a
d. Multiple choice exercises. Example: If you had a dog which
would you do?
Beat him Be kind to him Hurt him
e. Choosing a word to make a sentence true. Example: A robin is
a . . . — next, boat, boy, bird.
f. Matching phrases to make true sentences. Example:
1 - B1 ue is 1. ate a little pig
2. A cherry is 2. a color
3. A bad wolf 3. good to eat
g. Finding a word that answers a question. Example: After the
child has read "King Midas" he is asked to find in his book the
word that tells
Whom Midas loved more than all else.
What he loved more than all else.
What he loved next best.
Where Midas and his daughter lived.
98 Course of Study for the
h. Matching words of opposite meanings. Example: Words are
placed on the board or on mimeographed sheets arranged in
lines, and the child is directed to find in each line the word
meaning the opposite of the first, such as:
1. black blue white boy
2. yes gift day no
i. Matching words of like meanings. Example: The child is told
to find in each line the word that means the same thing that
the first one means.
1. happy good true glad
2. ocean waves sea beach
j. Adding words of the same kind. Example:
1. blue pink green
2. horn blocks tin soldier
k. Classifying words. Example: The child is given a list of words
such as:
green meat pie girl farmer blue
He is told to classify them as:
toys colors food people
1. Following directions for drawing, cutting, pasting, coloring. Ex-
ample: After the child has read "The Live Christmas Tree,"
The Open Door, the following directions might be placed on the
blackboard or on mimeographed sheets:
Draw a picture of the little fir tree as you think it looked in the
first of the story.
Draw a picture of the children dancing around it.
Color one little girl's dress blue.
Color one little boy's suit brown.
Draw and cut out what the children were carrying when they
came to the woods.
m. Construction work with clay, blocks, or paper. Example: After
reading "The Wise Snake," Open Road to Reading, the child is
asked to model with his clay: Something that walked on the
ground; something that flew in the air; something that swam in
the water.
n. Making booklets. When the child makes a booklet, it should be
an outgrowth of his experience. He should be allowed originality
in illustrating it. The illustrations may be made by drawing.
painting, coloring, paper cutting, pictures cut out of magazines
and pasted in. When possible, the reading matter in the book-
lets should be composed and written by the child himself.
Examples of subjects for booklets that are interesting to
second and third grade children are: Thanksgiving, Christmas,
Easter, Pets, Children of Different Lands, Mothers' Day, A Class
Diary (to record and illustrate the interesting happenings of the
group), A Poem Booklet (in which to place favorite poems,
illustrated appropriately) , A Word Booklet (a picture dictionary
made by the child himself, independently, or with the teacher's
aid. In the booklet, he places words alphabetically, or accord-
ing to kind, such as toys, foods, people, action words. The child
draws or finds and pastes in pictures to show the meanings of
the words).
d. Charts.
A type of chart useful in the second and third grades is the large
manila board on which is written or printed experiences the whole
class has shared or even experiences of one or more individuals. Ma-
terials placed on this board may furnish the basis for a very live read-
ing lesson — provided the story on the chart is an outgrowth of a real
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 99
experience the child has had. Excursions, pets, some happenings at
home or in the classroom, may be the subject. After the lesson, the
chart may be placed in some part of the room where the child can
read again this story he has helped to write.
Besides a reading value in charts of this type, there is also a social
use — the group planning together the record of an experience interest-
ing to all, sharing the experience in written form, and possibly passing
the charts on to be enjoyed by another grade.
The chart, too, may be a means of improving language habits. By
helping to construct experience stories, the child may become conscious:
(1) of the necessity of speaking to the point; (2) of introducing the
story in a strong way; (3) of making each sentence meaningful; and
(4) of closing the story in an interesting way.
See the manuals accompanying the readers for suggestions concern-
ing the use of chart materials which may be purchased from the
publishers.
Bulletin boards.
The bulletin board should be used to. stimulate interest in unknown
material as well as to add interest in the already known material.
When possible, it is suggested that two bulletin boards be used in the
second and third grade rooms. One for the purpose of bringing the
child in contact with new material that will have an appeal for him;
the other to be used for posting material that the child wishes to see
on the board. The first may contain incidental reading matter that the
teacher uses to attract the child's attention— an announcement as to
the day's work or activities that are to be undertaken or are being
engaged in, statements as to class attendance, assembly programs, and
pictures with appropriate sentences relating to the schoolroom activi-
ties; the second to be used for posting the child's own work or material
that he wishes other members of the class to share — poems he reads
and likes, original poems, a sentence or two telling of a personal ex-
perience, a group composition about a group experience, cut out pic-
tures brought from home, names of books and stories the child has
enjoyed, specimens of good writing, seat work exercises well done.
The bulletin board may be made of cork board, framed. Less ex-
pensive boards might be constructed from beaverboard or plaster board
covered with brown or green burlap. Even brown wrapping paper
serves as an adequate covering. In size, the boards should be thirty-
six inches by seventy-two inches.
Flash-cards.
The teacher should see that her drills with flash-cards are not a
waste of time or positively harmful. Certain of the established criteria
for using the cards are:
1. Rapid exposure exercises are to be used to develop better eye-
movements, to call attention to the necessity to read for thought
to increase speed and to decrease lip-movement — not for practice
for the sake of practice.
2. Drill with flash-cards should conform to the best known prin-
ciples for drill and practice work.
8 ' \he teacher should see that the habits and skills acquired by
the flash-card drills are carried over to the reading situation.
100 Course of Study for the
4. The word or phrase should be exposed for a shorter time than
is necessary to utter the particular word or phrase. In the
second grade, thirty cards should be run off in ten seconds.
5. Never increase the time of an exposure, though several exposures
may be necessary-
6. The cards are not intended for teaching new words. They are
to give the child practice in combining into thoughts words that
are already familiar to him. Hence, greatest care should be ex-
ercised in the vocabularies of the cards.
7. Even in work with cards for improvement of the fundamental
reading habits, intelligent interpretation should have a place.
The manuals accompanying the readers offer suggestions for various
types of exercises as examples of using flash-cards to increase the
child's speed in comprehension.
For the teacher feeling the need of flash-cards and wishing to con-
struct them herself, the following directions are given:
1. The cards should be four or five inches wide — cards of the same
set should be the same size because of neatness in appearance
and facility in handling.
2. White or manila board or oaktag may be used.
3. Show-card ink may be used. India ink is better but more ex-
pensive.
4. The lettering pen should be broad at the end. An eighth of an
inch is recommended.
5. The letters should be about three inches high, and an eighth of
an inch thick.
6. The phrases and sentences should be punctuated properly.
When using the cards for drill, each card should be held in a per-
pendicular position before the child for one-third of a second. If the
child does not get the phrase in that length of time, the exposure should
be repeated, the time of exposure not lengthened.
DESIRABLE LEVELS OF PUPIL ACHIEVEMENT FOR THE
SECOND AND THIRD GRADES
a. Attitudes.
1. A lively interest in reading for pleasure and information, as
shown by voluntary library reading, by the use of library table,
by bringing books to school, by taking home books to read, and
by reading during free periods.
2. A realization that books are useful as shown by the habit of
looking in them for information.
3. An increased desire to own books.
4. A deepened appreciation through reading — of the truth and
beauty found in the environment and in the stories and poems
on the grade level.
5. Attitudes that make for greater social adaptation.
6. An attitude that will lead to a permanent interest in reading.
b. Habits, knowledge and skills.
Knowledge — increased appropriately through reading and first-hand
experiences related to reading.
1. The habit of reading independently established thoroughly.
2. Reading silently without finger pointing, head or lip movement.
3. Inquiring about or seeking independently for reading materials
which relate to the activities upon which they are engaged.
4. Skill in the use of books; using table of contents, finding stories
by page numbers, and finding cross references.
5. Using standards in evaluating oral reading.
6. Habitually correct posture and consistent use of proper light in
reading.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 101
7. Ability to read orally at sight with ease and effective expression
varied material in natural situations, provided the material does
not contain word difficulties or difficulties of meaning.
8. Read more rapidly silently than orally. Pupils in second grade
should be able to read relatively easy passages of recreatory
reading material suitable to the grade at the rate of 100 to 125
words per minute; those in the third grade, 125 words to 150
words per minute.
9. Interpret effectively the reading material assigned in connection
with other school activities.
10. Select main ideas.
11. Follow directions in making objects in drawing and in playing
games.
12. Organize a sequence of events dramatizing a story.
13. Correlate reading with life.
c. Vocabulary.
1. Appropriately increased number of sight-words.
2. Ability to recognize meanings of new words through illustrations
and context clues.
3. Ability to recognize new words by the use of phonics.
FOURTH, FIFTH AND SIXTH GRADES
INTRODUCTION
This is the period of wide reading to extend and enrich experience and
to cultivate important reading attitudes, habits and tastes. Children
should enter the fourth grade, which is the beginning of this period, with
fundamental reading habits very well established. The two main prob-
lems which should receive emphasis in the fourth, fifth and sixth grades
are:
a. Perfecting the skill started in the previous grades, and bringing to
a high state of efficiency the speed and comprehension of silent
reading. By the time the pupils have reached the fourth grade
their rate of word recognition should have exceeded the rate of
pronunciation, hence an increasing amount of silent reading should
be used. Practically all oral reading should be with an audience
situation.
b. A second and very important part of the problem is to increase the
experience of the pupils by putting to use the habits and skills
obtained by extensive reading in varied fields. Whereas, in the
primary grades the pupils have been mainly "learning to read," in
the intermediate grades they should be "reading to learn."
Emphasis should be shifted in the word study to the enlargement of
meanings rather than to pronunciation. Dictionary work and an acquaint-
ance with meaning elements, such as the common prefixes and suffixes,
should be acquired. Pronunciations may now be gotten from the dictionary
by the help of diacritical marks.
Study habits and ability to recognize and to use organization should
receive more attention. Greater emphasis should be placed on the spe-
cific reading habits involved in reading different types of material, such
as geography, arithmetic, history, science, fiction, etc.
Since much more of the work in these grades should be silent reading
for content and experience, there should be greater opportunity for indi-
vidual reading. Small sets (five or ten books) of several kinds of books
should be provided. In oral reading, provision should be made for the
audience situation. The children at this age are developing a group con-
102 Course of Study for the
sciousness, and oral reading has a social value. It also has a large value in
developing appreciation.
OBJECTIVES
a. General
1. To provide rich and varied experience in all fields of thought and
activity for which the child is prepared.
2. To provide the child with the tools for further independent study-
ability to locate, select and interpret materials for problem solution;
ability to utilize appropriate skills and attitudes for a variety of
purposes.
3. To improve habits of recognition in both oral and silent reading.
This includes the development of greater speed, accuracy, word in-
dependence, and the total elimination of poor fundamental habits.
4. To continue the development of interest in entertaining, instructive
and worthwhile reading.
b. Specific Objectives for This Period by Grades
Fourth Grade:
1. Attitudes
a. Increased interest in and desire to read books, as evidenced
by regular borrowing of books from school and public library.
b. Realization that books are useful; frequent reference to books
to answer or to carry on activities.
c. Willingness to spend a part of savings on books.
2. Skills, habits, knowledge
a. Thought-getting
Ability to follow, without hesitation, continuity of thought
in successive sentences.
Ability to outline (evaluate and arrange thoughts accord-
ing to sequence and importance).
Ability to follow directions (interpret and execute accord-
. ing to written directions).
Ability to use ideas in solving problems, e.g., in making
comparison, reasoning from cause to effect, etc.
b. Vocabulary
Ability to recognize meaning of words through context.
Increasing of meaning vocabulary.
Adding new words to spoken vocabulary.
c. Mechanics of reading
Increase of recognition-span.
Elimination of any "hang-over" in mechanical deficiencies,
lip-reading, head-movement, or finger-pointing.
Clear enunciation, correct pronunciation, proper phrasing,
well modulated and expressive voice in oral reading.
Consciousness of the hygiene of reading.
d. Handling of books
Proper use and care of books.
Use of table of contents, cross-referencing, glossary, and
so forth.
Ability in the use of reference books.
e. Library
Appreciation of library and other free service.
Control of the technique of locating and borrowing books.
f. Transfer of study to content subjects.
Fifth Grade:
1. Attitudes — Further development of the attitudes stated under
objectives for Grade IV, indicated by forming of reading clubs,
by spontaneous discussion of books, etc., by increased amount of
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 103
voluntary reading, and by reliance upon books as valuable sources
of information.
2. Skills, habits, knowledges.
a. .Further development of the abilities set forth under 2-a in
Grade IV, and also ability to scan material rapidly for a
special point.
b. Vocabulary — Increased ability to recognize meanings of words
through context, and expansion and refinement of passive and
active vocabulary (vocabulary understood, vocabulary used) .
c. Mechanics of reading.
Silent reading with no vocalization.
Wide recognition-span.
Continuance of clear enunciation, correct pronunciation,
proper phrasing, and well modulated voice in oral reading.
d. Handling of books.
Sense of responsibility for the care of books.
Use of table of contents, indexes, cross-references, glos-
sary, etc.
Use of reference books, encyclopedia, dictionary.
e. Library — Ability to work in school and public libraries with
considerable independence.
f. Conscious application of study skills in working with content
subjects.
Sixth Grade:
1. Attitudes.
a. Greater interest in diversified reading.
b. Pride in school library and in owning books.
c. Growing appreciation of what can be gained by reading books
without the guidance of the teacher.
2. Skills, habits, knowledge.
a. Thought-getting — bringing to a high level of efficiency the
objectives set forth in detail for Grades IV and V.
b. Vocabulary — Further expansion of reading vocabulary, and
conscious effort on part of child to augment speaking and
writing vocabulary.
3. Mechanics of reading.
a. Silent reading with no mechanical deficiencies.
b. Wider recognition-span.
c. High degree of excellence in enunciation, pronunciation,
phrasing and voice modulation in oral reading.
d. Habitual regard for hygienic conditions in reading.
4. Handling of books.
a. Well established sense of responsibility for the care of books.
b. Skilled use of table of contents, cross-referencing, glossary,
etc.
c. Ready and independent use of reference books, encyclopedias,
and dictionary.
5. Library — Using the school and public library with self-assurance
and a business-like manner.
6. Independent ability to transfer reading skills to the study of
content subjects.
MATERIALS OF INSTRUCTION
a. Basal and supplementary readers (see list on page 35) .
b. Library books (see list on page 37).
c. Reading in connection with other classroom activities.
104 Course of Study for the
1. The variety of content matter in the curriculum for the fourth,
fifth, and sixth grades leads into a wide field of supplementary
informational reading. Advantage should be taken of these leads
into the fields of history, science, life and customs in other lands
and current events. Suggestive lists or annotated bibliographies
in each field should be posted, and well written, attractive sup-
plementary books, letters, magazines, magazine articles, scrap
books, and pictures, should be available in great variety.
Exhibits related to the topic under discussion should be provided.
Many libraries cooperate with schools in lending chosen groups
of books, bibliographies and other material related to a certain
field of content.
2. Reading should supplement experiences gained from excursions,
investigations with nature materials, and other types of study.
3. Assembly periods call for the preparation of reading material for
travel talks, illustrated talk on various topics, and reports.
4. Reading is done in connection with health, civic and safety
campaigns.
5. Printed directions should be used in connection with constructive
work, games, and study assignments in all work of the curricu-
lum.
6. Publication of bulletin board notices and a school paper or maga-
zine, and contributions to the children's sheet of the town news-
paper, call for reading in preparation of the material.
7. Reading should not only grow out of such situations, but should
lead into further reading, excursions, constructive work, and
campaigns of various sorts.
CLASSIFICATION
The class in each grade should be divided on the basis of needs. Three
types of tests are usable for this purpose:
1. Tests of ability to comprehend and interpret what is read (Stan-
ford Achievement Test in Reading, and Haggerty Test) .
2. Measure of rate of silent reading. (Courtis and Starch.)
3. Tests of rate and accuracy of oral reading. (Gray.)
STUDY IN GRADES FOUR, FIVE AND SIX
a. Ability to Comprehend Phrase and Sentence
How developed
1. By seeing that the child knows definitely what he is to find out
in the reading.
2. By asking questions which compel concentration on meaning of
various words, phrases, and sentences.
3. By constantly checking on comprehension through informal tests
of the following types: Yes-no, multiple-choice, matching sen-
tences, completion, riddles, drawing and following directions.
b. Ability to Outline (to evaluate and arrange thoughts according to
sequence and importance).
Main idea and evaluating
1. Ask questions which necessitates finding the main idea.
2. In checking, give questions that cannot be answered except by
an understanding of the whole unit. Give true-false tests that
involve the main idea; multiple-choice tests involving the selec-
tion of the correct topic sentence from a group of possibilities;
completion tests; riddles, directions, etc.
3. Have children make or select topic sentence.
4. Have children give a title to a paragraph or to any illustration
accompanying the paragraph.
5. Have children give reasons for choice of important ideas.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 105
Noting details
1. Give questions which call for a group of significant details.
2. Give exercises requiring the use of details to prove a point or
to solve a problem.
3. Have children talk from an outline of a topic.
Arranging ideas
1. Have children make an outline, showing arrangements of main
ideas and supporting sub-topics.
2. Have children give reasons lor evaluation of important sub-topics.
c. Ability to follow directions (1) where all details are to be used; and
(2) where significant items are to be retained and other items discarded.
Give children exercises which require both types of ability. Dramati-
zations, playing games, handwork, etc., furnish both practice exercises
and checking.
d. Ability to study with an efficient rate. Rate is important in reading,
since it determines the amount of reading an individual can do in any
given time. It is necessary to think of rate as meaning "comprehension
with a time limit," and not the number of words a child can read in a
given time; otherwise there is danger of over-emphasizing rapidity of
reading at the expense of comprehension. The rate varies with the
purpose of reading, and with the difficulty of the material. There are
several rates:
1. The rapid rate, used in reading a narrative for pleasure and in
reading newspaper articles, or in reading factual material that
is not technical, with no need for reorganizing, summarizing, or
evaluating with reference to some special question or problem.
2. The very rapid rate, used in looking over material for some spe-
cific fact, or scanning it to get the general trend. This might be
called the skimming rate.
3. The careful rate used in reading to obtain details to support a
statement, in weighing the significance of facts to solve a prob-
lem, and in carefully noting complicated directions for the carry-
ing out of some project. Such reading is reflective or analytical,
and is relatively slow.
It is possible to train readers so that even the rate of careful analytical
reading far exceeds that formerly used. O'Brien, in his experiments,
improved the rate 31 per cent in a two months' period, at the same time
increasing greatly the quality and amount of comprehension.
The following methods may be used to increase rate:
a. Reading connected material for comprehension under a time limit.
The check used should test both the number and quality of the
ideas. Any of the five types of tests may be used in this con-
nection.
b. Although there is some doubt about the value of short exposure
exercises (flash-card drills), they may be used at the teacher's
discretion.
c. Results should be charted, or improvement made evident to the
pupil in such a way that his interest is enlisted in meeting a
grade standard or in bettering his own record.
In the fifth and sixth grades, children may be taught the differ-
ent rates and the conditions under which each may be used, and
should learn to vary their rate in accordance with the nature of
the material. Through deliberate use of the various rates, time
may be saved. The average rate for fourth grade is 160 words
per minute; for fifth grade is 180 words per minute; for the
sixth grade 220 words per minute. Occasional tests for rate,
checking the number and accuracy of ideas gained within a time
limit are valuable, especially if the individual pupil keeps some
kind of graph or record upon which he records the number of
words per minute and the number of ideas. The pupil should
know whether or not he gets enough ideas.
106 Course of Study for the
e. Knowledge of the necessity for efficient study and how to im-
prove study techniques.
Developed by using a textbook which states directly the value
of study habits and provides the means for acquiring them.
f. In the fifth and sixth grades the ability to scan material rapidly
for a special point may be developed by giving children questions
or checks that call for scanning.
g. Vocabulary — In the intermediate grades, vocabulary building is
a matter of teaching new terms, — that is, new names for old
objects and ideas; e.g., the child learns that "honest" may be
expressed by "honorable," "upright," "trustworthy," and so forth,
or, he may learn a name for a new object; e.g., the propeller of
an aeroplane.
Methods of presenting and fixing these words include:
Having child try to understand the meaning through context.
Explanation in place of formal definition.
Classification.
The use of synonyms.
The use of antonyms.
Having child use words in a sentence.
Fixing vocabulary through repetition.
It is most important to build vocabulary and to fix this vocabulary
by the use of the words. The understanding of new terms de-
pends to a large extent on the teacher's presentation.
TRANSFER OF STUDY SKILLS
The content subjects of the curriculum call for the use of study skills.
It is in these subjects that the skills learned in the reading period should
be exercised. Work with content subjects should be as carefully planned
as the basal reading lessons with emphasis on the particular skill which
was stressed in the reading lesson. The basal readers for use in the fourth,
fifth and sixth grades carefully develop lessons in the different fields of
content, such as history, geography, and give teachers cues for dealing
with such materials. The assignments in these fields or subjects will be
very similar to those worked out with the class when The Study Reader
is used; the general lesson procedure, with slight alteration, applies in
most cases.
The following sugestions may prove helpful in working with arithmetic
content for instance:
a. Arithmetic Problems (the usual cause for errors in solving problems
is the failure to understand the meaning of the problem).
1. Check child's comprehension of the problem by having him write
one thing the problem tells.
2. Ask child to underscore words which give the idea of "subtract,"
"multiply," or whatever process is involved.
3. Possible assignment — "Read the problem silently. Be ready to tell
in two sentences what you will do when you work the problem."
4. Possible questions— (a) "What are you told in this problem?"
(b) "What are you asked to do?" (c) "What tool, or tools, shall
you use?"
b. Additional Suggestions for Working With History or Geography:
1. In most cases use the problem approach.
2. Be sure that terms are understood.
3. Make frequent use of the multiple assignment for facts supple-
mentary to those provided in basic text.
4. When generalizations are started in the text, be sure that children
understand by asking them to cite concrete illustrations as proof.
5. Develop outlines for evaluating, aranging, and retaining important
ideas.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 107
ASSIGNMENTS IN INDIVIDUAL STUDY
In the fifth and sixth grades independent study should take several
forms:
a. Intensive reading assignments from one book with a close check on
the material. Such an assignment should be carefully worked out,
using the same general plan and type of questions or checks as have
been suggested in the general lesson procedure for Grade IV.
b. Another type of assignment may call for the reading of a number
of references (from different books) on the same topic, for the
purposes of listing all important facts, comparing various opinions
and statements, verifying facts, making judgments on the basis of
facts (as when collecting material for debates) and so forth.
TIME ALLOTMENT AND THE READING PROGRAM
Because reading is, relatively speaking, the most important subject in
the intermediate grades the time allotment should be determined on this
principle. For reading instruction the teacher's schedule of classroom
work should, therefore, provide 250 minutes for grade four and 200 minutes
each for grades five and six. In addition, opportunity for teaching read-
ing will arise from the need of applying reading skills to the content
subjects. It seems advisable to provide two separate reading periods for
the two different types of reading instruction, work-type and recreatory-
type.
a. Types of lessons in these grades should include:
1. Group lessons in work-type silent reading, for the purpose of
developing fundamental habits and skills.
2. Independent work-type silent reading, checked carefully.
3. Audience reading of prepared recreatory or informational
material.
4. Independent reading of recreatory material, checked through
brief reports.
5. An appropriate amount of drill and exercises, to establish
habits of accuracy and independence in word-recognition and
wide span of recognition.
6. Testing twice a year with standard tests.
7. Remedial work.
b. Silent reading becomes progressively important during the fourth,
fifth and sixth grades, and for the following reasons:
1. The word recognition rate of pupils has become more rapid
than their ability to articulate.
2. The need for silent reading as a study tool in the content
subjects is increasing.
3. Rate and comprehension of silent reading become fairly well
established by the end of the sixth grade.
c. The amount of silent reading in these grades should be increased
as follows and in proportion to the amount of oral reading: fourth
grade, ratio 50-50; fifth grade, ratio 60-40; sixth grade, ratio 70-30.
LESSON PROCEDURES
The teacher is urged to study the contents of the pages of the readers
she is to use and to note the detailed suggestions -to be found in the manuals
accompanying the readers. It is essential that the teacher have a compre-
hensive view of the reading material provided, as this, will enable her to
plan more wisely her reading program several weeks in advance and to
provide adequately for related materials, extensive reading, and further
108 Course of Study for the
pupil activity in harmony with the general program. The type of lesson
procedure to plan will, to a certain extent, be determined in its relation
to the general reading needs of the class and their present attainments
in reading.
The teacher must guard against having too many lessons of a particular
type, and should plan a well-balanced program of lesson procedures, based
on the specific objectives for the designated grade.
While the basal readers for the fourth, fifth, and sixth grades are of
the work-type variety, and the manuals accompanying these readers (The
Study Readers, Charles E. Merrill Company, New York) provide excellent
work-type lesson plans, there are splendid suggestions for successful les-
son procedure in the manuals accompanying both the work-type and recre-
atory reading texts on the supplementary lists. Especially helpful are the
manuals for the Story and Study Readers, published by Johnson Publish-
ing Company, Richmond, Va.; The Elson Readers, Scott, Foresman Com-
pany, New York; The Pathway to Reading, published by Silver-Burdett &
Company, and Bobbs-Merrill Readers, published by Bobbs-Merrill Com-
pany, Indianapolis, Ind. Since the basal readers for use in these grades
are the work-type, which is usually the sort thought of as study, both the
work-type and recreatory type are used in the study of a subject, and no
lesson or series of lessons is apt to use one exclusively. The main thing
in this connection is to differentiate between materials and lesson plans
appropriate for work-type reading and for recreatory reading. Again,
the manuals for the readers on the supplementary text and library lists
will be helpful to the teacher in planning specifically for recreatory-type
lessons in reading.
The lesson procedure in the fifth grade and sixth grade is essentially
similar to that in the fourth grade. (See outline below.)
Suggested General Lesson Procedure (Work-type)
Introduction:
Connect with child experiences by picture, object, anecdote, or con-
versation.
Lead children to assemble some of their ideas on the topic by ques-
tions and discussions.
Give children a main purpose for reading the material.
Vocabulary :
Develop by explanation and questions a few words and phrases that
are likely to be difficult, and present them on the blackboard.
Silent reading by class, directed by questions.
Ask a question which covers the main thought of a paragraph or
larger unit; other questions may be asked after the reading. Types of
questions to ask:
1. Directions which call for selecting a number of details to prove
some point, as "Find statements in your book to prove that the
dragon-fly is helpful"; or, "Be ready to tell what a cyclops looks
like."
2. Questions which call for using the facts to infer something not
stated in the text, as "Do you think these insects are helpful or
harmful and why?" The book does not tell directly whether the
insects are helpful or harmful; the children have to read the
facts and judge them in the light of past information and ex-
perience.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 109
3. Questions which call for comparisons, as "Tell three ways in
which the water-tiger is different from the dragon-fly."
4. Questions which call for selecting the main idea: "What would
be a good title for this paragraph?"
The pupils should finally read the entire unit or story and discuss
the main or central thought running through the complete selection
read.
Additional check-up on the material — For one or two particular kinds
of comprehension.
a. Ability to follow directions.
b. Ability to get meaning of simple facts.
c. Ability to make inferences.
d. Ability to select main ideas.
e. Ability to select from a number of facts those pertinent to a
question or statement — any one of several types of tests may
be used.
Review of vocabulary for fixing meanings — Use classification, synonyms,
antonyms, and have children use words in sentences.
Leads to further activity:
1. To further reading of stories, information, poems, etc., in the
same field or related fields.
2. To excursions, etc.
3. To home and classroom constructive activities.
Type-Lesson for Grade IV
SWIMMING-HOLE NEIGHBORS
Perhaps, when you have been swimming or walking near a pond, you have seen
different kinds of water bugs. Do you know the whirling beetle, that swirls around
in circles on the top of the water; or the back-swimmer, the little silver bug that swims
very fast on its back? You can catch some of these insects if you get a net and drag
the mud around the edges of a pond in October. It is fun to watch these insects
through a magnifying glass. In our school we used to keep an aquarium with different
kinds of water bugs, water plants and stones in it. One class made a book about
water insects.
There is an interesting article about three kinds of water insects in your book. It
is called "Swimming-Hole Neighbors." Please find the title in the table of contents.
Before we read about the first insect, let us look at a few words we need to know.
How many have ever used a magnifying glass As you look through it, things appear
larger than they really are. (Develop "magnifying glass.") The insect we're going
to read about first is called the Cyclops. When we read let us see how many interest-
ing things we can find out about the Cyclops. Perhaps if I put a few suggestions on
the board, it will help you. What would be interesting to find out about the cyclopsr
Where to find him?
What he looks like?
Whether he is a helpful or a harmful insect?
Why people gave him the name he has?
(Children read from books.)
Who will tell about the first topic? The second, third, fourth?
The next section is about the water-tiger. It sometimes helps us to find and to
remember what is important if we think of a title for each paragraph. Read the first
paragraph and see what you would name it. The next. What do you find out?
Where I found the water-tiger.
How it uses its jaws.
Why it is named water-tiger.
How it uses its legs.
Its eating of the mosquito.
Its teeth.
The third section is about the dragon-fly. As you read, find three ways in which
it is different from the water-tiger, jaws, food, and the changes into a flying insect.
How does each of these insects help us? Prove it by reading aloud a section from
the book.
On your paper you will find a list of sentences referring to the water bugs, which
you have read about. Below you will find names of the three insects. Read each sen-
tence, then put the number of the sentence under the right name.
1. The3 r have but one eye.
They change to insects with wings.
The mother carries her babies in two sacks.
They have a frightful set of teeth.
Minnows like to eat them.
They eat May-flies and mosquito wrigglers.
110 Course of Study for the
7. Their hands grow where their ears should be.
8. They are about as big as the head of a pin.
9. Their jaws move sidewise.
10. Foolish people think they sew up children's ears.
11. Their teeth are hollow so they can suck the soft parts of the food through
them.
12. Its lower jaw unfolds and reaches out to catch food.
Cyclops Water-tiger Dragon-fly
1-3-5-7-8 4-9-11 2-6-10-12
Wouldn't you like to catch some water insects, and put them into glass bowls? You
can see some very interesting things through the microscope. (Some child might bring
a microscope.) Some interesting books about insects could be listed and stories
compiled.
Points Brought Out in Lesson
Introduction
1. Connection with children's interest and experience, and the assembling of
children's ideas. It gives purpose for reading.
Study abilities
1. Looking for facts — ("As you read, see how many interesting things you can
find out about the cyclops; it will help us if we suggest a few things we
want to find out.")
2. Organizing facts (using the outline made to group facts found in reading;
e. g., assembling all facts of size, etc., around the idea of what the insect
looks like.)
3. Outlining — selecting main idea (giving titles to paragraphs'). .
4. Comparing the selected facts (find three ways in which the dragou-rly is dif-
ferent from the water-tiger).
5. Reasoning beyond facts given; making inferences and finding statement that
influenced conclusions. ("How does each of these insects help us. Prove it
by reading aloud a section from the books").
UNITS OF WORK
The wide variety of content matter in the course of study for the fourth,
fifth and sixth grades leads to many fields of supplementary reading. Full
advantage should be taken of these leads and attractive supplementary
books, letters, scrapbooks, magazine articles, pictures and exhibits related
to the topic under consideration should be secured by the pupils. Sug-
gestive reading lists should be posted at opportune times.
There should be a room library, and also a library table in every class-
room upon which should be placed current magazines, books that contain
material which relates to activities in progress and attractive books and
magazines suited to the grade. A pupil should feel free to pass quietly
to the reading table when work in required subjects is well done and read
whatever appeals to him, or at any time to consult and to use books from
the library for the purpose of carrying on some activity in which he is
engaged. Then, too, there should be much reading of library books at
home.
In addition to this, there should be a free period daily in which pupils
make their own selections and read for enjoyment. This offers an excel-
lent opportunity for the teacher to study the child's reading interests and
habits and to note disabilities.
The habit of magazine reading should be encouraged and pupils often
referred to interesting related material in periodicals, as an outgrowth of
a reading lesson or in connection with a project, preparing reports, illus-
trated talks, moving pictures, dramatizations, pageants, assemblies, club
meetings and various special programs. Printed directions should be used
in connection with construction work and games and plays. Choosing
bulletin board material requires discriminating reading.
The relation of reading to practically every subject taught in the ele-
mentary grades, together with the importance of the subject itself, must
be given consideration in the selection of units of work. The problems
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 111
arising in connection with the immediate classroom situations should offer
a wide range of activities in the plans for solving these problems.
DESIRABLE OUTCOMES FOR THE FOURTH, FIFTH, AND SIXTH
GRADES
Thought-getting is emphasized in this period. Extensive reading for
information and pleasure should result in permanent interest in a wide
variety of wholesome reading materials, a knowledge of sources of reading
material, a skillful use of books, libraries, and other sources of information,
and a further development of desirable attitudes, habits, and skills.
Desirable Levels of Pupil Achievement
1. Attitudes
a. Strong motive for an increased interest in reading for infor-
mation and pleasure, with standards and tastes advanced, as
evidenced by a regular withdrawal of these kinds of books from
the library or other sources.
b. Realization that books are useful — frequent references to books
to answer questions or to carry on activities.
c. Spontaneous discussion of books read.
d. Pride in school library and in owning books.
e. Willingness to spend part of savings for books and good maga-
zines.
f. Evidences that desirable fundamental behavior, attitudes and
ideals are being inculcated.
2. Habits, skills and knowledge
a. A familiarity through reading with many of the common fields
of human experience.
b. Skill to read silently with no mechanical deficiencies.
c. Clear enunciation, correct pronunciation, proper phrasing, and a
well-modulated voice in oral reading.
d. Using a library, books, magazines, reference books, encyclopedias,
the dictionary, and newspapers skillfully and effectively.
e. Comprehend thought of increasing complexity and make keen,
critical interpretation.
f. Read at a rate most effective for the purpose in mind.
g. Read silently factual material suited to the grade at the rate
of 140 to 160 words per minute for the fourth grade; 160 to
200 words per minute for the fifth grade; 180 to 220 words per
minute for the sixth grade.
h. Read silently recreatory material suited to the grade at the rate
of 180 to 200 words per minute for the fourth grade; 225 to 250
for the fifth grade; and 250 to 300 words for the sixth grade.
i. Study content subjects effectively through a mastery of specific
skills and abilities needed.
3. Vocabulary
a. Increase in meaning vocabulary.
b. Ability to recognize words of increasing difficulty.
c. Habit of using dictionary to increase meaning vocabulary.
d. Habit of trying to work out independently meanings of new
words by means of context and familiar elements, as prefixes,
suffixes.
THE SEVENTH GRADE
Pupils who have completed the requirements of the preceding period
will enter the seventh grade with fundamental reading habits well-de-
veloped, and will be ready to participate in a program in which specific
reading attitudes, habits and tastes should be rapidly refined and per-
112 Course of Study for the
fected. The important thing to work for in this grade is independence
and efficiency in all activities that involve reading. Approximately 160
minutes per week should be given to reading classwork proper. The read-
ing requirements of the content subjects will increase this total con-
siderably.
OBJECTIVES
a. To develop further the ability of pupils to select and use in
reading situations the type of reading best suited to the purpose.
Each subject studied should require wide reading of books, selec-
tions, newspapers, and periodicals that contribute to a broader
understanding of the problems studied.
b. To promote and refine reading tastes and interests which will
guide and inspire the future life of the reader and provide for
the wholesome use of leisure time.
c. To promote habits of intelligent interpretation of, and thought-
ful reflection on, what is read.
d. To improve and refine habits of expressive oral reading of liter-
ary and dramatic materials.
e. To provide individual instruction in the fundamental habits of
silent and oral reading whenever the need for it exists.
f. To develop skill in the use of books and libraries, and to make
progress in locating, collecting, summarizing and filing printed
materials.
MATERIALS OF INSTRUCTION
a. Basal and supplementary readers (see list on page 35).
b. Library books (see list on page 37).
c. Reading in connection with other classroom activities (see ma-
terials of instruction for fourth, fifth and six grades, page 103).
CLASSIFICATION OF PUPILS, REMEDIAL WORK, AND PUPIL
PROGRESS
Pupils vary widely in reading ability, and in the seventh grade in
particular, many will be found who need further training in the funda-
mental habits and skills which should have been mastered during the early
grammar grades. Special provision will have to be made for pupils who
enter this grade wich good reading habits still undeveloped or who have
positively bad habits which must be counteracted. Therefore, it is es-
sential to check pupils on their fundamental habits and skills before taking
up the work as outlined specifically for the seventh grade. Standard tests
may be used to locate deficiencies, and for measuring such skills as —
comprehension of meaning; vocabulary, rate of reading, and ability to
recognize and pronounce words. Diagnosis of the reading status of each
pupil, noting chief difficulties and problems, will aid the teacher in properly
grouping pupils for purposes of instruction in reading. These groups
should be made according to specific needs and abilities of the pupils, and
adjustments made within the grade as the growth and progress of the
individual pupil demands.
Whenever remedial treatment is necessary, the following definite steps
in dealing with special cases may be suggestive to the classroom teacher.
(See also page 32, "Deficiencies and Remedial Work.")
a. Discover deficiencies in the course of classroom activities.
b. Observe and study the nature of difficulties encountered in regu-
lar class work.
c. Examine individual pupil by means of personal interview.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 113
d. Use standardized and informal tests with a view to revealing
fundamental attitudes and causes of deficiencies.
e. Formulate specific remedial measures which attack the cause of
the deficiency.
f. Initiate regular remedial work in a way to enlist pupil cooper-
ation and effort.
g. Study pupil records and note reactions and progress.
h. Adjust or adapt work to changing needs until deficiency is re-
moved and progress insured.
An important outcome of the testing and remedial program in reading
in the seventh grade should be that of conscious learning on the part of
the pupil. His reading difficulties as revealed by the diagnostic tests should
be explained to him and a conscious effort made by the pupil to under-
stand his problems, and the reading processes in general. There should
be deliberate study by the pupils of their own habits and effort made to
secure improvement where needed. The pupils should begin to realize that
their ability to use the printed page and to get the most out of reading,
will depend largely upon their own efforts to improve themselves in the
various reading skills. The classification of pupils in the seventh grade
should be to a certain extent, a matter of pupil adjustment to group work.
Progress from one level of work to the next higher must be a part of the
conscious effort of the pupil and resulting in success. On this basis a
more normal classification may be effected and the maximum progress of
pupils attained.
ACTIVITIES AND PROCEDURES
In planning and developing the reading program in the seventh grade
it may prove helpful to the teacher to study the following activities and
procedures as outlined under the several and essential types of reading
to be provided.
a. Work-type reading.
This type of reading includes both silent and oral reading. In this
grade the work-type reading deals largely with silent reading of the
subject matter of content subjects. However, many occasions will arise
in which oral work-type reading will be required.
1. In work-type reading the pupil learns:
a. To vary the rate of reading according to the kind of material
and the purpose for which it is being read.
b. To reflect on what has been read.
c. To follow the author's thought.
d. To make a contribution by broad interpretation of thoughts and
ideas.
2. Study problems which require work-type reading are:
a. To comprehend a principle or explanation; such as a discussion
of the selection of crops for certain agricultural areas.
b. To understand a problem to be solved in arithmetic or an as-
signment in science, which might require the following pro-
cedures :
Read to determine the essential conditions of the problem or
assignment.
Read a second time to understand all the facts in their neces-
sary relations.
State in one's own words what is given and what is to be
found out.
Recall related processes needed for the solution.
Rapid final reading to secure figures and facts required in
making necessary calculations.
114 Course of Study for the
c. To get the central thought in material which is new to the
reader; such as a detailed account of "The Byrd Expedition to
the South Pole." This will require:
Getting the main idea, the general purpose and plan.
Enumerating the supporting details of the general plan.
Arrangement of the events in proper order.
Associating the facts with other related information at hand.
Summarizing the details into a unified understanding of the
topic.
b. Extensive or supplementary reading.
To supplement the intensive work described in the section given to
work-type reading, there should be extensive reading of the reference
type which is an important aid in the seventh grade program. The
materials for this type of reading include: Reference books in special
subjects, general reference books, magazines, periodicals, and literary
works for recreatory and inspirational reading. There are three im-
portant purposes to be served in reference reading:
1. To secure definite information on special points or questions.
2. To find additional information upon a topic under discussion.
3. To gain new viewpoints and new leads into interesting situations.
c. Reading and enjoyment of literature.
Materials which are primarily literary are used for this kind of
reading. There is a wealth of literary material available for use in
the seventh grade. The supplementary and library lists are suggestive
of proper selection of literary materials. One of the important values
in the program offering the various types of reading is that of classi-
fying the materials to be used in developing the specific types of work.
In this connection, it should be understood that literary selections are
not to be treated analytically when used in this grade program. The
work-type reading material lends itself to a detailed analysis without
serious harm to the pupil's attitude toward the material. On the other
hand, the same sort of treatment of literary materials suitable for
pleasure or recreatory reading might defeat the main purposes which
this type of reading serves. They are as follows:
1. Reading rapidly in order to enjoy the events of the story. For ex-
ample, Irving's "Legend of Sleepy Hollow."
2. To understand and interpret characters. For example, Longfellow's
"Courtship of Miles Standish."
3. Reading aloud in order to enjoy certain selections more fully. For
example, Riley's "Circus Day Parade."
It is important to provide situations which will develop in pupils
the attitude and the habit of regarding literary reading as a deligthful
opportunity to widen experience. A stimulating environment affording
carefully selected and interesting materials is one of the most fruitful
situations in reading. The regularly functioning Literary Society, and
the Pleasure Reading Club activities offer opportunities for (1) group
discussions of experiences which the pupil has in reading widely through
extension library assignments and individual reading; (2) becoming
acquainted through exchange of experiences, with the sources of inter-
esting and wholesome reading materials; (3) presenting favorite selec-
tions of literary value to groups of fellow members of the organization,
or assembly or community meetings.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 115
. Free and independent reading.
The materials for this type of reading include the large number
of excellent books in fiction, biography, history, science, music, art, and
many other fields available in libraries. First-class newspapers, maga-
zines, and other periodicals of a high class furnish good reading ma-
terial daily, and at close hand. Training in school in the proper selec-
tion of the materials for their independent reading is essential in order
to avoid the development of undesirable taste in the matter. Careful
consideration should be given the plans for the gradual development
of good taste in the selection of reading materials.
Often the pupil may become discouraged if there are too many activi-
ties provided and he does not have the ability to satisfactorily partici-
pate in any of them. Materials suited to the needs and abilities of the
individual pupils must be selected for use in developing the habit of
independent reading. It is through experience that the pupil learns
to select proper materials for his leisure reading.
1. Suggestions for making provision for independent reading:
a. A well-selected and well-directed school library is one of the best
assets in the development of free and independent reading. It
may be supplemented by local, public and State library facilities.
Every school should have a table, or shelves in the bookcase
for newspapers, magazines, and books to which pupils may have
free access at all unoccupied times. Change both magazines and
books frequently. Do not put on too many at any one time and
have the place kept in an orderly and attractive condition. The
table may be supplied with library books, supplementary reading
matter, travel booklets, magazines and papers contributed bv
patrons. Only worthwhile contributions should be accepted.
b. The school librarian and the grade teacher working together
may direct the pupils' library activities as follows:
1. Supply with books to look into, to confer with the teacher
about, and to select one for reading.
2. Give a portion of the reading time for the reading of these
books. Encourage them to take the books home with them to
finish their reading.
3. Pupils should be allowed to select their own books for free
reading. Their tastes can be safeguarded by placing accept-
able books only in the school library and on the reading
table.
4. Pupils should be encouraged but not required to report to
the class upon interesting things which they have read. Stimu-
lation and encouragement but not compulsion should be the
keynote of the teacher's plans, and the element of independ-
ence in such reading should always be retained.
c. Lists of books for outside reading should be posted on the bulletin
board. Book exhibits, annotations of certain titles, and book
posters, are helpful. Visits to book shops, printing shops, news-
paper offices, and libraries tend to increase interest in free and
independent reading.
Expressive oral reading.
While intelligent silent reading is one of the main purposes of the
reading program for the seventh grade there will be frequent occasions
when pupils will feel the need for audience reading. Often children
like to read aloud to others. Training in oral reading should be pro-
vided to a certain extent in this grade. The materials for oral reading
may include:
116 Course of Study for the
1. Prose and poetry read for appreciation.
2. Selections of the dramatic, oratorical, and humorous types for the
entertainment of the audience.
Training pupils for dramatic contests should not be a part of this
particular phase of the reading program.
LESSON PLANS
The suggestions offered for general lesson procedures in the fourth,
fifth and sixth grades will be helpful to the teacher of the seventh grade.
The manuals accompanying the basal and supplementary readers offer
many acceptable types of lesson plans. In addition to these the following
references will be found valuable sources of suggested lesson procedures
in dealing with each type of reading. The teachers' manual for this grade
is especially helpful and should be carefully studied and referred to con-
stantly in planning lessons and units of work.
REFERENCES:
Teachers' Guide to Literature. Complete Manual for the basal reader. Houghton.
Reading and Living Series. Manual. Scribner's.
Schmidt. Teaching and Learning the Common Branches. Pages 199-203. Appleton.
Stone. Silent and Oral Reading. Chapter IV. Houghton.
Parker. Types of Elementary Teaching and Learning. Ginn.
Pennell and Cusack. How to Teach Reading. Houghton.
VOCABULARY DEVELOPMENT IN THE SEVENTH GRADE
a. Provision should be made for extending a meaning vocabulary through:
1. Rapid growth of vocabulary through actual experience and wide
reading. Special attention to words and idioms significant in
geography, science and other content subjects. •
2. Attention to words and groups of words in context whose value
will be increased because of intensive work done with them in
composition and grammar. This should be a carrying over of
training and should illuminate the context.
3. Intensive study of carefully selected words in order to extend
the use of them and to show their values in expressing meanings.
4. Training in interpreting definitions of words by illustrative sen-
tences.
5. Training in judging relative values of words in context.
6. Exercises in classification of words as to thought; relationships,
arranging word lists under appropriate headings; making lists
of synonyms and antonyms and of words with common roots,
prefixes and suffixes.
7. Training in knowing and using the resources of the dictionary.
8. Testing vocabulary growth by both informal and standard tests.
b. Accuracy in word recognition may be developed by:
1. Early discovery of remedial cases and specific diagnosis of their
individual difficulties, followed by remedial treatment.
2. Checking habits of attack upon new words to discover pupils
whose habits are faulty, followed by substituting more economical
procedures.
3. Exercises in word grouping for slow readers.
c. Suggestions for training in the independent use of habits of word
recognition.
1. Assign word study in context with a definite and specific pur-
pose in mind. This may suggest the meaning or pronunciation
of many words. The question may be asked: "What are some
.of the words we might expect to find in a story about Indians?"
2. Train pupils when to seek help; when to look for help in dic-
tionaries.
3. Keep a list of individual difficulties as a basis for remedial drills.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 117
4. Check comprehension, giving special attention to idioms and con-
structions which may prove puzzling — negative expressions, like
if, but meaning except, only.
5. Check comprehension and training pupils to guard against giv-
ing words too much or too little weight.
DESIRABLE OUTCOMES FOR THE SEVENTH GRADE
By the close of the seventh grade the pupils should be able:
a. To read any book of seventh grade difficulty with ease and under-
standing.
b. To get the main thought of a paragraph.
c. To read silently at the rate of 200 to 225 words per minute.
d. To understand new words from the context, and to pronounce
all common words without hesitation.
e. To do reference work voluntarily and without loss of time or
effort.
1. To use the index and table of contents of reference books
on any definite subject.
2. To follow easy directions, accurately.
3. To use reading as a tool in studying effectively.
f. To determine the paragraph or stanza in a selection that needs
the most emphasis.
g. To evaluate materials read and to discuss interpretations and
conclusions derived.
h. To read to an audience in a pleasing and carrying voice the type
of material required in adult situations: poetry, news items,
short stories and plays,
i. To select and use good books, magazines, newspapers, in reading
for enjoyment, recreation and information,
j. To show a love for good reading and evidence of frequent use
of the library to satisfy a desire for good reading.
PART III: FURTHER STEPS IN UNIFYING AND BROAD-
ENING THE READING COURSE THROUGH
THE GRADES
The outline course in reading as presented in Part II is designed to
lend suggestion and guidance to the classroom teacher in her efforts to
discover pupil needs, and in planning to aid the child in making normal
progress in reading as he enters and proceeds through the elementary
school. This course is organized on the basis of reading periods which
may include the work of more than one grade rather than specific outlines
to follow in the use of a particular text or texts. The content materials
of the course were assembled and approved by a special committee on
reading and are representative of the present-day practice in reading
instruction for the elementary grades.
Teachers may profitably use this course if they will first become familiar
with its purposes, organization and content all the way through; and
second, study carefully the grade outlines in which they are particularly
interested. While it is essential that the teacher have an intimate knowl-
edge of the contents of the outline for the grade she teaches it is also
necessary for her to have a clear-cut understanding of the suggested out-
lines for all the grades in order to insure for the individual pupil a unified
course throughout the elementary school avoiding over-lapping, unnecessary
repetitions, too difficult work, or omissions, all of which tend to retard his
progress in reading achievement. By a thorough understanding of this
118 Course of Study for the
common guide each teacher's work will strengthen and unify the course
in reading and insure satisfaction and success for the pupil.
The course in reading correlates and coordinates to a great degree with
the course in language which is included in this bulletin. Teachers who
have an adequate working knowledge of the two courses, one in reading
and one in language, will find that about three-fourths of each course
supplements and complements the other subject. This is a desirable point
of view in making and adapting courses of study in closely related sub-
jects such as reading and language, as it strengthens and unifies the
course in each subject. Cross references in the outline courses indicate
where correlations are emphasized and where coordination of plans and
suggestions are in evidence. A close and comparative study of each sepa-
rate course will aid the teacher in making out her own program for
teaching reading and language.
As the teacher becomes familiar with the course of study and adapts
it to the needs of her pupils she will have opportunity to test out the
suggestions and procedures in every-day classroom practice. As each phase
of the outline in reading instruction is applied to classroom needs it should
be a test of its usefulness in a particular situation.
A careful study and thoughtful use of the outline course in reading
will reveal many instances where it needs strengthening and expanding.
As the work in the classroom develops changes and improvements in the
course of study will become necessary.
The special and further needs of the present outline course include the
important factors listed below. It is planned to continue the study of
these special needs and the cooperation of all students of reading is re-
quested in this work.
Suggestions for further work on reading for the elementary grades.
1. An improved technique for securing information concerning the
individual child in order to plan for and adapt the reading course
to his needs.
2. A series of type lessons for each grade and illustrating acceptable
procedures in both work-type and recreatory reading in the class-
room.
3. A course in children's literature as a basis for a reading pro-
gram in the elementary grades.
4. Type studies of units of work involving reading and related
subjects for each grade.
5. A definitely outlined course involving the subjects of the English
group — reading, language and spelling.
6. A well-graded vocabulary for the elementary school beginning
with the first grade and the school beginner.
7. Suggestive list of subject matter materials and methods suitable
for the preparation period in reading.
8. A complete bibliography in reading including professional texts,
reference books, research studies, periodicals, and classroom
texts.
As these studies are completed they will be made available for sup-
plementing the outline course in reading as presented in this bulletin.
It is hoped that teachers will (1) cooperate in the effort to study the
usefulness of the present outline course, by testing it out in the class-
rooms, and (2) participate in its improvement as a whole as further work
is planned for broadening, enriching and unifying the course from year
to year.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 119
LANGUAGE
PART ONE: BASIC PRINCIPLES UNDERLYING THE
MAKING OF THE COURSE OF STUDY
IN LANGUAGE
I. Guiding Purposes and Activities in Making a Course of Study in
Language.
The desired course of study in language is interpreted to mean that
which shall offer guidance in all the language experiences which all the
children are most likely to have during the period of elementary school.
Such a course does not exclude the study of technical matters as found in
grammar and other formal language material, but regards this as only
a part of the necessary language development of children.
Those charged with the responsibility of making a course of study in
language are conscious of the fact that we are living in a complex de-
mocracy of changing and developing civilization where approved edu-
cational theories and practices are constantly and necessarily giving away
to those newer and often more desirable. This alone necessitates a long-
time plan of careful and constant work on a language course which will
produce desired results.
In keeping with the generally accepted principles and essentials under-
lying the making of a progressive language course, the material herein
submitted is expected to serve two major purposes:
1. That of guiding language instruction during the formation of
a new course of study in language.
2. That of producing information and material for a new course
of study in language which may serve as a more complete and
helpful guide to teachers.
II. Language Meaning,* Value* and Guidance.
A. LANGUAGE MEANING
Language is an art to be cultivated for the purpose of expressing
one's self most satisfactorily to all concerned. The process of setting
thoughts to words and words to thought is fundamental to all advance
in education. Whenever thoughts are to be transferred and wants are
to be supplied language must necessarily be used. Language is man's
greatest social asset, and the great common bond of our studies within
and beyond school.
B. LANGUAGE VALUES
A common language is one of the strongest bonds for holding a
people together. The English language is our chief medium of educated
life. It is essential to artistic expression, complete understanding and
a knowledge of our splendid literary heritage. Through speech, writ-
ing and reading all time is made contemporary and the bonds of avail-
able knowledge are flung back. While the values of language are
manifold the following seem most outstanding:
*Adapted from St. Louis Curriculum Bulletin No. 4.
120 Course of Study for the
1. Language is the fabric upon which civilization and progress
depend.
2. Increasing command of language links with increasing command
of thought.
3. Effective speech is a priceless asset in the business world.
4. Language ability is an excellent index of mental development
and of our social status.
5. It is a great bulwark of national life and one of the surest safe-
guards of national existence.
6. In its finest manifestations it becomes one of the soul's most
valuable media for expression of the true and the beautiful.
Upon these depend not only the successful measure of the school,
but the future development of a republic. Language should, there-
fore, be recognized as an integrated and related factor in the enrich-
ment of instruction as a whole rather than an end in itself to be pursued
in logical order.
C. LANGUAGE GUIDANCE
Language guidance or teaching seeks to develop in each pupil the
power to express his thoughts and feelings; interpret and evaluate the
expressions of others and influence thoughts, feelings and actions of
others to a more profitable end.
If education is to prepare girls and boys to cope successfully with
life undoubtedly an ability to speak, write and read well is a valuable
and social business asset. Oral and written expression lend to self-
expression, while reading furnishes wholesome stimulation that becomes
a potent force in the crystalization "of innate virtues into good man-
ners and morals. Oral and written thoughts of others influence one
in terms of his ability to grasp and interpret, and this, ability is con-
trolled by a knowledge of reading matter, mastery of vocabulary, an
understanding of technicalities, the power of attention and an ability
to organize language experiences.
One of the strongest and most valuable factors in language develop-
ment is the power of influence over others. This may be but is not
always an outgrowth of the other two. In addition to being able to
express one's self satisfactorily and to interpret intelligently the
thoughts of others, one may assimilate the two powers in such a man-
ner as to create a third language power, persuasive and convincing in
nature and tending toward leadership and control.
"The ultimate outcomes of language study include the information
and knowledge, habits and skills, attitudes and appreciations, belonging
to the various life situations in which people use language." Fourth
Yearbook of the Department of Superintendence of the National Edu-
cation Association.
III. General Life Situations in Which Language Is Used.*
A. LIFE SITUATIONS INVOLVING SPOKEN LANGUAGE
1. Conversations
In the family group; at the table; at social gatherings; in dis-
cussion groups; at public gatherings; in public places; during intro-
*This analysis of life situations is adapted from Fourth Yearbook of Department of
Superintendence.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 121
ductions; during calls; interviews; in greetings and partings; in
asking and giving directions; in telephoning.
2. Meetings
a. Informal proceedings such as classes and other group ex-
ercises.
b. Formal proceedings of organization, clubs and committees.
3. Practical discussions
a. Speeches of felicitation, dedication, presentation, gifts, intro-
duction of speakers, inauguration speeches, speeches upon re-
tiring from service, substitute or impromptu speeches.
b. Reports of meetings, conferences, visits, investigations, illus-
trated lectures, demonstration talks.
c. Persuasive talks as in membei'ship drives, religious work,
political campaigns, sales talk, school campaigns for thrift,
health, cleanliness; as in applying for a position as office boy
or paper carrier; as in selling tickets to school entertainments.
d. Messages and announcements of games, lectures, exhibits,
entertainments, meetings and excursions.
e. Explanations and directions as to how to make a radio, a fish
trap, a birthday cake, or a flower box; how to go to a store
or railroad station; how to iron a dress or care for a baby.
4. Anecdotes and stories
a. Telling anecdotes and stories to children in the home, school,
or social group.
b. Telling anecdotes and stories to adults at social functions,
on the train, at the club, at the dinner table, at formal gather-
ings of friends, to people who are sick or in trouble, at public
meetings.
B. LIFE SITUATIONS INVOLVING WRITTEN LANGUAGE
1. Letters
a. Social letters to friends, to parents, to children in other com-
munities.
b. Business letters to firms for information, for supplies, in pay-
ment of bills, for positions, recommendations.
c. Formal notes.
d. Informal notes: excuses, invitations, information.
2. Notices of games, exhibits, entertainments, sales, meetings.
3. Reports of committee to school, class or group; of delegates to class,
school or town council; official, president of school council; financial,
money saved by class or society; minutes of council or club; reviews,
books, articles, speeches, plays; of observations or experiments.
4. Note taking for preparation of papers, stories, discussion and
reports.
5. Filling out forms: bank deposit slips, checks, applications for money
orders, mail order blanks, receipts, personal information blanks,
telegrams and cablegrams, time cards; application forms for posi-
tion, forms for recording tests and measurements, school records,
public accounts, private business records, questionnaires, budgets.
6. Making a bibliography : classified and annotated.
7. Creative writing for class, clubs, newspaper and magazine articles
in school or local paper, diaries, imaginative writings such as stories,
poems, plays, songs.
122 Course of Study for the
C. LIFE SITUATIONS INVOLVING THE INTERPRETATION OF
LANGUAGE AS BASED ON READING
1. Following instructions
a. Reading definite assignments in reading, language, history
and other subjects.
b. Reading in order to follow written directions.
c. Reading in order to answer written questions.
d. Reading in order to fill blanks, forms, questionnaires, con-
tracts.
e. Reading in order to pay bills, assessments, pledges.
f. Reading in order to follow up references and make reports.
g. Reading in order to prepare an assignment as a talk, lecture,
report, argument.
2. Self-development
a. Reading for information, comparison, experiences.
b. Reading for enrichment of vocabulary, mastery of spelling,
improvement of sentence structure, development of compo-
sition style.
c. Reading for pleasure, entertainment, recreation, inspiration.
d. Reading for broad knowledge of the best in literature and
ability to choose wisely in literature.
e. Reading for a better understanding of human nature and
environment.
3. Entertainment of others
a. Reading as preparation to teach or to inform others.
b. Reading orally to others for their entertainment.
c. Reading in order to be able to converse with others on liter-
ature, politics, social events, weather reports, economic prob-
lems, marketing.
d. Reading in order to produce a play, story, poem, song, etc.,
for enjoyment of others.
PART TWO: GENERAL SUGGESTIONS CONCERNING
LANGUAGE INSTRUCTION
I. General Language Objectives.
In order to insure steady and unbroken language growth in the life
of each child during the period of elementary school, general language
objectives common to the school or school system should be definitely set
up and logically approached. The following are suggested:
1. To accept language as a gift, power and art to be cultivated.
2. To create and promote a desire for self-expression, self-develop-
ment and better understanding of others through language
growth.
3. To gain knowledge and to acquire skill in the use of the forms
of oral and written expression and interpretation.
4. To develop the ability to spell correctly words in one's writing
vocabulary.
*5. To gain knowledge and to develop habits of effective study.
*6. To acquire skill in use of books.
*7. To develop the habit of listening, observing and judging intelli-
gently.
*8. To develop the habit of using leisure time for reading and other
cultural activities.
•These objectives apply equally to reading, and practically all the objectives have other
subject matter values. Other illustrations: No. 4 includes spelling; No. 11 includes citizen-
ship, and No. 5 applies to all learning.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 123
*9. To develop the ability to select, to organize and to evaluate right
ideas and materials needed for overcoming difficulties.
*10. To develop the ability to read in pleasing and intelligent manner.
11. To develop leadership, a spirit of intelligent cooperation and
community relationships through language growth.
*12. To develop ethical standards of language for home, school and
community relationships.
*13. To develop appreciation for good literature and choice con-
versation.
II. Suggestions in Regard to the Selection and Organization of Subject
Matter.
The language work naturally covers a wider field than can be com-
pletely presented in the present course of study; but attention must be
given to both oral and written composition, to the laws governing correct
form and usage, and to the study and appreciation of good literature.
The study of words, phrases, clauses, sentences, paragraphs, abbreviations,
forms of composition, etc., are classified as language forms to be treated
by grades with the use of texts and other references as needed. Language
from the standpoint of spontaneous expression should be encouraged from
the time a child enters school, and each pupil should be guided into an
understanding and a desire for improvement of his expressions. He should
also be taught to appreciate good literature, to know his native language
and its uses.
The language course is further interpreted to mean that which includes •
oral speech, written speech, language forms, word study and literature,
with proper attention given to reading, picture-study and writing, all of
which are to be taught in proportion to their relative and corresponding
importance. Each division of the language course lends to and deserves
careful analysis. A brief discussion of each follows.
Oral and Written Composition. All effort toward expression in words
is in a broad sense composition whether it be fragmentary and informal
expression heard at random or a complete treatment of a topic. Because
of the increased demand for oral language over that of written and the
dependence upon oral language as a basis for written language the greater
portion of time given to composition should be spent in the development
of oral composition. Equally high standards should be held for each and
neither allowed to lag behind the child's needs nor fail to contribute to
his intellectual growth. f In order to secure a proper balance a greater
portion of the language work in primary grades should be given to oral
composition — conversation, story-telling, dramatization — with decreasing
emphasis on the amount and an increasing emphasis on the form with
advancing grades. A corresponding shift should be made to written compo-
sition with attention to freedom of expression (introduced through oral
composition), technical matters, word study, literature, reading, picture
study, and writing with advancing grades. Summarizing: the part of
the language time given to composition should show a gradual shifting
of emphasis from practically one hundred per cent oral composition in
first grade to fifty per cent oral and fifty per cent written composition in
seventh grade.
*These objectives apply equally to reading, and practically all the objectives have other
subject matter values. Other illustrations: No. 4 includes spelling; No. 11 includes citizen-
ship, and No. 5 applies to all learning.
tSee Hosic, The Elementary Course in English. University of Chicago Press.
+ See Sheridan, Speaking and Writing English. Sanborn.
124 Course of Study for the
Language forms. Capitalization, punctuation, word, sentence and para-
graph structure and usage, the style or arrangement on paper, etc., should
be taught chiefly for their practical value as needs arise in life situations
and not imposed for the sake of the mastery of facts. During the first
three years very little language form is taught as such; but during and
after the fourth year forms and underlying principles should be taught
whenever the pupils can profit by them in daily experiences.
Word study, while not intended to take the place of the teaching of
spelling (often confined mainly to teaching how to spell words), concerns
itself with making correct enunciations and pronunciations, getting word
meanings, developing a broad vocabulary, choosing the most appropriate
words in speaking, improving written word forms and checking for correct
spelling. (See treatment by grades and in the spelling and the reading
courses.)
Literature, the approved writings of our best authors, should be in-
cluded in both the language and the reading course; the reading course
because of the need for developing reading skills, abilities, habits and atti-
tudes and appreciations as such; and language because of the emphasis to
be placed on analysis, outline, interpretation, appreciation, reproduction,
imagination, selection, language power and desire to do creative language
work. Books, the foundation for the reading and the language course
should be used in terms of pupils' needs in both language and reading.
The literary selections should be varied to meet the general needs and
abilities of children but always in keeping with the most generally ap-
proved list of books, stories, poems, pictures, plays, etc. These should also
be chosen in terms of the individual pupil needs in language and reading
and based upon his interests and appreciations. Thus the reading and
the language courses should not only be closely related and interwoven,
but, make continued effort to provide each pupil with the reading and
literary, experiences needed for his rapid and complete educational develop-
ment.
Reading, an indispensable skill for effective language instruction, should
be developed as such in the reading course. Reading ability contributes
to growth and the possibility for growth in language while language in
turn strengthens reading through practice in reading and a better under-
standing and appreciation of what is read. Reading knowledge; skills and
abilities should, therefore, come from the reading course, while interpre-
tation, appreciation and attitudes may come from or be decidedly strength-
ened through language instruction.
Picture study, while not treated here as a special subject, should be
incorporated as a vital part of the language course. The study of pictures
so nearly coincides with the study of literature, both in purpose and
method that teachers will find it of advantage to supplement the one with
the other. Many passages in literature suggest excellent pictures, and
many poems are but an attempt to say in words what the painter has
already said with his brush. Thus picture analysis and art appreciation
are parts of the language value of literature. As a part of the language
course, therefore, suitable picture masterpieces may be introduced while
the child's mind is in the formative stage and indelible impressions may
be made. Action pictures carefully chosen from current magazines and
papers may form a worthy basis for composition.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 125
Writing is a skill given special treatment as a tool subject for the pur-
pose of developing a tool contributive to self-expression. Therefore a direct
relation exists between writing and language. Standards and practice
given in the penmanship course may be reinforced or abused by the prac-
tice in other subjects, and especially language. The language work may
lend to poor writing by requiring too much written work, too rapid and
uncensored note-taking, accepting poor written work and the failure to
emphasize writing habits already taught. Require only a reasonable amount
of written work and accept always nothing less than the pupil's best effort.
See that each pupil's writing needs are met as additional demands are
made on this tool subject.
Language text. No text has been adopted for use in grades one and
two. Language Training, by Bryce, has been recommended for the teach-
er's use in the first three grades, and The Third Grade Book of the Open
Door Language Series, Houghton-Mifflin Company, is optional as to use by
third grade pupils, while the other books of this series are required as
basal in grades four to seven, inclusive. ("A Teacher's Guide for the Use
of the Open Door Language Series," is also furnished by the publishers
free of cost.)
Since the best of textbooks can serve only as a sort of manual or refer-
ence summarizing leading principles and furnishing copious illustrations
and judicious exercises it will be well for the school to make a collection of
approved and graded books to which the pupils may go for further guid-
ance on particular points, but they must carry to this investigation of
form and usage a growing conviction that the art of speaking and writ-
ing and the science underlying these must develop through the medium of
self-expression. "Definite uniform and settled policy as to method and
especially as to materials," says Dr. Hosic, "is yet to be developed." Dr.
Hosic (continuing) says, "Learning English involves four fundamental
processes: hearing, speaking, reading and writing." The practical result
is, therefore, three-fold: ability to express oneself, to understand others,
and to influence for leadership.
REFERENCES:
Scott and Others. The Open Door Language Series (basal text). Houghton.
Bryce. Language Training. Newson.
Hosic. The Elementary Course in English. University of Chicago.
Bobbitt. Curriculum Investigations. University of Chicago.
McBroom. The Course of Study in Written Composition. University of Iowa.
Curry-Clippinger. Children's Literature. Rand.
McClintock. Literature in the Elementary School. University of Chicago.
Barnes. Types of Children's Literature. World.
Barnes. The Children's Poets. World.
Lowe. Literature for Children. Macmillan.
Sheridan. Speaking and Writing English. Sanborn.
Hill. A Conduct Curriculum (First Grade). Scribner's.
Tippet. Curriculum Making in an Elementary School. Ginn.
Rugg-Shumaker. The Child-Centered School. World.
Beust. American Library Association Book List. American Library Association.
State Approved Library List for Elementary and High Schools. North Carolina Edu-
cational Association.
North Carolina State Library Commission. Raleigh.
The Classroom Teacher (especially Volumes III and VI on Language). The Classroom
Teacher, Inc., Chicago.
Magazines
The Elementary English Review ($2.50 per year). Detroit, Mich.
Educational Method ($3.00 per year). West 120th St., New York City.
Childhood Education ($2.50 per year). International Kindergarten Union, 16th Street,
Washington, D. C.
Progressive Education ($3.00 per year). Progressive Education Association, Washington.
D. C.
126 Course of Study for the
Textbook Series
Charters, Cowan, Bettz. Essential Language Habits, series Books One, Two, Three and
Manual. Silver.
Rader-Defendall. The Doorway to English, series Books One, Two and Three. Johnson. ■
Wohlfarth. Self-Help English Lessons, series First, Second and Third Books. World.
Kinard-Brown-Rogers. Our Language Series, Book One, Two, Three. Macmillan.
Young-Memmott. Good English in Speaking and Writing, series Grade Four to Eight,
inclusive. Appleton.
Clark. Language in Use, series Fourth, Fifth and Sixth Grades. Public School Pub.
III. Suggestions in Regard to Method and Procedure.
In addition to a knowledge of child psychology and the mastery of
subject matter careful consideration should be given to the correlation
and integration of language with other subjects and the teaching pro-
cedure. Careful preparation should be made for the effective teaching of
the language course as a whole by making provision for each major factor
(such as language form, literature, etc.) in terms of its recognized im-
portance and relation to other language factors, other grade subjects, the
elementary school as a whole and local environmental conditions. Means
should be devised for making language function throughout and beyond
the elementary school. The whule school day should be a language period
and every teacher and every pupil, of advanced language ability, should
be a language teacher in that a language consciousness should be developed
which will keep every pupil consciously at work on all phases of his lan-
guage development.
A. SURVEY OF THE SITUATION
After becoming familiar with the best available teaching and subject
matter materials for use in the specific grade subject to be taught a
careful study should be made as to language objectives and expected
outcomes for the grade and the grade department or the grades just
above and below. A careful study should also be made of the language
abilities of the pupils to be taught as shown by school records — teachers'
marks, standard test results; pupils' work preserved; the pupil's present
attitude and practice and his ability to make progress. When this has
been carefully summarized and checked against the requirements in
previous grades the teacher is ready to outline her course and to make
definite subject matter selections, but not until this has been done.
B. INDIVIDUAL DIFFERENCES
Pupils differ mainly as to native ability, home environment interests
and educational opportunities. In the grade work pupils differ not
only in the grade and the subject matter accomplishments but in each
important and measurable phase of each subject. Because of this the
teacher should determine the various differences in her group and in-
struct accordingly, not as "a mender" patching the weak spots only but
taking advantage of all the types of differences so as to make possible
each pupil's progress at his maximum rate. This will also make pos-
sible a more careful pupil preparation of assignments because they
will be within his range of interest and his ability to complete, to
understand and to appreciate.
C. STANDARDS OF ATTAINMENT
After having established acceptable grade objectives and correspond-
ing and expected outcomes constant checks should be made for de-
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 127
termining progress, and the outstanding weaknesses needing special
attention. Informal tests may be made by the teacher, groups of teach-
ers, or the supervisor and administered by the teacher, the principal,
or the supervisor. The results of these tests should form a part of
the pupil's accumulative record. See
Ruch. The Objective or New-Type Examination. Scott.
Orleans-Sealy. Objective Tests. World.
At regular intervals, and to meet special needs, approved standard
tests may also be used to an advantage (see County Testing Program,
State Department of Public Instruction), but in all instances if used
to their best advantage, must be followed with remedial teaching where
shortages are found. For more complete analysis see Language in
Grammar Grades, Introduction, "Usage of Measures and Standards in
Language."
D. METHODS OF SECURING INTEREST
1. Importance of securing a real situation
Use a natural and interesting situation such as planning an an-
nouncement to be given in another grade, writing a letter to a child
who is ill, listing the books read by the group; planning for a play,
writing up a field trip, etc. The advantages of such approach can
readily be recognized.
2. Small group activities
The classroom group should be constantly working in small and
temporary groups having special interests or needs in common. Such
organization stimulates interest, expedites work, develops leader-
ship, and tends to meet the pupil's individual differences. It also
makes the work more attractive to the group as a whole. When a
large unit of work is undertaken in a classroom several small groups
may well busy themselves with the parts in which these pupils are
most interested. Illustrations of small group activities carried on
in a classroom at the same time and with unity of purpose in the
solution of a problem are: making a product map, looking up refer-
ences, modeling on the sandtable, painting original sketches, mak-
ing an illustrative booklet, preparing a chart, reviewing the lives
of the people, writing a play, or perhaps outlining a program and
selecting characters for presenting the study as an assembly pro-
gram.
3. The school exhibit or "Parents' Visiting Day"
Plan a school exhibit or a "Parents' Visiting Day" to which
parents are invited. The children should assume responsibility for
the entertainment. They should plan a definite, logical and inter-
esting program, write invitations, announcements for explaining all
work exhibited, such as maps, graphs, and projects, and plan for
all activities such as receiving parents and directing them to rooms,
answering inquiries and making introductions. In many schools
this may well be an all-day affair to which parents bring lunch.
Regular class work may continue throughout the morning with
parents observing both the work and the play, and in the afternoon
the pupils may give a program showing various types of school
work; e. g., explanations of charts, booklets, etc., showing the use
128 Course of Study for the
of cotton, a map showing early settlements and trails in North
Carolina, the reading of best liked poems — including original ones;
book reviews of special selections; talk on such subjects as: "How
we Learned About Cotton," "How we Made Our Tables and Chairs,"
"Why we Are Healthy," and presenting an original play, song,
dance, puppet show, etc.
4. The opening exercise period
The classroom or chapel exercises, properly used, offer excep-
tional opportunities for training in oral language and motive for
written work. This is particularly true of rural schools in that it
affords opportunity for valuable training of pupils as to how to
stand, speak and to act before an audience made up of various
grades. Pupils may also be given the full responsibility of plan-
ning and conducting assembly programs. When a pupil knows that
a unit of class work is to be reported or reviewed in assembly, the
work takes on a more decided audience situation and produces better
results.
5. The use of the bulletin board
The hall or school bulletin board, the property of all, should
reflect fresh and interesting work constantly and attractively dis-
played by each grade. A committee of children from each room in
turn may take charge of the general bulletin board, posting material
of interest to the school. For example, the seventh grade study of
transportation or tobacco production and consumption in North
Carolina; while for the fourth grade pioneer life, or how we are
fed and clothed. Children should take the whole responsibility for
selecting the material, writing any headings, descriptive paragraphs,
etc., needed for the general arrangement of the bulletin board.
For the room bulletin board children individually or in groups
may be responsible for posting notices, announcements, drawings,
writings, etc., and writing any headings needed. Bulletin boards
should be carefully criticised and improved by the room group. To
supplement this bulletin board in first grade room reading charts
giving original stories worked out in class and reproduced by the
teacher may be posted, while for the higher grades special exhibits
of construction work and collections of materials illustrating special
units of work may be shown.
6. The school newspaper
The school newspaper may be of great service to language work
if correctly handled so as to use the very best work of every pupil
and keep the quality and variety of contributions improving. Much
can be taught in this way, even though the newspaper is not printed.
A mimeograph or a hectograph may be used for making multiple
copies. Hectographing lends impetus to good handwriting and so
served a double purpose. It is often a good plan to let more than
one pupil make a copy for finished product. Where there is no
school newspaper a grade group may issue a newspaper, real or
fictitious, such as a bird's newspaper which will give training in
newspaper style, newspaper contributions and pupil leadership.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 129
7. The "magic" of concrete objects and illustrative material
Talking about an object which the pupil can hold in his hand
and use for illustrative purposes is a natural situation and seems
to give encouragement to the most self-conscious. A good begin-
ning point with pupils who are unused to talking may be made by
having them bring interesting objects from home and tell others
about them, or to tell about something he has done and use objects
for illustrating. If the child tells about "A Queer Pin Cushion my
Grandmother Gave Me," "How I Made My Radio," "The Knife Santa
Brought Me," or "How John and I Made a Bird Trap" and presents
the object, he becomes less self-conscious and speaks more freely
and other children recall similar experiences and wish to make a
personal contribution.
8. Interesting informal experiences
No other type of language is richer in possibilities than inter-
esting, informal experiences such as making soap, dressing a skin,
painting window boxes, making flower beds, hanging pictures, etc.
Practically all the language training in the earlier grades is done
by capitalizing on such experiences. These are particularly valu-
able from the standpoint of vocabulary building and sentence struc-
ture. The pupil meets new terms in handling the materials used,
and through the wide reading which is often necessary in order to
learn how to carry out a project as a part of a large unit of study.
The situation stimulates thinking, as is clearly shown by the ques-
tions asked during such a period. Many opportunities for exercising
judgment in a natural situation arises; e. g., "What shall we use
in substitute for real skins for covering our drums? Who can best
advise us about this matter? Will it be cheaper in the end? Could
we dress the skins ourselves if we bought them from a trapper?
What would they cost?" Such questions form a basis for lively dis-
cussion both among the group and in smaller groups. The definite
knowledge which comes from having taken part in the activity leads
to clearness and to proper sequence in oral and written reports
based on such concrete experiences. The pupil who has studied the
manufacture of cloth, has visited a local plant and has written an
account of the trip finds it much less difficult to organize than he
would a talk on an imaginary experience such as "What I Would
Like to do Next Saturday."
It is of great importance, therefore, that the work for each grade
be based on child needs and child interests, centering around a few
major topics common to the group and lending to child activity. As
language needs in a formal way develop each can be taken care of,
and the teacher should see that situations are such as will provide
for sufficient training in all language forms expected of her group
or grade.
9. Sharing work with other grades
Work which has been particularly enjoyed may be shared with
other grades. If a pupil gives a talk, a book review, an original
story or poem of unusual interest, a note may be written to another
class either inviting them in or telling them that a pupil will give
130 Course of Study for the
his talk in their grade if they wish. If the offer is accepted, the
pupil goes into the grade to give his talk, is introduced, and at the
end of his talk gives an opportunity for any of the group to ask
questions. The informal discussion which follows may be made to
bring out many valuable attitudes such as asking questions from
a sincere desire to know, and willingness on part of the speaker
to admit that he does not know.
A similar practice with groups of pupils may be carried on in
doing grade units of work. For instance, a third grade may tell a
fourth grade about an interesting study of bees which they have
carried on. In preparing to talk to others and especially younger
pupils, any group or grade may well keep the following points in
mind:
a. Plan a beginning which will interest the children in the talk.
b. Work out an explanation for any unusual terms so that all,
and especially the little children, can understand.
c. Make the time short.
d. If practical, use objects for illustrating.
e. Give the listeners opportunity for asking questions and en-
courage them to do so from time to time.
10. Putting work in permanent form,
The making of a class story book; a record book to preserve
interesting subject matter in science, history, geography, or health;
a book of original poems; posters; school and grade newspapers;
diaries; etc., furnish interest and valuable training in language.
(See other subject matter courses for additional suggestions.)
REFERENCES:
See reference for subject matter and organization.
Leonard. Essential Principles of Teaching Reading and Literature. Lippincott.
Woodberry. Appreciation of Literature. Harcourt.
Mearns. Creative Youth. Doubleday.
Mearns. Creative Education. Doubleday.
Wohlfarth. Self-Help Methods of Teaching English. World.
Bryant. How to Tell Stories to Children. Houghton.
Bryant. Stories to Tell to Children. Houghton.
Salisbury. An Activity Curriculum. Harr.
Moore. A Quantitative Study of Oral English in the Primary Grades. Houghton.
Haywood. Lessons in Appreciation. Macmillan.
Borening. Developing Appreciation Through Teaching Literature. John Hopkins Press.
Gardner-Ramsey. A Handbook of Children's Literature. Scott.
Harding. The Children's Own Book of Letters and Stories. Marshall.
IV. Organization of the Course.
In the preparation of the course by grades the general abilities, in-
stincts, interests and activities of children have been taken into consider-
ation in order that initiative and self-control may be developed. The com-
plexity of present-day life is also recognized and an attempt has been
made to provide for numerous situations wherein the pupil may learn to
cooperate, to have and to use the finest social spirit and eventually to
develop right ideals along with a comprehensive good will and the mastery
of essential knowledges and skills. The objectives set up and the subject
matter suggested are those that will likely contribute to the realization
of these purposes — more specifically stated in the expected outcomes by
grades. Suggested method and procedure in teaching and learning are
emphasized to the exclusion of simply "hearing lessons." These forms of
instruction appear especially significant in all learning situations en-
volving habit formation, and it is believed that the recommendations
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 131
herein provided are in harmony with the findings of modern educational
psychologists.
A. TIME ALLOTMENT
The most effective instruction is that which centers attention on
the pupils and their needs rather than the subject matter and the time
to be used. If pupil needs are to determine what is to be taught, the
subject matter lines become faint and over-lapping. For this reason
no one is able to say just how much time should constitute a language
lesson period, a day's work or a week's work; but certainly such time
and attention should be given as will insure rapid growth and in equal
proportion to learning in other subjects. Since language is of great
importance within itself and is a controlling factor in growth in other
subjects, it seems that too much time and attention can scarcely be
given to language. The enriching of the language course automatically
tends to reduce the needs in other subjects.
The relative proportion of time to be given to oral and to written
composition is also an indefinable term, but may be estimated in terms
of the best available research. Moore, Sheridan and Mahoney, as a
result of their investigations have set up on a percentage time bases
the following proportions for oral and for written work:
Oral Written
Range Range
First Grade 100% 00%
Second Grade 75-90 10-25
Third Grade 75-80 20-25
Fourth Grade __ 50-75 25-50
Fifth Grade 50-66 34-50
Sixth Grade 50-66 34-50
Seventh Grade 50 50
The relative proportion recommended above does not indicate the
total amount of time to be given to the language course; neither does
it show the relation of composition to the teaching of literature which
is essentially a part of both the language and the reading course and
closely related to and a part of other subject matter courses such as
history, geography, science, health, etc. However, with a broad selec-
tion of literature, language texts, pictures, pupils' general reference
material, practical and interesting language topics an integrated course
should be developed which will insure for language approximately one-
fourth of the pupils' total time in the first three grades; and range
with the advancing grades from one-fifth to one-sixth of the pupils'
total school time.
B. AIMS AND OBJECTIVES
Aims and objectives for the various grades are the result of sug-
gestions from many sources, in keeping with accepted language authori-
ties as to grade essentials, and thought to be based upon the needs of
the elementary children of the state. These are recommended for use
and revision in order that language objectives may be set up which
should go into a still more scientific course of study as course of study-
making is carried forward.
The teacher as a contributor to this work should constantly ques-
tion, evaluate, revise and enlarge upon the suggested objectives for
her grade and other grades, and report same to a language committee
when she thinks she has an outstanding contribution to offer.
132 Course of Study for the
C. MATERIALS
In the set-up by departments and specific grades suggestions are
offered as to material available for wholesome stimulation of both pupils
and teacher through reading and through natural situations arising in
the group from time to time as based on pupils' interests, experiences
and needs. These are expected to produce conversation, composition,
letter-writing, memory work, dramatization, creative work and a desire
for more and richer reading experiences. Specific suggestions are made
as to desirable readings and interesting topics and subjects to be
handled. The references, however, do not represent either the minimum
or the maximum grade essentials, but offer pupil and teacher leads
which may help the teacher to recognize and provide for pupil differ-
ences and to develop the strongest possible language powers and quali-
ties on the part of all the pupils.
The references are intended more as reminders of the breadth and
possibilities in language rather than as requirements to be met. The
successfully ambitious teacher will use most of the pupil and teacher
references and much in addition. She will also systematize the work
as to plans and teaching so as to include the various phases of language
and have at all times an adequate record and a sane evaluation of the
accomplishments of the group and of individuals, as well as plans for
future work with the group.
D. METHOD AND PROCEDURE
Suggestions regarding the method and procedure are intended to
offer guidance and stimulation which will not only reasonably assure
successful outcomes, but lead to an abundance of additional and de-
sirable undertakings which the teacher will record, and from which
she will select the most successful to report to the language committee
as her contribution to the further improvement of the teaching of
language.
The present recommendations are made in the light of two existing
methods of teaching language and the modifications of these: (1) lan-
guage for language's sake — the formal type based principally on the
mastery of grammar, the tools of writing, and memorization, all of
which require a great deal of drill and often without interest; (2) the
more democratic and progressive approach to education as a whole and
language in particular which would make definite provision for subject
matter mastery, standards of accomplishments (attainments, objectives,
outcomes, etc.) and a differentiated and integrated course built on the
needs, interests, and abilities of children in the present and probable
future. This would recognize the child and his needs as of greatest
importance and all other things as possible contributing factors. It
also provides for the unification of subjects in the form of projects,
large units of study and activity programs, tending toward a child-
centered school.
A modification of the two extreme types of instruction attempts to
provide for an interesting, democratic and scientific approach which
will cause the teacher to experiment and discover for herself such
principles as she can successfully put into practice. Specific grade
and topic illustrations are given as suggestive only. These cannot be
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 133
re-taught as outlined and made as effective as when the problem or
problems originate with the pupils and teachers. These, however, serve
as suggestive procedure and means of organizing and evaluating the
work.
The method and procedure outlined provide for a frequent analysis
of the pupil ability and accomplishment in terms of the results of
informal and formal tests supplemented with other information which
may be available concerning the pupil. References and illustrations
are also given in an attempt to meet the various grade needs.
As a guide to effective language growth it is suggested that ap-
proved standards of attainments within a subject or for a special phase
of the subject (such as letter-writing, making an oral talk, etc.) may
be worked out by pupils and teacher for grades or group mastery. See
illustrations.
E. OUTCOMES
Those listed for the primary and the intermediate grades as well
as for the specific grades are thought to be the most essential and that
which may be expected in terms of the former suggestions. The teacher
should give very careful consideration to these, but never teach them
as such. To do so narrows growth and defeats the purpose. Use the
expected outcomes only as a means for evaluating pupil and teacher
effort and modifying instruction to insure broad and satisfactory
development.
F. REFERENCES
References are given to substantiate recommendations and to con-
serve space where a more complete treatise is desired. (See pages 125,
130, 139, 177.)
PART THREE: LANGUAGE IN THE PRIMARY GRADES
INTRODUCTION
Many of the misfits in adult life seem to be traceable to the lack of a
wholesome environment and proper guidance during the early years of
childhood. The child who fails to develop into a desirable adult is often
one who has not been able to live completely and profitably in a world of
his own. In order to make such a life possible in school there must be a
gradual and harmonious transfer from the life in the home to life in
school and a blend of the two during the pupil's school life.
The home environment, human interests and abilities of pupils differ
so widely that it becomes necessary for the teacher to take this into ac-
count and guide and instruct accordingly. She should strive for the de-
velopment of a desire to talk well, an ability to do so, and an understanding
and appreciation for good grade literature. In order to do this definite
time must be provided, an atmosphere of ease must be in evidence and
the teacher must have something suitable to offer pupils in the form of
conversation, stories, rimes, pictures, song, dramatization and games.
Reading material for pupils' own use should be provided as early in the
first grade and in the other grades as the pupil's mastery of reading
mechanics will permit, along with definite help in the use of same.
134 Course of Study for the
The language work of the first grade should be informal, though a
regular period is set apart for training in both oral and written work
and the use of literature (in connection with the reading course). Specific
training should be given in listening.
In the second grade should come a more decided ability to tell a story
in sequence, give a short description without irrelevant detail, and to con-
struct complete sentences and brief paragraphs with aid and suggestions
from the teacher. Written work should be introduced frequently, but
sparingly, and under close supervision. Pupils should read for themselves
and discuss stories, rimes, poems, etc., in this grade.
In addition to strengthening the work of lower grades the third grade
should have decided training in paragraphing, letter-writing, in making
siruple outlines as guides, in relating experiences in the use of new words
found in reading and words needed for expressing thoughts and in listen-
ing to others.
Since no language text is to be in the hands of pupils and practically
no formal language is to be taught as such during the first three years
the work of the first three grades should be considered as a unit with
such demarcation as may be necessary in order to distinguish one year's
work from that of another and in order to aid the teacher in checking on
the pupil accomplishments and evaluating the results of her own work.
1. General Objectives
a. To create an appreciation for the best in nature, literature,
and art.
b. To train in effective conversation, story-telling and drama-
tization.
c. To train in effective listening.
d. To establish certain skills in the use of language forms.
e. To encourage creative language work along the lines of indi-
vidual ability.
The development of these will necessarily be gradual but should be
in decided evidence on the part of all the pupils by the time they have
completed the general school requirements for the first three grades.
2. The Conversation Period
The conference period affords an excellent opportunity for empha-
sizing oral expression. This period should be so organized that it be-
comes a true conference in which the pupil actually talks and has an
opportunity to tell his experiences. It should be a social period in
which the discussions are most informal. The half circle formation
with the pupils facing the teacher seems to be the best arrangement
for small groups of young pupils. It is important that each pupil be
placed so that he is physically comfortable. The teacher should have
at all times a pleasing, clear, and well-modulated tone of voice, a com-
mand of good language and an appreciation of good books and poetry.
She is the standard that the children imitate. If her voice is of good
quality and her language correct, these characteristics will become
evident ir- the speech of her pupils.
The requirements insisted upon during the conversation period
should be those in use outside of school. It is not always necessary
for a pupil to rise or stand erect while talking to the group. He should,
however, refrain from touching any object except for purpose of
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 135
illustrating. The social situation determines the fitness of any given
response and the teacher should help pupils to make habitual those
responses which contribute to the pleasure and comfort of all. The
position when addressing a group is quite different from that of speak-
ing to a small social group. The conditions of ordinary conversation
should prevail as far as possible in the classroom, and in all work there
should be an atmosphere of enjoyment and friendship.
Every subject in the curriculum correlates naturally with language.
Conversation may occur, follow and be based on the outcomes of any
other subject matter period. At this time the work and results of the
period are discussed, and criticisms and suggestions for improvement
are offered by the children.
The pupil's training in oral language begins when he has an experi-
ence he desires to express and share with others. In order to help the
pupil grow in ability to communicate ideas, the teacher should en-
courage him to talk and to listen, and to ask and to answer questions
with all possible freedom.
Pupils should practice wholesome and constructive criticism of one
another's work in terms of definite measures such as may be worked
out in class and adopted for use. Example:
Did the speaker stand erect, at ease and so as to be seen by the
group ?
Did he use a pleasing voice?
Did he speak so as to be heard by all?
Did he have a good beginning sentence?
Did each sentence help to explain the thing he was talking about,
and follow in good order?
Did he have a good closing sentence?
Were his words well-chosen?
Was his language correct?
These may be more brief for first grade and made available in chart
form with provision for checking pupils' scores at intervals.
3. Story-Telling
Story-telling offers rich opportunities for language growth. Al-
though stories are told for the enjoyment they give and for their value
in forming good taste in literature, they also increase the vocabulary,
give wider experience, and aid in following a sequence.
When selecting a story to tell to children it is well to keep in mind
that the stories they enjoy most are those that have three common
characteristics. First, they story should be full of action. Children
are not interested in detailed explanation; they want stories that tell
what people do and say. Second, the story should contain elements
familiar to the every-day life of the child. Third, there should be
some degree of repetition. This is not an absolute requisite, but it is
one of the desirable qualities.
The old folk tales and rhymes are well-suited to the needs of the
younger children. Although a selection may be appropriate, it is of
little value unless the teacher appreciates good literature, feels the
charm of the story, and knows the story well. This does not mean
that the teacher must memorize the story, but that she should read
the story over and over until she knows the essentials and the order
136 Course of Study for the
in which they occur. Sureness, ease, and freedom in telling a story
come only from complete mastery.
Reproduction of stories should not be forced but should come volun-
tarily from the pupils. When a pupil volunteers to reproduce a story
he shows confidence in himself and indicates that he knows the story
and has the vocabulary to reproduce it. After a pupil has finished
telling his story, the teacher may comment upon the good points. By
this means he becomes acquainted with standards and learns the de-
sirable points essential to telling a story well. Since stories are told
for pleasure, avoid emphasis on speech errors. Speech errors should
be noted for future reference in planning corrective measures for the
individual child. (See suggestions in reading in grades one and two.)
4. Dramatization
Dramatization is a language exercise in which children have an
opportunity to express themselves in a natural and spontaneous man-
ner. The dramatic play most valuable to primary children is that which
represents their own experience or the experiences of people in their
environment.
When pupils are very familiar with a story, they may dramatize
it. Stories for dramatization should be full of action and have many
possibilities for representation. The pupils and not the teacher should
bear the responsibility of deciding the following: which story is a suit-
able one to play; what should be done in order to play the story; what
characters, setting, and properties are necessary for the play; what
pupils are best suited for the different characters; what should be used
for costumes and properties; what acts and scenes are necessary; and
what the characters should say or do. A pupil's own interpretation,
though crude, is preferable to a finished result which is obtained through
too much drill or assistance by the teacher.
Dramatization aids the child to think through one unit of thought,
and to combine those thoughts into a whole by following a proper
sequence. Through dramatic play pupils incorporate into their own
speech some expression and words of real value and thus secure a
training in oral language and literary appreciation which cannot be
obtained in any other way.
5. Speech Errors
The correction of speech errors deserves careful consideration. A
study has been made showing the most common speech errors occurring
through the grades. Of the total number, verb errors made up a very
large proportion. The misuse of pronouns is also responsible for a
great many more. To enable teachers to attack this problem more
effectively a distribution has been attempted allotting certain speech
errors to the content of each grade. The teacher should stress the
correcting of errors in the present and preceding grades.
At the beginning of the school year the teacher should make a sur-
vey in order to determine the gross errors of the pupils of her class
and plan her work accordingly. When the teacher has discovered that
certain incorrect forms are common, the children can be made conscious
of them by degrees and effective drill exercises which should follow.
The teacher should select from the language games those that furnish
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 137
opportunities for teaching correct forms and secure whole-hearted lan-
guage expression in which the pupils' interests and needs are most
evident.
6. Vocabulary Building
In language training, nothing is more important than helping the
pupils to know the value of using well-chosen words. So much depends
on what they hear and understand that a good example set by the
teacher is worthy of emphasis. Each week the teacher should definitely
plan to use new words. This will increase the hearing vocabulary of
the pupils. Curiosity is aroused in hearing a new word. An attractive
room chart or dictionary may be made of new words. The teacher
should be careful to explain meanings of new words and encourage
inquiries. With extra emphasis and careful suggestion the word be-
comes part of their speech vocabulary. (See suggestions in the spell-
ing course for training in the use of the dictionary as given for grades
4-7 inclusive.)
7. Written Composition
It is well to note how the transition from oral to written composition
is made so that whatever facility the pupil has acquired in oral ex-
pression can be transferred readily to the written form. Written com-
position involves the additional factors of handwriting, spelling, punc-
tuation, and capitalization. While the pupil is acquiring these skills
his mind must be partly occupied with them. Through previous dis-
cussion he should have become thoroughly familiar with the ideas which
he is to write so that the process of recording thought will not be re-
tarded by the necessity of clarifying ideas.
A large part of the written composition in the early primary grades
can best be accomplished through group work. Pupils should be en-
couraged to compose their own accounts of class activities. The teacher
should place these individual contributions on the blackboard or bulletin
board newspaper, and have some pupils copy many of the contributions
and all pupils copy some of the contributions during and after the
second half of first grade. This plan makes written records possible
before the skills are mastered, and this early study in composition is
a means by which pupils recognize the need for language forms in
written composition. The correct use of these in their own compo-
sitions will turn attention to those occurring in the reading and make
them more meaningful.
There is a need for written expression in the lives of pupils in the
primary grades, and opportunity for practice occurs daily. This may
be for the pupil to write his own name, to label a picture, or to write
a simple sentence. Plans growing out of class activities call for brief
records which offer natural occasions for learning to write simple
sentences. The pupil who has been taught to speak in complete sen-
tences will have acquired mental images, helpful in writing. If pupils
keep a record of daily happenings, a clear concept of the simple sen-
tence and an idea of paragraph unity can be well established by the
end of the third grade.
138 Course of Study for the
All written work should be carefully supervised. If pupils do not
have too much written work and all is carefully supervised, correct
writing habits may be attained quickly. Pupils should be encouraged
to ask for the spelling of unfamiliar words. The teacher should write
these on the blackboard and later use them in spelling if they are likely
to be needed in the regular written work of the grade. If a paper fails
to show needed punctuation the teacher may have the pupil read what
he has written and ask him how he can make the meaning clear.
No error should be allowed to pass unnoticed, but should receive im-
mediate correction. Quality not quantity should be the aim in all writ-
ten work.
8. Poetry*
Poetry is one of the arts and like all the arts, in order to enjoy it
fully, there must be training in appreciation. Young children are
naturally fond of rimes and simple poems of childhood. These should
be used freely, not only to awaken a sincere appreciation of the beauti-
ful in verse but to afford excellent language training. There is prob-
ably no other way by which a full, pure vocabulary can be acquired as
readily as in memorizing poems.
A teacher should, first of all, be able to present a poem adequately.
In order to do this, she must heartily appreciate both its ideas and the
harmony and beauty of the language in which the ideas are conveyed.
She must be able to act as an interpreter, penetrated by the poem and
forgetting self in the endeavor to convey to her listeners the message
of the poet.
Method of Teaching a Poem
a. Preparation
(1) Teacher's preparation: The teacher prepares to give the poem.
(2) Preparation in class: An atmosphere for the poem is created
by the use of pictures and by using the pupils' experiences
which are related to the poem. A motivation is given which
will make pupils eager to learn the poem.
(3) Teacher recites the entire poem for greater comprehension and
appreciation.
(4) The "whole" method is used in memorization. In learning a
poem when verbatim exactness is required, time is saved by
employing the "whole" method. A poem has one simple theme,
a unit made of connected thoughts. By the "whole" method,
the selection is studied logically for main and secondary ideas.
The poem is repeated until thoroughly known. The element
of enjoyment should be kept throughout the memorization.
b. Study of parts
After pupils have gained an understanding of the whole poem,
they are ready to analyze whole thoughts.
c. The new whole
The poem is recited again by the teacher who gives careful at-
tention to thought-phrasing, vocalization, enunciation and pronunci-
ation. Pupils get the whole poem from hearing it many times. A
complete unit of thought should be used as a basis for memorizing
if it is necessary to divide the poem into parts.
d. Follow-up work
This may come from reciting the poem or best liked parts, re-
reading, copying, selecting and using choice words and illustrating
with drawings, dramatizations and pantomimes.
*Adapted from Minnesota Curriculum for Elementary Schools.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 139
9. Teachers' Reading and Reference. (See references given in Part
Two.)
Bryce. Language Training. Newson. .
Scott and others. Teachers' Manual for Use of the Open Door Language Series. Houghton.
McConathy and others. The Music Hour Series, Grade 1-7. Silver.
Barnes. Types of Children's Literature. World.
Barnes. The Children's Poets. World.
Gardner-Ramsey. A Handbook of Children's Literature. Scott.
FIRST GRADE
The language work for this grade has been outlined under the follow-
ing heads:
1. Suggested first grade objectives (such as the teacher may have in
mind in teaching).
2. Subject matter and activities (which should help to realize these
objectives).
3. Procedure (such as many teachers have found satisfactory in teach-
ing) .
4. An illustration of a reading unit as a basis for language work.
5. Expected first grade language outcomes (in terms of the former
recommendations) .
6. References.
Much of the detail of the work as well as the accomplishments in the
grades remain with the teacher. She should plan her work carefully and
keep full records (with illustrations) of accomplishments. The best con-
tributions should be submitted to a language committee for use in the
further revision of the course.
I. Suggested first grade objectives.
1. To provide opportunity and suitable material for the development
of spontaneous oral language.
2. To develop ease and freedom of expression directed to a realization
of things within the pupil's experience worth saying.
3. To increase each pupil's vocabulary through group discussions and
other experiences.
4. To encourage in pupils clear enunciation, pronunciation and pleas-
ing expressive tone of voice.
5. To establish correct practice in the oral and the written language
suited to first grade.
6. To train children in the use of courteous forms of speech as Ex-
cuse me," "Thank you," etc.
7. To develop appreciation for a good story, poem or picture.
8. To arouse or stimulate imagination and desire to create through
many avenues of expression.
9. To develop ability and desire to plan and participate in a simple
dramatization.
10. To develop power in the habit of good attention.
II. Subject matter and activities.
A. MATERIALS
No language text is required of the pupils in this grade. The teach-
er's text, "Language Training" by Bryce, and the "Teachers' Guide
for the use of the Open Door Language Series" suggest procedure based
on the use of various kinds of good reading material. This material
should have literary value, be composed of stories, rimes, ballads, poems,
pictures and songs and be of first grade interest. Much should also be
of first grade reading difficulty. The material should include: (1) read-
ing matter for teacher's use in selecting and preparing a story, poem,
140 Course of Study for the
rime, etc., to be given to the pupils; (2) reading matter which the
pupils can learn to use during the year. The picture books and Mother
Goose rhymes should be introduced early in the year and supplemented
with stories, rimes, etc., given .by the teacher. See
Bryant. How to Tell Stories to Children. Houghton.
Bryant. Stories to Tell Children. Houghton.
Wiggins-Smith. Tales of Laughter. Doubleday.
Baily. For the Children's Hour. Milton.
Drakesbill. The Story-Teller's Book. Rand.
Curry-Clippinger. Children's Literature. Rand.
The actual amount of reading matter to be used should be determined
by the teacher and by the particular needs of the class. Some may
read for themselves twelve or fifteen books and special selections in
still others, all of which will insure a knowledge of a large number of
stories, Mother Goose rhymes and poems, while others, pupils will do
well to be able, at the end of the year, to reproduce eight or ten stories
and an equal number of rimes and poems — the minimum promotion
level.
For leads into the various kinds of material see lists at the end of
this outline, the home reading list by grades, pages 679-681, in Curry-
Clippinger's Literature for Children and the N. C. E. A. State ap-
proved library list for elementary and high schools. The reading ma-
terial used in all first grade school subjects such as reading, health,
etc., may be considered language material because all reading and
speaking is language expression and should be approached in terms of
generally accepted standards in language.
B. ACTIVITIES
The activities should be many and varied. They should come as
spontaneous expressions of the pupils' daily interests and be kept in
his realm of thinking and experiencing. The activities should be of
such nature as to aid the child in assimilating and using both the home
and the school experiences in meeting new situations. These may
include:
Talking with the teacher and with the group.
Saying the names of other children, plants, things in the room, mem-
bers of the family, counting, the days of the week, etc.
Asking and answering questions with regard to things and persons
of interest.
Planning for parties.
Carrying messages to the principal's office, other classrooms, to the
parents, to sick ones, to one in charge with assembly.
Holding telephone conversation and imaginary conversation.
Repeating correct language forms, especially as found in language
games.
Hearing and telling interesting experiences at home or school; dur-
ing a visit; because of a surprise or accident; or following an
observation based on birds, flowers, trees, animals, weather cal-
endar, acquarium, sandtable construction, or other pieces of con-
struction work done in class.
Hearing and telling about other things: Our helpers — policeman,
postman, fireman, grocer, etc.; special days — Thanksgiving, Hal-
lowe'en, Christmas, Valentine's Day, Easter, Declaration Day,
and birthdays; street experiences — an accident on the street,
meeting and greeting people, going to a fire, going on excursions
and trips.
Re-telling stories and incidents and reciting riddles, rimes and poems.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 14i
Dramatizing- stories and incidents heard, stories read, and incidents
observed.
Describing and discussing interesting pictures.
Preparing and presenting a puppet show.
Labeling objects with one's own name to denote ownership or with
the name of the article.
Discussion and copying seasons' greetings from the teacher's black-
board production of the group discussion: Christmas, New Year,
Valentine's Day, Easter, Mother's Day.
Determining and writing (copying) for the bulletin board special
notices, rimes, names of posters, etc.
Writing titles to or names for booklets, pictures, exhibits, posters,
stories, etc.
Singing songs and Mother Goose rhymes.
Memorizing rimes, poems and songs.
Giving directions and dictation.
See standards for iudsring an activity, page 168, and Classroom
Teacher, Vol. Ill, page 181.
III. Procedure.
Before attempting to teach for the sake of gaining knowledge, substi-
tuting correct for incorrect speech, reading books, etc., an initial period
of strictly informal classroom work is necessary for the purpose of giving
the teacher time to know her pupils, their experiences previous to enter-
ing school, their home environment, their native ability and personal
interests. This also makes provision for the pupil to adapt himself to
school, make an association of home and school experiences in meeting
new situations and to respond in a normal way. Changing from the home
to the school environment may at first produce either of the two conditions:
(1) an excitable nature which causes the pupil to speak excessively and
incoherently, or (2) a shy and retiring nature with a tendency to refrain
from talking. The teacher should watch carefully to detect such conditions
and try to develop naturalness on the part of all. As this is done through
informal conversation, the teacher's telling and the pupils' re-telling and
discussing stories, the teacher learns more of the individual differences
and makes plans for meeting these. When sufficient understanding has
been gained, she should group pupils in terms of common needs and cause
them to choose such activities as will contribute to specific language growth.
These should result in well-directed pupil initiated conversation, story-
telling, listening, re-telling stories, dramatizing, memorizing, singing, writ-
ing and drawing, especially for illustrative purposes. See introduction to
primary grades, page 133, for more complete discussion of these.) Topics
may be developed in the field of nature study, reading, industrial and fine
arts, music, social studies, physical education and health. These should
show an integration of subject matter and receive full treatment as
language development regardless of the situation in which they appear.
A. ORAL COMPOSITION
1. Topics for Oral Composition
a. Excursions to places of immediate environment
(1) Parks. Looking at birds, animals and shrubbery. Playing
games and eating lunches.
(2) Post office
Mailing letters or packages.
Buying stamps.
Making a post office at school.
142 Course of Study for the
(3) Grocery store
Seeing things on the shelves.
Visiting the storeroom, butcher, etc.
Watching clerk at work, making change.
Buying groceries.
Making a toy grocery store at school.
b. Special occasions
(1) Holidays — Christmas, Thanksgiving, Decoration Day.
(2) Birthday parties
Preparing luncheon.
Making and using decorations.
Playing hostess or guest.
(3) School festivals, pageants, fairs, and special visiting days.
(4) Working out and conducting a circus, fair, or an out-door
movie.
c. Picture and story books
(1) Telling what is seen in pictures.
(2) Describing an original drawing based on a picture observed.
(3) Repeating rhymes, based on pictures.
(4) Originating rhymes and stories.
d. Informal dramatic play
(1) Playing store.
(2) Playing movies.
(3) Playing policeman.
(4) Playing postman.
e. Transportation
(1) Obtaining merchandise.
(2) Sending merchandise from distant places.
f. Nature
(1) Plant life
Observing growth and development of plants from seeds.
(These may be grown at school.)
Recognizing common fall and spring flowers and how
they grow.
Observing trees.
(2) Animal life
Pets — care, habits, food, value to us.
Birds — color, size, nature, etc., and how birds are fed
and cared for in the nests.
Weather — observation of conditions and interpreting
from time to time weather chart kept by the class.
g. Music
(1) Discussing songs.
(2) Making verse for original song.
(3) Discussing costume for musical performance and parts for
each person to play.
h. Hygiene, health and safety
(1) Necessary preparation for eating
(2) Best kind of food to eat.
(2) Correct way to eat.
(4) How to take exercise.
(5) The care of personal clothing.
(6) Obedience to traffic policeman.
2. Developing Technique Through Oral Composition
Through conversation, story-telling and other phases of the lan-
guage work the following should be emphasized:
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 143
a. Making clear and complete statements as in giving directions,
giving accounts of experiences, telling stories clearly enough to
hold the attention of the group.
b. Keeping to the point or thought under consideration.
c. Speaking in connected sequence. (This should be interpreted to
the pupil as making his story interesting and straightforward.
d. Using the right words. (This demands a broad and growing
vocabulary and an ability to choose words in terms of thought
to be expressed.)
e. Speaking with a well-modulated and controlled voice so the en-
tire group can hear. (The development of voice control and
thoughtfulness on the part of the speaker will aid here.)
f. Having a gracious and natural manner.
(See introduction to primary grades, page 135, for attainments.)
B. WRITTEN COMPOSITION
Very little written work should be required in this grade, and this
should be confined principally to copying either on the blackboard or
from the teacher's writing on the blackboard. The pupils' writing
should be based on a felt need for such and preceded by conversation
and dictation to the teacher, who writes on the board the things the
pupil or pupils may wish to copy as an invitation, announcement, note
of thanks, request, names, etc. If a pupil brings an interesting object
he may, with the teacher's help, write the label giving the name of the
article or the pupil's own name. Pupils should learn to write their
names correctly from memory, but should have a model at first, and
may keep such for constant reference. (See Part Five, Composition
Standards, page 211, and The Classroom Teacher, Vol. Ill, pages 3-103.)
The language forms necessary to correct practice in all written
work undertaken in first grade should be taught as needs arise. These
will be confined principally to:
Capitals for beginning sentences and proper names. (It is not neces-
sary that pupils learn technical rules, but to know the differences be-
tween capital and small letters and to know that capitals are to be
used in specific words included in their written work.)
Periods following a statement.
Interrogation point (question mark) following a question.
Writing; full, uniform and connected letter formations for all words.
Proper spacing on paper to "look well." (This will include the
proper spacing of the salutation, signature, and the observation of
proper margins.
C. LANGUAGE FORMS
Remedial work in the form of language games should be given con-
stantly and with a definite purpose in mind each time as a means of
substituting correct for incorrect speech. This will be necessary for
the choice, the enunciation and the pronunciation of words, and should
be based on the needs as discovered by the teacher. She will find that
one group needs one type of drill while another group needs another
and that there are common needs of the class to be met, especially in
vocabulary building. See reading outline for vocabulary building. Give
special attention to the proper use of
may and can
"he and I" (using the second person first and the first person
second.)
144 Course of Study for the
words ending in ing
"where" not "whar"
"ain't chu" for "aren't" or "are you"
D. LITERATURE
1. Stories
a. Pupils may be expected to become familiar with twelve or fifteen
good stories and ready to reproduce the majority at any time.
b. Examples of well-selected stories. (This list is not to be inter-
preted as minimum essentials) :
The Boy Who Cried Wolf. Stories to Tell Children. Bryant.
The Gingerbread Boy. Stories to Tell Children. Bryant. '
The Straw Ox. Tales of Laughter. Wiggins-Smith.
The First Thanksgiving. Story Hour. Wiggins.
Little Black Sambo. Little Black Sambo. Stokes.
(See list of story books, Section VI, at end of outline, and the
introduction to primary grades for suggestions in the use of
stories.)
2. Poetry
a. Pupils may be expected to become familiar with twelve or fifteen
attractive rimes and poems and memorize those which make most
personal appeal.
b. Examples of attractive poems:
My Shadow. A Child's Garden of Verse. Rand.
Jack and Jill. Mother Goose. Stokes.
Little Jack Horner. Mother Goose. Stokes.
Little Bo-Peep. Mother Goose. Stokes.
The Lost Doll. Iroquois Book I. Iroquois.
The Little Kittens. Iroquois Book I. Iroquois.
IV. Language growth through unit teaching of reading.
(Reading parties furnish a social situation through which parents be-
come acquainted with actual classroom work and children share their joy
in accomplishment with their parents. This material is adapted from a
series of reports from classroom teachers and suited to first grade. While
no part is labeled language, practically every step has language value.)
A. HOW THE UNIT OF WORK ORIGINATED
It is natural for a first grade pupil to want to show his reading-
book to his parents. This is not always desirable as it leads the parents
to read the stories to the child, thereby lessening the value of the
material for classroom teaching.
In order to satisfy the children and not exhaust the reading ma-
terial, the teacher suggested that the class have a reading party at
school for the parents instead of taking the books home.
The children were eager for a party and began to make their plans.
B. HOW THE WORK WAS DEVELOPED
The children reviewed the stories they were able to read.
They decided which stories should be read to the parents.
They decided which of these stories should be dramatized, as they
were read, different children taking the parts of the different characters.
They decided which of the selected stories should be read by indi-
vidual children.
They decided which child should read each part. (All children were
included.)
They selected "The Three Little Pigs" to be presented as a movie.
They decided the stage properties needed.
They found or made the properties needed.
They decided to sing some songs for the parents.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 145
They decided, with the teacher's help, to have refreshments.
They decided what refreshments were possible to prepare and serve
without a kitchen.
They wrote invitations to their parents.
They decorated the room with autumn leaves.
They chose one pupil to announce the program.
They organized and gave the following program:
Songs by the class: "The Magic Tree." "The Three Rules," 'Goldenrod Plumes."
Story: "The Wee, Wee Woman."
Story: "The Kittens."
Song: "The Four-Leaf Clover."
Story: "Little Piggy Wig."
Movie: "The Three Little Pigs."
Story: "The Poor Shoemaker."
Song: "The Bells."
Story: "The Little Tin Train."
Play: "The Three Bears."
(About three weeks were spent on this unit of work.)
C. OUTCOMES IN TERMS OF THE CARDINAL OBJECTIVES
1. Social relationships
a. Team work in planning the program and presenting the program
and serving the refreshments.
b. Conducting one's self as host or hostess.
c. Gaining confidence in dealing with one's fellows.
2. Self -expression
a. Dramatization of "The Three Bears."
b. Drawing and painting for "The Three Little Pigs."
c. Oral reading of several stories*
d. Songs.
e. Social contacts in meeting and introducing their parents.
3. Critical thinking
a. Selecting the stories to be read, dramatized or presented as a
movie.
b. Deciding which pupil can best take each part.
c. Deciding what properties were absolutely necessary.
d. Giving constructive criticism at rehearsals.
4. Knowledge and skills
a. Practice in interpreting stories for others.
b. Writing invitations.
c. Making pictures and captions for the movies.
V. Suggested outcomes for first grade.
1. Ability to relate a simple experience correctly and with some
originality of expression.
2. Ability to effectively deliver a simple message.
3. A constantly developing and enriching vocabulary.
4. Correct usage of all language forms most common to first grade
and including:
a. Two or more forms of speech mis-used at beginning of term.
b. Correct use of capitals when writing sentences, names of people
and the pronoun /.
c. Correct use of the period at the end of a sentence.
5. Ability and practice in the use of courteous forms of speech : "Thank
you," "Excuse me," etc.
6. Appreciation of stories, poems, and pictures suited to the pupil's age.
7. Ability and desire to participate in simple dramatizations, rhymes
and other creative work suited to first grade interests and practice.
8. Ability to listen attentively where pupils are expected to give at-
tention.
146 Course of Study for the
Careful checking for the realization of the outcomes may be made
by the teacher or teacher and supervisor working together during the
year. The results for each pupil should become a part of his accumu-
lative record. A simple and effective chart for checking attainments
over a period of time may be made by listing in colunm form at the
top of a sheet of paper the things on which the group is to be checked
and at the left side of the sheet extending down a list of the pupils.
At regular intervals of a few weeks or a month record on the chart
each pupil's progress by inserting statements giving evidence of progress
and final check when accomplishment has become satisfactory.
VI. Reference for pupil material. (For teaching helps see pages 125,
130 and 139.)
STORY BOOKS
Grade
-1 — Brooke. Johnny Crow's Garden; a Picture Book. Warne.
1-2— Caldecott. Hey Diddle Diddle Picture Book. Warne.
1-3 — Cox. Brownies, Their Book. Century.
1-3— Crane. Old Mother Hubbard Picture Book. Dodd.
1-2 — Field. An Alphabet for Boys and Girls. Doubleday.
1-2 — Greenaway. A -Apple Pie. Warne.
1-2 — Adelborg. Clean Peter and the Children of Grubbylea. Longmans.
-1 — Bannerman. Story of Little Black Sambo. Stokes.
1-3 — Gabriel. My Book of Cats and Dogs. Gabriel.
-1 — Grover. Sunbonnet Babies' Primer. Rand.
1-3 — Orton. Little Lost Pigs. Stokes.
1-2 — Smith. Chicken World. Putnam.
1-3 — Williamson. A Monkey Tale; Pictures by Berta and Elmer Hader. Doubleday.
1-3 — Rae. Children at Play in Many Lands. Volland.
1-2 — Dunn and Troxell. Baby Animals. Row.
1-2 — Potter. Peter Rabbit. Warne.
1-3 — Read. Grandfather's Farm. Scribner's.
1-2 — Tippett. This Singing Farmer. Warne.
POETRY
1-4 — De La Mare. Peacock Pie. Holt.
1-3 — Le Mair. Old Nursery Rhymes, No. 2. McKay.
1-3 — Lofting. Porridge Poetry. Stokes.
1-2 — Mother Goose. The Little Mother Goose. Stokes.
1-2 — Mother Goose. The Real Mother Goose. Rand.
1-2 — Poulsson. The Runaway Donkey and Other Rhymes for Children. Lothrop.
-1 — Iroquois. Literature (for reading and memorizing). Book I. Iroquois.
Attractive grade poems as determined by research and • reported by Huber in Teachers
College Record, Volume XXVIII, No. 2:
A Visit from St. Nicholas. Moore. Only One Mother. Cooper.
A Farmer Went Riding. Unknown. The Woodpecker. Roberts.
Frogs at School. Cooper. The Rabbit. King.
Jack-in-the-Pulpit. Holland. The Child and the Fairies. Unknown.
I Like Little Pussy. Taylor. Three Jovial Huntsmen. Unknown.
PICTURES COMMONLY USED IN FIRST GRADE
An Aristocrat. Landseer. Fairy Tales. Shannon.
Baby Stuart. Van Dyck. Feeding the Birds. Millet.
Boy With the Rabbit. Raeburn. Saying Grace. Chardin.
Can You Talk? Holmes. The Primary School in Britany. Geoffrey.
Children of the Shell. Murillo. Nurse and Child. Hals.
SECOND GRADE
The work in this grade should be a continuation and an expansion of
the work started in first grade with continued emphasis on oral composition
and the reading of good books of various kinds. Suggestions for the work
have been organized around the following heads:
1. Suggested second grade objectives (for the teacher's guidance).
2. Subject matter and activities (for the development of objectives
outlined).
3. Procedure (such as has worked successfully with many teachers).
4. An illustration of unit teaching as a means of securing interest.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 147
5. Expected second grade outcomes (in terms of the former recom-
mendations).
6. References.
I. Suggested second grade objectives
1. To continue the development of first grade objectives.
2. To increase pupil power to talk with ease and fluency about every-
day experiences and to ask and to answer good questions.
3. To lead pupils to appreciate and practice correct usage of gram-
matical forms most common to second grade.
4. To develop pupil ability to write one or two good sentences on a
topic.
5. To produce desirable pupil and group responses to grade situations
calling for short notes, letters, announcements and messages.
6. To increase appreciation for good stories, rhymes, poems and pic-
tures.
7. To develop the ability to listen, and to tell some things one likes
about stories, rimes, poems, pictures and songs.
8. To lead pupils to produce original rimes and stories.
9. To develop pupil ability and desire to plan and conduct a simple
dramatization.
10. To increase each pupil's stock of stories, rimes, poems and riddles
and. the desire to reproduce literary selections.
II. Subject matter and activities
A. MATERIALS
As in first grade no language text is required of the pupils. The
teacher's text, "Language Training," by Bryce, and "The Teachers'
Guide to the Use of the Open Door Language Series," offer suggestions
for the work. These may be supplemented with suggestions from
other professional references as given on pages 130 and 139. Criteria
for the selection of subject matter and activities may be found on
page 168.
The content material, found in a broad collection of books ranging
from first to third grade in difficulty, should consist of a variety of
stories, games, rimes, poems and riddles. The material may be of two
kinds: (1) that which the teacher uses with the pupil in reading, telling,
reciting, etc., for their enjoyment and (2) that which the pupils are
able to master under guidance. The last mentioned type should include
material which the pupils can read and enjoy independently. It should
also furnish desirable means for group entertainment. The reading
matter used in second grade should, therefore, include Mother Goose
rimes, old folk tales, classic fables, Indian myths and legends, Scandi-
navian myths (Fenris the Wolf, Loke the Crafty One, Thor, etc.), Greek
myths, Bible stories (Story of Joseph, Daniel, Esther, Moses, Noah's
Ark, Creation, The Ten Commandments, etc.), true stories of modern
life, and poetry of various kinds. See reference lists, section VI of
this outline.
B. ACTIVITIES
Conversing informally and freely with the teacher and in groups
using topics of general interest; discussing duties in the classroom;
plans for projects, plays, parties, games, entertainments, picnics, etc.;
discussing or criticizing pictures; discussing stories and poems read,
pictures drawn by individuals, writing done by individuals and playing
telephone, grocery story, etc.
Planning for a class bulletin board.
148 Course of Study for the
Relating experiences in connection with the home, toys, pets, games,
excursions, school, special holidays, health and street or highway ac-
tivities.
Telling how to do or to make things.
Telling about dreams, imaginary experiences, amusing accidents and
stunts.
Reproducing stories, riddles, rimes, poems, jokes, games and songs.
Giving descriptions of pictures, persons, animals, places and things.
Pretending to be an animal, a tree, a bird, a giant, a fairy, a fish
or a goat.
Imitating the fireman, the postman, the traffic policeman, the street
sweeper, the salesman.
Composing sentences, riddles, rimes, and stories.
Matching words as to meaning, rhy.hm, class (action words, names
of clothing, descriptions, etc.).
Studying titles of stories: discussing fitness, substituting titles,
making up titles for new stories.
Counting objects in the room, sentences in a paragraph, words in
a list, etc.
Asking and answering questions of more difficult nature than those
introduced in first grade.
Dramatizing: planning and acting out stories and plays read or
heard and original stories and plays. These may be connected with
special seasons: as Thanksgiving, Christmas, May Day, Easter and
Valentine.
Making booklets, illustrations and costumes in class.
Copying, taking dictation, composing and comparing, filling blanks
and revising in written work.
Keeping a diary.
Writing greetings for special occasions or holidays: Merry Christ-
mas, "To My Valentine," "Happy Birthday."
Writing instructions, labels, bulletins: "Please do not erase," "Wet
paint," "Do not touch."
Writing chart material: "Drink milk," "Eat slowly," "Run," "Wash
hands."
Composing and writing labels for pictures, illustrations, objects,
cutting, etc., e.g., "The Flower Girl," "The Garage Door."
Writing announcements, invitations and social letters, and respond-
ing to announcements, invitations and letters received.
III. Procedure
Read introduction to primary grades. As in first grade the teacher
should strive for pupil freedom and enthusiasm in spontaneous expres-
sion and constantly guide the responses into more mature taste and
judgment. The amount of time to be given to language course should
be determined by the general nature of the second grade program for
the year. (See time allotment, page 131.) The correlation and inte-
gration of language work with other subjects taught is more essential
than the length of language periods. The language course should
attempt to meet all the needs of all the pupils in the grade or group
being taught and should be built on the accomplishments of the previous
year and the present needs as determined by a careful investigation by
the teacher. She should make a study of her pupils' school record,
home conditions, intelligence test results (if available), subject matter
introduced in first grade and the extent to which this has been learned.
The pupils should form special groups within the classroom for activi-
ties and development in terms of common needs. See suggestions on
page 126 for grouping within the grade for instructional purposes.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 149
A. ORAL COMPOSITION
Before a child can speak freely, he must have something he wishes
ro say. (See section A, of first grade reading.)
Conversation enables the teacher to take stock of:
The pupil's range of interests and experiences.
His power of expression.
His difficulties.
Choose a topic of general interest. Ask well directed questions
that will hold the pupils to the subject and encourage contributions.
Have in mind an outline for the discussion to prevent rambling and
aimless talking. Errors of speech and procedure should be corrected
after a pupil has finished talking or at a still later time to avoid inter -
f erring with his line of thought. (See page 136.)
Guide in the selection and development of many, varied and appro-
priate grade topics. Let as many of these come from the pupils
themselves as possible. Develop standards for rating contributions and
a friendly spirit of rivalry.
Provide opportunity for many varied experiences through projects,
plays, games, books, pictures, museum material and duties within the
classroom and unconsciously direct to the point of securing satisfactory
responses. Help pupils to relate personal experiences with interesting
sequence of events.
For use of stories see introduction to primary grades and vary to
suit the needs and interests of the group and the grade difficulty. Tell
short interesting stories in an interesting manner. Clear up the meaning
of words by asking questions, giving explanations and writing brief
outline or main points and key words on the board as the story pro-
gresses. Re-tell the story if necessary, or if it is requested. Call upon
several pupils to reproduce consecutive parts. One of the stronger
pupils may then be allowed to tell the complete story. Teach the
essentials of good story-telling in such a way as to cause pupils to read
and reproduce interesting stories independently. These should include
imaginary stories based on the study of a picture, what one would like
to do or what the pupil would do if he were a certain animal, bird, etc.
Example: if the class or group were trying to develop an imaginary trip
let pupils select the place they wish to go, how many are going, why
they are going, the kind of conveyance and ask leading questions in
order to secure a well-rounded-out story.
The teacher may also develop imaginary stories by giving a good
beginning (topical) sentence and letting pupils complete the story.
Spend some time on riddles and lead pupils to make some for them-
selves. Develop several class riddles before asking for or insisting on
individual contributions.
Rimes, jingles and short poems may be treated in similar way. See
suggestions in introduction to primary grades for use of poems and the
reference to poems at end of this outline. Pupils may be led to
memorize a dozen poems, more or less, during the year.
150 Course of Study for the
B. WRITTEN COMPOSITION
All written work should be preceded by oral work and an outgrowth
of a felt need for the specific written work such as writing a letter to
a pupil who is ill, sending invitations to parents to attend some special
program, copying riming words in order to find still others which rime
with these, preparing an announement for assembly and writing the
names of characters in a story or play and the names of pupils who are
to take the part of each in a dramatization. Writing an original story
or rime thought out, listing choice stories, poems, and books read as a
part of the work done during the library reading period should also
develop as natural needs. These needs may or may not arise during
the language period but should be met with specific training in written
composition. Strive for quality and not quantity in written work.
Be careful to establish an understanding and constant practice in
each new formal step. Develop more fully the sentence and the habit
of variety in the choice of words. See that the sentences express the
thought intended and that the sentences used in the development of a
topic are related, arranged in proper sequence and that sufficient oral
composition shall precede all written work. Supeiwise closely the
copying of all words, sentences, rimes, poems, announcements, letters
and invitations. Give directions for and assistance in the making of a
diary, the writing of original letters, invitations, labels, announcements
and the brief outlining of stories. Supervise closely the written work
done in response to dictation, in original expression, the writing of
spelling and the writing in an illustrated booklet or on posters. Com-
pare, rate and exhibit special pieces of written work after each pupil
has read his contribution, once for correct thought and once for correct
punctuation, capitalization and spelling. Use a standardized writing
scale for pupils' self-rating and a standardized composition scale for
the teachers' rating of the compositions. Develop in class, adopt and
use specific and desirable standards of attainment. (See Part V, page
211.) Standards for attainment may be exhibited in the form of
attractive posters. See suggestions for third grade.
C. LANGUAGE FORMS
Language forms for this grade should be few and simple, but care-
fully and completely taught. They are of two kinds: (1) those due to
neglect and incomplete training in earlier years and largely confined to
grammatical errors, and (2) the new language essentials met with in
second grade, and largely confined to written work.
The remedial work should be based on needs which the teacher has
discovered and recorded as results of careful observation. It may
usually be confined to drill on the correct use of verbs and pronouns,
speaking in complete and coherent sentences, clear enunciation and
pronunciation, and letter forms. Select, make up and adapt language
games as means of drilling on correct form. (See Manual for Use of
Open Door Language Series, pages 26-27, and Young and Memmott:
Methods in Elementary English, pages 85-120, and 155-234.)
The new language essentials for this grade (based on the sentence
in its simplest form) are:
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 151
Capital and period to indicate the beginning and the end of the
sentence.
Other forms of capitalization as needed —
1. Child's own name, and its substitute "I".
2. Child's own address, and abbreviations involved, e. g., initials.
3. Other persons and places.
4. Dates. Days of the week. Months.
5. Begin each line of poetry with a capital.
Use as a model of the self-sufficient sentence, the simplest state-
ment, the easy proverb and adage, the verse of two and four lines.
Write, if a start has been made with print-script, a few labels, and
the simplest wish-card or dedication of a gift to parent or friend, or the
simplest form of letter without heading or envelope. These may include
bulletin board announcements. (See Part V, page 211.)
D. USE OF READING MATTER
All reading done in the grade should be in keeping with basic prin-
ciples of language instruction and contribute to logical language growth.
Through the reading of many books vocabulary is broadened, the sen-
tence sense is strengthened, thought is stimulated and knowledge is
gained. In the reading course sufficient reading skill should be de-
veloped to enable second grade pupils to do independent reading. Specific
time should be provided for such and followed up with effective work
directed by the teacher. In the follow-up work pupils should be led to
express themselves freely through stories, pictures, poems, rimes, etc.,
studied as language and as reading. See introduction to primary grade
for specific suggestions as to use of stories, poems, etc. Low open-shelf
book cases, a reading table with attractive centers of pot flowers or
other decoration and suitable chairs lend interest to books. For reading
material see section II and V of this outline.
IV. An illustration of a large unit of teaching suited to second or third
grade pupils and adapted from a series of reports by classroom
teachers.
There is no more valuable material for the school curriculum than
the information that 'satisfies the child's immediate needs for intelli-
gent living.
The experience with the post office not only supplies needed infor-
mation but gives additional knowledge of and an appreciation for
national and community service such as desired in other fields of
learning.
A. HOW THE UNIT OF WORK ORIGINATED
Last June a first grade group made vacation books in which they
planned to keep records of their summer experiences in order to share
them more fully with one another in the fall. These books included
all of the children's addresses so that they might correspond with one
another during the summer.
When the group reassembled this fall bringing attractively com-
pleted books as well as letters and postal cards received during the sum-
mer, there was unconcealed disappointment to learn that some letters
152 Course op Study for the
which had been mailed had failed to reach their destination and had
been returned; others had neither been received nor returned. Such
questions as these arose:
Why did the letter which I sent Barbara come back to me?
What become of the letter I wrote Robcliff?
Do you think it will ever come back to me?
What are all these quser marks on this letter that Peggy sent me ?
B. STEPS IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE UNIT
In attempting to answer these questions a consideration of the fol-
lowing seemed necessary:
1. Various ways of safeguarding mail.
a. Return address.
b. Use change of address cards.
c. Use forwarding privilege.
d. Write complete address plainly.
2. Postal rates.
3. Postal transportation.
The group took the responsibility for obtaining much of the infor-
mation by referring to books, by inquiring at the post office, of the
postman and of their parents. As the discussions continued various
"post office surprises" were brought by the children. Among them
were different kinds of stamps, several types of envelopes, money order
blanks, and change of address cards.
Many of the children were visiting the local post office and were
returning so many questions that it seemed advisable to go on a post
office excursion. The class wrote to the superintendent of the post
office asking permission to visit the post office. Then the pupils formu-
lated questions which they wanted their trip to answer. Certain indi-
viduals volunteered to be responsible for trying to find the answers to
certain questions. Each member of the group assumed some responsi-
bility.
At the post office they saw their friends, the postmen, sorting the
incoming mail for their routes; they saw the outgoing mail being
sorted, stamped, canceled and loaded on the truck; they found the num-
ber of their mail routes; the special delivery service in action; the
parcel post being sorted, the care given packages marked "fragile";
the private mail boxes; the clerks selling stamps and weighing pack-
ages, and the comfortable lunch rooms provided for the postmen. They
found answers to their questions by observing and questioning the
workers. The post office was becoming an increasingly live factor in
the experience of these children.
"Thank you" notes were eagerly written to the superintendent of
the post office. Reports were made. When the questions which were
formulated preceding the trip were satisfactorily answered, they were
checked on the chart. Individual pictures of the trip were made. The
interest in painting and drawing pictures of the trip was so great that
a large group frieze was planned.
One day one of the girls found a simple story about a post office.
She chose her committee. They rehearsed the play after planning it
and announced that they were ready to give their production. Three of
the boys immediately volunteered the information that they had been
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 153
playing post office at heme and that if the play could be postponed
until afternoon they would bring desirable properties. It was learned
that the properties consisted of chicken wire used for the pigeon holes,
and an express wagon used for a mail truck, old letters, cards, maga-
zines and papers for mail and the family's rapidly disappearing laundry
bags for mail bags. Neighborhood children served as postmen. Further
discussion revealed the fact that one-third of the class was playing
post office outside of class.
To the afternoon session came many mothers with bushel baskets,
boxes, a scale and an express wagon. Before the afternoon session
started the express wagon was being converted into a mail truck. The
little girls' production was given as soon as the truck was ready. It
was repeated many times with many additions which made it more
nearly approximate the children's actual experience at the post office.
The time was approaching when this second grade would be responsi-
ble for the primary assembly. They decided to give the post office
play. They began to view their production with a critical eye since
it was to be given on the stage. Having just enjoyed an assembly
by another grade which taught them much about bees, they expressed
the desire to have their play tell all about the post office. They made
a miscellaneous list of everything which they wished to show. Many
ideas on this first list were eliminated, others were added. The first
list included the following:
Special delivery boy with packages and letters.
Mail cleiks sorting mail.
Postmen going on routes with real mail bags.
Clerk at stamp window selling stamps to a woman.
Mail truck being loaded to go to the train.
Air mail.
Clerk canceling stamps with hand stamp.
Machine for canceling stamps.
Woman taking mail out of private mail box.
Clerk finding a letter with no stamp on it.
Parcel post.
Postman punching time card.
Pigeon holes for the different states.
Pigeon holes for routes in our town.
Postmen in their lunch room.
Postmsn taking mail from the box on the street.
Slots for outgoing and local mail.
After much discussion and exchange of ideas a single plot was de-
veloped. No final conversational form was encouraged. Many children
tried every part, spontaneously using the conversation and interpre-
tation which seemed reasonable and pleasing in the situation in which
they found themselves. The characters for the final production were
chosen a few days before the play was given. Every child had a part
in the final performance and every one had some part in constructing
the necessary properties. The play served as a comprehensive review
of the unit of work and assured the teacher of the pupils' appreciation
of what the post office does for them and in turn what they can do for
it in order to aid its efficient service.
154 Course of Study for the
C. OUTCOMES IN TERMS OF THE CARDINAL OBJECTIVES
1. Social relationships
a. An enriched background.
b. An increased sense of carrying on responsibility in order to
bring out a desirable group of objectives.
2. Self-expression
a. The joy of having created from a full experience.
b. The group's satisfaction of having shared with a larger social
unit, the school.
c. An increased understanding and appreciation of a phase of com-
munity service and a greater ability to respond to it more in-
telligently.
3. Critical thinking
a. A greater ability to think logically.
4. Worthwhile activities
Provided incentive for out-of -school play.
5. Knowledge and skills
a. Language.
(1) Oral.
(a) Worked out plot for the play.
(b) Outlined plans for giving play; scenes, properties, characters.
(c) Formulated questions to ask at the post office.
(d) Gave reports after the trip.
(e) Increased vocabulary as a result of an enriched experience.
(f) Gained some idea of possible sources for reference material.
(2) Written.
(a) Wrote labels and individual compositions frr "Our Post Office Play"
book.
(b) Wrote letters-
Thanking the superintendent of the post office.
To friends in school who received special delivery letters during
the play.
(c) Wrote invitations —
To superintendent of post office.
To parents.
To school friends.
b. Reading.
(1) Plans and questions.
(2) Letters, invitations, notes.
(3) Story of play used in the post office record book.
(4) Labels and individual compositions used in the post office
record book.
c. Arithmetic.
(1) Used inch, foot, yard continually in making properties.
(2) Recognized pound, half-pound and ounce in using scales for
weighing packages.
(3) Had some practice in making change at the stamp and
parcel post windows.
(4) Found how many stamps there were in a 97-cent, 49-cent and
25-cent stamp books.
d. Art.
(1) Individual expression with paint and crayons.
<,2) Group frieze.
(3) "Our Post Office" book (a composite of individual work).
(4) Properties.
Note: See Curriculum Making in the Elementary School by Lincoln Elementary School Staff,
Teachers' College — pp. 58-144 for description of other units of work, and pp. 29-41
for criteria for selecting units of work.
Elementary Schools op North Carolina 155
V. Expected outcomes for second grade.
1. Ability to give an interesting and worthy oral account of children's
prtivitips
2. Ability and tendency to give two or three oral sentences in good
sequence.
3. Ability to use correctly at least two language forms that were most
commonly misused at the beginning of the term.
4. Ability to write correctly a note or letter of one or two good sen-
tcnccs.
5. Ability in use of capitals for Miss, Mr., Mrs., and the names of
days of the week and months of the year.
6. Ability in the use of the period, capitals and the question mark.
7. Ability and desire to plan and conduct simple dramatizations.
8. Ability to give interesting reports on things heard in class and
elsewhere.
9. An appreciation for and a frequent use of good reading matter.
For evaluating the work of pupils in terms of the above suggested
outcomes see suggestions for using the list of first grade outcomes,
and check pupil accomplishments with general objectives for the pri-
mary grades.
VI. Reference for pupil material. (For teaching helps see pages 125,
130 and 139.)
STORY BOOKS
Grades
1-2 — Brooke. The Golden Goose Book. Warne.
2-4 — Carrick. Valery Carrick's Picture Folk Tales. Stokes.
1-2 — Skinner. Nursery Tales From Many Lands. Scribner's.
2-3 — Baldwin. Fairy Stories and Fables. American.
2-4 — Hutchinson. Chimney Corner Stories. Mentzer.
2-3 — Adams. Five Little Friends. Macmillan.
2-4 — Bianco. The Velveteen Rabbit. Doubleday.
1-3 — Clark. Poppy Seed Cakes. Doubleday.
1-2 — Field. A Little Book of Days. Doubleday.
2-3 — Grant. Windmills and Wooden Shoes. Southern.
4 Heward. The Twins and Tabiffa. MacRae.
1-3 — La Rue. The F-U-N Book. Macmillan.
1-3 — La Rue. Under the Story Tree. Macmillan.
1-2 — Lefevre. The Cock, the Mouse, and the Little Red Hen. Jacobs.
2-4 — Lindsay. Bobby and the Big Road. Lothrop.
2-4 — Orton. Prince and Rover of Cloverfield Farm. Stokes.
1-3 — Wright. The Magic Boat. Ginn.
2-3 — Taylor. Two Indian Children of Long Ago. Beckley.
2-3— Albright and Hall. Nature Stories (Books I and TI). Mentzer.
1.3 — Lucia. Peter and Polly in Autumn. (Also Spring, Winter, Summer volumes.)
American.
1-2 — Hopkins. The Doers. Houghton.
1-3 — Read and Lee. A Story of Boats. Scribner's.
POETRY
Grades
2 Huber, Bruner and Curry. Poetry Book for Children, II. Rand.
2-4 — Lansing. Rhymes and Stories. Ginn.
2-3 — Mother Goose. The Old Nursery Rhymes. Warne.
2-4 — Rossetti. Sing Song, a Nursery Rhyme Book. Macmillan.
2-5 — Stevenson. Child's Garden of Verses. Scribner's.
Attractive grade poems as determined by research and reported by Huber in Teachers'
College Record, Volume XXVIII, No. 2:
The Cradle Hymn. Luther. The Raggedy Man. Riley.
Hiawatha's Childhood. Longfellow. The Sugar Plum Tree. Field.
Kentucky Babe. Buck. *The Rainbow Fairies. Hadley.
Lullaby. Dunbar. The Owl and the Pussy Cat. Lear.
Our Flag. Ward. When the Sleepy Man Comes. Roberts.
PICTURES COMMONLY USED IN SECOND GRADE
Dance of the Nymphs. Corot. Indian and the Lily. Brush.
Distineuished Member of the Human Plowing. Bonheur.
Familv. Landseer. Primitive Sculptor. Couse.
Flower Girl in Holland. Hithcock. Spring. Mauve.
Hiawatha. Norris. The Pastry Eaters. Murillo.
The Windmill. Ruysdael.
Note: See page 177 for other sources for pictures.
'Substituted.
156 Course of Study for the
THIRD GRADE
Introduction t
Pupils in this grade may be expected to develop a much more decided
appreciation for and mastery of language power and essential language
form. Oral composition emphasized in first and second grades should
consume approximately three-fourths of the third grade pupils' language
composition time and will offer decided opportunity for the development
of a language power. Written composition and a broad reading experience
based on good literature offer training in both language power and lan-
guage form. Approximately 350 minutes or six hours per week should
be given to language instruction. Every pupil should be given adequate
time, material, stimulation and guidance into effective language accomplish-
ments comparable with the most acceptable third grade standards of attain-
ment or outcomes.
Before beginning to teach the teacher should study the suggestions for
this particular grade, the general introduction to language which precedes
the grade outlines and the suggestions for the grade below and the grade
above, — at least the suggested objectives and outcomes. She should again
review the third grade outline and follow with:
1. A survey of the situation as to what pupils have had; how well this
has been learned by each, and the group as a whole; how this compares
with general requirements for the grades or years completed and what
may be expected during the present year.
2. Definite working objectives in terms of local conditions and most
commonly accepted practice.
3. Necessary subject matter, teaching opportunities and methods.
4. Material and provision for checking the pupil and the teacher ac-
complishments.
This may be in the form of a program for the use of standardized
tests, non-standardized tests, class or group self-rating scales and other
measures.
The suggestions for work in this grade have been organized around
the following heads:
1. Suggested third grade objectives (such as the teacher may use as
a guide in the year's work).
2. Subject matter and activities (essential to the realization of these
objectives).
3. Procedure (such as many teachers have found helpful).
4. Suggested third grade outcomes (as recommended by members of
the language committee and modified by recommendations from
Chubb, McBroome, Bryce, Hosic and others).
5. References.
I. Suggested third grade objectives.
1. To continue the development of objectives set up for lower grades.
2. To increase power and desire to talk with ease and fluency about
every day experiences, and to ask and to answer questions.
3. To develop ability to reproduce a short story effectively.
4. To develop a deeper appreciation for stories, poems, and pictures.
5. To train pupils to write a paragraph on a topic interesting to third
grade.
6. To broaden and strengthen the pupils' vocabulary.
7. To train for more effective use of the margin, capital letters and
punctuation marks.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 157
8. To develop an inquiring attitude and a desire for self-improvement.
9. To guide pupils into worthy written responses to third grade situa-
tions calling for short notes, letters, announcements, messages and
original contributions.
10. To increase pupil power of attention.
11. To train for correct speech, and to correct two or more glaring
speech errors most common to the group.
12. To develop pupil ability and desire to choose good literature.
II. Subject matter and activities.
A. SOURCE OF MATERIALS
1. Text. No text is required for pupils' use; but The Open Door
Language Series, Third Grade, has been adopted for optional use.
Language Training, by Bryce, is the adopted text for teacher's use
and should be supplemented with other language material thought
to be contributive to the work.
2. Reading material supplementary to any text
a. One or more primary grade books in any of the recommended
language series. See page 126.
b. A classroom dictionary, reading charts, attainment charts, etc.
c. Basal and supplementary readers and other reading material as
used in all grade school subjects other than language.
d. A broad collection of miscellaneous and classical reading material
such as may be found in a desirable third grade or school library.
Too much of this material can scarcely be provided; the more
the better. These should be well written and attractive books
and magazines of stories, poems, and plays which have survived
the attacks of literary critics and also proved themselves interest-
ing and suited to the grade pupils for which they are to be used.
The kind of reading material needed for this must not be con-
fused with nor confined to work-type reading, but should lend
to interpretation, expression and freedom of the mind from
technical difficulties. This means that the selection of reading
materials for pupils' appreciation should be, therefore, of a
little less technical difficulty than the reading proficiency of the
pupils. The literature for this grade, as well as for lower grades,
should be of the objective kind where no more is meant than
meets the eye: tales of adventure, of plain experience, of highly
imaginative experience, of animal life and perhaps a few care-
fully chosen proverbs. Poetry should be drawn upon freely for
it is verse that gives the child the musical side of literature.
As a suggestive lead into the various types and possibilities
in this work a list of stories, poems, and pictures are given at
the end of this outline with the hope that the teacher will draw
freely on these and others in her attempt to meet certain funda-
mental needs such as that of making the pupil familiar with
fifteen or more of the best stories and a number of poems. Ten
or more good poems which make a personal appeal to the pupils
should be memorized. No attempt has been made to provide a
minimum or a maximum list of references. The teacher is ex-
pected to enrich the language experiences in whatsoever way
she can, and she will find that the use of well selected reading
matter is one of the most effective means. The selection should
guarantee possibilities for the development of
(1) An appreciation for the value of rapid reading.
(2) A constant pleasure in reading.
(3) An appreciation of the lives of famous people.
(4) An increased understanding of how to dramatize.
(5) An increased appreciation for rime and poetry.
(6) A discriminating taste in the choice of reading matter.
(7) A desire tn memorize special selections.
158 Course of Study for the
3. Other sources of material
All school life and the environment of the child as well as the
whole school curriculum provide material for many language lessons.
Where the recommended basal text is used this will supplement the
teacher's text. Both furnish specific suggestions, but should be
supplemented. All material placed in the hands of the pupils should
be on the level of their thinking and ability to read and based on
experiences common and interesting to the majority of the group.
(Provision should be made for exchange of ideas through conversa-
tion.) Such material may be found in:
a. Dramatization — One of the best sources for oral composition because it is
natural. Ideas are presented, discussed, exchanged, tried out and accepted or
rejected. Dramatization tends to improve speech tone and to train in correct
word usage, listening and logical thinking.
b. School life — Enjoyment of a school play, picnic, excursion, need for playground
apparatus, lunch room, library.
c. Home life — Amusements, playmates, helpfulness to others, animals, objects of
special interest.
d. Community life — Ways of helping street, fire and health departments; behavior
in public places; helping unfortunates; preventing accidents.
e. Other school subjects — Geography, nature study, etc.
f. The seasons — Causes, provisions to meet the change of seasons, effect on plant
and animal life.
B. ACTIVITIES
The language work should be interwoven with and an outgrowth of
all the important activities of the pupils. These activities are too
numerous to be given in detail. The following are suggestive:
1. Maintain a class or club organization as suggested for fourth grade,
and provide for purposeful procedure.
2. Have pupils plan and give informal and formal programs.
3. Help pupils to plan excursions, exhibits, permanent files, a class
newspaper, sand tables, puppet shows, dramatizations, and grade
entertainments.
4. Direct the writing of friendly letters and invitations.
5. Provide for conversation based on trips, observations, experiments
and leading interests, grade and special programs.
6. Give pupils practice in telling stories from point of view of one of
the characters.
7. Encourage the making of original stories, as based on personal ex-
periences, study of pictures, imagination, and a desire to dramatize.
8. Follow the teaching of fables with original fables made by pupils
and to be preserved in permanent form.
9. Provide for exercises in the study of poetry, riddles, plays, etc.;
lists, outlines, etc., to be kept in permanent form.
10. Give specific and frequent training in the making of various kinds
of booklets and other pupil-constructed material to be preserved
as pupils' best work in the various grade subjects.
11. Give frequent and increasingly difficult instructions to the class for
individual constructions.
12. Provide for definite language growth through the development of
other subjects in which reading, conversation, play writing, dramati-
zation and vocabulary building are necessary.
C. LANGUAGE FORMS (to be taught informally)
1. Remedial work
Read carefully the suggestions and references given for first
and second grades. The drill on forms stressed in first and second
grades should be kept up and two or three new forms representing
outstanding speech errors in third grade writing difficulties should
be taken up and mastered. These may be determined by local needs
and after the teacher has made a careful record of all language
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 159
errors and their frequencies as made by her pupils. Those most
often occurring as to form of speech are: "have saw"; "went" for
"gone"; "come" for "came"; "was" and "were" used interchangedly;
"this here" or "that thar"; "have got" for "have"; "ain't never";
"can" for "may". Pronunciation: "axed" or "ask" for "asked";
"yourn" for "your"; "youns" for "you"; "goin" for "going"; "didja"
for "did you"; "ware" for "where"; "naw" for "no". Those in
writing are: Misuse of capitals, wrong or neglect effort in punctua-
tion, poor spelling, poor writing and careless placement on paper.
2. New grade essentials in language form
As the speaking, writing and reading experiences of pupils
broaden definite provisions should be made for the integrated teach-
ing of certain knowledge in language forms in relation to the pupils'
natural experiences as when a felt need arises. Examples: Making
a sentence; writing a sentence; writing a letter; reading a story and
telling a story where the pupil must necessarily supply much of his
own vocabulary in terms of his interpretation of the story.
The needs for the mastery of language form should be determined
by the accomplishments in lower grades, the outgrowth of pupils'
experienced needs during the present year, and the most commonly
accepted third grade requirements in language. In speaking orally
the chief technical concern may be with the choice of words, enunci-
ation, and correct sentence structure. In writing additional tech-
nical information may be needed for spelling, letter formation, capi-
talization and punctuation. While in both reading and writing suf-
ficient knowledge of language form will be necessary as to insure
the recognition of a paragraph, the sentence as a unit and the
essentials for an enlarged sentence of the simple class. This should
include a study of:
a. The comma as a new need, chiefly to separate series of nouns
and the noun of address as illustrated in reading material.
b. The apostrophe chiefly as marking singular possessive nouns.
In connection with examples found in the use of reading ma-
terial the teacher may illustrate this by writing and marking
on the board singular possessive nouns.
c. The question mark and exclamation point as noted in the
reading material.
d. The quotation marks in dialogue as a convenience to indicate
where each speaker begins and ends. Broken quotations may
also be explained, and illustrated from the grade readers.
e. The paragraph (sentence group), the chapter, the section and
the verse should be illustrated with the use of reading
material and provision should be made for drill in the recog-
nition and use of each.
f. Indentation as introduced in lower grades and used in read-
ing material should be enlarged upon to include its use in
paragraphs, lines of verse, addresses and parts of a letter.
g. Margins carefully defined and observed.
h. Capitals. This should be strengthened and broadened as needs
and opportunities arise, as in proper names, initials, important
words in titles, first word of each line of poetry, first word
of a salutation and the closing phrase of a letter.
i. Other deficiencies and needs peculiar to the grade or group
being taught.
160
Course of Study for the
III. Procedure.
A. ORAL WORK
This should be a natural process growing in strength and purpose
as the year passes. Begin by improving the informal talks about the
home, playmates and other things of personal interest and advance to
the more formal requiring prepared talks, announcements, and reports
before a group or as a part of a planned program. A unit of work in
language or other subjects may be used as a basis for a number of
talks which may be practiced with class criticism and either as a pro-
gram for another grade, for assembly or for the Grade Mothers. Other
means for motivating language work are: the making and operating
of a moving picture, a puppet show, school fair, a circus, a general
information bureau, and various other units of public business such
as a bank, store, post office, news stand, or a bus station. Native trees,
birds, animals and flowers may also furnish a basis for valuable oral
language training in connection with language work in other school
subjects.
Standards for judging various phases of oral composition should
be worked out in class under teacher guidance and used frequently for
checking actual accomplishments. Example:
A Guide to the Use of Oral Language in Class*
Pupils
Had some-
thing
worthwhile
to say
Knew
what he
wanted
to say
Had a good
standing posi-
tion and
looked at
the group
Spoke smooth- !
ly and distinct- Did not
ly enough to repeat
be heard himself
by all
Accepted
critic sm
cheerfully
Anders, Jane j X
"
X
X | ..
X
Benson, Tom X
X
X | X
X
White, Mary
X
X
X X
--
This and similar rating scales may be devised to an advantage.
Such also holds pupils not reciting responsible for listening, organizing
their thoughts, and exercising judgment concerning the contributions
of others. The attention may be strengthened to more effective judging
if the listening pupils are also frequently called on for reproducing
parts or certain phases of the talk, summarizing what has been said
and giving personal opinion before actually recording the rating of the
speaker in terms of the previously agreed upon score card. This score
card may be substituted for those emphasizing other features of the
work as pupil accomplishments are realized.
Oral work should, include, therefore, in addition to training in the
thought-giving process, the quality, variety and depth of thought; the
voice tone; manner of expression with special emphasis on naturalness
in story telling, reciting memory work, dramatizing and carrying on
conversation; the selection of appropriate language topics. See intro-
duction to language in primary grades for suggestions as to directing
conversation, stories, dramatization and reciting poetry.
*A cross mark may be made in each open space to indicate approved practice
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 161
B. WRITTEN WORK
Since the basic essential of written work at this stage of the pupils'
development is generally conceded to be that of wanting to write, special
caution should be taken to insure this attitude. No written work should
be required which has not already been thoroughly discussed in class.
In these oral discussions preparatory to writing the choice of words
may be widened, the vocabulary enriched, the arrangement of ideas
improved and the composition style determined. Special work on words
will also eliminate much poor spelling. In the selection of topics dif-
ferentiation should be made in keeping with the varying interests,
imagination and creative abilities of the pupils. For psychological ap-
proach see Gates' Psychology for Students of Education, Macmillan.
Sentence study is of increased importance as pupils begin to write
their thoughts in third grade. Fundamental principles in making and
using sentences should be informally and specifically taught. Pupils
may be taught that a sentence is a group of tvords that express a com-
plete thought and the difference between a sentence and other groups
of words, but should not be required to analyze the parts except from
the standpoint of thought. Questions from the teacher will help pupils
in the construction of good sentences.
The next step is to develop independence in writing sentences. First
write on the blackboard two or three statements and two or three
questions. Explain the difference between a statement and a question
and point out the fact that each begins with a capital, but that a state-
ment ends with a period and a question with an interrogation point.
The pupils should now memorize, understand and begin to put into
practice these requirements:
Each sentence should begin with a capital letter.
Each statement should end with a period.
Each question should end with an interrogation point.
Because letter writing is probably the most common type of compo-
sition it should receive early and specific attention. Teach for inde-
pendent use only the friendly letter form in this grade. The need for
a business letter in ordering something, paying a bill, addressing a
stranger, etc., may justify the teacher's assisting the class to produce
such but not master a business letter form.
In developing social letter forms give an oral explanation, furnish
models and develop class discussion leading to the production of a
good social letter in group response and written on the board by the
teacher. This should be copied by pupils as their model. Train pupils
to (1) keep in mind the person to whom they are writing and the
things the writer wishes him to know; (2) write freely and naturally
as if talking; (3) observe good form as to arrangement on paper, use
of correct spelling, capitalization and punctuation. (See models in
Part V, Language Forms According to Grades; page 211.)
The paragraph idea should be carefully introduced for both oral
and written expression. It can best be explained through carefully
chosen paragraphs in reading matter. Select a short well-written story
of two or more paragraphs and study the paragraphs as big thought
units. Help pupils to see that a paragraph is a group of statements
162
Course of Study for the
telling about some central thought. Explain the division into para-
graphs and have pupils memorize the following rule:
The first sentence of every paragraph should begin on a new line
and should be indented, that is written twice as far from the left hand
edge of the paper as are the other lines in the paragraph.
Let the class select an original subject and develop a paragraph
which the teacher writes on the board. Pupils should copy this for a
model and find others. Pupils are then ready for and should begin
writing original paragraphs.
As in oral work the written work should be constantly subjected to
definite and adequate checks previously determined by the class as
desirable practice. These may be of various types and styles. Examples:
Achievement Chart for Written Work*
Pupils
Head-
ing
Margin
Capitals
Punctu-
ation
Spelling
Legibil-
ity
Neatness
Good
sentences
Jones, Billy
XX
XXX
X
X
Smith, M.
X
—
X
X
X
XX
Wright, Joe
XXX
X
XX
XX
XX
Pupil's Name
Author
Date book was completed ...
Most important characters.
What the book is about..
Book Report!
Grade Title of Book.
Publishers
C. LANGUAGE FORMS
The teaching of language form, both remedial and new steps, should
be done as the needs appear in regular classroom procedure based on
interesting and purposeful procedure. Examples: If the class or a
group wishes to invite another grade, group or others to enjoy a pro-
gram which has been prepared and it does not know how to properly
prepare and send an invitation this should be taught. If a glaring
speech error is noticed it should be corrected either incidentally at the
time or specifically drilled out later, depending upon the strength of
the habit and the number of pupils concerned. For outstanding needs
see list given under subject matter and those given in the text.
Correct practice should be stressed in the school, on the playground
and elsewhere. Various devices thought to contribute to improvement
should be tried out to the point of developing a conscious and whole-
some effort toward the improvement on the part of each child. For
suggestions in creating sentiment in favor of correct speech see Guide
*A cross mark may be made in each open space to indicate correct practice.
tThis outline may be used for record in third grade or above.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 163
to American Better Speech Week, National Council of Teachers of
English, West 69th Street, Chicago, 111. In this remedial teaching it
will be found far more valuable to correct a small number of errors
absolutely in the course of the school year than to attempt the cor-
rection of a large number without really correcting even one. The
correct usage drill should be frequent and purposeful, resulting in a
large number of repetition of correct form, and should continue through-
out the course or until correct form has been completely mastered.
Pupils should be led to feel a definite need for such and to assume
practically full responsibility for the drills.
Deming. Games for All Grades. Beckley.
Charters. Games and Other Devices for Improving Pupils' English. Dept. of Interior,
Bureau of Education, Washington.
King. Language Games. Educational Publishing Company.
Scott-Congdon and Others. Open Door Language Series, Third Grade. Houghton.
Scripture-Jackson. Correction of Speech Defects. Davis.
Young and Memmott. Methods in Elementary English. Pages 133-134. Appleton.
McBroome. The Course of Study in Written Composition. University of Iowa Press.
D. THE USE OF READING MATTER
As pupils advance in grade work good reading matter becomes the
great common storehouse of knowledge and inspiration in language
work. It is the basis for the formation of definite and worthy goals
of attainment in knowledge, abilities, habits, skills and attitudes if the
material has been properly selected and taught. Real masterpieces and
other good reading material should be used. Since the pupils of this
grade are able to comprehend literature far beyond their ability to
read the teacher must take the initiative in the selection and presenta-
tion of literary material. Some stories may be read to children, others
well told, while many should be left for pupils to read and enjoy for
themselves. Similar procedure should be used in study of poetry. The
teacher should strive to have her pupils gain a familiarity with much
prose and poetry, a knowledge of the proper care of books, an intro-
ductory knowledge of the use of the dictionary and a systematic plan
of memorizing some of the best selections. To force pupils to memorize
poems is a violation of the best educational practice but it is the func-
tion of the teacher to create a want or desire on the part of the pupil
to make the poem his very own. Not every pupil in a group will have
equal appreciation for the same poem. Some will be satisfied with a
mere reading of a poem which others will wish to memorize. When
once a piece of memory work is started it should be completed, thus
avoiding the development of poor study habits and a careless and im-
perfect recall. See part III, introduction for suggestions on how to
teach a poem.
Training should also be given in the interpretation of situations in
literature by comparing one selection with other literary selections and
with everyday experiences. Attitudes developed will determine largely
the extent of literary experiences carried on in upper grades. Special
attention should be given to the humor, beauty and description which
reading matter affords. Pupils may be requested to reduce literature
thoughts to their own words. Such practice should reflect language
power and originality on part of pupils and strengthen their apprecia-
tion for literary selections. Various forms may be used as to author,
title, style, outstanding quality of the selection, how used — read, dram-
164 Course of Study for the
atized, retold, memorized, etc. Lists of choice poems should also be
kept, and may be made into illustrated booklets of pupils' original
poems. Stories may be read for mere enjoyment, information, basis
for dramatization, oral conversation, and as a basis of comparison and
discussion.
The Twenty-fourth Year-Book, Part I, says: "It is suggested first of
all that real literature makes its best contribution when it is approached
in a recreational mood of curiosity and not in the way of study and
work. . . . We shall come nearer our aim (the enjoyment of real ex-
periences) the more we stress just hearty enjoyment as our basic and
central aim."
The study of pictures as contained in reading matter and in con-
nection with reading is of decided value and should not be overlooked
as a part of the language work and one of the common factors of lan-
guage and art.
To be most effective pictures should be selected for illustrative,
interpretative and inspirational purposes and not in terms of a pre-
scribed grade list.
IV. Expected outcomes for third grade.
1. Increased interest and ability in the selection of valuable experiences
and means of determining the main ideas to be brought out in re-
lating them.
2. Deeper appreciation for poems, stories and pictures.
3. Increased ability and desire to reproduce stories and poems and to
make original stories.
4. Increased ability to write with ease a short and correct paragraph.
5. Ability to write a short and correct letter.
6. Increased vocabulary in keeping with general third grade standards,
and the elimination of at least two outstanding language errors made
in class at the beginning of the year.
7. Ability to use quotation marks, abbreviations for the days of the
week and months, and capitals for the months.
8. Ability and frequent practice in self-testing, self-correcting and
self-evaluating.
9. Growth in good habits of listening and power of organization and
retention.
These outcomes are intended to include the major knowledge, abili-
ties, habits, skills and attitudes which should be evidenced by pupils
completing the third grade or year's work. The teacher should satisfy
herself as to the class and individual accomplishments in each by keep-
ing a constant check on accomplishments in the form of an accumulative
record for each pupil.
A careful check should also be made for the realization of the
general objectives set up for the first three or primary grades as a unit.
A study may then be made of each pupil's readiness for grammar grade
language as suggested in the general objectives for the primary grades,
for the grammar grades and for the fourth grade.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 165
V. Expected outcomes for the primary grades (1-3).
A. ORAL COMPOSITION
1. Interest in and an appreciation for the experiences of others.
2. Ability and habit of listening attentively to others.
3. Ability to recognize, pronounce, spell, know the meaning of and to
use a great many words, based on those in most constant demand.
4. Ability to recognize still other words.
5. A desire to express oneself naturally, intelligently and pleasantly.
6. Appreciation and respect for the opinion of others.
7. Ability to describe a person, animal, object, pictures and to relate
interesting experiences.
8. Ability and desire to grasp and reproduce interesting grade stories,
rimes, and poems. This should include the mastery of at least ten
stories and ten poems in each grade and a knowledge of many others.
9. Development of originality as shown by conversation, judgment, and
creative work.
B. WRITTEN COMPOSITION
1. Ability to recognize the sentence as a complete unit of thought.
2. Ability to write from dictation and to use dictation as a tool.
3. Ability to copy legibly and with a reasonable degree of speed and
accuracy.
4. Ability to write definite answers to specific questions.
5. Ability and practice in learning new words.
6. Ability to arrange lists in alphabetical order and an appreciation for
alphabetical lists.
7. A growing interest in and a mastery of the mechanics of writing:
penmanship, punctuation, abbreviation, capitalization, spelling,
composition and letter style.
8. Ability and pleasure in writing different kinds of informal notes,
letters, invitations and announcements and responses to each.
9. Ability to write an original composition of three or four related
sentences narrating an accident.
10. A growing interest and practice in writing original statements, rimes,
informal letters and compositions.
C. LANGUAGE FORMS
1. The use of capitals in proper names, for holidays, months, days of
the week, titles, for certain abbreviations, the first word of a line
of poetry, the beginning of a sentence.
2. Abbreviations — Mr., Mrs., Dr., in., ft., St., days of the week, months.
3. Punctuation — Correct use of period, question mark, comma, excla-
mation point, apostrophe for singular possessive, quotation marks.
4. Margins — One inch margin on the left and one-half inch margins
on right.
5. Standard letter forms commonly used in social and business letters.
6. Indentations for paragraphs.
7. Approved third grade handwriting.
8. Correct spelling of words needed in written work.
9. Correct use of verbs, nouns and pronouns used in oral speech.
10. Well-chosen words and sentences.
D. MISCELLANEOUS READING AND STUDY OF LITERATURE
1. Pleasure in reading and a desire to read.
2. Ability and desire to entertain others with literary selections, panto-
mimes, dramatizations, story writing and story reading, etc.
3. Ability to enjoy a story, rime, or poem and to reproduce and to
produce such.
4. A broad reading experience.
5. Ability to judge and a desire to choose various kinds of good liter-
ature.
6. A growing habit of spending leisure time in reading good books.
166 Course of Study for the
VI. Reference for pupil material. (For teaching helps see pages 125,
130 and 139.)
STORY BOOKS
Grades
1-3 — Lester. Great Pictures and Their Stories. (Books One, Two, Three.) Mentzer.
2-4 — Bidpai. The Tortoise and the Geese. Houghton.
2-3 — Deming. Little Indian Folks. Stokes.
2-4 — Scudder. Book of Fables and Folk Stories. Ginn.
2-3 — Aesop. Tales Told Anew and Their History Traced. Macmillan.
3-4 — Mulock. Adventures of a Brownie. Harper.
2-4 — Bingham. Merry Animal Tales. Little.
2-3 — Defoe. Robinson Crusoe. Public Schools Pub. Co.
1-3 — Maxwell and Hill. Charlie and His Kitten, Topsy. Macmillan.
3-4 — Wiggin and Smith. Story Hour. Houghton.
3- — Baldwin. Fifty Famous Stories Retold. American.
2-4 — Bass. Stories of Pioneer Life for Young Readers. Heath.
2-4 — Johnston-Barnum. A Book of Plays for Little Actors. American.
2-4 — Tappan. American History Stories for Very Young Children. Houghton.
2-3 — Eggleston. Stories of Great Americans. American.
2-3 — Chance. Little Folks of Many Lands. Ginn.
3-4 — Fairgrieve and Young. Children of Many Lands. Appleton.
2-3 — Perkins. Dutch Twins. Houghton.
3- ■ — Scantlebury. Little World Children. Ginn.
3-4 — Beskow. Pello's New Suit. Harpers.
1-3 — Grant. Story of the Ships. Macmillan.
3-4 — Meigs. The Wonderful Locomotive. Macmillan.
POETRY
3-7 — Conkling. Silverhorn. Stokes.
1-4 — Edgar. A Treasury of Verse for Little Children. Crowell.
2-5 — Field. Taxis and Toadstools. Doubleday.
1-3 — Huber, Burner and Curry. Poetry Book for Children, Book III. Rand.
1-5 — Milne. When We Were Very Young. Dutton.
3-4 — Iroquois. Literature for Reading and Memorization, Book III. Iroquois.
Especially attractive grade poems as determined by research and reported by Huber in
Teachers' College Record. Volume XXVIII, No. 2.
America. Smith. ^Farewell to the Farm. Stevenson.
A Boy's Mother. Riley. King Bruce and the Spider. Cook.
A Visit from St. Nicholas. Moore. Raggle Taggle Gypsies. Unknown.
A Long Time Ago. Prentiss. Robin Hood and the Ranger. Unknown.
Change About. Unknown. Which Loved Best. Allison.
PICTURES COMMONLY USED IN THIRD GRADE LANGUAGE
Angel With a Lute. Carpaccio. The Avenue of Trees. Hobbema.
Carnation Lily, Lily Rose. Sargent. The Artist's Mother. Whistler.
Going to Market. Troyon. The Horse Fair. Bonheur.
Lavinia. Titian. The Melon Eaters. Murillo.
Magnificat. Botticelli. The Windmill. Rnvsdael.
PART FOUR: LANGUAGE IN THE GRAMMAR GRADES
I. Common factors.
Language work in grades four to seven inclusive, while having decided
^rade demarcation, should show a continuous and gradual development
with a shifting from a decided emphasis on oral work in fourth grade to
less than fifty per cent oral work in seventh grade and a corresponding
increase in emphasis on general reading matter, literature, and language
form. The major aims or objectives for each grade should blend into a
set of common aims or objectives for the grades as a whole and contribute
to final and desirable outcomes for the elementary school. The subject
matter should be similar in type, but of increasing difficulty, breadth and
amount with advancing grades. The method and procedure should be
practically the same for each of the four grades, and the plans for
measuring results in one grade may, with careful adaptations, be used in
all the grades. A series of adopted texts for use in these grades also tend
to unify the work.
'Substituted.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 167
II. General objectives (grades 4-7).
1. To cause pupils to produce correct language in both speaking and
writing. .
2. To train pupils to express their thoughts with freedom, accuracy
and pleasing manner in both oral and written composition.^
3. To enrich pupils' vocabulary — both the active and the passive.
4. To bring about correction and avoidance of common errors of speech.
5! To develop pupil ability and desire to engage in worthy conversation
in informal and formal groups.
6 To develop a pupil consciousness of the need for systematic and
accurate planning for both oral and the written language contri-
butions. .
7. To lead pupils to master necessary forms of written work and to
make good form and necessary mechanical detail habitual.
8. To utilize life situations for developing creative language work.
9. To develop power and interest in intelligent interpretation of the
thoughts of others — both oral and written.
10. To provide a variety of choice language materials for pupils use
and encourage its use. . . „
11. To help pupils gain a living knowledge and appreciation of some oi
our best authors and their works.
12. To lead pupils to reproduce attractive stories and poems, and make
some of their own.
13. To help pupils realize that:
a. Every lesson is language expression.
b. Language is an important medium of understanding and, there-
fore, should be expressed in clear terms.
c. Written work and reading matter are but the records of thoughts
living in the present.
d. Every person should cultivate the habit of correct expression.
III. Materials and activities.
A. SELECTING AND ADAPTING PUPIL MATERIAL
As language work advanced by grades the scope broadens into a
far more extensive , use and variety of materials. Texts in the hands
of the pupils, The Open Door Language Series, Grades Four to Seven,
inclusive, are required in fourth grade and above; but not in the pri-
mary grades. Reference books, the dictionary (individual copies for
the pupils and an unabridged for class use) , maps, charts, encyclopedia
and atlases are used, and a greater amount of reading material — both
the classical and the informational and entertaining — should be used.
Pictures should be included for illustrations, inspiration and interpre-
tation for both oral and written work.
The collection should include prose and poetry and admit of still
other classifications such as narrative, descriptive, expository and argu-
mentative; lyric, epic and drama, with the story as basic in all modes.
The average sixth grade pupil may be stirred by myths, legends, and
stories of native and foreign lands. Poetry makes a strong appeal at
this time of life because of its rhythm and imagery. Dialogue not only
arouses interest but furnishes an excellent instrument for oral expres-
sion. Humorous selections add variety and stimulate desire to conquer
the mechanics of reading and language. Hero worship strong in chil-
dren of this age calls for short biographies, both real and ficticious.
For the younger pupils in these grades should be included accounts of
voyages, descriptions of animals or plants, history stories or descrip-
tions of important industries, when presented in suitable language.
168 Course op Study for the
Desirable grade selections may be found in the "State Approved Library
List for Elementary and High Schools," North Carolina Education
Association.
The teacher should know the contents and difficulties of all her grade
books. She should lead pupils to read books in terms of each pupil's
specific needs. She must recognize that some books are bracing to
higher endeavor; others are sedative — bringing us peace where we are
overwrought, and quiet where we are weary; others are specifics for
definite weaknesses and failings, and if applied in childhood may work
positive cures. For example, if imagination is weak poetry and fairy
tales will strengthen it; if the power to observe is dull, nature studies
or books of popular science will stimulate it; if ambition is lacking,
biographies of great men and women will arouse it; if the logical
faculty or appreciation of cause and effect is feeble, history will in-
fluence it. Books are a remedy for every ill, a cure for every weak-
ness; therefore, provide for all the pupils an effective use of many
books of many kinds.
B. ACTIVITIES
Language activities should be based on pupils' interests, needs and
abilities as related to the general objectives of the language course and
the other school subjects to make language teaching of most purposeful
and permanent value. All activities should grow out of life situations
but may result in the introduction of specific and technical learning.
Examples: finding out from the text or other reliable sources how to
write a good friendly or business letter; how to make an effective an-
nouncement, oral talk; how to use capital letters properly; how to
punctuate, abbreviate, get new words and use a variety of appropriate
words; what constitutes a good sentence, its parts and how to recognize
these; how to produce varieties of written language and interpret and
use to best advantage the works of others.
Effective pieces of language work may and should grow out of other
school subjects. Example: In a study of clothing the pupils may wish
to write a play and dramatize it for the entertainment of others and
to show what the pupils have learned about clothing. All oral work,
written work and reading are language expressions to be as carefully
guarded as though they were a specific part of the language period.
The highest type of language activity is that which deals with cre-
ative language work because this can come only after the pupils have
gained some knowledge of language technique and the works of others.
See Mearns, Creative Youth, and Mearns, Creative Power, Doubleday.
C. CRITERIA FOR THE SELECTION OF MATERIALS AND
ACTIVITIES
1. Does the activity on which the class or group is to begin work
appeal to be within the ranges of both the oral and the written
language interests, needs and abilities of the pupils?
2. Can the correct form be made perfectly clear?
3. Will the available materials afford pupils the opportunity to prac-
tice correct forms of language which the majority of the pupils need
to master?
Elementary Schools op North Carolina 169
4. Do the material and activity add new and enriched meaning to the
problems being worked out in connection with the content and routine
of other schoolroom activities?
5. Is it likely that this material and activity will suggest to pupils
other worthy language problems, such as authorities have found next
in order of difficulty, and enlist their interests in mastering them?
6. Do the material and the activity assist the teacher and pupils to
see relations between different branches of the traditional subjects?
7. Do the material and activity furnish their own "drive"?
8. Does the activity give opportunity for sufficient purposeful repetition
to insure adequate learning?
D. LANGUAGE FORMS
Every decidedly effective response in life has certain corresponding-
controls either natural or prescribed by common practice. Both types
of responses and controls are present in language. In the first class
come language expression as a means of being understood and a stock
of words as vehicles of thoughts and ideas, both of which have natural
controls. To be able to exercise these may be thought of as a natural
situation controlled by physical, mental, social and educational con-
ditions. To make more skillful the use of language as a means of
being understood and understanding others certain established regu-
lations have come into existence and become established practice. These,
usually treated in grammar, may be termed, "language forms," and
have to do with the way one speaks, writes and acts in language ex-
pression. These come in the second class as prescribed and established
controls.
Full agreement has not as yet been made with regard to the grades
in which specific language forms should be taught, but consensus of
opinion is that the most effective teaching comes through learning in
terms of specific and felt needs. There is also sufficient agreement in
the selection of general grade subject matter and activities to insure
some degree of uniformity in the actual needs met with by the pupils
of the various grade levels. Therefore, it seems wise to say that if
the teacher keeps in mind the suggested forms by grades, a careful
record of pupil accomplishments, and attempts to meet the actual needs,
met with by her pupils in their work, she can insure a reasonably satis-
factory handling of these. If all recommended grade language forms
do not present themselves in the pupils' general language experiences
such activities should be initiated as will create needs for these essential
and unlearned technicalities. The textbook and other references may
be used in this connection for setting exercises. They should provide
(1) practice work, and (2) reference books of rules, for the recollection
and observance of which the pupil is held responsible. These things
are not to stand out in the pupils' minds as book-created, book-enforced
things; but as reasonable conventions of ordinary practice, called for
in orderly, careful work. Treatment of these under remedial instruction
and new grade essentials is given more in detail in the various grade
outlines.
Speech errors, because of their frequency and because of the need
for breaking an undesirable habit in its early stage and supplementing
in its place a desirable practice, should be dealt with specifically and
carefully. A study has been made showing that most common speech
170 Course of Study for the
errors occurring throughout the grades are those dealing with the use
of verbs. The mis-use of pronouns is also responsible for a great many
more. (See suggested difficulties by grades, and recommendations for
treatment of these.)
IV. Method and procedure.
Emphasis in language instruction should be placed on creating on the
part of each pupil a desire to know, helping him to determine what he
should learn and how to obtain and use his language ability, rather than
to teach for the sake of imparting facts which pupils may have no desire
for, see no need of, and may never be able to use.
A. INTERPRETING THE SITUATION
The work in these grades should be built on the accomplishments
of lower grades. A survey should be made to find out what has been
taught, what should have been taught, what should logically follow
and what may be expected of pupils in the grammar grades.
All of these questions, except for the first which has to do with
what the pupils have learned in lower grades, may be answered by
careful study of the language course of study by grades, and reading
the books listed under teachers' references. The first question which
has to do with what pupils know at the beginning of the year may in
part be answered by administering and interpreting diagnostic tests.
(See language texts listed on page 175.) All language scores should
be interpreted in terms of individual abilities; mentally, socially and
educationally, or that which shows to what extent each pupil has had
an opportunity to master the work expected of him. Each pupil's
record should be compared with the average for the group, thus de-
termining the needs for grouping within the grade.
B. GROUPING WITHIN THE GRADE FOR INSTRUCTIONAL
PURPOSES
Practically all grades having an enrollment of fifteen or more can
profit by grouping pupils for instruction in terms of specific needs
peculiar to the group. The two major factors for determining groups
are: progress made and ability to make progress. There are those
who have mental ability and have made normal progress in language.
These should form a group for regular grade instruction. There are
those who have normal mental ability but fail to show normal progress.
These should form a second group for special instruction. There are
those who fail to measure up to standard mentally and educationally.
They should form a third group and receive a different type but still
more specific instruction. Pupils should be changed from group to
group during the year as justified by individual language growth.
Therefore, all groups should be temporary in that changes constantly
take place, and permanent in that group instruction, as to subject mat-
ter and method, are being constantly adapted within the grades.
C. USE OF THE TEXT
The adopted text, Open Door Language Series, should be used sys-
tematically and effectively as a basal factor in the course. The teacher
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 171
should know the plan of the text, its contents and the contents of the
teachers' manual before attempting to teach. At all times the text
should be used in relation to pupils' felt needs as discovered in their
every-day language expressions and interests in all phases of school
and recreational life. Of necessity the text should be supplemented
with much reference and reading material.
D. USE OF REFERENCE MATERIALS
As a part of the language course pupils should be given definite
instruction in the use of reference materials: dictionaries, encyclopedias,
maps, charts, guides, atlases, the library index and shelving and sets
of pupils' reference books such as The World Book, Compton's Pictured
Encyclopedia, series of graded poetry and other general helps. Periods
for group instruction in this should be provided and the materials
should be handled with definite problems in mind. Procedure learned
should be carefully followed in the future use: such as steps suggested
in looking up a word, finding books wanted and returning books to the
shelf or proper authorities after they have been used. Reinforced
teaching as to the care of books may well be included in this because
pupils often show less respect for public property than for their own
books.
Pupils should own and learn to use systematically and effectively a
good school, dictionary. A larger classroom or school dictionary should
also be available. Systematic and effective instruction should be given
in the use of the dictionary which may be introduced in fourth grade
or earlier. Explanation should be made as to the alphabetical arrange-
ment, how to open at the approximate place, reading and choosing the
most effective definition. The pupils' attention should also be called
to the classification of words as to nouns, verbs, adverbs, adjectives,
derivations, and to hononyms, synonyms, etc. Correct pronunciation,
spelling, and the wider use of words should be taught, thus bringing
into active use much of the pupils' passive vocabulary. Skill in the
use of the dictionary may be increased through the use of drill in the
form of games and contests. See course in spelling for additional
suggestions.
E. USE OF CLASSICAL LITERATURE
The use of all reading matter, whether in the language course or
other courses may be classified as language work, and the language
course should influence for a more effective selection and use of all
reading matter, both in and out of school.
No attempt has been made in this course to provide a minimum or
a maximum reading list, but in each grade appears a suggestive list
showing possibilities in variety, quality and content. The kind and
number of books used should be determined by the situation at hand.
Instruction should be so varied and inclusive in nature as to pro-
vide rich experiences in the use of literature and general reading mat-
ter. This should include silent reading periods for the use of books,
story-telling, book reviews, discussions, criticisms, debates, dramati-
zation and other activities which may be a natural outgrowth of read-
ing. Continued use should be made of the reading experiences as a
172 Course of Study for the
basis for oral and written composition and emphasis on effective story-
telling. Additional requirements as to kind, length and manner of
presentation should be set up. More preparation should be required
before contributions are accepted, and the contributions may be ex-
pected to measure up to definite and previously accepted standards such
as may be worked out in class. For suggestions regarding story-telling,
dramatization, and poetry as follow-up work based on reading see
general discussion of language in the primary grades. For book re-
ports, see outline given in third grade.
Literary clubs providing for the use of reading information gained
through the use of library and other pleasure reading books are of
great value. "A Poetry Club" to encourage the love of poetry among
children may be conducted by letting children bring to club their
favorite poems for reading and discussion. Encourage pupils to com-
pile the favorite poems of the club. Assist them to make a special
study of poetry written for children and of poetry written by children.
Encourage children to write poems and to club for discussion. "A
Press Club" may be organized to select and compile material for school
papers and magazines and to make a special study of the publishers.
The activities may be to edit papers or magazines for the school and
to furnish some of the content such as stories, poems, and news items.
"A Story Hour Club" should interest members in certain books and
stories of value for leisure time, and to develop an interest in story-
telling. The programs may be based on stories of interest to members
and may be given in school, in hospital wards and to others shut in
or unable to read. Christmas stories for the lower grades may be made
a special feature in lower grades. "A Travel Club" to study in an
interesting way the life and customs of people in other parts of our
own country and other lands appeal to almost any group of children.
"A Sunshine Club" to bring cheer to shut-ins may make scrap books,
sing carols, recite poetry, tell stories, give musical entertainments, etc.
See fourth grade outline for a description of an English Club as
actually carried on. Still other attractive clubs may be a "Magazine
Club," a "Music Club," a "Literary Club," a "Friendship Club," "An
Etiquette Club," a "Debating Club," a "Dramatic Club," or an "Audu-
bon Society."
F. COMPOSITION— ANY COMPOSITION IMPLIES FOUR STEPS*
1. Desire on the Part of the Pupil to Express Himself
This implies that the able teacher will so utilize every-day situ-
ations that the desire will be present. If the class is encouraged,
the pupils will suggest pertinent subjects.
A tremenduous field for this may be found in large unit studies,
extra-curricula activities and routine demands, and should be utilized
to motivate the language instruction.
The absences from class furnish a practical occasion for letter
writing and should, after communication with the attendant officer,
give practice in letter writing of inquiry, condolence, and infor-
mation (assignments). Letters of requests to business concerns, to
public speakers, to parents and friends, and letters of appreciation,
* Adapted from Denver Course.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 173
response and to accompany an article or a gift are needs recurring
in every school.
Announcements from the assembly platform, introductions of
speakers, advertising, and issuing informal and formal invitations
appeal to morale and should be developed as class work since the
practical motivation exceeds any artificial situation.
Such assignments should be competitive or should rotate among
the classes and practiced between classes before being carried out
in assembly. Those in charge of extra-curricula activities and at-
tendance should see that the responsibility is systematically dis-
tributed to various classes. Teachers favoring activity programs
can easily and effectively carry on this type of composition work.
Possession of Necessary Facts
Regardless of his willingness to talk no pupil should be allowed
the privilege of using class time unless he has available facts in
his possession and can show a readiness for entertaining others.
He should be given frequent opportunity to "try-out" and if not
ready with a real contribution should be led to discover his needs
and try to meet these.
Organization of Material
Organization of material involves consideration of these factors:
The need of the occasion, the form of expression agreed upon, the
emphasis of the grade, the development required by the previous
grades and the abilities peculiar to the individual — mentally, socially
and educationally.
Presentation
Presentation of written material should be properly motivated.
This can best be done by creating a situation which will develop on
the part of pupils a felt need for the specific thing they are writ-
ing. Technique of margins, construction, legibility and organization
should be recognized as essential tools.
The desire on the part of pupils to speak should be balanced by
a desire on the part of others forming the audience to hear. In oral
presentation definite principles should be constantly practiced.
Physical posture: Stand erect, body balanced on balls of feet,
and body relaxed but not slumped. For ease shift the position
occasionally. Hands should be allowed to hang with ease at the
sides most of the time. Eyes should be directed at the audience and
move from one to another casually so as to make every one feel that
he is being spoken to. The speaker should choose a location which
will enable him to speak to the entire audience most easily. This
usually means that he should stand in front of the class.
Voice: A pleasing voice should be cultivated. It should be so
pitched as to be heard by every normal member of the audience.
Enunciation should be clear and distinct. The rate of utterance
should be appropriate to the subject and pleasing to the group.
When the pupil has acquired a good physical posture he will
naturally relax and become mentally comfortable. Usually in this
condition his voice will be natural and pleasing. If not, special
training should be given.
174 Course of Study for the
Manner: The pupil should have the manner of one interested in
what he is saying and the effect he is producing. (See manual for
use of text, page 10.) The natural desire of the pupil to relate
some experience is ever-present and should be encouraged and di-
rected. Composition scales carefully explained and posted in a con-
spicuous place help pupils to know what may be expected of them.
Pupils should be encouraged to make frequent comparisons with
their own work and submit to the teacher and to a bulletin board
committee only their best. The Willing Composition Scale will be
of great assistance here. The teacher in grading compositions should
concentrate on one or two special points until they are well impressed
and then select other points. This enables the teacher to give more
written work since she can correct the papers or have pupils evalu-
ate them more quickly. It also makes the matter clear to pupils if
their attention is called to only a few points at a time. No written
work should be required which cannot be evaluated as such and
result in improved practice.
G. LANGUAGE FORM
Rules and regulations concerning correct practice in language, often
termed as technicalities, can best be taught and should be taught as
needs arise. See suggestions under subject matter and activities for
determining needs. Provide good reference and adequate assistance or
guidance in determining correct form or usage and see that such is
adopted. Where necessary provide extra drill periods for complete
learning of certain usages. Provide such variety here as will take care
of both remedial and initial instruction. Continue the use of language
games adapted to the particular need to be met. Keep in mind desirable
characteristics of language games:
1. They should involve many repetitions of the correct form.
2. They should have a definite aim or purpose.
3. They should involve natural situations.
4. The incorrect form should never be involved.
5. No pupil should be eliminated from a game because of making
a mistake in the game.
6. There should be no waste of time in carrying out the game.
7. The period of time used for the game should be short.
Good language games may be found in or adapted from the text-
book series and from the following:
Charters' Games and Other Devices for Improving Pupils' English. U. S. Bureau of
Education, Bulletin No. 43, 1923.
Young-Memmott. Methods in Elementary English. Appleton.
Brueckner-King. Language Drills, Series for Grades 3-8. Mentzer.
Tucker. English Grammar Hurdles. (For upper grammar grades and junior high
school.) Lippincott.
H. USE OF MEASURES AND STANDARDS IN LANGUAGE
1. Standardized tests
Because of the unreliability of teachers' grades common scales
of measurement are needed; but as yet no one scale has been de-
vised for a satisfactory, standardized and complete measure of
language ability. Standardized tests are available and may be used
to advantage in certain phases of this work, such as sentence struc-
ture, written composition, letter writing, etc., the sum total of which
may be of valuable assistance to the teacher in making a diagnosis
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 175
of pupils' abilities and progress. The most commonly expressed
measure of language given by course of study-makers are: language
outcomes, attainments or accomplishments by grades, and supposed
to be in keeping with the objectives or aims set up for the grade,
grades or department under consideration. Standardized tests are
exceedingly helpful if properly selected, administered, graded and
interpreted. If not handled properly they may prove to be an un-
satisfactory measure of work and an injustice to pupils. (See
County Testing Program, State Department, Division of Elementary
Instruction.) The most commonly used language tests seem to be:
Briggs English Form Test, Grades VII and VIII and High School, Bureau of
Publications, Teachers' College, Columbia University.
Charters' Diagnostic Language Tests — Pronouns, Verbs, Miscellaneous A and
Miscellaneous B, Grades III to VIII. Public School Pub.
Charters' Diagnostic Language and Grammar Tests — Pronouns, Verbs, Miscel-
laneous, Grades VII and VIII. Public School Pub.
Hudelson English Composition Scale, Grades IV to XII. World.
New York English Survey Tests — Language Usage, Sentence Structure, Grades
IV to VIII; Grammar, Literature Information, Grades VII and VIII. Public
School Pub.
Trabue. Nausau County Supplement to the Hillegas Scale. Teachers' College,
Columbia LTniversity.
Lewis. English Composition Scales, Grades IV to XII. World.
Willing Scale for Measuring Written Composition. Public School Pub.
Wilson Language Error Test, Grades III to XII. World.
2. Informal standards
Standard forms for an outline, a bibliography, a friendly or a
business letter, for margins, for capitals, for punctuation and for
other points on which teachers may differ, should be agreed upon
by the school as a whole so that a child is not required to change
his method from teacher to teacher and from grade to grade. There
must be some continuity in procedure from grade to grade if the
pupil is to develop sound practice. Standards should be determined
by an examination of commonly used forms and not by the teacher's,
the principal's, or the superintendent's opinion. Suggested standards
for oral composition are given under item 5 of expected outcomes for
grammar grades. Suggested standards for written composition are
given under item 3 of the expected outcomes for written composition.
Still other and more specific standards should be worked out in class
and used as a guide. Examples: How to take notes, dictation, as-
signments; write minutes, announcements, invitations, social letters,
business letters, outlines, excuses, requests and complaints. How to
copy, how to write poetry and plays. Rules for the use of capitals,
punctuation, spelling, writing, etc., may also prove helpful if pupils
produce and adopt such. (See McBroome, The Course of Study in
Written Composition, University of Iowa.)
V. Expected outcomes for grammar grades, four to seven, inclusive.
A. ORAL COMPOSITION
1. Ability and desire to discuss topics from various content subjects.
2. Ability and desire to make brief and interesting talks on well-chosen
subjects independently arrived at.
3. The habit of using correct pronunciation, clear enunciation and a
variety of well-chosen words.
4. The use of clear, forceful and related sentences and the avoidance
of unnecessary short, choppy or long and involved sentences.
176 Course of Study for the
5. The development and constant use of certain common measures, or
a criteria for evaluating the structure and content of formal oral
composition. Example :
Did the speaker use a pleasant voice?
Did he speak clearly and distinctly?
Was the subject of interest to the class?
Did the speaker use a good opening sentence?
Did each succeeding sentence add some definite information?
Were they in proper sequence?
Were his sentences well-stated, related to the subject and in the proper sequence?
Did the final sentence bring the talk to a satisfactory close?
6. Ability to give effective dictation.
7. Ability to recall, as shown by memory work, relating facts, and
making outlines.
8. Maturing judgment as indicated in describing, questioning, debating,
answering questions, and advancing worthy suggestions.
B. WRITTEN COMPOSITION
1. The ability and habit of using correct form in all written work
including good penmanship, correct spelling, punctuation, capital-
ization, neatness and a variety of accepted styles on paper; as in
letters, invitations, announcements, poems, and plays.
2. The habit of cheeking one's own work and presenting only the best
to others.
3. The development and use of certain common standards of measure
or criteria for evaluating paragraph writing. Example:
Is the work neat?
Is the title properly written?
Are the margins correct?
Are the sentences correct in form?
Are all the words correctly spelled?
Does the beginning sentence prepare for what is to follow?
Should any sentences have been combined? Divided?
Does the closing sentence conclude the paragraph?
Do all sentences contribute, in logical order, to the subject?
Does each paragraph deal with but one subject or topic?
Would the paragraph or paragraphs sound well if read aloud?
4. An ability to copy and to take dictation rapidly and correctly?
5. The habit of indspendently copying, outlining and listening to things
of personal interest.
6. A desire and a growing ability to express oneself in writing.
C. INTERPRETATION OF LANGUAGE AS BASED ON READING
1. An extensive use of worthwhile reading matter.
2. An ability to select and enjoy the best in literature. .
3. Skill and interest in the use of reference materials.
4. An enriched vocabulary — both active and passive — and a desire for
new words.
5. A critical and sane judgment concerning material read.
6. An ability to organize and reproduce stories and other special
selections.
7. An ability to produce from memory choice rimes, poems and quo-
tations.
8. An ability and practice in producing book lists, outlines, stories,
rimes, poems and plays.
9. An ability and practice in making book reports.
10. An ability and desire to use leisure time for effective reading.
11. Respect for books and a desire to own more books.
D. LANGUAGE RELATIONSHIP WITH OTHER SUBJECTS
1. An ability to find, read, interpret and use materials assigned in any
subject.
2. An ability to find, read, choose and to use information needed in
answer to a question, in preparation for a speech, in the solution
of a problem.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 177
3. A desire to maintain correct language practice as related to other
subjects and all language expression.
4. The development of language abilities as needs arise in the various
school subjects.
VI. Teacher's reading and reference material for grammar grade language
work.
1. Outline and discussion of the content for an elementary course of
study in language.
Hosic. The Elementary Course of Study in Language. University.
Chubb. The Teaching of English (Revised). Macmillan.
Bobbitt. Curriculum Investigations. University of Chicago.
Sheridan. Speaking and Writing English. Sanborn.
Tippett. Curriculum Making in an Elementary School. Ginn.
Mahoney. Standards in English. World.
Collins. An Experiment With a Project Curriculum. Macmillan.
2. Psychology and method.
Henderson. Materials and Methods in the Middle Grades. Gin«.
Parker. Types of Elementary Teaching and Learning. Ginn.
Gardner-Ramsey. A Handbook of Children's Literature. Scott.
Mossman. Teaching and Learning in the Elementary School. Houghton.
Rugg and Shumaker. The Child-Centered School. World.
Mearns. Creative Youth. Doubleday.
Mearns. Creative Education. Doubleday.
Moore. The Classroom Teacher, Volumes III and VI. The Classroom Teacher, Inc.
Wilson. Motivation of School Work. Houghton.
Wohlfarth. Self-Help Methods of Teaching English. World.
Moore. The Primary School. Houghton.
3. Literature: Subjectmatter and how to teach it.
Curry-Clippinger. Children's Literature. Rand.
Lowe. Literature for Children. Macmillan.
McClintock. Literature in the Elementary School. University of Chicago._
Beust. American Library Association Book List, American Library Association. _
State Approved Library List for Elementary and High Schools, North Carolina
Education Association.
4. Poetry: Content material and hoiv to use it.
Haliburton-Smith. Teaching Poetry in the Grades. Houghton.
Untermeyer. The Singing World. Harcourt.
Thompson. Silver Pennies. Macmillan.
Conklin. Poems by a Little Girl. Stokes.
Bates. Modern Lyric Poetry. Row.
5. Language manuals based on textbook series. (For textbook series
see page 125.)
Teacher's Guide for Use of Open Door Series. Houghton.
Bolenius. The Teaching of Oral English. Lippincott.
6. Pictures.
Carpenter. Stories Pictures Tell. Rand.
Perry Picture Company, Maiden, Mass.
Brown-Robertson and Company, 41 S Madison Ave., New York.
Elson Picture Company. Boston.
Art Extension Society. Westport, Conn.
7. Language games and drills.
Charters. Games and Other Devices for Improving Pupil's English. Department
of Interior, Bureau of Education.
Young-Memmott. Methods in Elementary English, pp. 153-234. Appleton.
King. Language Games. Educational Pub.
Guitteau. English Exercises and Tests Grades Five and Six. Johnson.
Pribble-Brezler. Practice Cards in English, Grades 3-6. Lyons.
8. Writing and composition.
McBroome. The Course of Study in Written Composition. University of Iowa.
Ayers. Handwriting Scale, Gettysburg Edition, Russell Sage Foundation.
Willing. Composition Scale. Public School Pub.
Freeman and Daughtry. The Teaching of Handwriting.
Hudelson. Composition Scale. World.
Lewis. English Composition Scale. World.
9. Story-telling.
Curtis. Why we Celebrate Our Holidays. Lyons.
Thorne-Thomsen. East O' the Sun and West O' the Moon. Row.
Sheriff. Stories Old and New. Ginn.
Curry-Clippinger. Literature for Children. Rand.
178 Course of Study for the
10. Books of plays for grammar grade pupils.
Finney. Plays Old and New. Allyn.
Knickerbocker. Plays for Classroom. Holt.
Thomas. Atlantic Book of Junior Plays. Little.
Webber and Webster. Short Plays. Houghton.
11. Measuring in education.
Russell. Standard Tests. Ginn.
Trabue. Measuring Results in Education. American.
McCall. How to Measure in Education. Macmillan.
Orleans and Sealy. Objective Tests. World.
Lincoln. Beginnings in Educational Measurement. Lippincott.
Ruch. The Objective or New-Type Examination. Scott.
Dearborn. Intelligence Tests. Houghton.
12. General reference works.
The World Book. Quarrie.
Champlin. New Champlin Cyclopedia for Young Folks: Art Literary. Mvthoiogy.
Holt.
Compton's Pictured Encyclopedia. Compton.
Thompson. The Book of Knowledge.
FOURTH GRADE
The work in this grade may show a more formal and technical approach
in that it is based on a required text and such other supplementary material
as may seem necessary for the realization of the requirements set up for
this grade, both technical and non-technical. The choice and use of all
materials, however, should be in terms of the pupils' needs and experiences.
Conversation because of its direct and its transferred values to the more
formal oral and written speech, continues in the fourth grade as a basic
essential. Recommendations and common practice in this grade indicate
that approximately three-fourths of the language composition time should
be given to oral work and that five hours per week may be considered the
minimum time to be given to language work including literature and inte-
grated with reading and other subjects. Suggestions for work in this
grade are:
1. Suggested fourth grade objectives (such as may guide the teacher
in her work).
2. Subject matter and activities (essential for the realization of these
objectives) .
3. Procedure (such as many teachers have found satisfactory).
4. Suggested fourth grade outcomes (which may be expected in terms
of the former recommendations).
5. References.
I. Suggested fourth grade objectives.
1. To continue the development of objectives set up for lower grades.
2. To develop an ability to speak fluently and vividly on subjects of
immediate personal interest.
3. To develop an ability to speak correctly and to insure a desire for
only the best.
4. To increase the quantity and quality of pupils' written work.
5. To increase the paragraph sense to the extent that pupils will prac-
tice such in both oral and written composition.
6. To develop the power of interpreting, evaluating and appreciating
the thoughts of others.
7. To increase appreciation for good elementary grade literature con-
ducive to worthy pupil development.
8. To develop in pupils the sense of wholesome self-criticism in all
language work.
9. To create a desire and an effort for original contributions.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 179
II. Subject matter and activities.
A. MATERIALS
1. Text: The Open Door Language Series, Fourth Grade.
2. Suggested supplementary for general reference:
a. Two or three series of language text. (See recommendations under Suggestions
in regard to the selection and organization of subject matter, page 125.)
b. General reference material: dictionary, maps, charts, guides, magazines, papers,
library and index.
c. Basal supplementary and reference books used in the various grade subjects
other than language. (See State List of Elementary Textbooks, Basal and Sup-
plementary; and the fourth grade reading outline.)
d. Special collections of classical and general reading and picture material of fourth
grade difficulty. This includes a variety of good poetry. (See reference lists at
end of this outline. For comments see grade three.)
B. ACTIVITIES
Activities suggested for third grade should be continued in fourth
grade with increased interest and purpose. Interesting and worth-
while activities for fourth grade:
1. Oral
a. Talking about personal experiences in school (natural science,
social studies, practical arts, fine arts, health), outside of school
(home, street, recreation and leisure), work (how to make a
bird house, how to make butter, etc.), clubs and church.
b. Reproducing a story, outlining a story, criticising a story, telling
a story from a picture, writing original stories, listening to
stories and other productions and dramatizing a story.
c. Making riddles, rimes, and poems.
d. Playing a game, describing a game and directing a game.
e. Asking and answering questions.
f. Organizing and carrying on a language club.
g. Talking about and drilling in the use of the alphabet and words,
especially with regard to the use of the dictionary.
2. Written
a. Copying letters, stories, poems, directions, examples (as in arith-
metic), outlines and references.
b. Explaining in writing how something is made.
c. Writing directions for reaching a certain place.
d. Writing paragraphs of narration, description and exposition
based upon activities in the school (natural science, social science,
practical arts, fine arts, health and safety), out of school (home,
street, duties, recreation and leisure) .
e. Keeping diaries.
f. Making booklets of original stories and poems.
g. Correcting one's own work and that of classmates,
h. Taking a test, dictation, and filling blanks.
i. Use of written drill exercises.
3. Use of Reading Material and References
a. Listening to, reading, telling, re-telling, dramatizing and mak-
ing stories.
b. Listening to, reading, memorizing, reciting and making rhymes
and poems.
c. Building a picture show, puppet show, making sandtable illus-
trations and other objects.
d. Writing plays, book reviews, book lists, outlines, and criticisms.
e. Looking up references, gleaning information, reading for
pleasure.
f. Entertaining others with programs based on reading experiences.
This may be done in chapel exercises, special day exercises (holi-
days, commencements, school visiting days) and for grade
mothers and other visitors from the outside and from within
the school.
180 Course of Study for the
C. TOPICS
Topics of interest to pupils should be drawn freely from home life,
school and community interests, recreations, readings, etc. Projects,
even though not initiated during the language period, should be drawn
upon for almost every phase of language learning to take place in the
grade and as included in the grade objectives. Freedom in the selection
and development of topics should be in proportion to the varying
interests, experiences and abilities of the pupils.
D. LANGUAGE FORM
1. Remedial Work
All requirements in previous grades should be given systematic
and sufficient treatment to insure complete mastery and automatic
use.
2. New and Correct Usage
New grammatical terms and standards for composition as es-
sential to the realization of the grade objectives should be taught
as needs arise in actual practice. If a natural situation does not
arise, the teacher should create and take advantage of an interesting
one. Needs most likely to be met with in technical grammar are:
a. Common speech errors
(1) Incorrect oral form: "Have rode" for "have ridden";
"begun" for "began"; "brung" for "brought"; "sing"
for "sang"; "he don't" for "he doesn't"; "Ruth and Tom
is going" for "Ruth and Tom are going"; "I hain't got
no" for "I haven't any"; etc.
(2) Pronoun errors: "She is taller than me"; "therselves"
for "themselves," etc.
(3) Pronunciation: Words ending in ing pronounced as
"readen," "singen," etc., "whar" and "thare" for
"where" and "there."
b. Written form, punctuation, capitalization and spelling as intro-
duced in earlier grade written work and standards for oral
composition should be reviewed and elaborated on in this grade.
Most of the following and possibly others may be introduced.
(1) The inside address of a letter; a knowledge of what is
included, the location, punctuation and capitalization.
(See text, page 171.)
(2) Salutation; the location, capitalization and punctuation
for a friendly letter.
(3) Letter content; more adequate knowledge of interest
factors in a letter, a knowledge of general principles
to observe in writing a friendly letter — variety complete
sentences, clear in meaning, brief.
(4) The envelope; planning and writing the address, setting
up and arranging the return. (See text, page 172.)
(5) Materials; knowledge of when to write in ink, kind of
paper, how to fold a letter, and where to place the stamp.
(6) Form, capitalization and punctuation for rimes and
poems.
(7) Form and punctuation for conversational stories and
plays.
(8) An analytical treatment of the simple sentence, as to
subject, predicate, number (singular and plural of nouns
and verbs), the agreement of the subject with the predi-
cate in number, adjectives as modifiers and a few con-
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 181
tractions using the apostrophe in a new way — Example:
"o'clock," "don't," "hasn't."
(9) Stricter attention to margins, indentations, and similar
formalities.
(10) The paragraph sense expended to include four or five
correct, well-chosen and well-written sentences.
If expedient, as determined by local survey, the correct usage
drills in the text should be changed to fit the particular needs of
the class. Needs in both oral and written work can best be remedied
in this way as difficulties arise. In oral composition more exacting
requirements may be made by the teacher and the pupils of this
grade and gradually put into practice. Persistent repetition of
correct forms of expression is absolutely essential in order to weed
out errors and make correct practice habitual. Completion exercises,
games, drills, direct criticisms and informal tests are all means to
a desired end. Models and copies of pupils' best work should be
available. (See text and Sheridan's Speaking and Writing English.)
III. Procedure.
The actual amount of time to be spent in language work should be
determined by the local situation and the general organization of. the fourth
grade work. Approximately three times as much time should be given to
oral as to written work. (See recommendations by Sheridan, Moore and
Mahoney.) In addition to oral and written composition much time must
be given to reading and the study of good books. Read section on language
for the grammar grades.
Story and poetry books, such as listed, should be used freely and sup-
plemented as interests and needs lead into special phases of work. Special
selections should be made as needs arise in unit studies and the various
school subjects. Pupils may be expected to master fifteen or more good
stories and fifteen or more poems which they like best. See Part III,
introduction, page 133, for suggestions in teaching stories, poems and
dramatization. Pictures, such as listed, should be used as a basis for
language expression, illustration and inspiration. (See Teachers' reference
for use of pictures.)
More careful preparation of oral work is necessary for its own im-
provement and as a pre-requisite to better written work. Attention should
also be given to language forms which have not become an automatic
practice. Written work should continue to come in response to a felt need
such as communicating, sharing, recording, preserving and improving.
This may take the form of letters; invitations; a diary; a journal; a
record for nature study, history, geography, etc.; writing a song, poem or
play. The newspaper may be used here as a wholesome incentive. The
writing of riddles may also stimulate the pupils' thought, strengthen the
sentence sense, and promote orderly thinking to the point of clearness,
neatness and force on paper.
The independent work of this grade should be limited to one paragraph
composition of five or six well-organized sentences. (The more advanced
pupils will often wish to write longer paragraphs.) After the pupil has
made his own corrections he may be allowed to read the paragraph to the
class and receive favorable and constructive criticism as to thought, sen-
tence structure and arrangement. The capitalization, spelling, punctuation,
182 Course of Study for the
and writing should be carefully checked later, possibly by a committee and
eventually by the teacher. (Standards for rating should be worked out in
class and used by pupils. See procedure in third grade outline.)
The language materials and topics listed as subject matter for this
grade suggest correlations and integrations such as may be realized from
projects and large unit studies, originating either in language or other
subjects and furnishing a natural and interesting language situation. The
value of language instruction may well be measured by the extent to which
it functions satisfactorily in the every-day needs of the child. A concrete
illustration of such possibilities, and including some desirable language
outcomes in teaching, have been taken from an actual fourth grade situ-
ation in Grace School in Buncombe County, spring 1930. At the request of
the supervisor, the teacher, Miss Territta Butrick, submitted the following
(which is abridged here to save space) :
An English Club
Teacher. "Nothing appeals to children quite so much as an opportunity
to pretend that they are grown-ups. They really enjoy assuming
responsibility and having a chance to use their imagination. For
these reasons we decided to organize a club including every child in
the grade and to meet once a week at the language period. The name
chosen was 'The Happy Workers.' The club motto:
'Do all the good you can,
In all the ways you can,
To all the people you can,
Just as long as ever you can.'
"A president, vice-president, secretary and treasurer were elected
by ballot. Chaplain, director of toy symphony and various commit-
tees were appointed. The duties of each officer and committee were
outlined and explained more fully.
"After being assisted by the teacher for two or three times, in
preparing reports and programs, the pupils are able to make and
carry out their own programs.
"The meetings are conducted in a business-like way. The little
president uses a tiny gavel and presides with much dignity. The
children address the chair before making a talk and have learned
how to make a motion. The business meeting is followed by an
interesting program, consisting of music, reading, playlets, or orig-
inal talks.
"The teacher is the official critic but she does not interrupt the
club session with her criticisms. All reports must be written and
handed to the secretary after they are read. The secretary gives
the reports to the teacher to be corrected before they are recorded
in the minutes. (It is surprising how well the little folks prepare
these reports.) Every child is a member of some committee, and
committee meetings are held the day before the regular meeting of
the club for the purpose of preparing reports to be read later by the
chairman.
"Grammar, spelling and composition have been greatly improved
since the pupils have been making this practical use of the language
lessons learned. Our supervisor recently visited one of the club
meetings and after inquiring into the general plan of the work re-
quested a brief written report from the teacher. The following are
extracts from the minutes of the meeting which she observed and
personal letters written by the pupils:
" 'MINUTES
The Happy Worker Club met Thursday, April 17, 1930. Helen Hoffman, the
President, presided. We repeated our club motto. The Chaplain, Lewis Beam, told a
Bible story and led the prayers. The Secretary read the minutes of the last meeting.
All of the committees had good reports. Adelene Barnett moved that we take in
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 183
Virginia and Robert Bunch as new members. The motion passed. Miss Butrick gave
them club pins.
It was decided to study wild flowers next week and make a scrap book.
Miss „ _-, our supervisor, was a visitor. She made a little talk. Then she
introduced Miss , State Supervisor. Miss .._ made a talk too. She
said she had visited many schools in our state and she thought our club meeting was
one of the best language lessons she had ever heard. She asked us to write her a
letter. We didn't have a program because we gave a program at assembly. The reports
will be added to the minutes. »
John Withers, Secretary.'
" 'REPORT OF PROGRAM COMMITTEE
We read in "My Weekly Reader" that next Thursday, April 28, is National Wild
Flower Day. We think it would be fine to study about wild flowers next week and
make a scrap book.
We will try to have a program about wild flowers.
Ellen Patterson, Chairman.'
"'SERVICE COMMITTEE
We sent 45 Easter cards to a Mexican school in El Paso, Texas. We sent 40
Easter cards to the Mission Hospital. Six of our members made scrap books for the
children in the hospital.
All of us made Easter book marks for our mothers.
Margaret and I picked up paper in the basement.
Ruth Henderson, Chairman.'
" 'REPORT OF SAFETY COMMITTEE
The Safety Committee has been ready to help when we have a fire drill and open
the door.
I help Mrs. Poole to get the first grade children out.
Two boys picked up banana peelings.
Zenas picked up a nail.
James picked up a plank with a nail in it.
Robert Creasman, Chairman.'
" 'HEALTH COMMITTEE
We are glad our teacher had us to keep the health rules. We have better reports
than ever before. We have inspected the playground and basement.
Every member drinks milk now.
Annie Mae Snyder, Chairman.'
" 'THE SAND TABLE COMMITTEE
The plants are growing fine on the farm. The beans have bloomed and there are
two little green beans.
I promised a new farm house but my daddy comes home so late he can't help me
finish it. As soon as I get it fixed I will bring it.
Harry Godwin, Chairman.'
" 'PICTURE SHOW COMMITTEE
We have finished sandpapering the new picture show and we are ready to paint.
We will paint the outside gray and the inside yellow.
Margaret brought a pretty flower border for us to use.
We named the theatre, "The Happy Hour."
Louis Beam, Chairman.'
" 'VISITING COMMITTEE
Twenty-four have been to see the sick.
Fourteen have carried flowers.
Five have carried food.
Sarah Stokes, Chairman.'
" 'MUSEUM AND BULLETIN BOARD COMMITTEE
We have had the pictures of birds on the bulletin board. Next week we will have
wild flowers. Sarah Ruth had current events. Adelene brought pictures. Robert
Swain brought sea shells for the museum and Lewis brought a bird's nest.
Evelyn Chambers, Chairman.'
Other committees submitting interesting reports are "The Doll
House Committee," and "The Flower Committee."
EXAMPLES OF PERSONAL LETTERS WRITTEN LATER
Grace School,
Asheville, N. C,
May 7, 1930.
Dear Miss _ — ,
We remember your coming with Miss We surely were glad to have you
at our Club meeting.
Yesterday our club played at the P. T. A. meeting.
We are making a wild flower book. Many of the class have been pressing wild
flowers to . put in it. I have been pressing some myself. I have pressed a dogwood
and some violets.
We have many beautiful flowers in our room.
Your friend,
Christine Drake.
184 Course of Study for the
Among the many letters one concluded with the statement, "I
will send you a rhyme."
WHERE THERE ARE FLOWERS
(By Elizabeth Ryan)
Where there is a flower
Growing by the brook,
There comes a gentle shower
To freshen the flower's nook.
Where there are flowers,
Every one of us knows
Some are pretty flowers
And some as sweet as a rose.
For an evaluation and further illustrations of this type of lan-
guage work, see "Curriculum Making in the Elementary School" by
the staff of Lincoln School, Teachers' College, published by Ginn.
IV. Suggested outcomes for fourth grade.
1. Ability to gain and hold the attention of his group or grade while
discussing a subject of fourth grade interest.
2. Ability to choose appropriate words and sentences which show an
enriched vocabulary and a mastery of the subject.
3. Ability to speak and write in a short, concise well-rounded para-
graph of four or five sentences.
4. A broad reading experience as evidenced from an increased vocabu-
lary and an interest in books.
5. A mastery of good literature as shown by desire to quote and dis-
cuss same.
6. Frequent writing of original short stories, rhymes, messages, and
descriptions.
7. Pupil ability and willingness to find and correct his or her errors
before handing in work.
In order to insure a definite knowledge of pupil ability and progress
each pupil should be checked during the year and at the end of the year
by the suggested outcomes, informal tests and standardized tests. See
County Testing Program, State Department of Public Instruction and
Language in the Grammar Grades, Section H.
V. Reference for pupil material. (For teaching helps see page 177.)
STORY BOOKS
Grades
1 Lester. Great Pictures and Their Stories, Book IV. Mentzer.
3-6— Bible. The Little Children's Bible. Macmillan.
4-5- — Eastman. Wigwam Evenings. Little.
3-6 — Beston. Firelight Fairy Book. Atlantic.
3-5 — Browne. Granny's Wonderful Chair and Its Tales of Fairy Times. Dutton.
4-5 — Carroll. Alice's Adventures in Wonderland and Through the Looking Glass. Mac-
millan.
4-5 — Grimm. Household Stories. Macmillan.
4-6 — Harris. Little Mr. Thimblefinger and His Queer Country. Houghton.
3-4 — Jacobs. English Fairy Tales. Putnam.
4-5 — Mulock. Little Lame Prince. Rand.
3-5 — Brown. Lonesomest Doll. Houghton.
4-5 — Lorenzini. Adventures of Pinocchio. Macmillan.
4-7 — Wiggin. Birds' Christmas Carol. Houghton.
3-4 — Eggleston. Stories of American Life and Adventure. American.
3-5 — Pumphrey. Pilgrim Stories. Rand.
3-5 — Baldwin. Four Great Americans. American.
-4 — Blaisdell. Pioneers of American Life. Little.
3-4 — Mulets. Sunshine Land in Europe. World.
3-5 — Beard. Mother Nature's Toy Shop. Scribner's.
4-6 — Burgess. Animal Book for Children. Little.
4-6 — Kipling. Just So Stories. Doubleday.
3-S — Wheeler. Playing With Clay. Macmillan.
POETRY
4-f — Adams. Highdays and Holidays. Dutton.
4-5 — Asquith. Pillicock Hill. Macmillan.
4-6 — Chisholm. The Golden Staircase. Putnam.
3-5 — Fyleman. Fairies and Chimneys. Doubleday.
3- — Iroquois. Literature for Reading and Memorization, Book III. Iroquois.
3-S — Skinner and Wickes. A Child's Own Book of Verse, Books I and II. Macmillan.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 185
Especially attractive grade poems as determined by research and reported by Huber in
Teachers' College Record. ' Volume XXVIII, No. 2.
America, The Beautiful. Bates. The Night Wind. Field.
*"Bob White." Cooper. Mr. Nobody. Unknown (text).
Book Houses. Johnston (text). The Runaways. Jackson.
Evening at the Farm. Trowbridge. A Strange Wild Song. Carroll.
The Height of the Ridiculous. Holmes. The Table and the Chair. Lear (text).
PICTURES USED IN FOURTH GRADE LANGUAGE
The Angelus. Millet. The Madonna of the Chair. Raphael.
The Annunciation. Rossetti. Plowing. Bonheur.
Christ and the Doctors. Hoffman. Potrait of George Washington. Stuart.
A Dutch Interior. DeHooch. Return of the Fishermen. Sorolla.
The Gleaners. Millet. Woman Churning. Millet.
FIFTH GRADE
Suggestions for work in this grade have been organized around the
following headings:
1. Suggested objectives for fifth grade (such as may logically follow
those of preceding grades and serve as a guide for the teacher).
2. Subject matter and activities (essential to the realizations of the
objectives).
3. Procedure (such as many teachers have found satisfactory).
4. Suggested fifth grade outcomes (to be expected in terms of the
former recommendations).
5. Eeferences.
Before attempting to teach fifth grade language the teacher should
read the section on language in the grammar grades and the work for
grades four and six as well as for fifth grade. Reading the entire language
course will prove still more helpful.
I. Suggested fifth grade objectives.
1. To carry forward the objectives set up in previous grades.
2. To outline stories and think in terms of main ideas in the develop-
ment of a subject.
3. To provide frequent practice in the form, proper content and
arrangement with regard to sending and replying to friendly and
business letters, announcements and informal and formal invitations.
4. To understand and apply grammatical principles in the writing of
a good fifth grade composition. Example:
a. Select a suitable subject.
b. Have something ready to say.
c. Have a good beginning sentence.
d. Vary sentences so as to make them blend into good paragraph and not over-
work any one word.
e. Make every sentence clear and to tell something worthwhile and essential to
the story.
g. Write so that reading will be enjoyable.
5. To understand and apply grammatical principles in the analysis of
the simplest form of the complex sentence.
a. The conception of modifiers expanded to include phrases and possibly clauses
as adjective modifiers, and the adverb as a verb modifier. The use of the
comma to set off certain phrases and clauses should be taught in this con-
nection.
b. The object of the verb should be distinguished. The^objective ^case and its
use with prepositions may be pointed out. Example: "to me," "for you and
me."
c. Comparison of adjectives and adverbs should be taught with emphasis on
correct use. . . .
d. Compound nouns and adjectives with hyphen: as used in descriptions and
numbers, "sky-blue," "coal-black," "twenty-seven," etc.
6. To develop a more liberal interpretation of the thoughts of others;
a more discriminating taste for good literature and its ability to
contribute to the pupils' experience and happiness; and to appreciate
the art of self-expression through language.
*Substituted.
186 Course of Study for the
7. To develop pupil ability to do persuasive thinking and speaking.
8. To strengthen in the pupil the habit of wholesome self-criticism and
giving out only his best in oral and written work.
II. Subject matter.
A. MATERIALS
1. Text: The Open Door Language Series, Fifth Grade.
2. Suggested supplementary for general use:
a. Two or more series of language texts. (See recommendations un-
der "Suggestions in Regard to the Selections and Organization
of Subject Matter," page 125.)
b. Reading references, such as sets of pupils' reference books, dic-
tionaries, maps, charts, atlases and guides.
c. Supplementary and basal grade readers in all grade subjects
other than language. (See outline for fifth grade reading and
the state list of elementary texts, basal and supplementary.)
d. Special collections of classical and general reading and picture
material of fifth grade difficulty. This should include a variety
of good stories and poems. For comments see Grade Three. For
book and picture list see reference at end of Fifth Grade outline.
B. ACTIVITIES
1. Reproducing stories heard and stories read.
2. Telling and writing original stories.
3. Outlining and recording the requirements of a good story.
4. Criticizing stories.
5. Rearranging poorly constructed stories.
6. Analyzing the value of conversation in stories.
7. Outlining and writing for class use the devices that help to improve
the style of a good story.
8. Making introductions to stories.
9. Outlining and preserving in written form the sources and kinds of
stories that may be reproduced.
10. Outlining and writing for class use the requirements of good titles;
criticism and revision of titles and specimens of choice titles.
11. Making and preserving in good form outlines of choice stories.
12. Giving oral and written reports and announcements to the room and
to other rooms.
13. Giving and writing directions and explanations as to how to make
and to do things.
14. Explaining pictures, maps, slides, cartoons, experiments, etc.
15. Analyzing descriptions and outlining requirements of a good de-
scription.
16. Describing in both oral and written form persons, animals, plants,
things, lost articles, wanted articles.
17. Debating informally, with or without written preparation.
18. Planning for dramatization, dramatizing, determining and writing
out for class use standards of measure for good dramatization.
19. Making, writing and telling or reciting jokes and poetry.
20. Memorizing and reciting poetry.
21. Consulting dictionary and interpreting references.
22. Planning for and making presentations.
23. Asking and answering questions.
24. Criticizing one's own work and that of others.
25. Writing letters: to absent classmates; to children in other rooms;
to children in other schools; to children in other cities or states; to
friends who are ill; to relatives and to business concerns.
26. Defining grammatical terms, forms, usages, etc.
27. Selecting words, phrases, or sentences in prose or poetry which make
most effective contributions to the vividness, beauty and force of a
selection.
28. Analyzing and studying sentences as to kind, meaning, grammatical
parts, punctuation, etc.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 187
29. Making and recording simple book reports.
30. Classifying words as to color, sound, feeling, action and name
meaning.
31. Preparing or collecting models; informal and formal letters and
invitations; accepting or declining informal and formal invitations;
responding to informal and formal letters; presenting and accepting
or declining a gift or bequest, submitting and responding to orders,
complaints, requests for information, applications, etc.
32. Collecting, studying and filling blanks; telegraph, application for
money order, bank deposit, residence card, personal information card
such as called for on standardized tests.
III. Procedure.
A. ORAL COMPOSITION
1. Story-Telling
Lead pupils to see the variety of sources from which they may
draw original stories bearing upon their daily activities, interests
and contacts. Guide them into the choice and development of subject
bearing on pupil interest and experience in the home, street, school,
work, sports, holidays, travel, community concerns and things seen,
felt and heard. Provide for the choice and use of other stories
dealing with pupil imagination such as may come from pictures,
dreams, autobiography, stories, anecdotes and fairy tales. Still
other types should include incidents and stories read or heard such
as anecdotes, fables and legends.
To insure the greatest possible growth in oral composition, each
contribution should be treated in terms of its possibilities for child
advancement and in terms of the individual needs of the pupils.
(See page 126 for grouping within the grade for instructional
purposes.) Very definite standards should be informally worked out
in class to serve as a guide in evaluating and strengthening the
quality of oral composition through story-telling. As these standards
are developed and parts agreed upon each should be written on the
board and reasons brought out for each essential point, along with
illustrations from the teacher and pupils. Actual story-telling and
criticism in terms of the previously agreed upon standards should
follow.
Outlines of the characteristics of special kinds of stories, and
fables or myths, should also be developed.
In the treatment of stories a variety of approaches may be made.
(See story-telling, page 135, in general introduction for primary
grades.) The teacher may tell or read the story in an interesting
way to the pupils and re-tell the story, studying it with the pupils
and noting the introductions, order of events, elimination of un-
necessary detail, gradual growth of interest, effective placing of
certain words, choice of words to produce stories and taking caution
not to attempt to memorize or have memorized the stories intended
for reproduction. Pupils may be asked to read and prepare to tell
specific stories; to tell original stories; to tell any story they es-
pecially like and why they like it, to tell stories of certain special
types such as a funny story, a story of kindness, a Christmas story,
a Thanksgiving story, a story about animals, travel, etc.
188 Course of Study for the
Outlines or notes which may be needed in presenting the story
should be written on small cards or slips of paper about 3x5 inches
so that they may be held in the hand in an inconspicuous manner
and not present a barrier between the speaker and his audience.
In order to give pleasure through the presentation of a story
the pupil should:
a. Enjoy the story himself, feel the need, see the pictures.
b. Know the story thoroughly and let it possess him before he is ready to share
it with others.
c. Make a desirable presentation before the class by standing erect, looking
pleasant and gaining voice-control to conform to the situation.
d. Talk to all members of the class by speaking so that he may be heard and
letting the eyes move easily over the entire group.
e. Tell the story logically, without repetition and by leaving out parts of least
essential when time for telling the story is limited or pupils are likely to tire
before story is completed.
f. Shift the voice to conform with changes of scene, characters and plot in the
story.
g. Be able to give one's own interpretation of the story if called upon.
2. Dramatization
Effective oral language work may be done through dramatization
following :
The reading of a story, poem, a book or a play.
The study of a picture, a project, an experiment, etc.
The writing of a story or a play.
The attendance at a fair, a circus, an auction.
Dramatization is decidedly a language activity but may and
should be used in the development of other school subjects. (See
sixth grade clothing project and other illustrations.) In whatever
subjectmatter field dramatization may appear, it should be held on
the same high plane of teaching as if it were a part of the language
period and often the preparation for such dramatization may be
worked out during language period.
In the study of literature and various other reading matter in-
cluded in the language and reading courses dramatization may be
based on book content such as "Just So Stories," "Uncle Remus,"
"Mr. Doolittle," "Toby Tyler," "Little Orphan Annie," "The Flag
Goes By" (text page 119), and other stories and poems representing
scenes from children's books which contain dramatic situations.
Language or "Good English" plays representing the battle of good
English, what became of the boy who did not care, what took place
in Judge Crammer's court, etc., afford splendid opportunity for
teaching correct speech through dramatization, while the writing
of the plays contributes to growth in composition and vocabulary.
In history dramatization may portray lives and events of earlier
explorers, as the landing of Columbus, the Boston Tea Party, sign-
ing the Declaration of Independence, making treaties with the In-
dians, etc.
In citizenship dramatization may reflect court procedure, cam-
paigns, elections, interviews, fire prevention, safety first, clean-up
campaigns.
In health dramatization may show the value and proper use of
foods; how to build strong bodies; how to make a garden; the care
of plants, animals, clothing, other members of the family; how to
provide proper work, exercise, and sleep; how to get rid of flies and
other pests.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 189
The number of dramatizations may well be determined by the
needs of the class, the general procedure for the grade work, pupil
needs, the reading being done, the season of the year and the time
available for such.
3. Other Oral Composition
All oral language work, including story-telling, dramatization,
conversation, description, debate, narration, interview, oral reading,
reciting from memory and such other experiences as the pupil may
have, should be carefully guarded regardless of the subject or the
situation in which such occurs. Correction, if necessary, and re-
medial work may well come later.
Pictures as listed for this grade may be used as a basis for con-
versation, story-telling, or description. These are intended to sup-
plement the study of literature through illustration and inspiration
and interpretation.
B. WRITTEN COMPOSITION
The written work should be a continuation, an enlargement and a
refinement of the work begun in lower grades. Along with the teacher's
effort to secure a free and natural pupil expression should come an in-
crease in the demand for correct form and the teaching or re-teaching
of essential forms as needs appear in natural situations. These may
include writing letters, notes, invitations, and excuses; filling in forms;
writing notices, announcements and advertisements; doing creative writ-
ing as in stories, poems, articles, plays, editorials, and diaries; writing
reports, reviews, summaries and directions; making notes, memoranda
lists, outlines, taking minutes, copying and taking directions and mak-
ing a bibliography.
Letter writing:
Business letters to firms for information or supplies. (May be
extensively correlated with geography by writing for pamphlets,
circulars, railroad information, quotations and guides.)
Letters asking permission to visit industrial plants, firms or
individuals.
Letters of thanks written after a visit, in response to a gift or
a special favor rendered.
Letters (social) to school friends, to parents, to children in other
communities, and to children in other lands. (See third grade pro-
cedure.)
Informal notes: Excuses or explanations, invitations, memorandums.
Formal notes: Invitations to friend to a party; application for posi-
tion as newspaper boy, office girl or to collect water rent, light
bills, etc.
Notices of games, lectures, exhibits, entertainments, meetings.
Reports of committee to school or class; minutes of council or club.
Report of books, articles, speeches, plays; of observations, or ex-
periments.
Creative writing: papers, clubs, class or school newspaper, diaries. In
creative work the pupil should be trained:
To choose appropriate subjects which he can make interesting
to others as he develops these.
To know the importance of being original and that to be original
he must think for himself.
190 Course of Study for the
To make the work interesting by beginning with a good sentence,
disclosing events rapidly and clearly, and, having an effective ending.
To use variety in the choice of words and sentences for pro-
ducing vivid pictures.
To develop a sense of humor in writing such as found in jokes
and riddles.
To recognize the difference between prose and poetry in writing
and to appreciate both.
To gain some knowledge of rhythm and to produce rhymes.
To know that it is important to keep one's audience in mind
when writing.
To realize that vulgarity and poorly chosen words in jokes,
stories, and poems are unpardonable and should be avoided.
To keep in mind the importance of making one's work on paper
attractive to the reader.
Class yearbook — containing samples of the best work of each pupil in
class for entire year.
Booklets containing local pictures and descriptions.
Booklets for geography class telling of imaginary toavels through
countries studied, also some real journeys or excursions. (This offers
opportunity for much originality.)
Booklets and plays in health work, local, state and national
history, developments.
Book reviews based largely on library books read.
Vacation subjects: "Where We Went During Easter," etc.
Social situations: "How Our Playground Should be Managed," "Why
We Should Have Traffic Rules," etc.
Creative poems (for pleasure). (Composite work of the class and the
work of an individual.)
Study and imitation of model compositions. (The teacher should
develop these in class or provide models.)
C. LANGUAGE FORM
1. Remedial Work
Review essentials for previous grades and require at all times
the correct use of all forms taught. Guard against speech errors,
and train pupils to recognize and to correct their own speech. Guard
both their oral and their written speech. Have pupils correct their
own work and that of others by definite and helpful rating sheets.
(See plan in third grade, pages 160-162.) Errors of speech common
to fifth grade:
Verb forms:
"Has spoke" for "have spoken"
"Has wrote" for "has written"
"He says" for "he said"
"Had ought" for "he ought"
"Hadn't ought" for "ought not"
Confusion of "set" for "sit"
"Come" for "came"
Pronouns :
"Him and me" for "he and I"
"Them trees" for "those trees"
"These kind" for "this kind"
"She told Mary and I" for "she told Mary and me"
"Us boys" for "we boys"
Miscellaneous :
Errors in sentence structure are usually of two kinds — the incomplete and the
stringy run on kind.
Paragraphs are often merely a group of unrelated sentences, and
too short or too long unless paragraph unity is stressed. Titles often
fail to make a striking impression on the reader because of the
wording.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 191
Grammar grade pupils may be self-conscious and not make an
attractive appearance unless taught to do so.
The over use of "and", "er", "well", "then", may appear unless
drilled out. Errors in spelling may be traced to poor accomplish-
ments during the spelling period, poor writing, failure to use dic-
tionary properly and failure to check one's own work.
Punctuation should also be carefully observed. (See Part Five,
page 215, of the language course.)
2. New Grade Essentials
Capitals — Where new needs arise.
First word of a quotation if not already introduced.
Certain abbreviations requiring the use of capitals and
not already taught.
Other correct uses as activities of the pupils may
demand.
Punctuation should be taught in terms of pupil needs and by
means of the use of language texts and reading matter for illustra-
tions. A more extended use should be made of the comma and the
apostrophe. The semi-colon and colon may be introduced.
The sentence — subject and predicate; the simple and the com-
plex; the use of clear-cut sentences and the choice of words in both
oral and written sentences.
Outlines — logical, brief, complete, correct and well-written.
Voice — pleasing, clear and forceful. Enunciation and pronunci-
ation should be made correct by keeping a list of all errors and
providing sufficient drill in correct practice.
Vocabulary, or word-building, should continue through the use
of the dictionary, conversation, listening to others and specific study
as to synonyms, prefixes, suffixes, modifiers, etc.
D. USE OF READING MATTER
Through the use of various types of choice reading matter including
stories, poems, and information pupils should master ten or fifteen good
stories and an equal number of poems. Definite provision should be
made for pleasure reading and follow-up informal discussions and free-
dom for pupil choice in the selection of what he shall read and the
amount of follow-up work he shall do. Very rarely if ever should a
pupil be required to read, report on or memorize a book or selection
which he does not like. It is the teacher's duty to create a situation
which will produce the appreciation or to help the pupil find desirable
substitute reading matter. Appreciation cannot be forced, but choice
can and should be guided so as to result in the pupil's appreciation for
literature.
IV. Expected outcomes for fifth grade.
1. Evidence of growth in oral and written composition as shown by
the quality, length and depth of thought given to a subject.
2. Ability to outline interesting grade stories, make brief book reviews,
give specific directions, make and respond to inquiries, carry on
telephone conversation, and dictate briefly but effectively to the
teacher or other members of the class.
192 Course of Study for the
3. Produce acceptable friendly and business letters, formal and in-
formal invitations and responses, and grade compositions.
4. Habit and skill in correcting one's written work.
5. Broad reading, liberal interpretation and careful evaluation of
literature.
6. Evidence of pupil originality in both oral and written speech as
shown by talks, composition, rimes, poetry and song.
7. Evidence of tolerance and reason when pupil finds thoughts in con-
flict with his own, as shown by courteous attention, re-reading, dis-
cussing and criticizing others.
8. Power of leadership as evidenced from debates, public speaking and
composition.
9. Ability to plan and direct an original grade dramatization.
V. Reference for pupil material. (For teaching helps see pages 125, 130
and 177.)
STORY BOOKS
Grades
-5 — Lester. Great Pictures and Their Stories, Book I. Mentzer.
4-5 — Brown. In the Days of Giants. Houghton.
4-6 — Hawthorne. Tanglewood Tales for Girls and Boys. Houghton.
4-6 — Anderson. Fairy Tales. Dutton.
5-7 — Hawthorne. Wonder Book for Girls and Boys. Houghton.
4-6 — Colum. Forge in the Forest. Macmillan.
5-7 — Harris. Uncle Remus, His Songs and His Sayings. Appleton.
4-6 — Kingsley. Water Babies. Macmillan.
5-8 — Lagerlof. Wonderful Adventures of Nils. Doubleday.
4-6 — Lang. Blue Fairy Book. Longmans.
4-8 — Defoe. Robinson Crusoe. Houghton.
5-7 — Dodge. Hans Brinker (Dutch Life). Scribner's.
4-6 — Otis. Toby Tyler. Harper.
5-7— Spyri. Heidi. Rand-McNally.
5-6 — Blaisdell. Stories From English History From the Earliest Times to the Present
Day. Ginn.
4-7 — Boutet de Monvel. Joan of Arc. McKay.
5-7 — Schultz. Sinapoh, the Indian Boy. Houghton.
4-7 — Tappan. American Hero Stories. Houghton.
4-6 — Brooks. True Story of Christopher Columbus. Lothrop.
5-7 — Hillyer. A Child's Geography of the World. Century.
4-6 — Bianco. All About Pets. Macmillan.
4-8 — Jenkins. Interesting Neighbors. Blackinston.
4-7 — Kipling. Jungle Book. Doubleday.
4-6 — Miller. First Book of Birds. Houghton.
5-8 — Adams. Cork Ships and How to Make Them. Dutton.
POETRY
2-6 — Lindsay. Johnny Appleseed. Macmillan.
4-7 — De La Mare. Down-a-down Derry. Holt.
3-8 — Lucas. Book of Verse for Children. Holt.
3.8 — Olcott. Story-Telling Poems. Houghton.
3-6 — Wiggin. Posy Riug, A Book of Verse for Children. Doubleday.
Commonly used grade poems as determined by research and reported in Teachers' College
Record, Volume XXVIII, No. 2:
Little Orphan Annie. Riley (text). Casabianca. Hemans.
The Leak in the Dike. Cary. Knee-Deep in June. Riley.
Robin Hood and Little John. Unknown. John Gilpin's Ride. Cowper.
Paul Revere's Ride. Longfellow (text). The Bells. Poe.
Nathan Hale. Finch. In Flanders Field. McCrae (text).
PICTURES MOST COMMONLY USED IN -FIFTH GRADE
A Polish Nobleman. Rembrandt. Pilgrims Going to Church. Boughton.
The Blue Boy. Gainsborough. Sistine Madonna. Raphael.
Don Caulos on Horseback. Velasquez. Song of the Lark. Breton.
Harp of the Winds. Martin. The Torn Hat. Sully.
In the Tulip Fields. Hitchcock. Venetian Waters. Tito.
SIXTH GRADE
The sixth grade language work should be based upon the accomplish-
ments of the fifth grade and result in a more complete preparation for
seventh grade in that the work in each grade should be a part of a con-
tinuous grammar grade language course. As in other grades oral language
should be correlated with all other subjects. Written composition should
be based on the oral work and include a wide variety of subjects. The
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 193
course should provide rich content, including a broad reading experience,
which will meet the needs of the various grade pupils. The different mental
capacities of the pupils, as well as the different environmental conditions
should be considered in grouping, teaching and promoting pupils. The
teacher, in consultation with the principal, should feel free to choose such
group and grade activities and materials as will best contribute to pupil
development through the use of the text.
Suggestions for work in the grade have been organized around the
following heads:
1. Suggested objectives for sixth grade (such as may logically follow
those of preceding grades and serve as a guide to the teacher).
2. Subject matter and activities (essential to the realization of these
objectives).
3. Procedure (such as many teachers have found satisfactory).
4. Suggested sixth grade outcomes (to be expected in terms of the
former recommendatibns).
5. Reference.
6. Illustrations and correlations (for making language instruction
function in all school life and outside of school).
Note: See general section, "Language in the Grammar Grades," for grouping pupils and
other information common to the grades.
I. Suggested sixth grade objectives.
1. To continue the development of objectives set up for lower grades.
2. To develop more discriminating thought in the choice of topics for
oral and written composition.
3. To encourage fluency and the creative spirit in expression.
4. To lead pupils to think, speak and write in terms of forceful, related
and logically arranged sentences of various kinds.
5. To establish habitual use of correct forms and to develop attractive
styles in harmony with generally accepted sixth grade practice.
6. To cause pupils to strive for language ability as contributive to self-
expression, self-adaptation and the development of leadership.
7. To lead pupils to use convincing terms and a pleasing voice.
8. To stimulate and guide pupils into a broader use and appreciation
of various kinds of reading.
9. To so arrange and direct the grade work that language growth shall
take place wherever language is used and in terms of the varying
interests, needs and abilities of each pupil.
II. Subject matter.
A. MATERIALS
1. Text: Open Door Language Series, Sixth Grade. (Individual copies
owned by pupils and teacher.)
2. Suggested supplementary for general use:
a. Two or more series of language texts. (See recommendations under Sug-
gestions in regard to the selection and organization of subject matter, pages
123-125.)
b. General references: Encyclopedia, dictionary (individual copies owned by
pupils and an unabridged copy for general use), maps, charts, atlases, guides,
yearbooks, magazines, newspapers and library index and shelving.
c. Basal supplementary and reference reading material used in all grade subjects
other than the language course.
d. A broad collection of classical and general reading and picture material.
This should include various kinds of prose and poetry. For types see refer-
ences at the end of the grade outline. These lists are not to' be interpreted
as minimum or maximum grade requirements but as suggestive of desirable
quality and variety.
B. ACTIVITIES
The activities listed below are suggested in terms of the grade
objectives, the general nature of children to think and to do and what
the teacher may direct as a means for child growth through language
194 Course op Study for the
expression in all grade work. Since children learn only through ex-
periencing and all instruction should be based on pupil needs, the actual
selecting of activities should be largely a matter of local concern. The
teacher should exercise good judgment and initiative to the extent that
she shall have a worthy and specific purpose for each activity.
1. Oral Composition
Discovering sources of and using original material for story-
telling based on personal interests, common interests and imagi-
nation. Examples: Our Ball Team. Our Christmas Entertainment.
Our Visit to the Factory. My First Boat Trip. A Good Citizen. The
Postman. A Week-end Vacation. What I Would do if I Had a
Thousand Dollars. Where I Would Like to Spend my Next Vacation.
Studying stories: Evaluating and improving upon titles; making
outlines; re-arranging ideas; substituting new ideas in minor cases;
substituting or re-arranging sentences; studying sentence structure
and suggesting changes for improving, shortening and reenforcing
parts; evaluating the closing sentence. Comparing one story with
another; outlining stories; classifying stories.
Listening to others read, tell, debate, question, answer questions,
recite from memory, outline, evaluate, give directions, sing, drama-
tize and carry on general conversation.
Dramatizing stories and real situations: Plan, memorize, cos-
tume, rehearse, reproduce. Reproducing stories read and stories
heard.
Giving simple directions: How to go to places, do things, make
things, find things, preserve things, use things. Examples: How to
Find the Local Hotel. How to Find Mr. Smith's Home in Dudley
Park. Transplanting Trees. Picking Strawberries. Making a Kite.
Making Jelly. How to Get a Library Book. Keeping a Good Note-
book. Making Preserves. Putting Clothes Away for the Season.
How to Use a Dial Telephone. How to Use the Dictionary. Travel-
ing on a Street Car.
Giving simple descriptions of persons, animals, places and things.
Examples: George Washington as a Boy. How my Grandfather's
Ice House Looked. The First Dog I Ever Owned. Mount Vernon.
Our Old Swimming Pool. My Mother's Party Dress. My First Over-
alls. A New Bicycle. The Picture I Like Best.
Giving simple explanation: How something is done, how games
are played. Examples: How a Water-Wheel Works. How a Cold
Frame is Made. Why Flowers Grow Better in the Ground Than in
Window Boxes. How Ice is Made. How to Play Basketball. How
to Hand Pictures. Why the Eskimo Eats so Much Meat.
Taking part in simple debates: Illustration of topics: All Ath-
letics Should be Given Out-of-Doors. Basketball is More Dangerous
Than Football. A City Library is More Important Than a City
Hospital. The Telephone System is More Important Than the Postal
System. Boys Should Study Domestic Science. A School Cafeteria
is More Important Than a School Auditorium.
Giving dictation.
Memorizing and reciting incidentally or in recitation: Poetry,
proverbs, mottoes, plays, facts, rules, principles, special references.
2. Written Composition
Writing letters to classmates, children in other rooms; in other
communities; in other countries; to those who are ill; to relatives;
to business concerns making orders; inquiries, requests, applications,
payments, responses to special requests, etc. Examples: Inviting
another grade to hear the original poems recently written; inviting
pupils in another school to join in a ball game or picnic; writing to
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 195
a pupil or a friend who is ill; writing- a friendly letter or invitation
to a favorite uncle or cousin; requesting a catalogue or a free map;
inquiring the way or the cost of a trip to a specific place; request-
ing a speaker to address the class or the school; applying for a
position for work before or after school hours, such as selling papers,
mowing lawns, making candy and selling things; paying a bill by
mail; answering inquiries and announcements from grades, schools
and other groups and individuals.
Writing informal notes and formal notes: inviting friends to a
party, accepting invitations, declining invitations, accompanying
gifts, thanking friends for gifts or favors.
Writing outlines: outlining things read or heard; outlining an
original story to be written.
Selecting, revising and developing topic into written paragraph
or paragraphs.
Writing out parts to a play.
Writing out preparation for a debate.
Reducing model compositions of more than one paragraph to an
outline.
Writing a narration of more than one paragraph on subjects in
the various fields: natural science, social science, practical arts, fine
arts, health, home environment, street environment.
Writing proverbs, mottoes, jokes, questions, answers to questions,
and information needed for filling blanks.
Writing original stories or poems.
Copying outlines of stories, lists of stories, complete stories,
favorite parts of stories, choice poems, list of characters in a play,
parts of a play, special lists of words, assignments.
Writing conversation: telephone; street; travel; social.
Keeping a diary, booklet, references, word lists, book lists, direc-
tions, problems, illustrations.
Writing criticisms on one's own work and that of others.
Writing out standards of attainments, outlines, guides, etc., for
class use.
Taking dictation and correcting work.
3. Use of Reading Matter
Listening to others read and to talk on topics of general interest.
Studying prose by reading, discussing parts or all of a selection
read, outlining material read, summarizing material read, comparing
the content with other reading matter, studying sentence structure
and word usage in the natural setting, studying the topic sentence
and the closing sentence of a paragraph, studying the usage of
punctuation, observing the use of capitals.
Studying the kinds of prose as to narrative, descriptive, etc.
Selecting suitable material for dramatization.
Choosing informational material in answer to a question, in
solution of a problem, in preparation for a debate or a talk and to
satisfy personal curiosity and desire.
Reading in response to a definite assignment; for directions for
going places, doing things, making things, finding things and pre-
serving things.
Reading for a better knowledge of people, the best ideas and facts
contained in print, a better understanding of the past and present
social, economic, business and religious life.
Reading to determine desirable styles of writing.
Reading for vocabulary development: securing new words, get-
ting additional word meaning and a better knowledge of spelling.
196 Course of Study for the
C. LANGUAGE FORMS
Continued effort should be given to the complete learning of all
essentials outlined in previous grades and review provided where neces-
sary. The new language forms to be presented in this grade should be
determined in part by the needs which pupils in natural language
situations such as letter, story and other writings.
Continued and advanced study should be made of sentences for ex-
panding, condensing and transforming. This should be included in the
recognition of various kinds of sentences: The declarative, the interrog-
ative, the imperative and the exclamatory; the simple, the complex
and the compound; the weak and the strong; the short and the long
and the variety of sentences which add to the strength and effectiveness
of a letter or paragraph. This means the developing of the power to
think two or more things or ideas in relation, and to make choices,
combinations, contrasts and comparisons.
Verbs should be studied as to auxiliaries, tense, conjugation, prin-
cipal parts and effective use in particular situations.
The semi-colon and the colon should be studied as needed in pupils'
actual written work, defined in language texts and illustrated freely in
reading matter.
The use of the dictionary for learning word meaning, new words,
synonyms, spelling and the essential and easier diacritical marks.
In the continued study of the paragraph sense to include a compo-
sition of two or more paragraph compositions attention should be given
to the construction and retention of the beginning paragraph, the end-
ing paragraph and the middle paragraph, if there be one.
Outlining to the extent of two or three sub-heads should be taught
and careful consideration given to indentation and capitalization. Out-
lines of things read may be more complete than the outlines of an
original piece of work to be produced but both should be taught.
III. Procedure.
Before actually beginning to teach the teacher should know as much
about children as possible: their nature, what they do and what they like.
She should make a special study of sixth grade pupils and determine, as
early as possible, the facts concerning her special group. This may require
a great deal of professional study, for in addition to knowing the nature,
interests and responses of pupils she should find out what these pupils
have had in lower grades, what was expected of them, what may be ex-
pected of them during the present year and how this can best be taught.
She should also know when to teach certain things, how to do remedial
teaching, how to help pupils meet special needs, how to measure results
and how to cause each child to develop a spirit of wholesome self-criticism
and growth.
A. ORAL COMPOSITION
Careful consideration should still be given to oral composition be-
cause life demands of each individual so much more oral than written
composition and skill in the use of oral composition is essential to being
understood and having one's wishes and desires satisfactorily met.
For conversation, discussion, story-telling, debating, etc., worthy
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 197
subjects of local interest should be selected by the pupils unconsciously
guided by the teacher. In group discussion definite outlines for the
development of these subjects and standards for measuring attainments
may be determined. After individual preparation has been made pupil
contribution may take place in a formal way, follow with discussion
and evaluation, and either lead into new and related activities or be
re-worked in terms of specific needs arising. Examples: In telling a
story a pupil may fail to know his subject matter, speak so as to be
pleasingly understood or show carelessness in the use of words and
sentences which will justify a re-working of the story or a better
presentation of another story. If the story has been successfully pre-
sented, as attractive to the group, and lends to play-writing and dra-
matization the next steps in the use of the story may be to select the
characters, write the conversation (if not already in conversational
style), plan a dramatization and reproduce the story in this form.
While this is essentially language instruction such may, and does,
take place in other subject matter courses and the development of big
topics into large unit studies regardless and inclusive of all subject
matter fields. Such practice is illustrated in the clothing project given
at the end of this grade outline and applicable to conditions in all
grammar grades. In this illustration may also be found real motive
for letter-writing.
B. WRITTEN COMPOSITION
Letter-writing and all forms of written composition should first have
a motive which prompts the pupil to see reasons, other than that of
making good appearances on paper, for his efforts in writing. Follow-
ing the establishment of motive should come a clear, reasonable and
interesting assignment and a pupil consciousness of desirable standards.
Most of the actual written work should be done in class and under
supervision (not mere inspection) .
While written composition is less in demand and one may live
reasonably complete without its mastery it is of sufficient importance
to justify careful and specific treatment. The sixth grade pupil still
experiences a self -consciousness at a moment of writing which tends to
check spontaneous written expression. This is no doubt due to the de-
mands made upon him for the mechanics of written composition, which
have not as yet become established habits. It should be an object of
the written composition lesson to make these mechanics function auto-
matically. In the sixth grade, however, far more attention should be
given to sentence structure, to the development of the paragraph and
to some of the rudiments of style than to technical matters. While every
pupil should progress at his maximum rate and accomplish as much as
possible during the year, any pupil who can express himself with simple,
clear and correct sentences invariably begun with capitals and ended
with the closing marks essential to each has the rudiments of written
composition and will acquire a more mature style in advancing grades
and outside of school.
198 Course of Study for the
C. LANGUAGE FORMS
The teaching of technicalities to be effective, must be in terms of
pupils' felt need. The teacher, should, therefore, have in mind at all
times the generally accepted grade essentials, the approaching needs
of her pupils, how to create a felt need on the part of pupils if such
does not exist, how to meet these needs and adequate measure for her
teaching in terms of expected outcomes. Re-teaching should be pro-
vided where learning is found to be incomplete. New situations and
new materials add interest to re-learning.
D. USE OF READING MATTER
The ability and desire to read, organize and digest the best in grade
literature is equally as important as the mastery of oral and written
composition, and largely controls growth in self-expression. The extent
to which one develops skill and appreciation through the use of well-
selected reading matter determines largely the possibility for inde-
pendent and worthy reading habits in upper grades and out of school.
The grade materials for the development of necessary skill and ap-
preciation should be selected in terms of specific needs and to insure a
reasonable use of all types commonly used in the grade. (See general
discussion of language in grammar grades for suggestions regarding
selection and usage.) Special thought should be given to pupil train-
ing in the effective use of all reference and source material, as indicated
in the use of the dictionary and other classroom and library practice.
Following purposeful reading of selections should come reports, dis-
cussions, arguments, comparisons, outlines, debates, possibly memori-
zation, etc., as suggested in the development of oral composition. A
definite part of the time assigned to language instruction should be
given to this factor of language correlated with instruction in other
subjects and based on pupil needs as actually met in general learning
situations.
IV. Expected sixth grade outcomes.
1. Desire to enter into worthwhile discussion and to contribute thought
in both oral and written form.
2. Acquired speaking traits: good posture, desire to please, mastery of
subject matter, organization of subject matter, command of words,
and sentences, correct speech, controlled voice, brevity and an atti-
tude of open-mindedness and reasoning.
3. Ability to speak in an interesting and logical way on a variety of
familiar topics using good enunciation, good pronunciation and vari-
ous kinds of sentences logically arranged.
4. Ability to write good friendly and business letters, announcements,
informal and formal invitations and outlines in keeping with gen-
erally accepted sixth grade standards.
5. Ability to develop a familiar topic by writing one or more strong
paragraphs containing various types of good sentences and correct
capitalization, punctuation, spelling and sentence structure, as com-
monly accepted sixth grade practice.
6. Ability to produce a good title and a brief outline of subject to be
discussed orally or in writing.
7. Ability to criticize directly and constructively, both favorably and
adversely.
8. Evidence of pupil consciousness of language errors and a desire to
eliminate same as shown by constant and volunteer revision and im-
provement of the pupils' work.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 199
9. Ability and frequent practice in the effective use of the dictionary,
encyclopedia, collections of books, indexes, table of contents and other
needed references. .
10. A general knowledge of myths, legends, hero tales and informational
material for the understanding of literature and problems to be met
with in advanced grades and outside of school.
11. An appreciation for tales of adventure and history, and interest in
12. A knowledge of leading authors of grade literature and ability to
reproduce choice stories and poems.
13. Pupil contributions through _
a. Group expression in clubs, plays, dramatizations, music and fine
b. Individual and original pupil contributions in the form of short
stories, descriptions, letters, plays, announcements, debates,
rhymes, and possibly poems and songs.
V. Reference for pupil material. (For teaching helps see page 177.)
STORY BOOKS
Grades „ . _ , , TT ,, ,
-6 — Lester. Great Pictures and Their Stories, Book VI. Mentzer.
3-6 — Bible. Children's. Scribner's.
3-6— Bible. Bible Stories to Read and Tell (Olcott ed.). Houghton.
5-6 — Colum. Children of Odin. Macmillan.
4.6 — Arabian Nights. Arabian Nights. Winston.
5-6 — MacDonald. At the Back of the North Wind. Macmillan.
5.7 — pyle. Some Merry Adventures of Robin Hood. Scribner's.
6-7 — Alcott. Little Women. Little.
5-7 — Baylor. Juan and Juanita. Houghton.
5-7 — Canfield. Understood Betsy. Holt.
6-7 — Swift. Gulliver's Travels. Macrae.
4-6 — Lofting. Story of Doctor Dolittle. Stokes.
6-8 — Meigs. Rain on the Roof. Macmillan.
5.7 — Wyss. The Swiss Family Robinson. Harper.
6-8 — Altsheler. Young Trailers. Appleton.
5-8— Hillyer. A Child's History of the World. Century.
6.8 — Wilson. White Indian Boy. World.
5.7 — Yonge. Little Duke Richard the Fearless. Macmillan.
5-7 — Kelly. Story of Sir Walter Raleigh. Dutton.
6_g — Beuret. When I Was a Girl in France. Lothrop.
5-7— Connor. Makers of North Carolina History. Alfred Williams.
6-8 — Mukerii. Gay Neck; the Story of a Pigeon. Dutton.
POETRY
4.6 — Riley. Rhymes of Childhood. Bobbs-Merrill.
3.3 — Burt. Poems Every Child Should Know. Grossett.
6-8 — Holland. Historic Poems and Ballads. Jacobs.
3-9 — Untermeyer. The Singing World. Harcourt.
1-11 — Stevenson. Book of Verse for Young Folk. Holt.
-6 — Iroquois. Literature for Reading and Memorization, Grade Six. Iroquois.
Attractive grade poems as determined by research and reported by Huber in Teachers'
College Record, Volume XXVIII, No. 2:
A Nautical Ballad. Carryl. The House With Nobody in it. Kilmer.
Bert Gelert. Spencer. m / te , x .9 , , , TI c „
Lochinvar. Scott (text). The Wreck of the Hesperus. Longfellow.
Out to Old Aunt Mary's. Riley. The Yarn of the Nancy Bell. Gilbert.
Somebody's Mother. Unknown (text). The Village Blacksmith. Longfellow.
The Duel. Field (text).
PICTURES COMMONLY USED IN SIXTH GRADE LANGUAGE
Christ in the Temple. Prombo. The Minute Man. French.
Joan of Arc Listening to the Heavenly Oxen Going to Work. Troyon.
Voices. Lepage. Shoeing the Mare. Landseer.
The Last Supper. Da Vinci. Spirit of '76. Willard.
The Millpond. Inness. State of Lincoln. Saint Gaudens.
Twilight. Mauve.
VI. Illustration and correlation.
Language instruction should be given during the language period and
for language sake in so far as may seem practical, but should be sufficient
in nature and scope as to include and provide for all the language needs
of all the grade pupils in and out of school. In order to meet all the
language needs of all the pupils in the most favorable situations it often
200 Course of Study for the
becomes necessary to unify subject matter instruction and teach language
at such time and under such conditions as will enable pupils to profit most
from their experiences. The unit of study which follows did not originate
in the language course, but furnishes a typical illustration of language
needs and possibilities in child development. The language growth is in
harmony with and supplementary to the training in history and science
through the study of clothing.
History of a Clothing Project
(Developed by Sixth Grade of Winecoff Consolidated School in Cabarrus County.
Directed by Mary Frix Kidd, Teacher.)
At the beginning of the year, when I took a new group of children
with whom I had made contact the previous year in public school music
classes and in a commencement operetta, I found the group rather difficult
to induce successfully to cooperate with each other or with me. It was
still more difficult to ascertain where their interests lay or to interest
them in any kind of project work. But with the aid of our rural super-
visor and at my suggestion, the children decided early in the year to under-
take quite an extensive clothing project around which we could center our
entire year's work.
So the children each wrote letters to a number of business houses ask-
ing for informative booklets, exhibits, or other material on the great cloth-
ing materials including cotton, silk, flax, wool, leather, rubber, rayon, and
fur, to say nothing of such incidentals as needles, pins, and buttons.
Immediate results were none too gratifying. Many of our letters were
not answered at all. Some firms wrote brief letters and sent a few book-
lets, and offered to send more material upon receipt of amounts varying
from $1.50 to $5.00.
Eventually we ordered a rubber exhibit from the Hood Rubber Com-
pany, with which they sent 40 copies of a booklet on the story of rubber.
We also ordered a silk exhibit from the Corticelli Silk Company, a hemp
exhibit from another place, and charts on silk and fur from another com-
pany. Our supervisor gave us a general chart put out by Colgate & Com-
pany, and showed picture slides of clothing materials.
The company to whom we wrote for information on flax turned our
letter over to an employe who passed it on to his sister who was a teacher.
She wrote a most interesting letter on flax culture and sent us some flax
seed.
The father of one of the pupils, and a designer in a local cotton mill,
prepared a highly instructive exhibit on the different stages of cotton
manufacture.
A teacher in the Harrisburg School, generously, and with a fine pro-
fessional spirit, loaned us a great deal of material that she had used in
a clothing project. This included an exhibit of gloves, leather, hats,
woolen blankets, rayon, and braid, besides a number of booklets and other
material on these subjects.
We planned a trip to the Locke cotton mill, and had our arrangements
all made for the superintendent of the mill, personally, to conduct us and
explain every machine. Because of legislation safeguarding children under
fourteen years of age, the trip had to be made on a Saturday afternoon
when the mill was not running. Arrangements were made for transporting
the children in a school bus to the mill, but unfortunately, at the appointed
time for us to go to the mill, it began to rain hard, so that no one got
there except a few children who lived near enough to walk; but we were
able to rely on what these told to the others.
Reading and literahire: For reading material, I ordered booklets from
the F. A. Owens Publishing Company entitled "The Story of Cotton,"
"The Story of Silk," "The Story of Leather," "The Story of Flax" and
"Gifts of the Forest." Our supervisor loaned us booklets on the "Story
of Rubber" and "The Romance of Rubber." In our school library we found
"Cotton," by Brooks, "How We Are Clothed," Stories from Pathway to
Reading, "Useful Inventions and Their Inventors," "America First," "See-
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 201
ing America, Farm and Field," "Seeing America, Mill and Factory," and
Carpenter's Geographic Readers on Asia, North America, and South
America. From the Corticelli Silk Company we obtained "Silk Culture"
and "The Romantic Story of Silk." The Hood Company sent us booklets
on making rubber shoes, and the Wittall Company sent us booklets on
wool. Roberts, Johnson, and Rand sent us some information on shoemaking.
From the office of our farm demonstrator, a boy secured information
on cotton raising and insect enemies of cotton, particularly the boll weevil.
I had on hand a number of National Geographic magazines which we
found helpful in studying clothing of other lands.
From the Concord Public Library, I obtained "Historic Costumes," by
Lester, and a book on wool. I also looked up everything I could find on
wool, flax, and silk, as well as the biographies of Hargreaves, Whitney,
Crompton, Arkwright, Slater and Cartwright, and Joseph Jacquard and
told this to the children. In connection with the material loaned us by
the Harrisburg teacher, we found booklets on rayon, and hat-making, and
a number of useful charts on other materials. A teacher from Whitehall
let us have a booklet on historic costumes which we studied and later used
as a basis for one of our friezes.
From the U. S. Department of Agriculture we obtained a few booklets,
but these were not of great practical value.
Our first plan, early in the fall, was to build and furnish a model house,
and dress a doll in material of each of the great textiles, but lack of
adequate equipment forced us to abandon this plan.
We planned a great many other things to do which resulted in a spring
program to which the parents were invited. They came and enjoyed both
our program and our exhibit.
Composition and spelling: The children learned to spell, pronounce,
and define 75 words used in connection with clothing materials and their
preparation. In their language work we kept the project in mind at all
times, and when language principles were to be illustrated, we supple-
mented sentences given in the text with informational sentences about
clothing.
I prepared a number of questions covering the nine major clothing
materials, mimeographed and distributed them among the pupils. From
these the pupils prepared a series of oral compositions, and later copied
these compositions in a series of nine illustrated booklets.
According to an outline prepared in class the pupils wrote a three-act
play, "The Man Who Made Cotton King," dramatizing the life of Eli
Whitney. This proved to be their most difficult piece of work and required
some assistance from the teacher.
Early in the fall, the children made a booklet entitled "Styles of Other
Lands." In letter-writing, they had practiced in writing to various firms
for materials, and enjoyed having these firms reply directly to the pupils'
home addresses. They also wrote letters to their parents inviting them
to attend their public entertainment, of which they were very proud.
Arithmetic: We constantly tried to have our arithmetic work as an
outgrowth of our project. I prepared and mimeographed 65 problems on
clothing, all of which the pupils worked at school under direct supervision.
Art — drawing and construction: In accordance with our early plan to
make and furnish a model house, a boy made a bed, another made a chair,
while a third made a table. One of the girls took some material to the
mattress factory and had a miniature mattress made. Then they made
doll clothes, aprons for themselves, pillows and pillow cases, curtains, table-
cloths, napkins, dish towels, counterpanes, sheets, in miniature, of course,
and a number of blocks to be made into a real silk quilt.
After our change in plan, they made and dressed dolls for the puppet
show, imitating as far as possible, the national dress of other countries.
The boys made a framework for the stage and the girls covered it, painted
scenery, and made curtains for it.
They made a frieze on the national dress of other lands, and printed
appropriate labels for the various scenes with practically no supervision
202 Course of Study for the
or instruction. They made another frieze on historic costumes and pre-
pared labels for these.
They found pictures, pasted them in, and cut letters for the backs of
booklet on (1) national costumes and (2) the eight booklets illustrating
major clothing materials.
They constructed and lettered several illustrative posters.
When we were preparing for the public entertainment, the boys found
that we needed a model of Eli Whitney's first cotton-gin, so they found
a picture and copied it as far as possible in the construction of one.
In making the wigs to be used in the play, I taught the girls how this
was done and they made the wigs. They selected the colors for their own
costumes, and in some cases, helped make them. They were also permitted
to select their own parts in the play.
Art — music, picture appreciation, dramatics, speaking: In the course
of our study of clothing, we studied "The Boy With the Torn Hat" and
"Baby Stuart." In music, we learned "Wooden Shoes", "Dixie", "Swing
Low, Sweet Chariot", and "Old Black Joe", all of which were used in our
public entertainment.
In dramatics, the pupils did most effectively their parts in "The Man
Who Made Cotton King" and "Visitors From Other Lands." Naturally,
they memorized these parts, as well as a poem called "The Shirt That Jack
Wears," and their clothing acrostic.
A number of pupils made instructive public talks on skins, furs, silk-
worms, silk, wool, leather, linen, cotton, and the like, thus gaining valuable
experience in standing on their feet and talking to an audience.
History and civics: The class became quite familiar with the biogra-
phies of Whitney, Hargreaves, Arkwright, Cartwright, Crompton, Slater,
and Jacquard. From the book "Cotton," by Brooks, we learned much of
the influence of cotton on the history of the world in general, and of the
south in particular, and what effect cotton had on changes in our govern-
ment and upon slavery. We tried to show that the relations between
masters and slaves were, in the main, friendly and happy. But at the
same time discussed its effect in relation to the poor white man of the
South. In showing how clothing has been one of the primal necessities
of man, and his civilization measured somewhat by it, we linked our study
of cotton with much of the history of Greece, Rome, and other ancient
countries, and the bearing cotton had upon the development of transpor-
tation and trade. In studying silk, we learned much of the history of
China and Japan.
Geography: In connection with our study of clothing materials, we
found that some are made from vegetable and some from animal fiber.
Climate is a great factor in determining where and how these fibers are
produced. It is also a determining factor in the amount and kind of
clothing needed by man, and has some influence on style.
It was necessary, too, to learn to locate places where these materials
are obtained and to study the growth of transportation and trade.
We also studied the manners and customs of other peoples, past and
present, including an extensive study of Indians and American pioneers
and the way they lived, dressed and did things.
Science and nature study: In our study of cotton, we found it neces-
sary to learn the life story of the boll weevil and other insect enemies of
cotton. The wonderful life history of the silk worm afforded interesting
study. Going further into the field of zoology, we studied sheep, goats,
cattle, alligators, horses, rabbits, fur-bearing animals of all kinds, and
other animals whose skins are used for clothing. We learned much of
how and where they are raised and how their coats or hides are prepared
for the use of man.
In the field of botany, we studied cotton plants, flax, rubber trees and
where and how they are grown and how their fiber is prepared for use.
We also learned about by-products in all these materials, such as cotton-
seed and its many uses, flax seed and its uses, etc.
In chemistry, we learned about rayon, its discovery and how it is made,
and about dyes of long ago and dyes of the present.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 203
Health: We emphasized at all times the importance of dressing to suit
the weather and made a poster to illustrate this. In our play, we learned
to dance the minuet.
Remarks: As a culmination of our study of clothing which took us
over all the world and into practically all subjects, we gave a public enter-
tainment consisting of talks, a poem, an acrostic, songs, a piano solo and
two plays, one being presented by pupil actors and the other by dolls made
by the pupils and used in a puppet show.
This large unit of study not only gave the pupils a broad understand-
ing of clothing but furnished a natural and favorable situation for pur-
poseful language training. Every phase of language experience was a
natural outgrowth of the situation and was capitalized in the teaching
of correct form, freedom of expression, choice of words, phrases, sentences,
books, style of composition etc. The reading and organizing of thought
furnished a background of experiences and intelligent participation in the
group responses and preparation for an audience situation. Preparing
for giving the program and meeting the visitors naturally, in unguided
conversation, produced a favorable measure of their earlier language ex-
periences.
A great deal of space would be necessary in order to reproduce all the
written work done in connection with this project and to describe all the
activities in detail. Extracts of creative work done by groups and by
individuals are presented for the purpose of showing more fully the scope
and possibilities of this work. For an evaluation see Tippett, Curriculum
Making in an Elementary School, Ginn; Mossman, Teaching and Learning
in the Elementary School, Houghton; Mearns, Creative Power, Doubleday;
Mearns, Creative Youth, Doubleday; Wells, Project Curriculum, Lippincott.
The following program was rendered:
Song — Wooden Shoes.
Talk on Skins, Furs, and Wool.
Acrostic — Clothing.
Talks on Silk-worms, Silk and Leather.
Poem: This is the Shirt Tha't Jack Wears.
Piano Solo : Dixie Land.
Talks on Cotton, Flax, and Rubber.
Song: Old Black Joe.
Play — The Man Who Made Cotton King.
Cast
Eli Whitney .Mr. Tom Land
Mammy Susan Miss Penelope Bates
Uncle Caesar Timothy
Puppet Show — "Visitors From Other Lands"
Little Negroes
Cast
Fairy Godmother Ho Lun and Li Chang
Hans and Gretel Ramoff and Sevik
Nando and Togo O. Hanu San
Hilda
ACROSTIC
C — is for cotton that is made into cloth
To make pretty clothing so white and soft.
L — is for leather that is made into shoes
For Betty and Billy so bright and so new.
O — is for outing so white and so clear
That all of us wear sometime in the year.
T — is for tree which grows in Brazil
Without rubber, automobiles would fare ill.
H — is for hats which of velvet are made
To keep off the sun and to keep in the shade.
I — is for indigo, a lovely blue dye
To make our clothing look well to the eye.
N — is for needle to sew cloth together
To make clothes to wear in all kinds of weather.
G — is for gloves to keep our hands warm,
To keep off the sun and protect from the storm.
204 Course of Study for the
The Man Who Made Cotton King
ACT I
Time: .1792. Place: Home of Mrs. Nathaniel Greene, in Georgia.
(Curtain rising disclosed group of little negroes laboriously picking the seeds out of cotton
by hand. ; Each has a shoe near him to hold seed. They are singing "Swing Low, Sweet
Chariot," and two of the boys take time to shove each other, or scuffle. Enter Mammy Susan.)
Mammy Susan: How is yo' gittin' along, chillun?
Timothy: Lawsy, Gran'mammy, slo, slo. I'se dat tired I dunno what to do.
Mammy Susan: Go long wid yo, yo' lazy limb of Satan. Yo' needs 39 lashes, so you
doze, for bein' so triflin'. (Cuffs at him, and in dodging her, Timothy upsets his shoe of seed.)
Timothy: Please don' hit me, Gran-mammy. I'se be good, I 'clar I will.
Mammy Susan: Dar now! Look what you went and done! Git right down dar now and
pic kup dem seeds. You know every one of you chaps has got to pick your shoe full of seeds
'fore you kin have no peas and corn and bread and milk, and 'fore you kin go to bed. (Thev
take up the song again, and go on picking, while Mammy Susan busies herself with tidying the
room. She pauses to listen.)
Mammy Susan: Shut up dere, now, you chaps. I hear ole Missus a-comin'.
(Enter Mrs. Nathaniel Greene.)
Mrs. Greene: Why, Mammy, have the children not finished with their task yet?
Mammy Susan: No'm Mist'ess. Dey's jest too triflin' to live!
Mrs. Greene: No, Mammy. I don't think that. Picking seeds out of cotton is hard and
slow work. I do wish somebody would invent a machine to get it out easily. It seems I just
can't make my farm pay. But, Mammy, let the children take their work down to the quarters
and finish it there for I am looking for company. I think they may stay for supper, so you
must cook something real good.
*****
Mammy Susan (putting her head in the door) : Supper is ready, Mist'ess.
Mrs. Smith: Oh! Is it so late? I must be going.
Mrs. Greene: Nonsense. You must all stay to supper. There is to be a beautiful moon
tonight, and you can go home later, if you don't care to spend the night. (All leave for din-
ing room.)
(Curtain)
ACT II
(Scene same as Act I. Time: Several weeks later. Mrs. Greene and Eli Whitney are
seated, conversing. Mammy Susan and Uncle Caesar are putting the last finishing touches to
the room before the guests arrive.)
Mrs. Greene: And, so, Master Whitney, your wonderful machine is finished. Was it very
hard to make?
Eli Whitney: No, madame, not very difficult. The hardest part was to think of some way
to tear the lint from the seed without mashing the seed. But I am glad to say, that the seed
came out perfectly whole and clean, and the lint is quite clean, too.
Mrs. Greene: And do you think it will really work?
Eli Whitney: Perfectly, madame. I have given it many tests.
*****
Mrs. White: Oh, Master Whitney, this machine is wonderful! I am sure you will be
rich and famous because of it.
Mr. Smith: Have you applied for a patent on it yet, Master Whitney?
Eli Whitney: Not yet. I only finished this model today. I intend to apply for a patent
at once.
Mr. Smith: You must do so by all means. This is surely going to be a valuable machine.
In my opinion it will completely change the history of the world, now that England has all
this new spinning machinery. (To others) Listen, friends, Master Whitney has not yet had
opportunity to patent his machine. He has been kind enough to show it to us. We must be
very careful not to tell any outsiders about it.
All : Oh, of course not.
Mrs. Greene: If any of you would like to dance, do so, and don't mind an old woman
like me. I think it would be fine for you to dance in honor of Master Whitney and his won-
derful invention.
Eleanor (clapping her hands) : How delightful. We all love to dance. Let's dance the
minuet.
Mr. Smith: Yes, let's do. Choose your partners. Choose yours first, Master Whitney.
Eli Whitney: No, thank you. I have never learned to dance the minuet although it is
a stately and beautiful dance. My Puritan ancestry has prevented my learning to dance at
all, but I shall be glad to look on.
(All take places and dance the minuet, except Whitney and Mrs. Greene.)
ACT III
(Place — Same as Acts I and II. Time — Several months later. (Morning) As curtain
rises Eli Whitney is seated alone in room with his head bowed upon his hands, as if weary
or downcast. Enter Mrs. Greene followed by Mammy Susan and Uncle Caesar with whom
she is talking. She does not at first see Eli Whitney.)
Mrs. Greene: Mammy, has Hester finished spinning that wool yarn she began last week?
Mammy Susan: Yes'm. Mist'ess.
Mrs. Greene: And has Elvira finished her cotton yarn?
Mrs. Greene (sees Whitney): Why, Master Whitney, what ails you? You look sick!
Eli Whitney (raising head): I am so discouraged I am almost' sick. You know I have
been busy on the farm for some time and have not been in my shop lately while waiting for
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 205
my patent papers to come. This morning I thought I would take another look at my model,
for I thought of something new to do to it. But, Mistress Greene, when I went to look for
it, I found that it was gone!
Mrs. Greene: Gone! Why, Master Whitney!
Mammy Susan: What yo say? Dat little gin done gone?
# * » * #
Mr. White: No, not today. We must get at the bottom of this. (Guests leave, and Eli
Whitney and Mrs. Greene remain on stage alone.)
Mrs. Greene: I am so sorry, Master Whitney. What will you do now?
Eli Whitney: If I can find who is responsible, I shall enter suit at once. Meanwhile, I
shall do as my old grandmother often told me when I would get discouraged when I was a
child, "If you don't at first succeed, try, try again." I shall go to work on a new model.
(Curtain)
Visitors From Other Lands
(A marionette play in one act produced by Sixth Grade, Winecoff School.)
Written by Margaret Sarah Isenhour
Cast
Dorothy and Dick —
American boy and girl known to radio audiences in connection with Dixie Circus
Fairy Godmother
Hans and Gretel Children from Holland
Togo and Nando Children from the Philippines
Li Chang and Ho Lun Chinese Children
Ramoff and Sevik Eskimo Children
O Hanu San Japanese Girl
Hilda Swedish Girl
Dorothy : Isn't it provoking that we had to have snow on the very Saturday afternoon that
L'ncle Bob Sherwood promised to take us to the Dixie Circus?
Dick: You bet it is. I wouldn't mind it so much if Mother would let me go out and play
in it. But she is afraid I'll take cold.
Dorothy : Well, you might.
Dick: Oh no I won't. Girls might, but not boys.
Dorothy: Well, I wish some good kind fairy would come and take us to the circus.
(Enter their fairy godmother.)
Dorothy: Who in the world are you?
Godmother: I am your fairy godmother. I just heard you wish for a fairy to take you
to the circus. What do you want to see at the circus?
Dick: Well, I like to see the elephants, lions, tigers and other animals and the funny
clown. Uncle Bob used to be a clqwn himself.
Dorothy: But I am afraid of animals. I like to see the children from other lands with
their strange costumes.
Dick: Huh! Afraid of animals. My, I wouldn't be a girl for anything. They are all the
time afraid of something.
Dorothy : We are not. . . .
Ramoff: I am from the land of the Eskimos, often called the frozen sea. We wear fur
coats and live in houses made of ice and called igloos.
Sevik: Yes, and we have dogs to pull our sleds from place to place. The sleds are made
from bone, for we have little or no wood. Our lamps are made of bone, and in them we burn
whale oil. We kill animals and make our clothing of their fur, and we have to depend on
our clothes to keep us warm. We have six months day and six months night. (They leave,
and O Hanu San appears and bows to Dorothy and Dick.)
O Hanu San: My name is O Hanu San, and I come from Japan, an island empire. Our
ruler is called the Mikado. Our land has many cherry blossoms and is very beautiful. Our
country would not trade with other countries until a few years ago, when Commodore Perry
and William A. Graham encouraged us to open our ports to the world. Since then we have
greatly progressed. (She leaves and Swedish girl appears.)
Hilda : My name is Hilda and I am from Sweden, close to Norway. My country is near
the sea and many of my people are sailors. It is also a great dairying country. (She leaves.)
Godmother: Well, children how do you like my circus? Is it as good as your Uncle Bob's?
Dorothy: Yes. thank you. I've had a good time and enjoyed it quite as much as if I had
gone with Uncle Bob.
Dick: And so did I.
Godmother: T shall leave you now. Perhaps I can visit you again sometime.
(Curtain)
SEVENTH GRADE
The work for seventh grade gives emphasis to the use of grade liter-
ature and other reading matter; the mastery of language form, including
grammar; the development of good written composition and continued work
in oral composition, and remedial instruction. Suggestions for work in
this srrade are:
206 Course op Study for the
1. Suggested seventh grade objectives (such as the teacher may use
in developing the year's work in language).
2. Subject matter and activities (essential to the realization of these
objectives).
3. Procedure (which teachers have found to be effective).
4. Expected seventh grade outcomes (in terms of the former recom-
mendations).
5. References.
I. Suggested seventh grade objectives.
1. To strengthen and increase language ability as provided for in the
objectives for lower grades.
2. To develop intelligent and critical thought conducive to sane judg-
ment.
3. To make good form in speaking and writing a matter of habit.
4. To increase pupil power to provoke wholesome and worthwhile think-
ing on part of others.
5. To cultivate power of salesmanship of one's ideas.
6. To strengthen the habit of open-mindedness and fair judgment.
7. To survey the best that is available in grade literature.
8. To develop pupil ability to write correct compositions of two or more
paragraphs on suitable seventh grade subjects, social and business
letters, informal and formal invitations, announcements and outlines.
II. Subject matter.
A. MATERIALS
1. Text: Open Door Language Series, Seventh Grade.
2. Supplementary for general use. See suggestions for sixth grade,
section V of the seventh grade outline and general reference, pages
210-211, and suggestions regarding selection and organization of
subject matter, pages 123-125.
B. ACTIVITIES
The language activities in this grade should be a natural outgrowth
of the needs, interests and abilities of the pupils. The pupils may be
expected to initiate and carry to completion many valuable activities
in this grade. The teacher may unconscious to pupils guide to the
realization of still other valuable grade activities. Appropriate activi-
ties are:
Writing outlines and notations in preparation for oral compositions.
Giving oral compositions upon subjects that demand a definite order.
Criticizing talks made, stories told, announcements made and various
written work presented — stories, poems, outlines, letters, bibliographies,
booklets, arithmetic work, drawings, paintings, dramatizations, and
debates.
Using a telephone for emergency calls, holding interviews and mak-
ing inquiries.
Explaining simple processes.
Giving and writing directions, explanations, recommendations and
debates.
Conducting formal meetings, clubs, committees, etc.
Work on stories: listening to, reading, re-producing, outlining, tell-
ing original stories, comparing stories, criticizing stories.
Elementary Schools op North Carolina 207
Work on poems: listening to, reading, analyzing, memorizing, re-
citing, comparing, criticizing, revising poems and writing rimes, poems,
jokes and riddles.
Using the dictionary for determining word meaning, correct pro-
nunciation, synonyms, hononyms, spelling, capitalization, derivations.
Discussing essentials and illustrations of good sentences, paragraphs,
outlines, stories and poems.
Self -checking for mastery of language forms, comparing with others
in the group and with generally accepted grade standards.
Writing courteous and informal notes, business letters, reports,
minutes, announcements, recommendations.
Making outlines for report in the social studies, library reading,
excursions and extra-curricula activities.
Analyzing models: compositions, letters, outlines, poems, booklets,
posters, etc.
Drilling in the use of correct language form as provided for in
language games, dictation and spelling.
Reading for pleasure, appreciation, enjoyment, interpretation, ex-
tension of experiences, development of ideals, satisfying curiosity about
life, gaining a knowledge of great men and women, understanding
dominant social ideals, understanding and interpreting economic con-
ditions, memorizing prose and poetry, gaining a fuller appreciation of
the beauties of nature, developing sense of humor, becoming a more
intelligent listener, recognizing helpful devices, broadening one's own
vocabulary, improving one's own sentence and paragraph sense, associ-
ating real and outstanding people with the content of books, magazines
and newspapers and strengthening one's own power and desire to do
creative language work.
III. Procedure.
Begin by finding out what the pupils know, should know, are expected
to learn in this grade, their capacity for growth and the group in which
each can work best. See pages 126-127 for suggestions on grouping and
make this tentative and subject to change with changing conditions. Pro-
vide separate exercises for remedial work and for the introduction of new
grade language experiences. Work specifically for development in
1. Oral composition
2. Written composition
3. Language forms
4. A broad reading knowledge
5. Self-analysis and self-guidance in language growth in all grade
subjects. Place special emphasis on the development of items 2,
3, and 4.
A. ORAL COMPOSITION
Guide pupils in the selection of material that can be organized
easily into a unified whole by beginning with a vital subject of general
interest such as hiking, swimming, or dressing and show how many
sub-divisions may well be made. Develop briefly one or two topics, the
general outline, question as to a complete, specific and striking title,
point out possible difficulties in the development of the theme, draw up
a plan of procedure with the class or group, let each try to complete
208 Course of Study for the
and evaluate his work and secure the class or group criticism on work
done. Compare with good literary selections, standards of attainment
and standardized scales for measurement such as composition scales and
handwriting scales. (See general reference, page 177.)
In the use of stories, poems, plays, etc., make similar procedure and
follow up with note book records in form of copies of best liked parts,
attractive lists, notations, bibliographies, illustrations, outlines, criti-
cisms and notations on the authors, records of business meetings and
original work of the pupil as a result of the literary stimulation.
Help pupil to master literary selections more fully through memo-
rizing, dramatizing, quoting, referring to, analyzing, criticizing, debat-
ing, discussing choice of words, types of sentences, paragraphs and out-
lines and essential technical forms for use in same.
B. WRITTEN COMPOSITION
In all written work strive for additional freedom of expression and
the improvement of organization of thought. Provide for pupil interest
and a felt need for all written work such as letters, notices, announce-
ments, reports, stories, articles, etc. Point out the fact that material
that appears in print furnishes a permanent record of both the edu-
cation and the individuality of the writer, and that all written work is
of permanent nature more or less.
Discuss every assignment sufficiently for each pupil to understand
what he is to attempt and how he is to do it. Individuality is so largely
expressed in this field that only in mechanics should uniformity be at-
tempted. The mechanics, however, should be carefully explained and
provided in such reference as to enable each pupil to criticize and re-
vise his work before releasing it. Read models and discuss them from
the standpoint of excellence in (1) content — clear, concise, true, courte-
ous (in letters) complete treatment of the subject, (2) mechanics —
correct form, punctuation, capitalization, spelling, penmanship and
choice of materials such as paper, pencil, ink.
Direct, as unconsciously as possible, the pupils' organization of his
material prior to the writing and guide the expression during the actual
composition until pupils have developed "mind patterns" for different
styles of writing and group standards of attainment for self-guidance.
Encourage an exchange of help and friendly criticism among the group.
Inspect, correct and grade (or provide for an evaluation) of all
written work submitted and strive for quality rather than quantity.
Give special attention to pupils' work which may or may not be re-
quested for criticism such as notebooks, copying assignments, making
outlines in preparation for writing, taking notes, writing spelling, etc.
Maintain high standards at all times. When necessary, submit models.
Encourage freedom of expression by letting pupils choose and de-
velop their own subjects after they have had training in planning, writ-
ing, revising and proof reading. Provide for contributions to publi-
cations such as the school paper or magazine and the local papers.
Develop ability in written composition which will stimulate rather than
curb the desire for original language work such as letters, stories,
poems, plays, etc. For models see adopted text, appendix to the lan-
guage outline and special selections found in reading matter.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 209
Provide for the preservation of pupils' best written work as models,
further stimulation, a basis for the study of individual differences, the
kinds of work undertaken and a measure of pupil progress.
C. LANGUAGE FORMS
Language forms for this grade should be determined by: general
grade requirements, inclusive of those in lower grades not already
mastered, based on actual needs of the class and reduced to minimum
essentials. These will be of two kinds: (1) those to be reviewed or
re-taught or taught as remedial work, and (2) those introduced for the
first time as new grade essentials.
1. Remedial work may be confined largely to drill on correct form as
a means of substituting correct for incorrect practice. These should
be determined by careful investigation by the teacher and will
usually confine themselves to speech errors (mis-use of verbs, pro-
nouns, over-worked adjectives, etc.), punctuation, capitalization and
sentence and paragraph structure. Each need should be dealt with
separately and in terms of life needs. See text, pages 251-253, for
functual grammar and correct usage, and Part Five to the language
outline and measuring language ability through the use of standard-
ized tests, page 175.
2. New grade essentials
These will likely confine themselves largely to the more extensive
study of sentences and their uses in the expression of thought in
paragraph units.
Study the classification of sentences: the three kinds — simple,
complex and compound; clauses — dependent and independent (sub-
ordinate and coordinate).
Review and develop case (chiefly in connection with pronouns)
and preposition, with their government.
The verb: transitive and intransitive; object and compliment.
a. The verb "to be" developing the idea of inflection already involved in the
treatment of case. The concept of person.
b. Transitive verbs: Double object. Example: "I gave him an apple."
Declension of nouns in full.
Weak and strong verbs, irregular plurals and plurals in com-
pounds. Example: "Brothers-in-law." Strengthen and development
of paragraph as to unity, variety, fitness to subject, clearness and
completeness. Strengthen and develop the outline by means of the
ideas of dependence and subordination in thought processes.
Letter-writing advanced; letters to be longer, more varied in
character — formal, informal and business types, and of more appeal-
ing nature showing individuality. Use models.
Punctuation: as needs demand for understanding of reading
matter and copying and producing original written work. (See texts
and Part Five of language outline.)
D. USE OF READING MATTER
This should be based on a broad collection of literary and general
reading matters as recommended in Section II and show more interest
ability and practice on the part of all the pupils. Because of the indi-
vidual differences of pupils special selections and approaches should be
made to meet the needs of special groups in the use of reading matter
in specific language periods, and in transferred language instruction
in other grade subjects as illustrated in sixth grade reading for a
knowledge of clothing. Definite time and guidance in the use of all
210 Course of Study for the
reading matter is necessary in order to avoid the abuse of instruction
for independent reading and in order to meet new needs as in finding
specific reference, note-taking, outlining, organization of thought, com-
paring information, appreciating content, and practicing correct form.
In addition to systematic and effective use of reference material the
normal pupil may be expected to become familiar with the content of
ten or fifteen grade books, and master an equal number of specific
stories and poems in addition to special selections in the form of pro-
verbs, fables, quotations, titles, etc. Book records and reports as sug-
gested in grade three will aid in summarizing, organizing, and putting
into permanent form. (See reference list of reading material including
stories, poems, and pictures, at end of this outline and modify the
selection to meet individual needs and interests.
IV. Expected seventh grade outcomes.
u. Increased freedom and power in expressing one's self in oral and
written language.
2. Ability to produce and constant practice in writing good compositions
of two or more paragraphs in length as needed in seventh grade
situations, correct business and friendly letters, formal and informal
invitations, announcements and outlines.
3. More mature thinking which produces liberal and fair judgment.
4. Ability to provoke wholesome thought on the part of others and to
exercise valuable influence on their decisions.
5. A reading knowledge of the best seventh grade literature and the
habit of extracting and assembling thought, vocabulary and style
as shown by a desire to reproduce in form of references and quo-
tations.
6. Constant effort to express new and different ideas; offer convincing
terms, reflect love, beauty, feeling and desire as discovered through
reading and to measure one's own ability in creative language work.
7. Ability to make intelligent self-appraisals, and the development of
an inner urge for the mastery of maximum language abilities in
the elementary school.
8. A knowledge of the technicalities essential to the elementary school
and a desire to put these into constant use. (See Part Five of
language outline.)
V. Reference for pupil material. (For teaching helps see page 177.)
STORY BOOKS
Grades
■7 — Lester. Great Pictures and Their Stories, Books VII and VIII. Mentzer.
6-7 — Malory. Boy's King Arthur, ed. by Sidney Lanier. Scribner's.
5-8— Alcott. Old Fashioned Girl. Little.
7-9 — Dickens. Christmas Carol. Dutton.
4-7 — Field. Hitty, Her First Hundred Years. Macmillan.
7-8 — Kipling. Captains Courageous. Doubleday.
7-11 — London. The Call of the Wild. Macmillan.
6-9 — Masefield. Jim Davis. Stokes.
6-8 — Pyle. Men of Iron. Harper.
6-8 — Twain. Prince and the Pauper. Harper.
7-9 — Twain. Tom Sawyer. Harper.
7-8 — Wiggin. Rebecca of Sunny Brook Farm. Houghton.
1-8 — Barstow. The Colonists and the Revolution. Century.
5-8 — Crump. Boys' Book of America. Dodd.
6-11 — Dark. The Book of England for Young People. Doubleday.
5-7 — Eggleston. Hoosier School Boy. Scribner's.
7-9 — Charnley. Boys' Life of the Wright Brothers. Harper.
7-9 — Hill. On the Trail of Grant and Lee. Appleton.
6-12 — Meadowcroft. Boy's Life of Edison. Harper.
7-9 — Sandburg. Abe Lincoln Grows Up. Harcourt.
7-12 — White. Daniel Boone, Wilderness Scout. Allyn.
6-8 — Clark. Europe. A Geographical Reader. Silver.
6-7 — Hall and Chester. Panama and the Canal. Newson.
6-7 — Holmes. Travel Stories, Egypt. Wheeler.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 211
5-7— Jordan. The Story of a Seal. World.
6-8 — Finley. Wild Animal Pets. Scribner's.
7-9 — Beard. American Boys' Handy Book. Scribner's.
POETRY
6-11 — Cooper. Poems of Youth. Ginn.
6-8 — Repplier. Book of Famous Verse. Houghton.
6-7 — Stevenson. Days and Deeds (Poetry). Doubleday.
5-8 — Teasdale. Rainbow Gold. School ed. Macmillan.
6-8 — Wiggin. Golden Numbers. Doubleday.
Attractive grade poems as determined by research and reported by Huber in Teachers'
College Record, Volume XXVIII, No. 2:
Annabel Lee. Poe. The Children's Hour. Longfellow
Darius Green and His Flying Machine. (third grade text)
Trowbridge. The House by the Side of the Road. Foss
Horatius. Macaulay. (text)
King John and the Abbot. Unknown. The Old Oaken Bucket. Woodworth.
Plantation Memories. Russell. The Charge of the Light Brigade.
The Leap of Roushan Beg. Longfellow. Tennyson.
PICTURES COMMONLY USED IN SEVENTH GRADE
The Fighting Temeraire. Turner. Robert E. Lee. Pioto.
The Fog Warning. Homer. Signing of the Declaration of Independence.
The Fruit Vendors. Murillo. Trumbull.
The Jester. Hals. Sir Galahad. Watts.
The Lace Makers. Vermeer. Souvenir of Normandy. Corot.
Spring. Corot.
See text, Chapter VII, "Selecting a Picture for a Schoolroom."
PART FIVE: LANGUAGE FORMS ACCORDING
TO GRADES*
I. Composition
A. TYPES, GRADES I, II, III
Class Letters
Dear Frank,
We wish you a happy birthday.
The First Grade.
Dear Miss Smith,
May we use your victrola Tuesday afternoon? We want to play a game.
The First Grade.
An Informal Note
We are having a dramatization in Room 12 this afternoon at 2:00 o'clock. We
would like for you to come.
The Children of Room 12.
Formal Class Letter
Blanktown, North Carolina,
May 28, 1930.
Dear Third Grade,
We liked the play you gave in chapel. Please lend us the music for your ucw song.
We want to learn it.
Your friends.
The Second Grade.
Envelope Address
The Third Grade The Third Grade
Blanktown (or) Blanktown
North Carolina North Carolina
A Friendly Letter
124 E. Edenton Street,
Raleigh, North Carolina.
August 8, 1930.
Dear Mr ,
We had a fine time yesterday at the bakery. The baker showed us how he baked
bread. His oven is as big as our whole kitchen. He gave us a hot cooky to eat.
Very truly yours,
Herbert.
•Adaptations from St. Louis Curriculum Bulletin No. 4.
212 Course of Study for the
A Narrative Paragraph
My Pet
One evening my father bought me a dog. I named it Sport. One day as I was play-
ing with Sport he ran after a cat. He never came back again and I was very lonesome
for him.
A Descriptive Riddle
I know a girl who has brown hair and blue eyes. She has on a blue dress. She
sits near Billy. Can you guess who she is?
A Descriptive Paragraph
My Doll
My doll is very big. She is a pretty doll. She has a pink dress with flowers on it
and white silk underwear. I love her very much.
A Descriptive Notice
I have lost a pair of brown woolen gloves in the school yard. They have a hole in
one thumb and a darned place on one finger. Please return them to the cashier's desk
in the cafeteria.
An Explanatory Paragraph
Why I Would Like to be a Boy Scout
I would like to be a Boy »Scout because they go on hikes. They can cook their own
meals, make tents and swim, too. They have good times climbing hills. You cannot be
a Boy Scout unless you obey the laws.
Rhythmic Substitution
Who has seen the wind
Neither you nor I
Substitution (But when the caps blow off)
The wind is passing by.
Original Rhythmic Expression
Today
The day was grey,
As grey could be;
This morning it was sunny,
Tomorrow, I guess and think, it will rain,
But rain or not T am happy.
B. TYPES, GRADE IV
Some Wrong Words
While I was playing pirate I hit my brother with a stick and ran away. He ran
after me, saying that pirates never ran away. When he said this I got some courage
and threw him in a closet. I think he said some wrong words.
Getting Dinner
One day my mother did not feel well. I told her I would get dinner. We were
going to have round steak. I got out the bread-board and a knife. I beat the steak to
make it tender. Then I salted it and put flour on it. I put it in the skillet and fried it.
A Flower
The flower that I am describing may be purple, yellow, or white. It has six petals.
Three of them droop down. The other three are closed. There are three tiny petals in
the center which almost cover three little lines of yellow fuzz. It has two names. Either
one of them will do.
C. TYPES, GRADE V
Our Dog
We used to have a little bulldog named Wobbles. One day my brother and I had to
take some medicine. Wobbles looked so funny at mother when she was giving us the
medicine that she thought he wanted some. She let him lick the spoon. He made such
a funny face that I guess he never wanted to taste that medicine again.
How to Start a Fire Without Matches
Every boy should know how to start a lire without matches. The materials needed
are a piece of soft wood about a foot long, a piece of hard wood, and some moss.
Take the hard wood and shape it like a round pencil. Make a hole in the soft wood
about the size of the pencil point. Put the point in the hole of the soft wood. Rub the
hard wood between your hands. A glimmer of smoke will appear. Rub your hands
together faster and a flame will appear. Feed the flame with moss. It will soon grow
larger and then you keep feeding it with leaves and twigs.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina
213
Description of a Mountain
A mountain is a high hill. The top is called the peak, or summit. The foot of the
mountain is called the base. The part between the peak and the base is the slope. The
tops of high mountains are covered with snow all the year 'round. Their slopes are
covered with trees. Many rivers rise in mountains.
.Note: See Sheridan's Speaking and Writing English for composition standards by
grades.
II. Technicalities
A. GRADE III
Miscellaneous List of Word "Demons" in Spelling
here
to
hear
too
two
and
blue
blew
are
our
know
see
knew
saw — seen
ain't for is not, am not,
Pronouns
me— I
him — he
use
you
where
were
wear
they
there
their
Faulty Endings
ed, ing
Verbs
was — were
done — did
are not
Capitalization
(See Standard Forms of Writing)
Days of the week, months of the year, Mr. and Mrs., names of special holidays.
North Carolina, America, United States. Names of streets, interjection O.
can't
don't
doesn't
isn't
wasn't
Punctuation — Apostrophe
(See Standard Forms of Writing)
Possessive singular nouns.
Example: Jane's dress.
(Others as needs arise.)
Period
Use of the period after abbreviations
Abbreviations
Mister
avenue
inch
Mistress
pint
foot
street
quart
yard
Days of the week
Months of the year
initials
GRADES IV, V, VI, VII
1. Contractions: Those occurring in common use, such as:
hasn't weren't
won't
isn't
wasn't
haven't
hadn't
aren't
couldn't
. Abbreviations:
Grade IV
Those used in Arithmetic or in Geography.
Dr. — Doctor P. M. — Afternoon
P. O.— Post Office Sr.— Senior
A. M. — Before Noon Jr. — Junior
Grade V
Those used in Arithmetic or Geography.
R. R.— Railroad
Rev. — Reverend
Grade VI
R. F. D— Rural Free Delivery
C. O. D. — Cash on Delivery
Mdse. — Merchandise
wouldn't
shouldn't
(Others as needs arise. See
language text.)
(Others as needs arise. See
language text.)
Co. — Company
B. C— Before Christ
A. D. — Anno Domini (in the Year
of our Lord)
(Others as needs arise. See language text.)
214
Course op Study for the
3. Usage Errors:
Grades IV, V, VI, VII
there — their
to — two — too
are — our — or
saw — seen
sit — set
lie — lay
may — can
through — threw
borrow — lend
bring — take
would of for would have
them skates for those skates
ain't got no for have no
he don't for he doesn't
we was for we were
we come for we came
were for where
(Consult language texts and
teacher's local list.)
When writing in the singular number, use it consistently. Example
of a common error: The violet is one of the earliest spring flowers.
They are found in parks.
Do not change the tense of the verb. Example: He walked hastily
down the road. In the distance he saw a light. He hurries toward it.
For capitalization, punctuation, manuscript form, letter forms, see
various series of textbooks and Woolley's Handbook of Composition
(revised), Heath and Company, and adopt -common usages for the
school.
III. Manuscript Form
(For Essays, Contributed Articles, Examination Papers, etc.)
Materials
1. When possible use ink for all written work except informal class
exercises. (For final copies in grade four and above.) Use black
or blue-black ink only.
2. If a typewriter is used, be sure that the lines of type are double
spaced.
Arrangement of page
1. On the first line of the first page write the date at the extreme left,
and the name — last name first — at extreme right. (Grade III.*)
2. Write the title on the third line of the first page only; center it, and
capitalize all words except articles, prepositions, and conjunctions
unless these words stand first; place no period after it. If the title
is long, use two lines, keeping both centered. (Grade III.)
3. Leave one line between the title and the composition. (Grade III.)
4. Maintain a uniform margin of one inch on the left of each page.
In using paper with ruled margins, write close to both marginal
lines except for paragraph indentations. In using paper without
ruled margins, fill the line to the right edge, or keep a uniform
margin of one-half inch or one inch on the right of each page.
(Grade III.)
5. The indentations of the first line of each paragraph should be equal
to the width of the left-hand margin. (Grade III.)
6. Number all the pages, except the first, placing the number at the
top and at the right of each page. (Grade V.)
7. Outline form:
I. ;._
A.
1.
a.
b.
2.
B.
II.
"Grade in which mastery may be expected.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 215
IV. Capitalization
Capitalize
1. The first word of every sentence. (Grade III.*)
2. The first word in every line of poetry. (Grade IV.)
3. The first word of a direct quotation. (Grade IV.)
4. The pronoun I (Grade III) and the interjection (Grade III).
Capitalize the word oh only at the beginning of a sentence. (Grade
III.)
5. All names of the Deity. (Grade IV.)
6. All proper nouns (Grade I) and adjectives (Grade IV) and their
abbreviations (Grade IV) ; all degrees and titles referring to people
(Grade V) ; all initials (Grade II) ; all words in such proper names
as: Lake Junaluska, French Broad River, Central High School;
but lake, river, high school should not be capitalized when not used
as part of a proper name. (Grade IV.)
I spent four years at Central High School.
I spent four years at high school.
7. Names of days of the week and months of the year and holidays.
Names of the seasons are not capitalized. (Grade III.)
8. North, South, East, and West denoting parts of a country or
geographical regions. (Grade VI.)
Oranges grow in the South.
There is distress in the Far East.
9. The names of school subjects only when they are derived from proper
nouns, or used as titles of special courses.
English, Spanish, algebra, arithmetic, Science I. (Grade VI.)
10. The first word and all other important words in the title of a book
or story. (Grade IV.)
11. The first word of the salutation in a letter and the first word of the
ending. (Grade II.)
V. Punctuation
Caution: Reduce Punctuation to a Minimum. Never Use a Mark
Without Having a Definite Reason.
1. Use a period
a. At the end of all sentences, except interrogatory or exclamatory,
and at the end of all other completed units of expression.
(Grade I.)
b. After certain abbreviations and all initials. (Grade V.)
c. After all Roman numerals; Arabic figures, and letters when used
to indicate lessons, paragraphs, and problems. (Grade V.)
2. Use an interrogation point
a. After direct questions. (Grade II.)
fb. After the individual members of a series, each of which might
be expanded into a question.
What is their nationality? age? sex?
fc. Inclosed in parentheses to indicate that the meaning of a word
or phrase is questionable.
3. Use an exclamation point
After a word, phrase, or sentence that expresses sudden or in-
tense emotion. (Grade IV.) Sometimes an exclamation takes the
form of an interrogatory sentence; if no answer is expected, use an
exclamation point. (Grade VI.)
4. Use a colon
a. After all salutations of a formal letter. (Grade IV.)
b. After the formal introduction to an enumeration of items or
particulars. (Grade VI.)
c. After a formal introduction to a quotation. (Grade VI.)
Lincoln spoke the following words: "Government of the
people."
I quote the following from Lincoln: "Government," etc.
*Grade in which mastery may be expected.
tNot required in the elementary school but may be taught as needs arise.
216 Course of Study for the
5. Use a semicolon
a. Between clauses of a compound sentence that are not joined by
a conjunction. (Grade VII.*)
Bryant was an American; Byron was an Englishman.
Hold on to your hat; the wind is blowing hard,
fb. Between clauses of a compound sentence that are not joined by
a conjunction, and that have as the first word in the second
clause one of the following words: thus, nevertheless, therefore,
hence, however, moreover, accordingly, besides, also, then, still,
otherwise, consequently,
c. To separate two or more coordinate members of a simple, com-
plex, or compound sentence, even when joined by conjunctions,
when those members, or some of them, have commas within them-
selves. (Grade VII.)
The pupil explained that she had loaned the book to a friend;
that a week later, wishing to use the book, she had asked her
friend for it; and that the friend, having in turn loaned it to a
friend of hers, could not give it to her.
fd. Before such expressions as namely, viz., i.e., as, etc., when used
to introduce an example or illustration. The comma follows
these words.
6. Use a comma
a. To separate the parts of a date. (Grade III.)
b. To separate the parts of an address. (Grade III.)
c. To set off such as yes, no and please when they are used inde-
pendently in answering questions or making requests. (Grade V.)
d. After both the greeting and the complementary close of a friendly
letter. (Grade V.)
e. To set off the name of a person addressed or a word used in its
place. (Grade V.)
f. To separate words in a list where and or or is omitted. (Grade
III.)
g. To separate the clauses of a compound sentence if they are
joined by and, but, for, or, or nor. (Grade VII.)
h. After introductory expressions. (Grade VII.)
(1) Always after the adverb however; seldom after there-
fore, consequently, and words of like meaning.
(2) After an adverbial phrase only when the sentence is long
or when the comma materially helps the reader.
(3) Always after an adverbial clause.
fi. To set off a non-restrictive clause.
j. To separate the members of a series of words or phrases when
the conjunctions are omitted including a comma between the last
two members even with the conjunction expressed. (Grade V.)
Georgia, Louisiana, and Texas are cotton-raising states.
John, who leads his class, did excellent work last term in
Latin, in algebra, in French, and in history.
k. To set off words in apposition, with or without the word or.
(Grade VII.)
Spenser, a non-dramatic poet, was contemporary with Shakes-
peare.
Indiana, or the Hoosier state, has given the Union many
prominent men.
Note, however, that no comma is used:
(1) If the appositive is an essential part of a proper name.
John the Baptist. Alexander the Great.
(2) If there is close connection between the appositive and the noun
it modifies.
My brother Charles is a lawyer.
You yourself did that.
(3) If attention is called to the appositive by italics or some other
device that sets it apart.
The word like should not be used to introduce a clause.
The phrase "along this line" should be avoided.
"Grade in which mastery may be expected.
fNot required in the elementary school but may be taught as needs arise.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 217
1. After a part of a sentence that precedes a direct quotation unless
a colon is required, and before the part of the sentence to follow
the quotation when such exists. (Grade IV.*)
m. To set off nouns of direct address. (Grade V.)
fn. To indicate intentional omission of words.
Grant was born in Ohio; Pershing, in Missouri,
fo. To set off etc. (This abbreviation, however, is not to be used in
a literary context.)
tp. To set off such independent expressions as at any rate, however,
to be sure, in fact, etc.
7. Use quotation marks
a. To inclose all direct quotations; to inclose all parts of a divided
quotation. (Grade IV.)
fb. To inclose a quotation within a quotation. In this case use single
quotation marks.
fc. At the beginning of each paragraph or stanza in a quotation of
several paragraphs or stanzas and at the end of the last para-
graph or stanza.
8. Use an apostrophe
a. In contractions to indicate letters intentionally omitted. (Grade
V.)
b. To form possessives. (Grade II for singular possessive nouns.)
Personal, relative, and interrogative pronouns, however, do not
take the apostrophe, nor, as a rule, do the names of corporations
and institutions. (Grade IV.)
Illustrations :
hers, his, its, theirs, ours, yours, whose
Harris Teachers College
Note that the possessive case should be used only with nouns
designating persons or with expressions indicating time. To this
usage there are a few exceptions.
Illustrations :
The man's coat today's news
Mary's book last term's work
Brown and Smith's grocery a year's salary
Exceptions:
for mercy's sake
her heart's desire
fc. To form the plurals of letters, numbers, and words when they
are mentioned as words.
That happened in the 80's.
Sound clearly your final d's, t's, and ing's.
9. Use of hyphen
a. To divide a word at the end of a line, placing the hyphen after
any complete syllable. (Grade IV.)
b. In various compound words. (Grade V.)
(1) Between two or more words that serve as a single adjective
before a noun.
Illustrations:
iron-bound regulations '
a record-breaking feat
high-school record
(2) In compound nouns that the dictionary prints as hyphenated
words. (Distinguish between the light separative hyphen
used in the dictionary after an unaccented syllable and the
hyphen in heavy black type between the parts of a com-
pound word.)
(3) In compound numbers from twenty-one to ninety-nine in-
clusive.
" f Grade in which mastery may be expected.
T"Not required in the elementary school but may be taught as needs arise.
218 Course of Study for the
(4) Words which are said to be consolidated, instead of com-
pounded, are not hyphenated.
Illustrations :
inasmuch, notwithstanding, outdoor, sometimes, something, somewhere,
nevertheless, itself, herself, himself, myself, themselves.
The present tendency is to write today, tonight, tomorrow as
consolidated words.
10. Correct punctuation for dates
January 15, 1930 Monday, Aug. 24
Jan. 15, 1930 70 B. C.
Monday, August 24 476 A. D.
11. Correct punctuation of names of places
Raleigh, North Carolina
46 Union St., Asheville, North Carolina
1742 Grand Ave., Louisville, Ky.
The Rockery, St. Paul, Minn.
While the correct abbreviation for the name of a state may be
used, the name written in full prevents misunderstanding and is a
more dignified form.
*VI. Underscoring
Any word underscored in manuscript will be set in italics by a printer.
*1. Underscore all titles of books, newspapers, magazines, pamphlets,
poems, musical compositions, pictures and other works of art, and
names of ships.
(There is some good authority for inclosing titles of pictures
and other works of art and names of ships in quotation marks in-
stead of underscoring them.)
*2. Underscore all words that are being made the subject of comment.
In the first sentence, right is a noun.
Give the rule for spelling occurred.
The possessive form of Keats is Keats's.
All right is written as two words.
VII. Spelling
1. When a dictionary gives two spellings, choose the first one. (Grade
Ill.f)
judgment, development, traveler, worshiping
2. Spell in full all civil and military titles except Mr., Mrs., Messrs.,
Dr. (Grade V.)
*3. St. (Saint) before proper names is correct.
4. St. (Street) after the name of a street is correct. (Grade III.)
*5. Spell in full all Christian names.
Richard, George, Charles
*6. Spell in full numbers that occur in manuscript if they can be indi-
cated by one or two words unless they are of a statistical or technical
character. Spell in full all numbers that begin a sentence.
7. In ordinary reading matter spell in full, ages, the time of day if
not used a. m. or p. m., the names of months, and the name United
States. Do not use st, d, or th in writing dates. (Grade VI.)
*8. Use O with a noun in direct address; use Oh (oh) for an excla-
mation.
3 John, wait a minute!
O most noble sir!
Oh! why did you do that?
Oh, what a beautiful sunset!
*Not required in the elementary school but may be taught as needs arise.
fGrade in which mastery may be expected.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 219
VIII. Marks of Parenthesis, Brackets, and Marks of Omission
Marks of parenthesis are used to inclose expressions grammatically
independent of the rest of the sentence and less closely related in thought
to the context than would be indicated by commas.
Brackets are used to inclose an interpolation in a quotation.
A series of dots indicate an omission in a quotation.
The Atlantic Monthly says, "He (John D. Long) kept a journal from
the age of nine ... to the days when he became Governor of Massachusetts
and Secretary of the Navy."
IX. Making Erasures
Draw a horizontal line through whatever is to be omitted. Do not use
marks of parenthesis to cancel a word or passage.
X. Letter Forms
Heading
Either of the two forms that follow may be used:
450 New Bern Ave., 450 New Bern Ave.
Raleigh, North Carolina Raleigh, North Carolina
November 25, 1930. November 25, 1930.
Punctuation at the end of the lines may be used in either the slant or
the block form; or punctuation may be omitted in either form.
In business letters the same address as is on the envelope and in the
same form should precede the greeting.
Alfred Williams and Company, Mr. John C. Smith
119 Fayetteville St., 41 State St.
Raleigh, North Carolina Chicago, Illinois
Gentlemen: My dear Mr. Smith:
The following greetings may be used in letters:
My dear Sir: My dear Mrs. Jones:
My dear Madam: Gentlemen:
Dear Sir: Ladies:
Dear Mr. Jones:
The following greetings may be used in informal letters:
My dear Mr. Brown: Dear Mr. Brown:
My dear Dr. White: Dear Dr. White:
My dear Alice: Dear Alice:
My dear Father: Dear Mother:
My dear Uncle Tom: Dear Aunt Mary:
Good usage also permits the comma after the salutation in an informal,
or friendly, letter. Note that the salutation Dear Friend or My dear
Friend is not in good form.
Complimentary close
The complimentary close should begin with a capital and be followed
by a comma. It should contain the word yours or your.
Very truly yours, Your loving son,
Yours truly, Your sincere friend,
Sincerely yours, Cordially your friend,
Yours very sincerely, Ever your friend,
220
Course of Study for the
The envelope address should be properly balanced, spaced and punctu-
ated. The following styles are acceptable :
Henry K. Brown
5 North Avenue
Asheville, North Carolina
-
Alfred Williams and Company
119 Fayetteville Street
Raleigh, North Carolina
Henry K. Brown,
5 North Ave.,
Asheville, N. C.
1
Alfred Williams and Compan;
119 Fayetteville Street,
Raleigh, North Carolina.
f, ■
XI. Symbols for Correction
Cap — Capital
A — A word or letter omitted
D — Diction
Gr — Grammar
Ital — Italics
K — Awkward
X — Illegible, untidy; or a careless
O — Something omitted
V— Omit
P — Punctuation
11 — Paragraphing
Ref — Reference of pronouns
S — Faulty sentence structure
Sp — Spelling
Syl — Syllabication
Coh — Coherence (of sentence, paragraph, or
the whole composition)
Emph — Emphasis (of sentence, paragraph.
or the whole composition)
U — Unity (of sentence, paragraph, or the
whole composition)
V — (check) an easily discoverable error
XII. The Teaching of Language Forms According to Grade
Each usage should, of course, be taught as need for it arises. There-
fore teachers in all grades should have full knowledge of all the rules
governing standard forms in writing, and skill in their application. The
incidental teaching should, however, be strengthened by specific instruction
in the grades indicated. Each grade should be held responsible for what
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 221
has been taught in the grades below so that the cumulative result shall be
correct habit.
From the Earliest Writing
Rule a for the period.
Rule a for the interrogation point.
Correct punctuation for dates.
Correct punctuation for names of places.
Correct way of making erasures.
Grade III
Rules 1, 2, 4 (first part), and 7 for capitalization.
Rules a, b for the comma.
Rules 1 and 4 for spelling.
Grade IV
Page arrangement should be observed from the Fourth Grade up.
Letter forms should be observed from the Fourth Grade up.
Rules 2, 3, 5, 6, and 10 for capitalization.
Rule I for the comma.
Rule a for the quotation marks.
Rule b for the apostrophe.
Rule a for hyphen.
Rule a for the colon.
Grade V
Rules 2, 8, 10 and part of 6 for capitalization.
Rules b and c for the period.
Rules d, e, j and m for the comma.
Rule a for the apostrophe.
Rule b for the hyphen.
Rule 2 for spelling.
Grade VI
Rules 8 and 9 for capitalization.
Rule a for the exclamation point.
Rules b and c for the colon.
Rule 7 for spelling.
Grade VII
Rules a and c for the semicolon.
Rules g, h and k for the comma.
PART SIX: FOLLOW-UP WORK IN COURSE OF
STUDY MAKING
The material, methods and procedure offered in the grade outlines in
language are designed for guidance to the teacher and other school folk in
(1) the promotion of language growth and the unification of instruction,
and (2) as a basis for producing a flexible and inclusive language course
contributive to an elementary curriculum.
The first essential to an intelligent use of this course is a knowledge
of its entire content with special attention given to the part pertaining to
the grade or grades taught.
The second essential is a knowledge of the language course content in
relation to the content of other subject matter courses.
The third essential is a comprehensive knowledge of and ability to
direct children.
222 Course of Study for the
The fourth essential is a definite, flexible and progressive teaching pro-
gram built on much professional study.
The fifth essential is the study of teaching outcomes in terms of future
needs as given in the suggestions for future work in course of study-
making in Part Three of the reading outline.
The sixth essential is a full and usable record of all outstanding prog-
ress and revision made in the present course of study, so that future
revision may have the benefit of the most worthwhile work done in the
schools.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 223
SPELLING
GUIDING PRINCIPLES IN THE TEACHING OF SPELLING
The Importance of Correct Spelling
In all phases of life written communication and the recording of infor-
mation for personal use are constantly employed. Correct spelling is
necessary for conveying the ideas intended. Accuracy in spelling is de-
manded of the educated person. Children completing an elementary school
course should be able to spell correctly the words which they will frequently
use in writing in daily life. A recent school survey showed that intelligent
people in all communities rank spelling as second in the list of subjects
which should be taught in the school.
Correct spelling is an evidence of education. Incorrect spelling dis-
credits an individual seeking a position, for letters of application and busi-
ness letters containing misspelled words bring severe criticism and failure
to gain the desired employment. Again, a student's progress in high school
and college is always affected by written work which contains misspelled
words. Since progress in education and life outside of school place this
great value on correct spelling, the elementary school course should estab-
lish in the child the habit of spelling words correctly, the desire to spell
them correctly and the habit of verifying the spelling of words about which
he is uncertain.
We should keep in mind that spelling is one of the language arts, and
that a real desire to express one's thoughts, and to write of one's experi-
ences and interests for the pleasure of others is fundamental in developing
a motive for writing correctly and effectively. With this eagerness and
genuine interest in writing present, the child's ability and desire "to say
the thing finely" and to spell correctly will be constantly fostered and
strengthened.
Aim in Teaching Spelling
*The function to be developed may be stated as the ability to use the
correct letters in their proper sequence within words. The need for ability
to spell is practically always in connection with written work, therefore
the aim may be stated as the ability to spell a word automatically when
the individual is giving attention to the content of the material being writ-
ten. This aim provides for the development of an ability which allows the
individual to record his language reactions.
Objectivesf
1. To make automatic the accepted sequence of letters in the words
most commonly needed for the expression of thought in writing.
2: To develop the meaning and use of words to be spelled. The de-
velopment of the meaning and use of words may involve the mean-
ing and uses given in the dictionary, but it is preferable to clarify
and build up the meaning and uses on the basis of the child's own
experience.
*Adapted from "Psychology of Elementary School Subjects" by Garrison and Garrison,
published by Johnson Publishing Co., Richmond, Va.
tFourth Yearbook — Department of Superintendence, 1926. National Education Association,
Washington, D. C.
224 Course of Study for the
3. To develop what is termed a "spelling consciousness" ; i. e., the ability
to recognize almost instantly the correct and incorrect spelling of
words.
4. To develop a "spelling conscience." This "spelling conscience" may
be referred to as an ardent purpose or desire to spell correctly or
as an ideal of correct spelling. This conscience is annoyed by in-
correct spelling and is satisfied only with correct spelling.
5. To develop a technique for the study of spelling. This technique
involves the application of an effective method of learning how to
attack and master the sequence of letters in the given word, the
method of diagnosing sources of errors in the spelling of specific
words, the knowledge of how to use the dictionary in finding the
pronunciation, meaning, and spelling of unfamiliar words, the
knowledge of what to do when in doubt concerning the spelling of
a word, and the application of a few inductive rules governing the
correct spelling of words.
Vocabulary Content
A. SELECTION OF WORDS
In recent years the subject of spelling has received thorough scientific
investigation and study. We are fortunate to have reliable information
in regard to the content of the spelling vocabulary. Since the function of
spelling instruction is to teach children how to spell the words they will
use, the spelling vocabulary should contain the words which children and
adults most commonly need in their written discourse. We are concerned
with what words and how many children will have occasion to use in
writing.
Investigations show that a scientifically sound minimal spelling list
need contain no more than four thousand words made up of the words
most commonly required to meet the writing needs of childhood and adult
life. Modern spelling books, including the McCall Speller — the State-
adopted text — contain such a list. Schools are advised to follow this
minimal list closely as the basal spelling material, supplementing it with
lists made up to meet individual, group, and class needs. These sup-
plementary lists will be discussed later.
B. GRADE PLACEMENT
The first criterion now generally accepted in the grade placement of
words is that of use. For the most part, children should be taught in
each grade, the words which are in the written work of children of that
age both in and out of school. A second criterion to be observed in the
grading of words is that of spelling difficulty. In general, easy words
should be taught first and difficult words later. Hence the four thousand
words of the minimal basal list are assigned to the grades where they are
needed in writing, in so far as they can be mastered by the children of
these grades with reasonable ease.
"In the McCall Speller* the grouping of the words within each grade
is principally on a basis of similarities of both spelling and pronunciation.
There are, however, some words in each grade which could not be grouped
on this basis. These words have been placed in groups by themselves in
the lower part of the column for each week. There is a distinct relation
between phonics and spelling, which in this book has been made a valuable
'The McCall Speller, Laidlaw Bros., New York.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina
225
aid in the teaching of spelling. The labor of learning to spell is greatly
minimized by this plan of phonetic grouping. At no place in the book,
however, has the principle of grouping taken precedence over the principle
of grading. In other words, some words that might ordinarily be grouped
together are found in different grades, because a study of children's compo-
sitions has shown that the words are first used in different grades. In the
upper grades, the grouping of the words is partly phonetic, and partly
based on similar derivation. Such a method of grouping provides adequate
and effective examples for the rules that are developed in the 'Aids to
Spelling'."
C. SUPPLEMENTARY WORD LISTS
1. Words selected from special subjects — language, arithmetic, geogra-
phy, history and other subjects or units of work — which the children find
they will need to use frequently in writing, compose one of the supple-
mentary lists. Each of the above subjects will have its special words not
included in the basal spelling text but which are needed frequently in
written work. Special days, occasions, and seasons also supply words for
this supplementary list in meeting the needs of pupils in their written
work. The words for this supplementary list should be checked against
such standard lists* as the Ayres, Horn, Kircher and Gates lists, and
(1) those of highest frequency and not too difficult for the grade may be
used as a supplementary list for spelling lessons, while (2) the words
used occasionally in written work would compose a list which the teachers
keep ready for reference by the children. In the fifth, sixth and seventh
grades, as the need arises, the children will go to the dictionary to find
the spelling of these words, and to verify the spelling of a word used in
written work, about which the pupil is in doubt.
2. Word demons. Another supplementary list would include: (1) cer-
tain words which are recognized as difficult for all pupils — such words as
the "one hundred spelling demons"; and (2) words which prove difficult
for a particular grade. These words should be kept before the children
and given special attention. A bulletin board or a corner of the black-
board may be used as a "Class Word Hospital" for the words missed by
a large number of the children.
One Hundred Spelling Demons!
ache
color
grammar
many
some
too
again
coming
guess
meant
straight
used
always
could
half
minute
sugar
very
among
cough
having
much
sure
wear
answer
country
hear
none
tear
Wednesday
any
dear
heard
often
their
week
been
doctor
here
once
there
where
beginning
does
hour
piece
they
whether
believe
done
hoarse
raise
though
which
blue
don't
instead
read (red)
through
whole
break
early
just
ready
tired
women
built
easy
knew
said
tonight
won't
busy
enough
know
says
trouble
would
business
every
laid
seems
truly
write
buy
February
loose
separate
Tuesday
writing
can't
forty
lose
shoes
two
wrote
choose
friend
making
since
*The addresses of these lists are given in the bibliography.
tThe most misspelled one hundred words in the English language by W. Franklin Jones,
Ph.D., former head of the Department of Education in the University of South Dakota.
226 Course of Study for the
3. Individual pupil lists. Each child will have his own "Special De-
mons." There would be two lists of these: (1) the words in his spelling
lessons missed by the child on the final test each week, as these would of
course be the most difficult words for him and are the words to be kept in
his "Word Hospital";* and (2) the words misspelled in personal letters,
compositions, and all written work in connection with geography, history,
and other subjects or large unit studies. Both of these lists would be kept
by each child in sections of his spelling notebook. Teachers will want to
see that the words on these two personal lists are mastered and cease to
be "demons." Plans and suggestions for the spelling notebook are given
later on.
Methods and Suggestions for the Teaching of Spelling
A. PRINCIPLES UNDERLYING LEARNING
The spelling period has come to be thought of as a learning period
rather than a period set aside for reciting. This should be especially true
in the early grades. A review of the suggested methods of work will re-
veal that special efforts are being made to develop in the early grades the
correct study habits, and to so emphasize throughout the course an efficient
plan for studying words that its use by the pupil independently will become
established. Some guiding principles effective in the learning of spelling
are:
1. Form a clear vivid imagery of the word through varied sensory
processes which include hearing, seeing, saying, and writing the
word, as well as the use of the word in a sentence.
2. Attentive repetition of the word, with persistent and precise practice
will tend to insure automatic control of the writing of the proper
sequence of letters in the word.
3. The method used should reveal individual needs and enable the child
to work on his own difficulties.
4. Adequate provision should be made for properly spaced reviews in
order to insure economy and permanency in the learning of the
words.
5. Aggressive interest on the part of the pupil should be enlisted by
developing a consciousness of the need for absolute accuracy in spell-
ing in the vaiious phases of the school work.
6. Provision should be made for the child to keep a record of his
progress.
7. Since mastery by the pupils of the words which they will need to
use in writing is the purpose of learning to spell, the spelling les-
sons should be written rather than oral.
B. NUMBER OF WORDS PER WEEK
The organization which groups the work for each week in units is the
plan most widely used in recent spelling texts and is the one given in the
State-adopted text, the McCall Speller. Modern courses in spelling include
eight to fifteen new words per week in the second grade, with a range of
twenty to twenty-five in the grammar grades, together with systematically
arranged reviews, for a school term of thirty-six weeks.
In adjusting the work by grades in the McCall Speller to schools hav-
ing a term of thirty-two weeks, it is suggested that work for two review
*Name suggested in the spelling text — "Spelling for Everyday Use," by Steadman, Gar-
rison, and Bixler, published by Smith-Hammond and Co., Atlanta, Ga.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 227
weeks be given in one week, during the last two or three months of the
term, or the review words can be added to the lists of new words for the
last eight or ten weeks in order to complete the work for the year.
C. METHODS OF INSTRUCTION
Two methods of conducting the spelling lessons for the week are com-
monly used — the Study-Test and the Test-Study Methods. Various adapt-
ations are being made and it is likely that there should be variations for
the different grades, especially the primary grades, in order that the
method used will, in the light of the ability and needs of the pupils, pro-
vide for the formation of proper study habits under the guidance of the
teacher.
In the primary grades, the pupils need to study with the teacher to
insure the learning of an effective method of studying words. Some author-
ities on the teaching of spelling and some recent studies which have been
made recommend the study-test method for the primary grades, while other
authorities suggest certain adaptations of the test-study method, called
the *assignment-test-study method. In the outline for the second grade
in this course, the study-test method is recommended and in the third grade
it is suggested that either the study-test or the assignment-test-study
method be used.
In the grammar grades, the test-study method is recommended, as the
pupil should establish the habit of independent study and be able to work
on his own difficulties as revealed by the pretest. It may be found helpful,
in the light of the needs of the children, to use the assignment-test-study
method at the beginning of the term in the fourth grade.
All three methods are here described, so that teachers may understand
them and see how the essential principles of teaching spelling are carried
out. The method to be used should be carefully and consistently followed
in order to judge the value of the various steps of the procedure.
1. Study-Test Method
First Four Days of the Week: During the first four days, teach the
new words for the week, teaching a few each day. In presenting a new
word, the teacher should pronounce the word correctly and distinctly, writ-
ing it on the board as she pronounces it, or pupils may look at it in their
books. When a word has more than one syllable, pronounce the word with
a slight pause after each syllable. Have several pupils pronounce the
word, and the class may pronounce the word softly. Present each word
in this way. Relate the words to the children's experiences, having them
used in sentences, and making sure that the meaning and pronunciation
are clear to all pupils. After all the new words have been presented, then
study each word according to the following plan:
1. The teacher pronounces the word, writing it on the blackboard. The
children, looking closely at the word, pronounce it. The teacher
then spells the word and calls attention to any part which may
prove difficult.
2. The pupils close their eyes and think how the word looks, trying to
get a correct mental image of the word. Then they look at the
word and see if they saw it correctly.
'Trabue-Stevens Speller, Row-Peterson & Co., Evanston, 111.
228 Course of Study for the
3. The pupils close their eyes, try to visualize the word and say the
letters softly. Then they look at the word to see if they spelled it
correctly. Repeat, if needed, to fix the correct image of the word.
4. Erase the word, and have pupils write it, saying the letters softly
as they write.
5. Then they should check the word by the book or the board to see if
they spelled it correctly.
6. Have pupils cover the word and write it three times, checking each
time to see if it is correct.
After all the words have been studied in this way, review the words
which were taught the previous day.
Then dictate all the words (new and review) for the day.
In correcting the papers, the children may exchange papers or check
their own. When the children check their own or each other's papers, the
teacher should pronounce the word, then spell it, saying each letter slowly
and distinctly as she writes it on the board, or the words may be checked
by the book. All papers should be checked later by the teacher.
Count as errors (1) any words misspelled, (2) any words written so
poorly that they cannot be read, (3) any words that have been rewritten.
After the papers have been checked each pupil writes correctly on his
paper the words which he has misspelled. These are to be given special
attention in the review the next day, each pupil working on his own
difficulties.
Friday: Final Test. Dictate all the words for the week, pronouncing
the word, using it in a sentence, and pronouncing it again. Any word
which has been spelled correctly every time by all pupils may be omitted
from the test on Friday, if the teacher thinks wise. After the papers
have been corrected, any word missed by a pupil on this final test should
be written in his spelling notebook as a word to be studied and mastered.
The teacher should check the words written in the notebook to see that all
are spelled correctly.
2. Test-Study Method
Monday: Attention to meaning and pronunciation, then pretest given.
Pupils turn to the lesson for the week in their books and look at each
word closely as the teacher pronounces it correctly and distinctly. The
children pronounce the word after the teacher. Special attention is given
to correct and distinct pronunciation by the pupils. Then they use in
sentences those words about which there is any doubt as to the meaning.
After all words have been pronounced, the pupils close their books and
the teacher dictates the words for the pupils to write. In doing this she
pronounces the word, uses it in a sentence, and then pronounces it again.
Pupils should understand that this test, before studying the words, is to
determine just which words each pupil needs to study. Instruct pupils
to leave a space blank, if they are uncertain about the spelling of a word.
The papers may be checked according to the plans given under the Study-
Test Method.
The teacher should have a notebook in which she has copied the words
for the week. By the word, she should record the number of children
missing it in the pretest. This can be done quickly by the showing of
hands for each word missed.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 229
After the papers are checked, each child should record in his spelling
notebook the words he needs to study. The teacher should check this list
to see that all words are spelled correctly. He also records his score on
his record card.
Tuesday: Study Day. Each pupil studies the words he missed on Mon-
day. Help them to use the plan, "Pupil's Guide for Studying Alone," as
given on the next page. This is the time for the teacher to aid individual
pupils with their difficulties. Pupils who did not miss any words on Mon-
day are excused from this study today. They may use the period for
reviewing words in the "Word Hospital" or "Words Missed in Written
Work" or for enjoying library reading.
Wednesday: Second Test. All the children in the class are given the
test, including those who did not miss any words on Monday. The teacher
dictates all the words for the week without any further study by the
children. Check these papers as on Monday.
Thursday: Study Day. Proceed as on Tuesday, using the words mis-
spelled on the Wednesday test.
Friday: Final Test. Proceed as on Wednesday. This test is for the
entire class. Any word in the week's list which has been spelled correctly
by every pupil on the pretest and on Wednesday's test may be omitted
from the final test if the teacher thinks wise. After papers have been
checked each pupil writes in his spelling notebook the words misspelled on
this test. They are his special words and he works for complete mastery
of them. He also records his score on his record card.
3. Assignment-Test-Study Method*
Assignment Day: Monday. With books open to the lesson for the
week, the words are related to the experiences of the children or grouped
around a topic of interest. The children use the words freely so that as
a result of the discussion each pupil should have a clear understanding
of the meaning, use and pronunciation of the words and will realize that
these are words which he will likely find need for in his writing.
Then the teacher writes one of the words on the board, pronouncing it
correctly and distinctly, and having several pupils pronounce it. With the
children carefully observing the word, the teacher spells it and calls at-
tention to any part which is likely to prove difficult. Then the pupils spell
the word. Next they close their eyes and try to visualize the word. Then
they look at the word to see if they had the correct image. They may
again close their eyes and think of the image of the word, saying the let-
ters softly. Then they look at the word to verify the correctness of their
spelling. Each word may be studied in this way. This preparation helps
to give the child a clear recognition of the words to be written and to fix
the correct spelling in his mind.
Test Days: Tuesday and Friday. The second day of the week is given
over to the preliminary test to discover which words and parts of words
each pupil needs to study. This test should be carried on as prescribed in
the "Test-Study Method." The words missed by each child become his
spelling lesson for the remainder of the week.
*Adapted from The Trabue- Stevens Speller, Row-Peterson Co., Evanston, 111.
230 Course of Study for the
The last day of the week is given to the final test on all the words for
the week. All the pupils in the class take this test. If any word was
spelled correctly by all the pupils on the pretest it may be omitted on the
final test. Each pupil should be encouraged to try to obtain a perfect
score on the final test. After checking the papers the words misspelled
are written by each pupil in his spelling notebook, as a word to be mas-
tered immediately by his own efforts. He also records his score on his
record card, and the teacher, with the help of a member of the class as
"Class Record Keeper" records the score on the class record chart.
Study Days: Wednesday and Thursday. These are the days for each
child to learn to spell correctly the words he missed on the preliminary
test. They should study these under the direction of the teacher, using
the steps in the "Pupil's Guide for Studying Alone."
D. PUPIL'S GUIDE FOR STUDYING ALONE*
The following steps are offered as a guide to the pupil in developing a
rather systematic and efficient method of study:
Step 1. Look closely at the word and pronounce it (aloud, if at home)
with a slight pause after each syllable.
Step 2. Think of a sentence in which you use the word.
Step 3. Look at the word again. Read the letters of the word softly
to yourself, pausing slightly after each syllable.
Step 4. Close your eyes, or look away from the book and try to see the
word letter by letter as you pronounce it in a whisper.
Step 5. When you have a clear picture of the word in mind, look at
your book to see whether you saw it correctly or not. If you did not, then
repeat these steps for the word again.
Step 6. Without looking at the book, write the word plainly and with-
out stopping. Draw a line under any part of the word that is difficult
for you.
Step 7. Check your writing of the word by your book. If you wrote
the word incorrectly, repeat all the steps until you are able to write it
correctly.
Step 8. Cover up what you have written and write the word again
without looking at the book. Do this until you have written the word
correctly three times. Never copy any misspelling in order to try to cor-
rect some special error.
Step 9. When you have studied all the words in this way, ask some-
one to pronounce the words to you — not in the order in the book. Write
each word as soon as it is pronounced. If you hesitate on the word,
underline it. Check your spellings by the book. Put a cross in front of
each word that you misspelled. These words and the underlined ones
should be studied further.
E. SOME ELEMENTS INVOLVED IN THE PRINCIPLES OF
LEARNING
1. Give special attention to the fixation of correct initial impressions.
2. Give special attention to the correct pronunciation of the word.
3. Knowledge of meaning should always precede the spelling.
4. Give special attention to the difficult parts of a word.
5. Study the words singly or in columns rather than in sentences.
6. Watch the spelling in other phases of the school work, for the final
test of ability to spell is found in the written work outside of the
spelling class.
7. Watch carefully that the writing is legible and distinguishes be-
tween the letters that often appear somewhat similar.
*Adapted from "Spelling: for Every-day Use" — Steadman, Garrison, Bixler, published by
Smith, Hammond and Co., Atlanta, Ga.
Elementary Schools op North Carolina 231
8. Provide necessary reviews according to group and individual needs
and word difficulties.
9. Present homonyms in their first presentation separately. They can
well be reviewed together in dictation exercises.
10. Develop a few simple rules in harmony with the pupils' needs, vo-
cabulary, and spelling ability.
11. Lay special emphasis upon a good study technique.
12. Develop the "dictionary habit" for looking up new spellings, mean-
ings, pronunciations, etc.
13. Drill with attentive repetition.
14. Present words without diacritical marks or divisions of syllables.
15. Preliminary testing is helpful in revealing to the pupil the words
he needs to study and to the teacher those which need special
attention.
16. Make provision for mastering words missed in daily written work
and ranking high on the check lists.
17. Occasional spelling matches using review words will give an added
incentive for learning these words.
18. Study words of similar spellings that fall in the same grade in a
group.
19. Investigate causes of poor spelling among the pupils, and try to find
a remedy.
20. Use achievement tests both as a check on the pupils' learning, and
as a check upon the teacher's teaching.
F. IMPORTANCE AND ORGANIZATION OF REVIEWS
Plans for effective teaching of spelling call for provision for the requi-
site reviews essential for fixing the correct spelling of words. All modern
spelling texts and courses provide for reviews, determining the number of
repetitions of a word in proportion to its difficulty and having the repe-
titions occur at intervals of increasing length. Some words have been
found to require only one intensive period of study by most pupils, others
had to be repeated two or more times. Exceptionally difficult words were
found in which reviews had to be provided three or more times and such
reviews had to be placed in three or more grades to insure final fixation
of the correct form. Pupils neither learn nor retain the correct spelling
of words with equal ease. The need for drill, and the extent and place-
ment of words for review will depend largely upon (1) the frequency with
which pupils use a word in written work; and (2) the degree of the word's
spelling difficulty; and (3) the persistence of its spelling difficulty.
Review of Words on Pupil's Word Lists. Much attention will need to
be given to review of the words on each individual pupil's "two special
lists of words most difficult for him" — his demons. These are kept in his
spelling notebook, and consist of (1) the words missed on the final test
each week, and (2) the words missed in his written work in all subjects.
Common errors in these lists may be tabulated and class instruction and
testing given on them at the end of each month, and especially at the close
of each half of the school term. Additional provision should be made for
reviewing individual pupils on their special difficulties.
G. LENGTH OF PERIODS
Recent investigations regarding the amount of time allotted to spelling
made by Ayres, Kyte, and others show weekly time allotments ranging
from seventy-five to one hundred minutes per week in grades two to seven.
Keeping in mind that the needs of the children should determine the
amount of time to be given in a particular grade, seventy-five to one hun-
232 Course of Study for the
dred minutes per week may be accepted as the general practice of repre-
sentative school systems at present.
H. INDIVIDUAL SPELLING NOTEBOOKS
One of the most important aids to be used in spelling instruction is the
spelling notebook. It should be kept by each pupil in grades three to seven.
A simple composition notebook is satisfactory. It is suggested that this
spelling notebook be divided into three separate sections. The first section,
headed "Words to Study" would include about twenty pages on which are
to be recorded the words misspelled on the first test (pretest) each week.
By ruling a line down the center of each page, a column is provided for
the words missed on the first test. This test may be written on a sheet of
paper or in a spelling pad, then the words misspelled are written in the
spelling notebook. These are the words to be studied and drilled upon so
that they will be known when the final test comes later in the week. The
teacher should see that they are spelled correctly in the notebook.
The second section of the notebook may be named "Word Hospital"
and in it would be written the words misspelled on the final test each week.
This test may be taken on a sheet of paper or on a pad. After the words
have been corrected, those misspelled should be recorded in the spelling
notebook. These are each child's "special spelling demons" and complete
mastery of these words is the goal. Each child should feel and accept
the responsibility of studying and learning these words. A particular
time should be set aside for assisting the children individually, many plans
used, and credit given when words are dismissed from the hospital. Every
month or six weeks, tests on these words should be given. When a word
has been spelled correctly on three different tests or in written work, it
may be dismissed from the hospital. This may be indicated by placing a
capital "D" by the word, or a check mark. If, however, later on one of
these words is spelled incorrectly, it should be returned to the "Word
Hospital" for further study.
In the third section of the notebook would be recorded: (a) all the
words misspelled in personal letters, compositions and written work in all
subjects, under the heading, "Words Missed in My Written Work," and
(b) the list of supplementary words the children in the class decide to
learn because they find that they need these words often in their written
work. This list could be called "Special Words We Need." The words in
the third section of the notebook should be arranged alphabetically, each
list kept separately. Pages may be ruled into two columns and a letter
of the alphabet placed at the left margin of each page. These words are
for constant reference. Every time the same word is missed in written
work, a line drawn under this word in the spelling notebook will direct
attention to it.
Some teachers arrange the spelling notebook so that all tests are writ-
ten in it, but it seems a better plan to record only the words misspelled
on the first and final tests each week in the notebook and to use a spelling
pad or sheets of paper for taking all tests during the week.
Especially prepared individual notebooks which may be purchased:
1. The Laidlaw Test and Exercise Book in Spelling — Laidlaw. For use with the McCall
Speller.
2. The Individual Spelling Notebook — Smith.
3. Pupils' Spelling Notebook — Row.
4. My Record Spelling Tablet — Lippincott.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 233
I. PROGRESS CHARTS AND GRAPHS
Keeping a record of his progress stimulates and increases a child's
interest in his spelling. The individual progress chart emphasizes im-
proving one's own record, and working to reach the goal of a perfect score,
as it shows the pupil's progress through the year. It is recommended that
this chart be kept by each pupil in grades three to seven. "Record Cards"
for this purpose are available without cost for use with the McCall Speller.
Full directions are given on the cards for keeping the record.
Class progress charts aid in making spelling a class problem, and thus
stimulate each member to cooperate in working for a perfect score. They
also provide the teacher and principal with a graphic means of analyzing
the progress of the class. The McCall Speller gives the following instruc-
tions for keeping this class record: "The teacher can draw on the black-
board (or on a large piece of cardboard) a record blank exactly like the
one which is used in her grade by each pupil. Instead of making individual
scores in the squares for the first and final tests each week, she would
mark the average of the scores of the whole class. These first and final
test scores should be marked in the same way as they are on the individual
pupil's Record Card. Such a record shows the weekly progress of the
class as a whole and is an incentive to each child to make his own score
contribute to a high class score."
Use of the Dictionary
One of the important results to be obtained in the modern spelling
course is the habit of using the dictionary whenever a word is needed
whose pronunciation, spelling, or meaning is not definitely known. A
knowledge of the method of gaining access to the wealth of materials
present in a good modern dictionary and the desire and the ability to
make use of this information when one is in doubt as to the spelling,
syllabication, meaning, use, or pronunciation of a word are invaluable aids
to progress in spelling. Our purpose should be to explain and demonstrate
the use of the dictionary so that no pupil will be in doubt about this and
then to provide opportunity for such thorough practice under careful
supervision that pupils will acquire skill in using it effectively. Modern
spellers give exercises and suggestions to guide teachers in this work.
The grades where these different types of exercises should be introduced
are discussed in connection with the spelling course of study as it applies
to the different grades. Suggestions are also given in the language course
of study in the discussion of vocabulary building.
Relation to Other Subjects
The realization by teachers and pupils that spelling, as one of the
language arts, is a means needed in expressing one's thoughts, is essential
from the very beginning of the course. In order to bring about this real-
ization, the child must have enriched experiences (thus having something
to tell about) and a desire to tell about these experiences because he be-
lieves they are worth expressing.
Then the teacher's task is to encourage the child's efforts and pleasure
in effective communication of his ideas. He will be led to see that effective
written work in every field is dependent upon accuracy in spelling and
hence out of this felt need the desire to spell correctly in all written work
234 Course op Study for the
may be aroused, and conscious acceptance of this responsibility gradually
built up.
In order for the child to establish the habit of accuracy in spelling, he
must give attention to the correct spelling of words in written work in all
subjects and unit studies. As suggested elsewhere, a section of the pupil's
spelling notebook should be reserved for "Words Missed in My Written
Work." These should be arranged alphabetically, constantly referred to,
and plans made for studying them.
Teachers and pupils together can build up a list of words related to
the activity, subject, or unit study being worked out which they think will
be needed in written work and which are not included in the basal spelling
course for the grade. The most widely used of these words, as a supple-
mentary list, may be alphabetically arranged in the spelling notebook for
reference, and some of the stronger pupils encouraged to master them.
Measurement of Results in Spelling
The need for some instrument for determining the spelling efficiency
of individual pupils or of groups of individuals, and for making com-
parisons between individuals or groups has led to much work in the field
of testing. The two main values for spelling scales for the teacher are:
1. They provide a list of common words having known degrees of
difficulty.
2. They provide scores (norms) which give the spelling ability of
the different grade pupils over the country for the various words
of the test.
Some of the most widely used scales are listed in the bibliography.
While the standardized tests and scales do not measure the actual
progress of the group of pupils, the teacher can construct from these
scales, tests which will do so. Probably the greatest value of the spelling
scales lies in their use as a source or guide in aiding the teacher to devise
a more scientific program for measuring the results of her teaching, or
diagnosing student difficulties, or comparing her group with other groups.
In selecting words for a spelling test, as a rule the teacher will find that
the words ordinarily spelled by 70 to 75 per cent . of the pupils in the
grade to be tested are quite satisfactory. The words should not be too
easy, or else some of the pupils will spell all of them. On the other hand,
the words should not be too difficult, for the opposite reason. Twenty words
will make a good test for the pupils.
Some questions that .might be answered from the spelling tests will be
considered further in connection with Diagnosis and Remedial Treatment
of Spelling Needs. These, along with other questions, are here presented
as follows: How does this grade compare with other classes of the same
grade? What improvement should be expected during the year? What is
the educational classification of each of the pupils in the grade? How do
the individual pupils in this grade compare in spelling ability with children
in lower and higher grades? What overlapping is there between grades?
Diagnosis and Remedial Treatment of Spelling Needs
There are two phases of the problem of the diagnosis of spelling diffi-
culties. The first phase of this might be considered more as a survey of
the general spelling situation, and in the light of the results obtained,
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 235
making an analysis of the conditions. The following questions and analysis
as given by Garrison and Garrison* will aid in group diagnosis:
"The first step in the diagnosis of spelling difficulties is to find how
the individual or individuals compare with children in general. For this
purpose it is necessary to secure measures on a standardized spelling test.
A good intelligence test also should be used. The following questions,
answers to which will aid in diagnosis, should be answered in the light of
the test results for the group as a whole:
1. Is the median of the grade up to the standard?
a. Is a large majority below the norm for the grade?
b. Is a large majority above the norm for the grade?
2. How does spelling achievement compare with mental ability?
a. Is spelling achievement below mental ability rating ?
b. Is spelling achievement above mental ability rating?
3. Are the pupils correctly classified according to age?
a. Are there many over-age students in the grade?
b. Are there many under-age students in the grade?"
By means of these comparisons the teacher should be able to make
further analysis of the difficulties of those pupils falling far below the
average in spelling achievement. When there is a general group inability,
the general cause of this should be sought. Such factors as the following
are often responsible for a general spelling difficulty:
Poor methods of teaching; lack of cooperation on the part of other
teachers, in the case of departmental teaching; poor early training in
habits of study for the group as a whole.
Once the trouble is ascertained the teacher can then direct her effort
towards remedying the condition. Proper presentation of words, proper
checking and drills, and above all proper motivation will tend to remedy
most group difficulties.
When the group disability has been ascertained and remedied, or in
case the group compares favorably with other groups, with their other
work, or with their general ability, then the remedial work becomes more
of an individual matter. The individual cases falling low on the spelling
scale should be studied and analyzed as to the difficulties involved. This
is the second phase of the problem of diagnosis and remedial work. The
two primary causes of bad spelling are negligence on the part of the pupil
and inability to spell. Negligence is synonymous with poor habits or poor
attitudes toward the spelling work. This, of course, is directly related to
the method of presenting words. Proper presentation should ever be
emphasized, for this makes for accurate observation on the part of the
pupil. Proper study habits, the development of a spelling consciousness,
a realization of the social motive, and careful checking on the part of the
pupil for errors, are aids in the prevention of wrong habit formation. A
more detailed classification of the causes of spelling difficulties follows:
a. Poor memory (visual or auditory)
b. Sensory deficiencies (poor vision, etc.)
c. Poor motor coordination (speech defects, writing defects, etc.)
d. Inferior learning capacity
e. Poor observation
f. Nervous instability
g. Lack of interest
h. Poor study habits
i. Improper pronunciation
j. Vocabulary difficulty
k. Poor spelling consciousness
*Garrison, S. C, and Garrison, K. C. Psychology of Elementary School Subjects. Johnson
Publishing Co., 1929. pp. 395.
236 Course op Study for the
After the teacher has ascertained the cause for poor achievement in
spelling, the case should next receive treatment to clarify if possible the
difficulty existing. Instruction should ever be based on the needs of the
pupil. If poor achievement is due to poor pronunciation in general, then
there should be further training in clear and distinct pronunciation of each
syllable in a word. For purposes of diagnosis, and motivation, records
should be kept over a period of years.
FIRST GRADE
Writing Words as Needed
After children have acquired a considerable reading vocabulary, and
have had occasion many times to come in contact with words and sentences
read or chosen by them and written by the teacher and later on written
(copied) by them in connection with group and class activities, they gain
the notion that there is a correct way to write a word. In this way, words
are written in response to a need. Since the same words are met over and
over, the forms of many of the simplest words unconsciously become fixed
with the children. Then, if the school so desires, during the last two or
three months of the term, attention may be given to regular work in spell-
ing with efforts made to fix the forms of certain simple words common to
a child's written vocabulary.
Early in their school career, children have the desire and the need to
write. Long before children enter school they pretend they are writing,
imitating the activities of those about them. It gives them real pleasure
to be able to write something that others can read. This desire should
be utilized by the teacher whenever the opportunity arises, for not only
is she satisfying a social need, but here also arises the recognition that
there is a right and a wrong way to write words.
Writing and the building up of the notion of the correct form of a
word are so closely associated in the beginning that one can scarcely be
mentioned without involving the other. When the child has need for writ-
ing a word, then attention is to be given to the form. His writing will
be largely copying and using a visual image. In doing both of these, there
will be occasion to call his attention to the correct form of the word from
time to time. From this will grow the consciousness that there is a right
and a wrong sequence of letters.
In helping a child to improve his form in writing, the teacher will have
occasion to call a letter by its name, and the child in this way will learn
many of the letter names. It is not necessary that the direct teaching of
these be done until the more formal study of spelling is undertaken. Dur-
ing the last two or three months of the term is early enough to make sure
that the names of the letters are known. The first gi'ade teacher is
concerned with helping children grasp quickly "reading wholes" and undue
emphasis on single letters will hinder this ability, if spelling is begun too
early.
Suggested Experiences and Activities
Until the need for writing is felt by a child there is very little motive
for learning to spell; therefore situations should arise that make the child
desire to express his ideas in writing and hence desire to learn to write
and spell.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 237
Situations which may arise and will call for the correct writing of
words in the first grade are:
1. Writing simple invitations to other classes, parents, principals,
supervisors, etc., to attend some class activity as a party, play,
assembly, a finished unit of work, etc. Example: "Come to see us
Friday at 12:00 o'clock." First Grade.
2. Accepting invitations. Example: "We will be glad to come." First
Grade.
3. Writing simple letters expressing thanks.
4. Writing greetings for Christmas, Valentines, Easter, birthdays, etc.
5. Making labels.
6. Writing news items for the bulletin board. Example: The child
brings to school the picture of a dog. He writes this item to place
under the picture on the bulletin board: "This is Dan."
7. Printing directions and signs.
8. Posting names of members of committees.
9. Making weather records.
10. Making scrap books and writing titles under pictures.
11. Making booklets.
12. Keeping health records.
13. Writing letters to mother on "Mother's Day."
14. Writing titles to pictures drawn.
Outcomes and Attitudes
The attention given to correct word forms in this grade should help:
1. To develop the desire to express oneself in writing.
2. To develop the idea that there is a correct way to write a word.
3. To develop the desire to write a word correctly.
4. To make a beginning of verifying correctness of spelling by refer-
ring to means within the child's ability.
5. To develop the ability to write (copying) those words which the
child may use in the activities which may call for writing.
6. To develop the idea that letters have names and that knowing the
names in order in the word helps to write the word correctly.
Suggested Word List
The following list of words, selected from the McCall Speller and
checked against the Gates list* are given as words which the children
will likely need. If regular spelling work is carried on during the last
few months of the first grade, words selected from this list may be taught,
or words from the children's experiences and interests, checked against the
Ayres, Horn, Kircher or Gates lists may be used.
the
for
our
run
him
by
I
be
man
your
has
may
is
all
come
had
girl
not
to
see
get
give
four
dog
in
go
two
mother
us
say
you
at
his
home
them
was
he
we
are
made
who
work
on
it
her
eat
an
out
no
me
play
they
did
hand
make
of
day
old
from
book
one
my
have
she
9top
baby
do
boy
big
am
tree
new
milk
look
Plans for Teaching Words
If there is a formal spelling period during the latter part of the first
grade, the plan for teaching the words given in detail in the second grade
outline under the heading "Studying With the Teacher" should be fol-
„ , "Gates: A Reading Vocabulary for the Primary Grades. Teachers College, Bureau of
Publications, New York City. 1926.
238 Course of Study for the
lowed. Be sure that the names of the letters are known before beginning
the regular work in teaching spelling. It is suggested that only one or
two new words be presented each day.
If there is a formal spelling period in the first grade, 10 or 15 minutes
per day should be given during the last two or three months. From 50
to 75 minutes per week is usually given.
SECOND GRADE
State Adopted Text: The McCall Speller, pages 2-10.
Objectives
1. To develop the desire to express oneself in writing.
2. To develop the desire to write a word correctly.
3. To develop the habit of verifying correctness of spelling by refer-
ing to sources within the child's ability.
4. To develop the habit of checking all written work for misspelled
words.
5. To develop the ability to write correctly those words which the child
may use in the activities which call for writing.
6. To develop pride in spelling every word correctly.
7. To develop the habit of correct pronunciation.
8. To develop the ability to study words effectively with the teacher,
gaining power to use the steps in a plan for learning to spell a
word.
Content
Modern spelling texts give a scientifically selected basal list of words
for each grade. The word lists for the second grade in the McCall Speller —
the State adopted text — are given on pages two to ten, and the lesson units
include fifteen new words each week except every fourth week, when the
lesson consists of twenty review words. To these lists should be added
other words for which the children have found frequent need in any written
work they may do. Suggestions for the use of these supplementary lists
are given in this ccurse on page 225. The children should know the letters
of the alphabet in order sometime before the end of the second grade.
Methods of Instruction
A. STUDYING WITH THE TEACHER
The mastery of a writing vocabulary is a learning process and not
merely a testing process. Pupils of the second grade should not be ex-
pected to do much independent study. The teacher should study with the
pupils and teach them how to study. In teaching the words for the week
it is suggested that three new words be taught each day for the first four
days of the week. A group of four or more words of similarity of spelling
would, of course, be taught together, thus leaving more time for the difficult
words of the week. Each day review the words taught the previous day.
Then on Friday dictate all the words for the week.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 239
The following plan for teaching a word is suggested:
1. If the need of the word has been developed through an activity,
further motivation is not necessary. If the word is taken from a
list, it should be connected in a very live way with the active life
of the child.
2. The teacher pronounces the word correctly and distinctly, writing
it on the board as she pronounces it.
3. The teacher then uses the word in a sentence. Then she calls on
different children to give a sentence using the word, or asks a ques-
tion, the answer to which will necessitate the use of the word.
4. The teacher erases the word, pronounces it, and writes it again,
calling attention to the writing of the word; e.g., "The first letter
is tall but the others are all the same height," "The 'g' goes below
the line," "Be sure to swing from the top of the V," "We must not
stop after each letter, but write until the whole word is written," etc.
In teaching long words, give attention to the parts of the word.
For example: going would be written on the board, attention called
to "go," then to "ing," and to joining the "o" and "i," and then
again to the word as a whole.
5. The children spell the word softly with their eyes closed. Then they
open their eyes and check with the written form on the board.
6. Then erase the word and have each child write it at the board or
on a piece of paper. Help a child who has difficulty. Then the
teacher writes the word on the board and the children check their
writing by it. Repeat this three times. When the teacher has
learned what parts of the word are most difficult for the children
to write, she writes the word again on the blackboard, calling special
attention to how these difficult parts are written. If necessary, give
the needed practice in writing the difficult letters, before having the
word rewritten. The blackboard should be used wholly until writ-
ing habits have been fairly well established, and should be used
freely at all times. Groups may take turns, if there is not room
for all, passing quickly to 'the board, writing the word, verifying,
writing again if necessary and going speedily back to their seats.
Those at their seats may write it in the air or be ready to give
helpful suggestions.
7. Proceed to the next word in like manner.
8. Review the words taught the day before by writing them one at a
time on the board. Have the children close their eyes and spell the
word softly. They should check their spelling by looking at the
word on the board. Then have pupils write the word on the board
or on practice paper, and check by the written form on the board.
Then take up the practice paper.
9. Give each child a uniform piece of paper for the dictation. Erase
all words from the board and dictate the new and review words.
Pronounce the word distinctly, give a sentence using it and pro-
nounce it again.
10. The teacher corrects the pupils' papers in order to learn which de-
fects to remedy and which words to reteach or review. Analyze the
children's difficulties and work individually with them, helping each
pupil to correct his errors, and guiding him as he studies the word
again. Be sure that he uses "the steps" in the plan for teaching
a word. It encourages the children to take their Friday written
work home, to show what they have accomplished during the week.
11. On Friday, dictate all the words taught during the week. Pupils
missing words on Friday should be given individual attention in
mastering their difficulties. The teacher should keep a list of the
words missed on Friday in her notebook. These are the important
words to review.
The task of learning and teaching spelling does not begin and end with
the spelling period. There should be provided many opportunities during
the pupil's school day, week, or month to use the words in context. These
240 Course of Study for the
opportunities may take the place of those dictation sentences and para-
graphs so frequently advocated. Available research indicates that column
dictation is more effective in testing spelling than paragraph or sentence
dictation.
B. REVIEWS
The present-day spelling texts designate the reviews. They usually
provide more systematic reviews than can be planned by a teacher and
should be carefully carried out. In the McCall Speller the words for every
fourth week are review words. In addition to this review give each month
a review on the words missed on the Friday test each week.
At the end of the semester, review (1) all words missed on the Friday
tests that were given as monthly review words, and (2) all words missed
in the written work that ranked high on some such lists as the Ayres,
Iowa, or Gates list.
Attention to Penmanship Difficulties
Pupils may need to be taught how to form letters and how to combine
them into words. If they have penmanship difficulties, the teacher should
let them watch her write the words often, calling attention to the way in
which the letters are formed. These should be written by the teacher on
the blackboard and also on the child's own paper. Help the child to form
a visual image of the word.
Suggested Life Activities
Some life activities that may arise that will call for a knowledge of
spelling in the second grade are:
1. Writing simple invitations and acceptances.
2. Writing simple notes of thanks.
3. Writing notes of appreciation, as of an assembly program.
4. Writing greetings for Christmas, Valentines, Easter, birthdays,
Mother's Day, etc.
5. Making labels.
6. Writing news items for the bulletin board.
7. Writing diiections and signs.
8. Posting names of members of committees.
9. Making weather records.
10. Making booklets.
11. Writing programs for class events.
12. Keeping health records.
13. Writing letters to absent classmates, parents, or to a child who has
moved away.
14. Writing titles to pictures drawn.
15. Menus for various occasions.
16. Original stories, plays, and poems.
17. Writing requests.
18. Lists of things needed for a dramatization.
Time Allotment
The amount of time usually given to spelling ranges from 75 to 100
minutes per week.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 241
THIRD GRADE
State Adopted Text: The McCall Speller, pages 12-20.
Objectives
The general objectives of the course should be kept in mind, with the
following specific aims given special attention:
1. To develop the ability to spell correctly all the words listed for the
third grade.
2. To develop the habit of using and pronouncing correctly the words
in the list for the grade and also the additional words.
3. To develop the habit of using an economical and effective method
of independent study in spelling.
4. To develop the habit of checking all written work for misspelled
words.
5. To develop the habit of verifying correctness of spelling by refer-
ring to all available tools or sources within the child's ability.
6. To develop pride in spelling every word correctly — to be satisfied
only with correct spelling, and annoyed by incorrect spelling.
7. To develop the ability to know when a word is spelled incorrectly.
8. To master the two lists of words kept in his spelling notebook:
(1) all words missed on the final test each week, and (2) all words
missed in written work.
9. To develop the ability to write the alphabet and arrange familiar
words in alphabetical order according to the first letter.
10. To create a desire to increase his own writing vocabulary.
11. To encourage each child to record and check his progress.
Content
A review of the difficult words of the list for the second grade is needed
at the beginning of the term. The columns of review words for every
fourth week given in the second grade list could be used for this study.
The word lists for the third grade in the McCall Speller — the State
adopted text — are given on pages twelve to twenty. The lesson units in-
clude twenty new words each week except every fourth week when twenty-
five review words are given. In addition, words for which the children
have found frequent need in any written work they may do should be used
as a supplementary list. These words should be checked by a reliable
word list such as the Ayres, the Iowa, or the Gates. Suggestions for the
use of these supplementary lists are given in this course on page 225.
Methods of Instruction
A. TEACHING PUPILS HOW TO STUDY WITH THE TEACHER
Teachers should read carefully the course for the second grade, es-
pecially the "Method of Instruction."
If the work of the second grade has been thoroughly mastered, as out-
lined in this course, the children will know how to study with the teacher.
It is recommended that the plan for studying with the teacher, as given
for the second grade be followed for the first two weeks of school, to give
pupils an understanding of the steps in learning to spell a word and to
insure fixing the correct forms of the words studied.
B. TEACHING PUPILS HOW TO STUDY BY THEMSELVES
For each pupil to learn an effective method of studying a word, and
to establish the habit of using this method, is one of the most important
242 Course of Study for the
objectives of the spelling course. The teacher should study words with
the class following the plan given below. Then, the pupils may be given
this "set of steps" as a silent reading lesson from the board. Several
words should be used for illustrating the steps. Be sure each step is
clearly understood and carried out.
How to Study a Word
1. Look at the word and say it softly.
2. Look closely at the word to see if any part is hard for you.
3. Look at the word and say the letters softly.
4. Close your eyes, try to see the word, and say the letters softly.
5. Open your eyes and see if you had it_ right. If you did not have it right, do steps
one to four again. Be sure you have it right.
6. Write the word and say the letters softly as you write. Look at the book if you
need to. .
7. Cover the word on your paper. Now write the word without looking at your book.
8. Look at the book to see if it is right. Write the word three times in the same way.
Make sure you have it right.
Throughout the year, the children should constantly use these steps.
Finally, the habit of thus studying a word will be established.
C. METHODS FOR TEACHING THE LESSONS FOR A WEEK
Two methods of conducting the week's spelling lessons are commonly
used. These are the Study-Test and the Test-Study Methods. Various
adaptations of these two methods are being made and it is likely that
there should be variations for the different grades. For the third grade,
it should be kept in mind that the pupil cannot be left upon his own re-
sources to find some specific method of work and study. For this reason,
it is suggested that such a method be used that will direct pupils in their
work and guide them in the formation of proper scudy habits.
Some modern spelling texts recommend the study-test method for the
third grade, or suggest a variation of the test-study method such as the
assignment-test-study method. In the McCall Speller, the State adopted
text, the test-study method is suggested, with attention to meaning, pro-
nunciation and any difficult parts of the words before the pretest is given.
It is recommended that the study-test or the assignment-test-study
method be used at least for the first part of the year in the third grade,
in order to direct pupils in their work, teach them an effective plan for
learning to spell words, and develop the habit of using this plan inde-
pendently.
All three methods are here described, so that teachers may understand
them and see how the essential aims of instruction in spelling are to be
carried out. The method to be used should be carefully and consistently
followed.
1. Study-Test Method
First Four Days of the Week: Learning the Words. Teach about five
new words each day during the first four days. A group of words of
similarity of spelling would be taught together, thus leaving more time
for the difficult words of the week. In presenting a word, the teacher
should pronounce the word correctly and distinctly, writing it on the board
as she pronounces it, or pupils may look at it in their books. When a
word has more than one syllable, pronounce the word with a slight pause
after each syllable. Have several pupils pronounce the word, then the
class may pronounce it softly in concert. Present each word in this way.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 243
Relate the words to the children's experiences, having them used in sen-
tences, and making sure that the meaning and pronunciation are clear to
all. After all words have been presented, study each word with the pupils
according to the steps given under "Teaching Pupils How to Study by
Themselves," on page 241 of this course. Review each day the words
taught the previous day, analyzing the children's difficulties, and giving
attention to their individual needs.
After all words have been studied, the pupils close their books, and
the teacher erases the words from the board or draws a shade over them.
Pupils prepare papers for the written lesson by writing their names at the
top of the paper, and the figures 1, 2, 3 and so on down the left edge of
the paper. Then the teacher dictates all the words (new and review) for
the day. She pronounces the word, uses it in a sentence, and pronounces
it again.
The children may correct their own papers, exchange papers, or the
teacher may check them after school, writing the correct form by each
misspelled word. When the children check their own or each other's
papers, the teacher should pronounce the word, then spell it, saying each
letter slowly and distinctly as she writes it on the board. Call attention
to the errors that may probably occur, as "Be sure there are two t's,"
"Notice that it is ar," etc. All the papers should be checked by the
teacher later.
Count as errors: (1) any words misspelled; (2) any words written so
poorly that they cannot be read, for example: yow for yoti; m for n; a
for o; t's not crossed; (3) any words that have been rewritten.
After the papers have been checked each pupil writes correctly on his
paper the words which he has misspelled. These are the words to be given
special attention in the review the next day, each pupil understanding and
working on his own difficulties.
The teacher should have a notebook in which she has copied the words
for the week. By each word, she should record the number of children
missing it. This can be done quickly by the showing of hands for each
word missed.
Friday: Pinal Test. Dictate all the words for the week, pronouncing
the word, using it in a sentence, and pronouncing it again. Any word
which has been spelled correctly every day by all pupils may be omitted
from the test on Friday, if the teacher thinks it wise. After the papers
have been corrected, any word missed by a pupil on this final test should
be written in his spelling notebook in the "Word Hospital" section as a
word to be studied and mastered. The teacher should check this list to
see that all words are spelled correctly. Suggestions for keeping the spell-
ing notebook are given on page 232. Each child also records his own score
on his record card.
Every Fourth Week: Reviews. Since, in the McCall Speller, the lesson
consists of twenty-five review words every fourth week, six of these can be
taught each day for the first four days, then the test on all of them given
on Friday. Work for mastery by all pupils. Any word missed on the
Friday test should be written by the pupils in their spelling notebooks in
the "Word Hospital" section. Children also record their scores on their
record cards. Another plan would be to teach twelve or thirteen words
each day for the first two days in the week, and have the test on all of
244 Course of Study for the
them on Wednesday. Then, the last two days of the week could be given
to studying and testing pupils on the two individual lists of words kept in
their spelling notebooks: (1) those in the "Word Hospital" and (2) "Words
Missed in my Written Work."
2. Test-Study Method
Monday: Attention to Meaning and Pronunciation, Then Pretest Given.
Pupils turn to the new lesson for the week in the book, or look at the list
of words written on the board. The teacher pronounces each word cor-
rectly and distinctly, pausing slightly after each syllable. Individual
children should be called on to pronounce the word. Then the pupils may
pronounce the word in concert, softly, after the teacher. If there is any
doubt as to the meaning, the teacher should use the word orally in a sen-
tence, and have pupils do so. Attention should also be given to any difficult
parts of the words.
After all of the words have been pronounced and the meaning made
clear, the pupils close their books and the teacher erases the words from
the board or draws a shade over them.
Pupils prepare papers for the written test by writing their names at
the top of the paper and writing the figures 1, 2, 3 and so on down the
left edge of the paper.
The teacher pronounces a word, uses it in a sentence, and then pro-
nounces it again. The pupils write the word. If a child is sure he does
not know how to spell the word, he may leave the space blank.
The children may exchange papers for correction or each pupil may
correct his own. Follow the suggestions for correction of papers given
under the Study-Test Method.
The teacher should have a notebook in which she has copied the words
for the week. By each word, she should record the number of children
missing it, in the pretest. This can be done quickly by the showing of
hands for each word missed.
After the papers are checked, each child should record in his spelling
notebook the words he needs to study. The teacher should check this list
to see that all words are spelled correctly.
Each child records his own score on his record card which is furnished
free with the McCall Speller.
Tuesday: Teaching Words Missed. Tuesday should be teaching day
for teaching the words missed to the ones missing them. Third grade
children should not be expected to do much independent study at first;
therefore this period should be conducted by the teacher. In teaching these
words, follow the plan given under "B. Teaching Pupils How to Study by
Themselves," in the course for this grade, or the method suggested on
pages XII and XIII of the McCall Speller. Children who did not miss
any words in the pretest are excused from this study. It is suggested
that they use the period for reviewing words in the "Word Hospital," or
"Words Missed in Written Work," or for library reading.
Wednesday : Second Test. Children prepare papers as on Monday. The
teacher dictates the words to the entire class without any further study
on part of the children. These papers should be checked as on Monday.
The teacher records in her notebook the number of children missing each
word, and the children, opening their notebooks to the list of words missed
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 245
on Monday, underscore those missed again on this test, and add any addi-
tional words missed today.
Thursday: Teaching the Words Missed. Proceed as on Tuesday, using
the words misspelled on the Wednesday test.
Friday: Final Test. Children prepare papers as on Monday. The
teacher dictates the words to the entire class. Check papers as on Mon-
day, and have each pupil record the results, both on his record card and
in his spelling notebook. The teacher records the results in her notebook
and on the record chart for the class.
3. Assignment-Test-Study Method
Monday : Presenting the Words. This may easily be the most important
day of the week, both in its effect upon the pupil's desire to learn, and in
helping to fix the correct spelling of the words.
As the words for the week are related to the children's experiences or
grouped around interesting topics there should be a free discussion by
the children, in order that the teacher may observe and correct any errors
in the pupils' pronunciations or uses of the words. The teacher may ask
appropriate questions which will require the use of these words in the
children's answers. Attention is now given to the study of each word.
The teacher pronounces the word correctly, writing it on the board as
she pronounces it, or pupils may look at it in their books. Pupils look at
word and say it softly. Attention is called to any difficult part of the
word as pupils look closely at it. Pupils look at word and say letters
softly. Pupils close their eyes and try to see the word, saying the letters
softly. Then they open their eyes and see if they had the correct image.
Tuesday: Preliminary Test Day. The second day of the week, the first
test on the words is given to all pupils to discover which words each pupil
needs to study. The suggestions for dictating the words, given under the
Test-Study Method, should be followed. When the papers have been
checked, each pupil should record in his spelling notebook the correct form
of each word missed on the test. He should also record his score on his
record card. This list of words, missed on this first test, is the list which
he needs to study and becomes his spelling assignment for the remainder
of the week.
Wednesday and Thursday: Study Days. Each child should study in-
tensively under the guidance of the teacher the words he missed on Tues-
day. The plan given under "Teaching Pupils How to Study by Them-
selves" should be followed. Pupils who did not miss any words in the
Tuesday test are excused from study on these days. They may use this
time for studying the "Words Missed in my Written Work" or the words
in their "Word Hospital," or for enjoying library reading.
Friday: Final Test. All members of the class- are given a test on the
entire list of words for the week. If any word was spelled correctly by
every child on the first test (Tuesday) it may be omitted from the final
test, if the teacher thinks it wise. Any word missed by a pupil on the
final test should be recorded at once in his spelling notebook, in the "Word
Hospital" section, as a word to be mastered immediately by. his own efforts.
Each pupil should keep a graphic record of the number of errors made
on this final test, and some member of the class, appointed for a certain
period as Class Record Keeper, should help the teacher calculate the class
246 Course of Study for the
record and enter it on the large record graph for the class, which should
be kept posted on the bulletin board or in some other conspicuous place.
Each pupil should be encouraged to try always to obtain a perfect score
in the final test, and the class as a whole should try as often as possible
to have a final test record of no errors by any pupil.
If any word is missed on the final test by more than one-fourth of the
class, it should at once be added to the review list for the following week.
D. REVIEWS
The present-day spellers provide systematic reviews which should be
carefully followed. From them the teacher should tabulate the most fre-
quent errors. In the McCall Speller, every fourth week's work consists of
review words. To miss one of these words is serious. Provide time for
mastery of them.
The two lists kept in the spelling notebook, (1) words in the "Word
Hospital" and (2) "Words Missed in My Written Work," should be given
individual attention. The teacher should then conduct learning and testing
periods on the list of most frequently misspelled words.
Individual Spelling Notebook and Record Charts
These are a most important aid in learning to spell effectively, and
should be kept by every child. Suggestions and plans for the notebook are
given in this course on page 232. A simple composition book may be used
or one of the especially prepared notebooks purchased. There is one pre-
pared for use with the McCall Speller.
Individual record charts and class charts show the child his progress
and are a valuable aid for improving individual and class scores. Full
directions for keeping these are given in the McCall Speller.
Attention to Penmanship Difficulties
A number of spelling errors are caused by poor writing; therefore
special attention should be given the penmanship difficulties. It is well
for the teacher to write the difficult words, both on the blackboard and on
the child's own paper.
Suggested Life Activities
Some life activities that may arise that will call for a knowledge of
spelling in the third grade are:
1. Writing simple invitations and acceptances.
2. Writing simple notes of thanks.
3. Writing notes of appreciation, as of an assembly program.
4. Writing greetings for Christmas, Valentines, Easter, birthdays,
Mother's Day, etc.
5. Making labels.
6. Writing news items for the bulletin board.
7. Writing directions and signs.
8. Posting names of members of committees.
9. Making weather records.
10. Making booklets.
11. Writing programs for class events.
12. Keeping health records.
13. Writing letters to absent classmates, parents, or to a child who has
moved away.
14. Writing titles to pictures drawn.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 247
15. Menus for various occasions.
16. Original stories, plays and poems.
17. Writing requests.
18. Lists of things needed for a dramatization.
19. News items.
20. Library reports.
21. Minutes for class meeting.
22. Making a yearbook.
Suggested Time Allotment
The amount of time usually given to spelling ranges from 75 to 100
minutes per week.
FOURTH GRADE
State Adopted Text: McCall Speller, Pages 22-40.
Objectives
The objectives of the course in spelling as already set forth should be
kept in mind throughout the year. In working for the accomplishment
of these in the fourth grade the aims given emphasis in the second and
third grades should lay the foundation for earnest efforts along the fol-
lowing lines:
1. To develop the ability to spell correctly all the words commonly
needed in written woi'k.
2. To develop the meaning and correct use of words to be written.
3. To further the desire and ability to pronounce words distinctly and
correctly.
4. To develop a strong desire to write without errors in spelling.
5. To establish very definite habits of study with a plan for learning
to spell words used systematically and independently.
6. To establish the habit of checking all written work for misspelled
words.
7. Strengthening the ability to recognize almost instantly the correct
or incorrect spelling of words.
8. To make a beginning in using the dictionary for spelling, pro-
nunciation, and meaning.
Content
A. REVIEW WORK
The most difficult words of the third grade list should be reviewed as
the spelling work for the beginning of the term or be included with the
new words during the first month or two of the course in this grade. The
columns of review words for every fourth week given in the third grade
work in the McCall Speller could be used for this review, or a list of words
composed of those in the "Word Hospital" section of the spelling note-
books kept by the children when in the third grade would be very valuable
for this purpose as it consists of the words these children found most
difficult.
B. NEW WORK
1. Word Lists. The list which should receive first consideration is the
basal list of the spelling text. The lesson units for the fourth grade in
the McCall Speller include twenty-two new words each week except every
fourth week when twenty-five review words are given.
248 Course of Study for the
The supplementary list would include (1) words missed in the written
work and (2) those which the children need frequently. This list may
be checked against some of the standard lists already mentioned. The
words missed on the written work should ever receive attention.
The additional words for the fourth grade given on page 40 of the
McCall Speller are taken from an eighth grade list which has been included
as part of a seven-year course. These words should not be studied by
any pupil until he has first learned to spell the basal words of the grade.
2. Special Study Exercises. Beginning with the fourth grade, special
study exercises relating definitely to the words on the opposite page, and
to be studied in connection with them are given in the McCall Speller.
They include: (1) "Aids to Spelling" which point out the peculiarities of
certain words, give a systematic study in the formation of inflected words,
provide training in the use of the dictionary, and state the more common
rules of syllabication; (2) "Study Exercises" which give the pupil practice
in working out the rules that he has learned regarding the derivation of
words, the use of the dictionary, and syllabication. The study exercise
for each fourth week consists of a "Dictation Review" which gives special
attention to (a) homonyms, (b) words whose part of speech and meaning
are determined by their accent, such as im'-port and import', and (c) words
with a degree of difficulty of over forty per cent.
3. Introducing the- Use of the Dictionary. Use the exercises given in
the McCall Speller, including in the work the following:
a. Teach arrangement of words in alphabetical order according to the
first letter.
b. Give practice in opening the dictionary to the different word lists.
c. Teach use of guide words at the top of the dictionary page.
d. Provide opportunity as the need arises for finding the spelling of
a word desired in written work by a pupil, and for verifying the
spelling of a word about which he is in doubt.
e. Toward the end of the year, give a small amount of carefully super-
vised work to learn the pronunciation of a few words and the mean-
ing of a few carefully selected words.
Methods
The teacher should bear in mind that she is dealing with immature
individuals, and time should be spent at the beginning of the term showing
pupils how to study, using "D — Pupil's Guide for Studying Alone," under
Methods and Suggestions for Teaching Spelling in this course or as given
in the McCall Speller, in order that the habit of using this guide inde-
pendently may become established. Give special attention throughout the
year to pronunciation. Continue to help pupils eliminate their errors in
penmanship for these are the source of many difficulties in spelling.
Teachers should read carefully the discussion given in the first part
of this course under Methods and Suggestions for Teaching Spelling. The
Test-Stud^ Method is recommended for the fourth grade. It is described
in this course and is outlined in detail in the McCall Speller, and teachers
should study carefully this plan. The Test-Study Method should be sup-
plemented continuously by aid, guidance and counsel in the spelling work.
At the beginning of the year, it may be helpful to use the assignment-
test-study method.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 249
Follow the plans for reviews already given in this course, working for
complete mastery of the words in the "Word Hospital" section of the
pupil's notebooks, and giving attention constantly to the words missed in
written work.
The plans for keeping the pupil's spelling notebook are discussed else-
where in this course. This valuable aid should be used throughout the
year. The individual progress cards and the class record chart are im-
portant in stimulating interest and as an aid in improving a pupil's record.
The amount of time usually given to the work in spelling ranges from
seventy-five to one hundred minutes per week.
Testing and Remedial Work
When achievement tests accompany the text, these should be used to
study teaching efficiency and student learning. Special tests can be de-
vised from the standard spelling scales as already suggested in this course.
These tests may be given at the beginning and end of the school year. In
this grade, the tests need not include words the child has not had oppor-
tunity for learning to spell. Diagnostic testing should be adhered to and
the individual types of errors studied. Remedial measures should then be
introduced for remedying the difficulties. The best places for the teacher
to ascertain special difficulties is through studying the errors present in
the student's "spelling demons." Errors pertaining to pronunciation and
writing should be very carefully observed in this grade.
FIFTH GRADE
State Adopted Text: The McCall Speller, pages 42-60.
Objectives
The objectives set forth for the fifth grade spelling work should be
those already set forth for spelling. The furtherance of many of the
barely established habits of the previous grades should be a goal. Some
of the more specific objectives especially applicable to the fifth grade are :
1. To develop the ability to pronounce all words correctly, and to pro-
nounce new words correctly by seeking help from the dictionary.
2. To develop such simple spelling rules as those assigned to this grade.
The extent to which this should be done should be in harmony with
the discussion already given on this topic.
3. To afford additional practice in dictionary exercises.
4. To establish more firmly the habit of listing words — either those
which give trouble or those which the pupil wishes to add to his
vocabulary — and of making an attempt to learn them.
5. To establish more firmly the proper habits of study, including a
discriminative type of study as is needed in the Test-Study Method
of this grade.
6. To establish more firmly the habit of checking all written work for
words misspelled.
Content
A. REVIEW WORK
The words from the fourth grade work which have been found most
difficult should be reviewed at the beginning of the term. The lists of
words given every fourth week for the fourth grade in the McCall Speller
250 Course of Study for the
may be used or a list composed of the words in the "Word Hospital" sec-
tion of the children's notebooks kept by them when in the fourth grade.
B. NEW WORK
1. Word Lists. The weekly lesson units for the fifth grade in the Mc-
call Speller include twenty-two new words except every fourth week when
twenty-seven review words are given. These are the basal words for the
grade.
2. Supplementary Lists. Such lists should be compiled according to
the plans already given in this course. The children should be held re-
sponsible for mastery of the list of words missed in their written work,
and be encouraged to include in their writing vocabulary the words fre-
quently needed in written work but not given in the basal list for the grade.
The additional words given at the end of the work for the fifth grade in
the McCall Speller should not be given attention until after the children
have learned to spell the words of the basal list.
3. Special Exercises. The aids to spelling and dictation exercises in-
cluded in the work for the grade should be very helpful in fixing certain
correct forms, providing for the use of the dictionary and in working out
simple spelling rules.
4. Use of the Dictionary. In this grade, the child begins to definitely
turn to the dictionary when in doubt as to the spelling of a word needed
in his written work and for the correct pronunciation and syllabication of
words. He also makes a beginning under supervision in finding acceptable
meanings for a few carefully selected words and to use them properly in
sentences.
a. Continue the work outlined for the fourth grade. Teach alpha-
betizing to second and third letters. Give practice in finding words.
b. Give lessons in learning to use the key words at the bottom of the
specimen dictionary page in the spelling text. Explain the respelling
given in the dictionary to show pronunciation.
c. Give lessons in finding number of syllables in words, pronouncing
these, properly dividing words, and determining the proper accent.
Methods
The method of work is conditioned largely by the general plan of the
book being used. It is therefore quite essential for the teacher to under-
stand the plan of the text in order to adjust any scientific method to the
study of the words. Read carefully the discussion of methods given in
this course. During the first two weeks of the term the teacher should
spend time and effort in aiding the pupils in developing the correct study
habits, using the "Pupil's Guide for Studying Alone." It seems advisable to
use during these weeks the Study-Test Method or the Assignment-Test-
Study Method.
After the pupils have further developed the habits of study, and have
learned to study discriminately, they should be given the Test-Study
Method of work. This method has already been described, and is given in
detail in the spelling text. At all times, give attention to the development
of the correct study habits.
Plans and suggestions for reviews have already been given in this
course. Work for complete mastery of the reviews in the text, and of the
words in the "Word Hospital" section of the spelling notebooks, guiding
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 251
pupils to learn these through their own efforts. Constant attention should
be given to the words missed in written work. Continue to give individual
assistance in remedying errors in penmanship.
The spelling notebook and the class and individual record charts are
important aids in the teaching of spelling and should be used in the fifth
grade. These have been fully discussed.
The amount of time usually given to the work in spelling ranges from
seventy-five to one hundred minutes per week.
Testing
When achievement tests accompany the text, these should be used in
studying teaching efficiency and student learning. The teacher can devise
special tests from spelling scales as suggested in this course. These tests
may be given at the beginning and end of the school year. Ordinarily,
the words for this test should come from the words the student has had
or will have an opportunity for studying in this grade. Individual errors
from the results on the spelling scales and the student's demons should be
analyzed by the teacher, for the cause of the same. Simple rules may be
introduced to aid in clarifying some special difficulty existing. Pronunci-
ation difficulties should be studied in relation to spelling difficulties. Some-
times the silent letters in a word give trouble, for example: knife, know,
knew, write, wrote, wrinkle.
SIXTH GRADE
State Adopted Text: The McCall Speller, pages 62-80.
Objectives
The objectives set forth for the sixth grade spelling work should be
those already set forth for the spelling course. The furtherance of many
of the barely established habits of the previous grades should be a funda-
mental aim. Some of the more specific objectives especially applicable to
the sixth grade are:
1. To develop the ability to pronounce all words correctly, and to pro-
nounce new words correctly by seeking help from the dictionary.
2. To develop further spelling rules assigned to this grade. The ex-
tent to which this should be done should be in harmony with the
discussion already given on this topic.
3. To afford additional practice in dictionary exercises.
4. To establish more firmly the habit of listing words — either those
which give trouble, or those which the pupil wishes to add to his
vocabulary — and of making an attempt to learn them.
5. To establish more firmly the proper habits of study, including a
discriminative type of study, as is needed in the Test-Study Method
of this grade.
6. To strengthen the desire to spell correctly in all written work.
Content
A. REVIEW WORK
The most difficult words of the fifth grade list should be reviewed at
the beginning of the term. Plans for this review are given under this
head in the fourth and fifth grade outlines.
252 Course of Study for the
B. NEW WORK
1. Word Lists. The words to be given first consideration for mastery
are those of the basal list for this grade. The lesson units for the sixth
grade in the McCall Speller include twenty-two new words for each week
except every fourth week when twenty-seven review words are given.
Supplementary lists, as already discussed, would be made up of the
words most frequently needed in writing and words missed in the written
work. Give individual attention to all errors in written work.
The additional words given at the end of the work for the sixth grade
in the McCall Speller should not be studied by a pupil until he has learned
to spell the basal words for the grade.
2. Special Exercises. Continue to make the study exercises as given
in the text an integral part of the work.
Some further supplementary work which should be considered is that
of the names and abbreviations of the states. In the McCall Speller, these
are listed with other abbreviations on page 126. Ordinarily the pupil will
have realized a need for spelling and abbreviating the names of the states
by the time he has completed the sixth grade. These should receive at-
tention in proportion to the development of a need for them.
The homonyms encountered in the sixth grade should be reviewed and
exercises given connecting these with words met in previous grades that
are similar in pronunciation.
3. Use of the Dictionary. Develop in the pupils a reliance upon the
dictionary as an aid to spelling.
Follow the outlines given for the fourth and fifth grades.
Teach the diacritical marks as an aid in the use of the dictionary.
Use the frequent opportunities which arise to give practice in using
the dictionary as a spelling aid.
Give carefully supervised work in finding the meanings of a few words
and using them properly in sentences. Provide opportunities as the need
arises, for selecting appropriate meanings under careful supervision.
Methods
Teachers should study carefully the discussion of methods as given in
this course. The general plan of the text in use conditions to a large
extent the method of work. It is therefore essential for the teacher to
understand the plan of the text and the method recommended for teaching
the lesson units.
The Test-Study Method, as already described, and outlined in detail
in the McCall Speller, is recommended for this grade. By now, pupils
should have developed the correct study habits and should be able to use
the Test-Study Method effectively in dealing with their own difficulties as
revealed by the pretest. In case the pupils have not developed the correct
study habits, give specific practice in using the "Pupil's Guide for Studying
Alone" and seek to establish such habits during the first few weeks of the
term. With the reviews given in the text adhered to and the additional
plans for reviews suggested in this course, mastery of the words of the
basal list should be the goal. Attention throughout the year given to the
words missed in written work will aid in the realization of the test of
ability to spell — writing words correctly when needed. Handwriting diffi-
culties should continue to be eliminated.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 253
The plans already discussed for the pupil's spelling notebook should
be carried out. Individual and class record charts are also important aids
to progress in spelling in this grade.
The amount of time usually given to the work in spelling ranges from
seventy-five to one hundred minutes per week.
Testing
When achievement tests accompany the texts, these should be used in
studying teaching efficiency and student learning. The teacher can devise
special tests or use the standard scales as suggested on page 255. These
tests may be given at the beginning and end of the school year. Such
standard scales enable the teacher to better understand student learning,
as well as how her pupils compare with the average child of this grade.
Diagnosis of individual difficulties from results on the spelling scales and
the student's "spelling demons" should be made to aid the teacher in better
understanding special individual difficulties. Remedial measures should
be made in attempting to analyze such special individual difficulties. Some-
times a rule as introduced in the text will aid in- clarifying such difficulties.
Here the grouping of special types of errors present, along with easier
words, but having similar structure will often aid considerably.
SEVENTH GRADE
State Adopted Text: The McCall Speller, pages 82-104
Objectives
The objectives set forth for the seventh grade spelling work should
be those already set forth for the course. The furtherance of many of
the barely established habits of the previous grade should be a funda-
mental aim. Some of the more specific objectives especially applicable to
the seventh grade are:
1. To develop the ability to pronounce words correctly, and to use the
dictionary in furthering this ability.
2. To develop the habit of using the dictionary to aid in spelling difficult
words encountered.
3. To develop the ability to add new words to one's writing vocabulary
as they are needed to express one's individual interests.
4. To develop a pride in correct spelling and an appreciation of its
value.
5. To firmly establish the habits directly connected with the spelling
words for this grade.
Content
A. REVIEW WORK
At the beginning of the term, review the most difficult words of the
sixth grade list. Suggestions for this review are given in the fourth and
fifth grade outlines in this course.
B. NEW WORK
1. Word Lists. The list of words for this grade given in the spelling
text are the basal words for mastery. The lesson units in the McCall
Speller include twenty-five new words for each week except every fourth
week when twenty-seven review words are given.
254 Course of Study for the
Suggestions and plans for the supplementary lists (1) words needed
frequently in writing, and (2) words missed in written work, are discussed
fully in the first part of this course.
The additional words given at the end of the list for the seventh grade
in the McCall Speller are included from an eighth grade list, and should
not be given attention until after the basal list has been thoroughly studied.
2. Special Exercises. Attention is again called to the use of the valu-
able exercises given as aids to spelling in the McCall text.
Further supplementary work which may be included in this grade is
the study of abbreviations as listed on page 127 of the McCall Speller.
The extent to which these words should be incorporated into the spelling
work will depend upon the development of the meaning and need on the
part of the pupils for them.
The homonyms encountered in the seventh grade should be reviewed,
and dictation exercises given connecting them with the words previously
learned that are similar in pronunciation.
3. Use of Dictionary. The work outlined for the fourth, fifth, and
sixth grades should be reviewed and carried on throughout the year, in
order to enable all pupils to use the dictionary properly, and to develop
the habit of using it. Such a habit will cause the child to turn inde-
pendently to the dictionary when in need of help, and contributes to his
continuous growth in ability to write correctly and effectively. Very help-
ful exercises in the use of the dictionary are given in "Spelling for Every-
day Use, Book Two."*
Methods
Modern spelling texts seek to carefully and scientifically arrange the
work of the course by grades and it is very essential for the teacher to
understand the general plan of the text in use and the method of study
recommended. At the beginning of the term, go over carefully the "Pupil's
Guide for Studying Alone," rising the steps in presenting several words, as
there are likely to be some pupils in the class who have not established
the habit of using this plan in studying a word.
The Test-Study Method, as already described and given in the McCall
Speller, should be used in the seventh grade. Continue attention to correct
habits of study. The pupils in this grade should be able to use the Test-
Study Method in an economical and effective way, working on their indi-
vidual needs, and through their own efforts mastering the words which
prove difficult.
The plans for reviews given in the spelling text are to be supplemented
throughout the year with systematic reviews of the words in the "Word
Hospital" section of the pupil's spelling notebook, and of the words missed
in written work, according to the suggestions already given in this course.
Hold pupils responsible for correct spelling in their written work. When
a good, legible handwriting has not been established, seek to eliminate the
difficulties.
Throughout the year, have all pupils keep spelling notebooks as sug-
gested in this course. These are a most important aid in learning to spell.
Tabulate from these notebooks the errors common to .the class, giving learn-
^Steadman-Garrison-Bixler. Published by Smith-Hammond Co., Atlanta, Ga.
•Elementary Schools of North Carolina 255
ing and testing periods on the words. In addition, see that pupils by their
own efforts master their difficulties.
In this grade, the pupils will take great interest in keeping their indi-
vidual scores on the record cards and in serving as Class Record Keeper
in recording the progress of the class.
The amount of time usually given to the work in spelling ranges from
seventy-five to one hundred minutes per week.
Testing
When achievement tests accompany the texts, these should be used in
studying teaching efficiency and student learning. Standardized scales are
very effective as means for making comparisons with other seventh grade
groups. Diagnosis of individual difficulties from results on the spelling
scales and the student's "spelling demons" should be made to aid the
teacher in better understanding special individual difficulties. Remedial
measures should be made in attempting to analyze such special individual
difficulties. An application of a rule may aid here. Homonym exercises
might be of value in connection with such difficulties. Errors resulting
directly from: Presence of double letters; presence of alternatives; un-
phonetic quality of the word; or a careless attitude should be carefully
observed and efforts made to eliminate such errors from the individual's
list.
BIBLIOGRAPHY FOR THE TEACHER
Books and Materials
Third and Fourth Yearbooks of the Department of Superintendence. National Education
Association.
Sixteenth Yearbook, Part I, and the Eighteenth Yearbook, Part II, of the National Society
for the Study of Education. Public School Pub.
Breed: How to Teach Spelling. Owen.
Garrison and Garrison: Psychology of Elementary School Subjects. Johnson.
Tidyman: The Teaching of Spelling. World.
Reed: Psychology of Elementary School Subjects. Ginn.
The Classroom Teacher. Vols. II and VII. The Classroom Teacher, Inc.
Trabue and Stevens: Spelling as a School Subject (bulletin). Row.
Word Lists and Scales
Kircher : The Vocabulary of Thirty-seven Primers and First Readers. Twenty-fourth
Yearbook of the Society for the Study of Education, Part I. Public School Pub.
Horn: A Basic Writing Vocabulary (1926). University of Iowa.
Horn, Packer, and Horn: The Commonest Words in the Spoken Vocabulary of Children,
up to and Including Six Years of Age. Twenty-fourth Yearbook of the Society for the Study
of Education, Part I. Public School Pub.
Gates: A Reading Vocabulary for the Primary Grades. Teachers College.
Thorndike: The Teacher's Word Book. Teachers College.
Ayres: Measuring Scale for Ability in Spelling. Russell Sage Foundation.
The Buckingham Extension of the Ayres Spelling Scale. Public School Pub.
The Iowa Spelling Scales. Public School Pub.
The Morrison McCall Spelling Scale. World.
Bixler Standard High School Spelling Scale. Smith.
Recent Spelling Texts
McCall Spellers. Laidlaw.
Steadman, Garrison, Bixler: Spelling" for Everyday Use. Smith.
Trabue: Stevens Spellers. Row.
Breed: French Spellers. Lyons.
Modern Methods Speller by Kyte. Silver.
New Horn: Ashbaugh Speller. Lippincott.
HEALTH
PART ONE: INTRODUCTION
I. What is the Relationship or Value of the Health Objective to
Other Objectives of Elementary Education?
Health maintenance has come to be regarded as one of the most im-
portant aims and activities of school life. Health is the recognized es-
sential by which the individual effects proper and satisfying adjustments
necessary to making a living, acquiring knowledge, attaining the status of
good citizenship, reaching a higher morality, and achieving happiness.
Dr. W. S. Rankin has well expressed this relationship to the whole of life
in this manner:
"First, health largely determines the factors of interest and en-
durance.
"Second, interest and endurance largely determine efficiency.
"Third, efficiency during youth, in studies and games; and during
maturity, in the more serious tasks of life, largely determines happiness.
"Fourth, happiness largely determines disposition and attitude."
Acceptance of the fact that only the healthy personality is capable of
achieving the highest physical, intellectual, and spiritual attainment, forces
upon one the conclusion that realization of all of the objectives of education
depends to a large extent upon the degree to which the health objective is
reached. Any aim is more successfully realized when a definite means
for reaching that end has been at least tentatively agreed upon; there-
fore, there is a need for a health education program, which seeks defi-
nitely to promote and organize the sum total of the experiences in the
child's life in such a way that they will bring about the establishing of
such habits, the formation of such attitudes, and the mastery of such
knowledges as contribute to the best physical and mental health.
II. What Definite General Objectives Should the School Seek to
Attain in Order That Pupils May Maintain or Achieve
Health?
A. Give the child such information about health as will interest and aid
him in protecting and improving his own health and that of others.
B. Provide for every pupil such experiences as will develop an appreci-
ation of health which demands of each pupil a respect for the welfare
of his native physical and mental endowment and that of others, and
which will lead to the setting up of a positive health ideal.
C. Establish such positive health behavior as will exclude less desirable
substitute activities.
D. Safeguard the health of child through physical examinations, cor-
rections, and inspection and through the creation of a wholesome,
healthful environment.
E. Provide wholesome, healthful forms of recreation that will lead to long
and varied growth in means of refreshing the body and mind.
258 Course of Study for the
F. Arrange for a maximum of opportunity for the practice of good citizen-
ship, sportsmanship, leadership, and satisfying happiness in a wide
range of purposeful activities.
G. Seek to influence parents and other adults to become interested in the
improvement of their own health environment, habits, and attitudes.
H. Make such practical plans as will "improve the individual and com-
munity life of the future; insure a better second generation, and a still
better third generation; a healthier and fitter race."
References: Health Behavior — Wood and Lerrigo. Pub. School Pub. $2.00.
What Range of Health Objectives — Kilpatrick. Public School Nurse, September
1925. 35^.
III. What Fundamental Principles Underlie the Construction and
Administration of the Health Program?
A. The beginning point is the child whose life is characterized by the fol-
lowing four integral phases in which there is normally a continuous
unifying and expanding growth:
1. Physical — what he does and what habits he forms.
2. Emotional — how he feels about things and what attitudes become
apparent.
3. Intellectual — what judgments he makes, what applications of his
knowledge, what attitudes and knowledge are acquired.
4. Social — what habits, attitudes, and knowledge are gained that affect
his group, his family, his community, and his social health.
B. Experience and scientific research have led to the conclusion that the
child has two sets of health needs:
1. Those related to health maintenance and protection for the present.
2. Those related to natural physical and mental growth or develop-
ment.
C. The method of approach to health should be positive rather than nega-
tive, emphasizing health not disease, and should be based for the
greater part on the child's interest in his own growth; therefore,
1. "Selection of subject matter should emphasize the wholesome ob-
jective aspects of health rather than the introspective, pathalogical,
or morbid.
2. "Wholehearted purposeful activities should be guided so that the
child obtains the most desirable by-products in attitudes and emo-
tional habits."
D. The child should be given responsibility in the conduct of the health
program as rapidly as practicable.
E. The child should not be held responsible for the maintenance of health
conditions over which he has no control.
F. The tendency of the pupil to imitate is so strong that the health status
and the health practices of the teacher will have a definite effect upon
the health-training of the child.
G. The development of mental health or wholesome emotional stability is
not to be sought through the discussion of this subject and the subject
of sociology which is outside the interest of the child and likely to
suggest the negative as well as the positive phases of the subject. It is
to be sought by the organization and presentation of the general pro-
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 259
gram of school life in such a way that children will be provided an
opportunity
1. To achieve and experience the satisfaction of success.
2. To get proper rest and relaxation.
3. To train in concentration of attention so as to promote an orderly
association of ideas.
4. To express themselves in many forms.
5. To practice effective action when necessary.
6. To have normal social relationships.
7. To enjoy an atmosphere of the school and home that is attractive,
happy, joyous, and optimistic.
H. Since school life constitutes at the most only one-third of the whole
of the child's day, to realize in any adequate fashion the health aims
demands that health promotion be thought of as a cooperative effort
of the school, home, and community. Therefore, all situations, activities,
and materials constituting phases of health education should be utilized
in such a way as to contribute to the child's life as a unit of experience
which affects favorably his intellectual, emotional, physical, and social
make-up and conduct as it expresses itself in his whole life.
I. The final and only legitimate test of the value of any health education
is the degree to which it contributes to growth in desirable forms of
health behavior manifested in the whole life of the child.
References: 1925 — Report of the Chicago Health Conference. A. C. H. A.
1930 — Report of the Sayville Health Conference. A. C. H. A. (in press).
1924 — Report of the Cambridge Health Conference. A. C. H. A.
Health Education. Joint Report N. E. A. and A. M. A., 1924, 1930. $1.25.
School Health Progress. A. C. H. A. Conference, 1929. $1.00.
Teachers and Health Education, 1929. A. C. H. A.
The Classroom Teacher, Vols. 1, 5, 8, 12.
The Laws of Health and How to Teach Them — Winslow and Williamson. Mer-
rill. $1.60.
IV. What Elements Are Involved in the School Health Program?
A. AN UNDERSTANDING OF THE QUALITIES OF A HEALTHY
PERSONALITY
"Health," as defined by Dr. Thomas D. Wood, is "an abundance,
soundness, and worthiness of life." Abundance is interpreted as mean-
ing vitality, joy, and interest; soundness as possessing normal mentality
capable of economic support of oneself; worthiness as contributing to
moral and social good. True tests of well-being require a careful
physical examination by a trained person and should reveal "proper
growth in weight, height, structural and functional development," and
"full efficiency" of the muscular, nervous, mental, emotional, glandular,
nutritive, circulative, respiratory, excretory, and reproductive functions
with "abundant energy for all the activities of life and some reserve
for unusual strains." Among the simple indices of the physically and
mentally healthy personality set up by the Joint Committee on Health
Problems in Education (1924) are found the following characteristics
easily recognized by the teacher:
"The healthy child is largely unconscious of his body. He has
a general sense of well-being, a feeling of muscular power and of
pleasure in movement. He is not conscious of the vital organs.
When a child is in pain, or in ill health, on the other hand, he be-
260 Course of Study for the
comes conscious of parts of his body, which so far as he knew
before might have been non-existent.
"He possesses sufficient vigor so that a reasonable amount of
work and play is more stimulating than fatiguing.
"His appetite is steady, wholesome and not capricious.
"He sleeps well, and during the normal regular hours of sleep,
he recovers satisfactorily from fatigue.
"He is able to adapt himself to new conditions of environment,
climate, or modes of life without undue physiologic disturbances.
"To picture the healthy mental, emotional, moral and social
qualities of the child is to describe the healthy personality. In de-
scribing the characteristics of a healthy personality, it is desirable
to allow for a variety and range of individual differences. To be
well-balanced it is not necessary to suppress one's individual quali-
ties, or to conform to a uniform pattern. It is nevertheless useful,
keeping this in mind, to describe the simplest and most significant
evidences of a healthy personality. They are as follows:
"The child possesses intelligence adequate to meet the demands
of his life. This includes the whole range of intelligence from very
superior to somewhat below the average. Some very healthy person-
alities are found among those whose intelligence is inferior to the
average, but is nevertheless sufficient to meet the demands of their
simple lives of manual work.
"He is able to concentrate his attention upon the matter before
him, and to perceive the important elements of the situation with
accuracy and alertness.
"He is interested in the world about him, and curious to under-
stand it.
"He is generally self-confident; he expects success and achieves
it with reasonable frequency.
"He is accive in overcoming difficulties; he does not "day dream"
so much that he fails to meet the actual situation.
"His predominating emotional qualities are happiness, cheerful-
ness, courageousness. He is not troubled by unnecessary fears, shy-
ness, or timidity. His emotional responses are those that are appro-
priate and useful for the occasion.
"He does not ordinarily brood or sulk, or indulge in morbid
introspection.
"He has many objective interests; friends, hobbies, games in
which he finds adequate self-expression.
"He is companionable and mingles easily with other children.
He adapts himself easily to cooperative enterprises; to leadership
or followship.
'The child's relationships with children of the opposite sex are
wholesome.
"He has a sense of responsibility for the happiness and well-
being of his friends, school mates and members of his family."
Refere-nces: Emerson — Diagnosis of Health. Appleton. $3.00.
Signs of Health in Childhood. Hugh Chaplin. 20?. A. C. H. A
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 261
B. KNOWLEDGE OF THE FUNDAMENTAL PHYSIOLOGICAL AND
PSYCHOLOGICAL LAWS OF GROWTH
1. Physiological Principles
It is obviously impossible to summarize here even the most funda-
mental scientific facts in the field of physiology, sanitation, and hygiene
upon which health instruction is based. The teacher should get these
in her own basic training and from the source material suggested in
the list of references below. In the grade by grade outlines an attempt
has been made to present the habits, attitudes, and knowledge units to
be stressed at the respective age levels.
References: Health Education — A Program for Public Schools and Teacher-Training Insti-
tutions. Joint report N. E. A. and A. M. A., 1924 and 1930 (in press).
Wood-Lerrigo — Health Behavior, pp. 5-18. Public School Pub.
Fisher and Fiske — How to Live. Funk. $2.0U.
The National Health Series — per set, $6.00; per volume, 300 net. National Health
Council, 370 Seventh Ave.
Armstrong, D. B. — Community Health; How to Obtain and Preserve It.
Bigelow, Maurice A. — Adolescence; Educational and Hygienic Problems.
Blatz and Bott — Parents and the Pre-School Child. Macmillan.
Chappelear, Claude — Health Subject Matter in the Natural Sciences. Teachers
College Bureau of Publications. $1.50.
DeNormandie, R. L. — The Expectant Mother; Care of Her Health.
Frankel, Lee K. — Health of the Worker; How to Safeguard It.
Galloway, T. W. — Love and Marriage; Normal Sex Relations.
Gillett, Lucy H.— Food for Health's Sake; What to Eat.
Haggard, Howard — What You Should Know About Health and Disease. Harper.
Bros., 1928, New York. School Edition, $4.00.
Howell, W. H. — The Human Machine; How the Body Functions.
Laird and Muller— Sleep. John Day Co., 1930. $2.50.
McLaughlin, Allan J. — Personal Hygiene; The Rules of Right Living.
Meanes, Lenna L. — Exercises for Health.
Noyes, Clara D. — Home Care of the Sick.
Shaw, Henry L. K. — The Young Child's Health.
Snow, W. F. — Venereal Diseases; Their Medical, Nursing and Community
Aspects.
Tobey, James A.- — The Quest for Health; Where it is and Who Can Help
Secure It.
Williams, Frankwood E. — Your Mind and You; Mental Health.
Winslow, C. E. A. — A Man and the Microbe; How Communicable Diseases Are
Controlled.
Wood, Thomas D.— The Child in School; Care of Its Health.
Wood, Thomas D. and Lerrigo, Marion O. — Teaching How to Get and Use
Human Energy. Bloomington, 111. Public School Publishing Co., 1928. 750.
Virginia Health Manual for Teachers. Office of Publication, 12 and Bank St..
Richmond, Va.
A List of Books for Parents and Teachers. John Day Co., 386 Fourth Avenue,
New York City.
2. Psychological Principles
a. Growing is learning a new and desirable way of behaving and
results in a changed organism which has a new set of habits,
skills, facts, insights, and attitudes that increase the individual's
knowledge of and control over life: therefore, the school health
program should aim to bring about a new and desirable pro-
gressive health behavior.
b. The child is an integrated organism which normally develops
gradually and harmoniously in his physical, psychic, and social
make-up. During the span of life known as the elementary
school age, however, there appear to be three well-defined levels
of development having fairly typical characteristics — the kinder-
garten-primary, the intermediate, and the early adolescent.
c. Normally the child will want and choose to do those things which
appeal to and involve the physical, mental, emotional, and social
responses characteristic of his level of development which is a
combination of his natural tendencies and his experiences; there-
fore, child desires, interests, and purposes leading to worthy
ends should be given consideration in choice of health activities.
262 Course of Study for the
d. The realization of the child's purposes must call for skills and
knowledge beyond his present achievement so that he will be
challenged to make genuine effort, but the degree of skill and
requisite facts needed must be sufficiently easy for him to have
a measure of satisfying success; therefore, the teacher must
watch carefully to make the program of activities really suit the
needs of child and situation.
e. Not only must there be difficulty that will challenge, and a
sufficient number of old elements to insure some success, but
there must also be in these purposes and activities ever-increas-
ing insights and ever-increasing controls over life experiences so
that more wholesome and wider health interests for himself and
the community are ever developing.
f. The quantity and quality of growth possible for each individual
are determined by (1) the child's physical and mental heritage,
(2) the child's social or environmental heritage, (3) the child's
training or education. Since all of these factors vary for each
individual, each individual's capacity for and rate of growth is
different; therefore, the use of same stimuli will not be equally
effective with all, nor can the same results be reasonably ex-
pected of all.
g. In developing mastery and control the individual proceeds from
the relatively simple activity requiring coarser coordinations and
associations to the coordinations and associations involving fine
connections, from the simplest concept to a highly generalized
notion, from instinctive to idealistic and reason-controlled action;
therefore, the teacher should not only be familiar with the health
needs, native health-developing capacities, but she should also
know the relative difficulties of graded activities.
h. The individual learns many things simultaneously and it is im-
portant that the so-called "concomitant learnings" be as care-
fully guided as the achievement of the specific immediate aim.
The best results for growth along all lines — habits, skills, fact —
mastery, insights, and attitudes are obtained where opportunities
and needs for these are seen and utilized in a real social^ setting.
The more stimulating the environment and the more judicious
the guidance given, all things being equal, the more favorable
the learnings. The social situations which give opportunities
for inculcating wholesome health behavior and which run
throughout the child's day are those connected with eating, sleep-
ing, clothing, bathing, exercise, resting, emotional reaction, and
social health.
In connection with the application of these principles teachers have
listed the following incentives, purposes, and interests as successful
centers of work about which successful health teaching has developed:
Desire to grow
Desire for approval from one's social group
Desire to imitate those one admires
Desire to earn recognition for worthwhile accomplishment
Desire to participate in outdoor sports (skating, swimming, coasting, hiking,
fishing, hunting and camping)
Desire to win in competition
Desire to do grown-up things
Desire to be helpful at home and at school
Desire to succeed in playground and gymnasium activities
Desire to earn membership and improved standing in Boy Scouts, Girl Scouts,
and similar organizations
Desire to improve record in athletic events
Desire to be a worthy citizen
Babies Clubs
Care of dolls — housekeeping Collecting things
Duties Dramatization
Community centers Drawing and painting
Concerts Poster making
Class and school loyalty Debates
Cooking Excursions
Cartoons Exercises
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 263
Folk dances Pictures
Free expression Possession or acquisition
Father's occupation Policeman, firemen, engineers, etc.
Games and toys Radio
Group competition Reading
Handling things — manipulation Repairing things .
Health magazines School and building activities
Keeping a diary Slides (pictures)
Machinery School newspaper
Making things Styles
Movies Seasons
Music Sewing
Nature (animals, vegetables, minerals) Stories
Other children Safety council
Parents, brothers, sisters Saving or thrift
Perfect attendance Scrapbooks
Puppet shows School fund
Parties School orchestra
Personal appearance Writing original plays and stories
Physical activity Writing poetry-slogans
Play in and out of doors
References: Thorndike and Gates — Elementary Principles of Education. Macmillan. $2.00.
Kilpatrick — Foundations of Method. Macmillan. $2.00.
Wood and Cassidy — The New Physical Education. Macmillan. $2.00.
School Health Progress, 1929. A. C. H. A. $1.00.
Myers and Byrd — Health and Physical Education. Doubleday. $2.00.
Norswortby and Whitley — Psychology of Childhood.
The Classroom Teacher, Vols. 1, 5, 8, 12. Classroom Teacher, Inc.
Report of the Cambridge Health Education Conference, 1924. A. C. H. A.
Miller — Creative Teaching and Learning. Scribner's. $1.60.
Report of the Chicago Health Education Conference, 192S. A. C. H. A. 75**
It was constructed of rock and cement practically all, f or a .depth of & %
to 3 feet being built below the level of the ground. A drain pipe leads
from th 'cement bottom to a small stream nearby. In this pool we put
goldfish, tadpSies, water hyacinths, ferns, and lilies. Different kinds of
flowers will be planted around the pool.
In addition to the playground activities mentioned ™ h aveteken part
in the school recreation program throughout the year. A number of new
games have been learned and we are now giving attention to various lolk
fame* taken from the North Carolina Bulletin on Physical Education.
Th?se are taught by using the victrola and the children are very enthusi-
astic in learning them.
Evidences of improvement in the following have been noticed:
1. Interest in appearance of person, home, and school.
2. Interest in scientific information about health.
3*. Faithful performance of health habits.
4. Conduct at table.
5. Interest in outdoor activity. . -i nnl .\,**
6. Interest and cooperation of parents— especially for hot lunches.
7. Gain in weight for all except one member o± class.
3. Living Health in the Fourth Grade:*
On the first day of school, September the ninth, thirty-seven Parents
eithe?sent or brought their sons and daughters to my room to enter school.
Out of this number twenty were underweight from two to eleven pounds
Eleven had ?our plus tonsils; eight more had. three plus; and one could
Se from only one P eye (a fact which the parents of the child had^not dis-
covered). One boy who was starting in the grade for the fourth time
could not see anything at all from any seat in the room, due to crossed
eves Nearly half of them needed dental treatment; and one boy had two
hemorrhages within the first month of school. These were some of the
St^flearned about from personal observation and doctor's .examin-
ation I was to teach those children to read, to write, to woik mdepend
^or'nearry^ne moSh we studied health stores, wrote health rhy^
and made health posters, before the class decided to check its own health
habits We did this for several days and found that less than one-third
of the children were having milk, more than half were drinking tea and
coffee oX ten were getting the right amount of sleep, and less than half
were Csning "teeth or possessed toothbrushes These > facts started j>ur
campaign. The group decided on the ten health rules they felt were mos
important Each child received a new chart each week and a check was
made' at the close of each day. The rules as developed by the children
were, "The Rules of the Game." (A. C. H. A.)
Many means were used to make it easier for the game to be put into
practice We sent numerous letters to parents. Parents' meetings were
•Adapted from report of Mrs. C. Parker Poole, Benvenue School, Nash County.
334 Course of Study for the
held in the room when the mothers were asked to make talks along this
line. Of course the material for these discussions was made available by
the teacher. Parents were asked to help the child check on Saturday and
Sunday, as the other checking was done at school. They were visited,
every one of them, and asked to help in many ways, especially in providing
toothbrushes and assisting with baths. Each parent was asked to send a
small mayonnaise jar filled with some kind of vegetable, soup or cocoa,
in the child's lunch. This they did very gladly. These vegetables were
placed in a large vessel with a small amount of water, over a hot-plate.
This provided children with a hot dish for lunch, and also made certain
that they were eating vegetables.
We helped establish the habit of hand-washing before meals by doing
it in our room every day before lunch. Our lavatory facilities were not
at all adequate, so we purchased a large oil can to hold liquid soap, a
gallon pot with funnel attached for the water, a ten-quart bucket to catch
the waste water. The soap and paper towels were furnished by the school.
With the help of three captains, one to squirt soap, one to pour water,
and one to hand paper towels — we soon learned to have the hand-washing
for every one in the room in four minutes. The captains soon learned that
they must have everything in readiness for us.
The biggest problem was that of drinking milk. Was it right to score
them down when they could not get milk? We solved that problem by
asking the Parent-Teachers Association to furnish half of the cost of a
half pint of milk each day for each child. This they gladly did. We fur-
nished the other half. For a few months we bought the milk at greatly
reduced prices from one of the very best dairies. Even at reduced rates,
the bills began to grow larger and larger, both for the teacher and the
P. T. A. It was then that the grade mother and the teacher decided to
rent a tested jersey cow. The teacher furnished the rent and part of the
feed, and the grade mother and P. T. A. furnished the rest. Tlie grade
mother kept the cow and cared for the milk. It was sent to school each
morning on the school truck. One of the boys took charge of it. This
method reduced the cost from sixteen dollars per month to seven, as the
grade mother got enough milk to pay her for the feed she furnished.
Each morning at ten o'clock, just after our outdoor play period, the
captain of each table acted as hostess, and served the milk. Other cap-
tains — as dishwashers— cleared the tables, and washed and scalded the
cups, pitchers and bottles, and put them away. Our grade kitchen became
a very popular place, and afforded many opportunities for teaching cleanli-
ness and sanitation.
The results of such efforts are never entirely visible. However, by
actual weighing and measuring at the last of school we found that we
had reduced the underweights from twenty to two. Those two gained
three and four pounds respectively, but had started the year nine and
eleven pounds underweight. During the year we enrolled forty-nine, seven-
teen of which were repeaters. At the close of school there were only six
repeaters left for next year. Personal appearance improved. Every grade
acquired a hot-plate and had a hot dish for lunch. Hand-washing was
practiced throughout school.
GRADES FIVE, SIX, SEVEN
General Objectives:
To place a new emphasis on health habits previously set up in such a
manner as to result in deepened appreciation of their values.
To supply real reasons in the form of supporting information for the
practice of health habits.
To secure the interest and cooperation of the community in a well-
planned health program.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 335
General Procedures:
Read carefully suggestions for the lower grades to get some idea of
the child's probable school experiences in health. List these. Study care-
fully the probable interests of the children. List these.
Plan a survey of your class to determine what their actual health be-
havior is and what their needs are. This survey should include the fol-
lowing :
1. Health knowledge measured by
a. Informal tests based on concepts and habits set up for lower
grades, or
b. Standard tests such as the Gates-Strang, or
c. Both
2. Health status as shown by weighing and measuring results. (See
page 279.)
3. Health habits as revealed by
a. The record of teacher's observation
b. The child's record of another pupil's practices
c. The child's own report or diary (unsigned) covering the follow-
ing items and kept successively over a period of time:
(1) Dietary history
(2) Sleeping and resting history
(3) Exercise and play history
(4) Work or study history
(5) Illness history
(6) Temper tantrum or other emotional history
d. Cumulative reports from previous years if any (physical and
mental)
4. Results of a physical examination made by a physician or nurse if
possible, by a teacher if not. (Note: Teacher may get suggestions
for this from Buice, pages 315-319, also see pages 267, 273.)
5. Results of a survey of their interests as revealed by
a. Their participation in the above survey
b. Their conversations
c. Their reactions to a suggested list of possible activities such as
health clubs, competitive game tournament, etc.
With the cooperation of your pupils build up a health program for the
year which does the following things:
1. Emphasizes pupil responsibility for their own health habits and
those of others.
2. Emphasizes more of the "why" for health habits.
3. Centers about real health problems relating to the individual, the
school, and the community, e.g.:
a. Preventing an epidemic of mumps, colds, measles, sore throat, etc.
b. Planning a beautiful, healthful school
c. Equipping a playground
d. Setting up standards for a model grocery, market, dairy, water,
supply, etc.
4. Provides for cooperation with the community forces — P. T. A., Ki-
wanis, Rotary Club, etc.
5. Indicates the probable schedule of interests at regular times during
• the year:
a. The twice-a-year physical examination of the borderline cases
b. Monthly weighings
c. Regular class assemblies for such purposes as meetings of the
clubs (any type class prefers, such as The Little Mothers, Modern
336 Course of Study for the
Health Crusaders, Junior Safety Council, Junior Red Cross) to
take care of such items as need attention — cleanliness and neat-
ness of clothing, person, room, school building, toilets, or grounds
— nutritional matters — sleeping, resting, or play activity reports —
community health projects and problems — instruction along any
needed lines — mid-morning lunch for the real underweights.
(Caution: This period must be carefully guided and directed by
teacher so that health and citizenship habits, attitudes, and in-
formation really grow. The following questions are suggestive
of a profitable committee meeting discussion:
What conditions or factors in the school life can members of
the club handle?
What committees are needed and what are the duties of each?
What should be concentrated upon?
What sources of help can be called upon?
What information is needed if a wise procedure is followed?
What will constitute a wise procedure ? )
d. Notes dates of annual drives known as "Clean-Up Week," "Safety
First," "Thrift Week," "Swat-the-Fly Campaign," etc.
e. Suggests types of helpful devices in records, scrapbooks, ex-
cursions, drives, bulletin boards, posters, pageants, plays, equip-
ment. (Note: The text has excellent suggestions along this
line.)
f. Supplements the above with a list of probable possibilities for
health teaching in connection with other subjects or units of
experience. The following are suggestive:
(1) Arithmetic (scan text to find other applications) : Family and individual food
budgets; weight and height computations; measurements — pints and gallons;
miles walked; quarts, pecks, bushels, pounds in grocery store or farm units;
dates for weighing, measuring, and visiting the dentist; time of sleeping and
rising; proportion of the body that is water; percentage gain in weight; graphs
of individual and class gains; common fraction — multiplication in making re-
cipes to serve class, or other groups at parties or luncheons.
(2) Language (Note references to Open Door Language Series given under each
heading.) :
Clear, correct, courteous, well-modulated speech in all routine work and
special discussions or reports.
Prepared talks presented to class, other class, school assembly, P. T. A.,
or some civic organization proposing some needed changes to improve health
opportunities or to defend any right practice that is in question. For example:
"This school can and should introduce sanitary fountains." "This class can
and should become responsible for making the playground a safe place to play."
"We should have interclass field days for the upper grades," etc.
Cooperatively produced pageants and plays centering about health themes.
Correctly spelled, well-written, properly capitalized, telling titles for posters,
scrapbooks, news articles about health topics.
Well paragraphed, correctly spelled and punctuated, simple health rules,
news, etc., for the booklets kept.
Correctly written, charmingly and graciously but simply expressed letters
of invitation, regrets, and thanks in connection with favors extended by class
or by others to the class.
Clear business letters asking for health materials.
Opportunities for practice in writing direct discourses, paragraphing, etc.,
in connection with imaginative stories built around health themes. (To teach
language technicalities there should be thorough checking at the language hour.)
Diaries and child reports of all kinds should receive periodical comment on
form, neatness, correctness and charm of expression with suggestions for
improvement where needed.
(3) Reading (Scan all basal and supplementary readers listing health topics. Note
references given also in connection with instructional units.)
Any history, geography, or civic reading for information should be taken
care of as needed by the class to solve directly a health problem, answer
questions about which they are curious, or to gain information needed in unit
of experience not strictly health.
(4) Nature Study and Science and Civics: In these grades units of work will
cover equally these four fields, (e.g.: water supply, insect campaigns.)
See courses of study for these subjects, particularly those units concerned
with insects, bees, time, lighting, harvesting, making soap, soil, bacteria, yeast.
(5) History (This list may be expanded upon.) :
Heroes — Washington for posture, Nathan Hale as an athlete, Nathaniel
Greene for strength of body, Daniel Morgan for endurance, Daniel Boone for
love of out-of-doors, Roosevelt for improving on his natural endowment, Walter
Reed for contribution to knowledge of yellow fever, Dorothea Dix for mental
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 337
health service, Edward Jenner for mastering smallpox; pioneer life— com-
parison of health snares; Pilgrim's winter; life at Jamestown; Gold Rush;
Panama Canal; training of the Athenians and Spartans — Olympic games of
ancient history and today; Rome's contribution to cleanliness; noted scientists
and their contributors — inventions, medical discoveries, etc.
(6) Geography:
Study of wheat — food products; value of whole-wheat, bran, graham
bread, etc. ,
Study of sheep raising, cotton, flax, relative merits of woolen, cotton and
linen clothing.
Study of hogs, cattle, sheep, goats, fish, fowl — value and sources ot various
meats, cod liver oils, roe, canned goods.
Study of sugar industry — cane, maple, beet — full food-
Study of Mexico — rubber for weather protection.
Canada — outdoor sports.
Study of tobacco — harm to digestion, sleep, rest, growth.
Coffee — interference with digestion, sleep, rest, growth.
Transportation — help toward balanced and varied diet.
Mining — effect of insufficient fresh air and sunlight on lives of miners.
Manufacturing — effect of overwork, lack of fresh air, outdoor exercise on
workers; contribution to healthful, attractive clothing.
Independence and interdependenece of different states and nations for
foodstuffs.
(7) Spelling: Any words needed to edit newspaper, make poster, write diaries,
plays, pageants, songs, etc.
(8") Music: Such songs as the following taken from Progressive Music Series —
One Book Course suggest obvious uses: New Day; Good Morning; Sleep
Little Treasure; In Wooden Shoes; At Night When I Have Gone to Bed
Will You Come With Me; The Holiday; Bed in Summer; The Swing Song
The Stars; Dolly's Lullaby; The Little Owls; Winter Cheer; Early to Bed
The Farmer; A Spanish Dance; A Basque Lullaby; Betty and Billy; Harvest
Home; Slumber Song; Sweet and Low; Little Sister's Lullaby; Russian
Harvest Hymn, etc.
The regular Progressive Music and the Hallis-Dann Series (State adopted
texts) offer many more.
(9) Art: , ,
Posters with designs and drawings for drives and campaigns that conform
to art principles and really clarify a health ideal or idea. See "Art in the
Elementary School" — Mathias.
Illustrations for scrapbooks, newspapers, health records, etc. (Same
standards.)
Costumes for plays and pageants. (Same standards.)
Play movies. (Same standards.)
Health favors. (Same standards.)
At appropriate intervals take stock of the outcomes in habits, attitudes
and concepts. (See page 378.)
General References for the Teacher:
Buice — pp. 273-334.
Strang — Subject Matter in Health Education — 80-114. _
Methods of Health Instruction — Hoefer — Elizabeth McCormick Memorial Fund, Chicago.
Classroom Teacher — Vol. I, 5, 8, 12.
Science in the Service of Health — Downing. Longmans.
GRADE FIVE
Specific Objectives:
To work out a health program which will meet the needs of pupils who
have reached the point of wishing or being interested in knowing the
reason for the health habits they are practicing.
To train children in proper habits of living based upon their natural
interests.
To develop clear conceptions of such habits, attitudes and knowledges
as will best promote physical and mental health of children at this level
of development.
To enlist cooperation of parents.
338 Course of Study for the
Methods of Procedure and Suggested Standards for Outcomes:
I-A. Some suggested specific approaches and activities that relate par-
ticularly to the experiences — eating, sleeping, and elimination of
waste.
Class may draw up a list of food habits which will help grov/th
and a list of those which do not.
Class may prepare a chart demonstrating the travels of a car-
rot, roast, milk, etc., showing work of digestive and excretory tract
and circulatory system.
Treat the unsigned class diaries of the kinds of food which have
been consumed in the following ways:
1. Penalize undesirable foods — pickles, coffee, tea, coca-cola, be-
tween meal sandwiches and candy. (For undernourished and
those having extremely early breakfast there should be oppor-
tunity for eating. The selling of candy should be discouraged
by substituting wholesome foods.)
2. Star desirable foods — fruit, milk, eggs, cooked cereal, brown
bread.
Let class work in groups and set up a series of daily menus
having good food combinations. Illustrate pictorially. Use Home
Economics teachers, high school students, the County Home Agents,
and 4-H girls and boys.
Compare food diaries of those who grow most with those who
grow little.
Classify foods in diaries as "go material," "building material,"
"regulating materials," "growth materials."
Have a "100 per cent Food Liking Campaign" with a view to
popularizing such foods as cabbage, collards, canned tomatoes, etc.
Conduct animal-feeding experiment using rabbits, white rats or
guinea pigs.
Keep records of food eaten and weight gains.
Demonstrate proper handling of food — washing hands (page
391), washing and peeling fruit, refraining from handling an-
other's focd or eating food which has touched the floor or other
dirty object.
During lunch periods as nearly as possible arrange so that chil-
dren:
a. Wash hands before beginning.
b. Sit down to eat.
c. Eat slowly, chew thoroughly, and take small mouthfuls.
d. Drink water only when there is no food in the mouth.
e. Try to be as pleasant as possible.
f. Do not talk with food in the mouth.
g. Rest before and after if possible,
h. Take care of food waste, etc.
Discuss in class importance of water, its proper care, etc., the
rpgularity of evacuation.
Observe Temperance Day and Live-at-Home Week.
Prepare tests suggested in Section III, Part Two for checking
actual outcomes.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 339
I-B. Some desirable outcomes — habits, appreciations, and attitudes — that
should develop in connection with activities which relate to eating,
drinking, and the elimination of waste, with sources of supporting
information and illustrative material.
1. With reference to the state adopted basal text:*
Continues those set up for lower grades V-l-12
Drinks from the school or other public fountains
after running the water and so as not to touch
with lips V-58, 75, 78
Realizes that diet-and-exercise regulation of di-
gestion and elimination is better than the use
of medicines V-58-72, 73-92
Is interested in the foods that make for growth,
those that maintain strength and energy
V-13-21, 22-26, 35-50, 51-66, 67-72
Desires to eat at regular hours V-84-92
Desires to eat right foods and grow — eggs, fish,
meat, vegetables, milk V-84-92, 93-102
Avoids sweets and soft drinks between meals, and
tobacco, tea, coffee and alcohol in any form at all
times V-84-92, 142-147
Evaluates more critically advertisements of foods, drinks,
and tobacco products.
2. Additional Sources —
a. For the pUpil: O. D. L.— 172, 96; N. H. L.— Book I, Chaps.
Ill, IV, V, VI, VII, VIII, IX; H. S.— IV, IX, VIII; H. E.
D.— IV; H. A.— Book I, Chaps. XI, XII; Kaa the Snake—
Kipling; Far and Near — 43; Louis and Rowland — Silent
Reader— V-234.
b. For the teacher: Averill — 65-68, 194-228, 403; O. H. H. —
242-297; Crissey, The Story of Foods, XXIII, XXIV; Food,
Nutrition and Health — McCollum; Rose and Knowlton. Nu-
trition in an Elementary School — Bureau of Publications,
Teachers College; Set of Nine Charts on Food and Growth —
Bureau of Home Economics, Washington, D. C; School Room
Experiments With Tobacco — Anti-Cigarette Alliance of
America, 26 S. Detroit St., Xenia, Ohio; T. H. G. — 36-76,
76-90 ; Rose. Study of Nutrition Teaching in Fifth and Sixth
Grades — Teachers College Record, May, 1930; Alcohol: Its
Effect on Mind and Human Efficiency. Fisk. W. C. T. U., 15^;
The Use of Tobacco— Hall-Signal Press, 1730 Chicago Ave.,
Evanston, 111.; Reasons I Would Give My Brother for Let-
ting Cigarettes Alone. Walkin. W. C. T. U., 2^; Baseball
Pitching and Smoking— W. C. T. U., 2^; Patent Medicines-
American Medical Association, Dearborn St., Chicago, 111.,
15^*; L. O. H.— 3-31, 245-57. 268-87, 307-18, 58-75, 62-5;
H. E.— 71-72, 57; Buice: VIII, IX, XIII, 277; Stoddard, C.
F. The World's New Day and Alcohol. S. T. F., 15tf.
I-C. Some concepts that should be gained through activities related to
eating, drinking, and the elimination of body waste.
1. Those set up for lower grades but not yet fully understood.
2. To touch the drinking fountain with the mouth is unmannerly
and dangerous because there may be harmful disease bacteria
left or picked up.
3. The stomach is the fuel box for the body.
4. A sick stomach is an indication that the body needs some at-
tention.
"Turner-Collins. Health. D. C. Heath Co., Atlanta, Ga.
340 Course of Study for the
5. Protein foods help the body to grow and repair itself.
6. Milk, eggs, cheese, cocoa, meat, fish, beans, and peas, are pro-
teins.
7. Starches, sugar, and fats give children strength to run and
play.
8. Cereals and bread from wheat, oats, rye, and corn, macaroni
and spaghetti from wheat, potatoes, fruits, vegetables, and milk
furnish starches and sugars.
9. Cream, butter, and olive oil are fats.
10. Alcohol is not a real food although it burns up quickly.
11. Unused fats form a reserve for body emergencies.
12. Water helps to regulate digestion and supplies muscle, bone,
blood, and other body parts with their needs.
13. The coarse, stringy fibers of vegetables help to move the food
along the digestive tract.
14. Dark bread has the coarse fibers but white does not.
15. Plenty of vegetables will prevent need of medicines.
16. Milk and fresh vegetables help to prevent skin disease and
scurvy.
17. Prunes, peaches, apricots, and apples when dried are good
regulators.
18. The body needs iron to make good red blood which it does by
extracting the oxygen from the air through the lungs.
19. Carrots, spinach, lettuce, celery, eggs, prunes, raisins, apples
and oranges contain iron.
20. The body needs calcium for strong teeth and bones.
21. Milk, green leafy vegetables, and celery contain calcium.
22. The juices of the digestive tract change whatever the body can
use into the following substances: (a) sugar, dissolved in
water, (b) a soapy or fatty fluid, (c) dissolved growth ma-
terial substances, (d) salts in solution, (e) water, (f) vita-
mines.
23. The blood carries food substances to all parts of the body.
24. Eating too much or too little food sometimes injures the di-
gestive system.
25. Eating too fast and between meals may also have a harmful
effect.
26. Good manners create a pleasant situation which helps digestion.
27. Baked, boiled, or steamed foods are more healthful than fried.
28. If between-meal food is necessary, milk, bread, butter or fruit
is best.
29. Tobacco spoils the appetite.
30. Hard foods give the teeth necessary exercise..
31. Tea and coffee cannot take the place of food.
32. One can break a habit by the following means:
a. Make up the mind that one wishes the thing desired.
b. Practice the desired activity.
c. Allow no exception.
d. Do everything possible to strengthen the desire.
e. Use a substitute (e.g., cocoa instead of coffee or tea where
possible).
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 341
33. Alcohol is made by yeast plants growing in a liquid which con-
tains sugar.
34. A narcotic is a substance which puts one to sleep.
35. Alcohol is a narcotic and puts to sleep parts of the body if
taken in great quantity.
36. Studies show that memory is not so good, the muscles do less
work, the heart goes faster, and the body is more susceptible
to disease when alcohol is taken.
37. Morphine and opium are narcotics also.
38. Research shows that tobacco makes the heart work faster, the
muscles relax, and makes the vision less accurate and clear.
39. Tobacco affects the nervous system and heart. These in turn
affect growth and scholarship, because they spoil appetites.
40. Alcoholic practices increase chances for illness, fatigue, and
accidents.
41. Insurance and industrial companies do not consider a drinking
man a good risk.
42. Tobacco will keep away insects from seed, plants, and clothes.
43. Patent medicines often contain drugs and as a rule should be
taken only on the recommendation of a physician.
44. The foods which should appear in the diet each day are:
a. Milk, at least one pint, preferably one quart.
b. Two kinds of vegetables every day, preferably two besides
potatoes.
c. At least one kind of fruit each day, preferably two, one
fresh.
d. A whole grain cereal for breakfast.
e. Some hard bread to chew every day, preferably made from
flours not entirely deprived of bran coats.
f. A glass of water between each two meals, besides that on
rising in the morning.
g. Three meals according to a regular schedule.
45. Going without breakfast, eating candy and sweets between
meals, omitting milk from the diet interfere with growth.
46. Daily Food Score Card:
Milk— 4 glasses plus 20 points
Two servings vegetables, other than potato plus 20 points
One serving raw fruit or vegetable plus 20 points
Cooked cereal or other hot food for breakfast plus 20 points
Foods requiring thorough mastication (raw vegetables or
hard breads) plus 20 points
Teas or coffee minus 20 points
Candy between meals minus 20 points
Weiners or pickles, or coca-cola minus 20 points
47. Breakfast is necessary to supply morning energy, lunch to
supply afternoon energy.
48. Tea and coffee usually displace milk, a complete food, and over-
stimulate young nerves.
49. Indigestion is sometimes caused by being worried or excited.
50. The stomach contains gastric juice which dissolves meat, fish,
and other proteins.
51. The intestines contain pancreatic and intestinal juices which
dissolve starches and sugars.
52. Plenty of water in the digestive tract helps to wash along the
food.
342 Course of Study for the
53. Regular evacuation is an aid to elimination.
54. Milk, vegetables, and cereals help build strong teeth. This
needs careful attention while growing the permanent teeth.
II-A. Some suggested specific approaches that relate to sleeping and
resting.
At 2:30 or other needed times, introduce relief periods of stretch-
ing and relaxation for the formal schedule. This is not necessary
in the flexible program where physical activity is the rule rather
than the exception.
Class may formulate a list of habits of rest and sleep which
promote growth and those which retard.
Conduct a Sleep-Long-Hours-Campaign when needed.
Demonstrate correct bed-making.
Demonstrate correct lying position.
Check actual outcomes in habits, concepts, and attitudes (page
378).
II-B. Some desirable outcomes — habits, appreciations, and attitudes — that
should be formed in connection with activities related to sleeping
and resting with sources of supporting information and illustrative
materials.
1. With reference to the basal text:
Those set up for lower grades (see previous
outlines ) V, 1-12
Eats a light meal before sleeping V, 148-156
Spends a short quiet period before sleeping V, 148-156
Relaxes completely during all rest periods at home
and at school . V, 148-156
Airs bed-clothing each morning V
Realizes and appreciates the importance of sleep,
rest, and relaxation as aids to efficiency and a
good disposition V, 148-156
Realizes that outdoor exercises and play helps
toward good sleep and rest V, 155, 167-169, 172-178
Sleeps so as to avoid a draft V, 148-156
Avoids tea, coffee, or alcohol V, 158
2. Additional Sources —
a. For the pupil: O. D. L.— 96; N. H. L.— Book I, Chaps., XVI,
XVIII; H. H.— X; H. E. D.— Ill; H. S.— XXIX.
b. For the teacher: O. H. H.— 236, 260, 294; L. 0. H.— 99-35;
H. P. E.— 38-46; H. B.— 60; Averill— XIV, IX.
II-C. Some concepts that should be gained in connection with activities
related to sleeping and resting.
1. Those previously set up.
2. The heart continues to work while one is asleep.
3. The digestive organs continue to work while one sleeps.
4. A light meal is more easily digested; therefore, the heart and
stomach have less work to do.
5. Sleep is necessary for growth and repair.
6. Grown-ups have only to repair but children have both; there-
fore, they require more hours.
7. Quiet before bedtime helps one to relax and be ready to sleep
immediately upon retiring.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 343
8. Sleeping long hours helps to gain weight.
9. Sleeping long hours helps to eliminate a cross disposition.
10. Tea and coffee are not real foods and tend to stimulate the
nervous system so as to interfere with sleep.
11. The nervous system governs all organs and causes them to
work together.
12. Rest, relaxation, and sleep are necessary to keep muscles and
nervous system up to the best.
13. Late bedtime and lack of fresh air retard growth.
III-A. Some suggested specific approaches and activities that relate to
making a good appearance through good posture and neatness and
cleanliness of person, clothes, and environment.
Pupils may assume responsibility for inspection work in their
regular class organizations covering the following as class and
individual needs demand: clean teeth, neckties tied, buttons on and
fastened, clean face, neck, ears, handkerchiefs, hands, nails, polished
shoes, brushed hair.
Make a microscopic study of skin.
Class or teacher or both may prepare a cleanliness question-
naire. A suggestive one is as follows:
Did you wash your hands before breakfast this morning?
Did you wash your hands immediately after using the toilet
this morning?
Did you use soap and warm water when washing your hands ?
Did you clean your finger nails this morning?
Did you take a cleansing bath at least twice within the past
week?
Did you wash your face, neck and ears thoroughly with warm
water and soap yesterday?
Did you rinse and dry your skin thoroughly yesterday?
Did you use cold water on your face, neck and chest and
then rub with a rough towel this morning?
Did you use your own towel and washcloth this morning?
Did you brush and comb your hair this morning?
Did you use your own clean comb and brush?
Did you wash your hair and rinse it thoroughly within the
last two weeks?
(The children answer "Yes" or "No" to the questions — prob-
ably the replies should be unsigned.)
Boys may construct home-made showerbaths or class may have
them installed as a special class project. A useful nail file may be
developed from the handle of an old toothbrush by filing it down
to a point.
A class "beauty parlor" might be a useful project.
Study styles in hair cuts and select becoming ones. Illustrate
for class members. Study styles in cloth fabrics which are best
suited to the season's characteristic weather.
Work up an exhibit of poor clothing, as tight garters, high-
heeled shoes, tight neckbands, tight waists, very long skirts. Indi-
344 Course of Study for the
cate the unhealthful results. House and school furnishings may be
treated in the same way.
Check for growth and needs in all the learnings.
III-B. Some desirable outcomes — habits, appreciations, and attitudes, that
should be formed in connection with activities related to making a
good appearance — posture and cleanliness and neatness in person,
clothing and environment with supporting information and illus-
trative materials.
1. With reference to the state adopted basal text:
Those set up for lower grades V, 103-111, 1-12
Washes feet regularly and keeps nails in good
order V, 127-134
Wears clean hose, and comfortable clothing V, 127-134
Massages the scalp by vigorous rubbing and
brushing V, 110-111
Wears rubbers out-of-doors during bad weather V, 133
Removes rubbers indoors V, 133
Speaks clearly and distinctly.
Listens carefully.
Wears shoes that fit the framework of the foot V, 130, 110
Keeps shoes clean and polished.
Keeps nose clean V, 110
Holds a sturdy upright posture V, 112-119, 120-126
Stands and walks with toes straight ahead V, 129
Has added appreciation of a clean skin V, 105
Has added appreciation of the value of exercising
to the point of perspiring V, 105
2. Additional Sources —
a. For the pupil: O. D. L. — 40, 53, 85; N. H. L.— Book I, Chaps.
XI, XII, XIII, XVII, XX; H. H.— Book I, Chaps. I, XIII,
XIV, V; H. E. D.— IX, VI; Rikki-Tikki-Tavi— Kipling; Father
Wolf — Kipling.
b. For the teacher: Graded Classics — Halliburton, V, 167; O.
H. H. — 245, 277, 289; Outline Course of Study on Cleanliness,
C. I.; Averill— XIII, XV.
III-C. Concepts that should be gained in connection with activities related
to makinq a good appearance — posture and cleanliness and neatness
in person, clothing and environment.
1. Those set up for lower grades.
2. The best form in walking or standing is to keep the toes
straight ahead.
3. Playing, running, walking, dancing strengthen the muscles of
the feet.
4. A sensible shoe is big enough to give free play to all the
muscles of the foot, has a line that runs straight through the
center of the great toe and the center of the heel and on the
inside of the foot, and a low heel set in direct line with the
back of the shoe.
5. Wearing rubbers indoors makes the feet tender and easy to
chap or frostbite.
6. Cutting nails straight across prevents ingrowing toenails.
7. Perspiration is body waste thrown off through the pores of
the skin.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 345
8. A handbrush, a file or nail board, a toothpick or orange wood-
stick are useful toilet necessities.
9. Tight clothing, especially bloomer elastic and garters, interfere
with circulation.
10. Proper sitting posture is obtained by sitting in seats of right
height with hips against back of chair, thighs horizontal, knees
bent at right angles, feet on floor, head up.
11. Bathing with warm water and soap improves body odor, and
appearance, and lessons chances for catching and spreading
communicable diseases.
12. A warm bath helps one to go to sleep.
13. The body is more easily chilled following a warm bath, and
going out-of-doors or in a cold room immediately may cause
a cold.
14. A warm, tingling glow should follow the rubbing after a cold
bath.
15. A cold bath or shower helps to toughen the skin and is a
tonic also.
16. Not everyone should take cold baths; a rubdown with a rough
towel is good for frail children.
17. Clean nails are a mark of gentility and one protection against
communicable diseases.
18. Food left between the teeth will spoil and form an acid which
eats upon the teeth, causing decay.
19. It is impolite to use a toothpick in company.
20. Brushing gums is as necessary as brushing the teeth.
21. Excessive neckwear may cause a cold.
22. Oil and perspiration soil the underwear and make changing
often a necessity to prevent bad odors.
23. Tight clothing interferes with good circulation.
IV-A. Some suggested specific approaches and activities that relate to
prevention of health injuries from communicable diseases, infection,
insanitary conditions, lack of fresh air and sunshine, accidents, and
physical defects.
COMMUNICABLE DISEASE
Teacher watches for symptoms and teaches class to recognize
and treat suspicious cases; for example, take this analysis of pro-
cedure in case of a cold:
*Situation: Protecting others when one has a cold: (1) Staying at home when
it begins. (It usually starts with occasional sneezing, slight irritation in the nose and
throat, and a chilly feeling. These are symptoms which should be heeded even though
the more obvious symptoms of coughing, frequent sneezing, and a running nose have
not yet appeared. Diphtheria, influenza, pneumonia, scarlet fever, measles, whooping
cough, and other serious illnesses often seem to be "just a cold" in the beginning.
Common colds are probably more contagious during the first two or _ three days.)
(2) Staying in bed. (If persons would isolate themselves by remaining in bed during
the first three days of a cold, they would not only benefit themselves, but would
largely prevent the spread of infection. The cold will run a shorter course if the
patient goes to bed.) (3) Sleeping alone. .(4) Keeping away from other people.
(5) Covering mouth and nose when sneezing or coughing. (6) Keeping away from
other people's food. (7) Using soft paper or old clean cloths as handkerchiefs to
spit in. (8) Putting them in a paper bag when used so that they can be burned.
(9) Keeping hands very clean, because anything touched may be handled soon after-
ward by someone else. (10) Not kissing anyone. (It is not a sign of affection to
give a person your cold germs.) (11) Using own towel and drinking cup.
* Adapted from "Subject Matter in Health Education" — Strang
346 Course of Study for the
Teacher sends children home and informs them of disease regu-
lations.
Teacher helps children combat any disease that is a menace —
e.g., scabies (itch), may be prevented by preserving cleanliness of
body and clothing. In case of infection, see that treatment is taken.
Visit parents; talk before Parent-Teacher Association on rela-
tion of well-being to school attendance.
Teacher leads pupils to see that most diseases and accidents
are preventable.
MAINTENANCE OF HYGIENIC CONDITIONS
Teachers and pupils assume responsibility where desirable for
ventilation, heating, lighting, and sanitation. For standards, see
pages 271 and 383.
Emphasize clean, right use of toilet by individuals. It is more
important to teach correct use of toilets than how to brush the
teeth.
Teacher does as much as possible to fit seats to pupils and to
arrange them so that they are not subject to glaring sunlight
and reflections. Teacher critically adjusts her program to the
physical needs of the child. Pupils assume responsibility for
conditions and keep up with them through committees.
Emphasize washing of hands preliminary to lunch periods and
wiping off milk bottle tops.
PHYSICAL DEFECTS
Make quite a point of cases where defects have been corrected.
See parents and educate them to fact that bad tonsils, bad teeth
and poor eyesight hinder growth.
Illustrate the ages at which teeth erupt. Illustrate appropriate
diets and habits for protection of the teeth.
Develop special studies on "the eye and ear our means of under-
standing."
Demonstrate good reading habits.
Illustrate health fads and fashions. Distinguish between these
and real health practices.
SAFETY
Special committees called patrolmen are set up. (See previous
outlines.)
Demonstrate rules for caring for eyes and ears.
Check by several testing devices and evaluate actual outcomes
as evidenced in real situations such as reading in proper light,
crossing streets, walking on highways, etc.
IV-B. Some desirable outcomes — habits, appreciations, and attitudes that
should be formed in connection with activities related to life ex-
periences which tend to prevent health — communicable diseases,
lack of fresh air and sunlight, infection, physical defects, accidents
and insanitary conditions — with supporting information and illus-
trative materials.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 347
1. With reference to the state adopted basal text:
Those set up in previous grades V, 1-12
Adjusts his windows, bed clothings, and night gar-
ments in accordance with hygienic practice V, 169, 164
Helps with school ventilation when it is practical V, 164
Avoids reading when lying down or in a moving
car V, 186, 192
Rests eyes by closing them or looking at a far-
away object V, 186, 192
Removes foreign particle carefully from the eye____V, 186, 192
Consults willingly an oculist when necessary—. V, 186, 192, 37
Listens carefully to others.
Speaks distinctly.
Desires to avoid unnecessary loss from fire and accident.
Dislikes presence of flies, mosquitoes, rats and mice.
Observes practices of safety as set up previously V, 193, 199
Observes precautions against colds V, 179, 185
Is conscious of the relationship of good habits of cleanliness
to the control of diarrhea, a common disease.
2. Additional Sources —
a. For the pupil: V, 103, 111, 182, 183; N. H. L.— Bk. I, Chaps.
X, XVII, XVIII, XIX, XXI, XXII, XXIII, XIV; H. E. D.—
IX, X; H. H.— XIII, XVI; H. S.— XXIV, XXVI; Days and
Deeds— 26; Study Reader— 136, 139; O. D. L.— 53, 89, 80, 52.
b. For the teacher: Free material on safety from state health
and insurance departments; Buice — Part I, Part II — XI, 276,
283, 287, 290; An Introduction to Safety Education — National
Safety Council, 30^; L. O. H.— 91-8, 151-78, 265-6, 199-213,
284, 226-42; Alcoholism and Narcotism — Health Education
Bulletin, 1929; Averill — X, XI, VI; pamphlets on all diseases
and Regulations Governing the Control of Communicable Dis-
eases in North Carolina — North Carolina State Board of
Health, Division of Epidemology, Raleigh, N. C.
IV-C. Concepts that should be gained in connection with the study of
factors that cause health injuries — communicable disease, lack of
fresh air and sunlight, infection, physical defects, and insanitary
conditions.
1. Those set up for lower grades.
2. Communicable diseases are to a great degree preventable by
proper cooperation with the health authorities.
3. Accidents are preventable to a large degree by observing safety
first rules (see V, 193-199).
4. Correction of physical defects increases a person's chances for
success and happiness.
5. Fresh air helps to stimulate circulation which gives a better
distribution of oxygen to the body.
6. Alcoholic practices increase illness, fatigue, and accidents.
7. Smoking is expensive; it increases fire hazards.
8. The class is familiar with results of some such studies as these:
Fisher and Berry: 12% decrease in accuracy of baseball pitch-
ing after smoking one cigar; 14.5% after two.
Smokers Non-Smokers
Number competing 93 117
Number successful 31 77
Per cent successful 1 33.3 65.8
348 Course of Study for the
O'Shea of University of Wisconsin: In mentality smokers
ranked below non-smokers; smokers' grades fell after begin-
ning; those smoking twice as much had lower grades.
Dodge and Benedict, in "Physiological Effects of Alcohol":
Tests showed that alcohol equal to that in a pint of wine, or
quart of beer, decreased contractile power of muscles 46%.
Tatterman: Drinking decreased fine hand-work such as
watchmaking, tooling, and surgery, by 10 to 15%.
Pearl, in "Alcohol and Longevity": "The drinkers as a class
have higher rates of mortality, and lower expectation of life
than the abstainers as a class. The essential elements in the
case are these: (a) alcohol, when abused, leads directly to
more or less disastrous consequences; (b) some human beings
are so constituted that they will abuse it, with greater or less
frequency and regularity."
Statistics from Leipsic Sick Benefit Societies: "Insured
drinkers had three and one-fifth times as many small accidents
as the average insured worker." "Drinkers lost 372 days for
every 100 lost by average insured worker."
Marshall, in "Prohibition in Arizona," etc.: Accident rate
reduced 83% in the largest mining and smelting company in
Arizona the first dry year (1915).
9. The temperature of room at home and school should be 65 to
68 degrees.
10. The class is familiar with quarantinable disease given in dis-
ease chart.
11. Scabies (itch) is due to insect parasites which thrive when
there is lack of cleanliness.
12. Physical health makes for better school attendance.
13. The ear should be washed carefully with a soft cloth over the
finger so as not to injure the delicate inner ear.
14. Sharp objects should never be used in the ear.
15. The child should be familiar with rules for eye-care — V-186.
16. One can keep warm by exercising.
17. Moving fresh air helps to refresh skin; therefore, sleep is bet-
ter in room with fresh air.
18. The nose helps to clean, warm, and moisten the air one breathes.
19. Sunbaths are good for convalescents.
20. Household garbage should be kept in a closed can.
21. Screen doors and windows should be kept closed.
V-A. Some suggested activities and approaches that relate to exercise,
play, and posture.
List of situations which involve posture and care of feet during
physical activity: sitting, standing, walking, after school in the
country, after school in the city, Saturday and Sunday leisure days,
physical education period, free play, going to and from school, buy-
ing new shoes and hose, inspecting feet of others, inspecting postur
of others, planning exercise for themselves and others, teacher's
constant good posture example. One illustration is given:
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 349
*" Situation: Buying a new pair of shoes — Choose a shoe that
fits the shape of your foot and that has broad heels not more than
one inch high, flexible shank, and usually a straight inner line.
Broad low heels are best because they give more support to the
body weight. High, narrow heels are undesirable because they
cause a shortening of the muscles of leg and back, throw the body
weight too much on the front of the foot, and induce poor posture.
To test whether or not a shoe has a flexible shank, you can do this.
The flexible shank allows the foot muscles more chance to exercise
and thus grow stronger. To test whether or not a shoe has a
straight inner line, place the two shoes together. The toes and
heels of each should touch each other.
"Our shoes are one important factor in health. Poorly fitting,
poorly constructed shoes may affect the back muscles. They cause
pain, form corns, bunions, callouses. They are one cause of faulty
posture. They often prevent the person from walking and playing
as he ought to. No one feels like taking a 'hike' if his feet hurt.
"Situation: Buying stockings — Be sure the stockings are long
enough and fit the foot. Stockings that are too small deform the
feet just as shoes that are too small do."
Class may draw up exercise conditions which favor growth and
those which do not.
Class may study the construction of the bone-muscle phase of
the body.
Study animal skeletons, etc.
Demonstrate good sitting and standing postures, and teach bone,
muscle, and will that produces them. Sit with the hips well back
in the chair, feet on the floor, knees bent at right angles, head up,
chin in, chest high, back straight, and abdomen flat. Stand flat
against the wall, stand with the feet a little apart, toes pointing
straight ahead. Stand tall with chin in, chest high, abdomen flat
(pull in at the waist line, back straight, back and head touching
the wall). Walk forward without changing the posture of the back
or head. The easiest way of assuming correct posture is to make
oneself as tall as possible — "make the head touch the ceiling."
The teacher should personally help each child to assume a cor-
rect posture, then should ask the child to relax and assume it with-
out her aid. (See Health, Chaps. XVI and XVII; Health Habits,
Chapter VIII.)
When continued poor posture exists, and no improvement in
posture is made, the teacher should try to discover if the cause is
poor health, poor nutrition, some physical defect, or a mental atti-
tude and should refer the child to the school physician or a properly
trained person.
Rate and rank the footwear and footcare of the class.
Collect pictures and stories of athletes.
Hold an exhibit. Let titles and explanations be well-written
and clear explanation of the health content revealed.
Study relationship of physical characteristics of primitive people
to their work — e.g., Indians and out-of-door life.
Prepare exhibit of lower animal, fowl and human feet skeletons.
Study adaptations.
^Strang — Subject Matter in Health Education.
350 Course of Study for the
Set up a shoe-shine stand in the "beauty parlor."
Check outcomes in actual habits formed, attitudes shown, and
information gained, remembering that the real test is performance.
V-B. Some desirable outcomes — habits, appreciations and attitudes — that
should be formed in connection with physical activities with sup-
porting information and illustrative material.
1. With reference to the state adopted basal text:
Those set up for previous grades V, 1-12
See also the outline for physical education and page 344.
Enjoyment of competitive and cooperative partici-
pation in games and sport with other children
V, 163-171, 172-178, 179-185
Walking naturally without scruffing or objection-
able mannerisms . V, 127-134
Wears proper shoes and exercise the feet
vigorously V, 127-134
Spends at least three hours daily in out-of-doors active play.
Is able to assume good posture upon request; should be will-
ing to accept help in self -corrective exercises.
Is interested in motor ability tests for running, jumping,
throwing, batting and climbing, and ready to compete with
other children.
Enjoys vigorous folk dances.
Is willing to play fairly.
Establishes "Rules of the Health Game" and should know
the value of keeping them.
2. Additional Sources —
a. For the pupil: N. H. L.— Book I, Chaps. XIII, XIV, XXVI;
O. D. L.— 2, 96; H. H. V.— IX, X; H. S.— XVII, XIII, XIV,
XXIV; H. E. D. — III; Ben Hur — Wallace ; Watcher in the
Woods — Sharp; Days and Deeds — 38.
b. For the teacher: The Tired Child — Lippincott; L. O. H. —
38-9, 43-57, 140, 283, 293, 294, 316, 334-7; H. B.— 58, 59; H.
P. E.— 144-219; O. H. H.— 289.
V-C. Concepts that should be gained in connection with physical activities.
1. See those related to posture, page 344.
2. The foot is made up of many small bones bound together by
ligaments and a great number of small muscles.
3. Playing, running, walking, and dancing strengthen the muscles.
4. The blood secures oxygen from the air breathed in through the
lungs.
5. The lungs exhale the gas carbon dioxide.
6. The vessels carrying blood from the heart are called arteries.
7. Good circulation helps in the distribution of oxygen to all parts
of the body.
8. The heart is strengthened by exercise in the fresh open air.
9. The heart is often injured by alcohol and tobacco.
10. Exercise increases digestion.
11. Work supplies exercise — hoeing, chopping, running errands, etc.
12. Exercise helps to get rid of body wastes.
13. The child should know what some athletes say about the use
of tobacco, as: "During my twenty years in the big leagues, I
have seen the careers of several promising young ball players
ruined by the use of tobacco." — Walter Johnson.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 351
"From personal observations with athletes who have been
addicted to the use of tobacco, I can speak with confidence that
they do not possess the endurance of athletes who have grown
up free from the use of it."— A. A. Stagg, Director of Physical
Education, University of Chicago.
"I have never used it (tobacco) in any form." — Charles
Paddock, fourteen-year champion.
14. Success in physical achievement is based for the most part on
sleeping long hours with windows open, eating right foods,
being cheerful, controlling the temper, taking care of the feet.
15. Play out-of-doors is better than the movies.
16. Lack of fresh air retards growth.
17. Overwork retards growth.
18. "Good posture is a thing of dignity, spirit, and grace which
has its roots embedded in a ground-work of good body me-
chanics. The purposes of good posture are to
a. Further healthy functioning of the body and its organs;
b. Reveal to others a picture of one's best self;
c. Increase one's self-respect and confidence in one's self; and
correspondingly, to increase the confidences of others in
one's personality;
d. Maintain a position of readiness for the demands of the
situation."
VI-A. Some specific approaches and activities which provide opportunities
to contribute to emotional and mental health.
See Educational Principles set up in the introductory section.
See also page 329.
Thorn. Everyday Problems of the Everyday Child. D. Appleton,
New York, $2.50.
VI-B. Some desirable outcomes — habits, appreciations, and attitudes — that
should contribute to emotional and mental health with supporting
information and ilhistrative materials.
1. With reference to the state adopted basal text:
Read V, 1-199.
2. Additional Sources —
a. For the pupil: N. H. L.— Book I, Chaps. XV, XVI; H. H.—
XV; H. S. — Book I, Chap. XIX; see outline on Citizenship;
Boy's Life of Roosevelt; Ben Hur; The Secret Garden —
Burnett.
b. For the teacher: Pamphlets and bulletins; N. E. A. Journal,
April, 1930; Burnham, "The Normal Mind" and "Great Teach-
ers and Mental Health"; Aver ill, The Hygiene of Instruction;
O. H. H.— 294.
VI-C. Concepts that should be gained as contributing agents to mental
and emotional health.
1. A short happy evening at home is usually better than the movies.
2. Controlling the temper and being happy help to win the game.
3. A nervous person cannot put his mind on the thing he is doing.
4. The healthy-minded person does not give way to bad temper,
selfishness, and fault-finding.
352 Course of Study for the
VII. Some suggested approaches and activities involving natural' oppor-
tunities in child experiences for learning about matters related to
life processes connected directly or indirectly with social hygiene.
(See page 296.)
VIII. Type lesson based on specific problem in school community.
The situation or incident to be treated: Smoking on the school-
grounds.
General principle to be established: We should not smoke on
school-grounds —
1. Because it is not thrifty:
a. Costs money.
b. Cuts down health chances.
2. Because it sets a bad example for others.
3. Because it is against the rules of the school.
4. Because it is too risky from the standpoint of fires.
Possible approaches:
1. A specific case of smoking.
2. Question raised by a pupil.
3. Pictures brought by teacher or children.
4. Topic arose in geography during study of tobacco.
5. News items.
6. Arrest of some merchant for selling to minors.
Problems: How much does smoking cost the average man per
day? How does smoking affect one's appetite? Why do most
smokers begin the habit? What is the right attitude to be held by
every boy and girl toward any regulation about conduct in a given
community ? How is a law or rule made ? Why ? Who built the
school buildings? For whom? Who owns the school buildings?
What would it cost to replace them? What is your duty to your
own property ? The property of others ?
Plan for right habit or action: What can we do about the smok-
ing we have already had? Can we prevent this from happening
again? (Report source of cigarettes, and persons smoking.) How?
Making the principle transfer to other cases: Are there other
reasons why young people in particular, should not smoke? Name
other things we do which cost money? (Drinking coca-cola, beer,
etc.)
Examples of generalizations which will serve as ideals or prin-
ciples of action:
We should try to eat only good, healthful foods.
We should try to protect buildings.
Boys and girls constitute the greatest wealth of a nation.
Methods of checking progress and of getting further action:
Both teachers and pupils pledge to avoid use.
Both teachers and pupils pledge to uphold laws of school and
country and to report any infringements thereof.
References for Teacher —
Unit Course of Study in Nutrition — Am. National Red Cross, Washington, D. C, 60tf.
Our Health Habits— p. 499, pp. 1-173.
All About Milk — Metropolitan Life Insurance Co.. N. Y. C.
References for Pupil — Page 347.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 353
GRADE SIX
Specific Objectives:
To help pupil maintain essential hygienic practices introduced in lower
grades.
To give pupils a more scientific understanding of cleanliness.
To develop more fully physiological reasons underlying desirable health
behavior.
Methods of Procedure and Suggested Standards for Outcomes:
I-A. Some suggested activities and approaches that relate to the experi-
ences of eating, drinking, and eliminating waste.
As this is the stage of child development when investigation and
rationalizing come into prominence, great emphasis may well be
placed on the biological approach to cleanliness. Many helpful sug-
gestions for method and content will be found in the section on
nature study and science covering nature of soil, dirt, mold, bac-
teria, yeast, etc.
In this grade, the food work may be connected with the study
of civics and ideas of quality of food developed; for example, the
production of a sanitary milk supply; the value of freshness in
vegetables, fruit, eggs, etc.; the safeguarding of meat; the pro-
tection of bread by bakery regulations; the control of public eating
places and soda fountains and its relationship to the welfare of
society. Throughout this work effort should be made to develop
certain attitudes, namely:
1. The sense of personal responsibility, not only in choice of
food, but in safeguarding food for others.
2. Standards in judgment with regard to suitable foods for the
individual.
3. Ideals of self-control in regard to kind of food, amount of
food and time of eating food.
See text, pp. 20, 57, 65, 73, 108, 199 for related activities and
information.
Make a study of water in connection with North Carolina his-
tory and geography, that shows water to be man's great ally in
supplying drinking and bathing facilities, means of fire protection,
irrigation, power, recreational opportunities, waste disposal. De-
velop ideals of purification by chemical treatment, sedimentation,
filtration, storage, aeration.
Prepare a chart showing how water promotes health.
Through actual investigation of experimental results, first-hand
experiences and observation, and expert opinions, determine answers
to following problems:
a. What is the real cause of the alleged soothing effect of
tobacco ?
b. What would be a more healthful way of securing satisfaction?
c. Why is a bootlegger not a good citizen?
d. Does ignorance of the law excuse accidents caused by drunk-
354 Course of Study for the
e. What is the attitude of local business corporations toward
smoking and drinking?
f. What percent of accidents are due to drinking?
g. What percent of fires are due to smoking?
Compile information about local laws in various communities
governing driving while under influence of liquor.
Trace growth of prohibition movement in North Carolina.
Publish a health bulletin.
Determine what constitutes a balanced and reasonable diet.
Review classes of food and what they supply to the body.
Plan weekly menus.
Keep personal "diet diaries" and study them critically for im-
provements from the standpoint of health and economy. Use strictly
scientific material for evaluating.
Study the work of the circulatory system. Make clear the effect
of alcoholism and narcotism. New Healthy Living, Book II, illus-
trates an excellent approach in a chapter called Habits That Pre-
vent Control.
Prepare charts or bulletins featuring heroes who do not use to-
bacco — Lindbergh, Wilson, Roosevelt, Burbank and Ford, for ex-
ample.
Survey the school for smokers and non-smokers. Compare the
two groups in scholarship, general physical and mental tone, gen-
eral efficiency, social poise and culture.
Make summary of money values of corn, wheat, potato, peanut,
and tobacco crops in North Carolina. Compare in food values.
If America now spends $3,360,000 annually for tobacco, and
there are 120,000,000 people, what is the average cost per person
for the United States? For North Carolina? For your town?
Since only one-third of population are users, how much will be
spent by each on the average ? What is the average cost per person
for school maintenance?
Extend the study of milk to include knowledge of kinds and
uses found in other countries.
Form a Health Citizenship Club which has self-control and
moderation as ideals for all activities.
Make type studies of tea and coffee — good and bad uses.
Report upon habitual "patent medicine takers." Get first-hand
notes on length of time they have been using these medicines, how
often they are used, and a comparison of first effects with the
present.
Check for actual growth in outcomes listed below.
I-B. Some desirable outcomes — habits, appreciations, and attitudes — that
should be formed in connection with activities related to eating,
drinking, and eliminating body waste with sources of supporting
information and illustrative material.
1. With reference to state adopted basal text (VI):*
Those previously set up and text, pp. 17-20.
Drinks little or no ice water.
Eats little or nothing when hurried or excited.
'Cleanliness and Health — Turner and Collins. Heath.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 355
Washes dishes properly after using them and likes
to do it v » 189-201
Uses individual cups.
Protects food in an approved way from flies, dust,
and rodents VI, 188-199, 47, 205, 206, 183, 190
Handles and stores fresh and prepared foods in an
approved way VI, 4-73, 188-199, 205, 114, 138
Exercises daily and eat coarse foods like vegetables
to aid elimination VI, 19, 104, 105, 115
Feels an interest in and responsibility for food
of others ,"..'; 18
Appreciates work of the heart and other organs and is inter-
ested in their functioning to their highest capacity.
2. Additional sources of information and illustrative material —
a. For pupils: N. H. L. II— XIX, XXI, II, V, VI, VIII ; Young
People's History of North Carolina— Hill— Alfred-Williams,
Chap. I. Supplementary Readers or texts: Character Book,
Grade 6— Gentry— Heath ; Jehrs— Nature Study II— Ameri-
can Book Company; A. B. — X, XIII, XX, IX.
b. For teachers: Rose— Study in Nutrition Teaching in Fifth
and Sixth Grades— T. C. Record, May, 1930; O. D. L.— VI,
174; S. S. H.— 9, 295, 140, 269-279, 282; P. H. (text); O. H.
H.— 313; Averill — Educational Hygiene— IX; The Great
American Fraud — Adams. American Medical Ass'n., Chicago,
111., 25^; An explanation of habit formation found in any
good educational psychology; Brook's Dual Government.
Results of Some Scientific Studies:
Hunter, Actuary, New York Life Insurance Company: "It is
certainly proved that total abstainers are longer lived than non-
abstainers."
Adolph Kickg, in "Alcohol and Child Mortality": "23% of chil-
dren of sober parents die; 45% of beer drinkers' children die."
Faux, President Logan Coal Company, Pittsburgh, Penn.: "The
families of the working class are better fed and clothed. Children
who formerly were barefooted wear shoes and stockings. Where
formerly stood two saloons now stand two national banks with
deposits of about $2,000,000."
Schweighofer ; Head Insane Hospital at Salzburg: "The study
shows that the children of drinkers develop mental diseases much
oftener than the children of parents who are themselves mentally
diseased but not alcoholic. That is, an existing tendency to mental
weakness becomes fixed under the effects of alcohol; while without
it there may be recovery."
Howell: "The physiological effects of alcohol are of peculiar
interest to mankind, owing to the widespread use and especially to
the disastrous results following its intemperate consumption. Those
who employ it in excess are in danger of acquiring an alcoholic
thirst or habit toward which the body possesses no counter-acting
regulations. When food is eaten in excess, we experience a feeling
of satiety which destroys the desire for more food, and the same
regulation prevails in the case of water. With alcoholic drinks, how-
ever, the desire may continue long after the alcohol has begun to
exert an injurious action upon the tissues."
356 Course of Study for the
"Recent investigations show that in the work of skilled labor in
which neuro-muscular machinery is involved, alcohol even in small
quantities decreases the efficiency."
Films: The Eastman Teaching Films, Incorporated, Rochester,
New York, has released the following films: Bacteria (7-9); Di-
gestion (7-9); How Teeth Grow (5-7); Mold and Yeast (6-8);
(numerals indicate best probable grade placement).
I-C. Some concepts that should be gained in connection with activities
related to eating, drinking, and eliminating of waste.
1. Those listed under preceding grades.
2. Mold plants and bacteria which spoil food are dependent for
growth upon moisture, darkness, and warmth about equal to
70 degrees.
3. Bacteria are microscopic plants living in the soil of the out-
of-doors, the dust of blackboard and floor and clothing, the soil
of the dirty hands, in food, in water, and in the body.
4. Sunlight, extreme heat, and extreme cold kill mold spores and
bacteria.
5. There are useful bacteria such as those which change cider into
vinegar, sours milk for cheese and butter-making, form tannic
acid, transform plant and animal substances into soil again.
6. Yeast feeds upon sugar, giving off the waste products, alcohol
and carbon dioxide.
7. Digestion begins with mastication in the mouth. Saliva breaks
up starches. Gastric juice of stomach acts on proteins. The
pancreatic juice from the pancreas and the bile from liver go
into the intestines and break up fats, proteins, and carbo-
hydrates.
8. Absorption takes place in the small intestine.
9. The working of bacteria on food materials stored too long in
the intestines, sets free poisons which are absorbed by the body.
10. Water can be made safe for drinking by boiling fifteen or
twenty minutes.
11. Tea and coffee dull the appetite.
12. Alcohol makes the heart overwork.
13. Alcohol injures the digestive tract because it irritates the lining.
14. Health is essential to industrial efficiency.
15. A drug is a substance which temporarily modifies the activity
of the bodily organs, including, of course, the brain and nervous
system, otherwise by increasing the supply of available energy.
16. Dissipation of any kind harms health.
17. Tobacco (a) diverts strength and vigor from growth to repair-
ing physical or mental injuries, (b) tends to require increasing
use — to make it difficult to get along with, (c) causes unneces-
sary inconvenience and discomfort when forbidden, (d) is a
needless expense incurred by people who should be saving and
planning for an education, (e) decreases skill in muscular and
mental activities.
18. Alcohol (a) increases likelihood of accidents, (b) injures nerve
cells, (c) decreases total energy because fatigue results sooner,
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 357
(d) decreases actual ability to stand heat and cold, (e) impairs
self-control by depressing brain and nerve cells causing im-
moderate and destructive uses of substance, impatience or irri-
tability, offenses against good order, sometimes cruelty and
violence by those who without it would naturally be kind and
considerate, (f) decreases health standards and length of life,
(g) causes often a lower standard of living, (h) produces mis-
understanding and ill feeling, (i) diminishes earning capacity,
(j) prevents employment and causes dismissal in many trades,
(k) makes unhappy homes where there are delinquents, (1) in-
creases such health problems as tuberculosis, infant mortality,
and social hygiene, (m) diminishes resistance to common con-
tagious diseases.
19. Muscles are of two kinds — voluntary which are controlled at
will, and involuntary, which are controlled by the nervous sys-
tem, and which work automatically.
20. The nervous system governs all the organs and causes them to
work together.
21. Rest, relaxation, and sleep are necessary to keep the muscular
and the nervous systems up to their best.
22. Alcohol, tea, coffee, and drugs affect the muscular and nervous
systems of growing people in an undesirable way because they
overwork them and produce unnatural conditions.
II-A. Some suggested specific approaches and activities that relate to
resting and sleeping.
See suggestions for preceding grades.
See VI, 30-34, and all references in IV and V.
II-B. Some desirable outcomes — habits, appreciations, and attitudes — that
should be formed which relate to sleeping and resting with sources
of supporting information and illustrative material.
1. With reference to the state adopted basal text:
a. A new emphasis on those set up for preceding grades — VI, 28.
b. Additional Sources —
(1) For the pupil: S. S. H.— VII, VIII, IX; A. B.— XVIII;
N. H. L. II— VII, XV, XVIII, XXIII.
(2) For the teacher: VI, 99; P. H. (text); Averill— XIV.
II-C. Some concepts to be gained in connection with the activities of
sleeping and resting.
1. The organs of the body need regular habits and hours of rest
to be able to serve the best needs of the individual.
2. Sleep and rest are necessary for nerve and muscle rest.
3. A light supper helps the stomach and heart to rest while one
sleeps.
III-A. Some suggested activities and approaches that relate to making a
good appearance through improved posture and cleanliness and
neatness of person, clothing, and environment. (See Grade Five,
page 343 — study carefully VII.)
358 Course of Study for the
III-B. Some desirable outcomes — habits, attitudes, and appreciations — that
should be formed in connection with activities related to making a
good appearance — posture and cleanliness, and neatness in person,
clothing and environment with supporting information and illus-
trative material.
1. With reference to the state adopted basal text:
Those not thoroughly established in lower grades.
Gives careful attention to cuticle to prevent hang-
nails VI, 124-114
Thoroughly dries hair before going out VI, 123, 118
Breathes through the nose only VI, 137, 129
Carefully refrains from biting or breaking hard
substances with the teeth VI, 74
Cleans the spaces between the teeth only with
dental floss, a pick of wood, or some similar pli-
able substance • _ VI, 74
Washes dishes properly after use and likes to do it VI, 204
Keeps shoes, especially heels, in good repair .VI, 24
Wears stocking of right size.
Carries a clean handkerchief every day VI, 138
Prefers clean and well-groomed feet VI, 25, 42-66
Removes rubbers, hats, and extra wraps while
indoors VI, 136, 121, 134
Expresses pride in clean, fresh, neat clothes
VI, 136, 121, 134
Wears all clothing as nearly suitable to the temperature and
weather as possible.
Removes damp clothing promptly; warming body
if chilled VI, 134
Puts on extra wraps after heating exercises VI, 136
Changes the underclothing at least twice a week,
of tener if possible VI, 121
Gives the skin sunbaths without burning (see grade V).
Carries a clean handkerchief or its equivalent every
day VI, 138
2. Additional Sources —
a. For the Pupil: See IV and V; S. W. H.— VIII, XVII, XXI;
N. H. L.— II, X, XI.
b. For the teacher: 0. D. L.— VI, 123; O. H. H.— 310, 339; A.
B.— VI, VII; Averill— IV, III. Films: Through Life's Win-
dows; Come Clean (from Division of Visual Education, State
Department of Education); Soap (5-7) — Eastman Teaching
Films, Inc., Rochester, New York; Purifying Water (7) —
Eastman Teaching Films, Inc., Rochester, New York; Posture
(5-7) — Eastman Teaching Films, Inc., Rochester, New York.
III-C. Concepts to be gained in connection with these activities.
Those set up for previous grades and IV-C, this grade.
IV-A. Some suggested specific activities and approaches that relate to
prevention of health injuries from communicable diseases, infection,
accidents, physical defects, insanitary conditions, lack of fresh air
and sunshine.
Organize so that pupils become responsible for scientific heat-
ing, ventilation and lighting when feasible. Survey room and plan
projects to make it easier to regulate factors. Insist on their under-
standing reasons underlying any change or activity.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 359
1. Putting a second floor over a cold one.
2. Putting glass or wooden deflectors in doors and windows to
prevent drafts.
3. Changing location of students.
4. Adjusting clothing.
5. Preparing racks for drying (on radiator, stove, or lights).
6. Softening certain window lights with safe adjustable shades.
7. Painting dark rooms with light cream, light pink, or light
yellow colors.
8. Cleaning windows.
9. Supplying and using foot-mats.
10. Constructing needed walks to street, outdoor toilets, other
buildings.
11. Cleaning the floors and blackboards.
12. Disinfecting desk of a person who has had a communicable
disease.
13. Setting up hand-washing facilities.
14. Making toilet attractive.
15. Creating desirable drinking water habits and facilities.
16. Taking care of the lunch problems — disposal of waste, pro-
tection from flies.
17. Surfacing the playground with sand and loam or gravel.
18. Inspecting building for fire hazards.
19. Listing and spreading information about poisonous plants.
IV-B. Some desirable outcomes — habits, appreciation and attitudes — that
should be formed in connection with activities related to life ex-
periences which tend to injure health — communicable disease, in-
fection, lack of fresh air and insanitary conditions, accidents, and
physical defects — with supporting information and illustrative
material.
1. With reference to the state adopted basal text:
Maintains responsibility for correct ventilation
when practical VI, 136
Refrains from looking directly at extremely bright
lights VI, 38
Avoids an excess of fine work VI, 36
Does not strike another's ears nor shout into them (see other
references).
Seeks medical advice when the ears give trouble (see other
references).
Uses toilet facilities in a proper and sanitary
manner IV, V, VII, VI, 42
Helps to keep schoolroom, school building, school grounds,
and parks neat and clean.
Helps to keep the bath, kitchen and bedroom neat
and clean VI, 200-213
Helps to keep flies and mosquitoes from breeding
VI, 183, 190, 180, 181
Disposes properly of household waste and garbage
VI, 200-213
Keeps doors and windows closed against flies and
mosquitoes VI, 200-213
Gives immediate attention to small cuts and scratches.
Obeys the advice of teacher, doctor, or nurse with
reference to control of colds VI, 129
360 Course of Study for the
Avoids expectorating VI, 42-46
Avoids persons known to be ill with infectious dis-
eases or contact with their possessions
VI, 42-166, 111-113, 133-137
Cooperates with parents and school authorities in
submitting - to vaccination against smallpox, diph-
theria, typhoid or scarlet fever VI, 150-152
Abstains from alcoholic beverages, cigarettes, tea
and coffee .- VI, 164-17
Takes medicine (except home remedies or common
standard prescriptions) as doctor or nurse directs- ... VI, 115
Prevents colds , VI, 129
2. Additional Sources —
a. For the pupil: VI— 214-229; S. S. H.— 1-315; A. B.— VIII,
VI, IV, XX; N. H. L. II— XX, XXI, XXII, XXIV, XXV, XXVI,
XXVII, XXVIII.
b. For the teacher: Safety Education in the Rural School —
National Council of Safety, 35^'; O. D. L.— VI, 24-25, 35, 36;
Averill— Educational Hygiene— VII, XIII, XV; O. H. H.— 459,
334; Health Education, 1924 and 1930; Junior First Aid
Course; Instructor's Manual — American Red Cross, Wash-
ington, D. C, 25'/; First Aid Manual — Johnson and Johnson,
Brunswick, N. J., free; Helps for the Rural School Nurse —
Sanitation of Schools — March, 1930, U. S. Department of
Interior.
Films: Eastman Teaching Films, Inc. — Sewage Disposal (7);
Tuberculosis and How It May Be Avoided (6-7); Mold and
Yeast (6-8); Diphtheria (6-7); Bacteria (7-9).
IV-C. Concepts to be gained in connection with experiences related to
activities that tend to injure health.
1. Those for preceding grades.
2. Communicable Diseases and Physical Defects.
a. These communicable diseases can be controlled by definite
well-proved methods; diphtheria, smallpox, tuberculosis,
cholera, dysentery, hookworm, typhoid fever, dengue fever,
malaria, plague, typhus fever, yellow fever, pediculosis, ring-
worm, scabies, trachoma, rabies, gonorrhea, syphillis.
b. The control of these communicable diseases depends largely
upon isolation of infected persons, germ-carriers, or persons
with suspicious symptoms; pneumonia, scarlet fever, influ-
enza, whooping cough, bronchitis, chickenpox, measles,
mumps, meningitis, colds, and poliomyelitis.
c. Correct habits of living in some instances will help to pre-
vent these non-communicable diseases (and to prolong life,
if they exist): diabetes, diseases of arteries, gout, certain
ear diseases (in so far as they are sequels of communicable
diseases), Bright's disease, and chronic nephritis, and appo-
plexy.
d. Correct habits of living can help to prevent or to alleviate
these disorders or defects: malnutrition, teeth defects, head-
aches, constipation, nervousness, indigestion, fatigue, some
visual defects, postural defects (including defective feet).
e. Sanitation — Temperature should not reach the pitch that
children show flushed faces, drowsiness, dullness, or other
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 361
signs of overheating. Windows opened for exercises should
be lowered in time to prevent lowering of room temperature.
(See also Grades IV and V.)
V-A. Some suggested activities and approaches that relate to exercise,
play, and posture.
See Physical Education Section.
See suggestions for preceding grades.
See VI, 37.
V-B. Some desirable outcomes — habits, appreciations, and attitudes — that
should be formed in connection with posture and exercise with
supporting information and illustrative materials.
1. With reference to the basal text:
a. Those for preceding grades V and VI, 21-24.
b. Avoids twisting the body in seat when writing.
2. Additional Sources —
a. For the pupil: Study Reader VI, 144; A. B.— XV, XIX, IX;
N. H. L. II— XV, II, III, V, XII; S. S. H.— X.
b. For the teacher: Your Child's Teeth — Dept. of Labor folder,
No. 12, 1929, Government Printing Office, Washington, D. C;
0. D. L.— VI, 49; Averill— V, VI; H. P. E.— 76, 164-214; T.
H. G.— 3-35, 90; 0. H. H.— 339, 343; H. B.— 80; H. E.— 1924
and 1930; L. O. H.— 43-57, 60.
V-C. Concepts that should be gained in connection with physical activities.
1. Those for preceding grades not yet realized.
2. Increasing amount of exercise increases amount of oxygen taken
to all parts of the body.
3. Exercise helps body to throw off waste.
4. Exercise helps to strengthen and stimulate stomach muscles.
5. Exercise helps to rest the body from study and work.
6. Exercise helps to strengthen the muscles of the heart.
7. Exercise helps to increase body temperature so that one is not
so likely to take cold.
VI-A. Some suggested approaches and activities which provide oppor-
tunities to build emotional and, mental health.
See text VI, 34, also suggestions on page 296.
Study the child: (1) help him find the defect in emotional bal-
ance, fear complex, anger, inferiority, or what not; (2) help child
to educate and cultivate the neglected desirable emotion; (3) main-
tain a calm, orderly atmosphere minus restraint or excitement; (4)
be reasonable and helpful in all dealings with him; (5) encourage
activities which will have as intrinsic phases desirable outcomes,
games, class and school papers, civic clubs, etc.; (6) aid him in
avoiding acts which give rise to undesirable emotions; (7) protect
him against shame, failure, ridicule, embarrassment, great fear;
(8) see that he is intellectually honest; (9) see that he does not
waste time in day-dreaming; (10) help him to do those worthwhile
things which bring him joy.
Teacher looks specifically to her own health until she meets
these standards: (1) practices proper standards of cleanliness;
362 Course of Study for the
(2) wears glasses if she needs them; (3) wears warm, light, com-
fortable, and for the most part, washable clothing; (4) wears shoes
of soft calf leather with low heels; (5) takes regular exercise of
some kind; (6) takes adequate rest from school routine, dances,
parties, etc.; (7) eats in accordance with healthful practices; (8)
pursues a hobby.
Give good understanding of habit formation. Let each child take
a strong, undesirable personal habit, and tell how it began, why it
began and plan to change it.
Check and measure to discover growth and needs.
VI-B. Some desirable outcomes — habits, attitudes, and appreciations — that
should contribute to emotional and mental health with supporting
information and illustrative materials.
1. See preceding grades and section on citizenship.
2. Feels hopeful about outcomes of his plans.
3. Can stick to wise choice without fear of being laughed at.
4. Wishes sympathetically to help in the movement against smok-
ing and alcoholism.
5. Is open-minded to truth and tries to govern life by it.
6. Wishes to influence others.
7. Knows that morality is a matter of moving in the right direc-
tion, immorality in the wrong.
Sources of information for the teacher: The Child in School —
Thomas D. Wood; National Health Series — Funk and Wag-
nails; Burnham — The Normal Mind. D. Appleton, New York;
Overstreet — How We Become Ourselves. W. W. Norton and
Co., N. Y. C; Burnham — Great Teachers and Mental Health.
D. Appleton, New York; Averill — Hygiene of Instruction and
Educational Hygiene (XIV); L. 0. H.— 3-23, 245-57; H. B.—
80; Pratt— Your Mind and You: Mental Health. Funk and
Wagnalls, 30^.
For the child: L. and R.— 100; A. B.— XIX; Study Reader VI—
26; N. H. L.— II; A. B.— XVIII, XIX, I, XXIII.
VI-C. Concepts that should be formed as contributing agents to desirable
emotional reactions. (See Citizenship Traits.)
VII. Some suggested activities and approaches involving natural oppor-
tunities in child experiences for learning about matters related to
life processes connected directly or indirectly with social hygiene.
(See page 296.)
Elementary Schools of North Carolina
363
•« fc
J.
H
o
W
*+-.
P
-1
00
to
•*a
P
pq
S
?
s
P
!«.
i-l
Q
P
ft,
U
ft,
o
B3
S
P
o
■<«>
»
rn
es
Hi
*
o
o
09
H
u
s
t/J
to
o
to
J
ft,
FQ
«
P
Ph
M
K
rC 1
o
tt
w
■*-,
i-i
o
<
00
«
■«
IS
o
OS
to
KH
o
TO
Crj
fc
o
m
W
P
P
0) co
_g
T3 m
s a
^ ft
a * E
o
"SoJ
to S_
a
03 -3
a £
■S
h
a.
bO
si-
C3 oS ft)
"3 S 03
85 a
W
H
P
a o^a
a^:
"* .°
«|
ft) 2
|H ft
_2-rt
S a
"" 03
g a
P
ft) CO
m •
K-— 4)
° i) -^
£||
"3 ,°
a od >.-«
=3 g g
.a 43 a
grigs
miB ft ^
Pn £
Z
o
H
■<
2
«
O
fc.
Z
si m
3 c i'
§ftl
CO Q.
13 b _7
a a "3
b C fl
a M -
os _-g
•a" M
t3
o
a os
sa
^ c
W g
t6fS
.2 *
feSS
-ta t-i eg
O 4) £
a^?
1 8
A> S
a a
ill
■43 So
03 1-
a S •« 03
•2 3 £ ft>
ffl 4) cq 8 ft
"3 ft >. a
•" 03 03 5
10 a -a ft
H bO B ft) - ©
D a bo jo
>^ a 4>t3
2
2
H
O
o
a
H
K
O
ft,
ft.
T3
O
o
bo
03
B1-&.S
111
ft S
J2B
*a
a S ©
g 03 a
OS °
"J*" 3
*— 'Or—'
. a t.
£ S^ osg
03 a a) ob
bc5 a"^ <3 4)
aSja» "Og
w
P
ag-oe
2 o'-S a
fa -.3 .2 OS
03
ft: ®
— _ ft)
5 a*
WftS.S
•s'i1«9 85a§'
§
o
o
H
P
o
*
M ft) 2
£tf ft
QPh^PtJPQ-bos
09
3
1
P
S
i-3
»S .
Th « ft
.9-a a
& mm
Mfi.S
.g3 g
£ 03.2
ft£ o
o
. - IT D
g'3-S
03
ft)
ja
PE
.2
*o
ja
BO
.5
"oS
ft)
!U
!>
9«
■" a)
m5
go
■^ a
.. 03
A »
2°
- fl ■
a c3 m
O ft)
£ — ^
o3o
-2a
"ol ?
- E
ftO
a
t. .
ft t.
ft 2
*, 03 ft)
"ft
» t, el's 2
° 111
m a '-3 xl
^bC^ 03 M
9 c 3 c a
ftS^^-jS
KflSoa
d. "9 . >>
.9 g>£S>
a M.aca'o^
os a -s b 2
9 a-S
r: S3 ft)
• •9bo8
ftS S3
w
8 £ a
o -a
Ofeli
03
4> .
? s
o £
o5
to 03--
-^ ft)
M - g bo
. k a
5 ^^
o3 (^ to
» ft) C3
6 is is
2»
a o^ 3
03 g g
IS O 03
M os a
■Sg
a°
es a
g bp
a
.3
ft) 03
as
H
bO O
4>"" .id a
'C O -fi
&^ o
o r; tH^-t
«S£ °
M >.
• « g
ft) S'C"-*
S K ° a)
ft; Q, 1-05
m ftj
jn .
2 i M o?
73 a^a
£ - a ft«
O o g£
P'o'S OS'S,
"a
*g
bc^a m
a a)
boS
a a-3
PI
a a -^
Occ a
a HEO
riJt-x a
ar3 S 03
.11 £3
s«o
T3 gT3 M
bD 2 a^_,
a - g 03
^^03>.
a o5
a) 3 .
43 c ft)
O h taia
ft£ 2
bD M Vj ft)
js.s»;la
SO.3 03X1
-a >>,a
T3
o a
13
a
'ft) (H
> 4)
bO>,
a. -a
H
O
ft.
P
•5°
03 OZ
o
d ft) „,
-^-^ ft) .
gp* t»ft=
a « «r^
l H« (SO
03 .
»|
a &
32
oj b£
E -ft5
c a
BS
wl
o"o
isO^
.5 a
"S ■ "
ft) 1^ m
* £~
.— — -
03
>.
03
"S
_a
d :9
-^
•" oS
ft)
1.9
a g
"i
1 1 of
•5 a
£ Si 3
5 a
c -a"g
364 Course of Study for the
2. Practical Hot Lunch Project in a Four-Teacher School*
At the close of the spring- term, a survey study of the children's monthly
weight records indicated quite clearly that many of our children were
underweight and needed to practice health in their daily living. Our prob-
lem became how can we help each child to make a satisfactory normal gain
in weight during the coming year.
It was decided that the quiet indoor lunch with its attendant activities
could most profitably be made a definite part of our next year's school pro-
gram, particularly if every child could participate. This meant that we
had to provide for some free lunches. . . . When the principal reached her
school in the fall, she found in the storeroom one hundred and fifteen or
twenty quarts of soup mixture, which the Home Agent with the help of
the Community Club women had canned during the summer. The local
Parent-Teacher Association had furnished the cans and the club women
had contributed the vegetables from their own gardens. She also found
in the kitchen a two-burner oil stove, a three-gallon kettle, a can opener,
a large knife, a large spoon, a cup pan, seven dozen spoons and dishes, one
other small pan, and built-in shelves for holding same — all of which the
P. T. A. and the school together had placed there the previous year when
the hot dish had been served at a small cost to each child who could
afford it.
The soup mixture on hand needed to be supplemented with other foods.
Consequently, the county rural supervisor, the home agent and the principal
sent a joint letter into each home, with a suggestive list of foods that each
could contribute with very little cost. Soon there was the promise of
enough peas, beans, white potatoes, sweet potatoes, turnips, pork, butter,
apples, milk, meal, rabbits, squirrels, chickens, salt, pepper, vinegar, choco-
late, oil, etc., to supply our wishes for the winter months. These articles
were sent to the school during the winter whenever the teacher requested.
To serve a hot dish to an average of eighty-five children each day re-
quires planning of all details. Two of the larger girls from the sixth and
seventh grades were selected to serve as cooks for a two weeks' term, to
avoid a conflict with the cooking and the class work. Six waiters from
grades three through seven were chosen to serve a one-week term. These
girls, with the cooks' aid, served the hot dish in about ten minutes to the
children seated at their own desks in each of the four rooms of our school.
A teacher acted as supervisor of the work for a one-month term.
A five-minute bell was rung before lunch period. At this time, each
teacher saw that her children went in an orderly way to the pump and
washed their hands, using sanitary towels when possible. Upon their re-
turn to their seats, the children waited patiently until their waiters served
them. After one child "returned thanks" for the food, each group enjoyed
a palatable hot lunch together in a quiet, social fashion for a period of
twenty minutes. Children, who prior to this practice had failed to bring
a lunch, now joined the group.
The teacher, who supervised the cooking, and the waiters in charge
retired from their room a few minutes before the five-minute bell for lunch
to wash their hands and get things in readiness. Usually, the teacher
served the food from the kettle in which it was cooked into bowls placed
on trays by the waiters preparatory to being taken to the children at their
seats. After the waiters completed their job of serving, they gathered at
the waiters' table in the kitchen and enjoyed their own meal in a friendly
way while the water was being heated for dish-washing.
After all of the lunches had been eaten, two waiters collected the dishes
and deposited the garbage in a can for the janitor's pig. Two girls washed
the dishes while the other two dried them with towels which the waiters
themselves had made in their sewing club work. Each waiter brought her
towel when it was her turn to serve; likewise, each cook brought her dish-
cloth. Whenever it was necessary that any preparation, such as shelling
beans and peas, paring turnips, etc., be made for the next day's dish, the
waiters did it at a leisure period during the afternoon.
^Reported by Mary Long Daniel, Hollister School, Halifax County.
Elementary Schools op North Carolina 365
As a result of this project there were many desirable outcomes in pupil
growth. It was not surprising to know that our children approached nor-
mal weight, as they habitually consumed hot food each day from a weekly
menu such as follows:
Monday — Soup (five or six cans with one quart of dried beans added
or three or four pounds of Irish potatoes).
Tuesday — Peas (one gallon).
Wednesday — Stewed sweet potatoes (one-half bushel and one gallon
meal).
The children are not satisfied now without having at least one hot dish
at lunch. They have acquired the habit of washing their hands, of sitting
and eating lunch in a friendly social way. They are more anxious to be-
come physically fit. School gardens have been started by different grades
with the hope that a greater supply of soup mixture might be canned
during summer for school use another year.
GRADE SEVEN
Specific Objectives:
To help pupil maintain and initiate desirable health practices suited to
his needs.
To supply supporting information on this level of development for these
health practices.
To extend further his interest in personal health to home, school, and
the community as a whole.
Methods of Procedure and Suggested Standards for Outcomes:
I-A. Some specific activities and approaches that relate to eating, drink-
ing, and elimination of body waste.
Seek first to attain those habits, attitudes and understandings
set up for previous grades as essential to personal health. Select
appropriate method. See also Appendix (VII)* for suggested
health score card. Read whole of state adopted optional text,
Building Strong Bodies, to strengthen desire for physical fitness.
Through activities of the class in the field of geography, history,
art, and civics, lead the class to a study of such vital problems as
are concerned with:
1. The source of food and its proper care; home gardens, nearby
farms, curb markets, various sections of the United States,
foreign countries, transportation, refrigeration, spraying, drying,
preserving, etc. — Food and Drug Act.
2. The source of water and its care: wells, pumps, bubblers, foun-
tains, drinking cups, city system, and ice supply.
3. The disposal of waste: open toilets, drainage, septic tanks, and
city sewage.
Compare home of early settlers of the community with those of
today in the following respects: consideration of beautiful location,
consideration of natural drainage and possibilities of artificial, con-
sideration of pure water supply, consideration of durability of ma-
terials used in constructing house, consideration of warmth of home,
providing and caring for foods, disposal of waste, danger from com-
municable diseases and healthful amusements.
*Communit3' Health — Turner and Collins. Heath.
366 Course of Study for the
Prepare score cards and rate the places handling foods.
Use one of the following or a similar card and survey the com-
munity in which you live (Pupils living on farms may use the first
for surveying their own homes and pupils in cities the second.):
Sanitary Survey of A Farm Home*
Students should go in small groups to survey farm homes. In their notebooks
they should copy the following outline and fill in with information of conditions found;
then they should write up a brief summary of adverse conditions arid make recom-
mendations for the improvement of each item criticized.
Location of farm home
Signature of farmer or of his wife
Names of the students making the survey-
Date of survey
Introduction: Description of general surroundings —
Geology — kind of soil and subsoil
Topography and drainage
Water: Piped into farmhouse and barns; well-depth, wall, cover, location with refer-
ence to barnyard, privy, cesspool, etc.; cistern — kind and structure; spring —
provision for protection against contamination; results of Bacillus coli test of
the water (send specimen to state laboratory).
Sewage: Privy — open, screened, location, kind; cesspool — condition, location; septic
tank.
Milk: Conditions of place where milking is done; evidence of care or lack of care in
handling; method of cooling; appearance of cows, if seen, with reference to
health; cows tuberculin-tested.
Sanitary Nuisances: Odors — source; distance of privy from house; distance of barn-
yard from house; pig pens, distance; fowl roost, distance; fowls in lawn or
yard about house; drainage from outhouses toward house.
Residence: Screens — number of strands per inch — fit well — torn; warm and cold
water; leaks in roof; ventilation; porches for summer (if in South); heat-
ing — method; conditions of crowding — number of persons, etc.
Mosquito Breeding Places: Troughs; flower pots; drain from ice box; roof gutters,
sagging or clogged; cistern, well, etc.; leaking hydrant; drain from bath or
kitchen.
Flies: Breeding places — manure, garbage, etc.
Sanitary Survey of Your City Residence BLOCKf
Students going in couples will make a sanitary survey of a residence block. More
advantages will accrue to the student if he makes his survey in a poor section of the
city. Copy the outline below in notebook and fill in with information obtained as the
survey is made. Write up a general summary of conditions found in the community
and make suggestions or recommendations for improvement
The block survey is bounded by the following named streets
Names of the two students making the survey-
Introduction: General description of the block —
Topography: Geology — kind of soil and subsoil and their depths; population — number
of families and the nationalities of the heads of families; native white Ameri-
can, Negro, Italian and other nationalities.
Other information:
Water — City supply or other source.
Sewage — By city system, open privy, other methods, efficiency.
Milk — City approved dairy, privately owned cow, pasteurized, certified.
Nuisances — Odors and Source: Dust, stables and manure, irritating noises, pigpens.
Housing — Screens : Condition, size of mesh, leaks in roof or wall, warm in cold
weather, method and sufficiency in heating, ventilation, crowded.
Mosquito Breeding Places: Troughs, flower pots, roof gutters, sagging or clogged,
tin cans, broken bottles, drain from bath, leaking hydrant, "traps" of sinks,
etc., not in use, tanks of unused closets of toilets, cisterns, etc.
Flies — Breeding Places: Manure, garbage and other unsatisfactory condition.
Debate the advantage and disadvantages of public health work.
Read VII$ carefully, chapters I-VIII and appendix in VII for other
suggestions.
Check and evaluate progress made at practical intervals.
*Reprinted by permission — Health Science and Health Education — W. Alfred Buice. John
Wiley and Sons, Inc.
tFrom Buice.
^Community Health. Turner — Collins.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 367
I-B. Some desirable outcomes — habits, appreciations, and attitudes — that
should be developed in connection with these activities with sources
of supporting information and illustrative material.
Those listed for previous grades and Appendix, VII, pp. 245-
252.
Feels a new value in health as a common interest
of the whole community VII, 1-123
Feels that a community problem is a personal
problem VII, 1-123
Realizes growth in ability to gather facts and
evaluate them VII, 18-125
Interested in the production, preservation and
transportation of foods VII, 41-76
Exercises cleanliness when handling food VII, 58
Exercises self-control in respect to eating and
drinking by eating and drinking only what seems
to be the right amounts, by not smoking while
growing, by refraining as a rule from candy and
other sweets between meals, by avoiding any act
which endangers the health of another VII, 40
Helps in the proper disposal of household waste VII, 77
Seeks as far as possible to effect the proper dis-
posal of community wastes and the abolition of
those places conducive to breeding and feeding
rats, mice, flies, and mosquitoes VII, 77-107
Additional Sources for the Teacher and the Pupil: Cooperative
Work in the Organization of Local Material for General
Science Instruction — The Water Supply System, Lincoln
School, Columbia University; see Geography and History
references; Home Life in Colonial Days — Earle; The Ways
of the Circus; Hunger Fighters — de Kruif; Microbe Hunt-
ers— de Kruif; N. H. L. II— Chaps. I, II, V, VI, XV, XX,
XXV, XXVIII; O. H. H.— 350-400, 428-435; L. O. H.— pp. 3-
23, 245-57, 58-68, 179-198; H. P. E.— 1-28; C. I.— Outline for
Grades VII-IX; A. B.— VIII, IX, XII, XIII, XXII; S. S. H.—
I, II, III, XI; Health and Civics Notebook— School Health
Bureau, Welfare Division, Metropolitan Life Insurance Co.
Films: Eastman Teaching Films, Inc. — Sewage Disposal (7),
Bacteria (7-9), Digestion (7-a), Purifying Water (7).
I-C. Some concepts to be gained in connection with these activities.
1. Health is a condition of the mind and of the body.
2. The first health duty of a good citizen is to be healthy himself.
3. The pioneer had health conditions that were under his control;
this is not true today for the life of the community decides
whether or not there are guarantees of clear water, clean food
and proper water disposal.
4. The qualities of good water: free from color; free from sus-
pended matter — clay, sand; free from odor; free from iron;
free from lead and other poisons; free from waste materials;
cool; and free from harmful bacteria.
5. Water soiled by body wastes is the most dangerous.
6. Storage in a deep reservoir or lake for many weeks purifies
water.
7. Running water through niters of fine sand also purines.
8. A solution of lime and alum forms a precipitate which catches
bacteria when filtered.
368 Course of Study for the
9. Chlorine gas added to water kills bacteria.
10. Boiling water makes it safe.
11. Thoroughly cooking food overcomes danger from animal para-
sites.
12. Peristalsis is more effective if bulky food is present.
13. The kind of work one does should influence somewhat the diet.
II-A. Some suggested approaches and activities that relate to sleeping
and resting.
Those set up for previous grades, those listed in VII, Appendix,
and those in B. S. B.
II-B. Some desirable outcomes — habits, appreciations, and attitudes — that
should be formed in connection with sleeping and resting with
sources of supporting information and illustrative material.
Those listed in previous grades are to be emphasized for incorpo-
ration in personal health programs where needed. It is possible
that health survey will reveal very poor habits practiced among
early adolescents, particularly boys of this group. Late hours, too
great physical exertion, irregular eating habits, initial experiences
in smoking and drinking, and poor forms of amusement are common
bad practices. Perhaps there will be a need in many classes for
emphasis regarding good substitute practices.
References and materials —
a. For the pupil: VII, 61-76; A. B.— XI, XVIII, XX, page 22;
N. H. L. II— 21-2, 109-123, 152-164, 192-207, 251-262; Health
and Civics notebook.
b. For the teacher: L. O. H.— 84-90, 99-109; H. P. E.— 19-28;
O. H. H. (see other references).
II-C. Concepts that should be gained in connection with activities related
to sleeping and resting.
1. The hours before midnight are especially valuable.
2. Rest and relaxation should follow active physical or mental
activity so that (a) cells may recuperate and repair; (b) fatigue
products may be eliminated; (c) one should take into consider-
ation the hours of work and rest in choosing an occupation.
III-A. Some suggested approaches and activities that relate to making a
good appearance through good posture and cleanliness and neatness
of person, clothing and environment.
See sections devoted to the problem in the preceding grades.
Continue emphasis along this line as the needs of the class and
individuals demand.
The Care of the School and Personal Appearance
1. Stimulate interest in the cleanliness conditions of your school,
among the mothers and fathers, the Parent-Teacher Associ-
ation, the other clubs and organizations of your community.
2. Get the interest and cooperation of the janitor in keeping the
school building clean.
3. Whenever drinking facilities are used at school, make it _ a
part of the work of the sanitary committee to check on this.
If fountains are not available, have the committee help to
provide individual cups.
Elementary Schools op North Carolina 369
4. Have the building committee responsible for seeing that the
children cooperate with the janitor by leaving their desks and
floor clean of papers and unnecessary dirt.
5. Have monitors responsible for seeing that the ways and means
of keeping the wash bowls clean are carried out regularly by
all who use the wash bowls.
6. If hand-washing facilities are not available at school, have the
children help in deciding what can be done about it, and then
help them to carry out the plans.
7. Have children interest their parents in helping to improve
hand-washing facilities and to make the wash rooms attrac-
tive. No child likes to use unattractive facilities.
8. Consider the use of paper towels versus individual cloth ones.
What is the initial cost of each? What is the laundry cost
for cloth ones? How do the per child costs of each compare,
and which is most economical? If the school is making a
drive on the use of paper towels, let the children present their
figures to the parents and school board or those who are re-
sponsible for purchasing school supplies.
9. Study clean hands in connection with the use of books and
other school equipment. Have a group of children visit the
library and get information on this point, reporting results to
the class.
10. Write to the New York Public Library and get information
about the new washable covers which are now being used on
library books. Consider the advantages and disadvantages.
11. Have children experiment with different ways of washing the
hands and decide upon the best, (e.g., Use cold water only —
cold water and soap — warm water only — warm water and
soap. (See page 391.)
12. Train a squad of boys and girls to demonstrate the method of
hand-washing, decided to be the best. Use this demonstration
in other classrooms, for parent-teacher meetings, etc., when
it is desired to arouse public interest in hand-washing facilities
and methods.
13. Have a mirror in the classroom so that the children may in-
spect their own teeth. Do they see a clean, shining set of
teeth that makes the smile attractive? Help children to real-
ize this asset to attractiveness.
14. Be quick to approve the children who have made an effort to
look clean and neat, even though the results are not perfect.
Show them how they can do better next time. In this way,
they get the desire to be clean, neat and attractive.
15. Study the best methods of "home-manicuring." What is the
essential equipment? (Make this the minimum with which
manicuring can be satisfactorily done, so that it comes within
the range of the financial means of all.)
16. Train a squad of boys and girls to demonstrate the methods
of manicuring decided upon as being best and most practical.
Make the idea of keeping the nails in good condition just as
important to the boys as to the girls. Show that for aesthetic
and health reasons it is just as necessary for boys.
The Care of the Home and Personal Appearance
1. Study cleanliness equipment of the home: bathroom facilities;
kitchen equipment (sink, etc.). What is the approximate cost
of these? Does the cost of installation balance the loss of
time in having to carry water from an outside source?
2. Look up statistics as to how much is used in the average home
each day by each person. Get water rates for own city and
figure cost per family and per person. If there is not a cen-
tral water supply, figure costs according to a rate usually paid
in that part of the state.
370 Course of Study for the
3. Get statistics as to the number of homes in the United States
which are not equipped with running water. What is the per-
centage of the entire number of homes in this" country? (See
report in Home Equipment Survey by the General Federations
of Women's Club, Washington, D. C.)
4. Discuss ways and means of taking a bath in homes where
bathroom facilities are not available.
5. Study laundering processes in the different homes. How many
do the laundry at home, how many send it out? Consider the
costs of both ways, taking into account the time needed at
home, giving it a per hour value. Have group or class visit
a commercial laundry to study the process.
6. Study various methods of shampooing the hair — use of cake
soap, liquid soap, commercial shampoos. Decide upon the best
and most practical methods. Have a squad of trained boys
and girls demonstrate and explain the proper way of shampoo-
ing the hair.
7. Study the structure and function of the hair and scalp. Why
does it need cleaning and care as the rest of the skin? De-
cide upon how often different types of hair can safely be
washed. Why not wash it too often?
8. Get information as to the cost of going to a barber or hair
dresser for a shampoo. Figure cost of the home shampoo. Is
it equally satisfactory? What percentage is saved? Are there
any advantages to having the hair done by an expert? Can
these be taken advantage of individually? (Rubbing and mas-
sage.)
9. Discuss the effect of thorough brushing of the hair and scalp.
What effect does it have upon each? Show how thorough
daily brushing will take the place of oil, water or some
preparation.
10. Make a gelatin or argar plate from a clean toothbrush and
from a dirty one. Let the children watch the growth of germ
colonies from each so that they can appreciate the significance
of the clean brush.
11. Have, class experiment on the best ways of cleansing the tooth-
brush. Is thorough cleansing with hot water and soap, fol-
lowed by drying in the sun or air sufficient? Is this method
within the means of all children?
12. In study of bacteria, consider different ways of keeping foods,
the necessity for clean utensils in keeping food, for keeping
food cool and covered. Stress the three important factors in
keeping food: cleanliness, cool temperature, and protection
from dust.
13. Many of the children have work in domestic science. Use this
opportunity to emphasize and demonstrate the satisfactory
ways of handling food in its preparation and service. Have
the children serve food to others.
14. The boys will be interested in the preparation and serving of
good food on camping or hiking trips. Consider in detail the
best methods of serving and preparing food and of cleansing
the utensils. Carry this over into the idea of a "chef" know-
ing the best procedures for the home, and consider home ways.
The Care of the Community
1. Study the organization of the community for public health
work. What is the place of cleanliness in a public health
movement? Visit the health department and report to the
class on the work being done.
2. Study the milk supply. How is it made safe for the people?
What is the place of cleanliness in a clean and safe milk sup-
ply? Make a study of the fly and mosquito breeding places in
the community. Carry on a campaign to clean these up. Work
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 371
to have windows and doors screened, especially in eating places
and food shops or homes and outdoor toilets.
3. Visit the shops, markets, and eating places in the community
and check on the cleanliness and sanitation of the place itself,
of the food and of the handlers.
4. In connection with eating places, consider self-service versus
waiters.
5. What is the place of a clean-up campaign in the community ?
Should it be necessary and how can public opinion and civic
pride be developed so that every day is clean-up day? Organ-
ize a sanitary committee with officers and helpers and have
weekly meetings to report and consider problems.
6. Most communities have annual clean-up days that end when
the day's program is finished. Aim to make the clean-up day
the starter for an all year round' clean-up program.
7. Make a study of dishwashing facilities in the different eating
places. How do they compare? Which has the best? How
can the others be interested to improve theirs?
8. What are the sanitary conditions at soda fountains? Can they
be improved? How?
9. Study the industries in the community. What are the cleanli-
ness factors in connection with the different industries? Are
washing facilities available? If so, do the workmen take ad-
vantage of them? How can more interest in their use be
stimulated ?
Check regularly the outcomes or improvements along all lines.
III-B. Some desirable outcomes — habits, appreciations, and attitudes — that
should be formed in connection with these activities with sources
of supporting information and illustrative materials.
1. See section devoted to this topic in the preceding grades. Con-
tinue emphasis in these respects as the needs of the class and
individual demand.
2. Additional Sources —
a. For the pupil: See III-B— Grade VI; See I-A— Grade VII;
N. H. L. I— XIX, XX, XXI; S. S. H.— II, IV; Health and
Civics notebook M. L. I.
b. For the teacher: A. B.— XXII, XV, XVI; O. H. H.— 390-405;
C. I. (whole outline); N. H. L. II— X, XI, XXI, XXII, XXV;
0. D. L.— 41, 89, 103.
III-C. Concepts to be gained in connection tvith these activities.
1. Those set up for previous grades and I-C, Grade VII.
2. The cleanliness of the surroundings should influence one's choice
of position.
IV-A. Some suggested approaches and activities that relate to experiences
which tend to prevent health injuries from- communicable diseases,
insanitary conditions, accidents, physical defects, lack of fresh air
and sunshine.
See VII, Appendix, and those mentioned in previous grades and
General Suggestions for Grades V, VI, and VII.
IV-B. Some desirable outcomes — habits, appreciations, and attitudes — that
should be formed in connection with these activities with sources
of supporting information.
1. See list for preceding grades and also VII, Appendix, and pages
77-183, page 180.
372 Course of Study for the
2. Additional Sources— XIX-XXIV, XXVI:
a. For the pupil: A. B. II-VI, VIII, XIX-XXIV, XXVI; S. S.
H.— 1-314; N. H. L. II— Chaps. II, VII, IX, XI, XVI, XVIII;
Health and Civics notebook; M. L. I.
b. For the teacher: O. H. H.— 353-418, 419-456, 405-418; O.
D. L.— 3, 41, 77, 89, 91, 103; Averill— XII, XIII, XV, XVI.
IV-C. Concepts that should be gained in connection with study of factors
which cause health injuries.
1. See those listed for previous grades.
2. Window glass intercepts some of the more valuable rays of
sunshine.
3. T'he greatest single cause of accidents is the automobile.
4. A person who "shows off" by such smart tricks as "hooking"
rides in traffic is less intelligent in that respect than those
who do not.
5. The work of the health department includes quarantining
people having, or who have been exposed to a communicable
disease, immunizing against smallpox and diphtheria, helping
to diagnose and discover communicable diseases, and their
sources of contagion, examining water for chemical and bac-
teriological content, inspecting food supplies, giving advice in
rearing and caring for babies, keeping records of vital statis-
tics, informing the people on health matters.
6. In the country responsibility for waste disposal and for get-
ting pure water rests upon individual families.
7. Leaving a clean camp is one sign of good sportsmanship.
8. Borax (about ten ounces for eight bushels of manure) will
prevent fly-breeding.
9. Spraying crude oil over a pool will destroy mosquito larvae.
10. Eliminating standing water is important in the control of
mosquitoes.
11. Air in good ventilation has the following five qualities:
a. Moderate temperature
b. Gentle motion
c. Moderate amount of moisture
d. Slightly varying temperature
e. Freedom from dust and odors
V-A. Some suggested approaches and activities related to posture, exer-
cise, and play with supporting information and illustrative ma-
terials.
(See outline on physical education and similar sections in previ-
ous grades.)
In connection with the play program for the grade it is recom-
mended that a rapid survey be made of Building Strona Bnd«'<>s
the state adopted supplementary text (Hutchinson).
V-B. Some desirable outcomes — habits, appreciations, and attitudes — that
should be formed in connection with posture, exercise and play
with sources of information and illustrative material.
1. See outline for Physical Education.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 373
2. Additional Sources — -
a. For the pupil: VII— 205, 184, 196; S. S. H.— IX; Health
and Civics notebook M. L. I.
b. For the teacher: O. D. L.— 106, 133; N. H. L. II— Chaps.
I-IV, VII-IX, XV, XXVII.
V-C. Concepts that should be gained in connection with posture, physical
exercise and play.
See those listed in outline for Physical Education.
Health is not the great objective of Physical Education.
Physical activity contributes to life in many ways — recreation,
citizenship, etc.
Perspiration has a two-fold function: excretion of salt, water,
impurities and cooling of body by evaporation.
VI-A. Some suggested approaches and activities which provide oppor-
tunities for contributing to emotional and mental health.
See suggestions for preceding grades.
Federal Bureau of Education suggests the following decalogue
for the Elementary School Teacher to apply to herself:
Have other interests beside the schoolroom.
Make not images of children.
Scream not names.
Keep each day happy.
Humor thy feelings.
Kill not stirring endeavor.
Utter not hard words.
Steal not hours of recreation.
Scatter not effort.
Laugh when it rains.
VI-B. Some desirable outcomes — habits, attitudes, and appreciations — that
should contribute to emotional and mental health.
1. See list for preceding grades.
2. Additional Sources —
a. For the pupil: VII— Chap. XII, XIII; N. H. L. II— Chapter
XII; Health and Civics notebook, M. L. I.
b. For the teacher: L. 0. H.— 99-135; H. B.— 96-8; H. P. E.—
38-46; see Grade VI.
VI-C. Concepts to be gained as contributing agents to mental and emo-
tional health.
See those set up for preceding grades.
VII. Some suggested approaches and activities involving natural oppor-
tunities in child experiences for learning about matters related to
life processes connected directly or indirectly with social hygiene.
(See page 296.)
VIII. Unit of work based on specific community problem.
1. The Situation: The prevalence of flies in the schoolrooms and
at the south entrance of the school building was very unde-
sirable. Other possible approaches:
a. Results of sanitary surveys suggested in course of study re-
vealed much unprotected waste.
b. An illness from typhoid or scarlet fever,
c Posters issued by health department.
374 Course of Study for the
d. Topic discussed in health text.
e. Advertisements of fly poisons, traps, etc.
f. Proper care of food.
g. An excursion to the grocery store, the meat market, restau-
rant, etc.
h. Cooperation with some civic campaign such as "Clean-Up
Day."
. 2. General Principle to be Established: The fly is a public
health menace and disgrace which can and should be controlled.
3. Procedures: Pupils and teacher proposed two problems:
a. What can we do about present conditions?
b. Can we prevent such a condition in the future?
In answering the first question the following problems arose:
(1) What makes the fly a nuisance or danger?
(2) What conditions encourage presence and production of
flies? How do they feed? Where do they live?
(3) What places in the neighborhood offer favorable oppor-
tunities for fly-breeding ?
(4) Can we rid this community of flies?
The class decided the fly followed children and food and
warmth. They reported having seen them about the garbage cans.
They read to secure information to help them further in an-
swering the above questions in the following references:
Andress and Brown: Science and the Way to Health — pp. 341-343.
Andress and Evans: Health and Citizenship — p. 260.
Burkard, Chambers, Maroney: Health Habits, II — pp. 234-237.
..— . — —..Personal and Public Health — pp. 360-363
Bigelow-Broadhurst: Health in Home and Neighborhood — pp. 221-223, 232-249.
Turner-Collins: Cleanliness and Health — pp. 183, 190.
- . - - - Community Health.
Whitcomb-Beveridge: Our Health Habits — pp. 414-416.
Farmers' Bulletin— Nos. 540, 480, 851, 200, 245. Department of Agriculture,
Washington, D. C.
Pamphlets from U. S. Public Health Service, Washington, D. C, and N. C.
State Department of Health, Raleigh, N. C.
Flytraps:
Electric Fly-Killer. Lit. Digest 75: 29 N. 18 '22.
Flytraps and Their Operation — Farmers Bui. 734: 1-16, 1921.
Work of a Municipal Flycatcher — Wells Am. City 26: 243, March, '22.
If Flies Were as Big as Birds — Sci. Am. 135: 97 Ag., '26.
Mr. Five — Eyes Who Walks Upside Down. Outlook 139: 495-97 Ap., '25.
Says the Fly Hygeia— 5 : 235, My '27.
Some Recent Experiments in Fly-Control. Am. J. Pub. Health 18: 220-1 F '28.
Summer Time is Fly Time; Hygeia 5: 420-21 Ag. '27.
Swat the Early Fly Hvgeia 6: 224 Ap. '28.
335,923,200,000,000 in One Family — Mentor 14: 65 My '26.
Fly v. Civilization— Sc. Am. 132: 402 Je '25.
(Possibility of colonizing Africa with fly control.)
The class gained the following information briefly summarized
as principles for action:
(1) The fly is a public menace because:
(a) He breeds and lives in filth.
(b) He carries germs of many communicable diseases.
(c) He is an unattractive pest.
(2) The fly lives and breeds in decaying, moist, warm, organic
substances usually away from sunlight and air: e.g., out-of-door
open toilets, stables, garbage pails, soiled damp clothing or paper,
empty food cans, etc.
(3) The fly is a prolific breeder which passes through four
stages during its life history; it may be easily destroyed during
the first two — the egg and maggot stage; poisons, traps, and
screening help protect against the adult.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 375
(4) The fly rarely travels more than one hundred yards.
(5) The probable breeding places for the flies in and about the
school building are: (a) the barnyard directly across the street,
(b) empty lunch boxes and soiled decaying paper on edge of school
ground, and (c) the uncovered garbage cans over the school yard;
these conditions can and should be changed.
(6) The daily practice of eating lunches out-of-doors or wher-
ever child chooses, the careless disposal of lunch remnants and
general insanitary manner of eating lunches (no hand-washings
before and after lunch) all attract flies; these conditions can and
should be changed.
The class then decided to put on an Anti-Fly Campaign for
three weeks and set up and worked out the following activities as
essential to carrying on an effective piece of work.
(1) Securing the cooperation of school by means of room-to-
room talks, posters, and a play for assembly that educates school
children to the need for fly elimination.
(2) Organizing committees to care for the active war on flies.
(a) Committee to search for and list breeding places on
the grounds (mudholes and garbage, and the stable),
to prepare chemical (borax mixture) to kill eggs and
pupae, and to invite janitor to our meeting so as to
secure his aid in burning refuse, etc.
(b) A contest to discover best method for their killing
adult flies.
Committee of "Swatters" to secure swatters and kill flies —
Grade III, IV.
Committee of "Trappers" to make traps for baiting and catch-
ing flies.
Directions secured from Health Department. Oatmeal boxes
were adapted.
Committee of "Stick-Ems" to test out flypaper— Grade I, II.
Committee of "Screeners" to consider needs for out-of-door
toilets, windows and door screens — Grades VI and VII.
The committee reported to class and P. T. A.
(3) Planning a supervised lunch in room or at some definite
regular spot out-of-doors with a view to caring for waste in an
organized way, to giving opportunity for practicing hand-washing,
and to allowing opportunity for a quiet social period for eating.
The teachers were asked to work this out with each grade.
(4) Working out a way to provide sufficient covered garbage
cans for the school. A committee appointed to interview the
principal.
(5) Arranging for the janitor or some other responsible person
or grade committee to burn refuse and waste regularly. (He ap-
preciated being invited to class and cooperated.)
(6) Carrying the message of fly prevention to the entire school
community through news articles, posters, visiting scouting com-
mittees, letters to all homes in school area, exhibits, assembly pro-
grams (prepared during period for language and fine and in-
dustrial arts); sale of fly traps, poisons, etc., personal service in
376 Course of Study for the
screening and cleaning up premises where desired as phases of
industrial arts.
(7) Maintaining permanent look-out committee to get the first
fly, to report breeding places, etc.
4. Samples of Child's Product and Activities:
Exhibits: A glass jar containing a fly illustrating each of the
various stages of development; an adult fly under a magnifying
glass which reveals the hairy, sticky nature of his feet and body
with this caption: "Over 50,000 bacteria were once washed from
one hairy foot"; a well-constructed fly-trap; a sanitary garbage
can; pictures of sanitary dairies, china closets, baby cradles, homes,
etc.; original posters.
Some Topics Used for Posters:
The Death-Dealing Fly — This is a Picture of the Culprit
Condemned to be Killed on the Spot
A Germ-Carrier — Banish Him
Swat the First Fly of Spring
Kill the Winter Fly
Screen the Window
Screen the Door
Keep the Garbage Can Covered
Patronize the Grocer Who Screens His Wares
Patronize the Milkman Who Keeps a Flyless Dairy
Some Topics Used for Talks in Other Classrooms:
What the Fly Likes to Do
A Photograph of Our School's Worst Pest
Discovering the Fly's Strongholds and Destroying Them
The Fly as an Agent of Transportation (for Bacteria)
What the Grade Can Do About the Problem
Our Plans for the Anti-Fly Campaign
(a) Tell everybody why flies are not only disagreeable but are actually
dangerous.
(b) Clean-up the school and care for garbage properly.
(c) Screen the school.
(d) Get every person we can in neighborhood to care properly for the barn-
yard and garbage, dish-water, to screen his home, and make a fly-proof
toilet.
Summary of Content of Play Presented in Assembly:
Act I — Dramatization of the Fly Plague in Egypt. (Flies are
symbolized black insects who sweep upon the people and
destroy them.) Good opportunity for creative dancing or
rhythmic interpretations.
Act II — A Twentieth Century Interpretation of the Fly Plague:
Scene One is laid in the doctor's office and opens on a
conference with a farmer whose family is ill with typhoid.
A mother brings a baby suffering from diarrhea. A second
man enters and describes symptoms of illness of child in
family — another case of typhoid. In conversation it develops
all have flies at their homes except one where water has
been polluted by excreta. A committee of school boys enter
as volunteers to destroy breeding places and protect against
flies. They demonstrate plans. The doctor advertises vac-
cination against typhoid.
Scene Two — the following summer — Same characters re-
veal in conversation the fact that there are no flies and
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 377
why. Mr. Brown has a bin for the barnyard manure which
is treated periodically with a borax solution. Mr. Smith
scatters his immediately upon the fields where sunshine and
air prevent breeding. All have screened doors and windows
(actual cost for cotton and wire netting given). All have
covered garbage cans.
The Letter to the Patrons of the School:
Dear Patron :
We are conducting an Anti-Fly Campaign because we have learned that he is
not only a filthy insect, but a very dangerous one. We have learned, too, that he
can be controlled by covering or treating all body waste or garbage with a simple
solution of borax, and by screening and protecting the food, the sick, and the win-
dows and doors of our homes.
If you have screened your home, please write "Yes" after this sentence; if not,
write "No."
If you have treated your barnyard refuse with borax solution, write "Yes."
. - Is the number of flies reduced?
Please return this letter at the end of three weeks.
Sincerely,
The Seventh Grade.
The Letter to the Man Who Owned the Barnyard across the Street:
, N. C.
April IS, 1930.
My dear Mr :
We have read in our health book that borax solution will kill the eggs and
maggots found in stables. May we try this experiment out in your barn? You live
near our school and we would like to do this at some time convenient to you.
Sincerely,
Charles S , Secretary Seventh Grade.
5. Checks on the Work: The class said the results in the fol-
lowing items would determine how successful they were (actual
results given in parentheses).
a. The number of covered garbage cans secured by the school.
(All had covers — each grade teacher donated half the price
of one.)
b. The number of rooms having a supervised lunch period in-
doors or out-of-doors where no food remnants or lunch
papers were left about. (All did this well as a general
inspection committee visited the rooms or places assigned
the various grades each day following the lunch hour. In-
doors the desk was always covered with a square of com-
mercial wrapping paper. This was later folded and put in
the waste basket or if out-of-doors in the garbage can.)
c. The number of screened windows for each room. (All — the
P. T. A. supplied the funds and the older boys put in the
screens.)
d. The condition of the school ground. (Several low places
where water often stood for days were filled with ashes
from the furnace and the papers, boxes and cans were
removed.
e. The interest of parents. (Each child in the grade reported
whether or not his parents were doing anything to combat
flies. Lots of children used the borax solution in the stables
and reported favorable results.)
f. The absence of flies at the entrances and in the school build-
ing. (Very much improved.)
g. Provision for future protection. (A permanent "Look-Out
Committee" for each grade to kill all flies in sight.)
h. Best method for fighting adult flies. (The swatter where
only an occasional one; the paper or trap if there is no one
to be actively working at swatting.)
i. Other ideas about Clean-Up Days. (It was suggested that
roaches, fleas, and rats might be eradicated.)
378 Course of Study for the
j. An examination prepared by the seventh grade for the school
to see what it had learned about flies:
Fill blanks with words which completed the meaning and make
true statements:
The foot and leg of the fly are covered with
The baby fly is called a.—
The place most favorable to fly-breeding is the
Name three diseases which flies carry: , , .
If the following statements are true write "Yes" after them;
if false, write "No":
The fly travels a great distance. ._
The fly can carry a cold germ.
The fly can carry a measles germ.
The fly begins to lay eggs after fourteen days
The fly egg hatches after one day. .
The fly does not thrive in cleanliness and sunshine.
Food should always be covered from flies.
Only the fly can carry the typhoid bacteria.
A single fly might cause many deaths in one family or the whole neighbor-
hood.
Check (V) the best answer in the following:
The best way to avoid having typhoid is to:
a. Kill all the flies.
b. Destroy all the flies and treat all breeding places.
c. Take the typhoid vaccine.
d. Kill flies, destroy breeding places, and take vaccine.
III. How May Health Achievements be Measured?
Measuring health gains is an essential part of the health program. It
is the only means of determining whether or not desirable habits, atti-
tudes and information have been established — what additional information
and attitudes most need to be emphasized — and what methods and ma-
terials are most useful in effecting these outcomes.
It is hoped that the set-up of this entire program is such that health
behavior rather than health knowledge is the impoitant factor. As atti-
tudes and knowledge effect behavior in other respects, it would appear
that the same would be true in health. Then, the attempt to measure
achievement should include some scheme for appraising outcomes as they
are expressed in terms of attitudes, habits, and information listed for the
different grade levels. Care should be taken that checking devices do not
encourage pupils to misrepresent the truth. With this in view suggestions
made below should help teacher and others responsible for health pro-
gram to check definitely and regularly on the effectiveness of various
activities.
A. Attitudes — No satisfactory tests have been worked out for determining
attitudes, but there are many subjective ways and some paper and
pencil means of finding out the attitude of the pupil, teacher, and
parent toward health itself, toward health practices, and toward the
school health personnel and program. Direct observation of the spe-
cific health trait actions listed by grades is the surest means now
available or practical from the standpoint of the teacher.
B. Health Habits — Information concerning health practice may be secured
from direct observation or from reports or questionnaires.
Direct observations may be made by the teacher, the nurse, the
parent, or another pupil. They may be conducted as a survey of re-
sults along any one line where the responses are directly observable —
e.g., drinking milk at school, washing hands before lunch, brushing
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 379
the teeth, sleeping with open windows, or any number of other activi-
ties. Sometimes the teacher or pupils may initiate a drive in any one
activity and cooperate in observing and measuring growth in that
particular line. To arrive at an accurate estimate of health status,
however, two principles must be followed in securing and comparing
data about such items. A definite method of judging should be de-
termined upon and this method must be used under the same con-
ditions. For instance, the object may be to find out how many children
put pencils in their mouths during a three-minute writing exercise.
The children should not know the check is being made. This furnishes
a definite standard set of conditions under which to arrive at a knowl-
edge of the status of this habit. When the observation check is made
later, conditions must be the same.
Observations should include health behavior as it is revealed at
school, in the home, in the lunch room, on the playground, and on the
way to and from school.
Records of Health Habit Performance
1. Daily reports of pupils concerning health practices such as
sleep, vegetables eaten, or other activities will reflect health
habit status with a high degree of reliability if the child's
interest is centered upon attaining health and growth and not
upon the attainment of a perfect record. (See home score card
below.)
2. Unsigned questionnaires or special reports kept by the pupils
or teacher or both may be used from time to time to gather
information concerning the status, or the improvement, or retro-
gression in health habits.
a. See appendix of text Cleanliness and Health for discussion
of suggestions for pupil's questionnaires. One type follows
here:
HABIT QUESTIONNAIRE*
School Grade
What time did you go to bed last night?
What time did you get up this morning ?___ __
What did you eat for breakfast this morning?
What vegetables did you eat yesterday?
What fruit, either raw or cooked, did you eat yesterday ?.
What cereal did you eat yesterday?
How many glasses of milk did you drink yesterday?
How many glasses of water did you drink yesterday?
How many cups of coffee did you drink yesterday?
How many cups of tea did you drink yesterday?
Did you eat candy between meals yesterday?
How long did you play out-of-doors yesterday?
How many times did you brush your teeth yesterday?.
Have you had a bath during the last week?
*C. E. Turner, Dr. P. H., Journal of N. E. A., January, ly26.
380 Course of Study for the
b. The following parent's questionnaire was taken from Turn-
er's "Adventures in Health Education," N. E. A. Journal,
1926:
Has your child talked at home of things which he has learned?
Please check the following list of health habits to indicate those which he
has improved since health teaching began:
Going to bed earlier?
Spending more time out-of-doors?
Keeping himself more clean?
Brushing teeth more regularly?
Drinking more milk?
Eating more vegetables ?
Eating more fruit?
Eating more cereals?
Eating less candy between meals?
Eating foods which he had refused before?
Standing and sitting in better posture?
Has your child improved in health appearance as shown in bright eyes, clear
skin, good color, etc. ?
Do you think there has been a real improvement in health?
Have you noticed improvement in any of the following ways as a result of
better health:
More cheerful and good-natured in disposition?
More completely rested in the morning and more willing to get up
promptly?
Better appetite ?
(Note: "An Intelligence Test for Parents," The Parents' Magazine, 255
Fourth Avenue, _ New York City, will supply interesting material for
P. T. A. meeting. The Health Behavior Supplement, prepared by
Wood and Lerrigo, contains many excellent suggestions along this
line.)
c. Often children will make records in story or letter form tell-
ing what other health performances have been.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina
381
The following score card covering home health activities adapted from
that used by the Salisbury City Schools is suggestive of others to be
made by teacher and pupils. It should be simple, emphasizing only the
greatest needs. The number of activities should be increased gradually.
(This is too complicated to begin with.)
Responsibility for Health Habits.
Name of Parent or some other Person keeping record
.Week Name „
Habits
M
T
W
T
F
S
S
Remarks
Washes hands before eating
Washes hands after going to toilet
Brushes teeth twice a day
Eats only at regular meal hour
Chews food well
Eats sweets only after meals
Eats one raw vegetable and some fruit each day.
Does not drink tea or coffee
Drinks a glass of milk at each meal
Drinks at least four glasses of water daily
Goes to the toilet regularly (preferably before
and after breakfast)
Eats one vegetable other than potato daily
Keeps fingers away from nose and mouth
Carries and uses a clean handkerchief each day..
Keeps hands, face, clothes and hair clean
Remembers to put on extra coat when going
out in cold weather
Does not take hard exercise after meals
Puts on rubbers in rainy bad weather
"Goes out" only on Friday or Saturday evenings
Sleeps with windows open at least nine hours
Plays out of doors at least ore hour after school..
Keeps head and chest up — does not loll when
the weather permits
Takes a bath twice a week
Washes, hands, face, and cleans nails daily
Removes outdoor clothing in the house
Key — Check each item he performs for himself. Cross mark when he forgets, and has to be told.
Make no mark until you discover some evidence that the child is conscious of habit. This
record should probably be kept over a period of from two to six weeks.
382 Course of Study for the
C. Paper and Pencil Tests of Health Knowledge Mastered — Few satis-
factory tests of this type have been devised. Health Education Tests
(A. C. H. A. bulletin, 60<) describes the Franzen Battery.
Sample set of test forms — story, matching, true-false, five rules,
time — without scoring keys, No. AS 136, 25 cents.
Each test may be secured in lots of 50 with scoring key as follows:
Five Rules Test No. AS 129 $ .36
Matching Test No. AS 130 .55
Story Test No. AS 131 1.80
Time Test No. AS 132 .36
True-False Test No. AS 133 1.50
These are not recommended for routine use but are suggestive
types of informal tests. Wherever experimental work is being done
and evaluation giving distinction between groups and individuals is
desired, these tests will prove useful. The Gates-Strang Health
Knowledge Tests are the best type now available. Concepts listed
should be used as bases of many informal teacher-made tests. (Public
School Publishing Company, Bloomington, 111.)
D. Measurement of Total Health Status — Satisfactory attainment of the
standards listed in score card below should entitle a child in the
elementary grades to receive some form of recognition for Health
Achievement in May of each year. (It is understood that each com-
munity or school should decide on its own standard.)
*A HEALTHFUL BODY— (Judged by physician, nurse, and teacher) 35 points
Child must have a thorough examination early in the school year, with a com-
plete record filed on the school card.
1. Satisfactory gains in weight.
2. Normal condition of all organs and systems.
3. Normal condition of bony structure of body.
4. Freedom from defect or chronic disease. Child's appearance, working energy,
and school attendance must show a fine state of health.
IMMUNITY TO SMALLPOX, DIPHTHERIA, TYPHOID—
(Judged by physician) . IS points
(Five points for each immunity)
FAITHFUL PRACTICE OF HEALTH HABITS AT HOME—
(Judged by parents or older person covering these items) 20 points
1. Neatness and cleanliness.
2. Food and eating.
3. Sleep and rest.
4. Exercise and fresh air.
5. Clothing and dress.
FAITHFUL PRACTICE OF HEALTH HABITS AT SCHOOL—
(Judged by teacher covering the following items) 20 points
1. Neatness and cleanliness.
2. Food and eating.
3. Work, play, and exercise.
4. Dress.
5. Protection of self and others.
GOOD CITIZENSHIP BEHAVIOR— (Judged by teacher) .....5 points
See trait list in citizenship course.
INTELLIGENCE REGARDING HEALTH EXPERIENCES 5 points
According to age and grade (judged by teacher).
Total 100 points
•Adapted from form proposed by the School of Education, Peabody College, Nashville,
Tennessee.
Elementary Schools op North Carolina 383
E. Measurement of Teacher Control With Regard to Health Promotion —
"A Tentative Analysis of Teaching in Nursery School, Kindergarten,
and First Grade,"* by Dr. Winifred Bain, gives an excellently graded
scale on five different levels with definite standards for rating teachers
on the following items connected directly with physical and mental
health :
1. Seeing to it that children form desirable habits and attitudes in
promoting cleanliness and order in the school situation.
2. Adapting the temperature, lighting, and ventilation of the room to
varying needs during the day.
3. Seeing that children maintain personal care and cleanliness in a
way which promotes habits, healthful living and social responsi-
bility.
4. Regulating wraps to weather conditions.
5. Giving children joyous and socially profitable out-of-door play
every day when weather is suitable.
6. Protecting children from physical danger and establishing habits
of cautions which are free from fear.
7. Promoting desirable postural habits and development.
8. Preventing contagion and developing habitual sanitary practices.
9. Using effective methods for establishing good habits of eating and
proper attitudes toward food.
10. Making intelligent effort toward the establishment of desirable
habits and attitudes toward elimination.
11. Providing a social organization which allows freedom for choice in
activities, giving children practice in social responsibilities, and
helping them to recognize authority as an aid to social well-being.
12. Promoting standards for social-moral conduct of children in the
social situation.
13. Promoting wholesome emotional adjustment.
14. Arranging an environment conducive to educationally constructive
work and play.
15. Guiding children to constructive thinking, desirable habits and
skills through creative use of tools and play materials.
16. Stimulating children to find and solve their own problems.
17. Providing educative experiences which are extra-curricular.
18. Guiding children in their investigations and interpretation of mean-
ings in social life and nature.
19. Guiding children to profitable use of their natural tendencies
toward dramatic or representative play, which promotes social co-
operation, problem solving, interpretation of experiences, and leads
to further activity and expression.
F. The School Grounds and Building —
The school grounds should:
Be free from paper, food, remnants, trash, lumber, other building
materials of all kinds, and standing pools of water.
Have carefully planned and constructed walks and driveways.
Allow ample space (about 50 square feet per child) for playground
away from highways and preferably at the rear or sides of the
building.
•"Teachers' College Publication, Columbia University, 250.
384 Course op Study for the
Be improved where possible with flowers, trees, and shrubs. (Mem-
ber of the Division of Schoolhouse Planting and Planning, State
Department of Education, will upon request gladly visit a school
and make suggestions.)
Provide for regular space given to storing, loading and unloading
the school trucks.
Be supplied with drinking water facilities safe from drainage of
privies, stables, and similar places, and adapted to sizes of vari-
ous pupils.
CNote: If the source is a spring or well, it should be walled up and covered
with concrete. Surface water should be drained away from these through drains
or ditches. Where there are no fountains, individual cups should be provided.
Sanitary fountains are those which make it impossible for children to touch the
bubbler with lips while drinking and for water which has touched lips to fall back
into stream.)
Have (if toilets are outdoors) at least two separate privies built
according to plans furnished free by the Bureau of Sanitation,
State Department of Health, which provide against flies getting
to excreta — through cracks, ventilators, or open seats — and which
are adapted to sizes of pupils. (The care of these buildings is
under supervision of principal or teacher and they should be as
thoroughly cleaned as any other room.)
Have seats in shady places for resting and eating (when lunch is
taken out-of-doors).
The building should:
Have all outside doors opening outward.
Have all inside doors opening into halls.
Have fire escapes for upper floors when there are not sufficient
stairways and exits.
Be supplied with indoor drinking facilities which together with
those out-of-doors give an average of a bubbler for every 60-70
children that is suited in height to all ages represented in school
and is so constructed that children cannot touch bubbler with
lips and it does not permit water touched to flow back in stream.
(If a container is used, it should be covered. Only individual
cups should be permitted.)
Have at least two separate indoor toilets (if school is equipped with
sewerage facilities) with a seat for every 25 pupils; thoroughly
cleaned, ventilated and deodorized each day; inspected daily by
teacher or principal; free from all markings; painted with wash-
able paint; screened against flies; provided with adequate hand-
washing facilities and trash receptacles.
Be fitted throughout with such heating and ventilating facilities as
will maintain a continuous, natural flow of fresh, moist air, and
a standard of 65° -70° during cold weather, thus eliminating need
for common habit of wearing wraps and hats indoors.
Be fitted throughout with adequate closet or screened off space
(cool and well-ventilated) for the shelves to carry lunches and
the books for hanging each individual's hat and coat. (These
should be placed with reference to height of children.)
Be supplied throughout with dustless chalk, sweeping compound
(damp sawdust or dampened bits of paper may often be used),
dampened dusting cloths, brooms, and floor or furniture oil.
Have a clean, orderly central closet or space for storing cleaning
equipment and supplies, teaching materials used by more than
one teacher (scales, pictures, maps, books, vases) and, first aid
supplies.
Have a central bulletin board for displaying materials of common
interest to the school group.
Be thoroughly cleaned and ventilated every day after the exercises
of the day are concluded during the school term and often during
the summer months.
Have permanent filing equipment for individual health records.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 385
Provide throughout for the admission of light from the east or
west and from the pupil's left or rear with a total light area of
approximately 25% of the floor area. (Windows should be
grouped in batteries of five or six units at least five feet from
front, with narrowest possible mullions, four feet from floor and
reaching as near the ceiling as possible.)
Make provision for hot lunch equipment. (See "The Lunch Hour at
School," Department of Interior, Bureau of Education Bulletin.)
Each classroom should:
Be fitted with a teacher's desk kept in good order as a matter of
convenience and example, with a seat for every child (preferably
movable individual tables and chairs), suited to size of children,
(they should permit comfortably resting both feet on floor and
be sufficiently close together to avoid body strain).
Have a bookcase or closet for storing in an orderly way books
and other materials.
Keep a thermometer that registers.
Have an attractive wastebasket which is emptied as often as neces-
sary and which really holds the trash.
Be supplied with adjustable, translucent tan or cream shades, hung
from top and center of windows.
Be fitted with clean blackboards (slate type preferable), placed
with reference to heights of children, clean chalk trays and
erasers, suitable pictures, artistic plants, flowers, and vases.
Allow fifteen square feet of floor space and two hundred cu. ft. of
air per child.
Contain a lavatory or other hand-washing facilities (see page 391)
which are kept clean.
References :
M. I. T. School Health Appraisal — Form I for Elementary Schools, Form II for Rural
Schools — Department of Biology and Public Health, Massachusetts Institute of Tech-
nology, Cambridge, Mass.
School Activities and Equipment for the Elementary School — Knox. Houghton, $2.00.
Educational Hygiene — Aver ill. Houghton.
School Hygiene — Dresslar. Macmillan.
Standards for High Schools — Standards for Elementary Schools — Straver-Englehardt.
Bureau of Publications, Teachers College.
Standards for the Elementary Schools, 1924-25 — State Department of Education.
Health for School Children — School Health Studies No. 1, U. S. Department of Interior.
G. Measurement of School Health Program —
1. Growth Status— Regular gain in weight and height from month to
month is some indication of health since the healthy organism does
not naturally cease to grow over any great length of time. To
secure comparable results weighing must be done at the same
time of day and under the same standard conditions. Failure to
gain over a period of one month is not a danger signal but failure
over a period of three or four months calls for an examination
of the individual's health habits and probably consultation with
the doctor or nurse. Underweight alone does not necessarily mean
that malnutrition is present. All children cannot be brought up
to average weight. The value of a health program for the indi-
vidual or the group cannot be determined by the number or per-
cent of children in the underweight group. This will readily be
seen when it is recognized, for example, that some children are
thin because of nutritional needs while others are thin because they
possess slender skeletons.
2. The number of corrections of physical defects also constitutes one
measure of health growth.
386 Course of Study for the
3. Where school health surveys are made, an analysis of these from
year to year should reveal the trend of health conditions. (School
Health Appraisal Forms — Summary Sheets, Nos. I and II, published
by the Department of Biology and Public Health, Massachusetts
Institute of Technology, Cambridge, Massachusetts, should prove
helpful.)
4. The number of successful immunizations against typhoid, small-
pox, colds, and diphtheria is an indication of how successful the
school health program is in this respect.
5. Physical ability tests for the various grade levels constitute some
measure of physical accomplishment where special skills and prac-
tice effects can be eliminated — See Course in Physical Education.
6. Attendance records do not furnish reliable health indications be-
cause they are affected by epidemic and climatic conditions over
which genuine health has no control. Illness records would help
toward interpreting growth results. An individual's attendance
record might upon diagnosis prove to be some index.
7. General observation to note growth in health attributes (page 378).
8. The increase in facilities for health service and supervision also
constitute an index to the vitality of the health program.
PART THREE: REFERENCE MATERIALS
I. Bibliography and Key to References and Materials for Pupils
and Teacher.
Because each topic discussed in the foregoing pages is followed by a
list of sources thought to be the most pertinent and helpful now avail-
able, a full cumulative reference bibliography has been omitted. In order
that the teacher may realize the full value of the very rich materials
indicated throughout it is recommended that she always read the lists
under similar topics for the grades preceding and following the one of
immediate interest to her. Since there are a number of common refer-
ences, for the sake of further economy in space abbreviations have been
used in connection with those for grade topics. The limited list below
is given merely a^ a key. (Note: Numerals in parentheses indicate
most common grade placements; the others refer to prices.)
Ill — The Voyage of Growing-up (3) — Turner-Hallock. Heath.
IV — In Training for Health (4) — Turner-Pinckney. Heath.
*V— Health (5)— -Turner-Collins. Heath, 630.
*VI — Health and Cleanliness (6) — Turner-Collins. Heath, 690.
VII — Community Health (7) — Turner-Collins. Heath.
A. B. — Science and the Way to Health — Andress and Brown. Ginn.
A. C. H. A. — American Child Health Association, 370 Seventh Ave., New York.
A. S. H. A. — American Social Hygiene Association, 370 Seventh Ave., New York.
Averill — Educational Hygiene. Houghton.
Bailey, R. R.— Sure Pop and the Safety Scouts. World, 520.
B. G. W. — Boys and Girls of Wake-up Town (4-6)-— Andress-Evans. Ginn, 660.
B. S. B. — Building Strong Bodies — Hutchinson. Houghton, 610.
Buice — Health Science and Education. John Wiley.
C. I. — Cleanliness Institute — 45 East Seventeenth St., New York City.
H. B. — Health Behavior — Wood and Lerrigo. Public School Pub., $2.80.
H. B. S. — Health Behavior Supplement — Wood and Lerrigo. Public School Pub., 350.
H. C. — Health and Good Citizenship, II (6, 7, 8) — Andress and Evans. Ginn, 960.
H. H. I. — Health Habits, Bk. I — Burkard, Chambers, Maroney. Lyons.
H. H. I T . — Health Habits, Bk. II — Burkard, Chambers, Maroney. Lyons.
H. P. E. — Health and Physical Education — Myers and Bird. Doubleday, $2.00.
H. W. — Land of Health — Hallock and Winslow. Merrill, 720.
"State adopted basal texts for the course in health.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 387
H. S. — Health and Success (6, 7) — Andress and Evans. Ginn, 76$.
H. S. — Keep Well Stories for Little Folks. Lippincott.
L. O. H. — Laws of Health and How to Teach Them — Winslow and Williamson. Mer-
rill, $1.60.
L. S. I. — Safety Hill and Health — Lummis-Schawe. World.
L. S. II. — Building my House of Health — Lummis-Schawe. World.
L. S. II. — Road of Health to Grown-up Town — Lummis-Schawe. World.
M. L. I. — Metropolitan Life Insurance Co., School Health Bureau, N. Y. C. Materials.
Moulton — Adventurers in Health. Little.
N. B. — The Way to Keep Well — Newmayer and Broome.
N. D. C. — National Dairy Council, 910 S. Michigan Ave., Chicago, 111. Free materials.
N. H. L. I. — New Healthy Living, Book I — Winslow and Hahn. Merrill; 84<$.
N. H. L. II.— New Healthy Living, Book II— Winslow and Hahn. Merrill, $1.00.
N. N. E. — Nutrition Notes for Elementary Teachers — McCormick. University of the
State of New York Press, Albany, N. Y.
O. D. L. — III, IV, V, VI, VII — Open Door Language Series — State Adopted Texts.
Houghton.
O. H. H.— Our Health Habits— Whitcomb-Beveridge. Rand, $1.73.
Payne — We and Our Health, Bks. I and II. American Viewpoint.
P. H. — Physiology and Health — Turner. Heath.
P. P. H. — Personal and Public Health — Burkard, Chambers, Maroney. Lyons.
S. H. H. — Stories of Health and Happiness — Jenkins. Merrill, 68(5.
S. S. H. — Science in the Service of Health — Downing. Longmans.
S. T. F. — Scientific Temperance Federation, 400 Boylston St., Boston, Mass.
II. Other Sources from Which Health Education Materials May
be Obtained.
Organizations Which Publish Health Material
American Medical Association, 535 N. Dearborn St., Chicago, 111.
American Posture League, 1 Madison Ave., New York City.
American Red Cross, Washington, D. C.
American Social Hygiene Association, 370 Seventh Ave., New York City.
Association for the Prevention and Relief of Heart Diseases, 370 Seventh Ave., New
York City.
*Boy Scouts of America, 200 Fifth Ave., New York City.
*Camp Fire Girls, 527 Fifth Ave., New York City.
*Child Study Association of America, Inc., 54 West 74th St., New York City.
*Children's Bureau, U. S. Department of Labor, Washington, D. C.
Commonwealth Fund, 578 Madison Ave., New York City.
Elizabeth McCormick Memorial Fund, 848 N. Dearborn St., Chicago, 111.
Life Extension Institute, 25 West 45th St., New York City.
Metropolitan Life Insurance Company, 1 Madison Ave., New York City.
National Child Welfare Association, 70 Fifth Ave., New York City.
National Committee for Mental Hygiene, 370 Seventh Ave., New York City.
National Congress of Parents and Teachers, 1201 Sixteenth St., Washington, D. C.
National Health Council, 370 Seventh Ave., New York City.
National Organization for Public Health Nursing, 370 Seventh Ave., New York City.
National Safety Council, 168 N. Michigan Ave., Chicago, 111.
National Society for the Prevention of Blindness, 370 Seventh Ave., New York City.
National Woman's Christian Temperance Union, Evanston, 111.
Natural History Museum, New York City. Exhibits and slides.
Playground and Recreation Association of America, 315 Fourth Ave., New York City.
The Rockefeller Foundation, 61 Broadway, New York City.
The Russell Sage Foundation, 130 East 22nd St., New York City.
Scientific Temperance Federation, 400 Boylston St., Boston, Mass.
Society for the Study and Control of Cancer, 370 Seventh Ave., New York City.
State Boards of Health.
State Tuberculosis Associations.
Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C. Price list of government publications
on health.
*United States Department of Agriculture, Washington, D. C.
*United States Public Health Service. Washington, D. C.
Women's Foundation for Health, 370 Seventh Ave., New York City.
Women's Press, 600 Lexington Ave., New York City.
Health Films
A list of films may be secured from the National Health Council, 370
Seventh Avenue, New York City. This list, prepared in 1928, contains a
classified list of health films organized according to subject matter, a list
of local distributors by states, and a list of national distributors. Several
hundred films are listed. The list is free.
"■Preferred references.
388 Course of Study for the
Magazines
1. American Journal of Public Health and The Nation's Health. American Public Health
Association, 370 Seventh Ave., New York City.
2. Child Health Bulletin. The American Child Health Association, 370 Seventh Ave., New
York City.
3. Child Study Magazine. Child Study Association of America, 54 West 74 Street, New
York City.
4. Child Welfare. The National Parent-Teachers Magazine. Subscription Offices: 5517 Ger-
mantown Ave., Philadelphia, Pa.
5. Hygeia. American Medical Association, 535 N. Dearborn St., Chicago, 111.
6. Journal of Health and Physical Education. American Physical Education Association,
P. O. Box 362, Ann Arbor, Michigan.
7. Journal of the National Education Association, 1201 Sixteenth St., Washington, D. C.
8. Journal of the Outdoor Life. National Tuberculosis Association, 370 Seventh Avenue,
New York City.
9. Library Index. National Health Library, 370 Seventh Avenue, New York City. Issued
weekly. Gives classified references to articles about health in many current journals.
10. Nature Magazine. American Nature Association, 1214 Sixteenth Street, N. W, Wash-
ington, D. C.
11. Parents' Magazine. The Parents' Publishing Association, Inc., 255 Fourth Avenue, New
York City.
12. Public Health Nurse. National Organization for Public Health Nursing, Inc., 370 Sev-
enth Ave., New York City.
13. School Life. Office of Education, Department of Interior, Washington, D. C. (Send sub-
scriptions to Superintendent of Documents, Government Printing Office, Washington,
D. C. 500 a year.)
Selected List of Health Education Materials
American Child Health Association, 370 Seventh Avenue, New York
City.
A complete list of publications may be secured by writing to the Association. Many of
these publications have already been listed.
Joint Committee on Health Problems in Education of the National
Education Association and the American Medical Association. Washing-
ton, D. C. : National Education Association.
Reports:
"Minimum Health Requirements for Rural Schools," 1920, 8p. 100.
"Health Essentials for Rural School Children," 1921, 24p. 150.
"Health Chart Report" (illustrated), 1928, 64p. 250.
"Health Improvement in Rural Schools," 1922, 52p. 250.
"Health Service in City Schools," 1922, 40p. 250.
"Health Education — A Program for Public Schools and Teacher Training Institutions,"
revised edition, 1930, 251p. Cloth, $1.75; paper, $1.25.
"Ventilation of School Buildings," 1925, 8p. 150.
"Daylight in the Schoolroom," 1921, 8p. 50.
"The Teacher's Part in Social Hygiene," 1926, 20p. gratis.
Charts :
Sixty "Exhibit Charts" illustrating health problems in education. Size, 22x28. Prices:
single charts, 500; any 5 charts, $2.25; any 10 charts, $4.00; 25 charts or more,
350 each; 50 charts or more, 300 each.
National Tuberculosis Association, 370 Seventh Avenue, New York
City.
Write for list of publications. Health plays, posters, pamphlets, etc. "Health Teaching
in Schools, A Manual for Teachers."
Office of Education, Department of Interior, Washington, D. C.
Health Education Series:
No. 1. Wanted, Teachers to Enlist for Child Health Service.
*No. 2. Diet for the School Child.
No. 3. Summer Health and Play School.
No. 4. Teaching Health. Lucy Oppen.
No. 5. Child Health Program for Parent-Teacher Associations and Women's Clubs.
Lucy W. Collier.
No. 6. Further Steps in Teaching Health.
*No. 7. The Lunch Hour at School. Katherine A. Fisher.
*No. 8. Health Training for Teachers. R. G. Leavitt.
No. 9. Your Opportunity in the Schools. L. Emmett Holt.
No. 10. Suggestions for a Program of Health Teaching in Elementary Schools. J. Mace
Andress and Mabel C. Bragg.
No. 11. Milk and Our School Children. Bernice C. Reaney.
*No. 12. Sleep. Harriet Wedgwood.
''Preferred references.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 389
No. 13. Dramatics for Health Teaching.
No. 14. The Kindergarten and Health. Arnold Gesell and Julia Wade Abbot.
No. 15. Suggestions for a Program for Health Teaching in the High School. Dorothy
Hutchinson.
No. 16. The Continuing Need for Teachers of Child Health. Dorothy Hutchinson and
and Harriet Wedgwood.
No. 17. Helps for the Rural School Nurse. Harriet Wedgwood and Hazel Wedgwood.
No. 19. Is Your Child Ready for School? J. F. Rogers.
No. 20. Better Teeth. J. F. Rogers.
Nos. 10, 17, 19, and 20 are 100; the others are 50 each.
III. Symptoms for Which a Child Should be Sent Home or Re-
ferred to the Doctor or Nurse or Segregated from the Rest
of the School.
A. Indications of Illness
1. Running eyes and discharging nose suggestive of acute coryza
(cold) or the beginning of measles.
2. Sores on the scalp suggestive of favus, ringworm, impetigo, or
pediculosis.
3. Sores on the face or body suggestive of impetigo, ringworm, or
scabies.
4. Sore throat.
5. Skin rash suggestive of measles, scarlet fever, or rubella.
6. Swollen glands suggestive of measles, sore throat, bad teeth,
mumps.
B. Indications of Physical Defects
1. Eyes
Red, inflamed lids, formation of scales about margins of lids.
Frequent styes.
Inflamed eye-ball (the outer coat being pink instead of white).
Tendency of the child to rub the eyes frequently.
Blinking of the eyes and avoidance of light.
Tilting of the head to various angles.
Excessive tears in the eyes, or any discharge from the lids, or
conjunctiva.
Habitually holding work close to the face, or bending over the
desk.
Squint, or eyes not parallel when child looks straight ahead
(cross eyes).
2. Ears
Failure to answer, misunderstanding and incorrect answers to
questions, or saying "what?"
Turning the head to one side when spoken to.
Apparent inattention when the person speaking cannot be seen
by the child.
A facial expression indicating that the child is not aware of all
that is going on about him.
Failure to associate naturally with other children.
Discharge or odor from the ear.
Ear-ache.
Picking at the ear.
Defective speech, improper forming of sound elements or un-
natural pitch of the voice (high, low, or monotonous tone).
3. Nose and Throat
Mouth breathing. Coughing.
Discharge from the nose. Frequent colds and sore throat.
Snuffling. Underweight.
&
03 jj
"S d_2 a> «s
co— 1 "ot3„
aj£>d d 2
a>:3 a>"3 o
4) 03 > *,£.
WQgH S
; o i
Nib
OS u 3
PA, 3 o
-35
."S°°d
^■^ a d °
Sfld g 8
5" 03 §.2 M
P5 ScS £
.a o
If
sa
iC m 00 3
3-3.2 *
Q"*oc ■ •
S-* oj
E a> 03
«»•
8 >S
.5-3 a:
a>|.2
S>
2 -fB
O
03 03
1-1 a£
d M d 13
a O S d
|K5«J
a S
■ QJ 3 £ £
03.2-2 3 Sd
-d 2^3 S'C 03
o. d p gy
"?Ja Sd
CN~ 60 O
.SvS
.13
gd
a.2
d i>
£S
T) a
S o
MS
a >
fer_3
it*
03 ^q
O S <« d ^ ,
pJ2> d 3 o 1
0) 03 > ■y,~-
\4Q gH g I
r*C* 00
"8-* 2
co o 3
03 Q,«_,
^Jg M
T3 g
.0*. d*
"3" ° 3 m
"9" 03 "^
1 0^|"d
■2 - te °
a 3-g g-2
£ g 03 gi2
js i-.s~^a
s§g^ M
oTjS d---a
tfPL,o>S!:S^
3 £ * n a
■-„•- a &
1 ©
bfl'S i m », . § g
|5 0.1 §|"a s
S< PQ HPh£
• 2 S 'la
h
pq g m* ° 43
o 03 03
to a d
a'S'S
o a © c o
co x t-i oj 03
O-S 03 gi
t:£0S;-
en S 03^
t) o-g^d g
£ a » co-d
a> S
a>
, - > d
•3-° g S
JO*'
°5,2 CD
"O^ ^ CD
a
d 3 a >>a
o a s
_ - o> -,.2
-a co w 03— •
« §2 d'S
&0 H O JJ
k>—rt 03 d
■3 a
03
2 d
Sgfla,
§ s ^
o'3-g'd
S o^ a
0d «
cawJd
°I
d d
• cu o
•aS°
d d £ d
O MO»
••s.2'0 5
« I
2 >>a a '^
d 03 a ■*
ih £J2 d
a.2 rt n| d
0^ 2 0; 3.2
-d o
I-
. Ml C
l'0
5 £ 5 «
"-log-
o 03 » £
3 BTl H
Qg^oi
Mi
-2 2 —
"g d d
-»-b a °
2 o g"0
-W d £ g
ClMO*
O o3><- aj
0; 5gg
ffl'gS Md* (n -
^3 >,"." 03 «
&}? og J
■g^ d >>o3 S g
o£ w 03 CB > o3
>
a cd^^
o d o
o OJ o
PM ^ d
fc. >> Sh
O 03 o3
"Sa
ci«fl
„ d 03
"03 dj3
o a to
^'§a
p a> 03
&3T3CC
d
si
BoT}-d
S Sf
1 a^O
,2 0) M
§1
s.9g^
>>P d o
0)73^
a">*.3
g-3°S^
WQJswg
o d-je
8« g^
-S(2 £.2
>» >i >^ >i >>
d m
03^3
O 03 ft
M
, ■ m2
f-.-aojftcup^os
"co °^5 c
03 J g ft
"a"e3 o >.
o > -c
o d^,_,
QS5.
g^a
„2ff(D
m^-O 4)
3 "3 m
^a a.|s|
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 391
V. Some Specific Cleanliness Techniques.
A. Methods of Hand-Washing:*
1. With Running Water Installed:
Wetting — child forms cup shape with hands and allows water to run over the
hands and wrists.
Soaping — (a) If powder or liquid, cup shape as in "wetting"; (b) if cake, rub
between hands.
Lathering — by rubbing hands over each other and over wrists.
Cleaning Nails — by use of toothpick or individual orange-stick.
Rinsing — by allowing water to run over the hands and wrists while continuing
the motions as in "lathering."
Drying — with individual towel until all moisture is gone. Be careful to dry the
cuticle thoroughly, pushing it back gently with the towel.
Tidying — (a) if bowl is used, rinse with clean water and wipe dry with used
towel; (b) deposit towels in proper waste towel basket.
2. Without Running Water Installed:
Equipment
Two large pitchers (gallon pails with one side bent to form spout).
Liquid soap container (old perfume or hair tonic bottle) .
Liquid soap.
Paper towel (each must use just one towel).
Flat toothpicks.
Two large buckets for waste water (for indoor use) .
Waste basket for used towels and toothpicks.
Supervisors
Teacher for soap monitor.
Two pupils for water monitors.
Method — Indoors
Place the waste buckets on a bench or stools about six feet apart.
A water monitor stands behind each stool.
Soap monitor stands between the buckets, nearer the first bucket.
Children form in line and approach first bucket, passing on as each step is
completed.
Wetting — child forms cup shape with hands and receives water over the bucket
so as not to spill on the floor. Rubs water over hands and wrists so entire
surface is wet.
Soaping — child again cups hands and soap monitor shakes soap over hands.
Lathering — by rubbing hands over each other and over wrists.
Cleaning Nails — child takes a toothpick with which to clean nails.
Rinsing — at second bucket, water is poured over hands and wrists for rinsing.
Drying — with individual towel until all moisture is gone. Be careful to dry the
cuticle thoroughly, pushing it back gently with the towel.
Tidying — deposit used towels in waste basket.
3. Method — Out-of-Doors :
Children form in two lines facing each other.
Wetting — children form cup shape with hands and water monitor passes down one
line and up the other, spilling a little water over each child's hands. Children
rub water over hands and wrists so entire surface is wet.
Soaping^children cup hands again and soap monitor passes down lines shaking
soap into hands.
Lathering — by rubbing hands over each other and over wrists.
Cleaning Nails — children take a toothpick with which to clean nails.
Rinsing — second water monitor passes down lines and pours on rinsing water.
Drying — with individual towel until all moisture is gone. Be careful to dry the
_ cuticle thoroughly, pushing it back gently with the towel.
Tidying — deposit used towels in waste basket.
Note: The habit of washing the hands before meals is one of the most vital of health
rules. Making this drill a part of the school routine immediately preceding the noon
lunch will be_ valuable in establishing this habit.
The entire time for this drill in a room of thirty pupils should not exceed five
minutes — and through practice, it can be done more quickly.
Washing to be done out-of-doors when weather permits.
B. Care of the Nails:*
1. Articles needed:
a. Basin with warm water, soap, towel, nailbrush, nail file, orange-stick, scissors.
2. File the edge of the nail until it has the curve of the end of the finger.
3. Place the hands in the basin and scrub thoroughly with soap and brush. Rinse well.
4. Dry hands thoroughly; be sure to dry the cuticle thoroughly, pushing it back gently
with the towel. Do not cut the cuticle.
^Course of Study in Cleanliness — Cleanliness Institute.
392 Course of Study for the
C. Care of the Hair:*
1. Articles needed:
a. A wash bowl.
b. Plenty of hot water.
c. Some cold water.
d. A mild soap.
e. One or two large towels.
2. Rub the scalp gently with the finger tips, then brush the hair thoroughly.
3. Fill the bowl with warm water, making a good soap lather and rub it thoroughly into
the scalp and through the hair.
4. For rinsing a warm spray is best. If this is not available, rinse several times in
clear, warm water, followed by a dash of cold.
5. Be sure no soap remains in the hair. Wipe thoroughly with towels. If possible dry
in the sun.
D. Method of Dish-Washing:*
1. To be thoroughly clean, dishes must be washed in hot, soapy water.
2. Articles needed:
a. Plenty of hot water.
b. A pan for washing and one for rinsing.
c. A wire basket for draining.
d. A clean dish cloth or dish mop.
e. Plenty of clean, dry towels.
Some authorities consider it best to drain the dishes and not wipe them.
3. Procedure:
a. Scrape food from the dishes into container.
b. Wipe off grease with soft paper, or flat rubber scraper.
c. Stack similar dishes together.
d. Wash dishes with soap and hot water, using mop on handle.
e. Rinse dishes in very hot v, ater.
f. See that pans, shelf, sink, table, etc., are clean.
g. Towels and dish cloth should be washed thoroughly in clean, hot water.
VI. North Carolina Laws Affecting Health Teaching and Super-
vision.
Consolidated Statutes — Section 7152: Parents required to report communicable diseases.
"It shall be the duty of every parent, guardian, or householder, in the order named, to
notify the county quarantine officer of the name, address, including the name of the school
district of any person in their .family or household about whom no physician has been con-
sulted, but whom they have reason to suspect being afflicted with whooping cough, measles,
diphtheria, scarlet fever, smallpox, infantile paralysis, typhoid fever, Asiatic cholera, typhus
fever, bubonic plague, yellow fever, or other disease declared by North Carolina State Board
of Health to be infectious or contagious."
If you do not obey you may be brought to court.
Penalty for Violation — Consolidated Statutes, 71S5:
"Any person willfully violating . . . any of the rules and regulations adopted by the
North Carolina State Board of Health for the control of the diseases mentioned in this
act ._ . . shall be guilty of a misdemeanor, and fined not exceeding fifty dollars ($50.00) or
imprisoned not more than thirty days, at the discretion of the court. In case the offender be
stricken with the disease for which he is quarantinable, he shall be subject to the penalty on
recovery, unless in the opinion of the Secretary of the North Carolina State Board of Health
the penalty should be omitted."
Sec. 5779. State Board of Health and State Superintendent to make rules for physical
examination. It shall be the duty of the_ State Board of Health and the State Superintendent
of Public Instruction to prepare and distribute to the teachers in all public schools of the
State instructions and rules and regulations for the physical examination of pupils attending
the public schools.
1919, c. 192, s. 1.
Sec. 5780. Teachers to make examinations; State covered every three years. Upon receipt
of such instructions, rules, and regulations, it shall be the duty of every teacher in the
public schools to make a physical examination of every child attending the school and enter
on cards and official_ forms furnished by the State Board of Health a record of such ex-
amination. The examination shall be made at the time directed by the State Board of Health
and the State Superintendent of Public Instruction, but every child shall be examined at
least once every three years. The State Board of Health and the State Superintendent of
Public Instruction shall so arrange the work as to cover the entire State once every three
years.
1919, c. 192, s. 2.
Sec. 5780 (a). Record cards transmitted to State Board of Health; punishment for
failure. The teacher shall transmit the record cards and other blank forms made by him or
her to the North Carolina State Board of Health, and if any teacher fails, within sixty days
after receiving the aforesaid forms and requests for examination and report, to make such
examination rnd renort as herein provided, the teacher shall be guilty of a misdemeanor and
subject to a fine of not less than ten dollars nor more than fifty dollars or thirty days in
prison.
1919, c. 192, s. 3.
^Reprinted from cleanliness outline by courtesy of the Cleanliness Institute.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 393
Sec. 5780 (b). Disposition of records; reexamination of pupils. The North Carolina State
Board of Health shall have the records filed by the teacher carefully studied and classified,
and shall notify the parent or guardian of every child whose card shows a serious physical
defect to bring such child before an agent of the State Board of Health on some day desig-
nated by the State Board of Health between the hours of nine a.m. and five p.m. for the
purpose of having said child thoroughly examined; and if, upon receipt of such notice, any
parent or guardian shall fail or refuse to bring said child before the agent of the State
Board of Health without good cause shown, he shall be guilty of a misdemeanor, and shall
be fined not less than five dollars nor more than fifty dollars or imprisoned not more than
thirty days: Provided, that the distance the child must be carried shall not exceed ten miles.
No pupil or minor shall be compelled to submit to medical examination or treatment
whose parent or guardian objects to the same. Such objection may be made by a written
and signed statement delivered to the pupil's teacher or_ to any person who might conduct
such examination or treatment in the absence of such objection.
1919, c. 192, s. 4.
Sec. 5780 (c). Treatment of pupils; expenses. Within thirty days after the completion of
the examination of the children by the agent of the State Board of Health, and after written
statement of the proper authority hereinafter designated, a sum not exceeding ten dollars per
hundred children enrolled in the county or city shall be paid to the State Board of Health
to be used exclusively for the purpose of treating school children for defects _ other than
dental, the same to be paid by the county commissioners of the county, and in cities or
towns having a separate school system, to be paid by the city manager, city council, city
board of aldermen, or city commissioners. Any funds so paid and not needed in enforcing
the provisions of this article shall be returned to the county or city from which it was
received.
1919, c. 192, s. 5.
Sec. 5780 (d). Free dental treatment; appropriation. For the purpose of providing free
dental treatment for as many children as possible each year, and to aid the State Board of
Health in making the examinations as provided for in this article, a special appropriation
not to exceed fifty thousand dollars per annum shall be set aside from the State Public
School Fund, and shall be paid by the Treasurer of the State of North Carolina on properly
signed requisition forms to the treasurer of the North Craolina State Board of Health.
1919, cc. 102, s. 14; 192, s. 6.
AN ACT TO PROTECT SCHOOL CHILDREN RIDING IN PUBLIC SCHOOL
BUSSES UPON THE PUBLIC ROADS AND HIGHWAYS OF THE STATE.
The General Assembly of North Carolina do enact:
Section 1. That no person operating any motor vehicle on the public roads shall pass,
or attempt to pass, any public school bus while the same is standing on the said public roads
taking on or putting off school children, without first bringing said motor vehicle to a full
stop at a distance not less than fifty feet from the said school bus.
Sec. 2. That any person violating the provisions of this act shall be guilty of a mis-
demeanor, and upon conviction shall be fined not to exceed fifty dollars, or imprisoned not
to exceed thirty days.
Sec. 3. That all laws and clauses of laws in conflict with the act are hereby repealed.
Sec. 4. That this act shall be in force and effect from and after its ratification.
Ratified this the 10th day of March, 1925.
1925, c. 265.
AN ACT TO REGULATE THE SPEED OF BUSSES CARRYING SCHOOL CHIL-
DREN.
The General Assembly of North Carolina do enact:
Section 1. That any person operating a bus carrying school children to or from the
schools of this State who shall travel at a greater rate of speed than twenty-five miles per
hour along any public street or public highway in the State of North Carolina shall be guilty
of a misdemeanor, and shall be punished by a fine not in excess of the sum of fifty dollars.
Sec. 2. That this act shall be in force from and after its ratification.
Ratified this the 10th day of March, 1925.
1925, c. 297.
Section 159. Health certificates required for teachers. Any person serving as county
superintendent, city superintendent, teacher, janitor, or any other employee in the_ public
schools of the State shall file in the office of superintendent each year, before assuming his
or her duties, a certificate from the county physician, or other reputable physician of the
county, certifying that the said person has not an open or active infectious state of tubercu-
losis, or any other contagious disease.
The county physician shall make the aforesaid certificate on a form supplied by the State
Superintendent of Public Instruction, and without charge to the person_ applying for the cer-
tification, and any person violating any of the provisions of this section shall be guilty of
a misdemeanor and subject to a fine or imprisonment in the discretion of the court.
394 Course of Study for the
an act to require the public schools of the state to furnish
adequate and scientific instruction in the subject of alco-
holism and narcotism.
The General Assembly of North Carolina do enact:
Section 1. In addition to health education, which is now required by law to be given in
all schools^ supported in whole or in part by public money, thorough and scientific instruction
shall be given in the subject of alcoholism and narcotism.
The State Superintendent of Public Instruction is hereby authorized and directed to pre-
pare, or cause to be prepared, for the use of all teachers who are required by this act to
give instruction in the subject of alcoholism and narcotism, a course of study on health
education, which shall embrace suggestions as to methods of instruction, outlines of lesson
plans, lists of accurate and scientific source material, suggested adaptations of the work to
the needs of the children in the several grades, and shall specify the kind of work to be
done in each grade, and the amount of time to be devoted to such instruction, which shall
in no case be less than ten lessons in any one grade in any one year on the subject of the
effects of alcoholism and narcotism on the human system. The work in this subject shall be
a part of the work required for promotion from one grade to another; provided, however,
nothing contained in this act shall be construed as requiring any additional text books, but
the instruction required shall be from text books already adopted and now in use in the
public schools of the State.
Sec. 2. In all normal schools, teacher-training classes, summer schools for teachers, and
other institutions giving instruction preparatory to teaching or to teachers actually in service,
adequate time and attention shall be given to the best methods in teaching health education,
with special reference to the nature of alcoholism and narcotism.
Sec. 3. It shall be the duty of all officers and teachers, principals and superintendents
in charge of any school or schools, comprehended within the meaning of this act, to comply
with its provisions; and any such officer or teacher who shall fail or refuse to comply with
the requirements of this act, shall be subject to dismissal by the proper authorities.
Sec. 4. This act shall be in full force and effect from and after its ratification.
In the General Assembly read three times and ratified, this the 6th dav of March. 1929.
1929, c. 96.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 395
ELEMENTARY SCIENCE
INTRODUCTION
"In early American history, nature education went hand in hand with
the three R's. To the pioneer, food and shelter, even life itself depended
upon keen observation of nature's ways. The American frontiersman
learned to know thoroughly the trees, the stars, even the habits of the
smallest animals and birds; and the obtaining of that knowledge, the
acquisition of that experience often necessarily took the place of other
education. Today it is not necessary for us to understand the ways of
nature to protect our lives from wild beasts and marauding Indians, but
dangers quite as great threaten society as a whole — dangers which can
likewise be met only by a careful study of nature and nature's ways." —
The Nature Almanacs — Pack and Palmer. While this quotation may have
come from an ultra-enthusiast, it nevertheless is indicative of the im-
portance of this subject in modern life. In this wonderful age of scientific
discoveries and inventions, where success and happiness depend much on
one's ability to know, understand and appreciate nature and nature's
laws, no subject could be made to contribute more to the education of the
elementary school child than science. Whatever differences of opinion
there may be with reference to this subject they would all deal with the
specific content of the course and the methods to be employed in its treat-
ment, rather than with the importance of the subject. It is not necessary,
then, to make a defense for the inclusion of the subject in the curriculum
of the elementary school.
THE SUBJECT DEFINED
Elementary Science is quite definitely related to many subjects of the
elementary school. It constitutes a large part of the knowledge side of
hygiene and health education, physical education, geography and civics.
It could form a basis for much in reading, language, art, etc. It is as-
sumed that much in the field of science will be treated directly or in-
directly in many subjects of the elementary school. With that under-
standing, science as here considered will be restricted to those general
fields which come rather definitely within the scope of pure science, and
which is therefore, least likely to have been duplicated or adequately
cared for in other subjects. Broadly speaking, the following categories
constitute a rough basis about which the science material may be organ-
ized or grouped:
1. Astronomy, which deals with the observable phenomena of the
earth in relation to the sun, moon, stars, planets and the inter-
stellar spaces.
2. Biology, dealing with the phenomena of living things.
3. Geology, which has to do with the earth and its rocks, minerals,
soils, etc.
4. Physics and Chemistry, which have to do with science phenomena
not included in the other groups, including those knowledges which
have to do with the laws observable in ail the other categories.
396 Course of Study for the
In view of the place which Nature Study has occupied in the cur-
riculum of the elementary school, it may be well to say a word about
that subject here. The general emphasis placed upon nature study, and
the point of view held with reference to it, restricted it largely to bio-
logical science. It has had to do with birds and flowers, with the chief
emphasis placed upon identification. Because of the sentimental attach-
ment which has grown up about nature study it has seemed wise not to
use that term, but to call the subject elementary science. It is under-
stood that this embraces all that has ever been included in the term
nature study, but at the same time makes it possible to ascribe a broader
interpretation to the field of knowledge which is represented by the sub-
ject under consideration. Those who have been accustomed to think in
terms of nature study may know it has been cared for in the term
elementary science, which it has seemed wise to use.
AIMS OF TEACHING ELEMENTARY SCIENCE
The Fourth Yearbook of the Department of Superintendence says:
"The ultimate aim of education to which nature study and elementary
science contribute is to produce a well-rounded individual, capable of liv-
ing a wholesome, happy life, and contributing worthily to the welfare
and happiness of others." In this same publication there appears a list
of aims which, while not belonging exclusively to nature study and ele-
mentary science, are nevertheless well fulfilled by the subject. All these
aims have merit and coincide with, supplement, or interpret the general
aims advocated in this course of study. Since that is true, and since
the detailed treatment and analysis given in that publication would prove
helpful to the teacher, they have been accepted in their entirety and
appear as follows:
A. Ethical Aims:
1. Ability to perceive the truth.
2. Belief in the value of the truth.
3. Desire to follow the truth — moral uprightness.
B. Spiritual Aims:
4. Realization of one's relationship to all other living things and to
the universe as a whole, and of one's dependence upon his fellows,
upon other forms of life, and upon the forces of nature.
5. Realization of the wisdom of nature's laws and of one's dependence
for successful living upon obedience to them.
6. Sense of companionship with outdoor life, and abiding love of
nature.
7. Establishment of clean, wholesome interests.
8. Ability to catch glimpses of the cosmic forces as revealed in natural
manifestations, in living creatures, in mankind, in man's highest
examples, in the record of man's thought and action and aspirations
as presented in nature, in literature, music, and art dealing with
nature and in science.
9. Reverence for the wonderful universe, for its mysterious forces,
and for life.
10. An attitude and desire for obedience to the law of love. Confidence
in and habitual practice of sympathy, humaneness, kindness, regu-
larity, patience, persistence, diligence, care, steadfastness, self-con-
trol, industry, thrift, and intellectual honesty. Desire to create
happiness.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 397
C. Aesthetic Aims:
11. Ability to create beauty and to use it.
12. Ability to see and appreciate beauty.
13. Habitual conservation of natural beauty.
14. Ability to interpret nature in a manner productive of aesthetic ap-
preciation.
D. Intellectual Aims:
15. Acquaintance with the environment in which one lives, through
direct observation of: (a) man; (b) plant life; (c) animal life;
(d) physical phenomena; (e) geological phenomena; (f) astro-
nomical phenomena; (g) sound and music as related to nature
study and elementary science; (h) language and literature as re-
lated to nature study and elementary science; (i) form, color, and
visual art as related to nature study and elementary science; (j)
man's inventions and creations; (k) the world in composite forms:
woods, hills, streams, lakes, oceans, farms, cities, etc., and (1) the
world of myth, legend, folklore, fairy tale, as related to nature
study and elementary science.
In each of the above fields the teacher should seek to awaken
interests, tendencies to greater attention, deeper appreciations, and
normal emotional reactions.
16. Sustained interest in the phenomena of nature and science, ever
increasing, broadening and deepening.
17. Automatic watchfulness or attention to the things involved.
18. Habit of observing keenly, independently, patiently and correctly.
19. Ability to exercise and control one's imagination.
20. Right evaluations, attitudes, and appreciations of things involved,
for example: (a) attitude of habitual curiosity concerning truth;
(b) ability to differentiate between useful and injurious forms;
(c) elimination of impulses of fear and the desire to kill unneces-
sarily; (d) appreciation of the importance of agriculture and the
dignity of labor, and (e) ability to think straight, and draw correct
conclusions.
21. Normal and healthy emotional responses to the things, situations,
and experiences, involved in nature study and elementary science,
enjoyment of the pleasures of the senses.
22. The specific habits and skills which are necessary for easy and
effective performance of the activities of nature study and ele-
mentary science.
23. Self-direction and self-control in performing specific activities. De-
velopment in initiative.
24. Habits of planning action prior to execution.
25. Habit of keeping abreast of developments, discoveries, or inven-
tions. Development of the scientific attitude of mind.
26. Ability to give accurate expression to the result of one's obser-
vations, experiences and emotions.
27. Ability to determine what constitutes proof.
28. Recognition of defects, errors, or shortcomings in conditions, pro-
cesses or results.
29. An abiding and impelling confidence in the worth of one's labors.
30. Development of poise and common sense.
31. Use of nature study and science interests as mental relaxation
throughout life to aid in keeping mentally fit.
32. Ability to use language in all ways required for proper and effect-
ive participation in the community life.
33. Acquaintance with the most common scientific terms which are apt
to occur in reading.
34. Maintenance of interest and vitality in all school work, especially
as a basis of expressive studies, as writing, reading, drawing,
manual arts, and oral expression. (Correlation.)
35. Habit of experimentation in school and out for the purpose of
learning first hand from nature.
398 Course of Study for the
E. Social Aims:
38. Reverence for human life.
37. Habit of cooperation with others in worthy undertakings.
38. Ability to make use of nature's forces for social betterment.
39. Sincerity, honesty, straightforwardness, truthfulness, fair-dealing,
steadfastness, and reliability in one's dealings with others.
40. Desire to contribute to community and national welfare by con-
serving natural beauty and natural resources, including human
health and energy, and controlling injurious forms.
41. Desire to contribute to home life by growing gardens, improving
lawns, and understanding and properly using the household and
other equipment of daily life provided by science.
42. Building of ideals of home life, of family ties and of the love and
duties of parents and children.
43. Appreciation of obligations to succeeding generations.
F. Civic Aims:
44. Acquisition of knowledge that will make one a better citizen, living
in a better and more convenient home amid more beautiful and
attractive surroundings.
45. Ability to participate intelligently in matters of public opinion
where knowledge of science is necessary, as city water supply sys-
tems, street lighting, street and road construction, ventilation of
public buildings, fire protection, gas supply, ice supply, etc.
46. Correction of superstitions, fallacies, prejudices, sentimentality, and
the like.
47. Realization of the importance of the conservation of natural re-
sources including human health and energy.
48. Ability to differentiate between the injurious and the good in one's
environment.
49. Ability to discern the social obligations and individual rights of
one's self and others.
50. Habitual practice of thrift.
51. A sufficient knowledge of the laws which one is expected to obey.
Examples: Bird laws, game laws, wildflower-protection laws, forest-
protection regulations, fire regulations, etc.
G. Economic Aims:
52. Conservation of useful forms and control of the injurious.
53. Reduction of cost of living through gardening.
54. Ability to live intelligently amid present day surroundings, such
as telegraph, telephone, etc.
H. Vital Aims:
55. Keeping one's physical well-being at the maximum through: (a)
understanding and following nature's laws; (b) habitual physical
exercise out-of-doors; (c) finding sane mental occupation out-of-
doors; (d) deriving relaxation from nervous tension out-of-doors,
and (e) acquiring a background for the facts of sex instruction
when the time comes for their presentation.
56. Ability to protect one's self from micro-organisms and poisons
from plants, venomous snakes, etc., and to deal with them and
their products effectively in case of attack.
I. AVOCATIONAL AlMS :
57. Ability, disposition, and habit of taking up occasionally the syste-
matic study of some new thing in the line of nature study or
science.
58. Habit of prolonging and repeating the enjo3 T ment of nature and
science through meditating upon one's experiences.
59; A disposition toward experimentation, exploration, discovery, and
invention in the fields of nature study and science.
60. Ability, profitably to utilize the observational opportunities of
travel.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 399
61. Ability to utilize music for a helpful, abundant and varied awaken-
ing of one's emotional nature.
62. Ability to utilize the products of the visual arts as sources of
enjoyable and profitable aesthetic experiences.
63. Amateur ability in the field of the fine arts.
64. Ability to participate in desirable activities of social clubs.
65. Ability and disposition to engage with pleasure and profit in a
sufficient and varied amount of games, sports, athletics, and out-
door recreation.
66. Ability and disposition to utilize outdoor life in the midst of natural
surroundings as recreation for mind and body.
J. Vocational Aims:
67. Experience, self-confidence, initiative and knowledge of how to do
things.
68. Ability to supplement one's income.
69. Background of knowledge aiding in a wise selection of one's
vocation.
K. Practical Aims:
70. Ability to make use of the forces of nature and science for per-
sonal betterment.
Special attention is directed to the economic, practical and vocational
aims as set forth in the yearbook. These have peculiar application to
the "Live-at-Home Program," which is being so fervently advocated by
His Excellency, Governor O. Max Gardner, and which is meeting with
such popular favor throughout the State. Science instruction in the
elementary schools may be made to contribute directly to this program.
What possibilities there are for advancing economic well-being through
the school and home garden; the study of soils in relation to agriculture;
biological life in its relation to gardening and other phases of agriculture;
simple understanding of farm machinery, the automobile, the electrical
and mechanical appliances of the home; the conservation of natural re-
sources such as forests, minerals, plant and animal life, soil fertility,
et cetera! It is hoped every teacher will see these large, practical, and
fundamental possibilities in this subject.
METHODS OF TEACHING ELEMENTARY SCIENCE
The place of methods in science teaching is quite important. In view
of that fact a rather detailed treatment is given to this topic.
Downing, in his "Teaching Science in the Schools"* says: "Science-
teaching should give the child the habit of scientific thinking, should im-
press the growing boy and girl with its value, and should make him
realize that all problems to be solved effectively must be solved by this
same method — by reasoning to correct conclusions on the basis of ob-
served fact." True the problems must be simple at first and increase in
difficulty as the child increases in capacity. The problem method is very
essential in all good science teaching. The early problems will likely be
largely of the "what" variety. "What bird is that?" "What tree is this?"
Later they will be "How" problems. "How does a windmill work?" "How
does a cricket make its chirp?" Finally, they will be largely "Why"
problems. "Why does a snake shed its skin?" "Why is the new moon
always seen in the west?"
*The Teaching of Science, E. R. Downing, University of Chicago Press.
400 Course of Study for the
What Downing is emphasizing here, of course, is the scientific method
of study. It is surprising how infrequently decisions are made in adult
life through the process of reasoning to conclusions on a basis of facts.
Prejudices, emotional attitudes, personal opinions, conventions, too often
are the governing factors. A man is a Democrat or Republican, a lawyer,
doctor or bricklayer "not through any process of reasoning but because
his father was such before him." Downing says: "If teachers and parents
but realized their opportunity to help children form good habits of think-
ing; if they would but lead them to see problems, to define them clearly,
and to attack them scientifically, by collecting the necessary facts, mak-
ing a guess at the solution then either proving or disproving it by ex-
periment and patient observation, and finally arriving at correct solution,
what a help it would be to them in thinking out their life problems! If
science-teaching can habituate pupils to careful scientific thinking and
point the way to carrying the habit over to the citizen, it will do a great
service to the individual and to the nation." It is hoped teachers will
realize the possibilities of elementary science in making direct contribution
to the scientific method of thinking and study. This fundamental con-
ception of the nature and function of science instruction should strongly
influence all techniques and methods of teaching the subject.
With this understanding of the importance of scientific method of
thinking as a general outcome of science instruction, it is in order now
to discuss a few specific points of technique and special method.
A. Use Material That is Concrete and Objective
The Fourth Yearbook, Department of Superintendence, says: "As
many as possible of the nature lessons should be given outdoors, if only
in the schoolyard or school block. The next best thing is to have real
material in the schoolroom." This emphasizes the importance of the
concrete and real. Every effort should be made to study the nature
materials at first hand, and in their natural setting or environment.
Trafton, in his book, "The Teaching of Science in the Elementary
School,"* lists the following types of materials:
1. Living things in their natural environment.
2. Living things in the schoolroom.
3. Preserved material.
4. Pictures.
5. Apparatus for demonstration and experiments.
These types of material have particular reference to biological science.
It is understood the physical, chemical and other phases of science would
be just as concrete and real.
B. Field Trips
Field trips and excursions are necessary in studying most science
material in its natural environment. They should consist of observations
made by the individual student under the guidance and supervision of
the teacher or group excursions personally conducted by the teacher.
Both types are valuable. The individual observation or tour should lead
to habits of accurate observation and should therefore, contribute defi-
nitely to the child's scientific equipment as well as his recreational re-
*The Teaching of Science in the Elementary School, G. H. Trafton. Houghton.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 401
sources. The possibilities for educative value from group excursions are
great, but the real outcomes will depend upon the care with which the
teacher has planned the excursion. Because of the importance of this
some suggestions have been taken from the "Elementary Science Course
of Study," Baltimore, and from Burton's "Supervision and Improvement
of Teaching."*
Preparation for the Excursions:
Teacher's preliminary visit to ascertain:
Data available for study.
Essential points of emphasis.
Best places for class and individual observation.
Safest, quickest route to traverse in making the excursion.
Teacher's preparation of the pupils to give them:
Live motive for observing.
Ideas in mind to serve as means of explaining new facts ob-
served.
Definite assignment to group as a whole and to individuals.
Hopeful expectancy that their "special interests" will be satis-
fied.
Right and opportunity to ask questions "on the spot."
Signal for summoning the group for general discussion and for
emergencies.
Conduct of the Excursions:
Divide observers at some points into smaller groups under other
teachers or reliable pupil leaders who have made the trip in
advance with the teacher.
Discourage attention being ,paid to irrelevant and unusual elements
in the situation.
Check success of pupils' observation while on the spot. Do not
allow serious misconceptions to pile up for the classroom clearing
grounds. Be sure the children see the essential features at least.
Encourage the exchange of ideas on the spot.
Have as much note-taking as seems consistent with the particular
pupils' temperaments and the teacher's desire to associate satis-
faction with their experience.
Suggestive Questions for Evaluating an Excursion Lesson:
Is the place, activity, or organization to be visited worth observing?
Will the excursion illustrate or contribute to a larger issue in the
pupils' regular work? If it is a part of a project is it well-
placed? Is there a careful preparation on the subject-matter
side?
Do pupils know what they are going to see, and why?
Are they prepared to understand it?
Is an aim set up?
Is careful preparation made on the routine side?
Clear explanation of where to go, how to get there, how to con-
duct themselves while there, how to return?
All signals worked out and explained for moving class from
place to place, gathering it together, etc.?
Has the teacher been over the ground beforehand and made
sure of all arrangements?
Are there individual and group assignments in addition to the
big aim for all? Instructions or note-taking?
Is there careful preparation for a summarizing lesson to be_ held
next day, or on the return, involving reports and discussions?
^Supervision and Improvement of Teaching, W. H. Burton. Appleton.
402 Course of Study for the
C. Utilize Children's Questions and Natural Interests
Children's questions and spontaneous interest in the phenomena of
nature should be utilized fully in the teaching of elementary science.
Perhaps more than in any other subject these would be criteria of im-
portance and dependableness. On any grade level, the teacher often
would find a child's question to be the convenient and natural way to
begin a unit of work, or the basis for selecting a unit. The importance
of children's questions in the methods of teaching, and the implied im-
portance in the selection of the subject matter itself, may be seen from
this statement from Caldwell and Meier, "Open Doors to Science With
Experiments."* "Children ask all kinds of questions about natural
phenomena. Many of these questions are not easily answered; some can-
not be answered at all with our present knowledge of science, but many
more of them than is usually supposed may be answered by the use of
a little careful thought. It is highly important that such questions be
asked and that many of them be answered, since constant failure to
secure answers to questions gradually weakens the habit of inquiry, and
inquiry is essential to education. Perhaps the greatest service of ele-
mentary science is to keep the tentacles of inquiry alive and operating."
D. Vocabulary Needs
Teachers should be conscious of the vocabulary needs that are peculiar
to a proper understanding and appreciation of science. Adaptation, pol-
lination, dispersal, reproduction, hibernation, et cetera, are terms which
have special significance in the study of science. It seems only necessary
to remind teachers of the importance of being aware of the child's needs
in this matter.
E. Individual Differences
Every possible effort should be made to care for the individual needs
and abilities of the children. Children on any grade level or within any
unit of study will vary greatly in their acquaintance with facts of science,
or in their ability to learn the subject. Opportunity should be given to
each child to profit most from his experiences. Breaking the class into
groups might help to do this. Added responsibilities and extra assign-
ments for the gifted and for those more advanced may aid in caring for
the needs of that group. The resourcefulness, ingenuity and the imagi-
nation of the teacher will be taxed to the limit if the problem of indi-
vidual differences and needs is met adequately.
F. Correlation With Other Subjects
The importance of this topic was implied in an earlier discussion in
which an attempt was made to define the subject of elementary science.
The material for English, reading, spelling, arithmetic, geography, his-
tory, health, art and other subjects should often grow directly out of the
problems of the science program. Skill in reading, proficiency in oral
and written composition, the appreciation of art and the ability to draw,
*Open Doors to Science With Experiments, Otis W. Caldwell and W. H. D. Meier. Ginn.
Elementary Schools op North Carolina 403
the understanding of scientific principles of health, and the interpretation
of much in geography — all these may be served through proper utilization
of the content of Elementary Science. Often a complete unit or activity
in science would include within itself all the major subjects of the ele-
mentary school curriculum. The possibilities of correlation and relation-
ship of a unit in science to other subjects may be illustrated by the
following chart from Trafton's, "The Teaching of Science in the Ele-
mentary School":*
""The Teaching of Science in the Elementary School, G. H. Trafton. Houghton.
404
Course op Study for the
w
H
O
H
>-s
m
P
cV2
hH
o
o
K
o
w
w
H
O
P
o
w
►—I
o
o
En
«!
M
O
55
O
i— i
,
as
— 1 CD O
a h °
03 a CD
bo M
03 H
> u S
T3 3
■
o
u
ft
O
'S
>>
O
3
CO
o
"o
»
o3
;g
o
03
3
O
■S|
■S-o
CD CD
CD CD
o
_3
T3t3
>
CD
3 co
OS
a P
CD 53
O &
^ °
CDr3
oSt,
3 CD
CD 5"°
M 3 3
POJ 3
o'3'El
°S3
OS 03
(h
o
1-i»
3 2 3
M CO
3
"c3 A .
bO
o
X)
"3 .
fc. 3 3
O o O
-3o'|
3 .
1
23«
O 3
03
o co
° C h
xi 53 S3
O CO
co
3
bo
3
*4
M
3 « ft
s °
».So
ft 'J3 l. t -
" CD
03
1-1
J§ 03
o ►«
° t,
ftT) O
"S >
ft«
fa
p h
ftX! O
M o
— '.M
CD
U-. CD
H
a
& S t-
t4
CO >
3 o3 co
O 03
0< a3
O
.3
*£h
<
Sfe^
CO «>
co^XI
a si*
a -a
CO >»
6 u-&
cd a>
Ph a Sj2
03
>■««
Ph OJ2
Ph m 03.H
CD 3
033
>- 3
Ph ccixi
53 4>
oSgg
Jr> 3 0^
Ph 3^2 ft
>£ o3
"3
^•S
3 4>
3
03 •
03 O
>>
■a m
O OH
CO CD
Xj g
cm
-a
p.
03
M
O
0)
O
■Ho
fl.S bO
o c
■- eo.s
gflh .
.^§§
03 CD
6
3
J3 CD
CD 3
5§
3 CD
O co
U O
£ M
CD 3
s^
s
Sg
"8.2
CD.-
ll
CD O
ft - CO
V g 03
Qxig
<
° 1
•9 - s
03 03
> &o
II a
3 - O
3 *>
31 |
03 ' .
t. _r co-73
!So
* 3
_3
3
■d
3 .
"S co
m'3
OS'S CD
u a >
T3 03 03
"Ob"
XI ■" m „_
^ 3^03
2 XI co £
a 03 S > J
bO M e 03 "ft
O OB
ft
03
a -
a JB
a "3
■« bO
X)
3
CO
3
_o3
"ft
O l-i 05 —
£ 2 >
*> P
°, ji 03
oi
OcaQ
a«M.S « .
•S O > — CO CD
£ co 5 coVS-^ •
^3 bo h b0*3 03 H
O.SQ.SiiS'S
& 3d
03 ."3
1- 3
O-S^J SKO
Q£
-"2
±
^ 5
^3 --^
3
5^
5^5
3m
1
CD
3
03 .g
t- co
.~x>
XI -s
J-
W 03
*5
CD J°
."S CD
— 1 CD
xl -B
o3 co
CD 9
+3 !>
—
"■«
T3-3
rt-rt 03
-*^ « 3 .
S H bo
CD 03 CD 3 1
3 ° 3
3 3 ftB
O CD CD
03^
CO °
a^
CD 3
3 "S
a io
X)o
CO CD
CD CO
P^.S
1-
W 03
03 OXI
W CST3
oxixixi
h c3 h
3 c3 flj 03
M bO h bO
o
H
bO
03
c
a
h
.•
CD
CD
m
X>
ffl
CD
CD
H
O
X
03
O
CD
CD
3
X
CD
CD
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 405
G. Problem Method of Instruction
The problem method should be employed in science teaching. The prob-
lems may be simple or involved. They may be solved at a single class
period, or the solution of them may extend over a long period of time.
How the house fly is able to crawl on a perpendicular window pane may
be determined after slight investigation but to answer the query as to
what preparation plants or animals make for winter may require several
weeks' study and a long series of careful and varied observations.
In connection with the problem method or with problem solving, a
word of caution is given.
The ability to realize intellectual problems and to solve them requires
a wealth of information. Children cannot see problems in science unless
they have had many experiences in the observation of real scientific facts.
Problem-solving lessons of an intellectual nature should follow rather
than precede an intensive study and observation of the facts in a given
unit. A concrete illustration of how this may be done follows: The
children in a third grade became interested in the study of birds. They
observed birds on field trips, they collected pictures of the common birds
of North Carolina, they made collections of last season's birdnests, they
read books about birds — their food, their habitats, their natural enemies.
After such an intensive study of this subject this third grade became
interested in solving intellectual problems about birds. The following
are some of the questions which were raised:
How are birds built so that they can get their food from the places
in which they live? What protection do birds have against their natural
enemies? How do some birds help man? What birds hinder man more
than they help him?
The children were able to discuss such complicated problems because
they had been given a wealth of experiences relating to birds before
problem-solving was undertaken.
H. Illustrative Types and Units of Instruction
To make more meaningful the discussion on method, a few types and
units of instruction are given. These are illustrative of the organization
of material and the methods employed in the teaching of science units.
They give concreteness to the problem and should afford helpful sug-
gestions to the teacher in organizing and in teaching her own science
material. The exact method employed will be the one which most nearly
meets the teacher's needs and which she can most effectively follow.
TYPE I— FIRST GRADE*
Moon and Stars
Children are intensely interested in the moon and conspicuous stars.
Through following suggestions given below they gain experiences valuable
later in the understanding of the movements of the earth.
Study of the moon can be made at any time when it is conspicuous
in the sky.
Study of stars should be made only in the winter months when they
are conspicuous before the child's bedtime.
"Course of Study, Minneapolis, Minn.
406
Course op Study for the
Objectives: Skills, Hab-
its, Abilities, Attitudes,
and Appreciations.
1. Skills:
a. Taking and recording
observations. This skill
is developed when the
child is trained.
(1) To look for results
of each activity.
(2) To express these
results in simple,
accurate statements.
2. Habits:
a. Making patient, careful
and correct observa-
tions.
b. Experimenting in order
to learn first hand.
Every observation made
with the idea of find-
ing out the truth is a
simple experiment.
3. Attitudes:
a. Realization of forces of
nature. The activities
of 1 and 2 will lead to
some understanding that
moon and stars move in
accordance with some
kind of law.
4. Appreciations:
a. Beauty.
b. The wonderful and per-
fect mechanism of the
universe. (These ap-
preciations should be
spontaneous on the part
of the child.)
Activities and Procedure.
1. Observe the moon:
a. Shape.
b. Color.
c. Position in the sky.
2. Observe bright and con-
spicuous stars.
Principles to be Discov-
ered, Facts to be Gained,
and Information to be
Given.
1. The moon is not always
round.
2. The moon is sometime in
the day sky and sometimes
in the night sky.
3. The moon is white in the
daytime and yellow at
night.
4. The moon is not always
in the same place in the
sky.
5. Some stars are brighter
than others.
TYPE II— SECOND GRADE*
The Rainbow
STIMULATION OF THE TOTAL SITUATION
1. A schoolroom situation already set up with such materials as: an
easel, various colors of water paints, colored chalk, crayons, many-
colored sewing materials, etc.
2. A daily period when the children are allowed to manipulate these
materials creatively for the satisfaction of worthwhile purposes
which are their own.
3. A daily period when questions, problems, and results of this work
are brought before the whole group for discussion, criticisms, sug-
gestions, and further planning.
4. An open-minded attitude on the part of both teacher and children
which encourages the sharing of all experiences and which recog-
nizes the value of every contribution sincerely given, however
humble its origin.
POSSIBLE INITIAL INDICATIONS OF INTEREST
1. May come as an outgrowth of the use of various colors in paint-
ing and drawing as: many colors together remind one of a rain-
bow; an attempt to paint a sunset looks like a rainbow; etc.
2. May follow the experience of having seen a rainbow.
3. May come as a result of experience with a prism or with a piece
of glass. (Observation of colors in a piece off a chandelier, floor
lamp, curtain pulls; or of colors in broken bits of glass from tele-
phone pole, broken bottle, or broken bits of mirror with bevelled
edge.)
"Training School, East Carolina Teachers College, Lucy Nulton,
Teacher.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 407
4. May be the outcome of blowing bubbles and seeing rainbows in
them.
5. May come from the experience of helping water the lawn and
seeing the rainbow formed.
6. May be the result of observing spiderwebs covered with dew.
PROBLEMS AND QUESTIONS WHICH MAY ARISE
How many colors are there in the rainbow?
What color comes first in the rainbow? What comes next?
Do they always come that way?
How do you know which comes next?
There isn't any orange paint? How can I paint a rainbow without
orange paint? What makes green? What makes purple?
What makes little balls of color stand up on the water?
What makes a rainbow?
Where is the end of the rainbow?
Why doesn't a rainbow go straight across the sky? Why is it like
a circle?
Why is a rainbow sometimes high up in the sky and sometimes low?
Sometimes rainbows are bright and sometimes they aren't very bright.
How can I make mine not so bright?
Why does the sun make a rainbow through a prism when it doesn't
through other glass?
What happens to the sunlight that comes through the prism?
(At conference one child gave this statement of a solution and the
question asking for verification. "When the sun shines on the
other side of the prism it is whole — all together. And when it
comes through it separates up into all the different colors on this
side. Isn't that so?")
Does the rainbow always come in the east? (Position in the sky with
relation to the sun.)
ADDITIONAL MATERIALS CONTRIBUTING TO THIS PARTICU-
LAR UNIT
1. Pictures of rainbows — prints, magazine pictures, advertising pic-
tures, copies of masterpieces. (Rubens, The Rainbow.)
2. Posters showing color relationships and how light is refracted by
prism.
3. A color top. (This can be bought or made. A flat cardboard disc
which fits over an axis so pointed that it will spin evenly; round,
accurately, colored discs of paper which will fit upon this card-
board disc; and a clip to hold them in place are all that are neces-
sary. The color discs should be slit down one side so that two or
more colors may over-lap, leaving sectors of each exposed. By
spinning two or more colors together the children can see the
mixture of colors.)
4. Books and reading materials:
Persing and Peeples — Elementary Science by Grades, Book II.
Aldis, Dorothy — Anything and Everything poem, "Skipping
Ropes."
Longfellow, H. W. — Hiawatha (reference to rainbow).
Bible — The story of the first rainbow.
The Book of Knowledge.
Charts growing out of the children's experience.
CONTROLS AND OUTCOMES
Knowledges
Science
The number of colors in the rainbow, their arrangement and
relationship.
What causes a rainbow and that it appears only under these
conditions.
408 Course of Study for the
The reason for its shape, for its position relative to the sun,
and for its position relative to the horizon.
That other objects of nature have some of the rainbow colors.
(Observation of autumn leaves, flowers, grasses, insects, birds,
sunsets, etc.)
That there is a reason for many of the colors of nature. (Pro-
tective coloration, attraction.)
The refraction and reflection of the sun's rays by a prism.
Thy psychological effect of color — red means danger, blue is
quiet, green is cool, etc.
Scientific combination of colors.
Art
Knowledge of fundamental colors, color relationships, the mix-
ing of colors, and color harmonies.
Experience in the use of color as a means of expression.
Perspective — the rainbow which is far away is higher on the
paper.
Proportionate width of colors to sky when painting.
Acquaintance with masterpieces relating to child's own ex-
perience.
Language and Literature
Knowledge of the story of the first rainbow.
Reading of related materials.
Realization that one can find information and pleasure in books
and the use of books for those purposes.
Pleasant experiences with poetry, which may, in some cases,
result in memorization of poems.
Writing their own poems and stories which express this rain-
bow experience.
Ability to converse freely and to exchange ideas or supply
information.
Music
Singing of songs related to this experience.
Composition of airs for their own poems.
Rhythms and musical dramatizations.
If possible, manipulation on the piano until those who desire
can play their own airs.
Habits
Sharing discoveries and experiences with the group.
Observation of things in one's daily environment.
Seeking for desired information from people, by experimenta-
tion, and from books.
Carefulness and neatness in manipulation of materials.
Making exact statements when telling a fact.
Sticking to a piece of work until it is finished.
Attitudes
An alert curiosity and a spirit of investigation.
A questioning of experimental attitude — a willingness to try out
the new and prove it which involves the withholding of opinion
until a fact is proven.
Willingness to accept criticism and suggestions and to utilize
them.
Fair play in sharing materials and pleasures.
Appreciation of color as a medium of expression.
Appreciation of the beautiful and harmonious coloring of nature.
Skills
The mixing of colors to obtain desired results.
So manipulating the prism as to throw the rainbow where one
desires.
Elementary Schools op North Carolina 409
Choice of colors and their use in a harmonized whole.
Handling of brush and paints.
Manipulating the color top to obtain desired observations of
color-mixing.
Manipulating a hose in sunlight to obtain rainbows.
POSSIBLE FURTHER ACTIVITY GROWING OUT OF THIS UNIT
("Activity which leads to further activity.")
1. Frequent and intelligent mixing of paints when needed.
2. Keen observation of colors of nature in trees, flowers, sky, etc.
3. Blowing of bubbles and seeing rainbows in them.
4. Experiences with reflection.
Recognizing color in things about us, leading to the noticing of
color reflections in water and in glass.
5. Experimentations in dyeing rags for rugs, wall hangings, scarfs,
etc. Use of nature materials in this activity.
TYPE III— FIFTH GRADE*
Economic and Aesthetic Values of Insects to Man
OBJECTIVES
1. To know the life cycle of insects in adapting themselves to their
environments.
2. To know that the activities of insects greatly influence the activities
of man.
3. To know and appreciate the aesthetic qualities of insects.
LARGER OBJECTIVES OF WHICH THESE OBJECTIVES ARE A
PART
1. Survival of the fittest..
2. The balance of nature.
3. Species have survived because in adaptations and adjustments they
have become fitted to the conditions under which they must live.
4. The place of parental care in the survival of the species.
SITUATION OR POSSIBLE SITUATION LEADING TO THE STUDY
1. Nature table with cases of specimens and reference materials
furnish much stimulation.
2. Caterpillars that children bring to school in fall may serve as a
lead into such a study.
3. Study of silk in geography could lead into a study of insects in
their relation to man.
4. A nature excursion in the fall in which many butterflies were seen
would furnish interesting stimuli.
ACTIVITIES OF THE CHILDREN
1. They made observations of their environment looking specifically
for insects.
2. They read and studied pictures of many nature books.
3. They searched readers and other books in the library for stories
and poems about insects.
4. They watched the bulletin boards for pictures of and articles con-
cerning insects.
5. They brought suitable materials for the bulletin boards.
6. They brought magazines and books from home that gave classi-
fication of and articles on insects.
7. They went on excursions.
8. They brought in many specimens of insects in different stages:
eggs, caterpillars, cocoons, chrysalis, butterflies, moths, crickets,
grasshoppers.
"Training School, East Carolina Teachers College, Cleo Riinwater, Teacher.
410 Course op Study for the '
9. They studied the cases of insects, comparing with reference books,
and classified the insects.
10. They participated in conversations about insects asking and answer-
ing questions.
11. They drew pictures of and worked out designs from insects.
12. They wrote poems about insects.
13. They looked at butterflies' wings through a magnifying glass
brought by a member of the class.
14. They watched caterpillars spin cocoons.
15. They listened to victrola records and orchestral pieces concerning
insects.
PROBLEMS SET UP AND SOLVED BY THE CHILDREN
1. What do butterflies eat?
2. Where do butterflies stay at night?
3. Where do butterflies stay in winter?
4. What is that on their wings that rubs off on one's fingers? What
makes their wings stiff?
5. Do little butterflies grow into big butterflies?
6. What are the differences between a butterfly and a moth?
7. What do grasshoppers eat?
8. What are the antennae for?
9. Where do grasshoppers stay in the winter?
10. What do they lay their eggs on?
11. Do grasshoppers help or hinder us?
12. What makes a grasshopper able to hop so far?
13. Will a praying mantis hurt us?
14. How do people make silk out of cocoons?
15. Why do some moths form a chrysalis while others spin cocoons?
16. How can a big moth stay in such a little cocoon?
OUTCOMES IN KNOWLEDGE
1. Science
a. Stages in the life of an insect:
(1) Egg
(2) Larva
(3) Pupa
(4) Imago or adult
b. Life history of a butterfly:
(1) Characteristics of insect at each stage.
(2) Where each stage is spent.
(3) Stages in which food is taken.
(4) Colors of butterflies. (Protective coloration.)
(5) Length of life.
(6) Classification of different species.
(7) Relation of butterflies to man.
c. Characteristics of a true insect — grasshopper as study:
(1) Divisions of body:
(a) Head: Antennae; compound eyes and simple eyes; pro-
boscis of butterfly, biting mouth parts of grasshopper.
(b) Thorax — Wings.
(2) Legs:
(a) Number.
(b) Value to grasshopper and other insects.
(3) Spiracles or breathing pores.
(4) Ears of grasshopper.
(5) Sound organs of grasshopper (comparison with cricket).
(6) Abdomen:
(a) Segments.
(b) Oviposits-
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 411
d. Comparison and contrast of butterfly and moth:
(1) Similarities:
(a) Life stages are the same.
(b) Characteristics of body are same.
(2) Dissimilarities:
(a) Butterfly flies by day, moth by night.
(b) Butterfly holds wings together.
(c) Butterfly has slender body, moth has large pursy body.
(d) Most butterflies have bright colors, moths have rich
colors but subdued ones.
(e) Pupa stage of butterfly is chrysalis, pupa stage of most
moths is cocoon. Over back when at rest, moth holds
wings outspread.
e. Life history of grasshopper:
(1) Incomplete metamorphosis:
(a) Egg
(b) Baby grasshopper
(c) Adult grasshopper
(2) Way the mother grasshopper deposits the eggs.
(3) Place where eggs are deposited.
(4) Economic relation to man.
f. Comparison of other insects with butterflies, moths, and grass-
hoppers:
(1) Praying mantis
(2) Cricket
(3) Dragon fly
(4) Katydid
(5) Mosquitoes
(6) Flies
2. Art — Fine and Industrial
a. Realistic drawing of simplest butterfly in collection (a yellow
sulphur), placing it in a triangle as an aid in getting correct
shape.
b. Realistic drawing of a more complicated butterfly (a swallow-
tail), using same method.
c. A study of designs worked out from butterflies by American
Indians and Chinese. The working out original designs from
insects.
d. Application of this design to something they can keep — a card-
board box to be used as a bank for Christmas.
e. Making of butterfly net, cage for specimens, cases for mount-
ing specimens.
f. Unraveling of silk of cocoon.
3. Music
a. Listening to the victrola record The Flight of the Bee.
b. Listening to Damrosch's orchestra play The Tarentella.
4. English
a. Much reading of both informational and literary types.
b. Conversation about insects.
c. Telling of stories and reporting information concerning insects.
d. Addition of many expressive words and terms to vocabulary.
e. Group composition of poetry.
f. Individual composition of poetry.
412 Course op Study for the
Example of poem composed by the group:
THE GAUZY BUTTERFLY
Butterfly, butterfly, on gauzy wing,
You come to us in the lovely spring,
Sipping nectar from the flowers
That grow beneath the April showers.
Butterfly, butterfly, you fly so high,
Your colors shine against the sky.
You flit around with the sunshine bright
And fold your wings at night.
When at night you go away,
I always wonder where you stay.
SKILLS
1. Observing and interpreting surroundings.
2. Collecting and using reference materials.
3. Collecting and mounting specimens.
4. Reading for answering definite problems.
5. Caring for specimens.
6. Handling equipment.
7. In reading and organizing information to present to the group.
ATTITUDES
1. Being curious about all things in nature.
2. Collecting.
3. Of not taking life unnecessarily.
4. Searching out the aesthetic values in nature.
5. Handling specimens without squeamishness — the scientific attitude.
HABITS
1. Looking for sources of designs.
2. Being accurate in giving information.
3. Observation.
4. Sharing materials, information, and experiences.
5. Setting up a hypothesis for oneself.
6. Following a problem through to its logical conclusion.
7. Recognizing man's actual and possible applications to his needs.
POSSIBLE FURTHER ACTIVITIES
1. Ants and wasps are examples of social insects.
2. Flies and mosquitoes in relation to health.
3. Silk worm and honey bee as domesticated insects.
4. Insects in their relation to flowers.
5. Economic value of birds in holding insects in check.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Comstock, Anna B. — Handbook of Nature Study. Cornstock.
2. Holland, W. J.— The Butterfly Guide. Doubleday.
3. Porter, Gene Stratton — Moths of the Limberlost. Doubleday.
4. Patch, Edith M. — First Lessons in Nature Study. Macmillan.
5. Knowlton, Philip A. — First Lessons in Geography. Macmillan.
6. Chase, A., and Clow, E. — Stories of Industry, Vol. II.
7. Cooke, Arthur O. — British Insects. Nelson.
8. The Life History of a Butterfly (pamphlet). The Press of the Hampton Normal and
Agricultural Institute, Hampton, Va.
9. Carpenter, Frank G. — New Geographical Reader, Asia. (See Silk.) American.
10. Carpenter, Frank G. — The Clothes We Wear, Chap. VII. American.
11. Weed — Butterflies.
12. Persing, Ellis C, and Wildman, Edward E. — Elementary Science by Grades, Book
Four. Appleton.
13. Compton's Pictured Encyclopedia, Vol. IV. Compton.
14. The Book of Knowledge, Vols. 17 and 18. The Grolier Society, New York, N. Y.
15. Our Wonder World, Vol. 2 and 3. George L. Shuman & Co., Boston.
16. The World Book, Vol. 5. Quarrie.
Magazines :
1. Nature Magazine, 1214 Sixteenth St., Washington, D. C.
2. The National Geographic Magazine, National Geographic Society, July, 1929, Vol. 56.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 413
TYPE IV— FIFTH GRADE*
Maple Tree
Suppose a maple tree is growing in the school yard. A second grade
class may visit this tree in the early fall, and their attention be directed
to the following points, with a careful discussion of each before taking
up another one: The general shape of the tree, the color of the bark, the
shape of the leaf. Children should be asked to examine the tree and
observe these points. They should visit other trees of the same species
if possible, so as to recognize the species at sight. It is advisable that
a drawing of the tree be made in the field.
In the schoolroom, the children may give an account of their field
trip. If the sentences are written on the board, as the children give them,
an interesting story may be the result. Should the children desire to
write sentences of their own, a written language lesson will evolve from
this work. The words they wish to know how to spell may form a list
for a series of spelling lessons. A single leaf, a twig, or the tree in its
environment may furnish interesting material for a drawing lesson. As
to what is used depends on what the child desires.
Stories and poems about the maple tree are found in many of the
readers. The teacher may help the child use the table of contents to find
them for himself.
This same tree may be studied in the winter, so the children will
recognize it without its leaves. In the spring, its flowers and seeds may
be studied. This method may be used in studying other trees, and each
child may keep his sentences and drawings in a record book.
Suppose a fifth grade should desire to carry on a study of trees. If
they do not know anything about trees, they should begin in the same
simple way that the second grade does. They can use their material in
school work in the same way, but they should elaborate on it. For ex-
ample, a study of the physiography of the country in which the tree
grows may be studied. The different kinds of maples that grow in the
community may be learned. With the use of reference books, the class
may find what use is made of maple trees and in what different parts of
the world the maple trees grow. This phase of work furnished geography,
history, language and spelling material. The drawing may be left to the
discretion of the teacher and the child.
The language lesson may be a letter, asking permission to study in
some special area, or a letter to a manufacturing establishment asking
for literature. It may be a descriptive paragraph or a story giving an
account of the excursion. It may be that some child may wish to express
himself through a poem, or talks may be made by the different class
members. All forms of language work may be taught through the study.
Spelling, of course, is a part of the language, and when the need arises
for use of certain words, that the child does not know how to spell, these
words may be written on the board and then be assigned for a drill
lesson.
History may be taught through various means, depending of course
on the species of trees that are being studied. The historical incidents
connected with the tree, its economic importance in the past and present,
and work regarding its conservation will furnish topics for much history
material.
A study of its distribution throughout the world in regard to climatic
regions, locations of industries due to its presence, in certain sections
and the habitat of the tree will furnish many geographical problems
through the school year.
The reading activities may take different trends depending of course
on the purpose for which the material is to be used. If the children are
planning a program for the room, recreational reading may be desired
by the pupils who are taking part in the activity. During the recreation
period the same type of material may or may not be needed. In pre-
paring geography or history, informational type of reading is needed.
*Raleigh City Schools, Mrs. M. Louise Billiard, Teacher.
414 Course of Study for the
The child is thrown on his own resources again and many learning situ-
ations arise here. First, learning how to use reference books, second,
organizing material, third, making bibliographies and other phases of
work may arise as different avenues are opened up.
In the health work a study of trees from the standpoint of materials
they furnish in the way of food, clothing, shelter, or substances for the
preparation of these such as nut trees for food, rubber trees and trees
used in preparation of leather, and various kinds of wood for building
purposes presents several worthwhile activities.
The suggestions mentioned in this paper have been successfully carried
out in different grades.
Practical problems in arithmetic have arisen in classrooms concerning
the size, height and value of trees. These problems of course depend
on the type of tree being studied, the method of approach, and available
literature. A study of the distribution of the sugar maple tree, the value
of its products in the New England states, the climatic conditions of that
section and its effect on social life, shows to the child the interrelation-
ship of the different school subjects. Different trees may be studied from
the same viewpoint and furnish material for every subject in the ele-
mentary school.
Conservation of trees becomes an interesting phase of civics. Through
this study another subject is introduced and tree-planting may become
a worthwhile activity to the group and to the community.
SCIENCE CONCEPTS TO BE GAINED
The course of study in elementary science should guarantee that the
child understand and grow familiar with a few scientific concepts. It is
understood that for the elementary school child these concepts would
be relatively simple but yet fundamental. There is danger that the
teacher will think of these concepts from an adult viewpoint and either
impose upon the child a mature conception of a scientific principle or
fail to see the significance of a simple concept to the understanding and
life of the child. Neither of these conditions should obtain and will not
if the teacher understands child life and child nature, and is consciously
aware of the place of science in the development and education of the
child.
For reasons which have been given elsewhere the content of ele-
mentary science as here treated relates to those organized bodies of
knowledge which may be classified as astronomy, biology, geology, physics
and chemistry. The science concepts to be acquired would, therefore,
relate to these categories. In The Teaching of Nature Study and Ele-
mentary Science, New Jersey Course of Study, definite science concepts
are given. They are presented here as being representative and indicative
of what is desired. They may be modified, rejected or added to as the
judgment and sound experience of the teacher dictate.
ASTRONOMY CONCEPTS
1. There are many other heavenly bodies in the universe.
2. There are vast distances between the bodies that we see.
3. Our system of reckoning time is based on our relation to the sun
and the stars.
4. The earth and some other bodies of the universe are surrounded
by a gas called the atmosphere.
5. The earth is one of the planets of the solar system.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 415
BIOLOGY CONCEPTS
1. Life appears on the earth in a great variety of forms.
2. Certain life processes or functions are common to all living things.
3. All forms of life react to their surroundings.
4. Living things are interdependent and interrelated.
5. Life comes from life.
6. Living things reproduce their kind.
7. The young of living things tend to be like their parents.
8. Living things pass through periods of growth commonly referred
to as youth, maturity, and old age.
9. Successful living is dependent upon the application of laws of life
and growth.
10. "Man exercises a controlling influence on his environment," Get-
man. Man exercises a continuously increasing control over his
surroundings.
11. Living things on the earth are greatly influenced by the sun and
its relation to the earth.
12. "Living things on the earth are dependent upon their available
food supply," Getman.
13. Life has existed on the earth for long periods of time.
GEOLOGY CONCEPTS
1. The earth is full of natural resources.
2. The relief features of the earth's surface are due to continuous
movements of the materials of which the earth is composed.
3. There are different kinds of rocks due to the methods of formation.
4. Those rocks are made up of different minerals.
5. The remains of plants and animals found in formations have a
historic interest.
6. Erosion is largely responsible for soils.
7. Present movements and eruptions are responsible for the theories
of the development of the earth.
PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY CONCEPTS
1. The facts involved in physics and chemistry are important factors
in the every-day life of the home and community.
2. Heat is a form of energy.
3. Light is an energy of importance to all life and there are different
forms of light.
4. Mechanical laws are applied to toys and household equipment.
5. Electrical energy is an active factor in modern social and economic
life.
6. Matter assumes different states according to temperature and
pressure.
7. When two elements combine to produce a new substance, a change
has occurred.
8. One form of energy can be changed into other forms of energy.
9. Science is fundamental to many occupations.
10. Universal law and order controls the natural world.
THE CURRICULUM
The content or the subject matter of the science curriculum manifestly
would be that which contributed directly or indirectly to a realization of
the aims of education in the elementary school, and which would result
in the child's acquiring the science concepts which are held to be desir-
able. Both the aims of elementary education and the science concepts
have been stated. It remains for the teacher to select and evaluate the
material in relation to these aims and concepts.
416 Course op Study for the
While what has just been said is true still it seems desirable to sug-
gest certain criteria which may be used in the selection and organization
of the material. These have pedogogical and psychological significance
and should be helpful to the teacher in selecting and organizing the sub-
ject matter of science. The utilization of these criteria should aid the
teacher in making elementary science contribute its share toward realiz-
ing the aims of elementary education and toward a full understanding
of the science concepts desired.
Criteria for Selecting and Organizing Subject Matter
In their Teachers' Guidebook for Everyday Problems in Science, Pieper
and Beauchamp,* propose these criteria:
1. Does the subject matter appeal to the interests of boys and girls
as worthwhile and real in their daily lives?
2. Is it possible to organize the subject matter in such form that
the method of study gives proper training in desirable attitudes,
habits, skills, and ideals ?
3. Is the subject matter such that the knowledge gained has a real
positive value in the life of the pupil?
4. Are the subject matter and the method to be employed of the
proper degree of difficulty so that the pupil can understand the
content and its meaning in life only through serious study?
In the Fourth Yearbook of the Department of Superintendence these
principles are set up for the selection of material:
1. The material should belong to the activities and experiences of
childhood, and to the child's biological and physical environment,
leading from the familiar to the unknown.
2. The material should arouse the interest and the curiosity of the
child, and at the same time be such that he is able to see and
determine most of the facts concerning it for himself.
3. As soon as the child's interest and comprehension make it suit-
able, material having social value should be given preference over
that which is interesting for itself alone.
4. The material should be seasonal.
5. The material should form a progressive and unified course and
should be of sufficient variety to afford as broad an outlook upon
the child's environment as the consideration of the four principles
stated makes practicable.
Downing, in his Teaching Science in the Schools,f discussing the prin-
ciples of organization, gives the following statements as principles to be
followed in organizing the subject matter:
1. The subject matter should be so organized that it will have de-
pendent continuity.
2. It should be organized in such manner that the course will increase
in difficulty commensurately with the pupil's increasing capacities.
3. It should be organized in reasonably small units that are within
the grasp of the pupils so that each student will have a constant
sense of mastery.
a. Each of these units should have a title or an introduction that
challenges attention.
b. Each unit should in the lower grades result in clear-cut pre-
cepts, in the upper grades, in the comprehension of an im-
portant principle or law, important from the point of view of
the pupil's needs.
*Teachers' Guidebook for Everyday Problems in Science, C. J. Pieper and W. L. Beau-
champ. Scott.
tTeaching Science in the Schools, E. R. Downing, University of Chicago.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 417
c. In the organization within the unit, adequate provision must be
made for drilling pupils on carrying such principles over into
life situations.
d. Some units or parts of units should be organized into problem
or project form so as to insure training in scientific thinking.
e. Organize one unit or parts of several so as to treat of the his-
tory of science and the biographies of notable scientists with a
view of obtaining an appreciation of the value of science and
the devoted labors of its workers.
f. Introduce as an element in some units correlated art and liter-
ature to develop the aesthetic appreciation of nature and the
moral import of her laws.
4. The subject matter should be organized so as to facilitate super-
vision.
An analysis of the criteria and principles recommended by the authori-
ties quoted shows that:
1. The materials should be so organized as to afford dependent con-
tinuity from unit to unit or from grade to grade.
2. They be within the scope of the child's capacities.
3. The interests and needs of the child be taken into account.
4. The material be arranged seasonally.
5. The knowledge gained have a real positive value in the life of the
child.
6. To some degree the problem or project method be employed so as
to insure training in scientific thinking.
Aside from these criteria and principles attention is called to the
illustrative type units which appear under the discussion of methods. In
these are found not only typical problems or units of work but also some
application of the criteria which govern the selection and organization
of subject matter.
The Curriculum a Series of Well Organized Units
The curriculum should consist of a series of well organized, sequential
units, embodying scientific concepts and principles and contributing toward
the realization of the aims of elementary education. One now finds a
number of courses of study so organized. While this is true much ex-
perimental work needs to be done before there can be scientific grade
placement of units. In view of that fact, no attempt is made to pre-
scribe a sequence of units by grades. In light of the general criteria
which have been suggested, and in the exercise of their best judgment,
teachers will select their units. A careful record should be kept of these
units and activities. It is recommended that all elementary teachers in
a particular school unit, in cooperation with the principal, determine the
science units which will be taught in all the grades. This cooperative
enterprise would enable each teacher to know what every other teacher
was doing, and would, therefore, reduce duplication of material from
grade to grade and sooner or later would result in a well organized
unified science program throughout the whole school. Within a few
years, from definitely and recorded experiences such as these, a rather
uniform and specific curriculum could be evolved and developed on a
state-wide basis. The importance of cooperation of all teachers within
a given school unit and the keeping of a detailed record of all that is
done can not be too strongly emphasized.
418 Course of Study for the
Suggested Units From Horace Mann School
Craig,* in the Course of Study in Elementary Science in the Horace
Mann School, lists the science units by grades in grade 1-6. As a helpful
suggestion his list is given:
First Grade Units
Change in Appearance of Landscape Due to Seeds Start New Plants.
Change of Season. An Effect of Cold Weather.
Effect of Seasonal Changes Upon Trees. Influence of Weather Upon Man.
Effect of Seasonal Changes Upon Plants There is Water in the Air.
Other Than Trees. The Schoolroom is Filled With Air.
Migration of Birds. A Fire Must Have Air in Order to Burn.
Insects in the Various Seasons. Wiring Doll Houses and Toy Villages for
Winter Birds. Electric Lights.
Other Animals in Winter.
Second Grade Units
Plants During Winter. There is Dust in Air.
Man and Seasonal Change. A Fire Must Have Air.
Insects and Seasonal Change. There is Water in Air.
Migration of Birds. We Receive Heat and Light From the Sun.
Other Animals in Winter. Plants Need Sunlight.
Ice Forms at the Top of Water. Seeds Start New Plants.
Observation of Change of Weather. A Magnet Picks up Nails and Tacks.
Water Can be Turned Into Ice and Steam. Spiders — Source Material.
Our Schoolroom is Filled With Air. Moths and Butterflies — Source Material.
Third Grade Units
How Animals Protect Themselves. Differences in Air Breathed In and Air
How Animals Care for Their Young. Breathed Out.
How Seeds Are Scattered. Some Objects Float and Some Sink.
Animals Are Dependent Upon Plants. Water Dissolves Some Substances.
Man is Dependent Upon Plants and Other Effect of Light Upon Some Plants.
Animals. The Rainbow.
Molds. Cause of Day and Night.
Magnetism. Turtles — Source Material.
Water in Air. Setting Up and Care of the School Aqua-
Plants Give Off Water. rium — Source Material.
Air Pressure. Domestic Animals — Source Material.
Fire Needs Air.
Fourth Grade Units
Community and Social Life of Animals — Plant Growth Depends Upon the Kind of
Source Information Concerning Ants, Soil.
Bees, and Beavers. Gardening.
Economic Values of Animals. The Early History of the Earth at New
Water Dissolves Some Substances. York City.
The Air About us Has Force. Molds.
We Live at the Bottom of an Ocean of Wiring an Electric Bell.
Air — the Sky. The Sun is the Source of Light and Energy.
Cause of Winds. The Sun is Larger Than the Earth.
How Soil is Made From Rock. Revolution of the Earth About the Sun.
The Moon.
Fifth Grade Units
Cause of Fogs and Clouds. Insects and Their Value to Man.
Migration of Animals. Insects as Competitors of Man.
Hibernation of Animals. Elements and Conditions Necessary to Life.
Some Animals Change Their Forms and The Last Ice Age.
Appearances. The Balance of Nature.
What Are the Stars? How Some Animals Are Protected by the
Cause of the Phases of the Moon. Way They Are Colored.
A Leaf is a Factory — Photosynthesis. How Plants Grow.
Conservation of Forests.
Sixth Grade Units
Vital Activities of Plants. The Balance of Nature.
Physical Properties of Air and Ventilation. Telephone.
Water and Its Importance to Life. Extermination of Pests.
Weather Bureau — Change of Seasons. The Story of the Earth.
Fire and Burning. Extermination of Species.
The Earth a Terrestrial Magnet. Planets.
Production and Transmission of Sound. Man's Methods of Adaptation Compared
Electromagnets. With That of Plants and Other Animals.
Electricity Cr.n be Used to Produce Heat.
*Tentative Course of Study in Elementary Science, G. S. Craig, Teachers College.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 419
The curriculum material has not been arranged with a grade sequence,
but it is assumed the teacher will have a grade consciousness, and will,
therefore, think of science with reference to the needs of children in her
particular grade. The cooperative plan of attacking this problem which
has been mentioned elsewhere will help to bring this condition about.
Definite objectives should be set up for each grade and definite standards
of achievement should be expected. This does not mean necessarily that
the objectives for each grade would be entirely different, rather it is
assumed they would not be, but it does mean that what the objectives
are for each grade would be known and understood. In a number of
courses of study the same general aims are set up for all primary grades
(1-3) and a separate general set for all intermediate and grammar grades
(4-7). This may be illustrated from the St. Louis course of study in
science, which follows:
Objectives for Primary Grades
To become acquainted with the environment in which one lives through
direct observation of man, plant life, animal life, and physical
phenomena.
To attain the habit of accurate observation through the use of one's
own senses.
To attain an appreciation of the beauty and interesting facts of
nature.
To attain habits of thinking in an effort to explain the "how" and
"why" of organic and inorganic phenomena.
To attain the habit of being guided by reason, thus discarding super-
stitious and biased opinions.
To become familiar with the law of cause and effect.
To acquire reverence for, companionship with, and love of nature.
To attain desirable attitudes and habits of humane treatment of
animals.
To attain wholesome recreational habits through contact with nature.
To acquire first-hand and meaningful experience with objects and
materials in order to interpret references to nature in music, art,
and literature.
Objectives for Elementary Grades
To acquire a love for and a joy in nature through observation and
discovery.
To acquire a habit of accurate observation and investigation of natural
phenomena.
To acquire a realization of the inter-relation of man, plants, animals,
and inorganic phenomena.
To develop an appreciation of nature.
To acquire the desire and the ability to use one's knowledge of nature
for the improvement of oneself and his environment.
To acquire the desire to protect and to preserve wild plant and animal
life.
To acquire wholesome recreational habits through contact with nature.
While there would be much duplication of general objectives in certain
grades, as illustrated by the St. Louis course of study, yet there would
be definite standards of attainment in knowledge gained, skill acquired,
et cetera. The teacher, then, should set up definite standards of attain-
ment for each grade.
Suggested Outline of Science Topics
For reasons which have been stated, the science material will deal
with those topics which may be catalogued under the headings of as-
tronomy, biology, geology, physics and chemistry. The material sug-
420
Course of Study for the
gested in the Fourth Yearbook of the Department of Superintendence,
while broken up into a number of separate topics, in reality belongs to
these four categories. In that yearbook, topics are given by grades for
the kindergarten and first six grades. The material suggested here fol-
lows the classification of units which are recommended in that publication.
Instead of outlining the material by grades, an abbreviated digest is made
and the material grouped under Primary Grades (1-3), and Intermediate
and Grammar Grades (4-7).
Classification op
Topics
Batrachians
Birds
Fish
Primary Grades
(1-3)
Frog and Toad— recognition, activi-
ties, etc.
Pigeon, domestic fowls, robin, — re-
cognition, activities, nest building,
migration, etc.
Goldfish — recognition, activities, etc.
A common fish of local waters.
Insects
Other Invertebrates
Caterpillar and bee — recognition, etc.
Moths and butterflies — recognition,
activities, etc. Fall insects, three com-
mon to locality.
Intermediate and Grammar
Grades (4-7)
Frog and Toad — review of previous
work, etc. Economic value, salaman-
der.
Ground and water birds — woodpeck-
ers, swallows, kingfishers, etc. Winter
birds — six common to locality. Return-
ing birds, etc.
A breeding aquarium fish (as stickle-
back). Fish common to local waters.
Salmon.
Water snail, spiders and spider web.
Land snail, slug, thousand legs.
Caterpillars and butterflies continued.
Cicada, locust, leafgalls, water insects
(as mayfly, dragon fly, etc.), leaf
miners, aphids, ants, water insects,
insect friends of the garden, enemies
of the garden, disease carriers, insect
enemies of man, of trees, etc.
Thousand-legs — review and expansion,
cray fish, fresh water mussel, earth-
worm, spiders, lobster, oyster, etc.
Mammals
Squirrel — recognition, etc. A pet
(rabbit) . Three or four farm animals,
animals of zoo or circus; cat and its
wild relatives; chipmunk.
Dog, different kinds, etc. Wild rela-
tives of dog. Wild relatives of farm
animals studied. Animals that hiber-
nate — bear and ground hog. Muskrat
and beaver, the bat, rats and mice,
burrowing animals, fur bearers, game
animals, game preserves, etc.
Reptiles
Turtle (land or water.) Lizard.
Review and enlarge on land and water
turtle. Alligator, giant land turtle,
snakes, etc.
Wild Plants
Fall and Spring wild flowers common
to locality. Coloring of flowers. Con-
servation of one Christmas green.
Continuation of Fall and Spring wild
flowers. Ferns, mushrooms, bracket
fungus, moss, lichens. Study of com-
posite and simple flowers. Seeds and
seed dispersal.
Cultivated Plants
Fall and Spring Garden flowers. A
few flowers common to the locality.
Observation of insects on flowers.
Recognition of whole plant. Flower-
ing shrubs, fruit blossoms, simple and
composite flowers. Pollination, seed
dispersal. Names of a number of
flowers.
Plants in General
Seed germination. Recognition of
common vegetables. Plants whose
fruits are eaten; whose roots are
eaten. Plant forms. Vines, shrubs,
grasses, water plants, etc.
Seed travelers continued. Weeds of
garden and lawn. Types of fruits,
berry like, stone, core, citrus, melons,
duration of plants, annuals, etc. Water
plants, poisonous plants. Weed
enemies of the garden. Plant adapta-
tions, etc.
Trees
Autumn leaves, Christmas tree. Fall
and Winter appearance of "Class
tree." Nut tree. Opening of buds.
Identification of few trees common to
locality.
Trees common to community.
Changes in trees, Fall, Winter, and
Spring. Shade trees and forest trees.
Tree transplanting. Forest protection
and conservation. Life cycle of trees.
Tree propagation. Relation of forests
to human life. Special uses of wood of
various trees.
Elementary Schools op North Carolina
421
Classification
of Topics
Primary Grades
(1-3)
Intermediate and Grammar
Grades (4-7)
Gardening
How to plant a bulb. Germination
of seeds. Home garden. School
garden. What plants need to grow.
Plants that grow from bulbs. Plants,
that grow from seeds.
Home and school garden. Growing
vegetables, flowers, etc. Harvesting.
Care of garden through Winter and
preparation for next year's work.
Rocks and Soil
Common building stone, recognition
and uses. How rocks were made.
Soils — kinds, and how made. Soils in
relation to gardening.
Sky and Weather
Signs of Autumn; of Spring. March
winds, April showers. Weather cal-
endar. Snow, frost, clouds.
Frost, dew, rain, temperature. Ther-
mometer, winds. Characteristics of
seasons. Causes of weather variations.
The weather map.
Star Study
Moon, sun, the dippers, milky way.
North star.
Orion and dog stars, more careful
study of milky way. Importance of
the sun. What stars are. Life story
of star. Comets and meteors. First
magnitude stars • Polar constellations.
Planet — theories of formation, etc.
Eclipses of sun and moon.
Toys, Inventions, etc.
Paper pin wheel. Swing, hammock,
pendulum, seesaw, scales, rubber
balls, bow and arrow, bat and ball,
tennis racquet, leather sucker, siphon,
inverted glass, etc. Mother's canning
in preparation for Winter.
Magnets and iron fillings. Comb
rubbed with silk and bits of paper.
Whistle tops, giant stride, water wheel,
kites, balloons, local water supply,
milk supply, electric bell, telephone,
telegraph, radio.
Utilize Nature Material of Local Environment
Fullest use should be made of the nature material found in the local
environment. If the migration of birds is being studied, the principle
should be illustrated through study of birds that are common to the local
community or to North Carolina. The pollination of flowers or the con-
servation of forests would be studied alike through the use of nature
material indigenous or common to this state. No subject affords a better
opportunity to know North Carolina than comes through a proper study
of elementary science. That the maximum may be accomplished toward
that end a brief list is given of certain nature material that is either
peculiar to or common to the state. Every elementary school child by
the time he finishes the seventh grade should be able to know the phe-
nomena mentioned.
422
Course of Study for the
RESTRICTED LIST OF NORTH CAROLINA PLANTS
Trees
*Balsam — Fir
*Spruce
*White pine
Hemlock
*Chestnut
Black oak
White oak
Northern red oak
Beech
*Sugar maple
Service-berry
*Yellow birch
White hickory
Black walnut
Tulip poplar
Black locust
*Cucumber tree
American elm
Mountain and Piedmont Regions
Shrubs
Alder
*Flame azalea
Spice bush
N. J. tea
Virgin's bower
Hazel nut
Wahoo
Winter green
Witch hazel
*Wild hydrangia
Laurel
*Dog hobble
Sour wood
Rhododendron
Sassafras
Elder berry
Sumac
Dogwood
Blueberry
Herbs
Wake robin
Hepatica
Spring beauty
Golden rods
Asters
Bluets
False fox glove
Buttercup, Skull cap, Meadow-rue
Horse mint
Wild phlox
Milk weed
Cow slip
Indian pipe
Jack-in-the-pulpit
Violets
Wood sorrel
Wild strawberry
Foam flower
Stone crop
Christmas fern
False Solomon's seal
True Solomon's seal
Coastal Plain
Trees
Swamp maple
Swamp gum
Chinquapin
Dogwood
Persimmon
Swamp ash
Beech
Holly
Tulip poplar
Sweet bay
Mulberry
Princess tree
Long leaf pine
Loblolly pine
Pocosin pine
Sycamore
White oak
Spanish oak
Black Jack oak
Turkey oak
Willow oak
Water oak
Black willow
Red cedar
Winged elm
Shrubs
Choke berry
Swamp azalea
French mulberry
N. J. tea
Pepper bush
High bush blueberry
Gallberry
Myrtle
Loblolly bay
Honey cup
Leucothoe
Fetter bush
Huckleberry
Farkleberry
Herbs
Bog dandelion
Fly poison
Trumpets
Pitcher plant
Venus fly trap
Sundew
Queen's delight
Red hot poker
Boneset
Pyxie _
False indigo
Atamasco lily
Dwarf in'3
Yellow fringed orchid
Blazing star
Star grass
White bracted sedge
Hat pins
Blue-eyed grass
Snowy orchid
White violet
Blue gentian
Meadow beauty
RESTRICTED LIST OF REPTILES AND AMPHIBIANS COMMON
TO NORTH CAROLINA
Snakes
Green snake
Black snake
Garter snake
King snake
Ground snake
Brown snake
Common water snake
Red King snake
Turtles
Box turtle, box tortoise
Mud turtle
Snapping turtle
Painted turtle
Lizards
Fence lizard
Red-headed scorpion
Green lizard or chameleon
Sand lizard
Frogs, etc.
Cricket frog
Tree frog
Leopard frog
Bull frog
Common toad
Toad
Water dog, mud puppy
Spring lizard
Spring frog
Newt
Slimy salamander
Dusky or common desmognoth
""Not common in Piedmont.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina
423
RESTRICTED LIST OF BUTTERFLIES, MOTHS, AND INSECTS
COMMON TO NORTH CAROLINA
(Swallowtails)
Ajax swallowtail
Tiger swallowtail
Common eastern black
swallowtail
Spice-bush swallowtail
Pipe-vine swallowtail
Orange-dog
(Blues)
Common blue
Eastern tailed blue
American silkworm
Cecropia moth
Luma moth
Butterflies
(Yellows)
Common sulphur
Eurytheme
Small sulphur
Large sulphur
(Whites)
Cabbage butterfly
Orange-tip
Moths
Promethea
Regal walnut moth
Yellow emperor
(Much Orange or Brown Color)
Monarch
Viceroy
Silver-spots
Southern silver-spot
Pearl crescent
Comma butterfly
Hunter's butterfly
Red admiral
Buckeye, peacock butterfly
Harvester
(Miscellaneous Color)
Mourning cloak
Red-spotted purple
Hawkmoths
Sphinxes
Underwings
Iiisccts and Moths
Where to Find Them
-Apples
Codling moth
Mexican bean beetle . Beans
San Jose scale Apple, peach trees
Round-headed borer Apple trees
Cabbage worm Cabbage
Plant lice Apple, rose
Potato beetle Irish potato
Curculio Peach trees
Tree borer . - Peach trees
House fly Houses
Boll weevil Cotton
Grasshoppers Grasses
Lincoln or terripan bug Squash
Squash bug
Tobacco fly
Lady beetle
June bugs
Crickets (field)
Praying mantis
Walking sticks
Dragon flies
House ant
Argentine ant
Honey bees
Hornet
Wasp
Where to Find Them
Squash
Tobacco
Leaves
Foliage
In grass
Twigs
.Foliage
_Near moist areas
TWENTY-FIVE COMMON NORTH CAROLINA BIRDS
Bluebird
Wood thrush
Tufted titmouse
Brown thrasher
Mocking bird
Chipping sparrow
Meadow lark
Blue jay
Red-headed woodpecker
Turkey buzzard
Oriole
Crow
Wood pewee
Robin
Chicadee
Carolina wren
Catbird
Cardinal
Goldfinch
Starling
Flicker
Downy woodpecker
Dove
Quail
Towhee
Extension Circular No. 170, of North Carolina Agricultural Extension
Service, State College Station, Raleigh, is a bulletin entitled "Common
Birds of North Carolina." This publication contains the names and
descriptions of one hundred common birds, and includes the twenty-five
whose names have been given.
FISH, MOLLUSCS, CRUSTACEA, ETC., COMMON TO
NORTH CAROLINA
Fish
Shad
Trout
Blue fish
Top minnow
Mackerel
Bass
Butters
Croakers
Herring
Mullets
Rock
Drum
Flounders
Perch
Jack
Molluscs
Clam
Oyster
Mussel
Snail
Slug
Scallop
Crustacea
Cray-fish
Lobster
Crab
Shrimp
Sow-bug
Myriapods
Millipeds
Centipedes
424 Course of Study for the
MAMMALS COMMON TO NORTH CAROLINA
Rabbit
Squirrel
Deer
ROCKS AND MIN
Minerals
Quartz
Magnetite
Feldspar
Hemotite
Muscovite mica
Limonite
Biotite mica
Pyrite
Hornblende
Kaolin
Augite
Talc
Garnet
Calcite
Cyanite
Raccoon
Chipmunk
Opossum
Mink-
Skunk
Muskrat
iS FOUND IN NORTH
CAROL]
Rocks
Granite
Diorite
Gabbro
Conglomerate
Sandstone
Shale
Clay
Limestone
Gneiss
Schist
Slate
Marble
Quartzite
Soapstone
The Department of Conservation and Development, State of North
Carolina, Raleigh, will identify and name any unknown rock or mineral
which may be submitted to it. This service is given without cost, except
the postal charges involved. Write this department for literature and
other services.
SCIENCE EQUIPMENT
Teachers should cooperate in use of the science equipment. Under ideal
conditions there would be a science room in which all science and related
work would be taught. Where a special science room cannot be provided,
there should be in each classroom, space available for nature material
and science equipment. To stimulate interest this might be called the
"Nature or Science Corner." The equipment and material here would
grow as the work progressed and the experiences of the children
broadened.
In schools in which both high school and elementary departments are
found, the high school teacher of science should cooperate with the
teachers of elementary science. In so far as practicable laboratory equip-
ment in the high school should be available to science teachers in the
elementary school. With no thought of standardization, it may be as-
sumed there should be a minimum physical equipment for effective science
instruction. In ''The Teaching of Nature Study and Elementary Science,"
New Jersey Department of Education, this list of simple equipment is
suggested:
1. An aquarium.
2. Shallow trays of growing seeds and plants.
3. Window boxes to supplement the second item.
4. Glass tumblers, for various purposes.
5. A rubber hose, for use with the aquarium.
6. Wooden boxes or glass jars, for the study of worms.
7. Shallow metai pans, for holding water.
S. An insect cage — this may be made of a lantern globe and wire screening or cheese-
cloth screening.
9. A collection of bottles with large mouths.
10. A ten-quart galvanized pail.
11. Nets for obtaining frogs' eggs.
12. A flashlight.
13. Dry cells and wire.
14. A magnetic compass.
15. A magnet.
16. A table with waterproof top. about 28x50 inches.
17. A globe, for study source of light, day and night, etc.
18. A wall cabinet with glass doors, for keeping collection's.
19. A storage cupboard, for materials not in use.
20. A thermometer.
21.- A barometer.
22. Small electric stove or hotplate.
23. A wetplate battery (upper grades).
24. It is desirable for children to have individual work lockers, especially in primary
rooms, for their work, built preferably under the windows, with doors. These are
useful for other purposes than that of the science work.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 425
REFERENCE MATERIAL
The fact that there are -no state adopted texts for the subject of Ele-
mentary Science emphasizes the importance of library and other reference
material. A rather detailed list of books and magazines is, therefore,
given. Every effort should be made to secure an adequate number of
these or other suitable publications. Science instruction cannot be made
effective unless the teacher is familiar with the field of science, and the
children have some opportunities to become acquainted with the subject,
both through the printed page and a study of the phenomena themselves.
A. Helpful Science Magazines
Title Publisher
Bird Lore Audubon Society, Harrisburg, Pa.
National Geographic Magazine. -National Geographic Society. Washington, D. C.
Nature Magazine..... 1214 16th St., N. W. Washington, D. C.
Current Science American Educational Press, Inc., 1123 Broadway, New York City
Popular Mechanics Popular Mechanics Press, 200 E. Ontario Street, Chicago, 111.
Popular Science .Modern Publishing Co., 250 4th Ave., New York City.
Science News Letter. Science Service, Inc., 21st and B Streets, N. W., Washington D. C.
The Science Classroom Popular Science Publishing Co., Inc., 250 4th Ave., New York City.
Travel Magazine Robert M. McBride, 7 W. 16th St., New York City.
B. Nature and Science Reference Books for Teachers and Older Pupils
Author Title Publisher Date
Animals:
Animals of North America National Geographic Society
Stone and Cram Animals of North America Doubleday 1905
Birds:
Baxter.. Bird Houses Bruce 1920
Chapman. Handbook of Birds of Eastern North
America Appleton 1900
Dearborn Bird Houses and How to Build Them.. U. S. Dept. of Agriculture 1923
Doubleday Birds of Town and Country Doubleday 1899
Grant Our Common Birds, How to Know
Them Scribner's.. ..1898
Pearson .Stories of Bird Life World 1924
Reed.... Bird Guide Doubleday 1923
Seipert Bird Houses Boys Can Build Manual Arts 1916
Snyder.. .Common Birds of North Carolina Extension Div. State Col., Raleigh 1927
Fishes:
Smith Fishes of North Carolina. ...State Dept., Conservation and De-
velopment, Raleigh, N. C 1907
Flowers:
Dana How to Know Wild Flowers. Scribner's 1900
Doubleday... Wild Flowers, Nature Library, Vol. IX Doubleday 1907
Matthews Field Book of American Wild Flowers Putnam 1902
Book of Wild Flowers National Geographic Society 1924
Reed Flower Guide Doubleday... 1925
Insects:
Brues, C. T. .Insects, Injurious and Beneficial Harvard University 1926
Fabre, J. H... ..Book of Insects Dodd 1927
Holland, W. J Butterflies— Nature Library, Vol. VI. ..Doubleday 1907
Moths— Nature Library, Vol. VII Doubleday 1926
Howard, L. C. Insects— Nature Library, Vol. VIII Doubleday 1926
Lutz, F. E.. Field Book of Insects Putnam 1918
Root- A. I., and E. R. A. B. C. and X. Y. Z. of Bee Culture.. Root Co 1923
Scudder, S. H Brief Guide to Common Butterflies of
United States Holt 1899
Weed, C. M Butterflies Worth Knowing. Doubleday .1919
Insect Ways Appleton ..1930
Minerals:
Watson, T. L. and Building and Ornamental Stones of State Dept. of Conservation and
Laney, F. B North Carolina, (N. C. Geo. Survey) Development, Raleigh, N. C 1906
Sea:
Bridges, T. C. Young Folks Book of the Sea.... .Little - 1928
Dixon, R. and Eddy, B. Personality of Water Animals Holt... .1928
Rogers, J Shells— Nature Library, Vol. XV Doubbday.— - 1908
426 Course of Study for the
Author Title Publisher Date
Stars:
Ball, Sir Robert ...Starland - Ginn __ 1922
Collins, A. F Book of the Stars.. Appleton 1917
McFee, I. M Secrets of the Stars Crowell ...1922
Proetor, M The Young Folks Book of the Heavens Little .1929
Trees:
Apgar, A. C ..Trees of the Northern United States.. American 1920
Bruncker, E North American Forests and Forestry-Putnam 1900
Coker, W. C. and
Totten, M. A .Trees of North Carolina .University of North Carolina Press 1916
Harris, G .Elements of Conservation Johnson 1924
Holmes, J. S Forest Conditions in Western North State Department of Conservation
Carolina and Development, Raleigh, N. C. 1911
Keelor, H. L Our Native Trees and How to Know
Them Scribner 1900
Newhall, C. S Shrubs of Northeastern N. America. .Putnam 1899
North Carolina Forest Fires and Their Protection, State Department of Conservation
Geological Survey Bulletin 51 and Development, Raleigh 1921
Pack, C. L Our Vanishing Forests Macmillan 1923
The School Book of Forestry... American Tree Association.. .1922
Rogers, J. E ...Tree Guide .Doubleday 1924
Trees Every Child Should Know Grossett.. .1909
Trees— Nature Library, Vol. I Doubleday 1907
General:
Caldwell, O. W Introduction to Science Ginn 1929
Caldwell, O. W. and
& Meier, W. H. D Open Door to Science Ginn. 1926
Champlin, J. D Young Folk's Cyclopedia of Common
Things Holt 1920
Downing, E. R Our Living World .Longmans. ...1924
Our Physical World Longmans 1924
Farquhar, and others The New Human Interest Library,
(Editors)... Vol. II Midland Press 1928
Green, G. R A Survey of Nature, Book I Comstock 1926
A Survey of Nature, Book II Comstock 1926
Hillegas, M. and others The Classroom Teacher (Vols. 5, 8
(Editors) and 9) The Classroom Teacher 1928
McFee, I. N The Wonderful Story of Science ,-Crowell 1929
Patterson, A. J The Study of Nature (Teacher's
Manual)... ...Public School Pub 1923
Encyclopedia:
O'Shea and others
(Editors) The World Book (12 Vols.) Quarrie 1929
C. Books Especially Suitable for Children
Primary Grades
Author Title Publisher Date Grades
Albright, N. B. and Nature Stories for Children: Book I... Mentzer 1927 1-2
Hall, J Book II 1927
Gordon, E. L. and An Autumn Book 1926 1-2
Hall, J A Spring Book 1927
Bailey, C. S Forest, Field, and Stream Stories Flanagan.. __ _1928 2-3
Garden, Orchard, and Meadow Stories Flanagan _1929 2-3
Brown, E. C Green Gate to the Sea.... Silver 1924 3-5
[Burgess Bird Book for Children 1 f 1919 2-6
Burgess, T. W ^Burgess Animal Book for Children.. [Little 1920 2-6
[Burgess Flower Book for Children... J { 1923 2-6
Dopp, K. E /Early Cave Men IRand f 1904 2-3
ITree Dwellers ( \ 1904 2-3
[Mother Nature Series: 1
Dunn, F. and I Baby Animals f 1928 ,1-2
Trosell, E [By the Roadside Row { 1928 2-3
[In Field and Forest J 11928 2-3
Johns, L. M. and
Averill, M Moths and Butterflies Owen 1929 2-3
King, J Birds in Rhyme Nelson .1926 1-4
Lewis, M. R ...At the Zoo Nelson 1927 2-3
[The Outdoor Book 1 f 1917 2-3
In the Green Wood. 1921 2-4
Meyer, Z \ Field and Tree [Little \ 1923 2-3
In Green Fields 1919 2-4
[Under the Maple Tree J [ 1927 2-3
1928 1-3
1928 1-3
1928 1-3
1928 1-3
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 427
Author Title Publisher Date Grades
[Science Readers: 1
Nida, W. L. and S. H. ^Trailing Our Animal Friends ^Heath.. / 1928 2-3
[Baby Animal Zoo .... J \ 1926 3-4
I Story of Man Series: ]
The Tree Boys f 1929 1-3
Fleetfoot, the Cave Boy Laidlaw { 1929 2-3
Taming the Animals J [ 1930 3-4
Persing, E. C. and [Elementary Science by Grades: 1
Peeples, E. K ^Bookl... }AppIeton.. . ../ 1930 2-3
[Book II J 1 1928 3-5
1 Grandfather's Farm.. ]
An Engine's Story.. (Scribners
An Airplane Ride f
Story About Boats J
Shillig, E. E Four Wonders: Cotton, Wool, Linen,
Silk ..Rand 1913 2-4
Zirbes, L. and
Keliher, A... ...Book of Pets Keystone.... 1928 1-2
and
Wesley, M.. ..Story of Milk Keystone 1928 2-3
Grammar Grades
Author Title Publisher Date Grades
Allen, N. B. Cotton and other Useful Fibers Ginn... 1929 4-6
Our Cereal Grains Ginn.. 1928 4-6
Bachman, F. P Great Inventors and their Inventions American. 1918 4-6
Bassett, S. W Steam and the Steam Engine Little. 1921 4-5
Bragg, W. H World of Sound Dutton. 1928 6-7
Carpenter, F. G .New Industrial Readers (3 Books) American 1929 5-7
Carpenter, F. G. and
Carpenter, F Journey Club Travels (3 Books) American 1925-26 3-5
Carpenter, H. A. and
Wood, G. C Our Environment Allyn 1928 6-8
Chant, C. A.. Our Wonderful Universe World 1905 6-8
Chamberlain, J. F Home and World Series Macmillan 1923-24 4-5
Collins, A. F Radio Amateur's Handbook Crowell. 1930 6-8
Craig, J. B /Nature Study for Boys and Girls IMcIndoo 1920 3-7
[Books for Grades 3-6. /
Crump, I Boy's Book of Airmen Dodd 1927 7-12
Daglish, E. F Reptiles Morrow 1929 4-7
.Fishes and Sea Animals Morrow 1929 5-7
Darrow, F. S. Thinkers and Doers. Silver 1925 5-7
Dorland, G. W In the Open Air.... ...Mclndoo 1924 4-6
DuPuy, W. A. .Odd Jobs for Uncle Sam... Heath 1927 5-7
Eaton, J .City and Country Series (4 Books) Harper 1927-28 4-7
Fabre, J. H. C Insect Adventures World 1918 5-7
Fox, F. C. How the World Rides Scribners 1929 3-6
Gehrs, J .Nature Study, Book II American 1930 5-7
Hawksworth, H Year in the Wonderland of Birds.. Scribners 1926 6-8
Hawksworth, H .Clever Little People with Six Legs Scribners 1924 6-8
.Strange Adventures of a Pebble Scribners 1921 5-7
Iseman, J. W Book of Airplanes Oxford 1930 5-7
Jenkins, O. P Interesting Neighbors Blakiston 1922 3-5
LePage, W. L A B. C. of Flight Wiley 1928 7-11
Maeterlinck, M... The Children's Life of the Bee Dodd 1927 4-7
Martin, J. L. and
Hay, J.... The Wayside Inn for Birds Heath 1929 6-7
Mellen, I Young Folks Book of Fishes Dodd 1927 5-7
Mooney, J. E.. Air Travel.... Scribners 1930 5-9
Moseley, E. L.. Trees, Stars, and Birds World 1919 5-7
1 Science Readers: 1
Animal Life IHeath j 1926 4-5
Makers of Progress | 5-7
Early Men of Science J [ 6-7
Parker, B. M .Book of Electricity. Houghton ...1928 5-7
and Book of Plants Houghton ...1925 4-7
Cowles, H. C.
Patch, E. M... Hexopod Stories.. Little 1928 4-7
Bird Stories Little 1921 4-7
First Lessons in Nature Study Macmillan 1928 3-6
Payne, E. G. and others Elementary Science Readers: Bks. 1-4 Sanborn 1928 4-8
Elementary Science by Grades:
Book III [1929-30 4-5
Book IV lAppleton. ....{ 5-6
BookV ( 6-7
Book VI I 6-8
Persing, E. C. and
Peeples E. K
428 Course of Study for the
Author Title Publisher Date Grades
Phillips, M. G._ Honey Bee and Fairy Dust Heath 1926 4-7
Spider Webs and Sun-Flowers Heath 1928 3-5
Rochelean, W. F Great American Industries (4 Books). .Flanagan 1927 4-6
Rush, C. E., and
Winslow, A... The Science of Things About Us Little 1930 5-7
Slusser, E. F ..Stories of Luther Burbank Scribners 1920 4-7
Speed, J -Billy and Jane, Explorers. (2 Vols.).... Heath 1922-24 3-6
Thomas, R Living Things Around Us Lippincott 1928 6-8
Thompson, J. M ..Water Wonders Every Child Should
Know Doubleday 1907 6-7
Trafton, G. H .Nature Study and Science Macmillan 1929 5-7
Washburne, C. W .Common Science. World 1926 5-7
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 429
CITIZENSHIP
MEANING OF CITIZENSHIP
In this course of study the word citizenship is interpreted as a term
covering whatever relationship the individual bears to the group of which
he is a part or to any phase of his life which affects both his own wel-
fare and that of the group to which he belongs. The institutions de-
veloped by society for affecting proper social adjustments are the home,
the school, the church, the government, and the occupation. It is first
in the home and then through some form of these other expressions of
group life that the individual must make his social adjustments; there-
fore, the content of such a course must necessarily deal with everyday
life experiences growing out of group life. The first training in citizen-
ship occurs in the home. The child comes to school his first day with a
definite set of habits, attitudes, and understandings related to home-life.
He immediately begins to acquire others about school-life which in turn
modify those connected with the home. The quality of adjustment re-
flected in standards of behavior is the quality of citizenship attained.
There have been many attempts made to define the good citizen. For
our purposes, this simple one should suffice. A good citizen in the school-
room, on the playground, on the street, at his home, or that of someone
else, or in strange surroundings freed from safeguards in the form of
friends and social standards, is the one who sees what should be done
to bring the greatest good to the most people, who can do it, who wishes
to do it, who will do it, and who having done it will judge the results
as impartially and constructively as possible. The problem of citizenship
training, therefore, simplifies itself into these steps: inspiration, infor-
mation, and participation. (Hatch. In Training for Citizenship. Scrib-
ner's.) Generally speaking, the educator's prime concern is making such
effective use of the total environment as will insure desirable dynamic
emotionalized behavior patterns which are satisfying to the individual.
Whatever integration the whole personality reaches through these experi-
ences is the quality of character, the foundation of good citizenship,
attained.
GENERAL OBJECTIVES
Recognition of the laws governing full and desirable growth and of
the conduct needs* in civic affairs suggests that the Elementary School
strive to realize the following objectives on the habit, understanding,
'Researches! reveal the following causes of inefficient social adjustments:
Failure to understand the economic and social value of health.
Failure to understand how to select one's life work.
Failure to know essential elements of success in one's life work.
Failure to handle one's income effectively.
Failure to grasp the meaning of citizenship in terms of actual specific conduct ele-
ments, skills, habits, understandings, and appreciations.
Failure_ to have cultural resources — such as music, painting, physical recreational
activities, etc., upon which to draw for leisure entertainment.
Failure to have "good manners" as a part of the personal equipment.
Failure in ability to reorganize real and superficial values characteristic of variety
of interests, activities, attitudes, etc., afforded by life of today.
tBobbitt. Curriculum Investigations. University of Chicago.
tMahan. An Analysis of Characteristics of Citizenship. TeLchers College
tGermane and Germane. Character Education. University of Chicago.
430 Course of Study for the
and appreciation level corresponding to the child's or group's capacity
and interests:
To focus attention of pupils, teachers, and parents on their own
civic and character problems and purposes as reflected in the home,
school, and community.
To develop a sensitive personal feeling on the part of each which
will result in the creation of a successful positive program for living
together happily and effectively to the end that stable character results.
To show the interrelation and interdependence of individuals of many
groups, so as to help the child make satisfactory adjustments to mass
units and situations having widely differing purposes and requiring
varying needs.
To supply such necessary contacts with the community life as ex-
pressed in the school, home, neighborhood, nation, and world as permit
the child to know that any government should
Be a means of protection from forces that handicap or destroy.
Be a means of cooperation to secure a worthy end.
Result from group agreement directly or indirectly or from an
acceptable authority.
Afford opportunities for the participation of all.
Offer greater opportunity for advancement than one would other-
wise enjoy.
Be subject to any needed changes.
To help supply contacts with other such social factors as the church,
civic clubs, etc., in school and outside of school which make for present
and later social efficiency.
To help supply such experiences and information about the work of
the world as will acquaint the pupil with vocational opportunities and
standards of efficiency to the end that he can and will enter upon some
profitable life career.
To acquaint the child with the worthy race achievements — fundamental
learnings and emotionalized ideals — and lead him to an appreciation
which demands that he treasure them so long as they shall fill racial
needs but willingly discards outworn customs, ideas, and institutions
when a real or possible substitute has been or can be worked out.
(This objective should result largely from a study of the Social
Sciences — history, geography, science, etc. The outline in 1923 Course
of Study is recommended until a revision is worked out.) •
SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES TO BE EMPHASIZED IN
CITIZENSHIP TRAINING
Grades One to Seven
A. Information and Understandings — These are developed in connection
with the grade outlines as separate units or in connection with pro-
cedure and content.
B. Traits and Trait Actions — The following limited list of traits has been
made to assist teachers in selecting guiding civic purposes for empha-
sis in the activities of the Elementary School: cleanliness, cooperation,
courage, courtesy, generosity, gratitude, health, initiative, kindness,
obedience, perseverance, responsibility, reverence, respect for rights
of others, and self-control. The treatment is not exhaustive; nor are
the items mutually exclusive. No attempt has been made at grada-
tion. The needs should govern conscious emphasis. For example, if
the survey reveals that all boys remove hats on entering building,
one should not center attention on this item of courteous behavior.
The analyses given below are suggestive of some desirable practices
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 431
which contribute to happy efficient social adjustments and these prac-
tices should be made at the time, in the place, and under the circum-
stances needed, regardless of the age or grade of pupil. The alert
teacher will not hesitate to add others and to lead her class to do so.
SAMPLES OF DESIRABLE TRAIT ACTIONS THAT MAY BE
PRACTICED IN THE HOME
Cleanliness — See Course of Study in Health Education.
Courage) — Bravely facing circumstances which cause physical or mental
pain:
Standing for what one believes is right when older brothers and sisters
dominate.
Enduring physical illness with patience and consideration of others.
Going to sleep in the dark away from parent or nurse.
Refraining from meddling with others' things or affairs (e.g., sister s
dolls, brother's skates, father's spectacles). .
Leading other children to respect his home property and rights of its
members (e.g., playing out-of-doors in good weather to avoid likely
disturbing noises, refraining from playing victrola or radio until
invited, etc.).
Acknowledging mistakes in the home.
Co-operation — Doing what one can and should to promote the group pur-
poses in family, school, or community:
Being on time at every meal.
Responding promptly to request of older persons — father, mother,
nurse or others.
Refraining from burning lights unnecessarily.
Refraining from running water unnecessarily.
Performing cheerfully and promptly those house duties which he is
capable of executing (setting table, running errands, caring for
younger children, getting fuel, sprinkling lawn, cutting grass, get-
ting a meal, or any other activity suited to the child's capabilities).
Accepting pleasantly reasons mother and father offer for denials to
their roouests.
Keeping quiet during the rest periods for father, mother, baby, or
self.
Putting personal belongings in their places to save mother, maid, or
sister from extra labor and waste of time.
Caring for furniture and floors (e.g., playing in suitable places, not
on sofa, beds, etc.).
Waiting cheerfully one's turn (e.g., to be served at the table, to talk,
for a bath, to go to the show, to make a visit, etc.).
Courtesy — Outward acknowledgment of the feeling of good-will for group
and group purposes:
Listening without interrupting.
Speaking in a pleasant, well modulated voice.
Closing doors quietly.
Rising upon the arrival of guests.
Offering chair to mother and father or older people.
Giving others preferences (e.g., giving largest piece of cake, and
prettiest flowers to others).
Using "please" to preface a request and "Thank you" to acknowledge
a favor.
Greeting father, mother, brothers, and sister cheerfully in the morning.
Welcoming visitors into the home (e.g., receiving at door pleasantly,
seating guests, and calling parents).
Expressing pleasure for a good meal, a new dress, or like favor.
432 Course of Study for the
Offering to care for younger children while mother attends a club,
calls, or takes a nap.
Greeting mother on return from school and putting one's things away
carefully.
Lending one's toys and other belongings in an agreeable way.
Refraining from borrowing each other's things without permission.
Entertaining younger children with story or older person with account
of day's happening.
Avoiding quarreling and fault-finding with members of the family.
Generosity — Expressing sympathy for individual and group purposes
through contributions:
Making presents to mother and father voluntarily, particularly on
Mother's Day, Thanksgiving, and Christmas.
Giving time patiently to younger brothers and sisters.
Giving and lending to others — books, ■ tools, etc.
Yielding pleasantly to authority making for the right.
Giving due credit to others for victory in game, debate, or any other
piece of work deserving praise.
Gratitude- — Feeling thankful for the good one receives from the group
and members of the group :
Appreciating clothes, food, shelter, amusements as a gift from mother
and father directly.
Acknowledging attentions and small courtesies.
Enjoying visits of neighbor's children and developing into real hosts
or hostess.
Health — See Course in Health Education.
Initiative — Thinking of, proposing, and working out plans to effect
worthy individual or group purposes:
Helping mother water the garden without being told.
Making sister a carriage for her doll.
Planning any pleasant surprise for members of family.
Recognizing any need and trying to meet them (e. g., bringing father's
slippers in the evening, getting the morning paper, bringing in the
milk, etc.).
Being resourceful in solving own problems (e.g., mending broken toys,
earning spending money, doing one's school tasks).
Seeing the possibility in materials and objects for play.
Asking for needed help when solution of problem is really beyond his
ability.
Knowing in what ways or affairs to follow leadership of mother,
father, brother, or sister and in what he is free to carry out (e.g.,
should not spend mother's money without her approval for other
things than those she suggested when she sends him to the grocery
store).
Kindness — Remembering in act and thought the rights, feelings, and
weaknesses of both members and contributors to group life:
Treating courteously the old and helpless.
Treating courteously the cook, the maid, the butcher, grocer, milk-
man, garbage collector, ice man, policeman, postman, etc.
Attending to food and cleanliness needs of all animals which are a
part of the home.
Protecting all animals from abuse.
(Note: See Courtesy and Cooperation.)
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 433
Obedience — Recognizing by appropriate action the will of the group or
proper authority until ability to make right choice is reached:
Accepting mother's decision that another day would be better for a
picnic, the show on another day is better, a certain book is prefer-
able, etc.
Performing health practices as outlined by mother and teacher.
Playing in certain places as directed by father.
Securing parent's approval of a proposed course of action involving
others (e.g., visiting the neighbors, bringing home company, spend-
ing one's savings).
Perseverance — Holding to individual and group purposes until achieve-
ment is made or seasoned advice or reason shows such a course of
action inadvisable:
Sticking to a thing until finished (e.g., child undertaking to keep the
baby for mother should do it at a regular time and always as care-
fully as possible; practicing the piano without being coaxed, paid,
or reminded, drinking milk after eating a good meal, etc.).
Responsibility — Being dependable in the execution of duties assigned or
assumed in behalf of the purposes of the group or for one's self as
evidenced in proper use of materials, time, and money:
Keeping promises made to mother, father, brothers, sisters or servants.
Carrying on one's own work faithfully without remindings (e.g., milk-
ing the cow, tending the garden, sweeping the stairs).
Protecting others from carelessness (e.g., not leaving pins where babies
can get them).
Entering an honest protest when younger or older child refuses to ob-
serve a rule or rectify a wrong (e.g., playing on the highway, re-
turning "purloined" property) .
Making helpful suggestions to guide future behavior of an offender.
Knowing when to report his own or the actions of others to parents
or to others who may be in authority.
Reporting happenings accurately.
Reverence) — Feeling and acting with respect for the verities of life:
Participating appropriately in prayer-life as an individual or as one
of a group upon his level of understanding and according to highest
standards of community.
Knowing and appreciating the meaning of motherhood and fatherhood.
Respecting one's parents.
Accepting and treating one's body and mind as gifts to be treasured
for future parenthood.
Feeling that creation is so much a sacrament as to forbid irreverent
attitudes.
Finding beauty in music, painting, sculpture, nature and work of
world.
Respect for Rights of Others — Yielding and providing opportunities
for members of group to realize their purposes:
Suspending judgment and actions until mother, father, or other mem-
bers of the family have the chance to explain.
Overcoming disappointment when special favors or privileges are not
granted.
Playing out-of-hearing of guests when mother has callers.
Protecting flowers and shrubs by playing in right spots, picking only
those flowers which should be, etc.
Staying off the lawn of others unless invited.
(Note: See also Cooperation, Kindness, and Responsibility.)
Self-Control — Inhibiting undesirable reactions toward members or ac-
tivities of group and expressing positive contribution to them:
(Note: See Perseverance, Courtesy, Generosity, and Cooperation.)
434 Course op Study for the
SAMPLES OF OPPORTUNITIES FOR PRACTICING DESIRABLE
TRAIT ACTIONS IN SCHOOL
Cleanliness: See Course of Study in Health.
Co-operation :
Helping the janitor, principal, teacher and other pupils to keep build-
ing and grounds clean and to protect school property (e.g., putting
trash and waste in baskets or garbage can, flushing the toilets,
picking up bits of paper, putting away crayons or other materials
not in use).
Distributing materials promptly and in an orderly way.
Helping to maintain quiet in the halls, toilets, and places near the
building.
Assisting the home room to carry out at least a few principles of
pupil government or control.
Being at school on time and ready for work.
Observing safety rules (see Health Course).
Following directions for the group and for individuals.
Using material at proper time (keeping hands off crayons, scissors,
etc.).
Setting up standards for work and play situations.
Bringing flowers and decorating at any time and for special occasions
such as programs.
Saving assignments for pupils who have been absent.
Returning equipment to regular place.
Courage :
Coming to school alone and returning home alone.
Defending one's rights on the playground by argument and with sup-
port of proper official if necessary — not by fighting if so doing
means violating school regulations.
Willing to take a little push or knock good-naturedly.
Standing up for one's ideas in classroom discussions by presenting
real evidence or logic.
Giving in gracefully when one's ideas are disproved.
Admitting failure or dishonesty in work, play, or speech and making
proper amends.
Keeping promises in spite of handicaps.
Playing a losing game well to the finish.
Keeping one's spirits up and putting forth real effort after repeated
discouragements in writing, in making a talk, working out a prob-
lem, getting a job, etc.
Courtesy :
Waiting turn in class discussions, cafeteria, classroom routine, etc.
Saying "I beg your pardon" when passing in front of a person, when
failing to hear, when accidentally bumping into someone.
Paying attention to the topic (important enough for group consider-
ation) without digressing until points have been settled satis-
factorily.
Practicing classroom manners (e.g., greeting one's teacher and class-
mates politely, keeping away from teacher's desk if she is having a
personal conference with another child).
Developing a pleasing voice in all discussions with pupils and teacher.
Feeling and expressing appreciation for the work of the faculty and
school officials.
Helping to care for the younger children of the school.
Greeting and assisting visitors to find seats in auditorium or rooms
in the building.
Closing doors quietly.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 435
Observing, bowing and other like courteous, gracious expressions at
opening and closing of school day.
Removing hats and wraps.
Allowing girls and elders to pass ahead.
Assisting others with wraps.
Introducing oneself or friends properly.
Generosity:
Giving needed help to classmates in school activities.
Acknowledging the value of good work done by one's class and school-
mates.
Sharing the use of tools and materials.
Listening to ideas of others and giving them consideration.
Gratitude :
Appreciating one's school environment, library, desks, physical com-
forts through heat, water, etc.
Appreciating these as gifts from parents and other families of the
community.
Appreciating services of principal, teacher, and janitor.
Health: See Course of Study in Health.
Initiative :
Thinking for himself and carrying out his plans in preparing lesson
assignments or other projects such as: (1) making travel booklets
and bird booklets, (2) contributing to school museum, (3) planning
and making picture shows in geography, history, etc., (4) plan-
ning and making contributions to doll house furniture or parts of
the equipment for sandtable scenes, (5) preparing stories to read
to class, (6) leading songs or games, and (7) participating crea-
tively in dramatizations.
Kindness:
Being friendly and helpful to the poor children, the lame children,
the "slow" children, the people who are ill or hurt, or frightened,
or unhappy in the school surroundings and to all dumb animals.
Being helpful and tactful to those who are unable to progress at the
normal rate.
Obedience :
Obeying without coercion the necessary rules for the group unless
granted special privileges (e.g., using certain entrances to building
to expedite administration).
Reporting promptly to work or study from play periods.
Being careful to reach school on time.
Observing rules about passing in and out of the building and about
the use of equipments and responding to bells or other signals.
Securing approval of teacher, principal, or proper group for a pro-
posed course of action affecting others (e.g., taking an excursion,
practicing in auditoriums).
Perseverance:
Persevering without being prodded when materials are hard to find
for museum, booklets, costumes, and properties for plays and other
work. , ,
Persevering when recitations are difficult to prepare or make (the
teacher must be careful not to give so much work, the child cannot
experience success in realizing the goal).
436 Course of Study for the
Responsibility:
Pulling on, taking off, and hanging up out-of-door wraps.
Observing the rules of waiting one's turn in conversation, use of
materials, etc., so as to contribute to the happiness and success of
group work.
Feeling the responsibility to oneself and group for mastering the
recitations, completing the booklet, finishing the piece of furni-
ture, etc.
Knowing the difference in fact and fancy in stories, occurrences, etc.
Showing pride and orderliness in ownership of proper use of school
materials and those of other children such as doing good writing
and drawing instead of scribbling and correcting first efforts in-
stead of throwing away papers and materials — using both sides of
paper with first efforts.
Knowing that it is proper to report a wrong-doer who breaks into a
school building and molests school records or property and will not
admit the act himself, and does report it.
Knowing that to report a pupil's spoiling a piece of paper, or crayon,
or wood in an honest effort to create something is very unnecessary,
and does not report it.
Helping and directing young children (in courtesy and kindness, using
carefully time, money, and supplies) .
Returning found articles.
Going directly home after school to avoid worrying parents.
Reverence: (See also analysis of this trait for home practice.)
Observing quiet and attention during devotional exercises.
Experiencing deep and abiding wonder and pleasure in looking at the
type of Madonnas which are supposed to typify Mary and the Christ
Child (example — The Sistine Madonna) when listening to stately
music such as Hallelujah Chorus or Largo, or a fine church hymn,
or when witnessing the dawn or blossoming trees or productive
fields of grain, mountains, or ocean, a great city, a mighty ship, or
in following man's great adventures, in the air (Lindbergh's flight,
Byrd's exploration of polar regions), the records of Christ's un-
selfishness and kindness, the kindliness and goodness that can be
found in one's family, friends, and business or school associates.
Respect for Property and the Rights of Others:
Playing the game according to the rules set up by group or an
authority.
Keeping buildings free from crayon and pencil marks.
Taking turns.
Handling books with clean hands; opening them properly.
Returning borrowed property promptly.
Talking quietly so that others may not be disturbed.
Taking just that part of the teacher's time which belongs to the
individual.
Using other pupil's time sparingly on individual projects.
(Note: See also Courtesy, Cooperation, and Responsibility.)
Self-Control :
Sitting on chairs in a way that does not interfere with others.
Feeling and expressing good will when one's team loses to another.
Rejoicing in good fortune of another.
Doing one's work when one does not wish to "carry on."
Taking one's turn in line at the drinking fountain, lunch counter,
or ticket booth.
Observing good sportsmanship qualities even when opposite team does
not.
Walking through halls instead of running.
Refraining from meddling in other people's affairs and things.
Elementary Schools op North Carolina 437
SAMPLES OP OPPORTUNITIES FOR PRACTICING DESIRABLE
TRAIT ACTIONS IN THE COMMUNITY
Cleanliness: See Course of Study in Health.
Courage :
Entering an honest protest to the child violator of community laws
and demanding that the wrong be rectified (e.g., a child breaks a
window-pane in a public building, sneaks fruit at the grocery, does
not pay for street car ride, crosses road or street in front of
vehicles, etc.).
Persisting in reforms in the face of indifference (e.g., participating
in clean-up campaigns, etc.).
Co-operation: (See also Obedience and Courtesy.)
Obeying the traffic laws about speeding, crossings, parking, and signal-
ing; looking to right and left before crossing.
Observing safety measures. (See Course of Study in Health.)
Playing games likely to break panes or cause other damage away from
public or private buildings (e.g., baseball, cat).
Picking only those flowers in public places which are designated for
that purpose.
Leaving things in order and giving orders quickly when shopping or
visiting the library.
Throwing all waste (fruit skins, clay, pasteboard, hair, paper, etc.)
into the garbage can.
Helping to make the lives of unfortunates happy (e.g., carrying bas-
kets to the poor at Thanksgiving and Christmas) .
Participating in community drives and special programs (e.g., Red
Cross, Clean-Up, Swat-the-Fly) .
Writing neatly and addressing letters carefully.
Patronizing local farmers, merchants, and doctors.
Attending church, Sunday School, and meetings of civic organizations
regularly.
Courtesy :
Entering all public buildings quietly and in a basiness-like way.
Removing one's hat (if a boy) in church, theater, or other building
where there are ladies (if a girl, in a theater or other crowded
hall).
Removing one's hat (if a boy) in an elevator in which there is a
woman.
Greeting those one meets and lifting one's hat (if a boy) to a girl,
woman, or older person.
Holding the door and allowing women, girls, and older women to pass
through.
Welcoming visitors to community first (if a boy).
Giving directions or other information clearly and pleasantly when
requested, refraining from saying unpleasant things about others.
Refraining from talking or whispering in the church, movie, library,
or other public places where speaking or other forms of entertain-
ment is going on.
Participating by listening to preaching and joining in the singing
or other activity going on at church or other public meeting.
Keeping engagements promptly.
Expressing pleasure of company, good foods, enjoyable entertainment,
things of unusual beauty and charm.
Being on time at Sunday School, church, a concert, meeting of the
Scouts, rehearsals, etc.
Passing to the right when meeting someone.
Awaiting one's turn and refraining from pushing or crowding at a
game, on a train, before a concert, etc.
Greeting the worker's of the community pleasantly.
Observing same manners for eating in public places as are set up
for good home practice.
438 Course of Study for the
Generosity :
Acknowledging merits of another community.
Contributing time and services to community projects.
Contributing funds and gifts to sick, poor, etc.
Gratitude :
Expressing appreciation of small favors and attentions of others.
Expressing appreciation of services rendered by the farmer, grocer,
milkman, baker, laundryman, teacher, banker, lawyer, preacher,
dentist, physician, undertaker, etc.
Expressing appreciation of the services of the policeman, patrolman,
fireman, street-cleaner, garbage collector, commissioners and other
county, state and national officials.
Health: See Course of Study in Health.
Initiative :
Organizing camping, fishing trips, or other recreational activities.
Buying and caring for a pet.
Selecting and following good leadership.
Finding a job for "after school hours."
Kindness: See Generosity, Courtesy and Cooperation.
Obedience :
Crossing intersections on "go" signals.
Observing "Keep Off," "No Trespassing," "Danger" signs.
Fishing, hunting, and trapping in season.
Observing the prohibition amendment and the law prohibiting sale of
cigarettes to minors.
Perseverance: See Courage.
Responsibility: See also Obedience.
Picking up paper and other trash in public parks, etc.
Acting in accordance with standards set up for behavior in church,
at the theater, in the library, on the street.
Helping others to cooperate in observing community laws.
Exercising thrift in use of money.
Exercising thrift in use of public materials.
Paying bills promptly.
Reverence: See same topic for Home and School.
Respect for Rights of Others: See Cooperation and Courtesy.
Knowing and recognizing values of trials.
Suspending judgment until facts are obtained and understood.
Overcoming disappointment when special favors (e.g., attempting to
get more favored parking spot which is forbidden).
Refraining from tipping public servants to get first place.
Refraining from trespassing on public or private property forbidden
to public.
Refraining from taking short cut paths across the lawns of other
people.
Reporting children who should be in school to teacher if they stay
out or do not enroll.
Self-Control : See Courage and Courtesy.
Being courteous to visiting teams.
Taking irritability and inefficiency of others quietly (e.g., clerks, tele-
phone operators, etc.).
Keeping cool in a "traffic jam" or fire.
Refraining from outbursts of temper where nothing can be gained
thereoy.
Refraining from making plans which will interfere with meeting one's
obligations (e.g., purchasing new things when old ones are unpaid
for).
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 439
SOME SUGGESTIONS FOR REACHING
THESE OBJECTIVES
GENERAL PROCEDURE
A. Study the natural tendencies of childlife; learn why children behave
as they do, how they grow; apply these principles to school life* in
planning with the help of the individual or group, when practical,
such a positive program of activities having intrinsic value for the
pupils that the members of the group, individually or collectively, are
constantly confronted with the genuine problems of life, and see that
they courageously meet these until a satisfactory adjustment is made.
B. Utilize as much as possible (without "preaching") the wealth of life-
enriching material found in language, art, music, literature, history,
geography, nature, and science. Some suggestions are made under
Materials and Special Period for Civic Instruction below, but as
there is a need for a unified Social Science course a committee is
now at work with a view to producing this within the next two years.
The 1923 Course of Study in geography and history is still sug-
gestive. Illustrative units from teachers will be welcomed by the
council on Course of Study Revision, State Department of Education.
C. Make case studies of problem children; get background of heredity
and environment, conduct history, scholastic record; try out various
solutions until a workable one is discovered. (See Remedial Work for
Problem Cases.)
D. Teachers should exemplify such traits as those listed under specific
objectives. Then they will promote through imitation and suggestion
these qualities in others.f
MATERIALS AND PERIOD FOR DIRECT INSTRUCTION
IN CIVICS
The time to be given to instruction in civic information is indicated
in the General Introduction, but because of the apparently crowded
schedule in the Elementary School, it is necessary to discuss the period,
or periods, to be used. By carefully checking through the topics covered
in the subject matter of the course in citizenship the teacher will find
that these can and should be cared for principally in the courses in read-
ing and literature, geography, history, language, and health. These are
indicated to a limited degree along with the topics as they are discussed
in the grade outline; incomplete but suggestive examples are given from
recommended basal and supplementary texts.
Arithmetic: Thrift and accuracy through personal budgeting, record
keeping, types of investments, etc.
Geography and History: See grade outlines.
Reading and Literature: See all lists in connection with language and
reading.
*See General Discussion of Method and the Course of Study in Health.
tSee Course of Study in Health and Waring's "Relationships Between Early Language
Habits and Early Habits of Conduct Control."
440 Course of Study for the
Moralizing in connection with literary works is not advocated as a
regular procedure. Usually they speak their own language and inspire
individuals to a variety of actions. However, when there is a definite
need for clarifying the pupil's thinking as to the right course of action,
it may be wise to find in literature a story illustrative of the desired
point. The following list is suggestive in a very limited way as to how
the state basal and supplementary reading material may be used
occasionally:
The Elson Reader, Book Two, page 75— The Rabbit Who Wanted White
Wings. (Contentment: doing what one can with what one has.)
heading Literature — Second Reader, page 11 — The Wind and the Sun (it
is better not to boast). Page 24 — The Lion and the Mouse. (Grati-
tude: doing a "good turn" for a "good turn.") Page 241 — Joseph.
(Kindness to one who has mistreated others.)
Child's World, Third Grade, page 9 — Philemon and Baucis. (Sharing
with another brings pleasure and creates willingness to serve.)
Studies in Reading, Fourth Grade, page 158 — King Solomon and the Two
Mothers. (Love: "Actions speak louder than words.")
Child Library Readers, Fourth Grade, page 187 — Laetitia and the Red-
coats. (Courage in presence of physical danger.)
Studies in Reading, Fifth Grade, page 235 — A Little Sermon. (Helping
the older person.)
The Silent Reader, Fifth Grade, page 107 — It Takes Two to Make a
Quarrel. (Self-control when another angers one.)
Days and Deeds, Fifth Grade, page 24 — The Scout Trail. (Scout Code
Traits.)
Music and Art:
Pictures and music should make a definite contribution to character
for through them children may come not only to recognize and appreciate
the beauty in rhythm, tone, pictures, in architecture, and nature, but
they may also gain clearer ideals and increased inspiration toward right
conduct. This will tend to influence them to want and make artistic
homes — beautiful public buildings, and highways — clean streets, play-
grounds and parks; to want and seek worthy amusements. Some of the
pictures, properly presented which might be used in this connection are
listed on the following page. Accompanying each is a suggestive musical
composition. As it is desirable to have many pictures and many musical
selections to allow for individual choices and tastes, it is taken for granted
that the teacher will greatly extend and make adaptations of this list.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina
441
Trait
Cleanliness
Co-operation
Courage
Courtesy
Generosity
Gratitude
Health
Initiative
Kindness
Obedience
Perseverance
Victor Records (Arabic)
Pictures Progressive Music
No Title Grade Series (Roman)
3— Children of the Sea 1-4 The Song Sparrow's Toilet (I ) .
33— Dutch Interior 4-7 1326.
92-Washerwoman 1-7 Volga Boat Song.
119— The Holiday 1-7 20440 (Second Garotte-Sapellmikoff).
15— The Blue Boy 1-7 20161.
9 — Age of Innocence.. 1-7 6622.
95-Summer Shower 1-7 20442-20173.
602— Independence Hall 5, 6, 7 Star Spangled Banner (III).
H4_Feeding Her Birds 1-3 20215.
7-Children of the Shell 1-3 22169
156-The Wheelwright 4-7 The Blacksmith (IV).
157-Going to Work 4-7 The Glory of the Game (IV).
601-The Capitol 5-7 America for Me.
50— The Solemn Pledge 4-7 90983.
127-The Fog Warning.. 5 20319 (Storm. Rossini)
207-Northeaster. 5 9275. Lead Kindly Light (III).
4 — An Aristocrat 1 6835.
106 The Vigil - --- - 6 6791.
113— The Boy Christ in the Temple 4-7 35958 (Largo-Handel).
256— Quest of the Golden Fleece.. 7 Upidee
502— The Minute Man 4-7 Soldier Boys (I).
503-The Protest — - 4-7 The American Hymn (III).
181— Boyhood of Raleigh 6 The Sea Princess (III).
129-Christ at Emmaus 1-7 He Shall Feed His Flock (III).
81— King Cophetua and the Beg- ,.,.„. ,
lar Maid — 4-7 20750 (Love's Greeting Elgar).
30— The Artist's Mother 5-7 776 or 1286 (Mother of Mine Tours).
221— Modern Cinderella. 1-3 Polly s Bonnet (I)
279— Old Market Woman 1-7 Hot Cross Buns (I).
86— Breakfast 6261.
162-Saying Grace - 1-3 gappy Thought (I).
129— Christ at Emmaus Praise to God (III).
149— Spanisn Beggars 3-7 1153.
106-The Vigil 4-7 6791
93— The Last Supper 5-7 21254
271— The Art Jury 5-7 The Glory of the Game (IV).
69— Going to Church 4-7 20805
45— The Jester 22163 : B.
162-Saying Grace Russian Harvest Hymn (IV).
2-Holy Night 1-3 20150.
901— Hearing 1-3 Hearing (Meisner).
2 202-seeing g :::::::::::: 1-3 pretty Me gouiu. ©.
203-Tasting 1-3 Cherries are Ripe (I).
904— Touching 1-3 Blowing Bubb.es (1).
205-Smemng g ::::::::: l-3 Will you Come with Me? (I).
119-The Holiday 1-4 The Holiday (I).
72— The Dance Carmage 7 A Spanish Dance (II).
1QQ— The Whistling Boy 4-7 Betty and Billy (1)-.
27-Spring Dancl . 4-7 20121 (Rustle of Spring; Come Lassies and
Lads) .
20-Dancing in a Ring 1-5 20169 (Armaryllis-Old French Song).
In Wooden Shoes (I).
146-The Torn Hat.. £&7k" B-
28— Lavinia 22075.
41— Joan of Arc 6577.
118— The Primitive Sculptor nns
^Mi5 S at Wyk--^:::::::::."" I.":::: The Mill Fairy (ID. Back of the Bread (III).
64— Water Carrier 21781.
151— In the Country 1-3
167-The Two Sisters 1-5 Sleep Little Treasure (I).
Tfiij— Ohums — ■ 4-7 Hail to Our Class (IV).
270-Mother'andChTldV.;::--:.-.. 1-3 33958 (Jewels of the Madonna Ferrari).
91— Washing the Diciples' Feet .. 1-7 The Immigrants (IV).
107— Boy with Rabbit 1-4 20203.
94— St. Francis 1-7 57180.
21— The Horse Fair 4-7 6246 (Festival at Bagdad)— Korsakow.
34-Behind the Plow" 4-7 35767 (Plowing Song)-Chadwick.
114— Feeding Her Birds 1-3 20215.
94— St. Francis 1-7 57180.
606-Lincoln Memorial 6-7 See the Conquering Hero Comes (III).
508— End of the Trail 5, 6, 7 Integar Vitae (III).
505— Roosevelt S?/ 6 -^ , T ,
34— Behind the Plow The Farmer (I).
280— Prophets 35873
281— Prophets 201150.
442 Course of Study for the
Victor Record (Arabic)
Pictures Progressive Music
Trait No. Title Grade Series (Roman)
Responsibility 50— The Solemn Pledge 4-7 90983.
601— The Capitol 4-7 Columbia, The Gem of the Ocean.
221— A Modern Cinderella 1-3 A Carriage to Ride In (I).
13— Homework 1-5 Chant D'automne— Tschaikowsky.
64 — The Water Carrier 1-3 Dancing Raindrops (I).
116— The Santa Fe Trail 4-7 21169 (Oh Susannah) (II).
28— Lavinia 5-7 Wishing and Working (II).
Come Ye Tankful People (III).
39— Return of the Fishermen. A Sailors Life— Van Lussenbrock.
Fisherman's Song — Parker. (III).
Fisherman's Prayer — Myrberg (III).
47— The Gleaners 4-7 81603: Song of Rest (IV).
114— Feeding Her Birds. 1-3 Morning Song (II).
112— Holland Morning 6590 (Spring Flowers)— Saint-Saens.
35839 (Spring Song)— Mendelssohn.
Reverence 41— Joan of Arc. 5-7 6599 (Elegie)— Massenet.
22053 (Le Marsaillaise).
32— Preparing for Church 6093 (Cavatina)— Roff.
600— Arlington Amphitheater 5, 6, 7 See the Conquering Hero Comes (IV).
37— The Angelus 4-7 6691 (Ave Maria)— Schubert.
Evening Bells (III).
74— Women in Church 5-7 Now with Creational Morning Song (III).
122— The Infant Samuel 1-5 Children's Hymn (II).
500— Appeal to the Great Spirit... 4-7 Integer Vitae (III).
2— Holy Night 1-7 20150.
Self-Control 166— Blue Flowers To the Fringed Gentian (IV).
Dandelion (I).
34— Behind the Plow— In the
Cornfield (II).
41 — Joan of Arc 6577.
106— The Vigil 6791.
27— Spring Dance 6576.
116— Santa Fe Trail... 5-7 22174.
14 — Dance of the Nymphs 6576.
Note: — These pictures may be secured from Art Extension Press, Inc., Westport, Conn., or from Gray-
Creech Company, Winston-Salem, N. C.
OPENING EXERCISES:
Teaching and practicing flag salutes, and holding flag-raising;
checking one's record on observance of trait actions; presenting special
programs on the traits; presenting activities that mark the culmination
of a unit of work.
OBSERVING SPECIAL DAYS AND CHARACTERISTIC IDEALS
SUCH AS THOSE LISTED HERE:
Hallowe'en: Respect for property and rights of others, encouraging
generosity, etc.
Armistice Day: Sacrifice for an ideal, love of country.
Thanksgiving Day: Any phase of service.
Christmas: Sharing gifts, time, talents, etc.
Lincoln: Maintaining good humor, kindliness.
Washington: Being truthful and fair.
Flag Day: Meaning of flag, correct usage.
(Note: See Curtis, "Why We Celebrate Our Holidays." Lyons, 750.)
ENCOURAGING SUCH EXTRA CURRICULAR ACTIVITIES AS
FOLLOWS:
Scouting, traveling, fishing, reading, gardening, etc.
KEEPING A GOOD SUPPLY OF ILLUSTRATIVE MATERIAL:
Books listed after various topics.
Maps of town, district, state, nation, world. (See County Superin-
tendent of Schools for local maps; write State Highway Commission
for outline maps; cheap traveling, pocket-size may be secured from
most gasoline stations.)
Copies of the constitution of state and nation.
Collier's Code, Collier's Weekly, New York City.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 443
Hutchins' Code and the Iowa Character Education Plan, Character
Education Institute, Chevy Chase, Washington, D. C.
Junior Red Cross Magazine, Washington, D. C.
A bulletin board.
Collection of good music, records, books, etc. (List furnished by
State Department of Public Instruction upon request.)
Collection of famous people who were good citizens for the local
community, state, nation, and the work.
Collection of pictures of beautiful homes,- schools, public buildings,
parks, trees, roadsides, etc. (Note: Back numbers of National Geo-
graphic, Washington, D. C, may be secured very cheaply. Dow's
The American Rennaisance, published by Comstock and Co., is ac-
companied by a wealth of pictures illustrating gradual evolution of
social life from colonial days until the present.)
Bulletins and pamphlets on North Carolina — write State Depart-
ments of Conservation and Education, Chambers of Commerce in the
various cities and the North Carolina Library Commission.
Play Materials — See "Course of Study in Physical Education" and
"Permanent Play Materials for Young Children," by Garrison (Scrib-
ner's), "Flags of Various Nations" — J. W. Van Kirk, Youngstown,
Ohio. Bulletins of the Committee on Public Information, Washington,
D. * C. Bulletins on special days — Arbor Day, Safety, Clean-Up,
Temperance, American Education.
GENERAL DISCUSSION OF METHOD
In general we may say that citizenship training is a matter of method
which, whether we will it or not, is serving as a binder for the subject
matter content of experiences — assignable knowledges and skills and those
non-assignable emotionalized ideals, attitudes, and appreciations. What-
ever is learned is colored by the emotions of the pain or pleasure, the
success or failure, connected therewith. To build right attitudes, the
teacher, then, must acquire a technique encompassing the whole of learn-
ing. Below are listed practical suggestions which are in harmony with
child characteristics of growth.
A. Essential Steps for Teacher to take in planning any school ex-
perience that will contribute in a worthwhile way to citizenship
growth :
1. Studying the immediate objectives sought, the suggested major
problems, and the subject matter outlined as contributory to the
solution of the problems and objectives set up.
2. Making a tentative survey of the class and list their interests, their
past and present activities, so as to get an intelligent knowledge
of what they will likely wish to do that will fit in with the scheme.
3. Deciding upon some problem, project, center of interest, or uni-
fying topic or question, which will most nearly result in attaining
the objective set up.
a. See that it meets the following criteria:*
(1) Is it related to the present living experience of the
children?
(2) Does it give promise of outcomes relatively valuable in
life today?
(3) Will this work contribute to some of the larger essential
goals of education?
(4) Will it give fuller meaning to the experience of child in
this particular environment?
(5) Is it hard enough to challenge?
(6) Is it easy enough to insure some degree of success?
(7) Will it lead on to something more worthy?
"Lois Coffey Mossman, Professor of Education, Teachers College.
444 Course of Study fob the
(8) Does it come out of the children's previous experience?
(9) Will it foster an inquiring, investigative attitude?
(10) Will it teach the children method in ordering their ex-
periences
(11) Will it develop relationships leading to organization of
experience
(12) Is the experience involved socially constant or socially
variable?
(13) Are the fields of subject matter involved worthwhile repre-
sentative of the big aspects of life?
(14) Is it related to other interests of the children?
(15) How often and how recently have similar activities been
experienced?
(16) Will it contribute to the child's efficiency?
(17) Is it in line with the theory of increasing difficulty?
(18) Is it practicable under school conditions?
(19) Are materials and helps needed available?
(20) How fully can the purposes be carried out?
(21) How much time will it consume?
(22) What difficulties may arise in carrying it out?
b. If it seems to meet immediate objectives, list probable .values
in terms of outcomes and decide whether or not the proposed
experience is worthwhile.
4. Reading up on available materials and work up list of those needed.
5. Taking stock of all the various approaches that can be made to
lead the pupils to see relation of the new experience or idea to
the old.
6. Trying out the selected approach or approaches with the class.
7. Through thought-provoking questions and information helping the
class to state and define their problem or problems.
8. Challenging the initiative of the pupils in suggesting the material
necessary to solve the problem, and
9. Helping them to make a plan of procedure that points to the
accomplishment of their purpose, the solution of their problem,
taking care of the following items:
a. Available sources of information — books, pictures, supplies,
people, observations, excursions, experiments, etc.
b. Needed equipment.
c. A suitable working set-up:
(1) If it be a study and appreciation activity — will there be
need for demonstrations, excursions, interviews, lectures,
experiments, investigation of source material, discussion
and reports, wide and intensive reading? Should they
work as individuals, or in group committees, or as a whole?
(2) If it be a drill activity — will it be conducted for needs
of individual, group, or class as a whole? Should original
or standard material be used? What time should be
utilized and standards attained? Will standards set by
course of study be well taken care of?
d. Through thought-provoking questions on the part of teacher
and pupils challenge reflective thinking of the pupil to see
whether or not the essential facts, the accomplishment, etc.,
constitute an adequate solution to the problem.
10. Measuring results of work. (Study suggestions made for each
outline in course.)
B. Types of Approaches that tend to focalize attention and interest in
the desired directions.
1. Providing a rich and stimulating environment of beautiful pic-
tures, interesting exhibits, challenging tools, inviting books, aquari-
ums, etc.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 445
2. Encouraging initiative and freedom of language expression as
reflected by:
a. Questions.
b. Involuntary attention to certain ideas or things.
c. Expressions of desires to perform certain acts, make certain
things, find out reasons for, go certain places, etc.
3. Seeing to what extent there are common interests and setting
about making them active through such means as reading a poem,
telling a story, informal group discussion, exhibiting related ma-
terial, etc.
4. Building the desired experiences in child life which lead to the
projected experiences (e.g., before the Newson Primer is to be
really vital every child should have a carefully planned birthday
experience).
C. Ways of Keeping Effort Moving in the Right Direction
1. Through group discussion.
2. Through study and investigation.
3. Through excursions.
4. Through creative expression.
5. Through culminating organizations, (e.g. — See unit on Art Ap-
preciation, page 475.)
Group discussions play an important role from the initial point to
the final step of the experience. They are needed for pooling ex-
periences, planning steps of an undertaking, exchanging ideas and
materials, evaluating same, solving problems and difficulties, checking
accomplishments, and determining next lines of attack.
A successful group discussion or lesson requires skill and careful
planning. It is a technique which permits the greatest waste of time
and effort if definite standards are not taken into consideration by
the teacher who is a guide and director and who is ultimately re-
sponsible for the success or failure of the procedure. Always the
form the discussion takes should be determined by needs. They may
vary from a few minutes to an hour or more while solving a difficulty
or presenting material of interest to part or all of the class.
Criteria for Evaluating Group Discussions:*
1> Is the situation a genuine social one?
a. Does the subject matter under discussion seem worthwhile to the child?
b. Is the group seated socially?
c. Do pupils address remarks to the group as a whole, to each other, or to the
teacher, as the occasion demands?
d. Is the teacher a member of the group?
e. Do children base discussions upon their own experiences whenever appropriate?
f. Does every child feel responsible for some contribution?
g. Do pupils make voluntary contributions?
h. Are pupils courteous to each other? Do they address each other naturally?
i. Do pupils exchange materials?
j. Is the class aware of individual or small-group related interests which arise as
the problem progresses?
k. Do pupils have frequent opportunities for exercising leadership?
1. Is the teacher quick to recognize and utilize intelligent questions of pupils and
not substitute those of her own making?
m. Does the teacher talk unnecessarily?
n. Is the teacher flexible in her plan and adjustable in changing situations?
The socialized recitation or discussion is a spirit which permeates the classroom, not
a form to be learned and used mechanically. It is the natural way to proceed when a
group of people interested in the same subject come together for discussion. A discussion
is socialized just to the extent that children are allowed and encouraged to exercise the
social qualities of self-control, initiative, cooperation, personal responsibility, critical judg-
ment, clear and independent thinking, and courtesy.
2. Is reflective thinking stimulated?
a. Is ample provision made for building clear and vivid images through rich and
colorful contributions from teacher experiences; recalled experiences of chil-
dren; reading materials full of episodes rich in detail; excursions, demonstra-
tions, observations, blackboard sketches, exhibits, maps, graphs, pictures?
*Note: Practically all of the remaining discussion or method is adapted or taken directly
from the Ann Arbor Course of Study in Social Studies through permission of Superintendent
of Schools, Ann Arbor, Mich.
446 Course of Study for the
b. Is constant attention given to enlarging the meaningful vocabulary of children?
c. Are new meanings always accompanied by the written or printed symbol ?
d. Are opportunities found and utilized for making worthwhile generalizations?
e. Are generalizations made only after adequate data and experiences are at
hand?
f. Are pupils held to the point in the discussion and do they grow in power to
recognize relevant and irrelevant contributions?
g. Are summarizing statements made from time to time?
h. Does the group hold itself responsible for definite accomplishments at the close
of a discussion? In other words, do they ask, "Have we arrived?" "What's
next?", etc.
i. Do the pupils exercise critical judgment? Do they challenge statements? Do
they evaluate data?
j. Is sufficient time given for reflective thinking and full replies from pupils?
k. Is a reasonable amount of time given to questions and difficulties of indi-
viduals?
1. Does the discussion leave the pupils with a desire to study further?
m. Do specific learnings come out of the discussion?
The Conduct of a Study and Investigation, too, is successful to
the degree that the teacher recognizes and promotes right practice in
mastering the skills, habits, and knowledge most useful in the study
of technique. This phase should care for training in the work-type
reading and lead to the pursuit of personal, permanent reading
interests. Definite library hours should be set aside to work with
books. These should be as carefully planned as any other phase of
activity. The following questions will suggest criteria for evaluating
the study procedure:
1. Are the independent study and reading expected of pupils well
within their powers?
2. Are assignments adjusted to individuals needs and interests? Does
the assignment provide for skills on increasingly higher levels?
3. • Is ample material on the child's level available?
4. Does definite training in the technique of study keep pace with
the demands of the problem?
5. Are various study procedures required, such as reading accurately
and carefully or reading to answer specific questions?
6. Are pupils given definite help in putting the results of study and
investigation into proper shape for group discussion or presen-
tation? Do pupils become increasingly independent in this respect?
7. Are pupils given help in knowing where to go for information and
how to use the sources? Is sufficient practice given in available
sources? Is provision made for increasing ability in locating
material through the use of such mechanics as a table of con-
tents, an index, and an appendix?
8. Are specific individual purposes apparent during the study exer-
cises?
9. Are the physical conditions during the study period hygienic, and
are they conducive to concentration?
10. Is the teacher conscious of the study practices of the individual
pupils?
11. Is every child challenged to the limit of his capacity?
12. Does every child feel the satisfaction which comes from successful
accomplishment?
13. Is the teacher wise in giving or withholding individual assistance?
An Excursion must be carefully thought through in terms of pur-
poses such as: (1) gathering data, (2) approaching problem, (3)
organizing information and ideas already obtained. Probably no ex-
cursion should be undertaken if the teacher does not already know
in advance what the class will likely see. There should be a clear
understanding on the part of the teacher and pupil as to what they
are looking for. Organization and detailing of leadership should be
worked out ahead of time with leadership, time, and routing made
clear to all.
Follow-up work is even more important than the set-up, for while
children get details, they do not easily see relationships and need to
have certain misunderstandings and false conceptions cleared up.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 447
There will be need for organization and application of facts. Any
new interests should be given due consideration inasmuch as they
may be the source of new purposes.
Creative Expression, the highest level of interest, effort, and at-
tainment of any unit of experience or study, may come often, and at
various intervals of time. In the truest sort of sense to follow one's
real interest and to clothe it with meaning by setting-up a plan of
procedure is as creative as the writing of an original song, poem,
or story — as the molding of a vase — as the painting of a mural.
This truth must be realized, but the use of plastic materials will
always have a definite place as a medium for clarifying ideas and is
just as important as any other.
The following questions are suggestive of standards for conducting
the period for free expression:
1. Is purposefulness apparent in each pupil? Are absorption in the
test, interest, and self -direction apparent?
2. Are opportunities given for individual purposes as well as for
group purposes?
3. Is the technique such that proper emphasis is placed upon plan-
ning?
4. Are all materials and tools at hand when needed?
5. Are pupils held individually responsible for caring for unfinished
work and unused materials?
6. Does mastery of technique keep pace with the increasing demands
of the task? Is it given when the need for it is recognized?
7. Are the pupils aware of the kind of conduct required by the
situation?
8. Is the pupil held to an individual project until some profitable
learning has been derived? Are pupils at times permitted to
abandon purposes which in their development have proved unwise?
9. Are results judged in terms of growth, in terms of purposeful-
ness, resourcefulness, mastery of technique, creative power, order-
liness, industry, self-control, and leadership rather than in terms
of the finished product?
10. Are pupils stimulated and encouraged to find expression through
various media?
11. Is the situation such that individual creative powers have freest
possible expression?
Perhaps no Outcome is as Important as the Finding of New Pur-
poses, new directions for interesting pursuits. Other culminating ac-
tivities may take the form of assembly programs, plays, pageants,
festivals, posters, booklets, maps, and charts. Evaluate this type of
activity according to the following principles:
1. Does the culminating activity come as a spontaneous and natural
outgrowth of the work of the group?
2. Are the forms of expression used childlike rather than adult?
3. Are plans made cooperatively and is there a proper balance be-
tween pupil and teacher suggestions?
4. Does the culminating activity have intrinsic worth; that is, is it
interesting, stimulating in content, and controlled by worthwhile
purposes?
5. Does it at the same time operate as a means of integrating and
organizing past experiences?
6. Does the activity call for the participation of all members of the
group?
7. Are the content values of the previous experiences made apparent
in the culmination?
448 Course of Study for the
REMEDIAL WORK WITH PROBLEM CASES
Investigations of problem cases in behavior made through the assist-
ance of teachers show that these are surprisingly similar throughout the
grades. The sixteen most frequently mentioned types were: theft, lack
of interest, disobedience, selfishness, poor sportsmanship, lying, cheating,
mischievousness, discourtesy, lack of self-control, stubbornness, disregard
for property, anti-socialism, bullying, near-incorrigible, truancy, unadjust-
ment. A study of these cases to discover causes produced the following
list: a new experience, past environment, wrong habits from associates,
lack of moral concepts, natural impulsive and emotional disposition, en-
vironment of self-control lacking, pampered, petted, spoiled, had not been
taught to think, needed constructive criticism, desired success without
effort, listened .to wrong counsel, destitute home life, could not stand
temptation, low mentality, no idealism in home, lacked self-confidence, did
not know how to study, work unsuited to individual needs, never per-
mitted to "shine," had nagging father, wanted to play all the time,
conceited, deserted by parents.
In the method used to help the child form the right response some
of the following proved effective for several cases: discussion, appeal to
reason, honor, pride, etc., coercion, letting him work it out after dis-
cussion, having him consult others, making it a group project, calling
attention to rules violated, reading or picture study, cooperation with
parents, searching members of group, duties demanding honor and
honesty, application of golden rule, inspection of lunches, praising efforts,
threatening with reform school, showing him that we cared, responsibility
of handling money, inducing mother to buy glasses, kindness, having him
arrested, winning his confidence, praising the truth, eliminating need of
theft, encouraging him, appealing to officers of law, showing sympathy,
prayer, appeal to fair play, trusting him, giving a chance to earn money.
"Big Sister" movement, definite assignments, showing interest, winning
his confidence, helping unfortunate classmate, giving constructive work,
changing his seat, restoring his confidence, interest in wholesome activi-
ties, giving him part in play, letting him choose work, making him leader,
letting him "shine," helping him help himself, getting him a job, with-
holding privileges, winning his admiration, isolating him, admission to
vocational school, ousted from office by class, citizenship talks, medical
attention, citizenship organizations, introducing a new moral code, bar-
ring unfair players, supervising play, requiring less class work, extra
work in which he excelled, avoiding harsh criticism from class, more
shop work, seeing the humor in situation, having study hall patrols,
asking for his help, recognition of good work, outside civic enterprises,
plenty of reading material, more parties at school, more guests of child
in the home, greater consideration for his ideas, more music, tools, play-
things, etc., regular sleeping hours, wholesome food, better associates,
more knowledge of child life by teacher, more knowledge of child life by
parent, fewer playthings, more exacting parents, less loafing, better home
environment, more parental care, dishonesty in the home, respect for
authority, more home training, more interest in the home, more re-
sponsibility, a mother who stays home, allowance for the child, fewer
iron-clad rules, greater faith in the child, someone to understand and
Elementary Schools op North Carolina 449
help him, curriculum made from pupil viewpoint, less corporal punish-
ment, cooperation of home and school, higher ideals in home, more super-
vised games, free discussion of problems by pupils, more individual at-
tention, more patience with them, more praise of success, more comrade-
ship, more group activities, student participation in government, teacher
with strong personality, more manual work, more supervision of school
work, less pampering in home, honor system, more activities child likes,
lessons in unselfishness, supervision of leisure, special attention to choice
of leaders, more team work in room, organization for pupil participation.
When a child becomes a problem the teacher must discover the cause
and attempt to supply the need or needs which underlie the violation
of laws governing group life and his own worthy growth. These needs
are rooted deep in his instinctive life and directing them into desirable
expressions is the first duty of the teacher. Unfortunately, lack of space
forbids detailed accounts of specific examples of corrected behavior.
References :
Bobbitt. Curriculum Investigations.
Gregg. A Course of Study in Character Education. Lincoln School Supply Co., Lincoln,
Nebraska.
Mahan. An Analysis of the Characteristics of Citizenship. Teachers College.
Germane and Germane. Character Education. Silver, 1930.
See references in Course of Study in Health and those at end of this course.
GRADES ONE, TWO AND THREE
Text: Not required.
Time Allotment: See General Introduction and page 439.
Specific Objectives: See Traits and Trait Actions (page 430), and
Information and Understandings (page 430).
School Situations, Experiences and Procedures That Afford Oppor-
tunities for Arousing Interest in, Practicing Desirable Trait Actions, and
Mastering Supporting Civic Information:
A. PLAYING HOUSE
Playing with large dolls — holding, rocking, dressing, and undress-
ing them; selecting clothes that fit, making clothes, taking care of
doll's clothes by folding them and putting them in proper places;
bathing _ dolls ; taking them for a walk.
Playing housekeeping — protecting clothing, sweeping with a small
broom, making beds, dusting, washing clothes, ironing clothes; pre-
paring and serving a meal; setting the table; washing and drying
dishes; making and caring for a garden; entertaining callers, house
guests, etc., caring for pets.
The following illustrates this type of activity:
Playhouse and Flower Garden*
the beginning
A doll in a cradle was part of the equipment of the room when the beginner
entered school for the spring term. The children named the doll Peggy and played
with her for several weeks, just enjoying her. Finally they decided Peggy needed a
house. A chair was made for a girl to sit in to rock the cradle. A table and two
doll chairs were also made. A bed was made for visiting dolls. Dishes were made
so Peggy could have a party. A cupboard was made to keep the dishes in. Toys
were made for Peggy to play with. A flower garden was made and cared for by
children. A vase was made to put flowers in for Peggy's house.
*Adapted from report of Miss Virginia Eldridge, First Grade Teacher, Raleigh Public
Schools.
450 Course of Study for the
materials
1. For Construction: Orange crates for walls; large boxes and chalk boxes for furni-
ture; clay for dishes, toys, vase; cold water and shells; paint for dishes, toys, vase;
paint for furniture; paper for mats for dining table; seeds, plants, fertilizer for
flower garden.
2. Tools: Saw, hammer, nails, scissors, yard stick, garden tools; broom, duster and
dust pan.
3. Readers and Special Reading Selections Used in Connection With Unit:
Playtime "(Newson) : "Ted's Birthday," "Toys and Play," etc.
Playfellows (Johnson) : "What I Do For Polly," etc.
Friends to Make (Johnson) : "The Thanksgiving Dinner."
Jimmy Crow's Garden. Brooke.
Pathway to Reading, Primer (Silver) : "The Little Red Apple," "The Apple Man."
Pathway to Reading, First Reader (Silver) : "The Dinner Party," "The Pet Shop,"
"Hop, Skip, and Jump," "The Wee Nest," "The Little Pig With the Curly Tail."
Child Story Primer and First Reader. (Lyons.)
Wag and Puff. Hardy. (Wheeler.)
Surprise Stories. Hardy. (Wheeler.)
Everyday Doings at Home. Serl. (Silver.)
Work-a-day Doings at Home. Serl. (Silver.)
Work-a-day Doings on the Farm. Serl. (Silver.)
Literature and Living. Lyman and Hill. (Scribner's.) Part One: "Making Homes."
Rabbitville. Serl. (American.)
Smedley-Olsen Primer and Book One (Hall) : "The House That Father Made,"
"The Doll House," etc., and "The Frog That Went to School," etc.
The Singing Farmer. Tippett.
4. STORIES TOLD FOR APPRECIATION:
Bailey. Friendly Tales. "The Guest in the Playhouse," "Little House Neighbors,"
"Saving Brother," "The House That Went Downhill."
Bailey. For the Children's Hmr. "The Fairy Who Came to Our House," "Who
Ate the Dollies' Dinner?", "The Elder Brother," "The Little Gray Grandmother."
Dunn, Baker, and Thorndike. Everyday Classics. "The Three Pigs," "The Three
Bears."
Lindsay. Mother Stories. "Dust Under the Rug," "How the Home Was Built."
5. PICTURES USED FOR APPRECIATION:
Baby Stuart, Van Dyck; Feeding Her Birds, Millet; The First Step, Millet; Can't
You Talk?, Holmes; A Helping Hand, Renouf.
6. MUSIC:
Progressive Music Series. Book One. "My Dolly," "Oats, Peas, Beans, and Barley
Grow."
7. POEMS:
Field. Taxis and Toadstools. Doubleday.
Milne. When We Were Very Young. "The Wrong House."
--- - Now We Are Six. "Busy."
Tippett. I Live in a City. "Apartment Houses," "Inside Houses," "Groceries."
Wynne. For Days and Days. "Mother's Fingers," "Sleepy Time," "Mothers," "When
the Day is Over," "Suppose You Were a Little Seed," "The Little Seed Speaks,"
"In the Garden."
Stevenson. A Child's Garden of Verses. "Morning."
SUBJECT MATTER OUTCOMES
Reading, language, literature.
1. Stories about the doll, her house, the garden, were made by the children. These
stories were read from charts, and later put into little books, each pupil having one.
Sample story:
"We have a little doll. She is pretty. Her name is Peggy. The children learned
to read the names of the flowers in the flower garden. Stories and poems about
dolls, houses, family life, and nature were read and told by the teacher."
2. Stories read by children from primers.
3. NUMBER — The yard stick was used to measure the first leg of chairs, table, and
bed. The other legs were measured by these.
The dishes were made in sets of six because their mothers bought dishes by the
half dozen.
4. MUSIC — Many lullabies and flower songs were sung. The children composed the
words to the following lullaby. It was sung to the tune of the "Mother's Song," a
Columbia record :
"Go to sleep my Peggy dear,
Go to sleep and do not fear,
Go to sleep my dolly dear,
Go to sleep, mother is near,
Good night, good night, my Peggy dear,
Good night, good night, my dolly dear."
The pupils compared several flower songs which they played on the bottle chimes,
e.g.:
"One, two, three,
Come and see,
Where the pansies like to be."
h.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 451
DRAMATIZATION — The doll and play house suggested many dramatizations. One
morning the children played that Peggy had measles. The doctor was a boy who
had brought a little satchel to school. There were the brother, who went for the
doctor, the mother and the father. , . „
This playing with the doll led to many other dramatizations — e. g., Uean feter.
FINE ARTS — Pictures of mothers and babies and nature were enjoyed by the
children A picture of the "Madonna of the Chair" on the classroom wall, also a
French print showing children working and watering flowers have been greatly
Many flower and nature pictures were drawn and painted. The children learned
how to put on crayons and paint smoothly, how to make the sky and ground meet,
how to draw trees, houses, etc.
CITIZENSHIP — Growth in and practice of the following citizenship traits were
noted during these activities:
a. Cooperation — helping in work and play. .
b. Courtesy— The children tried to observe the rules of courtesy in the play house
that they would observe in the home and in listening.
c. Cleanliness and health in keeping doll and play house clean and furniture
arranged, and in stressing proper food, rest and ventilation.
d Friendliness and generosity in sharing dolls and toys, also tools and materials.
e. Initiative in planning play house, furniture, in planning dramatizations ana
games. .
f. Patience in waiting turn to use tools, play with doll, etc.
Perseverance in finishing a piece of work.
Responsibility for bringing boxes and other materials, for care of house ana
doll and the flower garden.
Self-control — The children decided those who were boisterous could not play
in plav house. The children decided that they could enjoy their work and
play more if they worked and played quietly. The interest in the flower
garden led to an interest in nature of all kinds, e.g.— Some girls voluntarily
cared for garden all summer. The interest in the play house led to an
interest in the home, family life, pets, etc.
Some of the flowers that bloomed in the flower garden were pressed and made
into a flower book; some were carried to sick classmates.
At the close of the activity the mothers were invited to a party. A program was
given which explained the unit. Refreshments were served.
CHECKS
1. Tests of the YES and NO type— e.g., Should you cry when you don't get your way?
2. Does the unit check by the laws of learning? .
a. Readiness. Will the appreciation of citizenship traits carry over into home liter
b. Exercise. Will activities similar to or suggested by those at school be carried
on at home? , . . . . ,
c. Effect. Does the pupil have satisfaction that comes as a result of helpfulness,
obedience, cooperation, accomplishment, etc.
REFERENCES
Art in the Elementary School. Mathias. Scribner's.
Industrial Arts in the Elementary Schools. Bonser and Mossman. Macmillan, 19J7.
A Conduct Curriculum. Burke and Others. Scribner's, 1923.
Curriculum Bulletin, No. 2. Raleigh Public Schools. »,-„-i
Kindergarten — Primarv Activities Based on Community Life. Clouser and Millikan.
Macmillan, 1929.
The Primary School. Annie E. Moore. Houghton, 1929.
Curriculum Making in an Elementary School. Tuppett and Others. Ginn, 1927.
Socializing the Child. Sarah A. Dynes. Silver.
How the World is Fed. Carpenter.
How the World is Housed. Carpenter.
How We Are Clothed. Chamberlain.
How We Are Fed. Chamberlain.
How We Are Sheltered. Chamberlain.
Home and Community Life. Hartman.
Open Door Languages, Book One, Chapters I and II.
B. FREE PLAY BASED ON HELPERS OF THE COMMUNITY
Playing farmer, trucker, etc.; animals in the environment; play-
ing fire department; playing postman; playing milkman; going to
market for supplies; playing store or market; playing patrolman
(highway); playing grocery store or market; building the store,
keeping the store, buying the store.
References: Sies. Spontaneous and Supervised Play in Childhood. Macmillan.
C. GIVING A PARTY, LUNCH, OR DINNER
Deciding on guests; planning decorations suitable for occasion;
choosing and preparing foods; choosing entertainment of worthy pic-
tures, songs, stories, dramatizations, etc.; finding out the number of
guests; making and sending invitations to guests; making and deco-
452 Course of Study for the
rating napkins; making and decorating favors; choosing games to
play; setting the table; arranging chairs; welcoming guests; placing
guests at table and seeing that all are seated; sitting quietly while
eating; conversing quietly while eating. This unit is illustrated
below by an adaptation of a report made by Harriet Mellon, First
Grade Teacher, Taylorsville, N. C.
Entertaining the Beginners
origin of the interest and activity:
In April our county superintendent of schools introduced a physical examination
clinic for the children who are to enter school this fall. He asked the first grade
teachers to plan work for these children such as would lead them to spend a happy
day. I took up with my first grade class the problem of what we could do to make
them glad they came. As it was just two weeks before Easter a party was proposed
and agreed upon enthusiastically on Monday morning at our general conference period
opening the day's work. What we should do was left for discussion on Tuesday.
GENERAL AIM STATED FOR THE GROUP BY THE TEACHER:
To work well together in planning, practicing and preparing in a correct, original
and an attractive way, according to the group standards we adopt, all the things that
are necessary for an interesting, enjoyable Easter party for the visiting beginners and
to check carefully on the extent to which we approach these standards in each of these
things we need to know and do for the party.
HOW THE ACTIVITY PROGRESSED:
Problem One (set up by teacher Tuesday morning): What shall we do at our party?
Pupils' suggestions: "Let's have an Easter egg hunt"; "Let's have ice cream"; "Let's
decorate our boards and sandtable"; "Let's make some eggs and biddies for them."
Teacher's suggestion: "Maybe they would like to make some for themselves." Pupils'
suggestion: "We can help them make things." Teacher's suggestion: "Why do we have
eggs, rabbits, and chicks at Easter time? Perhaps our visitors would like to know.
Would you? If you find out you could tell them." Pupils' suggestion: "We can tell
some stories, sing songs, and play, too."
Problem Two (discussed Monday at the art period) : What materials do we need
that we do not have?
The class had crayola, drawing paper, and materials for construction, and their
texts and library books for songs, poems, and stories. They agreed to search at home
for others, but they would have to provide eggs for the hunt, and ice cream for
refreshments.
Problem Three (settled at the same period) : What things shall we do first and
when?
They decided to work on decorations at the art period, stories and poems during
the reading period, songs at the music hour, games at the play period, refreshments
at the time set aside for health discussion and how to behave at a party at one of the
morning exercises.
Problem Four (worked out in art class for the remainder of two weeks preceding
Easter): What kind of border shall we put above our board? What story shall the
sandtable tell ? Do we need other decorations ? What would be best to give a five-
year-old to carry home as a remembrance? Before we begin what do we need to know?
There was a dearth of suggestions. Finally one said, "Let's make something like
the one in Miss X's room." The teacher asked, "How would you like to visit all of
the rooms to get ideas?" They were eager to do this.
Teacher: It may not be convenient now.
John: May I go see?
Henry: May I gc too?
Teacher What will you say? They planned together what they were to say as follows:
We wish to plan an Easter party for the beginners.
May we come see your borders and sandtable?
The visit was made and they saw the usual symbols of Easter — chickens, lilies, rab-
bits, eggs. They decided to have some of all and each child selected the part he wished
to work up a model for.
Teacher: Can you make a good rabbit, Harold? Can you make good eggs, Ellen?
etc., etc. What would help you? Here are some large drawings I will post on the
board, so all may see. Here are some drawing books and magazines on the table. You
may find time to visit the stores this afternoon. They have toy chicks and rabbits.
Do you know of any real ones you might visit?
They returned next day with many pictures, toy chicks, and a real rabbit that was
so glossy and fat as to call forth spontaneous comment from the children. Two standards
were set up for selecting the best product in the art work: the one "most like what
it is" and the "neatest." These served as patterns for the" border motifs of the frieze
to be made on green burlap above the board and for those to be colored by the begin-
ners when they came. A basket of green construction paper filled with candy eggs were
the favors.
On the first Tuesday at the story hour, the teacher told them "The Story of Pros-
erpina" and "The Coming of Spring." They decided that the sandtable should be a
spring garden with both vegetables and flowers. This project occupied our spare time
and some recesses. Each child contributed services or materials. There was a lake
made of glass bordered by blooming wild violets and green moss, tiny toy ducks swim-
ming upon it — daffodil and tulip bordered walks — cunning nests of wee Easter eggs — a
perky rabbit. In the seed bed the beans had just sprung up ready to discard their
"baby coats" (cotyledons) when the visitors came.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 453
The glossy, fat rabbit gave rise to a change in our refreshments. It developed that
he was so because he ate foods that were good for rabbits and because he was kept
so clean; the little beginners would be so hungry a mid-morning lunch should be better
than ice cream. Our menu became a glass of milk with a generous egg sandwich. The
home economics teacher gave us the recipe and supervised the preparation of the sand-
wiches early Easter Monday, the day the guests arrived.
The activities in detail follow with the definite standards of attainment (objectives),
materials, and procedure.
SUMMARY OF ACTIVITIES, SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES, MATERIALS, AND
PROCEDURE:
Activity One: Deciding on a program for an Easter party which would effectively
entertain the beginners. Objective: To work out a varied, interesting, appropriate Easter
program suited to these visiting beginners, which will show them the types of work
we have been doing and which will stimulate their hearty participation and enjoyment.
Materials: See each item below. Procedure: Asked pupils to suggest what they would
like to have in the program. Wrote items on board and had children to pick out four
of the best. Had children with teacher to add any new ideas that would help to make
it an enjoyable program. Had programs that children have brought to school. Best
ones selected. Reported to the class and the teacher adding items the pupils liked.
Led pupils to see need for selecting the best of these. Decided on materials needed and
time to get ready each item.
Activity Two: Making drawings of rabbits, chicks, and eggs for the border and con-
structing a basket for the favors. Objectives: (1) To make a border of rabbits, chicks,
and eggs, which are lifelike in shape and which are beautiful in color; (2) to make a
neat basket strong enough to hold a few candy eggs; (3) to please visiting children
with the decorations in whole room. Materials: Real rabbits, eggs and chicks; pictures
of drawings made by others; pictures of rabbits, eggs and chicks in lifelike poses; draw-
ing and construction paper; painting materials; standards for judging drawings; standards
for governing right proportions and colors of rabbits and chicks; standards for deco-
rating room. References: The Classroom Teacher, Vols. IV, V; Denison's Easter Book,
Practical Drawing Books; Normal Instructor, Easter Number, 1929; Child Life, Easter
Number, 1927; Easter Entertainments for Little Folks, J. S. Latta Co., Huntington,
W. Va.; Primary Education, March, 1926; Progressive Teacher, April, 1930, p. 19;
Art in the Elementary School — Mathias; How Children Learn to Draw — Sargent and
Miller. Procedure: Discussion of kind of room they think would be most appropriate
for an Easter party and most pleasing to visiting children. Children made reports of
what they saw when they visited other rooms. ^Teacher and children evaluated these,
deciding which of these things they would use in decorating their room. Pupils sug-
gested where they could get additional ideas for decorating room. Teacher suggested
additional things they might use. Divided the class into groups to find out these things.
Each group reported to the class and the teacher added items the pupils failed to give.
Pupils led to see the need for selecting the best of these. Pupils (aided by teacher)
decided upon standards: (1) have colored objects which look pretty together in the same
section of the room; (2) have a few of the best objects on display; (3) select burlap
which will look pretty with drawings; (4) place baskets where visitors can see them
easily. Pupils worked in groups arranging material attractively. Aroused pupils'
interest in drawing through a desire to make their drawings attractive to the visitors.
Had pupils suggest what they would like to draw. Teacher and pupils discussed and
evaluated these suggestions. Pupils discussed the kind of drawings the visitors would
like. Pupils suggested additional places where Easter drawings may be found. Teacher
suggested additional sources. Children made drawings according to their best knowledge.
Children and teacher judged drawings according to standards set up.
Activity Three: Making the Easter Garden. Objectives: (1) To have the sandtable
reflect the spirit of Easter, the season of flowers; (2) to have the sandtable show use-
fulness in addition to beauty by having a section for zinnias and beans. (This section
was later separated.) Materials: Drawing materials: construction paper, colors, paste,
scissors, etc., for garden seats; clay for rabbit, ducks, and chicks; shellac for clay and
paper objects; story books containing stories related to Easter; magazines — Easter num-
bers; seed catalogs; holiday cutouts — Easter sections; experiences and pictures as to
Easter sandtables and real gardens they have seen; stories centered around the Easter
garden idea. References: Milton Bradley, Atlanta, Ga.; Gray and Creech, Winston-
Salem; Practical Drawing Co.. Dallas, Texas; Classroom Teacher, Vol. 4, Child Life,
March, 1926; Normal Instructor, April, 1928, Progressive Teacher, April, 1929; Pri-
mary Education, March, 1929, American Childhood, March, 1925; School Arts Magazine
and Youth's Companion, April, 1928. Procedure: Placed pictures and stories of sand-
tables and gardens in a prominent place in the classroom where thev would attract
attention. Allowed interest and curiosity to develop naturally. Guided the discussion
to secure, as much as possible, the present level of pupils' experiences. Led them to
ask questions which they wished to raise regarding further information. Had the
children, with the teacher, set up plans from suggestions made in the discussion:
(1) place rabbits near carrots; (2) place colored eggs in baskets on rabbits' back:
(3) place chicks in green grass; (4) near by chick, place eggs in nest. Had special
group committees to be responsible for various natural flowers. Had children make a
study of forms, color and proportion of objects to be used. Worked out in detail with
them the specific steps needed in actually making them. Secured suggestions from
pupils as to best articles and their arrangement on the sandtable. Had children arrange
the sandtable and judge the effect of the finished garden.
Activity Four, Five and Six: Securing a number of Easter stories, poems, and
songs that would interest the visitors. Objectives: (1) To find a storv containing
language expressions the visitors would understand and full of action, feeling, and
humor to be read; (2) to find a song (or two) to be sung and learn to sing it well;
(3) to find a poem or two to be read well to visitors. Materials: Stories told by
teacher — "The Coming of Spring," "Proserpina," "The Little Red Hen," "The Lost
454 Course of Study for the
Egg," "The Easter Rabbit"; poems — "What Does Little Birdie Say?," "The Kite and
the Butterfly," "An Easter Surprise," "Daisies," "Market Square," "Daffodowndilly,"
"The Wrong House"; music — "A Surprise," "Little Sister's Lullaby," "The Violet."
References: Bailey and Lewis — For the Children's Hour; Bailey and Lewis — Merry
Tales; Bailey — Tell Me Another Story; Bailey— Friendly Tales; Evans — Worthwhile
Stories for Every Day; Child Life Magazine, April, 1929-30; Pictures to Illustrate
Easter; Experiences of Visiting Pupils; Grade Teacher, April, 1930; The Progressive
Teacher, April, 1930; American Childhood, April, 1930; The Pathway to Reading—
Cateman; When We Were Very Young. A. A. Milne; Progressive Music Series, Books
I, II. Procedure: Led children to suggest the kind of story, poem and song the visitors
would be interested in. Children brought in Easter stories they have read or heard
read from books or magazines (environment arranged by teacher) ; also encouraged
original stories. Pupils reported to class on different stories. Led pupils to see the
need for selecting the best of these stories (pupils and teacher set up standards for
selecting the best story). Had pupils and teacher select the story according to the
standards set up: (1) start with something that visitors know about and are interested
in; (2) keep before you one important thing you want them to know about and re-
member; (3) have interesting, funny happenings and stunts in story; (4) leading up
to an exciting point and closing story.
Activity Seven: Planning the games. Objective: To plan and work out appropriate
Easter games which will be full of action and fun and which the visitors can under-
stand and play well enough to want to join in the play. Materials: Judgment and play
experience of first grade children; A list of games — Games for Children's Parties — pp.
446-448, Bancroft; Pictures of children playing games; Story plays by Lewis C. Wright,
pp. 94-95-126; Normal Instructor and Primary Plans, April, 1930, plate 2; Books and
Magazines Containing Easter Games — Graded Games for Rural School, by Ross, 1-14;
Woman's Home Companion, Jr. Department, April, 1930. Procedure: Teacher found
out what members of her class had brothers and sisters coming and what games they
played. Decided all the children should take part in the game and the game should
be one they knew. Decided on the "Rabbit and the Tree" as the game to be played.
Practiced the game until it was learned thoroughly and several children could lead it.
Decided on Egg Hunt Management and practiced with peanuts.
Activity Eight: Bringing and dyeing eggs for hunt. Objective: To dye eggs beauti-
fully and smoothly. Materials: Red, yellow, blue, orange, green and purple dyes; five
dozen eggs; six big kettles; six large ladles for placing in and removing eggs from
kettle; directions for dyeing. Procedure : Collected eggs donated by class members;
decided on colors and divided class into six groups; teacher demonstrated and the class
watched; class dyed remainder of eggs.
Activity Nine: Preparing refreshments. Objective: To prepare a wholesome, health-
ful, enjoyable lunch. Materials: Two and one-half dozen eggs; six loaves of bread;
60 pints of milk; 60 napkins; 60 straws. Procedure: Decided to serve milk with egg
sandwich; had Home Economics teacher talk and demonstrate; estimated cost and pre-
pared bill for the county superintendent; divided up work among committees for pre-
paring food, for serving, for greeting, for acting as hosts and hostesses at each table;
practiced seating guests first; practiced serving to the left (milk and sandwiches); pre-
pared sandwiches; decorated napkins with Easter chicks; folded and placed them
correctly.
Activity _ Ten: Practicing the program to insure effective presentation of the whole
party. Objective: To practice and prepare, according to group standards set up by the
pupils and teacher, all the features that go to make up an enjoyable Easter party and
to check carefully up on the extent to which we approach these standards in each of
the things we need to know and do at the party. Materials: Indicated above. Procedure :
Children from second grade played guests; committee received guests at doors; com-
mittee showed display of work; committee invited visitors to seats. Standards of con-
duct to be used during programs were set up — (1) see that everyone has a chair, (2)
play with everyone, (3) take them to rest room, (4) let them wash their hands; re-
hearsed program; children demonstrated best way to serve refreshments and bid their
guests good-bye. Gave the following program :
The Little Red Hen (story told with dramatic reading of parts)
Mid-morning Lunch
a. A Surprise (Song) Class
b. The Rabbit (Poem) Pupil
c. Informal Conversation Host or Hostess at Table
Our Work by a Committee (border, sandtable)
Visitors Colored Rabbit or Chick
Play Games and Have Egg Hunt
SOME EVIDENCES OF GROWTH IN RESPONSES WHICH HELP ONE TO
GET ON BETTER WITH HIS FELLOWS:
Teamwork in planning and presenting the program and in planning and serving the
refreshments.
Working quietly together while using others' materials (such as paste, scissors, etc.).
Responsibility for such tasks as decorations, entertainment and social committees
assigned to groups.
Judgment in selecting by definite standards for the best drawings for the room the
most interesting story and the most able story-teller.
Self-reliance in entertaining the expectant visitors.
Self-expression in planning the program.
Neatness in work such as drawing, written work, and decorations.
Cleanliness in care of paste and scrap paper and special attention to clean hands and
dress while serving refreshments.
Politeness to visitors as hosts and hostesses.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 455
SOME EVIDENCES OF GROWTH IN MASTERY OF FUNDAMENTAL TOOLS
OF LEARNING:
The enjoyment in reading stories of rabbits and chicks.
Reading stories quickly in order to get main thought of each story.
Better technique in the expression of pupil's experience and reciting that which pupils
have read.
Better understanding of the harmony of color.
Better construction of objects for the sandtable. . .
Better understanding of numbers and their uses in planning and serving ot guest.
Better knowledge of bringing work up to standards made by children.
SOME THINGS THE CLASS SAW GREATER NEED FOR:
Further practice to secure complete learning.
Further reading for speed, accuracy and thought.
Further knowledge of art principles to insure harmony in other work.
Further knowledge of games and the best ways to play them to get enjoyment.
Further information so as to be at ease at social occasions outside of school.
SOME RESULTING INTERESTS WE COULD HAVE PURSUED PROFITABLY:
Poultry unit.
Nature study as to early spring flowers.
Art exhibit of work done by first grade pupils. _
May Day festival including games, exercises and dramatization on first grade pupil s
level.
Pageant of the Spirit of Easter.
Chapel programs given, showing costumes for school, for play and parties.
D. MAKING REMEMBRANCE CARDS AND PRESENTS (Christmas,
Thanksgiving, Easter, Valentine, Mother's Day, etc.) — Looking at
samples; talking about colors, shapes, pictures, verses related to the
subject; planning original ones; printing (if any); making envelopes;
building a post office for mailing the cards; visiting real post office
and an airport to see arrival of mail plane; building a post office
using large blocks, boxes or tables; building windows for buying
stamps; making mail boxes; making a bag and cap for postman;
making a mail truck or car; mailing the cards; playing postman by
turns; collecting stamps; making rural mail boxes; making streets
and names; numbering desks for houses or boxes.
Poems: Stevenson's "The Cow of Bouton's," "The Policeman"; Wynne's The Post-
man"; Rosette's "The Postman." .
Music: Progressive Music Series, Book One, "Postman, Valentine, etc
Books and Stories: Child Story, First and Second Readers (Lyons); The Happy Children
Readers (Ginn) ; Child's Ozvn Way Reader; Friends to Make; New Stories; Open
Door Language, Book III.
E. DRAMATIZING RIGHT WAYS OF BECOMING CHARMING SO-
CIALLY — e.g., Going to church, theater; receiving guests; listening
to right ways told by teacher and pupil or watching her do it;
looking at pictures; playing various parts; costuming (if desired);
making scenery (if desired) ; selecting the cast from those who play
best; presenting the play. Open Door Language, Book One, Chapters
I, II, III, IV.
F. CELEBRATING GEORGE WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY
Looking at Washington's pictures.
Looking at pictures of soldiers.
Looking at pictures of the present president of the United States.
Observing, discussing and saluting the flag.
Memorizing a simple flag rhyme.
Listening to The Star Spangled Banner.
Planning costumes for a parade.
Decorating the room.
Hearing stories of his childhood and youth.
G. CELEBRATING MAY DAY
Hearing stories, songs and poems of May Day.
Planning the May Day festival.
Planning the processional.
Choosing the queen (by good citizenship standards).
Making plans for crowning.
Choosing someone to crown her.
456 Course of Study for the
Choosing attendants.
Learning a May Day song to sing at the festival.
Choosing suitable songs (e.g., spring songs).
Dancing simple ring dances or games.
Working out and learning a May-pole dance so simple that all
may participate.
Gathering or making flowers.
Making wreaths, a crown, garlands, standards, the throne.
Making baskets to hang on doors.
Gathering flowers and filling the baskets.
Hanging baskets on the doors of the schoolrooms, the principal's
office, and those of neighbors.
H. TAKING EXCURSIONS TO NEIGHBORHOOD PLACES (See Gen-
eral Discussion of Method.)
Discussing reasons for taking the excursion.
Setting up standards of proper conduct.
Getting the principal's permission.
Getting the permission of the managers or owners of any private
property to be visited.
Making the trip and collecting any desired information.
Relating experience in oral and written form.
Reference for Pupil: Trips to Take (Johnson), etc.
I. PLANNING A PICTURE OR PUPPET SHOW (See Course of Study
in Health.)
J. PLANNING A READING PARTY (See Courses of Study in Read-
ing and Language.)
K. MAKING KITES, BOATS OR AIRPLANES
Picture books and stories — A limited suggestive list of reading
materials :
Dobias — The Picture Book of Flying, Macmillan.
Hader — The Picture Book of Travel, Macmillan.
Read — An Airplane Ride, Scribner's.
Read — An Engine's Story, Scribner's.
Read — A Story About Boats, Scribner's.
L. STUDYING AND ILLUSTRATING THE WORK OF, ALL OF THE
COMMUNITY HELPERS— Baker, milkman, grocer, farmer, dairy-
man, patrolman, etc., after some such manner as this — Outline for
studying the baker:
Studying and collecting pictures.
Discussing value and labor involved.
Getting permission from principal and baker to take trip.
Planning a trip to bakery by street car, private car, highway or cross country
hike.
Observing traffic rules.
Introducing themselves and getting instructions.
Introducing an idea of steps in bread-making: mixing the dough; kneading the
dough; allowing the dough to rise; carrying the loaves on belts tp the oven;
placing the loaves in the oven by means of a large wooden shovel; wrapping
the bread in waxed paper; making bread; accepting gift of bread; writing
"Thank You" letters to baker; discussion of trip; recording experiences in a
booklet, play, frieze, picture show, etc.
Note: Social Science Readers (Scribner's) make good collateral reading.
M. STUDYING CHILD LIFE IN PIONEER AMERICA AND OTHER
LANDS. (See State courses of study in history, geography, and civics,
1923; Open Door Language, Book One, Chapter V; Ann Arbor, Mich.,
Course of Study in Social Studies; State Approved Library List for
Elementary and High Schools. For a limited cross section of read-
ing, see page 461.)
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 457
N. DEVELOPING PUPIL SELF-GOVERNMENT IN HABITS AND
STANDARDS OF CONDUCT
1. Through clubs.
2. Through self -measuring of citizenship practices (see page 486).
3. Through routine and unusual life situations in the school schedule
as illustrated in the following records of typical teaching units
and those given in connection with the Course of Study in Health.
"OUR NEW SCHOOL"*
A. SITUATIONS SUGGESTING ACTIVITY:
1. A desire to know our new building, a gift to us from the people of the com-
munity. .
2. A wish expressed by the children of first grade that their parents might know
all about our new school, especially our own rooms.
B. STATEMENT OF PROBLEM TO BE UNDERTAKEN:
1. A party to be given the parents, with a booklet, "Our New School," as a
souvenir.
C. TEACHER'S OBJECTIVE IN USING PROJECT FOR GROWTH AND DE-
VELOPMENT OF THE CHILD:
1. Development of civic pride in such an addition to our campus and community.
2. Respect and appreciation for those who made our new school possible.
3. A feeling of personal responsibility for proper care of our building.
4. To further cooperation in our form of school government.
5. To enlist the interest and cooperation of parents.
6. To vitalize required work in language, art, reading, and other regular school
subjects.
D. PLAN OF WORK TO CARRY OUT OUR PROJECT:
Suggestions from children growing out of class conference and discussion:
1. To visit different parts of the building to learn more about it ourselves.
2. To tell parents about it.
3. To write down what we want them to see especially.
4. To draw a plan of our own room.
5. To invite parents to visit the new building.
6. To decide how to make our room more attractive.
7. To put plans and writing into a book.
8. To have a party for the mothers (to see our room, to meet teachers, to know
each other) .
9. Plans for the party.
Entertainment — readings, songs, a play.
Refreshments — tea, sandwiches, mints.
Decorations — flowers, pictures, place cards, baskets for mints, souvenirs.
Give booklets, "Our New School," as souvenirs.
Contents of booklets suggested as the project grew.
a. Picture of new building from newspaper.
b. Plan of our five rooms.
c. Rule for keeping materials in order.
d. How to decorate our room.
e. Gifts to our room.
f. "Birthday" wishes for the n;w building.
g. How second grade children should act.
E. TYPES OF EXPERIENCES— Subject Matter Outcomes.
1. Arithmetic.
Measurement for book covers — use of one inch and one-half inch.
Proportion, spacing, arrangement in lettering on cover design.
Use of terms square, rectangle, twice as long, etc., in discussing plans of room.
The idea of drawing to a scale.
Number on doors of rooms and offices were read and written when children were
taken on an excursion around building. Later some were sent to various
rooms with messages.
Measuring and sewing chair covers.
2. Art and Handwork.
"Our New School" booklet.
a. Cover design — lettering cut out and pasted.
b. Selections of colors for cover and lettering.
c. How to tie in leaves, using three-hole tie.
Baskets for mints at party.
a. Folding square basket, green, with handle.
b. Cutting "pumpkins" to paste on two sides.
Place cards for party.
Columbus boats — "The Santa Maria." _
White background, blue sea, black ship.
Print "Mother" on back, also children's initials.
Chair covers of flowered cretonnes measured and sewed.
*Myrla Morris, Critic Teacher, N. C. C. W.
458 Course of Study for the
3. Spelling and Writing.
Pages of booklet.
Page 1. Picture of school from newspaper.
Page 2. "We have a new school building."
Page 3. "The Second Grade has five rooms."
Page 4. "We made a plan."
Page S. The plan.
Page 6. "We will keep it clean." "We will put up pictures."
Page 7. "We will bring flowers." "We will put things in the right place."
Printed names of rooms on plan.
Copied a page a day to put in booklet.
Invitations to parents to party;
Letters of thanks for gifts for our room.
SAMPLES OF LETTERS
Dear Mother:
Come to see our new school. We have made a plan of our rooms.
Dear Mother:
Come to our party — at three o'clock.
Second Grade.
Second Grade.
Dear Mrs. Sutton:
We thank you for the flowers for our Mother's party.
Second Grade.
The words italicized were used for spelling drill, one a day for three weeks
with a daily review of old words.
4. Reading.
a. A chart was printed of "Rules for Our New School" as suggested by the
children. This was typewritten and pasted in the booklet.
RULES FOR OUR ROOM
Pick up our chairs the best way.
Put our chairs down right.
Do not run in the halls.
Wait our turn politely.
Get in line to wait our turn.
Stop, look and listen at signal, "Attention," or sound of triangle.
Never walk in front of class or visitors.
Use the right door.
Try to keep voices soft.
Do not talk when it disturbes others.
Look and listen when anyone is speaking to us.
Follow rules for care of toilets and wash basins.
b. The birthday wishes were dictated to the teacher, typewritten and pasted in
the booklet.
WISHES FOR OUR NEW BUILDING
We wish it wouldn't burn up.
We wish that no one will break windows or doors.
We wish no one would mark the walls.
We wish everyone would help to keep it clean.
We wish all will help to keep it beautiful.
We wiih all the children will be happy.
We wish the college girls will enjoy their work here.
c. Preparation of stories to be read to mother's at the party. One selected from
each group of readers by vote of his class.
5. Language.
a. Many opportunities for contributions of ideas, for organization of suggejstions,
for judgment and decisions (as outlined under IV).
b. Working up a simple play from their reading of library books.
c. See also under spelling and writing.
6. Music.
Songs from regular class work that "mothers will like."
F. HABITS IN WHICH THE CHILDREN HAD PRACTICE:
Perseverance over a long period of time.
Working toward a definite goal.
Group work — cooperation.
Observation of detail.
Responsibility for success of books and party.
Ability to follow directions.
Accuracy and neatness.
Orderliness, care of property.
Correct forms for oral expression of ideas.
Self-control in keeping quiet, in walking through building.
■ Consideration of others, taking turns, etc.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 459
G. ATTITUDES IN WHICH CHILDREN HAD PRACTICE:
Happiness in work and spirit of helpfulness.
Satisfaction in doing something worthwhile.
Responsibility for care of school building, for our room, for mothers party.
Pride in participating in making and keeping rules of school, in planning and
giving party, in care and beautifying our room.
Respect for school property and rights of others.
Note- The activity units listed below have been tried out by the Raleigh Public Schools and
seem to have supplied natural situations for mastering needed civic information,
practicing desirable habits, and inspiring worthy ideals and attitudes. Bulletins giving
details may be secured at cost by writing Miss Mildred English, Assistant Super-
intendent, Raleigh Public Schools.
First Grade Fourth Grade Sixth Grade
(1) Playhouse (D Circus (1) School Newspaper
(2) Rarnvard (2) Birds (2) North Carolina
3 Garden (3) A Museum (3) Study of City Water
c j r a System
Second Grade
(i! HX."* U) RalXh and Wake J^f .^
(3) Store County (1) Health
-T7 • Tr a (2) Study of Oak and (2) Transportation . .
Third Grade Pine Trees (3) Ways of Communication
(1) Library (3) Banking
(2) Toy Shop
(3) Indians
Information and Understandings That Should be Obtained by the End
of the Third Grade
People must work together to obtain food, clothing, shelter, and to
be comfortable and happy.
The home is dependent upon the farmer, the farmer upon the home,
the factory upon home and farmer, etc.
The meaning of Thanksgiving and Christmas.
The idea that time passes and conditions have changed with the pass-
ing of time. ,
The topographical features of his neighborhood — valleys, hills, rivers,
creeks, etc. — and the location of roads or streets, public buildings, etc.
A slight acquaintance with the following heroes: George Washington,
Abraham Lincoln, Robert E. Lee and any local hero or tale of heroism.
Home life is different according to time and place.
Facts covering services, dependence, interdependence, and duties about
the following workers: the farmer, the trucker, the dairyman, the milk-
man, the grocer, the patrolman, the policeman, the highway repairers,
street cleaners, garbage collectors, laundryman, postman, clerk in store,
janitor, school principal.
Sample Outline of Concepts
The Postman or R. F. D. Mailman
Services: Brings letters and packages from post office, takes letters to the post office
regardless of weather, cares for mail.
Individual's Duty to Postman:
To respect the service and the one who renders it.
To treat him with courtesy.
To answer his questions promptly and courteously.
Avoids unnecessary complaint.
The Postman's Duty to the Community:
To be honest in word, in time, and in making deliveries to and trom the post
office.
To be faithful in doing his work.
To be clean and neat.
To be polite.
To keep his goods in an orderly pack.
References for the Pupil: See "State Approved Library List" and list at end of this section.
References for the Teacher: See list at close of this section.
Beeby. Community Life Today and in Colonial Times. Charles L. Merrill.
Dunn. The Community and the Citizen. Heath.
Judd and Marshall. Lessons in Community and National Life — Series A, ±5, ana C.
Government Printing Office, Washington, D. C.
460 Course of Study for the
GRADES FOUR AND FIVE
Text: No text required for pupils.
Time Allotment: See General Introduction and page 439.
Specific Objectives:
To supply such experiences as will give pupils information and
understandings of individual and group behavior that increases
human efficiency and happiness in the home, school, and local
community.
To help them develop skill in solving civic-moral problems.
To inspire in them a dynamic desire for good behavior as opposed
to bad.
To furnish opportunities for practicing good habits and attitudes
in and out of school.
Suggested Procedure and Content for Fourth Grade
A. MAKE A STUDY OF PUBLIC SERVANTS
1. The Policeman or the Constable
a. Use stories of their heroism.
b. Develop idea of services: protects homes, gives fire alarm,
keeps watch on street or highway, reports landslides, cave-ins,
etc., protects at street or road crossings.
v. Develop idea of how we may aid the policeman or constable.
(See Traits of Cooperation, Courage, Responsibility in connec-
tion with community, pages 437-438.)
d. Develop ideas of why the policeman or constable succeeds.
2. The Fireman (if any) and Prevention of Fires (Get material from
North Carolina Department of Insurance. Follow same general
plan as suggested for the postman.)
3. The Postman or Mail Carrier (R. F. D.)
a. How often he comes; how his day is spent.
b. The post office and the work of sorting, stamping, etc.
c. The story of a letter-writing, posting, collecting, stamping, its
travels, restamping at destination, final delivery.
d. Why he is a success.
4. The Street Cleaner (if there is one) or Sanitary Inspector (Fol-
low same general plan as suggested for the postman.)
B. MAKE A STUDY OF PUBLIC UTILITIES
1. The government, food, and food producing occupations.
Review sources of food.
How does the government protect the food supply? (Examine
labels or canned goods, flour, etc.; interview grocers and store-
keepers; watch the process of pasteurization and inspect the
premises' of dairies, etc.)
Review idea of interdependence of the farmer, storekeeper, dairy-
man, etc., through units studied in geography and health courses.
Prepare probable life histories of typical foods common to com-
munity (e.g., certain vegetables) and those not common (e.g.,
sugar).
Teach thrift, conservation and gratitude as relates to food. (See
Specific Objectives.)
2. Water
In the country: (See Course of Study in Health Education.)
How do people get their supply?
What precautions should they take to keep it pure?
In the city: Find out source of supply, ownership, how it is kept
pure, regulating rules, how to save the supply; what would hap-
pen if the supply gave out (soiled clothes, homes and persons;
no cooking, thirst, dirty streets; parched lawns; dry hydrants);
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 461
visit the source of supply; trace water by an illustrative map
from source to home; purify some water; find out how the work
and plant are paid for; set up rules to follow for conserving
water and making it safe.
3. Light (Follow same procedure.)
4. Fuel (Follow same procedure.)
5. Clothing (If there is a factory in town or the community.)
The Government's relationship here is concerned with working
hours for employees, conditions of heating, lighting and venti-
lation under which they work.
6. Telephone (This may be developed in lower grade to advantage.)
Story of invention or introduction to the community — write Bell
Telephone Company for their materials.
Its usefulness.
A visit to telephone exchange.
Any town or regulations of telephone company.
Courteous telephone relationships. (Open Door Language, Gr. V.)
7. Transportation
a. Streets or Roads — Who is responsible for cleaning, paving,
dragging, repairing, parking?
b. Railroads and Busses — Ownership, regulations governing, serv-
ices rendered by each?
c. Other forms of transportation.
d. Relationship of all these to Cooperation, Responsibility, Self-
Control, etc.
References: Open Door Language, Grade Four, Chapters I, II.
See State Approved Library List for Elementary and High Schools.
"Mainstreets of the Nation," Bureau of Education, Bulletin No.
38, Dept. of Interior, Washington, D. C. 10(J.
Maps and pamphlets from North Carolina State Highway Commis-
sion, Raleigh, N. C.
8. Health (See Course of Study in Health Education.)
9. Library (Follow same general plan as suggested for telephone.)
10. Playgrounds or Parks (Follow same general plan as suggested
for telephone.)
C. PRACTICE TRAITS in school, home, and community situations as
suggested by those set up as specific objectives and the needs of the
individual pupils and group as a whole. Check for growth. (See
pages 486-489.)
D. ADAPT ACTIVITIES SUGGESTED FOR LOWER GRADES TO
THIS LEVEL (e.g., The story of the American flag. Open Door
Language, Grade V, Chapter VIII.)
E. CONTINUE STUDY OF CHILDREN OF OLDEN TIMES AND
OTHER LANDS, EMPHASIZING HOME LIFE
REFERENCES:
Organization and Method
Outline for geography in North Carolina State Course of Study, 1923 — p. 434.
(Secure from County Superintendent.)
Social Studies in the Public Schools — Grades 3-6. Board of Education, Ann
Arbor, Mich. $2.50. (Excellent)
Curriculum Making in the Elementary Schools. Bureau of Publications, Lincoln
School, Columbia University, New York City.
Sources of Information for Teacher and Pupil
Book of Knowledge.
Compton's Pictured Encyclopedia.
Stoddard's Lectures on Travels Abroad and in America.
World Book (encyclopedia).
Andrews. Little Journeys Series. Ginn.
Aitchison and Utley. Across Seven Seas to Seven Continents. Bobbs.
Allen, N. B. Geographical and Industrial Studies of U. S. How and Where We
Live. Ginn.
Barrows and Parker. Journeys in Distant Lands. Silver. $1.28.
Barrows and Parker. United States and Canada. Silver. $1.48.
Barrows and Parker. Europe and Asia. Silver. $1.48
(20% discount.) (Excellent, with many suggested jources.)
Beuret, G. When I was a Girl in France.
462 Course of Study for the
Brown. Spain and Peeps at Many Lands. Macmillan.
Carroll. Around the World. Silver, Books 1-5.
Chamberlain. How We Are Sheltered. Macmillan.
Carpenter, F. G. Around the World With Children. American.
Carpenter, F. G. Europe. American.
Carpenter, F. G. How the World is Housed. American.
Carpenter, F. G. The Houses We Live In. American.
Department of Conservation, Raleigh, N. C. — Common Trees of North Carolina.
Fox. Indian Primer. The Cliff Dweller. American.
Fairgrieve and Young. Homes Far Away. Appleton.
Holmes, Burton. Egypt. Wheeler.
Holmes, Burton. Japan. Wheeler.
Holmes, Burton. India. Wheeler.
Mackler-Ferryman. Norway. Peeps at Many Lands. Macmillan.
Mills, E. A. The Story of One Thousand Year Old Pine. Houghton.
Packard and Sinnott. Nations as Neighbors. Macmillan.
Perdue, H. A. Child Life in Other Lands. Rand.
Pinchot, G. Primer of Forestry. U. S. Dept. of Agriculture, Washington.
Winslow, I. O. Spain and Portugal. Doubleday.
Winslow, I. O. Europe. Doubleday.
Maddox and Parkins. Our Trees and How They Serve Us. Scribner's.
Mirick. Home Life Around the World. Houghton.
Redway. All Around Asia. Scribner's.
Hoke. Lands and Life. Russia and the Old East. Johnson.
Related Stories
Bates. In Sunny Spain With Pelarica and Rafael.
Bayliss. Lolami, the Cliff Dweller.
Cannon. The Pueblo Boy.
Clay. When I Was a Boy in Norway.
Dopp. The Early Cave Man.
Dopp. The Later Cave Man.
Dopp. The Tree Dwellers.
Kaleel, M. When I Was a Boy in Palestine.
Mansfield, B. Our Little Dutch Cousins.
Maguire. Two Little Indians.
McManus, B. Our Little French Cousins.
Olmstead and Grant. Ned and Nan in Holland.
Perkins, L. F. The Dutch Twins.
Perkins, L. F. The Japanese Twins.
Perkins, L. F. The Eskimo Twins.
Perkins, L. F. The Filipino Twins.
Perkins, L. F. The Cave Twins.
Smith. Hawkeye and Little Hiawatha.
Sakae, S. When I Was a Boy in Japan.
Snedden. Docas, the Indian Boy.
Sugimoto and Austen. With Taro and Hana in Japan.
Wade, M. H. Our Little Jewish Cousin.
Wade, M. H. Twin Travellers in the Holy Land.
Related Pictures
A Reading from Homer. Alma Tameda.
The Storage Room. De Hooch.
A Dutch Interior. De Hooch.
Belgian Farm. Eugene Kampf.
Related Poems
Selections from Stevenson's "A Child's Garden of Verse," such as "Foreign
Children," "My Kingdom," "The Little Land," "To My Name Child."
Literature and Living. Lyman and Hill. Scribner's. Part I. Making Homes.
Poems for Children. Books I -VI. Iroquois.
Taxis and Toadstools. Field. Doubleday.
Guides to Related Industrial and Fine Arts
Bonser and Mossman. Industrial Arts for the Elementary Schools. Macmillan.
Mathias. Art in the Elementary School. Scribner's.
Related Illustrative Material
National Geographic Society, Washington, D. C. — pictures of homes, such as a
Philippine bamboo house, a miner's cabin, an African grass house, a sod home,
colonial homes, Japanese pergola, Mexican adobe, Italian villa, Spanish court,
ancient castles, New York apartment, etc. (Back numbers of the National
Geographic may be secured at very low cost. These afford excellent illustrations
for many other things.)
Pictures from New York Times Sunday Supplement, and other newspapers.
Pictures from current magazines.
Bulletin — Illustrative Free Material, price .20 — Miss Lillian Smith, Murphy, N. C.
Metropolitan Museum of Arts, New York City — picture postcards at low prices.
American Brick Association, 1737 People's Life Building, Chicago. Bulletin — The
Story of Brick (free).
American Portland Cement Manufacturers, 115 West Washington St., Chicago.
Bulletin — Course in Concrete.
Long-Bell Lumber Co., Kansas City, Mo. From Tree to Trade.
Public Domain Commission, Michigan. Mosher's "Forest Study in the Primary
Grades."
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 463
F. EMPHASIZE BIOGRAPHY
See State Approved Library List for Elementary and High Schools
and survey state recommended books for such material as is contained
in these references:
Pathway to Reading, page 200, George Washington and the Colt
(Honesty of word) ; page 202, Rosa Bonheur (Persistence until
goal is reached.)
Everyday Classics (Fourth Reader), page 179, Benjamin Franklin.
(Industry in work.)
Elson Reader, V, page 25, How Roosevelt Overcame His Handicap.
(Pluck — perseverance in spite of one's physical handicaps.)
Suggested Content and Procedure — Fifth Grade
A. STUDY HOME RELATIONSHIPS IN SPECIAL DISCUSSIONS—
e.g., Chapel and on such occasions as suggested in the Open Door
Language Series, Grade V, Chapter VI.
B. MAKE A STUDY OF AGENCIES THAT PROMOTE SOCIAL
WELFARE
1. A more thorough study of post office
a. Real owners of post office.
b. Local operators and work of each.
c. Work of various departments, stamps and stationery, parcel
post, registry, money order, postal savings, special delivery, air
mail.
d. Expenses of the postal department — for building, postmaster,
clerks, sending mail, city and rural delivery.
e. Meeting expenses.
f. How to assist the postal servants
(1) Sealing letters neatly and carefully.
(2) Wrapping packages durably and securely.
(3) Writing plainly.
(4) Being sure address is correct.
(5) Putting on return address (discuss Dead Letter Office).
(6) Mailing early.
2. The county courthouse and city hall — location, titles and names of
officials, duties and pay.
3. The city and county plan for education.
4. Any clubs for hobbies, etc. Gardening, pig, poultry, music, etc.
Sources of information: Interviews with officials and references
on page 491.
C. PRACTICE TRAITS in home, school, and community as suggested
under Specific Objectives and by the needs of individual and group.
Check for Growth. (See pages 486-489.)
D. ADAPT ACTIVITIES SUGGESTED FOR LOWER GRADES TO
THIS LEVEL
E. EMPHASIZE BIOGRAPHY. (See State Approved Library list and
basal and supplementary texts for such material as contained in The
Elson Reader, V — Boyhood of Lincoln — the man who said, "I will
get ready and some day my chance will come," and The Whistle,
which teaches the worth of time and money.)
See 1923 Course of Study in Geography and History for procedures which contribute
to understandings leading to appreciations of the broader communities of the nation and
world.
464 Course of Study for the
Civic Information and Understandings to be Gained
This is implied in material under Suggested Procedure and Content.
References for the Pupil
See State Approved Library List for Elementary and High Schools
and list at end of course.
References for the Teacher
See general list at close of this section.
GRADES SIX AND SEVEN
Text: No text required for pupils.
Time Allotment: See General Introduction and page 439.
Specific Objectives:
See those listed for Grades Four and Five.
To extend information and habits and attitudes to include the more
remote communities of the state and nation.
To give each pupil as broad an understanding as is practicable, of
the basic occupations, and to show the close interdependence of individuals
and of groups who carry forward the world's work in pursuing these
occupations.
To see that each pupil has information regarding the occupation or
occupations which especially interest him, and that it includes facts about
standards of preparation for success in it, about its advantages and dis-
advantages, the need of such workers, the importance of careful choice
of an occupation, etc.
Note: The work of these two grades from the standpoint of citizenship should leave
the child with a fairly good understanding of
1. Local, state, and national history and geography.
2. The actual and potential vocational opportunities offered by the local community, as
it relates first to school life and second to life out of school and necessary training.
3. Nature and services of political units.
Suggested Procedure and Content
For the present the geography and history courses as outlined in the
1923 Course of Study take care of the first item referred to in preceding
note. It is planned that a full revision of these two courses be worked
out in the next two years. Suggestions for the other two items are given
here : *
EDUCATIONAL AND VOCATIONAL GUIDANCE
Note of explanation: This unit is not a course in vocational training. Its purpose is to
supply the teacher with a guide for crystallizing life motives that will tend to increase the
desire for further training. It presupposes widen experiencing in activities suggested for
lower grades. It is a means of strengthening desirable attitudes that should be suggested
by a study of work of the people of the immediate community, of supplying information
about work of world beyond the child's immediate horizon, of opening up to him a variety
of vocational opportunities permitting choice and self-direction. Where sixth and seventh
grade pupils are working happily and have the mental ability to continue, the vocational
need is usually that of information, not choice of an occupation. It will do pupils no harm,
however, to choose tentatively, making new selections as their occupational background widens.
1. Prepare child, through regular routine, in practice of traits neces-
sary to success and in mastery of civic information underlying prac-
tices as suggested for previous grades. This means planning how
he shall use his time in the most enjoyable, profitable way, home and
school chores, earning during leisure, participation in extra curricular
activities.
*The material contained in this outline has been assembled principally through the efforts
of Dr. O. Latham Hatcher, President of the Southern Woman's Educational Alliance, .Rich-
mond, Va., in Suggestions for a Vocational and Information Guidance Section of a Citizen-
ship Course for Sixth and Seventh Grade Pupils With Special Reference to North Carolina
Elementary Schools.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 465
2. Study actual and potential occupational opportunities as they are
reflected in local farming, dairying, fishing, manufacturing (types
of), lumbering, dentistry, teaching, nursing, forestry, etc., according
to some such outline as suggested, organized around some such cen-
tral theme as "Human and Social Needs Which Our Workers
Seek to Meet" or along with a closely allied project in history or
geography.
a. General descriptions of the occupation
b. Divisions of field if any
c. Education and training necessary for success in the field
d. Desirable personal qualifications
e. Best way to enter the field
f. Incomes to be expected
g. Advantages and disadvantages of the work
3. Lead the pupils to make tentative choice of occupations — discuss why
everyone should have an occupation, what he should know about it,
how important to make right choice, and what further education and
training are necessary.
4. Lead them to evaluate their own character qualifications for success.
5. Lead them to evaluate their own educational qualifications necessary
for success.
6. Visit higher institutions of learning and occupational centers to ex-
plore facilities for training.
7. Plan a series of interviews in the various fields with best local repre-
sentatives.
8. If possible and practical, make local tryouts to discover and create
interests — -gardening, acting as librarian, repairing school busses, etc.
9. Make exploratory visits to learn about occupations — e.g., a Saturday
trip with the public health nurse for some girl interested in nursing,
or a similar trip for a girl interested in that work, or visits to best
operated farm, factory, craft, etc.
10. Compile individual scrapbook of a minimum of three occupations.
11. Invite a few speakers on the various occupations, especially in seventh
grade.
12. Conclude study with a pageant of occupations.
SUGGESTIONS FOR A PROGRAM FOR EDUCATIONAL GUIDANCE WEEK
Monday :
Why an Education?
How Education Pays ?
What Elementary School Offers:
a. Its curriculum.
b. Its extra-curricular activities.
c. To what is it a gateway?
Is a Boy Worth as Much as a Pig?
Tuesday:
After Elementary School, What ?
Choosing School or Leisure Activity the Right Way and the Wrong Way.
What I Want to Become and Why.
Post lists _ of occupations and special present interests all classes writing about or,
discussing_ its own group of occupations.
Speaker on Agriculture as an Occupation or Leisure Hobbies for Boys and Girls. (Some-
one_ from the vocational or other special departments — e.g., the librarian, a local
florist or artist, a designer, writer, a banker, etc.)
Wednesday :
How to Choose a College, an Interest, or Hobby, or What Has the High School to
Offer?
The Colleges in My State, or How Can I Make Myself as Good a Student as Possible,
or How May I Become an Interesting Person?
Thursday :
Vocational Colleges, Vocational Schools, Books on Developing Hobbies.
Friday :
Discussions, Interviews and Selections of Courses, Interests and Occupations to Study
and Work Out —
Subject:
a. How does this apply to me now
b. My next step in school — interviews and discussion.
c. Three occupations I should be interested in looking into.
d. Making a scrapbook study of a vocation or interest — ooetry, fashions in clothes,
furniture, homes, transportation, sea life, butterflies, plants, hothouses, gardens, etc.
466 Course of Study for the
References for the Pupil:
Doughton — Preparing for the World's Work, Scribner's; Hill — Community and Vo-
cational Civics; Open Door Language Series, Grade VII, Chapters II, VIII; Boyle and
Saul — Rotating Plan for the Study of Occupations; Open Door Language Series, Grade
VI, Chapter VIII; Gowin, Wheatley and Brewer — Occupations; Ferris-Moore — Girls
Who Did; Hatcher — Guiding Rural Boys and Girls — Lesson Plans (S. W. E. A.);
Barnard — Getting a Living; Jackson — What Men Do; Piatt, Farnham and Sarg — The
Book of Opportunities; Vocational Pamphlets of U. S. Department of Labor, Navy,
and New Orleans; Lane. May Rogers — Vocations in Industry, Vol. I; Catalogs from
colleges and schools of mechanics; Bulletins on Foresty, Bulb-raising, etc., from U. S.
and State Departments of Agriculture; Magazines — The Trained Nurse and Hospital
Review, The Journal of Business Education, The Manufacturer's Record, The Pro-
gressive Farmer; State adopted basal and supplementary texts in history and geography.
References for the Teacher:
*S. W. E. A. — Suggestions for Guidance Programs in Rural Schools.
Bernays. An Outline of Careers, 1927. Doran.
Cases in the Administration of Guidance, 1929. McGraw.
Ferriss. Secondary Education in Country anr! Village, 1927. Appleton.
Ferriss, Henel and Moore, Virginia. Girls Who Did, 1929. Dutton.
Gowin, Wheatley and Brewer. Occupations, 1923. Ginn.
Hatcher. Edited by Emery N. Ferriss. Guiding Rural Boys and Girls, 1930. McGraw.
*Hatcher. Occupations for Women. S. W. E. A.
Holbrook. A Seventh Grade Course in School Opportunities, Bulletin 48, Pennsylvania
State Department of Public Instruction, 1928.
Hollingsworth. The Psychology of the Adolescent, 1928. Appleton.
Lane. Vocations in Industry, Volume I. Professions, Trades, and Allied Occupations in
Agriculture, Forestry and Animal Husbandry. International Textbook Company,
Scranton, 1929.
Lincoln School, New York City. Vacation Activities.
Lincoln. Manual for Gowin and Wheatley (Brewer Revision).
. Occupations. Ginn.
Jones. Principles of Guidance, 1930. McGraw.
Myers. Planning Your Future, 1930. McGraw.
Pennsylvania State Department of Public Instruction. Courses of Study in History and
Social Science, Grades VII-VIII. Bulletin 18. Harrisburg, 1927.
Pugh. A Guidance Program for a Nine-Grade Consolidated School (in press). S. W. E. A.
Proctor. Educational and Vocational Guidance, 1925. Houghton.
Vocations, 1929. Houghton.
Whipple. How to Study Effectively, 1927. Public School Pub.
Wood and Pruitt. A Guidance Program at Work in the Schools of Craven County.
S. W. E. A.
My Autobiography. (Record for child to make.) S. W. E. A. 7(J each.
Home and Parent Record. 2y 2 $ each.
Official School Record. 2y 2 $ each.
Topical Guide for Interviews. 2J40 each.
HOW LOCAL POLITICAL UNITS PROMOTE
THE WELFARE OF ALL
1. What is a political community? A social community? A church com-
munity? A school community?
2. The various types of political units :f
a. School District
(1) Find out when the school district was formed; how large
is it?
(2) Why are school districts necessary?
(3) How many officers are there in common school districts? In
independent school districts?
(4) How are they chosen? When?
(5) What are their most important duties?
(6) Make a list of all the benefits that a district receives from
its school.
(7) From what sources does money for the school come?
(8) What return can one make to his school for the benefits he
receives?
(9) List services noted in a given time rendered by district.
(10) Open Door Language Series, Grades VI and VII, Making
the School More Attractive.
•Southern Woman's Educational Alliance, Richmond, Va.
tAdapted from Minnesota Course of Study.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 467
b. Township (Study precincts also if township includes more than
one.)
(1) When was the township settled?
(2) How did it get its name?
(3) How large are North Carolina townships?
(4) From one of the reference books find the names of township
officers and what they do.
(5) What uses are made of the town halls?
(6) Why does North Carolina have townships?
(7) List services noted in a given time rendered by townships.
(8) How is a township financed?
c. County
(1) When was the local county first settled?
(2) How did it get its name?
(3) How many counties has North Carolina?
(4) Why is the state divided into counties? Make county map.
(5) Review the county offices and the most important duties of
each officer, term of office. Pupils may be sent to court
house to interview officials and make a report to the class.
(6) How does the county punish law breakers?
(7) How does the county care for its poor?
(8) List services noted in a given time rendered by county.
(9) For what does a county need money? How does it get it?
Summary of Services to Individual
Protection of life and property through sheriff, county
attorney and courts; writing and recording deeds, transfers,
records; building and maintaining county roads, bridges,
culverts; services to unfortunates; school supervision.
d. The City or Town
(1) Teacher should explain the difference between the two. Fol-
lowing this, children should find out in which they live.
(2) Find out how the village or city got its name.
(3) Why did people first choose to live in the local village or
city?
(4) Why do people live there now? (Some work in factories,
mills, stores, bakeries. Many people want the comforts of the
modern city.)
(5) How does city or village protect property?
(6) How does the city government safeguard life?
(a) Duties of policeman
(b) Care of health
(7) Name ways pupils can serve their city.
(8) Visit a session of city council. Talk with mayor and council
and report on their duties.
(9) List services noted in a given time by city or town.
Open Door Language Series, Grade VII, Chapters III, VI.
Outline for Studying Local History and Geography
of Town and County*
A. County
1. Read many historical stories to create and cultivate sense of reality for
movement and progress in history.
2. Get copy of law establishing the county.
3. Get any maps which have ever been made of the county; bring them up-
to-date.
4. Get picture of man for whom county was named and write a sketch of his
life; collect names and pictures of the original settlers; develop family
histories; lead pupils to see that combined family histories and geography
is history of county and nation. See also No. 20.
5. Get copies of newspaper articles and letters advocating the establishment of
the county, reorganization of the county etc.
'This outline is an adaptation of one originally worked out by Supt. Charles L. Coon,
Wilson, N. C. (Deceased)
468 Course of Study for the
6. Make table showing population by races, 1860-1930.
7. Make table showing the decrease in illiteracy, 1870-1930. Show relation-
ship, if possible, to school development facilities.
8. Make a list of the members of the legislature, 1855-1930, also list of county
officers during the same period; indicate any contributions made by them.
9. Make a list of the members of the Conventions of 1860, 1866, 1868, 1875.
10. List the soldiers and officers furnished to the Southern Confederacy, 1861-
1865 — any supplies furnished also.
11. List the events of the Civil War which occurred in county; indicate any
significance to be attached.
12. Make a table showing the value of property from 1860-1930. What con-
clusions and observations can be made?
13. Make a list of the churches of each denomination — location, date established,
pastors from the beginning, short biographies of leading pastors, etc. How
has the church influenced community development?
14. Make a table showing the growth in membership of each religious denomi-
nation from 1860-1930.
15. Make a list of the county superintendents of schools, 1870-1930. Include
short biographies of the superintendents that will show exactly what influence
he had on schools and other phases of community life.
16. Make a table showing the growth of the public schools of the county, 1870-
1930 — attendance, value of property, etc. Indicate significance.
17. Write short stories of each of the private schools of the county with
biographies of noted teachers, 1855-1930. Show plainly contributions made
toward community development.
18. Write a history of the railroads of the county — their relationships to other
railways.
19. Compile a history of the road legislation and road building of the county.
20. List the family names of county 1773-1800, 1860, 1870, 1890, 1900, 1930,
with something of the nationality and origin of our population; indicate the
national and family characteristics and contributions.
21. Write the chapter of the county's attitude toward slavery.
22. Negroes — 1865-1930 — their number, occupations, property values, educational
status, etc.
23. Industries and occupations — outstanding producers and products, causes,
needs.
B. Town — Local History
1. Law incorporating the town.
2. All laws cnanging the original act or incorporation.
3. Collection of the town ordinances.
4. History of town system of taxation.
5. Names of the mayors and aldermen; biographies of prominent mayors and
aldermen.
6. History of the churches:
a. Episcopal Church c. Presbyterian Church e. Baptist Church
b. Methodist Church d. Catholic Church f. Christian Church
7. History of the public school.
8. History of any other schools.
9. History of the newspapers; biographies of editors, etc.
10. History of the leaders; biographies of leading lawyers, doctors, merchants,
farmers, etc.
11. History of the banking business.
12. History of the tobacco industry (if any).
a. Cigarette factories.
b. Warehouses and tobacco market.
13. History of manufacturing (if any).
14. History of the lumber industry (if any).
15. Electric lights and water works.
16. Cemetery.
17. List of the merchants; biographies of the leading merchants.
18. Family names; nationality, at various dates, 1775, 1800, 1870, 1880, 1890,
1900, 1910, 1920, 1930.
19. Traditions, folklore, incidents, reminiscences: Make collection from a col-
lection of material, such as laws, newspapers, N. C. histories, documents,
reports, census tables, photographs, advertisements, church reports, memories
of old people, and every available source of information which will throw
light on any phase of the history of the county or the town.
Note : Some local histories have been compiled and may be secured at a nominal
cost. Write County Board of Educations at Burnsville, N. C, for one of
Yancey County, at Jefferson, N. C, for one of Ashe County, and at Murphy,
N. C, for one of Cherokee County. Some very interesting work of this type
has been done by counties in Wyoming and Virginia.
e. The State of North Carolina
(1) How long has North Carolina been a state?
(2) What does the name mean?
(3) List all the reasons why people are attracted to North Caro-
lina.
(4) How is North Carolina governed?
(a) Executive department: Name officers and state main
duties.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 469
(b) Legislative department: Name legislators that repre-
sent you, and state their important duties. Demonstrate
the passing of a law.
(c) Judicial department: Explain duties.
(5) What part does North Carolina take in the national govern-
ment?
(6) (a) Show map of ten congressional districts.
(b) Pupils should know names of United States senators
and their own congressmen.
(7) A suggested unit of work in reviewing these units of govern-
ment :
(a) Have the pupils draw a map of North Carolina and
on it locate in such a manner that they will be dis-
tinct, the boundaries of their congressional district,
county, township, school district, village or city.
(b) Have them find the size and population of each of the
above.
(c) Have them give reasons for the location of the county
seat.
(8) How does North Carolina care for criminals? Why is the
state prison ranked high among the prisons of the United
States?
(9) How does North Carolina safeguard the health of her
people? (See Course in Health Education.)
(10) List services noted in a given time rendered by state.
(11) For what does a state need money? How does it get it?
(12) Why is it cheaper for state to handle the matter discussed?
Summary of Services Rendered by the State
Property services: Ownership established, protection in courts;
regulation of banks, insurance and loan companies, inspection
of weights and measures.
Health services: Examining and licensing of doctors, dentists,
pharmacists, undertakers, etc.; investigation, checking and
prevention of diseases, regulation of quarantine, etc.; in-
spection of milk and foods.
Educational services: State colleges and state university; certi-
fication of teachers; supervision of schools through office of
the State Superintendent of Public Instruction.
Travel and traffic services: Building, marking and maintaining
of State roads and bridges.
Safety services: Fire regulation, marking of highways; speed
limits, intersections, railway crossings, etc.; laws for the
prevention of accidents.
Services of sympathy: Care of unfortunates, insane, feeble-
minded, blind, deaf, etc.
Occupational opportunities: Based on North Carolina's rating in
crops, variety of soils, type of climate, use of natural resources.
Reciprocal services and duties of the individual: Paying taxes,
cooperating in enforcement of law, supporting public improve-
ments.
f. Nation
(1) Follow same procedure for the national community as for
State.
(2) Summary of services of national government:
Postal services: Post offices, parcel post, money orders
savings, deliveries (city, R.F.D., Star routes).
Services to consumer: Pure food laws, food inspection,
regulation of railway rates, standards of weights and
measures.
470 Course of Study for the
Services to the manufacturer: Tariff, regulation of trusts,
regulation of immigration and foreign labor.
Services to the farmer: Weather and crop reports, bulle-
tins on phases of agriculture.
Money services: Coining, issuing currency, standardizing
value.
(3) Minimum duties of citizenship which every child should
know and observe:
(a) Obey the laws.
(b) Vote for honest and efficient men.
(c) Serve in public office if elected.
(d) Serve on jury if elected.
(e) Fight in the army if necessary.
(f) Protect and help beautify public property.
(g) Work for good measures and right issues.
References:
Brooks. Our Dual Government. Rand.
News and Observer Yearbook. Raleigh News and Observer.
North Carolina Manual. Secretary of North Carolina Historical Commission. Free to
pchool libraries.
Hobbs. North Carolina Social and Economic. University of North Carolina Press.
Knight. Our State Government. Scott.
Economic Maps of North Carolina (free). State Planters Bank and Trust Company,
Richmond, Va.
State Department of Conservation and Development. Regular bulletin issued by the
department, North Carolina tne Fifth State.
Thomas. Living Things Around Us. Lippincott.
State basal and supplementary history and geography texts.
Appropriate classifications in the State Approved Library List for Elementary and High
Schools.
Teaching Units Illustrating Some Phases of Citizenship Training
in the Intermediate and Upper Grades
SOCIAL LIFE IN THE COLONIES— FIFTH GRADE*
Started January 20, 1930— Completed April 5, 1930
How the Unit Originated:
Prior to_ our study of the colonization of America, we made a study
of the continent from which most of the settlers of America came. In
December and January we studied Great Britain, centralizing on the
manufacturing industry in England. This led to a study of early ways
of making clothing before the invention of machinery. Pictures were
brought showing wool and flax spinning wheels, the most interesting of
which was that of Priscilla. The pupils recalled the operetta, "The
Courtship of Miles Standish," and a study of the Pilgrim settlement
followed after which the other twelve colonies were studied with an
abundance of comparisons and contrasts.
Steps in the Resulting Activities:
1. Creating a Colonial Atmosphere
A flax wheel of approximately 100 years history was loaned to the
classroom and this lovely antique was placed on the large reading table
with groups of various magazines. Pictures and stories of a colonial
nature with a copy of the Early American Furniture Wing of the
Metropolitan Museum of Art were added. "The Garden and Home
Builder" of July, 1926, which was devoted largely to the history, photo-
graphs, and scale drawings of Longfellow's Wayside Inn, or The Old
Red Horse Tavern of 1686, located at South Sudbury, Mass., was very
much in demand during library period. This old landmark bought and
restored by Henry Ford in 1923 in his collection of Americana shows as
nearly as possible the conditions under which the New England pioneers
lived. Along with Mr. Ford, the pupils realized that The Wayside Inn,
•Adapted from a report of Mrs. Allene Moseley Shroeder, Fifth Grade, High Point
Public Schools.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 471
which has housed George Washington and Marquis de Lafayette, is
indeed a part of the nation. It truly expresses the pioneer spirit. From
this article the pupils passed into an intensive study of social life in the
early New England colonies with the actual construction of The Wayside
Inn and its furnishings and a later branching out to include types in
other colonies.
2. General Methods of Planning and Discussion
All activities in this unit of work were largely cooperative in that
there was a need for general discussion in which objectives were set up
in outline form. Plans for reaching them were made. The committees
gathered data, collected pictures, made drawings, or served as a reference
committee using home, school, - grade or public library, depending upon
the nature of their problem. At the next discussion period these com-
mittees reported to the class their progress, difficulties or successes, after
which discussion of necessity followed. The class as a unit evaluated
the reports, made comments and inquiries followed usually by helpful
suggestions, if needed, for further work.
The pupils had purposes of their own which furnished the "push"
and stimulated them in their activity in planning and executing necessary
work in realization of purposes. Teacher aids were given in helping them
to find, secure and use materials and methods of work. In as far as
possible, the problems were arranged so that the situation in one phase
of unit was followed in natural order by the needed step which came
as a demand of the children themselves, rather than by teacher selection.
Subject matter entered as an answer to this demand for information
concerning both constructive and intelligent problems.
3. Description of a Typical Day's Work
Reading: Paul Revere's Ride — Studies in Reading — V.
Storybooks of Colonial Children — Learning to Study.
Social Science: First battle of the Revolutionary War period with
location of British troops and Minute Men — Dangerous mission of Revere
and Dawes.
English and Language: My experience as a guest of Squire Howe
at the Wayside Inn when Paul Revere brought the alarm.
Reports: Paul Revere's Announcement, Paul Revere's Personal His-
tory.
Arithmetic: Problems involving measurements of the Wayside Inn in
square feet and in linear measurements of furniture. Ability to compute
area, containing fractional parts.
Music: Colonial songs.
Library Period: Research Group work, recreatory reading of colonial
fiction with ten minutes devoted to reading of "How Pickles Were Made
in Olden Times" by teacher.
Industrial and Fine Arts: Constructing the Wayside Inn and its
furniture, painting, designing old wall paper, costuming the dolls for
characters, making hooked and woven rugs.
Physical Education: Colonial games.
4. Trips and Excursions
a. Through the courtesy of Mr. C. F. Tomlinson, we visited the Tom-
linson Chair Factory to see (1) the Colonial reproduction show rooms
covering several floors; (2) the actual making of furniture. Several
employees of the company conducted the groups of pupils on this tour.
Before the trip, in our general discussion period, we talked of
lovely pieces we expected to see, such as Windsor chairs, William
and Mary tallboys and Field beds. We noted the many things to be
seen, the proper way of taking notes, of sketching the reproductions.
The pupils were delighted with an original Duncan Phyfe table, and
pencils were soon busy sketching it. From our study of the Wayside
Inn, many were able to name at once different articles of furniture
seen on this trip. (See criteria for plannnig an excursion, page
443.)
472 Course of Study for the
b. The Grandfather Clock Committee visited the jewelry store of a patron
of ours, where they viewed a priceless grandfather clock, two hun-
dred years old. This aided them in their work period with their
miniature reproduction, in which an Ingersol watch movement keeps
accurate time.
c. Various trips to stores for selection of materials for curtains, up-
holstery, screws, and things needed for their unit of work.
5. Outcomes
a. Growth in cooperation and appreciation of individual responsibility
to group, the necessity for planning group enterprises, and of group
and individual contributions:
Through this unit of work the class was welded into a social
group supplied with an abundance of situations in which the place
of each pupil was appreciated fully. In the division into small groups
according to selection of some specific work, the finer qualities of
citizenship were called upon and tested as personal contacts which
led to a feeling of responsibility to the group as a whole. The children
"worked" with a feeling of worthwhile "play" for the benefit of the
group. Constructive criticism was given freely and accepted grate-
fully. Due to the lack of sufficient room for the different groups
during the work period, each individual felt the need for and co-
operated at once with the group by establishing habits or order, sys-
tem and neatness in arrangement of materials with the realization
of his proportional share of time and attention.
b. Practice in facing real problems and working through them to a
satisfactory solution:
Example: In building the colonial stairway in a hall of the Inn,
the problems arose as to the relative height of lower and higher
bannisters. The stairway committee appealed to the group at last.
After much argument and reference to pictures and descriptions of
colonial stairways, they referred the committee to the stairway of
the school for measurements. The question of perspective arose and
some definite understanding of the principles of perspective in art
was reached.
Quite a bit of improvement was noted in the ability to attack
problems and enter into work with promptness, effectiveness and suc-
cess and in establishing habits of system, order and neatness in
arrangement of materials.
c. A deepened appreciation for colonial character and contributions to
American life (see General Objectives).
d. Content and Materials —
(1) Selections found in State basal or supplementary material read
by the whole group:
Story Books of Colonial Children — Learn to Study Reader — IV; Old-Fashioned
Clothes — Learn to Study Reader; A Rescue and a Wedding — Pathway to Reading;
How Madeline Held the Fort — Story Reader; Apple Seed John — Study Reader;
William Penn, the Great Quaker — Lewis and Roland (5) ; Betty's Ride — Elson Ex-
tension; The Last Catamount — Stone (5) ; The Beacon Tree — Pathways to Reading;
The Quaker Poet, Whittier — Bolenius; The Story of Light — Elson Extension; The
Clockman — Elson Extension — Child Library Series; The Wary Wolf — Elson Ex-
tension — Child Library Series; The Corn Husking — Elson Extension — Child Library
Series; Besieged by Bears — Stone; The Village Blacksmith — Studies in Reading;
Capturing the Wild Horse — Elson Extension; The Clocks of Rondaine — Elson Ex-
tension; Jason and the Golden Fleece — Science Reader; At the Desert's Edge —
Lewis and Roland; James Watt and the Steam Engine — Science Reader; Maple
Sugar Days With John Burroughs — Study Reader; The Pygmies, Hawthorne — Elson
Extension; My Boyhood on the Prairies — Elson Extension; A Boy of American
Pioneer Days — Reading and Living — II; Paul Revere's Ride — Studies in Reading;
Mount Vernon — Study Reader; Benjamin Franklin — Elson (S); Benjamin Franklin
— Pathway to Reading; Franklin's Experiment — Science Reader (5); Making Furni-
ture — Stone; The Young Artist — Study Reader; Washington With Braddock — Elson;
The Children's Hour — Longfellow — Studies in Reading; Washington, Betsy Ross and
the Flag — Bolenius (5) ; Makes This Greatest One Live Again — Study Reader;
What the Clock Told Dolly — Elson Extension; Eli Whitney and the Cotton Gin —
Science Reader; George Stephenson and the Coming of the Locomotive — Science
Reader; Peter Cooper and the First Locomotive — Pathway to Reading — IV; Morse
and the First Telegraph — Science Reader; How Cyrus Laid the Cable — Bolenius;
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 473
Robert Fulton and the Steamboat — Science Reader; The Discontented Pendulum —
Studies in Reading; Making Maple Sugar — Pathway to Reading; The Boy Who
Saved the Settlement — Elson Extension; The Rich Kingdom of Cotton — Elson Ex-
tension; The Family Clock — Elson Extension; When You Meet A Bear — Study
Reader; The Yankee Who Crowned King Cotton — Study Reader; The Boy From
the Hatter's Shop — Stone; The Indian Hero Tale — Stone; The First Thanksgiving
Day— Elson (5); The Fish I Didn't Catch— Bolenius; The Old Clock on the
Stairs — Bolenius; Henry Hudson's Trip Up the Hudson — Finding America; The
Candle's Beauty — Elson Extension; The Old Street Lamp — Elson Extension; The
Lighthouse — Longfellow — Elson Extension; The Keeper of the Light — Elson Ex-
tension; Thomas Edison — Science Reader; Marconi^Science Reader; The Story of
Ships— Study Reader; Wayside Inn Number, July, 1926, Garden and Home Builder
Magazine, featuring antiques and interiors; The World Book (encyclopedia).
Additional Reading Done by Individuals
Bass — Stories of Pioneer Life; Perry — Four American Pioneers; Hart — Colonial
Children; Earle — Home Life in Colonial Days; Stone and Fickett — Everyday Life
in the Colonies; MacElroy — Work and Play in Colonial Days; Halleck and Frantz —
Makers of Our Nation; Studies in American History — Book II — Melody — Lyons
and Carnahan; Boys and Girls in Colonial Times — Mulliken; Holland Stories —
Smith; The True Story of Washington — Brooks; Copy of Early American Furni-
ture — Wing of the Metropolitan Museum; Early American Furniture; Popular
Science Monthly; Pilgrim Stories — Pumphrey; From Columbus to Lincoln — Logie —
Lyons and Carnahan.
There was a great deal of reading by individuals in connection with unit in
newspaper clippings, magazines, and reference books.
(2) Language Arts:
There was much improvement noted in enunciation, pronunci-
ation, and clearness in reports, enlargement of vocabulary, ability
to talk with ease before a group and ability to read poetry with
expression. Extracts from books and magazines were read aloud
for specific information, oral reports following prepared outlines
in life, customs, dress, food, homes and furniture of early colo-
nists, followed by conversations and discussions. Many debates,
imaginary trips, dramatizations, group letters and book reports of
historic interest gave incentive to better speech. Poems of Long-
fellow, Whittier and Hawthorne were read aloud by some member
of the class. (See above list.) We summarized the study in a
program given before parents and friends.
In this project the needs were large for written work, giv-
ing occasion for teaching technical elements necessary in good
written composition work in groups and individual letters, re-
ports and summaries, dramatizations, original stories, poems, short
plays and newspaper articles. Especial interest was aroused in
the writing of advertisements for the Wayside Inn stage coach
rides, a practical model being constructed by a pupil.
Drill in use of dictionary was given on (a) how to find words,
(b) how to pronounce words, and (c) selecting the proper defi-
nitions and meaning, so that new and difficult words could be
used in oral and written work. Several papers were posted after
each writing, as an incentive to the rigid requirement of ink and
legible penmanship.
(3) Arithmetic:
There were rapid drills in fundamental processes to secure
speed and accuracy in solving problems dealing with measure-
ments in linear and square feet (including fractional parts) while
reproducing the Wayside Inn, vehicles and hand loom.
Problems also involved comparing values of goods used for
food, clothing, furnishings, tools and utensils for the early days
with the use of the present. The pupils learned of the cost of
lumber through purchase, made their money for payment of cost
and kept accounts of expenditures for nails, screws, cloth, putty,
furniture and glue.
(4) Social Studies:
Class studied period from 1607-1800, emphasizing the three
types of colonial life in Virginia, Massachusetts and New York
with a brief survey of North Carolina. An interpretation of the
present was shown in its development from the past with the
474 Course of Study for the
resultant changes in economics, industrial, religious and social
life. The pupils saw the need for discoveries and inventions and
especial attention was given to the industrial revolution. Selected
biography of those furnishing examples of loyalty, sincerity, patri-
otism and toleration, such as that of Franklin were read. Com-
parisons were made of the life of the pupils and colonial children
in sports and games, schools and homes, books, work, food and
clothing, travel, transportation and communication, and news-
papers.
The necessary questions of geographic controls arose in study
of location, climate and physical environment of the colonies.
(State Course of Study, 1923, gives examples.)
(5) Industrial and Fine Arts:
(a) Miniature model, scale one inch per foot of the Wayside Inn,
with furnishings complete on the entire lower floor as shown
in plans, drawings and photographs of the Inn. Miniature
furnishings, curtains, utensils and rugs made by pupils.
(b) History of travel and transportation of colonial days shown
in miniature stage wagon, stage coach and Conestoga wagon.
(c) Practical model of stage coach was constructed by member of
group in workshop at home. The rides at five cents each
helped greatly to finance cost of our Inn. "Pull candy" and
pumpkin pies made by the girls aided considerably with this
item.
(d) Hand looms for weaving rugs.
(e) Costuming colonial dolls.
(f) Practical models of 1650 cradle, three-legged chair of 1650
and flax and wool spinning wheels.
(g) Posters and drawings in crayons, water colors and pencil,
(h) Easel drawings of the Wayside Inn.
(i) Designing wall paper.
(j) Colonial invitations to program (block print).
(k) Painting of interior and exterior of the Wayside Inn, in-
cluding window glass. There was a cultivation and develop-
ment of standards of good taste accompanied by a love of
that which is beautiful and lovely in homes and furniture.
(1) Pictures and appreciation: The Landing of the Pilgrims;
Arabs on the March — Schreyer (story of horse) ; Signers
of the Declaration of Independence; Photographs of the Inn,
showing the lovely gardens; Washington Crossing the Dela-
ware; Horse Fair — Bonheur.
(m) Music: Colonial songs, both descriptive and patriotic were
learned. Some knowledge was obtained of the harpsichord,
pianoforte, viol, Jew's harp, violins, flutes and horns of colo-
nial days. (Pamphlet may be secured from the Metropolitan
Museum of Art.)
(6) Plays and Games:
Knowledge gained of games enjoyed by colonial children such
as Ring Around the Rosy, London Bridge, Wood Tag, Dancing
Around the Maypole, Hopscotch, Blind Man's Buff and Leapfrog.
(7) Natural Leads for Other Units of Study: Story of Light; His-
tory of the Horse; History of Transportation, Cotton, Flax and
Wool Industry; Story of Communication; Furniture Industry of
High Point; Story of Glass; Story of Paint; Costumes from
Past to Present.
(8) Bibliography — (Those especially good for teacher are marked*)
How Our Grandfathers Lived — Hart*; Compton's P'Cture Encyclopedia*; Stan-
dard Reference Work; Standard Dictionary of Facts; Book of Knowledge; Boys
and Girls Book Shelf; The Wonder World; Nelson's Encyclopedia; Elementary
Industrial Arts — Winslow*; How the World is Fed — Carpenter; The Farmer and
His Friend — Tappan; Boycraft — Whitman Publishing Co., Racine, Wis.; Travelers
and Traveling — Eva March Tappan; Visitors a Guide to Salem, Mass.; Better
Homes and Gardens; Good Housekeeping; House and Garden, April issue, 1930;
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 475
Stories of Industry— Educational Publishing Co.; Makers of Many Things— Tao-
pan; Certified Style Book of Wall Paper; How the World Rides— Florence E.
Cox; Building a New Country; From Trail to Railway; Adventuring in Young
A^ er AT a- ;^ c £ ulre a " d P h ! ] , h P s = Building Our Country; Old Time Stories of thl
Old North State— McCorkle; How We Are Sheltered— Chamberlain; Popular
Science Monthly; Tales of the Wayside Inn— Longfellow*; Mary Had A Little
Lamb— Published by Mr. and Mrs. Henry Ford; Encyclopedia Britannica; Saturday
Evening Post; Human Interest Library; Little Bits of Old Time Furniture; Ameri-
can Histories— Latane; Lincoln Library; First Lessons in United States History
limes Encyclopedia; Pageant of America; Winston's Encyclopedia.
AN ADVENTURE IN ART APPRECIATION
How the Unit Originated:
Last fall the Teacher Training Class in Taylorsville began its year's
work with sixteen potential teachers having a background almost entirely
lacking m those aesthetic qualities which make for a well-rounded social
and civic personality. Furthermore the school lacked paintings, vases
and other evidences of an art consciousness. Believing that Art Ap-
preciation should develop in each child a feeling of personal responsibility
for establishing and maintaining beauty and knowing that the student-
teachers could not build those qualities in the children if they did not
themselves possess them, the instructor deliberately began to set the
stage for an experience which would contribute to these objectives:
1. Enable the student-teacher to see and appreciate beauty wherever
and m whatever form she found it.
2. Contribute to the innate love of beauty through the intelligent
use of good pictures and music.
3. Develop > a finer and more discriminating taste in the selection of
those pictures with which she lives.
4. Acquaint the student-teacher with the fundamental principles un-
derlying pleasing art balance; rhythm and repetition; harmony
of line and color; effect of light and shadow (tone); method of
ieelmg expressed.
5. Give the informational background with which to interpret honestly
the historical, political, social, ethical, or aesthetic values as ex-
pressed by the artist.
6. Influence indirectly and directly the attitude of the whole ele-
mentary school toward art.
How the Unit Was Developed:
1. A plaque, Raphael's Madonna of the Chair, was hung on the wall
It was chosen because it so successfully uses the fundamental and
more easily understood art principles. Wall spacing was carefully
considered m the hanging. The instructor awaited comment, and
bet ore the day was over, in answer to inquiry, she gave the name
of the picture, a bit of its story, and some interesting incidents
m the artist's life. The discussion was informally guided toward
the following points: what the artist was attempting to portray
center of interest and theme, pattern of the lines upon which the
picture was built (preliminary foundation for balance as an art
principle), and the appropriateness of the 15th century type plaque
as a setting for that particular picture, harmonizing as it did in
color and line.
2. In the midst of this discussion a visitor dropped in. She told the
human little story of the painting of the Madonna of the Chair
(Good English, Book III, or School Arts Magazine, Dec, 1926.)
This caused a discussion of the feeling the artist was expressing
in the picture and it was suggested that the same feeling might
be expressed in music. A committee investigated the matter and
found several records which they thought did this. Hymns were
chosen and sung, Holy, Holy, Holy, Halleluiah Chorus, etc.
3. Other treatments of the Madonna theme — The Sistine Madonna,
The Madonna of the Harpies, The Madonna of the Streets were
brought to class and group committees gave chapel programs which
furnished the informational background for the study.
476 Course of Study for the
4. A new stimulation came in the form of an invitation to the class
to visit the Colonial Art Exhibit in a nearby town. This is an
attractive exhibit done in color. The invitation was accepted and
it was decided that a visit to a furniture store should be included
in the excursion, in order that they might see art expressed
through a different medium.
As the instructor was to be away during their trip, she asked
them to report on the pictures they liked best. The students re-
turned with a heightened interest in pictures and a new interest
in picture posing, which they had seen for the first time.
As they were working for graphic expression in anticipation
of the return of the instructor they tried out their talks on each
other to get the benefit of criticism on choice of vocabulary for
expression.
5. The class wrote letters to the State Supervisor, expressing fairly
spontaneously their enjoyment of the pictures. Art principles of
spacing and choice of words in picture painting and letter writing
were here emphasized.
6. They greatly desired to give to the elementary school children
the pleasure of seeing the collection of paintings. There had been
before some discussion of bringing a less desirable but more re-
munerative exhibit to the school; the decision was that an enter-
prise in which the elementary school children profited in an in-
tangible but important way is more worthwhile than financial
gain.
7. Letters were written to the Colonial Art Company, Oklahoma City,
Okla., and received the information that an exhibit could be
secured with no charge other than the express. All the money
from ticket sales had to be used to purchase pictures from the
company.
A date was selected and an advertising campaign gotten under-
way. Posters conforming to art principles of spacing and emphasis
were made. The entire class made collections of copies of master-
pieces from many sources. These were mounted and various grades
were invited to see them. Many of these children returned indi-
vidually for a second and often a third view of certain prints.
There was much study of these pictures and eager searching for
information about the artists in preparation for an original pic-
ture pageant that should be a part of the exhibit. (The North
Carolina Library Commission and the University Extension Di-
vision Library proved to be invaluable aid in this respect.) The
students selected fourteen pictures on the basis of their preference
and the possibility for posing and costuming them.
Since poetical form was felt to be the most suitable mode of
expression, the English class took up the study of verse forms in
poetry. Descriptive poetry for each picture selected was written
by individual and polished cooperatively in class.
The music periods were used for selecting and learning appro-
priate music to be used as an accompaniment for entire pageant
choruses and voice and piano solos were used.
During the physical education period the rhythmic interpreta-
tions were developed for the fairies.
Finally the student-teachers chose the cast of characters. The
class studied costuming and lighting effects, arranged a stage set-
ting in harmony with the theme, and constructed many stage
properties such as the harp for Hope.
It was decided that the money realized should be used to place
pictures in the classrooms, each class being urged to sell enough
tickets to buy a picture. In the end each class did proudly, seri-
ously choose a picture. Besides there were two for the Teacher-
Training Department and one each for the two libraries.
9. Before the exhibit arrived plans had been made for the handling
of tickets, talks about the paintings, and programs by different
grades for each night. The day was so scheduled that each class
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 477
enjoyed a period in the exhibit, looking at and discussing the
pictures under the direction of a teacher or a student-teacher.
The entire school seemed to become picture conscious; many contri-
butions being brought to school.
10. The instructor, taking advantage of an opportunity in judging,
encouraged the classes to choose from the entire collection the
picture they wanted to own. Before judging, certain criteria must
become a part of the individual's equipment. Through the indirect
study of art principles expressed in specific paintings, the class-
room teachers had prepared for this situation. Many evidences
of growth in liking for real art were noted while selections were
being made.
11. The student-teachers used the intense interest of the grade children
in the exhibit as a motive for language lessons during practice-
teaching. Their classes made booklets, each page of which con-
tained a small picture mounted above a story about that picture —
sometimes the result group composition, sometimes original with
a child.
12. Another phase of art study was the making of plaques, an interest
which continued throughout the year. The student-teachers made
these for Christmas gifts, using prints of masterpieces. There
were group efforts in making plaques for Miss McDougald and
another department. When they wanted to beautify the new
elementary library, plaques were made and grouped artistically
on its wall.
13. All through the year the student-teachers collected pictures and
teaching material about those pictures. Much English work grew
out of this activity. This work was organized according to this
plan:
Study picture and artist
Mount picture on heavy construction paper of harmonizing color
Tell story as to children
Write story of artist and picture
Find music to express same mood
The desire to make a pleasing cover for the Picture Study
Booklet which resulted introduced designing as an activity. After
research they selected the following principles as guides:
Honest point of interest in center of design
Space must be pleasingly filled, not crowded
Must have rhythm without monotony — attained by using large
and small symbols together
Must have balance.
14. The students read much about methods of arousing a love for
beautiful pictures and selected the following as the best current
practice :
Place on bulletin board several days before study.
Give children opportunity to express what the picture tells
them — opportunity freely to express their own ideas and
feelings about the picture before you tell them anything.
Direct observation — questions needed to bring out points not
covered by discussion.
Tell material in story form, not duplicating points covered by
discussion.
Evidence that there was growth in:
a. An interest in pictures
A sixth grade boy: "Miss , today is my Mother's birthday. I
bought her a copy of Hope for a present."
A fifth grade boy (owner of a white rabbit, upon seeing a small plaque
of The Boy With a Rabbit placed in the library) : "Do you know where I
can buy a picture like that? I want one for myself."
Some child in grades to Teacher-Training Instructor : "Have you seen
our new picture?" or "I found this Blue Boy in a magazine."
Every student started a collection which remained a live interest to the
end of the year.
478 Course of Study for the
Many adults of the community : "I am so glad that you brought this
exhibit to the school. I've enjoyed it so much."
Many copies of masters other than those brought through the exhibit
appeared in the classroom. Many students desired to own certain pictures
and inquired where they could be bought.
The instructors visited a student-teacher's home and found that several
neatly mounted copies of good pictures had taken the place of the usual
calendars.
b. Taste for good pictures
Case I.- — A class of forty-three fourth graders the first day of the exhibit
evidenced an intense liking for "Little Old Man of the Woods." This liking
was probably conditioned by familiarity with the subject matter of the pri-
mary story by that name. Three days of directed picture study under the
guidance of a classroom teacher or a student-teacher followed. The last day
(and to the class the most important day!) they were choosing their picture.
Again they were clustering about one painting. This time, "The Boy
Pioneer"! When its price was known to be prohibitive they chose "Feeding
Her Birds."
Case II. — The sixth grade decided to choose "Where the Sun Goes" be-
cause of the color and illusion of great distances achieved by the artist.
Case III. — Fifth grade: "We want the picture of somebody. We like the
portraits in the collection best." They chose "Sir Galahad."
Case IV. — A first grade gravJy discussed the picture they wanted. "The
Boy With a Rabbit" won the vote.
Case V. — The Teacher-Training class had just closed the trunk of pic-
tures. "I wish we could keep them all. I've never enjoyed four days so
much."
Case VI. — A student-ttacher, who had lived the twenty-three years of her
life thirteen miles from a railway, whose interest in the initial art studies
had been passive, spent every spare minute with the collection. Her letter
to the supervisor gives her reaction:
"/ am writing to tell you what a delightful time we had last Thursday
afternoon at the Art Exhibit. The pictures were wonderful and it was a
difficult task indeed to choose our favorites. In my opinion the two hours
spent were the must profitable and the most delightful I have ever spent. I
feel that I was lifted to a higher plane of life and though being no artist
myself, I got an intelligent satisfaction from the creations of those more
gifted than I for it made me feel as some one else has said, 'that a work
of art means a combination of two people, the one who did it and the one
who looks at it.'
"It seemed that the pictures really talked and for the time being I just
lived with them and tried to be a good listener.
"The exhibit gave us the suggestion that we might in our chapel program
dramatise some of the pictures we saw. Another thought was that we might
get the exhibit here. This will mean that more boys and girls will have the
privilege of enjoying worthwhile pictures.
"We are very grateful to you and to our teacher for this good time.
We especially enjoyed the nice picnic supper she prepared for us.
"We hope you may visit us again soon and we will be glad to tell you
more about the exhibit."
Case VII. — A reaction from another student-teacher:
"Our party left town about three o'clock. We arrived at our destination
in about three-quarters of an hour and went directly to the exhibit. Our
teacher had told us we might select any ten of the pictures we liked best
to tell her about when we came back. It was interesting to see what dif-
ferent students selected.
"We z'isited a leading furniture store. A gentleman showed us around.
He gave us some hints on how to arrange furniture, the different styles,
and some of the most noted manufacturing companies.
"We had supper in the bus. There was a golden sunset that we noticed
while we were eating. '1 ne fifth grade gave a program and posed some of
the pictures we had selected as the ones we liked best: ' 1 he Boy With a
Torn Hat,' 'The Song of the Lark,' and 'Baby Stuart.'
"Perhaps we can have this exhibit at our school. Don't you think so?
Anyway every grade must give a program in our school. We have decided
to pose some of those pictures and are now at work writing a play about
them.
"I enjoyed every minute of that day and I want to thank you for mak-
ing it possible for us to attend this exhibit. We hope you will visit us
again soon."
Case VIII. — In every case the classes chose pictures of recognized worth,
as follo-vs:
First Grade; — Boy With a Rabbit
Second Grade — The Shepherd Boy
Third Grade B— Can't You Ta.k?
Third Grade A — The Age of Innocence
Fourth Grade — Boy Pioneer
Fourth Grade — Feeding the Birds
Fifth Grade— Sir Galahad
Sixth Grade — Where the Sun Goes
Seventh Grade — The Song of the Lark
Eighth Grade — Corot's Spring
Teacher-Training — Corot's Spring and Boy With Torn Hat
High School Library — The Pioneers
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 479
Evidences that worthwhile citizenship attitudes were being
aroused and practiced during the unit:
a. The student-teachers showed a desire to share with their school the pleasure
of seeing pictures.
b. They made the decision that an enterprise in which the elementary school
profited was more worthwhile than money making.
c. They were made more self-reliant through practice in planning and executing.
d. Initiative was exercised in planning for and carrying out program — e.g., tub
with pillows on top covered with dark robe tor top of world in Hope.
e. There was responsibility to group — e.g., each student-teacher trained children
for certain picture and looked after costuming and ali the properties.
Observation of, liking for, and desire to own pictures were quite evident.
£• They desired to beautify new elementary library (made plaques for it).
All over the school there was a more evident desire to make the rooms more
_ beautiful. The materials on the bulletin boards were better arranged.
l. There was a better school spirit — perhaps the result of a cooperative effort
involving the entire school.
j. Unselfishness was shown during the selection of the pictures that were
bought for the Teacher-Training Department and each elementary room,
k. Art appreciation growth was shown by type of pictures selected.
The following sources of materials proved useful:
Sources of good prints:
Colonial Art Company, Oklahoma City, Okla.
Art Extension Society, Westport, Conn.
Harter School Supply Company, Chicago.
Brown-Robertson Company, New York.
Normal Instructor — Owen Publishing Company.
Masterpieces in Art for Picture Study— Selected by Dr. W. Linwood
Chase — Educational Publishing Company.
(True color representation is essential.)
References for informational background:
Pictures:
Bacon. Pictures Every Child Should Know. Doubleday. (Correlates
pictures and music.)
Caffin. How to Study Pictures. Century.
Lester. Great Pictures and Their Stories. Mentzer. (8 volumes.) Ex-
cellent reproductions — good material.
Horton My Picture Study Book. Harter School Supply Company
Teacher's Manual for Grades I and II
Work Books for Grades III-VI.
Library Commission, Raleigh, N. C.
Library University of North Carolina.
(The books sent for the asking from the last two places are excellent
tor informational background.)
Music:
Records in Rural Unit No. 1. Victor. Price $10. (Varied in content )
Music Appreciation With the Victrola. Victor. (Good for correlation
of music and pictures.)
Mohler. Teaching Music From an Appreciation Basis. Birchard.
A FIFTH GRADE PROJECT INVOLVING CITIZENSHIP-READING*
How the Plan Originated:
One cool day in October the fifth grade boys came into the room after
the noon bell had rung for classes with joy written over their faces
They had won the football game ! Their clothes, faces, and hands showed
the result of a fierce battle. Details from the game were given. The
teacher took the situation in hand for she saw the possibility for a good
lesson in citizenship. She said, "You see, boys, the players who hit the
line the hardest, who didn't foul and didn't shirk, were the ones who
counted. We can't all play football but we are all playing in a greater
game — life. Let's turn to the famous writing of Roosevelt and see if
we are measuring up to the standards he sets forth for the American
boy."
The American Boy — Theodore Roosevelt.
Elson Reader — Book V.
How the Plan Developed:
The class and the teacher studied the selection together and decided
they were endeavoring to "play the game" in the schoolroom on the
grounds, on the street, and in the home. We studied the character traits
*Ava R. Stockman.
480 Course of Study for the
given in the selection and named others that we thought every good
citizen needed. The teacher asked if they could plan any way to put
more good habits into practice. They decided to form a "Good Citizen-
ship League" and see if they could not make better citizens. For their
league officers they elected a chairman and three helpers. This com-
mittee was to see that the work was carried on successfully in the room,
to offer suggestions, and to handle any matters of law-breaking that
might occur. Their action had to be approved by the other members and
the teacher. They made a list of the habits they wanted to be put into
practice. At the end of each day they marked the habits they had kept
and those they had not kept by distinguishing signs. Their chief aims
were:
1. To keep the schoolgrounds and schoolroom cleaner and more at-
tractive.
2. To make each boy and girl a better citizen (checked by Chassell-
Upton scale).
3. To make a habit of the desirable character traits which every
person should possess.
4. To perform every task given him to the best of his ability.
Outcomes in Terms of Citizenship:
1. The children learned that they were citizens working among
citizens and that each had certain rights and privileges.
2. They became more courteous and thoughtful
a. At school
b. On the playground
c. On the street
d. At home.
3. There was a growing pride in keeping the room and buildings free
from papers, trash, marks, etc.
4. They felt that the schoolroom was their home and that they were
responsible for bringing flowers and keeping the desks, shades,
books, and erasers in order.
5. They developed in habits of good sportsmanship
a. Good winners
b. Good losers
c. Fair play
d. No bullying.
6. They became more responsible for proper care of
a. Books
b. Materials
c. Overshoes, coats, handkerchiefs, etc.
KNIGHTHOOD OF YOUTH CLUB*
How the Unit Originated:
For our first supplementary reader the sixth grade read "King
Arthur." The children enjoyed it immensely. They were interested in
any picture or poem dealing with knights. One day the teacher left on
her desk a sample of literature from the Child Welfare Association.
This sample described the National Knighthood of Youth Club. One
of the children noticed it and remarked about the pictures of knights on
the cover of the booklet. The teacher told them they might look at the
booklet. Inside they found a badge of a page in the organization and a
member's book of record-keeping and knighthood projects. Many ques-
tions were asked of course, and the teacher took part of a period during
the day to explain the club. The class asked to organize a club.
Steps in the Development of the Work:
1. Pupils who wished to join brought money for badges, member's
book, and record card. These were ordered from the National
Child Welfare Association, Inc., 70 Fifth Avenue, New York City.
'Rachel Alexander, Teacher, Grade Six, Taylorsville, N. C.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 481
2. A more extended study of the organization by pupils and teacher.
3. Effort on part of teacher to keep interest of class until the ma-
terial came:
a. Making of shields by all members of class.
b. Naming of their particular circle of the club. The children
chose the name, Sir Lancelot Circle.
c. Dramatizing the story of the Castle of the Maidens from
King Arthur. This was taken from a different copy of
King Arthur, which was in our new library.
4. Materials came. Club was organized, and now continues to enlarge
daily. There is a self-checking of habits formed or broken. The
plan of the club provides for a meeting each week. The executive
committee, composed of the officers, meet one week. The alternate
week there is a social meeting of the entire circle, at which time
a program is given.
(As it takes 64 weeks of parent-teacher cooperation to com-
plete this unit, it will continue throughout the summer vacation
under the guidance of the parents and into the following school
term.)
(Information about the club plan may be secured by any teacher
or parent from the National Child Welfare Association, 70 Fifth
Avenue, New York City.)
Outcomes of the Unit in Terms of Citizenship:
1. A safe and happy (imaginary) adventure for pupils. Their bad
habits become enemies for knights to overthrow.
2. A feeling in the child that he is a part of a great national organ-
ization.
3. A group of children who help to promote better citizenship in the
entire grade through their own improved example.
4. A cooperative responsibility for the child, parent, and teacher;
thus drawing them all into closer relationship. Both parent and
teacher sign the child's report to the National organization.
5. Activities for both home and school, which enlarge the life of the
child and make of him a better citizen.
6. An improvement in the following character traits:
a. Promptness
b. Self-reliance
c. Neatness
d. Politeness or courtesy (See trait action list.)
e. Truthfulness or honesty
f. Self-control
g. Helpfulness.
7. A greater willingness in pupils to read outside work, make reports,
serve on committee, etc.
MAKING THE CONSTITUTION OF UNITED STATES REAL*
In the fall when we were studying the "Making of Our Constitution"
in American history, the critical conditions of our country just prior to
the making of the constitution, the causes of those conditions, and the
means of remedying them were stressed. The facts were brought out
that under the then existing form of government the country was in
danger of drifting into anarchy or being forced into a monarchy, that
a new form of government was necessary for the preservation and prog-
ress of the nation, that a constitution is necessary for a successful or-
ganization and that therefore a new one must be made for this nation
as the articles of confederation were no longer effective.
At this time in the discussion a number of the children compared our
class, an organization of a group of members, with our nation, an organ-
ization of a group of states, and asked why the class should not organize
under a different form of government. The class took up the discussion
*Annie Howell, Teacher, Wilmington, N. C.
482 Course of Study for the
and came to the conclusion that true enough the same conditions existed
in the classroom that existed in the national affairs of the United States
in 1783-1787. They decided that there was either a monarchy with
teacher ruler or practically no government at all. This did not make for
the best working order for all.
The class began to do extensive studying and reading about organ-
izations and clubs of different kinds; then they expressed a desire to try
a democratic form of government. A committee was appointed to draw
up a constitution. The United States Constitution was used as a model
and was followed as closely as possible. The one adopted is as follows:
Preamble
We, the pupils of the seventh grade, in order to form a more perfect organization,
establish justice, obtain a cooperative class spirit, provide for a working condition for all,
encourage self-control, and secure respect for our class and our school, do ordain and
establish this constitution for the Civics Club of the Seventh Grade of the Wm. Hooper
School, Wilmington, N. C.
Article I
Sec. I. The Legislative Department shall consist of a Senate and a House of Repre-
sentatives.
Sec. II — 1. The House of Representatives shall be composed of five members chosen
every two weeks by the members of the club.
2. No person shall be a representative who does not pass his work and does not co-
operate with the class in the betterment of the class.
3. The House of Representatives shall choose its chairman.
4. The House of Representatives hall have power to impeach.
Sec. Ill— -1. The Senate shall be composed of three members chosen by the members of
the club for six weeks.
2. No person shall be a Senator who does not prove himself a beneficial citizen of the
class, who does not pass his work, and who does not come to school regularly.
3. The Vice-President of the club shall be the President of the Senate.
4. The Senate shall have power to try impeachments.
5. Judgment in cases of impeachment, if the person is found guilty, shall be removed
from office, and disqualification to hold any office of the club again during the school year.
Sec. IV. The Congress shall assemble once each week, on Monday morning at 8:45
o'clock.
Sec. V — 1. A majority of each house shall constitute a quorum for business.
2. Each house shall keep minutes of its meetings and read to the club.
Sec. VI. All laws concerning the - conduct of the members of the class, and for the
punishment for certain conduct, shall be made by Congress.
Article II
Sec. I. The Executive Department shall consist of a President, Vice-President, and five
Secretaries.
Sec. II. The President and Vice-President are elected by the members of the class
for a term of four weeks.
Sec. III. The President shall appoint five Secretaries to aid him in promoting the wel-
fare of the class. They are as follows: Secretary of Protection of School Property, Secre-
tary of Schoolroom Behavior, Secretary of Classroom Attractiveness, Secretary of Cleanliness
of Schoolroom and Grounds, and Secretary of Sportsmanship on school grounds. These
secretaries shall form the President's Cabinet, and shall be appointed by the President for
four weeks.
Sec. IV. No person who does not prove to be a good citizen of the class, who does not
come to school regularly, who does not make a grade of 85% on his work, and who is
tardy, shall be President or Vice-President of the club.
Sec. V. The Vice-President shall assume the power and duties of the President in case
the President is removed from office or withdraws from school.
Sec. VI. The President (together with the teacher) shall be the chief advisor of the
club.
Sec. VII. An officer of the Executive Department may be removed from office if con-
victed of unfaithfulness to the club or for improper conduct.
Article III
Sec. I. The Judicial Department shall consist of a Supreme Court of five judges and
an inferior court of five judges. The judges shall be appointed by the President and shall
hold office during good behavior.
Sec. II. The Supreme Court shall have power over all cases concerning misdemeanors
on the school grounds or disputes between club members.
Sec. III. The Superior Court shall have power over all other cases.
Article IV
Sec. I. All members of the club shall be given equal privileges.
Sec. II. All members have a right to vote.
Sec. III. No person shall be punished until he has been tried by a jury.
Sec. IV. All persons shall have a right to hold and enjoy his property without inter-
ference from others so long as this possession does not annoy others.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 483
Article V
The ratification by two-thirds of the members shall be necessary for the establishment of
this constitution.
The class adopted the constitution readily and unanimously. All went
to work very enthusiastically, each to do his part in making the club
worthwhile.
A number of by-laws have been made by the legislative department.
The court is called to order every afternoon and if any members have
committed misdemeanors during the day they are brought to trial.
I have found the children to be very just in their accusations and
decisions, and need very little advice or restraint.
The different executive departments, made up of the secretary and
five members, are doing some very effective work. Each department tries
to see how high it can make its score go up on an efficiency chart that
is placed in front of the classroom. (I score them there.)
An especially beneficial project is being carried out by the conduct
and sportsmanship departments in school citizenship. These committees
made a special study of what is meant by a good citizen and formed a
citizenship guide, which was presented to the class. The class adopted
the guide as the requisite of good < itizenship.
One child made a chart using the above scale of citizenship. She
printed the requisites and illustrated each in freehand drawing. The
chart was then placed on the wall in view of the class. The chart is
as follows:
Points
1. Return all borrowed property . 3
2. Be punctual in getting to school 7
3. Get your work in on time. Fine attention during class 10
4. Keep schoolroom attractive. Take care of school property __ 10
5. Be quiet when entering and leaving classroom. Respect
authority 13
6. Be honest in work and play 15
7. Be courteous and polite. Be clean in thought and habit 17
8. Govern yourself, think, choose, and act independently 25
100
Each child scores himself and is scored by the conduct committee. I
find that each one takes a great pride in making a high score every day.
CHAPEL PROGRAM ON OPTIMISM*
The following program was worked out by a group of Fifth A pupils
to be given at one of their civic club meetings. The poems were brought
in by the pupils and the comments made by the president were worked
out in the auditorium class by the pupils with the aid of the teacher.
The songs were selected by the pupils and learned in the music room.
The game played, Squirrel and the Nut, was taught in physical education.
The nosters of the Optimist and Pessimist were made in art. This work
was done at the time that the pupils were studying poetry in their
language work.
This program* was given in chapel after being given in the club
meeting. Rows of desks were placed on the stage with the large desk for
the president at one side. The stage was made to look like a schoolroom
with bulletin boards placed on both sides and large posters on the wall
at the back.
Class President: It gives us great pleasure to present to you a short program on Opti-
mism. A month ago we hardly knew what the word meant, but now the more we _ know
about it the better we like it. Tom Smith will explain just what we do mean by Optimism.
Tom Smith!
Tom Smith: Optimism is just plain "smilin' through," "keeping your sunny side up,
whether it be sunshine or rain; bad roads or good ones; smooth sailing or tempest-tossed;
glad times or heartaches; up in the air or down on your luck.
♦Similar programs might be worked out_ on Thrift, Safetj, Honesty, etc. They serve as
stimulations to worthy ideals. — Kinston Public Schools.
484 Course of Study for the
But by this we do not mean that the optimistic person is that reckless individual who
just grins at life and doesn't care a straw whether things are goud or bad for himself or
the other fellow.
The truly optimistic are those cheerful ones who look for good in everything and never
fail to see the silver lining through every dark cloud shining.
President: John Smith, can you give us a thought on Optimism?
John Smith: Seems to me this little jingle expresses the spirit of Optimism:
"For every evil under the sun there is a remedy or there is none.
If there is one, try to find it,
If there is none, never mind it."
President: Will the class please stand and sing "Brighten the Corner." One, ready;
two, stand! (He counts in like manner for them to be seated.)
President: All about us we see every day the Optimist and the Pessimist, who is just
his opposite, going about with a long face and looking always on the dark side of life.
There have been great men of all times who have striven in song and story to spread
abroad in the land the spirit of Optimism. The poet, Foss, warms our hearts with his
"Hullo" poem. James Johnson will give us Foss's "Hullo."
James Johnson:
1
If you meet a man in woe
Walk right up and say "Hullo."
Say "Hullo" and "How d'ye do"
An' how's the world a' servin' you?
Slap the feller on the back,
Bring your hand down with a whack,
Walk right up an' don' go slow,
Smile, an' shake, an' say "Hullo."
2
Is he clothed in rags — Oh, sho,
Walk right up an' say "Hullo."
Rags is but a cotton role,
Jest fer wrappin' up a soul,
An' a soul is worth a true,
Hale and hearty, "How d' ye do!"
3
When big vessels meet they say
They salute and sail away.
Jest the same are you and me,
Lonesome ships upon a sea;
Each one sailing his own job,
For a port beyond the fog.
Let your speaking trumpets blow,
Lift your horn and cry "Hullo!"
4
Say "Hullo" and "How d' ye do!"
Other folks are good as you.
When 3 r ou leave your house o' clay,
Wandering in the far away
'Tother side the range,
Then the folks you've cheered
Will know who you be
An' say "Hullo!"
The remainder of the program was as follows:
Shine, Shine, Just Where You Are.
Frank L. Stanton's Definition of Optimism.
Smile Awhile and Give Your Face a Rest.
Robert Browning' as an Optimist.
Play as a Contributor to Optimism.
James Whitcomb Riley's There Little Girl Don't Cry!
Robert Loveman's Rain Song.
It Isn't Any Trouble to Smile.
PLEDGE AND SET OF RULES FOR A BASEBALL TEAM*
It was discovered that there was a great deal of friction in one of
the ball teams in a sixth grade. The team was about to be split up and
some of the' boys were going to form a new team, which would have
made both teams weak. The class laid the case before the teacher who
became judge and appointed a jury. Both sides stated their grievances.
The jury met that afternoon, decided to reorganize the team, letting one
of the best players decide upon the line-up. The jury then wrote a
pledge and a set of rules which the class had to promise to try to follow
before becoming members again. They adopted the rules, signed the
pledge and since then the team has been very successful.
*Kinston Public Schools.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 485
Pledge
On my honor, I will try to support my manager and my fellow players
to the best of my ability and hold down my part of duty as best I can.
Set of Rules
1. I will not smoke.
2. I will not curse.
3. I will encourage my team rather than be a knocker.
4. I will not cheat.
5. I will be a good loser.
6. I will be a generous winner.
7. I will come to all practices when possible and give my manager a
good excuse when it is impossible.
MEASURING GROWTH IN CITIZENSHIP
Estimating gains made in right conduct responses is an important
phase of teaching procedure. It is the technique by which the teacher
discovers whether or not worthy habits, attitudes, information, and under-
standings have been or are being established — what additional habits,
attitudes, information, and understandings need most to be emphasized —
and what methods and materials are most useful in effecting the desired
results.
It is hoped that the course of study is such that behavior as reflected
in ideals, attitudes, and habits — not civic information — is the important
factor. No completely satisfactory tests have as yet been worked out,
but suggestions are offered here for individual and class surveys to be
made by the teacher alone, the pupil alone, or by the two together, at
intervals throughout the year, so that she and they may check definitely
and regularly the progress being made and determine the effectiveness
of the various phases of citizenship training.
Commercial Tests: These are of two types — the work-book and the
regular form of standard tests. Both test civic information and atti-
tudes, and the results give some notion of pupil's power for ethical dis-
crimination and his background of information.
Work Books:
Collins. Citizens in the Making (Grs. 1-6). Dr. C. A. Gregory, University of Cincinnati^
Cincinnati, Ohio.
Morgan. Case Studies for Classes in Civics (Grs. 6, 7). Laidlaw.
Gentry. Character Education (Grs. 4-7). Heath.
Tests :
Brown-Woody. The Brown- Woody Civics Test (Grs. 7, 8, 9). World.
Chassell-Upton. Scales in Citizenship. Bureau of Publications, Teachers College.
Hill. Civic Tests (6, 7). Attitudes and Information. Public School Pub.
Correll, Coxe and Orleans. Rating Scale for School Habits (1-12). World.
Informal Tests: The above tests help the teacher and pupils to secure
clear ideas of desirable behavior, but direct observation of pupil activities
is the surest, best test of the quality of citizenship. The Chassell-Upton
Scales are particularly usable and practical as the following sample will
show:
486 Course of Study for the
extract from chassell-upton citizenship scale— g
Score in Points School Date
Name Sex. Grade..
Age: Yr Month Pupil marked by
2 3 Keep pencils sharpened, ready for use.
2 3 Passes and collects materials promptly.
2 3 Opens doors for others.
2 3 Speaks without shyness and in a direct manner.
2 3 Does not indulge in sweets to a harmful extent.
2 3 Acknowledges favors graciously.
2 3 Anticipates his needs and does not borrow.
2 3 Enjoys the beautiful in art and nature
2 3 Is thoughtful in making requests of others, including helpers.
2 3 Gives praise where praise is merited.
2 3 Plans his daily program so that there may be a healthful balance between work and
outdoor activities.
2 3 Takes care not to promise more than he can fulfill.
2 3 Gives proper criticism in a courteous manner, and accepts suggestions from others and
profits by them.
2 3 Sees details in their relation to the whole, and selects essential points.
2 3 Tries to do his best, even when the task is disagreeable, or praise is not forthcoming.
2 3 Seeks intelligently opportunities for serving others.
2 3 Has faith in others.
2 3 Does not indulge in injurious or other debasing practices.
2 3 Faces facts squarely and does not allow himself to be misled by prejudices.
2 3 Considers candidates from the standpoint of the qualities essential for leadership,
and elects a person for no other reason than his fitness for the position.
Many forms for recording practice in the home, school and community-
may be used. Class histories and calendars — daily, weekly and monthly
diaries — class and individual (including parents) estimates of each other's
citizenship performances. A word of caution is needed with regard to
participation of parents in rating. If a record is sent to them, it should
be preceded by a personal visit to, or conference with parent, at which
time purposes and plans are explained in detail, because of the essentially
personal nature of the problem and because the best possible results can-
not be secured without their cooperation it is advisable to make the de-
velopment of desirable traits the subject of special study. The discussion
of questionnaires in the Course of Study in Health should prove helpful.
Elementary Schools op North Carolina
487
Because of their suggestiveness the following illustrative records used
by many schools are given:
Date
Teacher .
HABIT SCALE FOR PRIMARY GRADES
School
Grade
Check for Exceptions
Habit of talking quietly
Habit of moving quietly | rooms
1 halls
Habit of carrying chair properly and placing
it carefully
Habit of going close to the person you wish to speak to
Habit of coming to school at proper time
Habit of attending closely to the person speaking to you, or
to the group of which you are a member
Habit of taking place in line without pushing
Habit of working with concentration
Habit of offering help
Habit of sharing materials and tools generously
Habit of working neatly
Habit of picking up and keeping things in order independently
Habit of using books carefully
Habit of quiet attention in auditorium during assemblies
Habit of attending to teacher or group leader, instantly, when
attention is demanded by gong, bell, or other signal
Habit of using blocks or other materials with no unnecess-
ary noise
Habit of obeying the teacher instantly when commands are
given
Habit of entering into group activities to the best of the childs'
ability, offering suggestions, giving help, and working for
their success
Course of Study for the
A suggested form for surveying class to note needs and improvements
at the opening of school, at midyear, and at the end of the year is given.
Name of Child Age Grade
Note: Health Habits and Attitudes: See Course of Study in Health.
Social and Mental
Chabacteristics
Fall
Mid-
Year
Spring
Remarks
Apprehensive-
Assertive
Complacent ..
Complaining .
Contented
Considerate— -
Dependable.. -
Dreamy
Erratic
Excitable
Moody
Petulant
Playful
Quarrelsome. .
Sensitive
Serious
Suggestible ...
Suspicious
Sympathetic.
Responses to People
Leads
Participates
Contributes
Is responsible for: 1. Self
2. Others
Works alone
Works in group
1. Gregarious
2. Co-operative:
a. Spontaneously
b. Called together for definite purpose
Criticizes constructively: 1. Self
2. Others
Willingly takes and uses constructive criticism from
1. Another pupil
2. Group
3. Grade teacher
4. Principal
Controlled by:
1. Teacher
2. Other members of class
3. Self
Obeys :
1. Willingly
2. Reluctantly
Has orderly habits in:
Materials
Room
Hall
Playground
Responses to Materials
Initiates -
Plans
Executes
Overcomes difficulties
Perseveres to end
Follows directions
Language and Literature
Speech:
Quality of
Voice
Enunciation
Special difficulties
Oral Expression — ability to:
Talk intelligently
Question intelligently
Converse
Discuss
Narrate
Reproduce
Appreciate
Originate
Elementary Schools op North Carolina
489
Fall
Mid-
Yeab
Spring
Remarks
Reading:
Ability to comprehend--.
Loves to read
Writing, ability to:
See defects of product
Improve product
Number, ability to:
Discriminate, e. g., relative sizes, amounts,
weights, etc
Measure
Count
Science:
Observes animal and plant life
Interested in natural elements and forces
Experiments
Asks questions or gives information spontan-
eously
Arts:
Industrial Arts, ability to:
Appreciate work of others
Reproduce work of others
Originate new ideas
Develop skill in production
Gain knowledge of arts
Improve in expressing ideas
Fine Arts, ability to:
Appreciate work of others
Reproduce work of others
Originate new ideas
Develope skill in production
Gain knowledge of arts
Improve in expressing ideas
Dramatic Arts, ability to:
Participate in plays of others
Express ideas of others
Originate new ideas
Music:
Interest in trying to sing_.__ --
Interest in interpreting music
Interest in listening to music
Ability to reproduce songs
Ability to originate songs
Ability to give rhythmic response through
following others
Ability to give rhythmic response through
originating new responses
Ability to lead a song
Ability to teach a song
Some Understandings and Appreciations,
Such As:
Interdependence of individual on society ...
Interdependence of groups and nations
Value of loyalty to ideals
Desirability of good hygienic conditions for
practical and for aesthetic reasons
Physical fitness
Creditable performances of others in discovery,
communication, and expression
Value of well-appointed home, church, social
centers
. Value of labor and skill in home
Each individual's relation to home
Right attitude toward work
Right attitude toward associates
Value of a finished performance
Rights of workers
Duties of workers
Importance of having leisure
Importance of spending leisure advantageously.
Importance of having varied interests
Seeing beauty in nature.--
Seeing beauty in art
Personal idealism
Altruism
Respect for personality of others
Dynamic faith
Note: — Forms similar to this on the primary level may be secured from Bureau of Publications, Teachers
College.
490 Course of Study for the
BIBLIOGRAPHY AND REFERENCE MATERIALS
Note: The teacher is expected to familiarize herself with civic material contained in
basal and supplementary texts and library lists listed in connection with other courses.
References for the Teacher: (See also each grade outline.)
An American Citizenship Course in United States History. Scribner's.
Beechel. A Citizenship Program for the Elementary School. Bureau of Publications,
Teachers College, $1.50.
Bennett. How to Make the Most of Life.
Bobbitt. Curriculum Investigations. University of Chicago Press.
Character Education. Bureau of Education Bulletin, Bulletin No. 7, 150, Superintendent
of Documents, Department of Interior.
Character Training for Boys and Girls. The Child Welfare Association, New York City.
Charters. The Teaching of Ideals. Macmillan.
Charters and Waples. The Commonwealth Teacher Training Study. University of Chi-
_ cago Press, $4.00.
Citizenship Through Character Development (magazine). School Committee, Boston,
Mass., $1.50.
Citizenship Through Guidance. City Public Schools, Winston-Salem, N. C.
Coe. Law and Freedom in the School. University of Chicago Press.
Cunningham. Character Conduct and Study. Putnam's.
Davis. Guidance for Youth. Ginn.
Dewey. Democracy and Education. Macmillan.
Dewey. Human Nature and Conduct. Macmillan.
Diemer and Mullen. Pupil Citizenship. World, $1.60.
Dynes. Socializing the Child. Silver.
Fishbein-White. Why Men Fail. Century.
Fosdick. Twelve Tests of Character. Doubleday.
Fourth Yearbook of the Department of Superintendence, N. E. A.
Fiske. Boy Life and Self-government.
Germane and Germane. Character Education. Silver.
Gregg. A Course of Study in Character Education for School and Home. Lincoln.
Groves. Wholesome Childhood. Houghton.
Gruenberg. Your Child Today and Tomorrow. Lippincott.
Harris, H. M. Lessons in Civics for the Six Elementary Grades of City Schools. 150.
Superintendent of Documents, Department of Interior.
Hartshorn. Childhood and Character. Pilgrim.
Iowa Plan. National Education Press.
Hatch, Roy W. Training in Citizenship, 1926, $1.50. Scribner's.
Hatch and Stull. A Unit-Fusion Course in the Social Studies for the Junior High
School, 1926. Bureau of Publications, Teachers College.
Hutchins. Children's Code of Morals. National.
James. Talks to Teachers. Macmillan.
Kilpatrick. Education for a Changing Civilization. Macmillan.
Knight. Our State Government. Scott.
Lee. Play in Education. Macmillan.
List of Good Stories to Tell Children Under Twelve Years of Age (50). Carnegie
Library, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Mahan. An Analysis of the Characteristics of Citizenship. Bureau of Publications,
Teachers College, $1.50.
Maryland Course of Study in Citizenship. State Department of Education, Baltimore,
Maryland.
Martin, E. D. Meaning of Liberal Education.
Meyer, Harold. Thrift Through Education. Barnes.
Moore, C. B. Citizenship Through Education. American, $2.00.
Nebraska Course of Study in Character Education. Burr.
Overstreet, H. A. How We Become Ourselves. W. W. Norton, New York.
Influencing Human Behavior. W. W. Norton, New York.
Pageant of a Nation, 40 colored pictures of the story of Our Country. Foundation Press,
Inc., 501 Bulkley Bldg., Cleveland, Ohio.
Rugg and Mendenhall. Teacher's Guide for Changing Civilizations in A Modern World.
Ginn.
Richardson. Parenthood and the Newer Psychology. Putnam.
Russell. Education and the Good Life.
Starrett. The Charm of Fine Manners. Lippincott.
Thomas. Some New Techniques for Studying Social Behavior. Teachers College.
Thorndike, Edward L. Education for Initiative and Originality. Bureau of Publications,
Teachers College.
Thorn. Habit Training for Children.
Twenty-second Yearbook of the National Society for the Study of Education. Public
School Pub.
Waring. Relationships Between Early Language Habits and Conduct Control. Bureau
of Publications, Teachers College, Columbia University.
Winnetka Public Schools Goal Cards, Winnetka, 111. »
References for the Pupil:
Bailey. Sure Pop and the Safety Scouts. World.
Boy Scouts of America, 200 Fifth Ave., New York City.
Brooks. Dual Government (5-7). Rand.
Broome and Adams. Conduct and Citizenship (6, 7, 8). Macmillan.
Carpenter. Ourselves and Our City (3-5). American.
Carlton and Carlton. Story of Declaration of Independence. Scribner's.
Carlton and Carlton. Spirit of Independence. Scribner's.
Citizenship Readers (Grs. Kng.-7). Lippincott.
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 491
I. Home Environment.
II. City and County.
III. School Days.
IV. Good Citizenship Club.
V. Team Work.
VI. Makers of America.
VII. Notable Events in the Making of America.
VIII. American Government and Citizenship.
Constitution of State of North Carolina. Division of Publications, State Department of
Public Instruction.
Davis. Guidance for Youth (6, 7). Ginn.
Dearborn. The Road to Citizenship (6, 7, 8). Ginn.
Dunn and Harris. Citizenship in School and Out (1-6). Heath.
Edmonson and Dondineau. Citizenship Through Problems (6-9). Macmillan.
Evans, Patterson, Simmons. American Citizenship. Rand.
Finch. Guideposts to Citizenship. American.
Facts About the Government. The Sun, 15(5, New York City.
Fox. Roller Bears and the Safeway Tribe (3-5). Macmillan.
Gentry. Character Education. Work Books (4-7). Heath.
Hill. Community and Vocational Civics. Ginn.
Halleck and Frantz. Makers of Our Nation. American.
Hughes. Community Civics (6, 7, 8) . Allyn.
A Textbook in Citizenship. Allyn.
Knight. Our State Government. Scott.
Lyman and Hill. Community Life (6, 7). Scribner's._
Lyman, Moore and Hill. Literature and Living. Scribner's.
McVenn. Good Manners and Right Conduct. Heath.
Moore. Pennies and Plans (1-3). Macmillan.
Morgan, DeWitt S. Case Studies for Class in Civics (6, 7), 52(J. Laidlaw.
A form of workbook containing a series of interesting situations selected largely
from school life in which one or more perplexing civic questions have arisen, but
each case presents several important issues common to other forms of group life.
Phillip and Newlon. The New Social Civics (6, 7, 8). Rand.
Rexford and Carson. Constitution of Our Country. American.
Richmon and Wallach. Good Citizenship (3-7). American.
Scouting for Girls. Girl Scouts, Inc., New York City.
Serf. Rabbitville (1-3). American.
Smith. Planning a Career. American.
Playing to Win (5). Mentzer. Single copy, 640.
Turkington. Lessons in Citizenship. Ginn.
My Country. Ginn.
World Almanac. New York World, New York City, 60<. •
Elementary Schools of North Carolina 493
ADDRESSES OF PUBLISHERS
Abingdon Press, The, New York, N. Y.
Allyn & Bacon, Atlanta, Ga.
American Book Company, New York, N. Y.
.American Library Association, Chicago, 111.
Appleton, D., and Company, New York, N. Y.
Atlantic Monthly Press, Boston, Mass.
Barnes, A. S., & Company, New York, N. Y.
Beckley-Cardy Company, Chicago, 111.
Birchard, C. C, & Company, Boston, Mass.
Blakiston's, P., Son & Company, Philadelphia, Pa.
i?o&6s-Merrill Company, Indianapolis, Ind.
Bruce Publishing Company, Milwaukee, Wis.
Bureau of Publications, Teachers College, Columbia University, New
York, N. Y.
Bureau of Research, Teachers College, Columbia University, New York,
N. Y.
Burr Publishing Co., Lincoln, Neb.
Century Company, New York, N. Y.
Classroom Teacher, The, Chicago, 111.
■Compton, F. E., & Company, Chicago, 111.
Crowell, T. Y., & Company, New York, N. Y.
Department of Interior, Bureau of Education, Washington, D. C.
Dodd, Mead & Company, New York, N. Y.
Doran, Geo. H., Company, New York, N. Y.
Doubleday, Page & Company, Garden City, N. Y.
Dutton, E. P., & Company, New York, N. Y.
Educational Plaything, New York, N. Y.
Educational Publishing Company, Chicago, 111.
Flanagan, A., Chicago, 111.
Funk and Wagnalls Company, New York, N. Y.
Gabriel, Samuel Sons & Company, New York, N. Y.
Ginn & Company, New York, N. Y.
Gray and Creech, Winston-Salem, N. C.
Grossett & Dunlap, New York, N. Y.
Harr-Wagner Publishing Company, San Francisco, Cal.
Harcourt, Brace & Company, New York, N. Y.
Harper & Bros., New York, N. Y.
Heath. D. C, & Company, Chicago, 111.
Holt, Henry, & Company, New York, N. Y.
Houghton-Miffiin Company, Boston, Mass.
Iroquois Publishing Company, Syracuse, N. Y.
Jacobs, G. W., & Company, Philadelphia, Pa.
Johns Hopkins Press, Baltimore, Md.
Johnson Publishing Company, Richmond, Va.
Keystone View Company
Laidlaw Brothers, New York, N. Y.
Lothrop, Lee & Shepard Company, Boston, Mass.
Laurel Book Company, Chicago, 111.
Lincoln School Supply Company, Lincoln, Neb.
Lippincott, J. B., Philadelphia, Pa.
Little, Brown & Company, Boston, Mass.
Longmans, Green & Company, New York, N. Y.
Lyons & Carnahan, Chicago, 111.
Macmillan Company, New York, N. Y.
Macrae- Smith Company, Philadelphia, Pa.
Marshall, Jones Company, Boston, Mass.
Mclndoo Publishing Company, Kansas City, Mo.
McKay, David Company, Philadelphia, Pa.
Mentzer Bush & Company, Chicago, 111.
Merrill, Charles E., Company, New York, N. Y.
Milton Bradley Company, Atlanta, Ga.
Moffat, Yard & Company, New York, N. Y.
494 Course of Study for the
National Capitol Press, Washington, D. C.
National Education Press, Washington, D. C.
National Education Association, Washington, D. C.
Nelson, Thomas & Sons, New York, N. Y.
Newson & Company, New York, N. Y.
Noble & Noble, New York, N. Y.
North Carolina Education Association, Raleigh, N. C.
North Carolina Library Commission, Raleigh, N. C.
Owen, F. A., Publishing Company, Philadelphia, Pa.
Oxonian Press, Queen Street, Oxford.
Perry Picture Company, Maiden, Mass.
Pilgrim Press, Chicago, 111.
Practical Drawing Company, Dallas, Texas.
Public School Polishing Company, Bloomington, 111.
Putnam's, G. P., & Sons, New York, N. Y.
Quarrie, W. F., & Company, Chicago, 111.
Rand, McNally & Company, Chicago, 111.
Reynolds Publishing Company, Seattle, Wash.
Row, Peterson & Company, Chicago, 111.
Russell Sage Foundation, Bloomington, III.
Sanborn, Benj. H., & Company, Boston, Mass.
Scott, Foresman & Company, Atlanta, Ga.
Scribner's, Charles Sons, New York, N. Y.
Silver, Burdett & Company, New York, N. Y.
Sling erland-Comstock Company, The, Ithaca, N. Y.
Smith-Hammond & Company, Atlanta, Ga.
Southern Publishing Company, Dallas, Texas.
Standard Publishing Company, Cincinnati, Ohio.
State Department Conservation and Development, Raleigh, N.
State Department of Public Instruction, Bismarck, N. D.
Stokes, F. A., Company, New York, N. Y.
Thompson Publishing Company, Raleigh, N. C.
University of Chicago Press, Chicago, 111.
University of North Carolina Press, Chapel Hill, N. C.
University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa.
Volland, F. P., Company, Chicago, 111.
Wheeler Publishing Company, Chicago, 111.
Warne, Frederick & Company, New York, N. Y.
Warwick and York, Baltimore, Md.
Williams, Alfred & Company, Raleigh, N. C.
Winston, John C, Company, Philadelphia, Pa.
World Book Company. Yonkers, N. Y.
Victor Talking Machine Company.